Use these links to rapidly review the document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 30, 2014

Registration No. 333-              


UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, DC 20549



FORM S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933



Inovalon Holdings, Inc.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)



Delaware   7374   47-1830316
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)



4321 Collington Road
Bowie, MD 20716
(301) 809-4000
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of registrant's principal executive offices)



Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D.
Chief Executive Officer and Chairman
Inovalon Holdings, Inc.
4321 Collington Road
Bowie, MD 20716
(301) 809-4000
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)

Copies to:

David P. Slotkin
Spencer D. Klein
Justin R. Salon
Morrison & Foerster LLP
2000 Pennsylvania Avenue, Suite 6000
Washington, DC 20006
(202) 887-1500
  Shauna L. Vernal
Chief Legal Officer
Inovalon Holdings, Inc.
4321 Collington Road
Bowie, MD 20716
(301) 809-4000
  Rachel W. Sheridan
John H. Chory
Latham & Watkins LLP
John Hancock Tower, 27th Floor
200 Clarendon Street
Boston, MA 02116
(617) 948-6000



            Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after the effective date of this registration statement. If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933 check the following box.  o

            If this form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  o

            If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  o

            If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  o

            Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of "large accelerated filer," "accelerated filer" and "smaller reporting company" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer  o   Accelerated filer  o

Non-accelerated filer  ý   (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)

 

Smaller reporting company  o

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

       
 
Title of Each Class of
Securities to be Registered

  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate
Offering Price(1)

  Amount of
Registration Fee

 

Class A Common Stock, $0.000025 par value per share

  $500,000,000   $58,100

 

(1)
Estimated solely for the purpose of computing the amount of the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended. Includes shares of common stock that may be purchased by the underwriters pursuant to their option to purchase additional shares.

             The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.


Table of Contents

The information in this preliminary prospectus is not complete and may be changed. These securities may not be sold until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This preliminary prospectus is not an offer to sell nor does it seek an offer to buy these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted.

Subject to Completion. Dated December 30, 2014.

                  Shares

LOGO

Class A Common Stock



           This is the initial public offering of shares of Class A common stock of Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

           We have two classes of common stock, Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting and conversion rights. Each share of Class A common stock will be entitled to one vote per share. Each share of Class B common stock will be entitled to 10 votes per share and will be convertible at the election of each holder at any time, or automatically upon the occurrence of certain events, into one share of Class A common stock. Immediately following the completion of this offering, outstanding shares of our Class B common stock will represent approximately         % of the voting power of our outstanding common stock. See "Description of Capital Stock — Class A and B Common Stock."

           Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. It is currently estimated that the initial public offering price per share will be between $             and $             per share. We have applied for listing of our Class A common stock on the NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol "INOV."

           We are an "emerging growth company" as defined under federal securities laws and, as such, have elected to comply with certain reduced public company reporting requirements.

            Investing in our Class A common stock involves significant risks. See "Risk Factors" beginning on page 19 to read about factors you should consider before buying shares of our Class A common stock.



            Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any other regulatory body has approved or disapproved of these securities or passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.



 
 
Per Share
 
Total
 

Initial public offering price

  $                       $                      

Underwriting discount(1)

  $                       $                      

Proceeds, before expenses, to Inovalon

  $                       $                      

(1)
See "Underwriting" for additional information regarding underwriting compensation.



           The underwriters have the option to purchase up to an additional                          shares from us at the initial public offering price less the underwriting discount.

           The underwriters expect to deliver the shares of Class A common stock to purchasers in New York, New York on or about                          , 2015.



Goldman, Sachs & Co.   Morgan Stanley   Citigroup

 

BofA Merrill Lynch   UBS Investment Bank

 

Baird   Piper Jaffray   Wells Fargo Securities   William Blair



   

Prospectus dated                          , 2015.


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

GRAPHIC


Table of Contents


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

  1

RISK FACTORS

  19

SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

  42

USE OF PROCEEDS

  43

DIVIDEND POLICY

  44

CAPITALIZATION

  45

DILUTION

  47

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

  49

MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

  51

BUSINESS

  77

MANAGEMENT

  119

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

  129

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

  137

PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

  138

DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

  140

SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

  148

MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS FOR NON-U.S. HOLDERS OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK

  151

UNDERWRITING

  156

LEGAL MATTERS

  162

EXPERTS

  162

WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

  162

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

  F-1



          Neither we nor the underwriters have authorized anyone to provide any information or to make any representations other than those contained in this prospectus or in any free writing prospectuses we have prepared. Neither we nor the underwriters take responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information that others may give you. This prospectus is an offer to sell only the shares offered hereby, but only under circumstances and in jurisdictions where it is lawful to do so. The information contained in this prospectus is current only as of its date.

          Persons who come into possession of this prospectus and any applicable free writing prospectus in jurisdictions outside the United States are required to inform themselves about and to observe any restrictions as to this offering and the distribution of this prospectus and any such free writing prospectus applicable to that jurisdiction.

          This prospectus includes market data and forecasts with respect to the healthcare industry. Although we are responsible for all of the disclosure contained in this prospectus, in some cases we rely on and refer to market data and certain industry forecasts that were obtained from third party surveys, market research, consultant surveys, publicly available information and industry publications and surveys that we believe to be reliable.

i


Table of Contents

 


PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

           This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. It may not contain all the information that may be important to you. You should read the entire prospectus carefully, including the section entitled "Risk Factors" and our financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus before making an investment decision to purchase shares of our common stock.

           In this prospectus, unless we indicate otherwise or the context requires, references to the "company," "Inovalon," "we," "our," "ours," and "us" refer to Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries. The following summary is qualified in its entirety by the more detailed information and consolidated financial statements and notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus.


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Our Company

          We are a leading technology company that combines advanced cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms to achieve meaningful insight and improvement in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance across the healthcare landscape. Our powerful platforms drive high-value impact, improving quality and economics for health plans, hospitals, physicians, patients, pharmaceutical companies, and researchers. The value we deliver to our clients is achieved by turning data into insights and those insights into action. Through our large proprietary datasets, advanced data integration technologies, sophisticated predictive analytics, and deep subject matter expertise, we deliver seamless, end-to-end platforms that bring the benefits of big data and large-scale analytics to the point of care. Our analytics identify gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance, while our data-driven intervention platforms provide clients with differentiated capabilities to resolve these gaps. During 2014, we provided these services to nearly 100 clients representing approximately 200 patient populations, providing analytics informed by our data and insight on more than 744,000 physicians, 244,000 clinical facilities, 118 million unique patients (covering approximately 98.2% of all U.S. counties), and 9.1 billion discrete entries relating to patient interactions, medical procedures or changes in patients' medical conditions, which we refer to as medical events, a number that has been increasing at a rate of approximately 3.0% compounding monthly, or 43.3% annually, since 2000.

          Healthcare costs in the United States have been increasing significantly for many years, currently approaching almost $3 trillion annually. This rise in healthcare costs has driven a broad transition from consumption-based payment models to value-based payment models across the healthcare landscape. As a result, the specific disease and comorbidity status (i.e., the presence of one or more diseases or medical conditions co-occurring with a primary disease or medical condition), clinical and quality outcomes, resource utilization, and care details of the individual patient have become increasingly relevant to the various constituents of the healthcare delivery system. Concurrently, the count and complexity of diseases, diagnostics, and treatments — let alone payment models and regulatory oversight requirements — have soared. In this setting, granular data has become critical to determining and improving quality of care and financial performance in healthcare.

          We believe that the opportunity before us is substantial as data increasingly becomes the lynchpin in healthcare — from clinical quality outcomes and financial performance, to the consumer experience and drug discovery. A January 2013 McKinsey & Company, or McKinsey, report estimates that utilizing data analytics could drive improvements in healthcare resulting in a beneficial economic impact of $300 billion to $450 billion annually. As a reflection of the increasing need for data analytics, in the last several years our advanced analytics and data-driven intervention

 

1


Table of Contents

platforms have been driving significant economic impact through improvements in clinical and quality outcomes, disease and comorbidity data accuracy, and utilization, achieving hundreds of millions of dollars per year in quantified beneficial financial improvements for our clients.

          At the core of our capabilities is a long history of innovation and profitable growth, positioning us to deliver value to our clients and capitalize on the confluence of recent changes in the healthcare industry that many describe as historically unprecedented. Our ability to rapidly innovate is enabled by the depth and breadth of our industry expertise, large-scale proprietary datasets, advanced analytical prowess, highly flexible platform components, a common native code base, and experience across the healthcare landscape.

          We deliver value to our clients through our platforms, which are accomplished through four primary components:

    Data Integration:   Highly efficient and effective data assimilation of structured and unstructured healthcare data in any format from highly disparate and disconnected sources;

    Advanced Analytics:   Data analysis using big-data processing to yield highly actionable insights identifying gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance;

    Intervention Platforms:   Software and services that allow our clients to take the insights derived from our analytics to address and resolve the identified gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance; and

    Business Processing:   Powerful business intelligence tools that summarize key analytics and benchmarking information as well as a comprehensive claims data warehouse that helps our clients comply with government mandated reporting requirements.

          Our ability to deliver value to our clients through our advanced analytics and intervention platforms has allowed us to achieve significant growth since the company's organization. Over the last three years, our revenue has increased at a compounded annual growth rate of 19%, Adjusted EBITDA at a compounded annual growth rate of 20%, and net income at a compounded annual growth rate of 33% despite a 1% revenue decrease during the year ended December 31, 2013 as compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, our revenue was $271.6 million, representing 17% growth over the same period of the prior year. In this same period, we generated Adjusted EBITDA of $103.1 million, representing 38% of revenue and 77% growth over the same period in the prior year. Net income for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 was $51.9 million, representing 19% of revenue and a 92% increase over the same period in 2013. Adjusted EBITDA is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to net income, see "Selected Consolidated Financial Data."

Industry Overview

          We believe that the increasing demand for our platform is driven by the confluence of four fundamental healthcare industry trends:

          Unsustainable Rise in Healthcare Costs.     Healthcare spending in the U.S. was almost $3 trillion in 2012 according to the 2012 National Health Expenditure Highlights prepared by the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, or CMS, representing more than 17% of U.S. Gross Domestic Product, or GDP. The 2014 set of healthcare cost projections from the Congressional Budget Office, or the CBO, indicate national healthcare spending will rise to 22% of GDP by 2039. To address this expected significant rise in healthcare costs, the U.S. healthcare market is seeking more efficient and effective methods of delivering care. This same trend is playing out across modernized nations around the globe.

 

2


Table of Contents

          Shift to Value-Based Healthcare.     The traditional fee-for-service reimbursement model in healthcare has played a major role in elevating both the level and growth rate of healthcare spending. In response, both the public and private sectors are shifting away from the historical fee-for-service models toward value-based, capitated payment models that are designed to incentivize value and quality at an individual patient level. As seen in the figure below, the number of Americans covered by capitated payment programs (care programs provided in shared risk arrangements wherein an organization is responsible for the healthcare of a population of patients for which the total compensation is fixed other than adjustments for factors including the populations' individual, patient-specific disease burden, utilization efficiency, outcomes, quality, and other demographic factors) has been increasing rapidly and, according to industry sources and our internal estimates, is anticipated to increase from approximately 80 million at the start of 2014 to over 150 million by 2019. This increase is expected to further drive the critical importance to accurately measure, analyze, report, and improve patient disease and comorbidity conditions, utilization rates, and clinical quality outcomes.

GRAPHIC

          Digitization of Healthcare Information.     Across the healthcare landscape, a significant amount of data is being created every day driven by patient care, payment systems, regulatory compliance, and record keeping. These data include information within patient health records, clinical trials, pharmacy benefit programs, imaging systems, sensors and monitoring platforms, laboratory results, patient reported information, hospital and physician performance programs, and billing and payment processing. Despite significant investments by public and private sources within the industry, however, the digitized healthcare data remain largely stored in "walled gardens" — data that is static and not easily shared or interpreted. As the amount of data in healthcare continues to grow, we believe that it will be critical for the healthcare industry to be able to use this disparate data to better achieve the goals of higher quality and more efficient care.

          Increasing Complexity.     The healthcare industry is on a course of dramatically progressive complexity. As technology employed in the healthcare space has become increasingly

 

3


Table of Contents

sophisticated, new diagnostics and treatments have been introduced, the pool of clinical research has expanded, and the paradigms dictating payment and regulatory oversight have multiplied. This expanding complexity drives a growing and continuous need for analysis of the underlying and resulting data.

Problems Our Clients Face

          As the U.S. healthcare market continues to transform, the aforementioned industry trends have set into motion a number of significant challenges faced by our clients. We believe that we are well-positioned and have the solutions to help clients not only adapt to, but thrive within, the new healthcare landscape.

          Understanding and Improving Clinical Quality Outcomes.     Quality and value-based, capitated programs require that clinical and quality outcomes be measured at the individual patient level. These measures require detailed and highly granular reporting of the care sought and delivered to each patient to allow for the accurate calculation of population quality metrics. The results of these quality measurements drive significant financial incentives and consequences, influencing more than an estimated $3 billion in quality-related payments annually.

          Understanding the True Health Status of Patients.     The ability to establish the appropriate treatment protocol among multiple physicians, ensure that patients are supported with the correct care resources and monitored for the proper patient-relevant quality metrics, and determine the overall population risk is contingent on the ability to become accurately aware of a patients' disease and comorbidity status. Having detailed and highly granular reporting of the disease and comorbidities of each patient is essential for care, quality, and financial performance.

          Understanding and Improving Utilization.     Under new legislation, health plans are required to submit data on the percentage of revenue collected from health insurance premiums that is spent on clinical services and quality improvement, which is more commonly known as the Medical Loss Ratio, or the MLR. If health plans fail to meet set MLR thresholds, they are required to rebate the customer. If the cost of care exceeds the MLR threshold, however, health plans must absorb the shortfall. Given the importance of accurately reporting the MLR and managing the underlying healthcare costs, many health plans enter into complex arrangements with key providers in their networks and other industry constituents (such as pharmaceutical companies and pharmacy benefit managers) through shared risk arrangements and performance bonus programs to help manage costs, drive improvements in patient health, and achieve long-term utilization containment and quality goals.

          Complying with Increasingly Complex Regulatory Requirements.     Federal and state regulation and compliance is increasing and becoming ever more complex, with agencies at nearly every level of government regulating the activities of organizations participating within the healthcare marketplace. The breadth, complexity, and intensity of regulation require these organizations to focus nearly every activity through a compliance lens in order to meet the data-intensive regulatory reporting requirements.

          Enabling and Empowering the Consumer.     Individuals can now buy direct coverage, select clinicians and hospitals, and directly research implications of specific medications, procedures, and treatment courses. Further, the individual is increasingly participating in the quantified-self movement in which they can self-monitor their key health metrics. This shift to a more informed and engaged consumer is resulting in new challenges and opportunities for how practice groups, payors, employers, pharmaceutical companies, retail pharmacies, and other healthcare constituents interact with consumers.

 

4


Table of Contents

          Unlocking the Value of Data through Actionable Interventions.     A key commonality among the changes in the healthcare landscape is the importance of highly granular data. However, data by itself has limited usefulness without the right technology and systems in place to analyze and act on it and drive meaningful action. We believe that the leveraging of data is the critical differentiator in deriving meaningful insight and turning that insight into action to drive valuable impact across the healthcare landscape. However, in today's healthcare technology environment, much of this data goes unrecorded in a structured or meaningful way, unintegrated with other pertinent data related to the patient's events or conditions, and unanalyzed for the purposes of driving improvements in care and affordability.

          Easily Deploying and Interoperating Platforms at Massive Scale.     The ability to receive, seamlessly integrate, and accurately process extremely large-scale data flows efficiently and at high speeds is increasingly important and necessary for the healthcare industry. However, data integration and processing in massive scale is extremely challenging, which prevents the various components of the healthcare landscape from effectively communicating and coordinating with one another to deliver higher quality care. Overcoming this in scale is integral to managing large patient populations efficiently and effectively. Our platforms provide solutions to help address our clients' challenges and drive meaningful improvements in the clinical quality outcomes and financial performance across a wide expanse of our society's healthcare landscape.

Our Market Opportunity

          We believe that our opportunity is significant and growing. According to a January 2013 McKinsey report, utilizing data analytics could reduce healthcare costs in the United States by $300 billion to $450 billion, or 12% to 17% of total U.S. healthcare costs today.

          The ability to aggregate, integrate, and analyze data in massive scale and apply garnered insights in a manner that achieves meaningful impact is crucial for healthcare payors (e.g., health plans and integrated health delivery systems), clinical providers (e.g., hospitals, ACOs, and physicians), pharmaceutical and life sciences companies, and consumers. We estimate that our addressable market for these capabilities serving these healthcare constituents to be approximately $83.8 billion. We believe that the market opportunity for our current platform offering within the payor market, the historical focus of our company, is approximately $10.6 billion. According to industry sources, the market for software and related services is approximately $14.0 billion within the U.S. payor market. We believe that as analytics continue to demonstrate greater value within the U.S. payor landscape, the market will expand commensurately. As we continue to build and launch new capabilities, we believe it will provide a significantly larger value opportunity within this same payor space. For providers, industry sources estimate that software and related services represent a $32.3 billion U.S. market size. In the global pharmaceutical and life-sciences market, International Data Corporation, or IDC, in a 2013 report, estimates a $30.9 billion market size for total software and services spend in 2013. In the consumer market, an October 2013 Research and Markets report estimated a $6.6 billion global market size for mobile health applications and solutions. As with our other market segments, we believe that analytics will also drive a significant expansion in the consumer market.

          In addition, the pressures that face the U.S. healthcare market are not unique, as other communities around the world are facing aging populations and growing pressures in the sustainable affordability of healthcare. We believe that our capabilities are highly applicable to other developed and developing countries around the globe, which we believe represents a sizable related future opportunity for us.

Our Platforms

          Through the application of our platforms, we help our clients achieve large-scale insight and meaningful improvement in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance.

 

5


Table of Contents


          In deploying our technology to attain the results our clients require, they want us to synthesize opaque, convoluted, and disparate data into actionable information aligned with individualized goals and, in turn, empower patient and provider intervention platforms that achieve the realization of their goals in a measurable way. The diagram below illustrates the components of our technology platforms.

GRAPHIC

          Our platforms' capabilities are currently engaged by nearly 100 clients supporting approximately 200 patient populations that leverage our ability to analyze and improve clinical and quality outcomes and financial performance.

          Data Integration:     Datasets and the management of data are part of our core strengths, which give us insight into how a patient, provider, or population is doing. We integrate data seamlessly and securely into our systems through our proprietary extraction, transformation, and load tools and processes. Data we receive in the course of providing our services are statistically de-identified and stored in our Medical Outcomes Research for Effectiveness and Economics Registry, or MORE 2 Registry®, which, as of September 30, 2014, contained more than 9.1 billion medical events from more than 118 million unique patients, 744,000 physicians, and 244,000 clinical facilities, touching 98.2% of all U.S. counties and Puerto Rico and growing at a rate of approximately 43.3% annually since 2000.

 

6


Table of Contents

          Advanced Analytics.     For years we have developed, honed, and scaled a portfolio of sophisticated analytics. Applying our team's deep subject matter expertise in compute processing, data architecture, statistics, medical sciences, and healthcare policy, and leveraging the billions of medical events within our significant propriety datasets, we believe that we have developed one of the most advanced analytical platforms within the industry, as well as a culture and set of analytical toolsets that serve to rapidly innovate and significantly expand our platform. Examples of the innovative analytics powered by this combination of data and processing capabilities include:

    disease and comorbidity presence and closure probability determination analytics;

    clinical and quality outcomes gap presence and closure probability determination analytics;

    medication compliance and persistence analytics;

    principally relevant provider determination analytics;

    targeted intervention timing optimization analytics;

    targeted intervention venue and logistics optimization analytics;

    gap resolution valuation determination and prioritization analytics;

    population simulation analytics; and

    relative comparative analytics.

          Intervention Platforms.     Our data-driven intervention platforms are toolsets and services that enable our clients to take the insights derived from our analytics and implement solutions at the patient and provider level in order to achieve meaningful impact with the patient and provider. Our data-driven intervention platform tools encompass both internal administrative tasks as well as outbound, patient-oriented and provider-oriented functions. Examples of our intervention platform tools include:

    point of care tools that provide patient-level insight to the healthcare provider, which guides the provider to aid in the assessment, documentation, and care of a specific patient;

    communication tools that support a wide range of notifications and interactions with patients and providers at the appropriate level of implied education and language to aid in the process of achieving patient and provider actions;

    supplemental patient encounter tools that facilitate the coordination of data-driven patient encounters for those who are unable to participate in traditional office encounter venues; and

    medical record data tools that facilitate electronic medical record data pulls, remote accessing, and clinical facility communications regardless of the underlying medical record data medium (e.g., digital or paper).

          Business Processing.     Our business processing toolsets are made up of a powerful business intelligence system and comprehensive data warehousing, which provide historical and current data insight, reporting, and benchmarking to support multiple client business needs such as government-mandated data filings, financial planning, and compliance requirements.

Our Competitive Strengths

          We believe that our operational and financial success is based on the following key strengths:

          Industry-Leading Analytics.     We have demonstrated performance and leadership in disease and comorbidity identification analytics, predictive model analytics, patient and provider intervention

 

7


Table of Contents

prioritization analytics, quality outcomes analytics, and a host of additional analytical and data-driven processes. Based on our experience in the industry and our interactions with existing and prospective clients, we believe that very few other organizations, if any, are able to offer the depth and breadth of data-driven analytical insights, tools, and actionable interventions that our platforms are able to offer.

          Industry-Leading Data Asset.     We maintain one of the industry's largest independent datasets in our MORE 2 Registry. The primary source nature of the contributing data, the clinical content depth of certain elements, the analytically-derived enrichments, the significant data integrity, and the ability to maintain accurate identification of entries and patient matching over time regardless of data source and chronology (a valuable characteristic within our datasets known as longitudinal matching) all combine to create a unique and valuable asset. We believe that these datasets serve as a significant differentiator, informing analytical and product strength design, population simulations, health outcomes research, patient engagement, and both speed-to-market and speed-to-impact capabilities.

          Fully Integrated End-To-End Solution Delivery.     Our platform is able to turn data into insights and insights into actionable interventions. The ability of our platform to integrate disparate and highly complex data to derive impactful and actionable insights has enabled us to bridge the gap from analytics to practical applications on a vast scale.

          Scale of Organically Developed Platform.     We have developed a highly efficient and scalable data and analytics platform that has successfully scaled to serve many of the nation's largest health plans as well as hundreds of separate patient populations concurrently. This platform has been developed on one common code base, supporting strong interoperability within our platform, efficiency in innovating and expanding our platform capabilities, and establishing both predictability and reliability when operated at high levels of load.

          Subject Matter Expertise.     We have, and plan to continue to cultivate, a culture of fostering domain expertise. We maintain a dedicated research team comprised of industry experts and thought leaders, including physicians, as well as clinical, statistical, economical, and data research scientists, and field practitioners who focus on next-generation healthcare solutions and data applications. In addition, we empower our product groups with their own industry experts who focus on research and development in their respective product domains.

          Industry Innovator and Thought-Leader.     We invest considerable time and resources to produce ground-breaking research and strategically share it through industry publications, peer presentations, strategic relationships, and the media. Our MORE 2 Registry is routinely featured at high-profile industry events and within influential publications, which we believe further reinforces our brand as an industry innovator and thought-leader.

          Long, Successful, Profitable Operating History.     We have been delivering value to our clients while gaining scale and profitability since 2006, the year of our reorganization as a C corporation. This scale and profitability has provided organizational stability, an empowerment to invest in ongoing research and development, a high level of trust and confidence in us from our existing clients and potential clients, and ready access to resources to meet our clients' needs.

          Trusted, Independent, and Unbiased Partner.     We are not owned or influenced by a health plan or private equity organization. As a result, our data and analyses remain truly independent, not biased to any single patient base, we are incentivized to be transparent with our clients, and we believe our goals are more fully aligned with the success of our clients.

          We have grown by attracting clients, accumulating increasingly larger and more robust datasets, and developing more advanced analytics from this growing dataset that deliver

 

8


Table of Contents

increasingly valuable insights and impact. By providing increasingly valuable insights and performing increasingly effective patient and provider interventions we are able to deliver greater value to our clients. As our data asset continues to grow, our analytics and intervention solutions become even more effective and our clients realize even more value from our solutions. This in turn results in greater demand for our solutions and attracts new clients. We believe that this virtuous cycle provides us with a competitive position that cannot be easily replicated.

Growth Strategies

          Our objective is to continue to provide leading data analytics and intervention platforms across the healthcare landscape while continuing to grow profitably. We intend to achieve this objective through the following key strategies.

          Deliver Increasing Value to Existing Clients.     We believe that we have a significant opportunity to deliver increasing value to our existing clients and this, in turn, will drive continued growth for us. As our clients recognize value and success as a result of working with our platforms, we frequently see our clients grow in their patient count and increase the number of products engaged with us — both of which result in our mutual success and growth. As we continue to deliver value to our clients, we plan to increase revenue from our existing clients by expanding their use of our platforms, selling to other parts of their organizations, and selling additional analytical toolsets and services to them.

          Continue to Grow Our Client Base.     We believe that we are still in the early stages of realizing our substantial opportunity to grow our client base. We intend to leverage our expertise and experience from the existing large client base to gain new clients through increased investment in our sales force and marketing efforts.

          Continue to Innovate.     Our strength in applying advanced, big data, cloud-based data analytics and our proprietary datasets enable us to achieve increasingly more impactful results for our clients. We intend to continue to invest in research and development to further enhance our data analytics and intervention platforms.

          Continue Expanding into Adjacent Verticals.     We believe the application of advanced analytics and data extends well beyond our current market opportunities and provides additional adjacent market verticals for growth. These verticals include providers, pharmaceutical and life sciences, employer and private exchanges, and direct to consumer.

          Expand Reach through Growing our Channel Partnerships.     While we have been successful in growing our business through our direct sales efforts, we believe there is a significant opportunity that exists for us to further expand and accelerate our reach through channel partnerships with organizations such as retail clinics, pharmaceutical companies, contract research organizations, large technology solution providers, and consulting firms.

          Continue to Leverage our Technology Partnerships.     The healthcare industry has traditionally lagged behind the technology innovation curve. Our advanced data processing and analytics capabilities, coupled with infrastructure thought leadership from leading vendors like EMC, has enabled us to empower our clients with powerful data-driven solution offerings and further transform the use case of modern technologies across the evolving IT healthcare landscape. We intend to continue to invest in these partnerships with thought leaders in the software and infrastructure sector.

          Expand Internationally.     Governments, corporations, and consumers worldwide face similar pressures as within the U.S. with respect to their healthcare systems. We believe that our

 

9


Table of Contents

capabilities are highly applicable to other countries around the world and we intend to invest in replicating our success in the U.S. market to other strategic countries and regions.

          Selectively Pursue Acquisitions.     We plan to selectively pursue acquisitions of complementary businesses, technologies, and teams that will allow us to add new features and functionalities to our platform and accelerate the pace of our innovation and expansion into adjacent market spaces beyond what we can achieve organically.

          Leverage our Dynamic, Passionate and Mission-Focused Culture.     We believe that our work must meet a higher standard. We believe that the analytics that we design, deliver, and support achieve an impact in the lives of real people — parents, spouses, partners, siblings, and children — making integrity and quality cornerstones of our culture. Our dedication to integrity and quality extends to the proprietary technology used for medical data integration, analysis, abstraction, and reporting. Even more importantly, this culture is embraced throughout our company.

Summary Risk Factors

          Our business is subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, including those highlighted in the section titled "Risk Factors" immediately following this prospectus summary. Some of these risks include, among others:

    we may not grow at the rates we historically have achieved or at all, even if our key metrics indicate growth, which could have a material adverse effect on the market price of our Class A common stock;

    if our existing clients do not renew their agreements with us, renew at lower fee levels, decline to purchase additional services from us, choose to purchase fewer services from us, or terminate their agreement with us, and we are unable to replace any lost revenue, our business and operating results could suffer;

    our top clients account for a significant portion of our revenues and, as a result, the loss of one or more of these clients could materially and adversely affect our business and operating results;

    if we do not develop new services that are adopted by clients or fail to provide high-quality support services to our clients, our growth prospects, revenues and operating results could be materially and adversely affected;

    we cannot assure you that we will be able to manage our growth effectively, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, and growth prospects;

    if our security measures fail or are breached and unauthorized access to a client's data is obtained, our services may be perceived as insecure, we may incur significant liabilities, our reputation may be harmed, and we could lose sales and clients;

    our quarterly operating results may fluctuate significantly, which could adversely impact the value of our Class A common stock;

    because the dual class structure of our common stock has the effect of concentrating voting control with holders of our Class B common stock, these holders will continue to have significant influence over our company after this offering, including control over decisions that require the approval of stockholders, which could limit your ability to influence the outcome of matters submitted to stockholders for a vote; and

    an active, liquid trading market for our Class A common stock may not develop, which may limit your ability to sell your shares at or above the initial public offering price.

 

10


Table of Contents

Corporate Reorganization and Credit Facilities

          Effective September 17, 2014, in order to facilitate the administration, management, and development of our business and this offering, Inovalon, Inc. implemented a holding company reorganization, or the Corporate Reorganization, pursuant to which we became the new parent company and Inovalon, Inc. became our direct, wholly owned subsidiary. To implement the Corporate Reorganization, Inovalon, Inc. formed our company and we, in turn, formed Inovalon Merger Sub, Inc., or Merger Sub. The holding company structure was implemented by the merger of Merger Sub with and into Inovalon, Inc. with Inovalon, Inc. surviving the merger as a direct, wholly-owned subsidiary of our company. As a result of the Corporate Reorganization, each share of Inovalon, Inc. issued and outstanding immediately prior to the merger automatically converted into one share of common stock of our company.

          On September 19, 2014, we and our subsidiaries entered into a credit and guaranty agreement with Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as administrative agent, and the lenders from time to time party thereto, which we refer to as the Credit Agreement. The terms of the Credit Agreement provide for credit facilities in the aggregate maximum principal amount of $400.0 million, consisting of a senior unsecured term loan facility in the original principal amount of $300.0 million, which we refer to as the Term Loan Facility, and a senior unsecured revolving credit facility in the maximum principal amount of $100.0 million, or the Revolving Credit Facility, which we refer to together with the Term Loan Facility as the Credit Facilities. Proceeds of the Revolving Credit Facility may be used for working capital and general corporate purposes. The obligations under the Credit Facilities are guaranteed by our domestic, wholly owned subsidiaries.

          After the Corporate Reorganization, our capital stock was reclassified to implement a dual class capital structure providing for two classes of common stock, with each share of common stock held by our existing stockholders reclassified as Class B common stock. Following the reclassification, we redeemed approximately 8.33% of our Class B common stock on a pro rata basis from our existing stockholders for an aggregate amount of $300.0 million using the proceeds from the Term Loan Facility, as more fully described in "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Liquidity and Capital Resources — Debt."

Corporate Information

          Our principal executive offices are located at 4321 Collington Road, Bowie, Maryland 20716. Our telephone number at that address is (301) 809-4000 and our Internet address is www.inovalon.com. The information contained on, or that can be accessed through, our website is not a part of this prospectus. Investors should not rely on any such information in deciding whether to purchase our Class A common stock.

          "Inovalon," the Inovalon logo, and other Inovalon marks are trademarks of Inovalon. This prospectus contains references to our trademarks and to trademarks belonging to other entities. Solely for convenience, trademarks and trade names referred to in this prospectus, including logos, artwork and other visual displays may appear without the ® or ™ symbols, but such references are not intended to indicate that we or their respective owners will not assert, to the fullest extent under applicable law, our rights or the rights of the applicable licensor to these trademarks and trade names. We do not intend our use or display of other companies' trade names or trademarks to imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship of us by, any such companies.

Implications of Being an Emerging Growth Company

          As a company with less than $1.0 billion in revenue during our most recently completed fiscal year, we qualify as an "emerging growth company" as defined in Section 2(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, or the Securities Act, as modified by the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or

 

11


Table of Contents

the JOBS Act. As an emerging growth company, we may take advantage of specified reduced disclosure and other requirements that are otherwise applicable, in general, to public companies that are not emerging growth companies. These provisions include:

    an exemption from compliance with the auditor attestation requirement on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting;

    an exemption from compliance with any requirement that the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board may adopt regarding mandatory audit firm rotation or a supplement to the auditor's report providing additional information about the audit and the financial statements;

    reduced disclosure about our executive compensation arrangements; and

    exemptions from the requirements to obtain a non-binding advisory vote on executive compensation or a shareholder approval of any golden parachute arrangements.

          We may take advantage of these exemptions for up to five years or such earlier time that we are no longer an emerging growth company. Accordingly, the information contained herein may be different than the information you receive from other public companies in which you hold stock. We would cease to be an emerging growth company upon the earliest to occur of: the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; the date we qualify as a "large accelerated filer," with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; the issuance, in any three-year period, by us of more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; and the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of this offering.

          The JOBS Act also permits us, as an emerging growth company, to take advantage of an extended transition period to comply with new or revised accounting standards applicable to public companies and thereby allows us to delay the adoption of those standards until those standards would apply to private companies. We have irrevocably elected not to avail ourselves of this exemption from new or revised accounting standards, and, therefore, will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.

 

12


Table of Contents

 


THE OFFERING

Class A common stock offered by us

                            shares

Class A common stock to be outstanding after this offering

 

                          shares(1)

Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering

 

                          shares(1)

Total Class A and Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering

 

                          shares(1)

Use of Proceeds

 

We estimate the net proceeds to us from this offering, after deducting the underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us, will be approximately $             million (or $             million if the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares in this offering is exercised in full), assuming the shares are offered at $             per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated price range set forth on the front cover page of this prospectus.

 

We plan to use the net proceeds from this offering for working capital and other general corporate purposes. See "Use of Proceeds."

Voting Rights

 

The rights of the holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting and conversion rights. Holders of our Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share and holders of our Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share. Holders of shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock will vote together as a single class on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders (including the election of directors), with certain exceptions described in our restated certificate of incorporation. See "Description of Capital Stock — Class A and B Common Stock — Voting Rights." Immediately following the completion of this offering, outstanding shares of our Class B common stock will represent approximately         % of the voting power of our outstanding common stock. As a result, holders of our Class B common stock, comprised of our common stockholders prior to the Corporate Reorganization, will be able to control the outcome of all matters submitted to a vote of our stockholders, including, for example, the election of directors, amendments to our certificate of incorporation and mergers or other business combinations.

 

13


Table of Contents

Class B Common Stock Conversion Rights

 

Each outstanding share of Class B common stock is convertible at any time at the option of the holder into one share of Class A common stock. Each share of Class B common stock will also convert automatically into one share of Class A common stock upon any transfer, whether or not for value, except for certain transfers described in our restated certificate of incorporation, including, without limitation, transfers for tax and estate planning purposes, so long as the transferring holder of Class B common stock continues to hold exclusive voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares transferred, and transfers to persons or entitities who are Class B stockholders at the time of the transfer. Also, each share of Class B common stock held of record by a natural person, other than a natural person who held the shares as of our initial public offering, will convert automatically into one share of Class A common stock upon the death of the holder. In addition, each share of Class B common stock will convert automatically into one share of Class A common stock upon the earlier to occur of (i) the date upon which the number of shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock beneficially owned by our Class B common stockholders, in the aggregate, represents less than 10% of the total number of shares of Class A and Class B common stock then outstanding and (ii) the date specified by affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66 2 / 3 % of the outstanding shares of Class B common stock, voting as a single class. Once converted into Class A common stock, a share of Class B common stock may not be reissued. See "Description of Capital Stock — Class A and B Common Stock."

Risk Factors

 

You should read the "Risk Factors" section of this prospectus for a discussion of factors to consider carefully before deciding to invest in shares of our Class A common stock.

Proposed NASDAQ Global Select Market symbol

 

"INOV"


(1)
The number of shares of our Class A and Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering is based on                          shares of Class A common stock offered in this offering and excludes:

24,451,429 shares of Class A common stock issuable upon the conversion of shares of Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering;

1,290,255 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of September 30, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $29.86 per share;

97,756 shares of Class B common stock issuable upon vesting of restricted stock units; and

             shares of Class A common stock available for future grant under our 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

 

14


Table of Contents

 


SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

          The following table sets forth summary consolidated financial data for the years presented and at the dates indicated below. We have derived the summary consolidated statements of operations data for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013 from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the summary consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2012 and 2013 from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the summary consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2011 from our audited consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. The summary consolidated statement of operations data for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of September 30, 2014 have been derived from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the summary consolidated balance sheet data as of September 30, 2013 from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. In our opinion, such financial statements include all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, that we consider necessary for a fair presentation of the financial data set forth in those statements.

          Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of our results in any future periods, including the full year ending December 31, 2014. The summary of our consolidated financial data set forth below should be read together with our consolidated financial statements and related notes, as well as the sections entitled "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations," included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
  (in thousands, except per share data)
 

Consolidated Statement of Operations Data:

                         

Revenue

  $ 239,685   $ 300,275   $ 295,798   $ 231,264   $ 271,622  

Expenses:

                               

Cost of revenue

    102,695     101,188     120,054     94,869     85,065  

Sales and marketing        

    6,752     6,793     5,952     4,597     5,355  

Research and development

    14,855     15,499     21,192     16,171     17,376  

General and administrative

    63,184     72,661     80,638     60,266     62,920  

Depreciation and amortization

    11,229     12,899     15,517     11,105     15,012  
                       

Total operating expenses

    198,715     209,040     243,353     187,008     185,728  
                       

Income from operations

    40,970     91,235     52,445     44,256     85,894  
                       

Other income and (expenses):

                               

Interest income

    10     11     9     6     4  

Interest expense

    (62 )   (129 )   (79 )   (61 )   (209 )
                       

Income before taxes

    40,918     91,117     52,375     44,201     85,689  

Provision for income taxes        

    15,991     35,962     19,657     17,218     33,836  
                       

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  
                       
                       

Basic net income per share

  $ 0.90   $ 2.00   $ 1.21   $ 1.00   $ 1.94  
                       
                       

Diluted net income per share

  $ 0.90   $ 1.98   $ 1.20   $ 0.99   $ 1.91  
                       
                       

Weighted average shares of common stock outstanding:

                               

Basic

    27,573     27,573     27,061     27,111     26,728  
                       
                       

Diluted

    27,771     27,808     27,275     27,346     27,167  
                       
                       

 

15


Table of Contents

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
  (in thousands, except percentages and statements of work)
 

Other Financial Data and Key Metrics(1):

                               

Adjusted EBITDA(2)

 
$

57,526
 
$

108,105
 
$

71,847
 
$

58,333
 
$

103,059
 

Adjusted EBITDA margin(2)

    24 %   36 %   24 %   25 %   38 %

MORE 2 Registry dataset metrics

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

Unique patient count(3)

    69,916     86,002     109,464     98,607     118,932  

Medical event count(4)

    5,479,599     6,379,293     8,321,236     7,560,838     9,112,175  

Trailing 12 month Patient Analytics Months (PAM)(5)

   
8,797,514
   
10,822,673
   
12,830,914
   
12,272,280
   
15,593,906
 

Engaged patient population statements of work(6)

   
227
   
314
   
355
   
344
   
536
 

Data analytics and data-driven intervention revenue mix:

                               

Revenue from data analytics subscriptions(7)        

    42.3 %   45.3 %   48.6 %   47.0 %   56.3 %

Revenue from data-driven intervention platform services(8):

                               

Fully automated processes

    1.5 %   4.2 %   4.3 %   4.8 %   7.1 %

Partially automated processes

    56.2 %   50.5 %   47.1 %   48.2 %   36.6 %
                       

    57.7 %   54.7 %   51.4 %   53.0 %   43.7 %

 
  December 31,   September 30,  
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
  (in thousands)
 

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 114,872   $ 106,361   $ 110,594   $ 110,891   $ 131,947  

Accounts receivable, net of allowances

    36,764     62,899     33,398     43,233     52,037  

Working capital

    131,676     136,933     130,562     145,209     156,446  

Property, equipment and capitalized software, net

    28,089     34,170     43,050     40,561     49,126  

Goodwill

    62,269     62,269     62,269     62,269     62,269  

Total assets

    262,922     285,655     269,746     277,710     317,345  

Long-term debt

                    285,191  

Total liabilities

    33,817     48,826     38,012     32,471     340,706  

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    229,105     236,829     231,734     245,239     (23,361 )

(1)
MORE 2 Registry dataset metrics, Trailing 12 month Patient Analytics Months (PAM), and Engaged patient population statements of work, each of which is presented in the table, are key operating metrics that management uses to assess our level of operational activity. While we believe that each of these metrics is indicative of our overall level of analytical activity and the underlying growth in our business, increases or decreases in these metrics do not necessarily correlate to proportional increases or decreases in revenue, Adjusted EBITDA or net income. For instance, although increased levels of analytical activity historically have corresponded to increases in revenue over the long term, differences in fees charged for different analytical packages exist and differences in how analytics trigger the applicability of our data-driven intervention platforms may result in increases in analytical activity that do not result in proportional increases in revenue, Adjusted EBITDA or net income (and vice versa). Accordingly, while we believe the presentation of these operating metrics is helpful to investors in understanding our business, these metrics have limitations and should not be considered as substitutes for analysis of our

 

16


Table of Contents

    financial results reported under GAAP. In addition, we believe that other companies, including companies in our industry, do not present similar operating metrics and that there is no commonly accepted method of calculating these metrics, which may reduce their usefulness as comparative measures.

(2)
Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are financial measures not calculated in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP. For definitions of Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin, as well as the reasons why we believe that Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin provide useful information to investors and, to the extent material, any additional purposes for which we use Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin, see "Selected Consolidated Financial Data."


The following table presents a reconciliation of net income to Adjusted EBITDA for each of the periods indicated (dollars in thousands):

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 

Reconciliation of Net Income to Adjusted EBITDA:

                               

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  

Depreciation and amortization           

    11,229     12,899     15,517     11,105     15,012  

Interest expense

    62     129     79     61     209  

Interest (income)

    (10 )   (11 )   (9 )   (6 )   (4 )

Provision for income taxes

    15,991     35,962     19,657     17,218     33,836  
                       

EBITDA

  $ 52,199   $ 104,134   $ 67,962   $ 55,361   $ 100,906  

Stock-based compensation

    3,767     2,560     1,842     1,408     1,340  

Other non-comparable items(a)           

    1,560     1,411     1,565     1,564      

Professional service fees(b)

            478         813  
                       

Adjusted EBITDA

  $ 57,526   $ 108,105   $ 71,847   $ 58,333   $ 103,059  
                       
                       
    (a)
    Other "non-comparable items" include business transaction-related professional fees, corporate name change and associated rebranding expenses, workforce restructuring expenses, and certain legal costs. We believe these are non-comparable expenses that should be excluded from Adjusted EBITDA in order to more effectively assess our period-over-period and on-going operating performance.

    (b)
    Represents legal costs associated with the enforcement of a specific client contract. The legal process associated with this matter began in the first quarter of 2013 and concluded in the second quarter of 2014.

(3)
Unique patient count is defined as each unique, longitudinally matched, de-identified natural person represented in our MORE 2 Registry as of the end of the period presented.

(4)
Medical event count is defined as the total number of discrete medical events as of the end of the period presented (for example, a discrete medical event typically results from the presentation of a patient to a physician for the diagnosis of diabetes and congestive heart failure in a single visit, the presentation of a patient to an emergency department for chest pain, etc.).

(5)
Patient Analytics Months, or PAM, is defined as the sum of the analytical processes performed on each respective patient within patient populations covered by clients under contract. As used in the metric, an "analytical process" is a distinct set of data analytical calculations undertaken by us which is initiated and completed by our analytical platform to examine a specific question such as whether a patient is believed to have diabetes, or progression of the disease, during a specific time period. Examples of the analytical processes tallied within the PAM metric include disease and comorbidity gap presence and closure probability determination analytics, clinical and quality outcomes gap presence and closure probability determination analytics, targeted intervention timing, venue, and logistics optimization analytics, and a variety of population simulation and relative comparative analytics which are executed on

 

17


Table of Contents

    engaged patient populations on a periodic or recurring basis. See "Business — Our Platforms — Advanced Analytics."

(6)
Engaged patient population statements of work is defined as the number of discrete identified patient populations (for example, the Medicare Advantage members enrolled in a client health plan within the state of Florida) engaged under a contracted statement of work, or SOW, during the period presented. SOWs for any discontinued product offerings are not reflected within this metric.

(7)
Revenue from data analytics subscriptions is defined as revenue that results from subscription agreements/contracts for the provision of data analytics (which include such components as the company's data integration, data management, data analytics, and data reporting) services.

(8)
Revenue from data-driven intervention platform services is defined as revenue that results from contracts for the provision of data-driven intervention platform services. This revenue is further broken down into revenue achieved through fully automated processes (i.e., those processes that require no material variable-based labor component) and partially automated processes (i.e., those processes that require certain material variable-based labor components).

 

18


Table of Contents


RISK FACTORS

           Investing in our Class A common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should consider carefully the risks and uncertainties described below, together with all of the other information in this prospectus, including the consolidated financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus, before deciding whether to invest in shares of our Class A common stock. If any of the following risks actually occur, our business, financial condition, results of operations, and future prospects could be materially and adversely affected. In that event, the market price of our stock could decline, and you could lose part or all of your investment.

Risks Related to Our Business

We may not grow at the rates we historically have achieved or at all, even if our key metrics may indicate growth, which could have a material adverse effect on the market price of our Class A common stock.

          We have experienced significant growth since 2010, with total revenues growing from approximately $176.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 to approximately $295.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2013, and from approximately $231.3 million for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 to approximately $271.6 million for the nine months ended September 30, 2014. Future revenues may not grow at these same rates or may decline, such as the approximate 1% revenue decline from the year ended December 31, 2012 to the year ended December 31, 2013. Our future growth will depend, in part, on our ability to grow our revenue from existing clients, to complete sales to potential future clients, to expand our client base in the life sciences industry and with provider organizations and employer and private exchanges, to develop direct-to-consumer services and to expand internationally. We can provide no assurances that we will be successful in executing on these growth strategies or that, even if our key metrics, such as trailing 12 month PAM, would indicate future growth, we will continue to grow our revenue or net income. Our ability to execute on our existing sales pipeline, create additional sales pipelines, and expand our client base depends on, among other things, the attractiveness of our services relative to those offered by our competitors, our ability to demonstrate the value of our existing and future services, and our ability to attract and retain a sufficient number of qualified sales and marketing leadership and support personnel. In addition, clients in certain industries in which we have a more limited presence, such as the life sciences industry, may be slower to adopt our services than we currently anticipate, which could adversely affect our results of operations and growth prospects.

If our existing clients do not renew their agreements with us, renew at lower fee levels, decline to purchase additional services from us, choose to purchase fewer services from us, or terminate their agreement with us, and we are unable to replace any lost revenue, our business and operating results could suffer.

          We historically have derived, and expect in the future to derive, a significant portion of our revenue from renewals of existing client agreements and sales of additional services to existing clients. As a result, achieving a high renewal rate of our client agreements and selling additional services to existing clients is critical to our future operating results. It is difficult to predict our client renewal rate, and we may experience significantly more difficulty than we anticipate in renewing existing client agreements. Factors that may affect the renewal rate for our services and our ability to sell additional services include:

    the price, performance and functionality of our services;

    the availability, price, performance and functionality of competing services;

19


Table of Contents

    our clients' perceived ability to develop and perform the services that we offer using their internal resources;

    our ability to develop complementary services;

    our continued ability to access the data necessary to enable us to effectively develop and deliver new services to clients;

    the stability and security of our platform;

    changes in healthcare laws, regulations or trends; and

    the business environment of our clients, in particular, reductions in our clients' membership populations and budgetary constraints affecting our clients.

          Contracts with our clients generally have stated terms of two to four years. Our clients have no obligation to renew their contracts for our services after the term expires. In addition, our clients may negotiate terms less advantageous to us upon renewal, may renew for fewer services, may choose to discontinue one or more services under an existing contract, may exercise flexibilities within their contracts to adjust service volumes, or which could reduce our revenue from these clients, which, for example, occurred during the second quarter of 2013. Our future operating results also depend, in part, on our ability to sell new services to our existing clients. If our clients fail to renew their agreements, renew their agreements upon less favorable terms, at lower fee levels or for fewer services, fail to purchase new services from us, or terminate their agreements with us, and we are unsuccessful in generating significant revenue from new clients to replace any lost revenue, our revenues may decline and our future revenue growth may be constrained.

          If a client fails to fulfill its obligations under its agreements with us, or permanently terminates certain services or its agreement in its entirety prior to its expected completion date, whether or not in our view permitted by the terms of the agreement, and revenue and cash flows expected from a client are not realized in the time period expected or at all, our business, operating results and financial condition could be adversely affected.

Our top clients account for a significant portion of our revenues and, as a result, the loss of one or more of these clients could materially and adversely affect our business and operating results.

          Our top four clients individually accounted for 12%, 11%, 11%, and 10%, respectively, of our revenues for the year ended December 31, 2013. Moreover, our top ten clients accounted for approximately 70% and 75% of our revenues for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 and the year ended December 31, 2013, respectively. The engagement between these clients and us generally is covered through multiple separate statements of work ("SOWs"), each with different and/or staggered terms which are all multi-year in their duration, ranging from two to four years. We can provide no assurance that these clients will renew their existing contracts or all SOWs with us upon expiration or that any such failure to renew will not have a material adverse effect on our revenue. For example, our revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013 decreased by approximately 1% as compared to the year ended December 31, 2012, in part as a result of a client's decision to discontinue several integrated solution engagements during the second quarter of 2013. If we lose one or more of our top clients, or if one or more of these clients significantly decreases its use of our services, our business and operating results could be materially and adversely affected.

20


Table of Contents

If we do not develop new services that are adopted by clients, or fail to provide high quality support services to our clients, our growth prospects, revenues and operating results could be materially and adversely affected.

          Our longer-term operating results and revenue growth will depend in part on our ability to successfully develop and sell new services that existing and potential clients want and are willing to purchase. We must continue to invest significant resources in research and development in order to enhance our existing services and introduce new high-quality services that clients and prospective clients will want. If we are unable to predict or adapt to changes in user preferences or industry or regulatory changes, or if we are unable to modify our services on a timely basis in response to those changes, clients may not renew their agreements with us, and our services may become less attractive than services offered by our competitors. Our operating results could also suffer if our innovations are not responsive to the needs of our clients, are not appropriately timed with market opportunity, or are not effectively brought to market. Our success also depends on successfully providing high-quality support services to resolve any issues related to our services. High-quality education and client support is important for the successful marketing and sale of our services and for the renewal of existing clients. If we do not help our clients quickly resolve issues and provide effective ongoing support, our ability to sell additional services to existing clients would suffer and our reputation with existing or potential clients would be harmed.

We cannot assure you that we will be able to manage our growth effectively, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and growth prospects.

          If we are successful in expanding our client base and growing our business, our existing services may not be as scalable as we anticipate, and we may need to expend significant resources to enhance our IT infrastructure, financial and accounting systems, and controls, and also hire a significant number of qualified client support personnel, professional services personnel, software engineers, technical personnel, and management personnel in order to provide services to those new clients. As a result, our expenses may increase more than expected, which could adversely affect our results of operations. In addition, identifying and recruiting qualified personnel and training them in the use of our services requires significant time, expense, and attention, and our business may be adversely affected if our efforts to expand and train qualified personnel do not generate a corresponding increase in revenues. If our existing services are not as scalable as we anticipate or if we are unable to manage our growth effectively, the quality of our services and our reputation may suffer, which could adversely affect our business, results of operations and growth prospects.

If our security measures fail or are breached and unauthorized access to a client's data is obtained, our services may be perceived as insecure, we may incur significant liabilities, our reputation may be harmed, and we could lose sales and clients.

          Our services involve the storage and transmission of clients' proprietary information, sensitive or confidential data, including valuable intellectual property and personal information of employees, clients and others, as well as protected health information, or PHI, of our clients' patients. Because of the extreme sensitivity of the information we store and transmit, the security features of our computer, network, and communications systems infrastructure are critical to the success of our business. A breach or failure of our security measures could result from a variety of circumstances and events, including third-party action, employee negligence or error, malfeasance, computer viruses, cyber-attacks by computer hackers, failures during the process of upgrading or replacing software and databases, power outages, hardware failures, telecommunication failures, user errors, or catastrophic events. Information security risks have generally increased in recent years because of the proliferation of new technologies and the increased sophistication and activities of

21


Table of Contents

perpetrators of cyber-attacks. As cyber threats continue to evolve, we may be required to expend additional resources to continue to enhance our information security measures or to investigate and remediate any information security vulnerabilities. If our security measures fail or are breached, it could result in unauthorized persons accessing sensitive client or patient data (including PHI), a loss of or damage to our data, an inability to access data sources, or process data or provide our services to our clients. Such failures or breaches of our security measures, or our inability to effectively resolve such failures or breaches in a timely manner, could severely damage our reputation, adversely affect client or investor confidence in us, and reduce the demand for our services from existing and potential clients. In addition, we could face litigation, damages for contract breach, monetary penalties, or regulatory actions for violation of applicable laws or regulations, and incur significant costs for remedial measures to prevent future occurrences and mitigate past violations. Although we maintain insurance covering certain security and privacy damages and claim expenses, we may not carry insurance or maintain coverage sufficient to compensate for all liability and in any event, insurance coverage would not address the reputational damage that could result from a security incident.

          We may experience cyber-security and other breach incidents that may remain undetected for an extended period. Because techniques used to obtain unauthorized access or to sabotage systems change frequently and generally are not recognized until launched, we may be unable to anticipate these techniques or to implement adequate preventive measures. In addition, in the event that our clients authorize or enable third parties to access their information and data that are stored on our systems, we cannot ensure the complete integrity or security of such data in our systems as we would not control access. If an actual or perceived breach of our security occurs, or if we are unable to effectively resolve such breaches in a timely manner, the market perception of the effectiveness of our security measures could be harmed and we could lose sales and clients, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, operations, and financial results.

Data protection, privacy and similar laws restrict access, use, and disclosure of information, and failure to comply with or adapt to changes in these laws could materially and adversely harm our business.

          We are subject to data privacy and security regulation by both the federal government and the states in which we conduct our business. The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, and its implementing regulations, which we refer to collectively as HIPAA, established uniform federal standards for certain "covered entities," which include healthcare providers and health plans, governing the conduct of specified electronic healthcare transactions and protecting the security and privacy of PHI. The Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health Act, or HITECH, which became effective on February 17, 2010, and an implementing regulation known as the Omnibus Final Rule, which became effective on September 23, 2013, make HIPAA's privacy and security standards directly applicable to "business associates," which are independent contractors or agents of covered entities that create, receive, maintain, or transmit PHI in connection with providing a service for or on behalf of a covered entity. HITECH also increased the civil and criminal penalties that may be imposed against covered entities, business associates, and other persons, and gave state attorneys general new authority to file civil actions for damages or injunctions in federal courts to enforce HIPAA's requirements and seek attorney's fees and costs associated with pursuing federal civil actions.

          A portion of the data that we obtain and handle for or on behalf of our clients is considered PHI and subject to HIPAA because our clients are covered entities under HIPAA and we act as their business associate. Under HIPAA and our contractual agreements with our HIPAA-covered entity health plan clients, we are considered a "business associate" to those clients, and are required to maintain the privacy and security of PHI in accordance with HIPAA and the terms of our agreements

22


Table of Contents

with clients, including by implementing HIPAA-required administrative, technical, and physical safeguards. We have incurred, and will continue to incur, significant costs to establish and maintain these safeguards and, if additional safeguards are required to comply with HIPAA or our clients' requirements, our costs could increase further, which would negatively affect our operating results. Furthermore, if we fail to maintain adequate safeguards, or we use or disclose PHI in a manner not permitted by HIPAA or our agreements with our clients, or if the privacy or security of PHI that we obtain and handle is otherwise compromised, we could be subject to significant liabilities and consequences, including, without limitation:

    breach of our contractual obligations to clients, which may cause our clients to terminate their relationship with us and may result in potentially significant financial obligations to our clients;

    investigation by the federal regulatory authorities empowered to enforce HIPAA, which include the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, or HHS, and the Federal Trade Commission, and investigation by the state attorneys general empowered to enforce comparable state laws, and the possible imposition of civil and criminal penalties;

    private litigation by individuals adversely affected by any violation of HIPAA, HITECH, or comparable state laws to which we are subject; and

    negative publicity, which may decrease the willingness of current and potential future clients to work with us and negatively affect our sales and operating results.

          Laws and expectations relating to privacy continue to evolve, and we continue to adapt to changing needs. Nevertheless, changes in these laws may limit our data access, use, and disclosure, and may require increased expenditures by us or may dictate that we not offer certain types of services. Any of the foregoing may have a material adverse effect on our ability to provide services to our clients and, in turn, our results of operations.

          Data protection, privacy and similar laws protect more than patient information and, although they vary by jurisdiction, these laws can extend to employee information, business contact information, provider information, and other information relating to identifiable individuals. Failure to comply with these laws may result in, among other things, civil and criminal liability, negative publicity, damage to our reputation, and liability under contractual provisions. In addition, compliance with such laws may require increased costs to us or may dictate that we not offer certain types of services in the future.

The information that we provide to our clients could be inaccurate or incomplete, which could harm our business reputation, financial condition, and results of operations.

          We aggregate, process, and analyze healthcare-related data and information for use by our clients. Because data in the healthcare industry is fragmented in origin, inconsistent in format, and often incomplete, the overall quality of data received or accessed in the healthcare industry is often poor, the degree or amount of data which is knowingly or unknowingly absent or omitted can be material, and we frequently discover data issues and errors during our data integrity checks. If the analytical data that we provide to our clients are based on incorrect or incomplete data or if we make mistakes in the capture, input, or analysis of these data, our reputation may suffer and our ability to attract and retain clients may be materially harmed.

          In addition, we assist our clients with the management and submission of data to governmental entities, including CMS. These processes and submissions are governed by complex data processing and validation policies and regulations. If we fail to abide by such policies or submit incorrect or incomplete data, we may be exposed to liability to a client, court, or government agency that concludes that our storage, handling, submission, delivery, or display of health

23


Table of Contents

information or other data was wrongful or erroneous. Although we maintain insurance coverage, this coverage may prove to be inadequate or could cease to be available to us on acceptable terms, if at all. Even unsuccessful claims could result in substantial costs and diversion of management time, attention, and resources. A claim brought against us that is uninsured or under-insured could harm our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

Our business is principally focused on the healthcare industry, and factors that adversely affect the financial condition of the healthcare industry could consequently affect our business.

          We derive substantially all of our revenue from clients within the healthcare industry. As a result, our financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected by conditions affecting the healthcare industry generally and health systems and payors in particular. Our ability to grow will depend upon the economic environment of the healthcare industry, as well as our ability to increase the number of services that we sell to our clients. Furthermore, we may not become aware in a timely manner of changes in regulatory requirements affecting our business, which could result in us taking, or failing to take, actions, resulting in noncompliance with state or federal regulations.

          There are many factors that could affect the purchasing practices, operations and, ultimately, the operating funds of healthcare organizations, such as reimbursement policies for healthcare expenses, consolidation in the healthcare industry, and regulation, litigation, and general economic conditions. In particular, we could be required to make unplanned modifications to our services or could suffer delays or cancellations of orders or reductions in demand for our services as a result of changes in regulations affecting the healthcare industry, such as any increased regulation by governmental agencies, changes to HIPAA and other federal or state privacy laws, laws relating to the tax-exempt status of many of our clients or restrictions on permissible discounts, and other financial arrangements. It is unclear what long-term effects the general economic conditions will have on the healthcare industry, and in turn, on our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

Consolidation in the industries in which our clients operate may result in certain clients discontinuing their use of our services following an acquisition or merger, which could materially and adversely affect our business and financial results.

          Mergers or consolidations among our clients have in the past and could in the future reduce the number of our existing and potential clients. When companies consolidate, overlapping services previously purchased separately are typically purchased only once by the combined entity, leading to loss of revenue for the service provider. If our clients merge with or are acquired by other entities that are not our clients, they may discontinue their use of our services. There can be no assurance as to the degree to which we may be able to address the revenue impact of such consolidation. Any of these developments could materially and adversely affect our business and financial results.

Our proprietary applications may not operate properly, which could damage our reputation, give rise to a variety of claims against us, or divert our resources from other purposes, any of which could harm our business and operating results.

          Proprietary software and application development is time-consuming, expensive, and complex, and may involve unforeseen difficulties. We may encounter technical obstacles, and it is possible that we discover additional problems that prevent our proprietary applications from operating properly. If our applications and services do not function reliably or fail to achieve client expectations in terms of performance, clients could assert liability claims against us and attempt to cancel their contracts with us. Moreover, material performance problems, defects, or errors in our

24


Table of Contents

existing or new applications and services may arise in the future and may result from, among other things, the lack of interoperability of our applications with systems and data that we did not develop and the function of which is outside of our control or undetected in our testing. Defects or errors in our applications might discourage existing or potential clients from purchasing services from us. Correction of defects or errors could prove to be time consuming, costly, impossible, or impracticable. The existence of errors or defects in our applications and the correction of such errors could divert our resources from other matters relating to our business, damage our reputation, increase our costs, and have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

As a result of our variable sales and implementation cycles, we might not be able to recognize revenue to offset expenditures, which could result in fluctuations in our quarterly results of operations or otherwise adversely affect our future operating results.

          The sales cycle for our services is typically four to six months from initial contact to contract execution, but can vary depending on the particular client, product under consideration, and time of year, among other factors. Some clients, for instance, undertake a more prolonged evaluation process, which has in the past resulted in extended sales cycles. Our sales efforts involve educating potential clients about the use, technical capabilities, and benefits of our services, and gaining an understanding of their needs and budgets. During the sales cycle, we expend significant time and resources, and we do not recognize any revenue to offset such expenditures, which could result in fluctuations in our quarterly results of operations and adversely affect our future operating results.

          After a client contract is signed, we provide an implementation process for the client during which we load, test, and integrate data into our system and train client personnel. Our implementation cycle generally ranges from 20 to 90 days from contract execution to completion of implementation, but can vary depending on the amount and quality of the client's data and how quickly the client facilitates access to data. In addition, for certain clients, our third-party vendors must go through delegation processes in order to become authorized to provide certain services to those clients, which could delay our ability to provide such services to those clients. During the implementation cycle, we expend time, effort, and financial resources implementing our services, but accounting principles do not allow us to recognize the resulting revenue until implementation is complete and the services are available for use by our clients. If implementation periods are extended, revenue recognition will be delayed, which could adversely affect our results of operations in certain periods.

          In addition, because most of our revenue in each quarter is derived from agreements entered into with our clients during previous quarters, the negative impacts resulting from a decline in new or renewed agreements in any one quarter may not be fully reflected in our revenue for that quarter. Such declines, however, would negatively affect our revenue in future periods and the effect of significant downturns in sales of and market demand for our services, and potential changes in our renewal rates or renewal terms may not be fully reflected in our results of operations until future periods. Our sales and implementation cycles also make it difficult for us to rapidly increase our total revenue through additional sales in any period. As a result, the effect of changes in the industry impacting our business, or changes we experience in our new sales, may not be reflected in our short-term results of operations.

25


Table of Contents

We operate in a competitive industry, and if we are not able to compete effectively, our business and financial results could be materially and adversely impacted.

          We operate in a competitive industry, and we expect that competition will increase as a result of consolidation in both the information technology and healthcare industries. Our future growth and success will depend on our ability to successfully compete with other companies that provide similar services, including existing clients and other healthcare organizations that seek to build and operate competing services themselves and newer companies that provide similar services, often at substantially lower prices. We compete on the basis of various factors, including breadth and depth of services, reputation, reliability, quality, innovation, security, price, and industry expertise, and experience. If we are unable to maintain our technology, management, healthcare, or regulatory expertise or attract and retain a sufficient number of qualified sales and marketing leadership and support personnel, we will be at a competitive disadvantage. Some of our competitors, in particular health plans and larger technology or technology-enabled consultative service providers, have greater name recognition, longer operating histories, and significantly greater resources than we do. Furthermore, our current or potential competitors may have greater financial resources and larger sales and marketing capabilities than we have, and may have a more diversified set of revenue sources, which may allow them to be less sensitive to changes in client preferences and more aggressive in pricing their services, any of which could put us at a competitive disadvantage. As a result, our competitors may be able to respond more quickly and effectively than we can to new or changing opportunities, technologies, standards, or client requirements and may have the ability to initiate or withstand substantial price competition. In addition, potential clients frequently have requested competitive bids from us and our competitors in terms of price and services offered and, if we do not accurately assess potential clients' needs and budgets when submitting our proposals, they may appear less attractive than those of our competitors, and we may not be successful in attracting new business. In addition, our clients may perceive our toolsets to be at a higher price point than our competitors, which could result in reduced revenue if we are not able to adequately demonstrate the value of our toolsets to our clients and prospective clients. Increases in competition in our industry could reduce our market share and result in price declines for certain services, which could negatively impact our business, profitability, and growth prospects.

If we fail to maintain awareness of our brand cost-effectively, our business might suffer.

          Maintaining awareness of our brand in a cost-effective manner is critical to continuing the widespread acceptance of our existing services and is an important element in attracting new clients and in attracting and retaining qualified employees. The importance of brand recognition may increase as competition in our market increases. Successful promotion of our brand will depend largely on the effectiveness of our marketing efforts and on our ability to provide reliable and useful services at competitive prices. Our efforts to build and maintain our brand nationally have involved and will continue to involve significant expense. Brand promotion activities may not yield increased revenue, and even if they do, any increased revenue may not offset the expenses we incur in maintaining our brand. In addition, third parties' use of trademarks or branding similar to ours could materially harm our business or result in litigation and other costs. If we fail to successfully maintain our brand, or incur substantial expenses in an unsuccessful attempt to maintain our brand, we may fail to attract enough new clients or retain our existing clients to the extent necessary to realize a sufficient return on our brand-building efforts, and our business and our ability to attract and retain qualified employees could suffer.

Our success depends on our ability to protect our intellectual property rights.

          Our success depends in part on our ability to protect our proprietary software, confidential information and know-how, technology, and other intellectual property and intellectual property

26


Table of Contents

rights. To do so, we rely generally on copyright, trademark and trade secret laws, confidentiality and invention assignment agreements with employees and third parties, and license and other agreements with consultants, vendors, and clients. There can be no assurance that employees, consultants, vendors, and clients have executed such agreements or have not breached or will not breach their agreements with us, that we will have adequate remedies for any breach, or that our trade secrets will not otherwise become known or independently developed by competitors. Additionally, we monitor our use of open source software to avoid uses that would require us to disclose our proprietary source code or violate applicable open source licenses, but if we engaged in such uses inadvertently, we could be required to take remedial action or release certain of our proprietary source code. These scenarios could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition, and results of operations. In addition, despite the protections we do place on our intellectual property, a third party could, without authorization, copy or otherwise obtain and use our products or technology, or develop similar technology. In addition, agreement terms that address non-competition are difficult to enforce in many jurisdictions and might not be enforceable in certain cases.

          Pursuant to our initial strategy regarding intellectual property protection, we currently hold no issued patents. As we begin to pursue patents, we might not be able to obtain meaningful patent protection for our technology. In addition, if any patents are issued in the future, they might not provide us with any competitive advantages or might be successfully challenged by third parties.

          We rely on unpatented proprietary technology. It is possible that others will independently develop the same or similar technology or otherwise obtain access to our unpatented technology. To protect our trade secrets and other proprietary information, we require employees, consultants, advisors, and collaborators to enter into confidentiality agreements. We cannot assure you that these agreements will provide meaningful protection for our trade secrets, know-how, or other proprietary information in the event of any unauthorized use, misappropriation, or disclosure of such trade secrets, know-how, or other proprietary information. Further, the theft or unauthorized use or publication of our trade secrets and other confidential business information could reduce the differentiation of our services and harm our business, the value of our investment in development or business acquisitions could be reduced, and third parties might make claims against us related to losses of their confidential or proprietary information.

          We rely on our trademarks, service marks, trade names, and brand names to distinguish our services from the services of our competitors, and have registered or applied to register many of these trademarks. We cannot assure you that our trademark applications will be approved. Third parties may also oppose our trademark applications, or otherwise challenge our use of the trademarks. In the event that our trademarks are successfully challenged, we could be forced to rebrand our services, which could result in loss of brand recognition and could require us to devote resources advertising and marketing new brands. Further, we cannot assure you that competitors will not infringe our trademarks or that we will have adequate resources to enforce our trademarks.

Our ability to obtain, protect, and enforce our intellectual property rights is subject to uncertainty as to the scope of protection, registerability, patentability, validity, and enforceability of our intellectual property rights in each applicable jurisdiction, as well as the risk of general litigation or third-party oppositions.

          Existing U.S. federal and state intellectual property laws offer only limited protection. Moreover, if we expand our business into markets outside of the United States, our intellectual property rights may not receive the same degree of protection as they would in the United States because of the differences in foreign trademark and other laws concerning proprietary rights. Governments may adopt regulations, and government agencies or courts may render decisions, requiring compulsory licensing of intellectual property rights. When we seek to enforce our intellectual property rights we

27


Table of Contents

may be subject to claims that the intellectual property rights are invalid or unenforceable. Litigation may be necessary in the future to enforce our intellectual property rights and to protect our trade secrets. Litigation brought to protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could be costly, time consuming, and distracting to management and could result in the impairment or loss of portions of our intellectual property rights. Furthermore, our efforts to enforce our intellectual property rights may be met with defenses, counterclaims, and countersuits attacking the validity and enforceability of our intellectual property rights. Our inability to protect our proprietary technology against unauthorized copying or use, as well as any costly litigation or diversion of our management's attention and resources, could delay further sales or the implementation of our solutions, impair the functionality of our solutions, delay introductions of new solutions, result in our substituting inferior or more costly technologies into our solutions, or have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

Our services could become subject to new, revised, or enhanced regulatory requirements in the future, which could result in increased costs, could delay or prevent our introduction of new services, or could impair the function or value of our existing services, which could materially and adversely affect our results of operations and growth prospects.

          The healthcare industry is highly regulated on the federal, state, and local levels, and is subject to changing legislative, regulatory, political, and other influences. Changes to existing laws and regulations, or the enactment of new federal and state laws and regulations affecting the healthcare industry, could create unexpected liabilities for us, could cause us or our clients to incur additional costs, and could restrict our or our clients' operations.

          Many healthcare laws are complex, subject to frequent change, and dependent on interpretation and enforcement decisions from government agencies with broad discretion. The application of these laws to us, our clients, or the specific services and relationships we have with our clients is not always clear. In addition, federal and state legislatures have periodically considered programs to reform or amend the U.S. healthcare system at both the federal and state level, such as the enactment of the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act and the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010, or the Affordable Care Act or ACA. Our failure to anticipate accurately the application of these laws and similar or future laws and regulations, or our failure to comply with them, could create liability for us, result in adverse publicity, and negatively affect our business.

          Our services may become subject to new or enhanced regulatory requirements, and we may be required to change or adapt our services in order to comply with these regulations. For example, the introduction of the new ICD-10 coding framework in 2015, pursuant to which physicians are expected to characterize the specific conditions of patients among more than 90,000 discrete descriptions (up from nearly 15,000 discrete descriptions under the existing ICD-9 framework), could present additional challenges for our business, including requiring us to allocate resources to training and upgrading our systems. If we fail to successfully implement the new ICD-10 coding framework, it could adversely affect our ability to offer services deemed critical by our clients, which could materially and adversely affect our results of operations. New or enhanced regulatory requirements may render our services obsolete or prevent us from performing certain services. New or enhanced regulatory requirements could impose additional costs on us, and thereby make existing services unprofitable, and could make the introduction of new services more costly or time-consuming than we anticipate, which could materially and adversely affect our results of operations and growth prospects.

          Because personal, public, and non-public information is stored in some of our databases, we are vulnerable to government regulation and adverse publicity concerning the use of our data. We provide many types of data and services that already are subject to regulation under HIPAA and, to

28


Table of Contents

a lesser extent, various other federal, state, and local laws and regulations. These laws and regulations are designed to protect the privacy of the public and to prevent the misuse of personal information in the marketplace. However, many consumer advocates, privacy advocates, and government regulators believe that the existing laws and regulations do not adequately protect privacy. They have become increasingly concerned with the use of personal information, including health information. As a result, they are lobbying for further restrictions on the dissemination or commercial use of personal information to the public and private sectors. Similar initiatives are under way in other countries in which we may do business in the future. The following legal and regulatory developments also could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial position, results of operations, or cash flows:

    amendment, enactment, or interpretation of laws and regulations that restrict the access and use of personal information and reduce the supply of data available to clients;

    changes in cultural and consumer attitudes to favor further restrictions on information collection and sharing, which may lead to regulations that prevent full utilization of our solutions;

    failure of our solutions to comply with current laws and regulations; and

    failure of our solutions to adapt to changes in the regulatory environment in an efficient, cost-effective manner.

Laws regulating the corporate practice of medicine could restrict the manner in which we provide our clients certain of our intervention toolsets, and the failure to comply with such laws could subject us to penalties or require that we change the manner in which we provide such toolsets.

          Among our intervention toolsets are supplemental patient encounters, or SPEs. While some clients utilize our platform toolsets to conduct their own SPEs directly or through third-parties, some of our clients engage us to utilize our intervention platform toolsets to facilitate SPEs. In such cases, we use third-parties to undertake such SPEs utilizing our intervention platform toolsets or may utilize our own associate to undertake such SPEs. Certain of our SPEs may be considered patient care. Some states have laws that prohibit business entities from practicing medicine, employing providers to practice medicine, exercising control over medical decisions by providers (also known collectively as the corporate practice of medicine). These laws, regulations, and interpretations have, in certain states, been subject to enforcement, as well as judicial and regulatory interpretation, and are subject to change.

          In these states, we operate by maintaining long term contracts with affiliated physician groups, which are each owned and operated by physicians and which employ or contract with additional providers to perform the SPEs, If there were a determination that a corporate practice of medicine violation existed or exists, we could be subject to criminal or civil penalties or an injunction for practicing medicine without a license or aiding and abetting the unlicensed practice of medicine. The occurrence of any of such events could have a material adverse effect on our ability to continue to provide our clients with the full array of our intervention toolsets.

We could experience losses or liability not covered by insurance.

          Our business exposes us to risks that are inherent in the provision of analytics and toolsets that assist clinical decision-making and relate to patient medical histories and treatment plans. If clients or individuals assert liability claims against us, any ensuing litigation, regardless of outcome, could result in a substantial cost to us, divert management's attention from operations, and decrease market acceptance of our toolsets. We attempt to limit our liability to clients by contract;

29


Table of Contents

however, the limitations of liability set forth in the contracts may not be enforceable or may not otherwise protect us from liability for damages. Additionally, we may be subject to claims that are not explicitly covered by contract. We also maintain general liability coverage; however, this coverage may not continue to be available on acceptable terms, may not be available in sufficient amounts to cover one or more large claims against us, and may include larger self-insured retentions or exclusions for certain products. In addition, the insurer might disclaim coverage as to any future claim. A successful claim not fully covered by our insurance could have a material adverse impact on our liquidity, financial condition, and results of operations.

We could incur substantial costs as a result of any claim of infringement of another party's intellectual property rights.

          In recent years, there has been significant litigation in the United States involving patents and other intellectual property rights. Companies in the software and healthcare technology and services industries are increasingly bringing and becoming subject to suits alleging infringement of proprietary rights, particularly patent rights, and our competitors and other third parties may hold patents or have pending patent applications which could be related to our business. These risks have been amplified by the increase in third parties, which we refer to as non-practicing entities, whose primary business is to assert infringement claims or make royalty demands. Moreover, many of our current and potential competitors may dedicate substantially greater resources to protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights, especially patents. It is difficult to proceed with certainty in a rapidly evolving technological environment in which there may be patent applications pending related to our technologies, many of which are confidential when filed.

          We may receive in the future notices that claim we or our clients using our services have misappropriated or misused other parties' intellectual property rights, particularly as the number of competitors in our market grows and the functionality of services among competitors overlaps. If we are sued by a third party that claims that our technology infringes its rights, the litigation, whether or not successful, could be extremely costly to defend, divert our management's time, attention, and resources, damage our reputation and brand, and substantially harm our business. We do not currently have a patent portfolio of our own, which may limit the defenses available to us in any such litigation.

          In addition, in most instances, we have agreed to indemnify our clients against certain third-party claims, which may include claims that one of our services infringes the intellectual property rights of such third parties. These claims may require us to initiate or defend protracted and costly litigation on behalf of our clients, regardless of the merits of these claims. If any of these claims succeed, we may be forced to pay damages on behalf of our clients or may be required to obtain licenses for the products they use. If we cannot obtain all necessary licenses on commercially reasonable terms, our customers may be forced to stop using our services. In addition, our business could be adversely affected by any significant disputes between us and our clients as to the applicability or scope of our indemnification obligations to them. The results of any intellectual property litigation to which we might become a party, or for which we are required to provide indemnification, may also require us to do one or more of the following:

    cease offering or using technologies that incorporate the challenged intellectual property;

    make substantial payments for legal fees, settlement payments, or other costs or damages;

    obtain a license, which may not be available on reasonable terms, to sell or use the relevant technology; or

    redesign technology to avoid infringement, if feasible.

30


Table of Contents

          If we were to discover that our applications and services violate third-party proprietary rights, there can be no assurance that we would be able to obtain licenses to continue offering those applications and services on commercially reasonable terms, or at all, to redesign our technology to avoid infringement, or to avoid or settle litigation regarding alleged infringement without substantial expense and damage awards. Any claims against us relating to the infringement of third-party proprietary rights, even if not meritorious, could result in the expenditure of significant financial and managerial resources and in injunctions preventing us from distributing certain products. If we are required to make substantial payments or undertake any of the other actions noted above as a result of any intellectual property infringement claims against us or any obligation to indemnify our clients for such claims, such payments or costs could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

We depend on our senior management team and other key employees, and the loss of one or more of our executive officers or key employees could materially and adversely affect our business.

          Our success depends in large part upon the continued services of our key executive officers, including Dr. Dunleavy. We also rely on our leadership team in the areas of research and development, marketing, services, and general and administrative functions. We can provide no assurances that any of our executive officers or key employees will continue their employment with us. The replacement of one or more of our executive officers or other key employees would likely involve significant time and costs and may significantly delay or prevent the achievement of our business objectives.

We may fail to attract, train, and retain enough qualified employees to support our operations and growth strategy, which could materially and adversely affect our business and growth strategy.

          The success of our business and growth strategy depends on our ability to attract, train, and retain qualified employees, particularly technology personnel, subject matter experts, sales and marketing leadership and support personnel, and personnel with healthcare regulatory, clinical, and appropriate management expertise. The market for qualified employees in our industry and in the markets in which we operate is very competitive, and companies that we compete with for experienced personnel may have greater resources than we. In addition, our ability to attract and retain qualified employees depends in part on our ability to maintain awareness of our brand. If we are not successful in our recruiting efforts, or if we are unable to train and retain a sufficient number of qualified employees, our ability to develop and deliver successful technologies and services and grow our business may be materially and adversely affected.

We may acquire other companies or technologies, which could divert our management's attention, result in dilution to our stockholders and otherwise disrupt our operations and adversely affect our operating results.

          We may in the future seek to acquire or invest in businesses, services, or technologies that we believe could complement or expand our services, enhance our technical capabilities, or otherwise offer growth opportunities. The pursuit of potential acquisitions may divert the attention of management and cause us to incur various expenses in identifying, investigating, and pursuing suitable acquisitions, whether or not they are consummated. Acquisitions also could result in dilutive issuances of equity securities or the incurrence of debt, which could adversely affect our operating results and financial condition. In addition, we have limited experience in acquiring other businesses. If we acquire additional businesses, we may not be able to integrate the acquired personnel, operations, and technologies successfully, or effectively manage the combined business

31


Table of Contents

following the acquisition. We also may not achieve the anticipated benefits from the acquired business due to a number of factors, including:

    inability or difficulty integrating and benefiting from acquired technologies, services, or clients in a profitable manner;

    unanticipated costs or liabilities associated with the acquisition;

    difficulty integrating the accounting systems, operations, and personnel of the acquired business;

    adverse effects to our existing business relationships with business partners and clients as a result of the acquisition;

    assuming potential liabilities of an acquired company;

    possibility of overpaying for acquisitions, particularly those with significant intangibles and those assets that derive value using novel tools or are involved in niche markets;

    difficulty in acquiring suitable businesses, including challenges in predicting the value an acquisition will ultimately contribute to our business;

    the potential loss of key employees;

    use of substantial portions of our available cash to consummate the acquisition; and

    the need to understand local healthcare regulatory regimes.

          If an acquired business fails to meet our expectations, our operating results, business, and financial condition may suffer materially.

          In addition, a significant portion of the purchase price of companies we acquire may be allocated to acquired goodwill and other intangible assets, which must be assessed for impairment at least annually. In the future, if our acquisitions do not yield expected returns, we may be required to take charges to our operating results based on this impairment assessment process, which could adversely affect our results of operations.

Our use of accounting estimates involves judgment and could adversely impact our financial results, and ineffective internal controls could adversely impact our business and operating results.

          The methods, estimates, and judgments that we use in applying accounting policies have a significant impact on our results of operations. For more information on our critical accounting policies and estimates, see "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. These methods, estimates, and judgments are subject to significant risks, uncertainties, and assumptions, and changes could affect our results of operations. In addition, our internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements because of the inherent limitations, including the possibility of human error, the circumvention or overriding of controls, or fraud. Even effective internal controls can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to the preparation and fair presentation of our consolidated financial statements.

32


Table of Contents

As a result of becoming a public company, we will be obligated to report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting. These internal controls may not be determined to be effective, which may harm investor confidence in our company and, as a result, the trading price of our Class A common stock.

          We will be required, pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, or the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, to furnish a report by management on, among other things, the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting in the second annual report we file with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the SEC. This assessment will need to include disclosure of material weaknesses, if any, identified by our management in our internal control over financial reporting. However, as an "emerging growth company," as defined in the JOBS Act, our independent registered public accounting firm will not be required to formally attest to the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act until the later of the year following our first annual report required to be filed with the SEC, or the date we are no longer an emerging growth company. At such time, our independent registered public accounting firm may issue a report that is adverse in the event it is not satisfied with the level at which our controls are documented, designed or operating. Any failure of our internal control over financial reporting to be effective or our failure to implement required new or improved controls, if any, or difficulties encountered in their implementation, may harm our operating results, cause us to fail to meet our reporting obligations, and negatively impact the trading price of our Class A common stock.

We are an emerging growth company and we cannot be certain that the reduced disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies will not make our Class A common stock less attractive to investors.

          We are an emerging growth company, as defined under the JOBS Act. For as long as we continue to be an emerging growth company, we intend to take advantage of certain exemptions from various reporting requirements that are applicable to other public companies including, but not limited to, reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements and exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and stockholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. We cannot predict if investors will find our Class A common stock less attractive because we will rely on these exemptions. If some investors find our Class A common stock less attractive as a result, there may be a less active trading market for our Class A common stock and our stock price may be more volatile.

          We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest of (i) the end of the fiscal year in which the market value of our Class A common stock that is held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of June 30, (ii) the end of the fiscal year in which we have total annual gross revenue of $1 billion or more during such fiscal year, (iii) the date on which we issue more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt in a three-year period, or (iv) December 31, 2020, which is the last day of the fiscal year following five years from the date of this prospectus.

Our Board of Directors may change our strategies, policies, and procedures without stockholder approval and we may become more highly leveraged, which may increase our risk of default under our debt obligations.

          Our investment, financing, leverage, and dividend policies, and our policies with respect to all other activities, including growth, capitalization, and operations, are determined exclusively by our board of directors, and may be amended or revised at any time by our board of directors without notice to or a vote of our stockholders. This could result in us conducting operational matters, making investments, or pursuing different business or growth strategies than those contemplated in

33


Table of Contents

this prospectus. Further, our charter and bylaws do not limit the amount or percentage of indebtedness, funded or otherwise, that we may incur. Higher leverage also increases the risk of default on our obligations. In addition, a change in our investment policies, including the manner in which we allocate our resources across our portfolio or the types of assets in which we seek to invest, may increase our exposure to interest rate risk and liquidity risk. Changes to our policies with regards to the foregoing could materially adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations, and cash flow.

Future sales to clients outside the United States or with international operations might expose us to risks inherent in international sales which, if realized, could adversely affect our business.

          An element of our growth strategy is to expand internationally. Operating in international markets requires significant resources and management attention and will subject us to regulatory, economic, and political risks that are different from those in the United States. Because of our limited experience with international operations, any international expansion efforts might not be successful in creating demand for our services outside of the United States or in effectively selling our services in the international markets we enter. In addition, we will face risks in doing business internationally that could adversely affect our business, including:

    the need to localize and adapt our services for specific countries, including translation into foreign languages and associated expenses;

    difficulties in staffing and managing foreign operations;

    different pricing environments, longer sales cycles, and longer accounts receivable payment cycles and collections issues;

    new and different sources of competition;

    weaker protection for intellectual property and other legal rights than in the United States and practical difficulties in enforcing intellectual property and other rights outside of the United States;

    laws and business practices favoring local competitors;

    compliance challenges related to the complexity of multiple, conflicting, and changing governmental laws and regulations, including employment, anti-bribery, foreign investment, tax, privacy, and data protection laws and regulations;

    increased financial accounting and reporting burdens and complexities;

    adverse tax consequences; and

    if we denominate our international contracts in local currencies, fluctuations in the value of the U.S. dollar and foreign currencies might impact our operating results when translated into U.S. dollars.

Our business could be harmed by disruptions in network service or operational failures at our data centers (including our co-location facility) related to the storage, transmission and presentation of client data.

          Our success depends on the efficient and uninterrupted operation of our data centers and service provider locations. Interruptions in service or damage to locations may be caused by natural disasters, power loss, Internet or network failures, physical damage, operator error, security breaches, computer viruses, denial-of-service attacks, or similar events. The varied types and severity of the interruptions that could occur may render our safeguards inadequate. These service

34


Table of Contents

interruption events could result in the corruption or loss of data and impair the processing of data and our delivery of services to clients, which could have an adverse effect on our business, operations, and financial results. Furthermore, if any of our data centers are unable to keep up with our growing needs for capacity, it could have an adverse effect on our business.

          Problems faced by our third-party data center location, with the telecommunications network providers with whom we or it contract, or with the systems by which our telecommunications providers allocate capacity among their clients, including us, could adversely affect the experience of our clients and the security of the data.

          Further, our ability to deliver our cloud-based services depends on the infrastructure of the Internet and a reliable network with the necessary speed, data capacity, bandwidth capacity, and security. Our services are designed to operate without interruption in accordance with our service level commitments. We have, however, experienced, and may experience in the future, interruptions and delays in services and availability from time to time. An extended period of network unavailability could negatively impact our ability to deliver acceptable or accurate services, and negatively impact our relationship with clients, which could have an adverse effect on our reputation, financial condition, and results of operations.

We rely on agreements with third parties to provide certain services, goods, technology, and intellectual property rights necessary to enable us to implement some of our applications.

          Our ability to implement and provide our applications and services to our clients depends, in part, on services, goods, technology, and intellectual property rights owned or controlled by third parties, including one vendor from whom we purchase significant components of our storage architecture. These third parties may become unable to or refuse to continue to provide these services, goods, technology, or intellectual property rights on commercially reasonable terms consistent with our business practices, or otherwise discontinue a service important for us to continue to operate our applications. If we fail to replace these services, goods, technologies, or intellectual property rights in a timely manner or on commercially reasonable terms, our operating results and financial condition could be harmed. In addition, we exercise limited control over our third-party vendors, which increases our vulnerability to problems with technology and services those vendors provide. If the services, technology, or intellectual property of third parties were to fail to perform as expected, it could subject us to potential liability, adversely affect our renewal rates, and have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

Our reliance on third-party vendors to perform certain of our intervention toolsets could have an adverse effect on our business, results of operations and growth prospects.

          We rely in part on third-party vendors to perform certain of our intervention toolsets, including supplemental patient encounters such as in-home encounters. These third parties may not perform their obligations to us in a timely and cost-effective manner, in compliance with applicable regulations, or in a manner that is in our and our clients' best interests, which could have an adverse effect on our reputation and our ability to retain and attract clients. In addition, our growth depends in part on the ability of our third-party vendors to leverage our intervention toolsets to a larger group of clients. If our third-party vendors do not perform their services at a level acceptable to us or our clients or if they are unable to leverage our intervention toolsets to a larger group of clients, it could have an adverse effect on our business, results of operations, and growth prospects.

35


Table of Contents

Risks Related to Our Class A Common Stock and this Offering

Our quarterly operating results may fluctuate significantly, which could adversely impact the value of our Class A common stock.

          Our quarterly results of operations, including our revenue, gross margin, net income, and cash flows, may vary significantly in the future, and sequential quarter-to-quarter comparisons of our operating results may not be meaningful. In addition to the other risk factors included in this section, some of the important factors that may cause sequential quarter-to-quarter fluctuations in our operating results include:

    seasonal variations driven primarily by regulatory timelines cause a significantly higher proportion of our services to be performed, and therefore revenues and costs to be recognized, during the second and, to a lesser extent, the fourth quarters of the year compared to the first and, most significantly, the third quarter;

    possible delays in the expected recognition of revenue due to lengthy and sometimes unpredictable sales and implementation timelines;

    the amount and timing of operating expenses related to the maintenance and expansion of our business, operations, and infrastructure;

    the timing and success of introductions of new applications and services by us or our competitors or any other change in the competitive dynamics of our industry, including consolidation among competitors, clients, or strategic partners;

    the addition or loss of large clients, including through acquisitions or consolidations of such clients;

    network outages or security breaches;

    our ability to attract new clients;

    general economic, industry, and market conditions;

    client renewal rates and the timing and terms of client renewals;

    changes in our pricing policies or those of our competitors;

    the mix of applications and services sold during a period; and

    the timing of expenses related to the development or acquisition of technologies or businesses.

          Any fluctuations in our quarterly operating results may not accurately reflect the underlying longer-term performance of our business and could cause a decline in the trading price of our Class A common stock.

Because the dual class structure of our common stock has the effect of concentrating voting control with holders of our Class B common stock, holders of our Class B common stock, including Dr. Dunleavy and Mr. Hoffmann, will continue to have significant influence over us after this offering, including control over decisions that require the approval of stockholders, which could limit your ability to influence the outcome of matters submitted to stockholders for a vote.

          We are currently controlled, and after this offering is completed will continue to be controlled, by holders of our Class B common stock. Upon completion of this offering, holders of our Class B common stock will beneficially own an aggregate of         % of the voting power of our common stock (or          % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares). In

36


Table of Contents

particular, Dr. Dunleavy will beneficially own an aggregate of         % (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares), and Mr. Hoffmann will beneficially own an aggregate of         % (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares). The shares beneficially owned by Dr. Dunleavy and Mr. Hoffmann and other current stockholders are shares of Class B common stock, which have 10 votes per share, whereas each share of Class A common stock to be sold in this offering has one vote per share. As long as holders of our Class B common stock control at least a majority of the voting power of our outstanding common stock, they will have the ability to exercise substantial control over all corporate actions requiring stockholder approval, irrespective of how our other stockholders may vote, including the election and removal of directors and the size of our board of directors, any amendment of our certificate of incorporation or bylaws, or the approval of any merger or other significant corporate transaction, including a sale of all or substantially all of our assets. Even if their ownership falls below 50%, holders of our Class B common stock will continue to be able to exert significant influence or effectively control our decisions because of the dual class structure of our common stock. This concentrated control by our Class B common stockholders will limit or preclude your ability to influence those corporate matters for the foreseeable future and, as a result, we may take actions that holders of our Class A common stock do not view as beneficial. This dual class structure may adversely affect the market price of our Class A common stock. In addition, this structure may prevent or discourage unsolicited acquisition proposals or offers for our capital stock that you may feel are in your best interest as one of our stockholders.

An active, liquid trading market for our Class A common stock may not develop, which may limit your ability to sell your shares at or above the initial public offering price.

          Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. Although we have applied to have our Class A common stock listed on the NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol "INOV," an active trading market for our Class A common stock may never develop or be sustained following this offering. The initial public offering price will be determined by negotiations between us and the underwriters and may not be indicative of market prices of our Class A common stock that will prevail in the open market after this offering. A public trading market having the desirable characteristics of depth, liquidity, and orderliness depends upon the existence of willing buyers and sellers at any given time, such existence being dependent upon the individual decisions of buyers and sellers over which neither we nor any market maker has control. The failure of an active and liquid trading market to develop and be sustained would likely have a material adverse effect on the value of our Class A common stock. The market price of our Class A common stock may decline below the initial public offering price, and you may not be able to sell your shares of our Class A common stock at or above the price you paid in this offering, or at all. An inactive market may also impair our ability to raise capital to continue to fund operations by selling shares and may impair our ability to acquire other companies or technologies by using our shares as consideration.

We will incur significantly increased costs and devote substantial management time as a result of operating as a public company.

          As a public company, we will incur significant legal, accounting, stockholder communication, and other expenses that we did not incur as a private company. For example, we will be subject to the reporting requirements of the Exchange Act and will be required to comply with the applicable requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, as well as rules and regulations subsequently implemented by the SEC, and the NASDAQ Stock Market LLC, or NASDAQ, including the establishment and maintenance of effective disclosure and financial controls, changes in corporate governance practices, and required filing of annual, quarterly, and current reports with respect to our business and operating results. We expect

37


Table of Contents

that compliance with these requirements will increase our legal and financial compliance costs and will make some activities more time consuming and costly. In addition, we expect that our management and other personnel will need to divert attention from operational and other business matters to devote substantial time to these public company requirements. In particular, we expect to incur significant expenses and devote substantial management effort toward ensuring compliance with the requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, which will increase when we are no longer an emerging growth company, as defined by the JOBS Act. We may also need to hire additional accounting and financial staff with appropriate public company experience and technical accounting knowledge. Furthermore, we expect that the expenses necessary to communicate with our stockholders, the financial community, public relations audiences, and other such similar audiences will be significantly more than any such similar expenses have historically been for us.

          We also expect that operating as a public company will make it more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain coverage. This could also make it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified people to serve on our board of directors, our board committees, or as executive officers.

          Furthermore, if we are unable to satisfy our obligations as a public company, we could be subject to delisting of our Class A common stock, fines, sanctions, and other regulatory action and potentially civil litigation, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

The stock price of our Class A common stock may be volatile or may decline regardless of our operating performance, and you may not be able to resell your shares at or above the initial public offering price.

          The market price of our Class A common stock may fluctuate significantly. These fluctuations could cause you to lose all or part of your investment in our common stock since you might be unable to sell your shares at or above the price you paid in this offering. Factors, many of which are beyond our control, that could cause fluctuations in the market price of our Class A common stock include the following:

    overall performance of the equity markets;

    our operating performance and the performance of other similar companies;

    changes in the market valuations of similar companies;

    changes in our capital structure, such as future issuances of securities or the incurrence of debt;

    changes in the estimates of our operating results that we provide to the public or our failure to meet these projections;

    failure of securities analysts to maintain coverage of us, changes in financial estimates by securities analysts who follow our company, or our failure to meet these estimates or the expectations of investors or changes in recommendations by securities analysts that elect to follow our Class A common stock;

    sales of shares of our Class B common stock by our stockholders upon expiration of the market stand-off under our Stockholders' Agreement or contractual lock-up agreements with the underwriters;

    announcements of technological innovations, new services or enhancements to services, acquisitions, strategic alliances, or significant agreements by us or by our competitors;

38


Table of Contents

    disruptions in our services due to computer hardware, software, or network problems or a security breach;

    announcements of client additions and client cancellations or delays in client purchases;

    recruitment or departure of key personnel;

    the economy as a whole or market conditions in our industry and the industries of our clients;

    litigation involving us, our industry, or both, or investigations by regulators into our operations or those of our competitors;

    developments or disputes concerning our intellectual property or other proprietary rights;

    new laws or regulations, or new interpretations of existing laws or regulations, applicable to our business;

    the size of our market float; and

    any other factors discussed in this prospectus.

          In addition, the stock markets have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations that have affected and continue to affect the market prices of equity securities of many technology companies. Stock prices of many technology companies have fluctuated in a manner unrelated or disproportionate to the operating performance of those companies. In the past, stockholders have filed securities class action litigation following periods of market volatility. If we were to become involved in securities litigation, it could subject us to substantial costs, divert resources and the attention of management from our business, and materially adversely affect our business.

We do not currently intend to pay dividends on our common stock and, consequently, your ability to achieve a return on your investment will depend on appreciation in the price of our Class A common stock.

          Although we have paid cash dividends on our common stock in the past, we currently intend to invest any future earnings to finance the operation and growth of our business and do not expect to pay any dividends for the foreseeable future. As a result, the success of an investment in shares of our Class A common stock will depend upon future appreciation in its value, if any, and there is no guarantee that shares of our Class A common stock will appreciate in value or even maintain the price at which our stockholders purchase their shares in this offering.

If you purchase shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, you will experience immediate and substantial dilution of your investment.

          The initial public offering price will be substantially higher than the net tangible book value of each outstanding share of common stock immediately after this offering. If you purchase shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, you will suffer immediate and substantial dilution. At the initial public offering price of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the price range on the cover of this prospectus, with net proceeds to us of $              million, after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses, investors who purchase shares in this offering from us will have contributed approximately         % of the total amount of funding we have received to date. The dilution will be $             per share in the net tangible book value of the common stock from the initial public offering price. In addition, if outstanding options to purchase shares of our common stock are exercised, there could be further dilution. For more information refer to "Dilution."

39


Table of Contents

A significant portion of our total outstanding shares are restricted from immediate resale but may be sold into the market in the near future when "market standoff" and contractual lock-up periods end, which could cause the market price of our common stock to decline significantly, even if our business is doing well.

          Sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market could occur at any time. These sales, or the perception in the market that the holders of a large number of shares intend to sell shares, could reduce the market price of our common stock. After this offering, we will have outstanding shares of Class A common stock (assuming no exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares). All of the shares of our Class B common stock (including any shares converted by the holders thereof to shares of Class A common stock) are subject to a 180-day market stand-off agreement provided under our Stockholders' Agreement or contractual lock-up agreements with the underwriters, pursuant to which holders have agreed, subject to specific exceptions, not to sell, dispose of, or transfer their shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus. We also intend to file a Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register all shares of common stock that we may issue under our equity compensation plans, and we have entered into the second amended and restated stockholders' agreement with the existing holders of our common stock, including certain of our executive officers and directors, that provides them with registration rights. Once we register these shares, they can be freely sold in the public market upon issuance, subject to the lock-up and market stand-off agreements described in the "Underwriting" section of this prospectus. As restrictions on resale end, the market price of our stock could decline if the holders of currently restricted shares sell them or are perceived by the market as intending to sell them. See the information under the heading "Shares Eligible For Future Sale" and "Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions — Stockholders' Agreement" for a more detailed description of the shares of common stock that will be available for future sale upon completion of this offering.

Delaware law and provisions in our restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws that will be in effect at the closing of our initial public offering could make a merger, tender offer, or proxy contest difficult, thereby depressing the trading price of our Class A common stock.

          Following the closing of our initial public offering, our status as a Delaware corporation and the anti-takeover provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law may discourage, delay, or prevent a change in control by prohibiting us from engaging in a business combination with an interested stockholder (generally a stockholder, who together with affiliates and associates, owns 15% or more of our voting rights) for a period of three years after the person becomes an interested stockholder, even if a change of control would be beneficial to our existing stockholders. In addition, our restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws that will be in effect at the closing of this offering will contain provisions that may make the acquisition of our company more difficult, including the following:

    we have a dual class common stock structure, which could provide the holders of our Class B common stock, including our executive officers, directors, and their affiliates, with the ability to control the outcome of matters requiring stockholder approval, even if they own significantly less than a majority of the shares of our outstanding Class A and Class B common stock;

    when the outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represent less than 10% of the total outstanding shares of our common stock, certain amendments to our restated bylaws will require the approval of two-thirds of the voting power of our then-outstanding shares of common stock;

40


Table of Contents

    when the outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represent less than 10% of the total outstanding shares of our common stock, vacancies on our board of directors will be able to be filled only by our board of directors and not by stockholders;

    when the outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represent less than 10% of the total outstanding shares of our common stock, our board of directors will be classified into three classes of directors with staggered three-year terms and directors will only be able to be removed from office for cause;

    when the outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represent less than 10% of the total outstanding shares of our common stock, our stockholders will only be able to take action at a meeting of stockholders and not by written consent;

    only our chairman, our chief executive officer, a majority of our board of directors, or stockholders holding shares representing at least 50% of the combined voting power of our Class A common Stock and Class B common stock will be authorized to call a special meeting of stockholders until the outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represent less than 10% of the total outstanding shares of our common stock, at which time only our chairman, our chief executive officer, or a majority of our board of directors will be authorized to call a special meeting of stockholders;

    advance notice procedures will apply for stockholders to nominate candidates for election as directors or to bring matters before an annual meeting of stockholders;

    our restated certificate of incorporation will authorize up to 100,000,000 shares of undesignated preferred stock, the terms of which may be established, and shares of which may be issued, without stockholder approval; and

    certain litigation against us can only be brought in Delaware.

          For information regarding these and other provisions, see "Description of Capital Stock — Anti-Takeover Provisions."

If securities or industry analysts do not publish research or reports about our business, if they adversely change their recommendations regarding our shares, or if our results of operations do not meet their expectations, the share price and trading volume of our Class A common stock could decline.

          The trading market for our Class A common stock will be influenced by the research and reports that industry or securities analysts publish about us or our business. We do not have any control over these analysts. If one or more of these analysts cease coverage of our company or fail to publish reports on us regularly, we could lose visibility in the financial markets, which in turn could cause the share price or trading volume of our Class A common stock to decline. Moreover, if one or more of the analysts who cover us, express views regarding us that may be perceived as negative or less favorable than previous views, downgrade our stock, or if our results of operations do not meet their expectations, the share price of our Class A common stock could decline.

41


Table of Contents


SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

          This prospectus contains forward-looking statements. All statements contained in this prospectus other than statements of historical fact, including but not limited to statements regarding our future results of operations and financial position, our business strategy and plans, market growth, the use of the net proceeds from this offering and our objectives for future operations, are forward-looking statements. The words "believe," "may," "will," "estimate," "continue," "anticipate," "intend," "expect," and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. We have based these forward-looking statements largely on our current expectations and projections about future events and trends that we believe may affect our financial condition, results of operations, business strategy, short-term and long-term business operations and objectives and financial needs. These forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks, uncertainties and assumptions, including those described in the "Risk Factors" section. Moreover, we operate in a very competitive and rapidly changing environment. New risks emerge from time to time. It is not possible for our management to predict all risks, nor can we assess the impact of all factors on our business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, may cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements we may make. In light of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, the future events and trends discussed in this prospectus may not occur and actual results could differ materially and adversely from those anticipated or implied in the forward-looking statements.

          Factors that may cause actual results to differ from expected results include, among others:

    our future financial performance, including our ability to continue and manage our growth;

    our ability to retain our client base;

    the effect of the concentration of our revenue among our top clients;

    our ability to innovate and adapt our platforms and toolsets;

    the effects of regulations applicable to us, including regulations relating to data protection and data privacy;

    the ability to protect the privacy of our clients' data and prevent security breaches;

    the effect of competition on our business; and

    the efficacy of our platforms and toolsets.

          You should not rely upon forward-looking statements as predictions of future events. The events and circumstances reflected in the forward-looking statements may not be achieved or occur. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee future results, levels of activity, performance, or achievements. We are under no duty to, and we disclaim any obligation to, update any of these forward-looking statements after the date of this prospectus or to conform these statements to actual results or revised expectations.

42


Table of Contents


USE OF PROCEEDS

          We estimate that the net proceeds to us from the sale of shares of our Class A common stock in this offering will be approximately $              million (or $              million, assuming the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional shares in full), based on an assumed public offering price of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated price range set forth on the front cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

          The principal purposes of our initial public offering are to create a public market for our Class A common stock and thereby enable future access to the public equity markets by us and our employees, and obtain additional capital. We intend to use the net proceeds to us from this offering for working capital and other general corporate purposes; however, we do not currently have any specific uses of the net proceeds planned. Additionally, we may use a portion of the proceeds for acquisitions of complementary businesses, technologies, or other assets or to repay outstanding indebtedness.

          Our management will have broad discretion in the application of the net proceeds from this offering to us, and investors will be relying on the judgment of our management regarding the application of the proceeds. Pending their use, we plan to invest our net proceeds from this offering in short-term, interest-bearing obligations, investment-grade instruments, certificates of deposit, or direct or guaranteed obligations of the U.S. government.

43


Table of Contents


DIVIDEND POLICY

          Following the completion of this offering, our board of directors does not currently intend to declare and pay dividends on our common stock. However, our board of directors will periodically reevaluate our dividend policy following this offering and may determine to pay dividends in the future. Any future determination to declare cash dividends will be at the sole discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon various factors, including our results of operations, financial condition and liquidity requirements, restrictions that may be imposed by applicable law and our contracts, and other factors deemed relevant by our board of directors.

          The following table sets forth the cash dividends per share of our common stock that our board of directors declared during the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2013 and during the nine months ended September 30, 2014.

 
   
   
 
Nine
Months
Ended
September 30,
2014
 
 
 
Year Ended
December 31,
 
 
 
2012
 
2013
 

Dividends declared per share

  $ 1.81   $ 0.74   $  

44


Table of Contents


CAPITALIZATION

          The following table sets forth our cash and cash equivalents, as well as our consolidated capitalization as of September 30, 2014 as follows:

    on an actual basis;

    on an as-adjusted basis, giving effect to the sale and issuance by us of             shares of our class A common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

          You should read this information together with our consolidated financial statements and the related notes to those statements, and the sections titled "Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data" and "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" that are appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

 
  As of September 30, 2014  
 
 
Actual
 
As Adjusted(1)(2)
 
 
  (in thousands, except share
and per share data)

 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 131,947   $    
           
           

Long-term debt

  $ 285,191   $    

Stockholders' equity (deficit):

             

Common stock, $0.000025 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, actual and as adjusted; zero shares issued and outstanding, actual and as adjusted

           

Class A common stock, $0.000025 par value, 50,000,000 shares authorized, actual and as adjusted; 2,221,857 shares issued and zero outstanding, actual and         shares issued and         outstanding, as adjusted

           

Class B common stock, $0.000025 par value, 50,000,000 shares authorized, actual and as adjusted; 24,451,429 issued and outstanding, actual;                          shares issued and outstanding, as adjusted

    1        

Preferred stock, $0.0001 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, actual and as adjusted; zero shares issued and outstanding, actual and as adjusted

           

Additional paid-in-capital

    108,677        

Retained earnings

    167,978        

Treasury stock, at cost, 2,221,857 shares actual and zero shares as adjusted

    (300,017 )      
           

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    (23,361 )      
           

Total capitalization

  $ 261,830   $    
           
           

(1)
A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per share would increase (decrease) each of cash and cash equivalents, additional paid-in capital, retained earnings, total stockholders' equity (deficit), and total capitalization by $              million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the

45


Table of Contents

    cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions. If the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full, the as adjusted amount of each of cash and cash equivalents, additional paid-in capital, retained earnings total stockholders' equity (deficit), and total capitalization would increase by approximately $              million, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions.

(2)
The as adjusted information discussed above is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of our initial public offering determined at pricing.

          The number of shares shown as issued and outstanding in the table above does not include:

    1,290,255 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our common stock outstanding as of September 30, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $29.86 per share;

    97,756 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon vesting of restricted stock units granted subsequent to September 30, 2014; and

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

46


Table of Contents


DILUTION

          If you invest in our Class A common stock in this offering, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per share of our Class A common stock and the as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after this offering.

          Net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our tangible assets less our liabilities divided by the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding.

          Our as adjusted net tangible book value as of September 30, 2014 was $              million, or $             per share of common stock. As adjusted net tangible book value per share gives effect to the sale by us of             shares of our Class A common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $             per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the front cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. This represents an immediate increase in as adjusted net tangible book value of $             per share to existing stockholders and immediate dilution of $             per share to new investors purchasing shares in this offering.

          The following table illustrates this per share dilution:

Assumed initial public offering price per share

        $    

Net tangible book value per share as of September 30, 2014, before giving effect to this offering

  $          

Increase in net tangible book value per share attributable to investors purchasing shares in this offering

             
             

As adjusted net tangible book value per share, after giving effect to this offering

             
             

Dilution per share to investors in this offering

        $    
             
             

          Each $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per share of our Class A common stock, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus, would increase or decrease our as adjusted net tangible book value per share after this offering by $             and the dilution to new investors by $             per share, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the front cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Similarly, each increase or decrease of 1,000,000 shares in the number of shares of Class A common stock offered by us would increase or decrease the as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $             per share and the dilution to new investors by $             per share, assuming the assumed initial public offering price remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated expenses payable by us.

          If the underwriters exercise their option to purchase             additional shares of Class A common stock in full, the as adjusted net tangible book value per share after this offering would be $             per share, and the dilution in as adjusted net tangible book value per share to new investors in this offering would be $             per share.

          The following table summarizes, on a as adjusted basis as of September 30, 2014, the differences between the number of shares of common stock purchased from us, the total cash consideration and the average price per share paid to us by existing stockholders and by new investors             purchasing shares in this offering, at the initial public offering price of $             per

47


Table of Contents

share, before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions, and estimated offering expenses payable by us:

 
  Shares
Purchased
  Total
Consideration
   
 
 
 
Average
Price Per
Share
 
 
 
Number
 
Percent
 
Amount
 
Percent
 

Existing stockholders

            % $         % $    

New public investors

                          $    
                         

Total

          100 % $       100 %      
                         
                         

          Each $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per share of our Class A common stock, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the front cover page of this prospectus, would increase or decrease the total consideration paid by new investors by $              million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover of this prospectus, remains the same, and before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

          If the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares of our Class A common stock is exercised in full, the number of shares of common stock held by existing stockholders will be reduced to approximately         % of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering, and the number of shares of common stock held by investors participating in this offering will be further increased to             shares, or approximately         % of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering.

          The number of shares of Class A and Class B common stock shown as issued and outstanding in the table and discussion above is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 24,451,429 shares of our Class B common stock issued and outstanding as of September 30, 2014 and excludes:

    24,451,429 shares of Class A common stock issuable upon the conversion of shares of Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering;

    1,290,255 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our common stock outstanding as of September 30, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $29.86 per share;

    97,756 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon vesting of restricted stock units granted subsequent to September 30, 2014; and

                 shares of our Class A common stock available for future issuance under our 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

          To the extent that any outstanding options or warrants to purchase our common stock are exercised or new awards are granted under our equity compensation plans, or we issue additional shares of our common stock or convertible securities in the future, there will be further dilution to investors participating in this offering.

48


Table of Contents


SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

          The following table sets forth selected consolidated financial data for the years presented and at the dates indicated below. We have derived the selected consolidated statements of operations data for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2012 and 2013 from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2011 from our audited consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. The selected consolidated statement of operations data for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of September 30, 2014 have been derived from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of September 30, 2013 from our unaudited interim consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. In our opinion, such financial statements include all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, that we consider necessary for a fair presentation of the financial data set forth in those statements.

          Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of our results in any future periods, including the full years ending December 31, 2014. The summary of our consolidated financial data set forth below should be read together with our consolidated financial statements and related notes, as well as the sections entitled "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations," included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
  (in thousands, except per share data)
 

Consolidated Statement of Operations Data:

                               

Revenue

 
$

239,685
 
$

300,275
 
$

295,798
 
$

231,264
 
$

271,622
 

Expenses:

                               

Cost of revenue

    102,695     101,188     120,054     94,869     85,065  

Sales and marketing

    6,752     6,793     5,952     4,597     5,355  

Research and development

    14,855     15,499     21,192     16,171     17,376  

General and administrative           

    63,184     72,661     80,638     60,266     62,920  

Depreciation and amortization

    11,229     12,899     15,517     11,105     15,012  
                       

Total operating expenses

    198,715     209,040     243,353     187,008     185,728  
                       

Income from operations

    40,970     91,235     52,445     44,256     85,894  
                       

Other income and (expenses):

                               

Interest income

    10     11     9     6     4  

Interest expense

    (62 )   (129 )   (79 )   (61 )   (209 )
                       

Income before taxes

    40,918     91,117     52,375     44,201     85,689  

Provision for income taxes

    15,991     35,962     19,657     17,218     33,836  
                       

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983     51,853  
                       
                       

Basic net income per share

  $ 0.90   $ 2.00   $ 1.21   $ 1.00   $ 1.94  
                       
                       

Diluted net income per share

  $ 0.90   $ 1.98   $ 1.20   $ 0.99   $ 1.91  
                       
                       

Weighted average shares of common stock outstanding:

                               

Basic

    27,753     27,573     27,061     27,111     26,728  
                       
                       

Diluted

    27,771     27,808     27,275     27,346     27,167  
                       
                       

Other Financial Data:

                               

Adjusted EBITDA(1)

 
$

57,526
 
$

108,105
 
$

71,847
 
$

58,333
 
$

103,059
 

Adjusted EBITDA margin(1)

    24 %   36 %   24 %   25 %   38 %

49


Table of Contents

 
  December 31,   September 30,  
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
  (in thousands)
 

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

                               

Cash and cash equivalents

 
$

114,872
 
$

106,361
 
$

110,594
 
$

110,891
 
$

131,947
 

Accounts receivable, net of allowances

    36,764     62,899     33,398     43,233     52,037  

Working capital

    131,676     136,933     130,562     145,209     156,446  

Property, equipment and capitalized software, net

    28,089     34,170     43,050     40,561     49,126  

Goodwill

    62,269     62,269     62,269     62,269     62,269  

Total assets

    262,922     285,655     269,746     277,710     317,345  

Long-term debt

                    285,191  

Total liabilities

    33,817     48,826     38,012     32,471     340,706  

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    229,105     236,829     231,734     245,239     (23,361 )

(1)
We define Adjusted EBITDA as net income calculated in accordance with GAAP, adjusted for the impact of depreciation and amortization, interest expense, interest income, provision for income taxes, stock-based compensation, other non-comparable income and expenses, and certain legal costs. We use a variety of operating and other information to evaluate the operating performance of our business, develop financial forecasts, make strategic decisions, and prepare and approve our annual budgets. These key indicators include financial information that is prepared in accordance with GAAP and presented in our consolidated financial statements as well as Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin, both of which are non-GAAP metrics, to evaluate our business, measure our performance, develop financial forecasts and make strategic decisions. We have provided below a reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to net income, which is the most closely comparable non-GAAP financial measure. Adjusted EBITDA margin is our calculation of Adjusted EBITDA divided by revenue calculated in accordance with GAAP. We use Adjusted EBITDA as a supplemental measure of our performance to gain insight into our operating performance.


We use Adjusted EBITDA margin as a key metric to assess our ability to increase revenues while controlling expense growth and the scalability of our business model. We believe that the exclusion of the expenses eliminated in calculating Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin provides management and investors a useful measure for period-to-period comparisons of our core business and operating results by excluding items that are not comparable across reporting periods or that do not otherwise relate to our ongoing operating results. Accordingly, we believe that Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin provide useful information to investors and others in understanding and evaluating our operating results. However, our use of Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as analytical tools has limitations, and you should not consider them in isolation or as substitutes for analysis of our financial results as reported under GAAP. In addition, other companies, including companies in our industry, might calculate Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin or similarly titled measures differently, which may reduce their usefulness as comparative measures.


The following table presents a reconciliation of net income to Adjusted EBITDA for each of the periods indicated (dollars in thousands):

   
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
   
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 

Reconciliation of Net Income to Adjusted EBITDA:

                               
 

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  
 

Depreciation and amortization           

    11,229     12,899     15,517     11,105     15,012  
 

Interest expense

    62     129     79     61     209  
 

Interest (income)

    (10 )   (11 )   (9 )   (6 )   (4 )
 

Provision for income taxes        

    15,991     35,962     19,657     17,218     33,836  
                         
 
 

EBITDA

  $ 52,199   $ 104,134   $ 67,962   $ 55,361   $ 100,906  
 

Stock-based compensation        

    3,767     2,560     1,842     1,408     1,340  
 

Other non-comparable items(a)           

    1,560     1,411     1,565     1,564      
 

Professional service fees(b)

            478         813  
                         
 
 

Adjusted EBITDA

  $ 57,526   $ 108,105   $ 71,847   $ 58,333   $ 103,059  
                         
 
 
                         
    (a)
    Other "non-comparable items" include business transaction-related professional fees, corporate name change and associated rebranding expenses, workforce restructuring expenses, and certain legal costs. We believe these are non-comparable expenses that should be excluded from Adjusted EBITDA in order to more effectively assess our period-over-period and on-going operating performance.

    (b)
    Represents legal costs associated with the enforcement of a specific client contract. The legal process associated with this matter began in the first quarter of 2013 and concluded in the second quarter of 2014.

50


Table of Contents


MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

           The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with our "Selected Consolidated Financial Data" and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results could differ materially from those forward-looking statements below. Factors that could cause or contribute to those differences include, but are not limited to, those identified below and those discussed in the section entitled "Risk Factors" included elsewhere in this prospectus.


Overview

          We are a leading technology company that combines advanced cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms to achieve meaningful impact in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance across the healthcare landscape. We deliver value to our clients by turning data into insights and those insights into action. Currently, our clients include health plans, hospitals, physicians, patients, pharmaceutical companies and researchers.

          Our large proprietary datasets, advanced integration technologies, sophisticated predictive analytics, and deep subject matter expertise allow us to provide seamless, end-to-end platforms that bring the benefits of big data and large-scale analytics to the point of care. Our data analytics platforms identify gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance in our clients' datasets. Our data-driven intervention platforms enable our clients to take the insights derived from the analytics and implement unique, patient-level solutions, drive impact and enhance patient engagement.

          We generate the substantial majority of our revenue through the sale or subscription licensing of our data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services. Since our inception, we have experienced significant growth. During the most recent three years, our ability to deliver value to our customers through our advanced analytics and data-driven intervention platforms has allowed us to expand our revenue at a compounded annual growth rate of 19%, Adjusted EBITDA, at a compounded annual growth rate of 20%, and net income at a compounded annual growth rate of 33% despite a 1% revenue decrease during the year ended December 31, 2013 as compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, our revenue was $271.6 million, representing 17% growth over the same period of the prior year. In the same period, we generated Adjusted EBITDA of $103.1 million, representing a 38% Adjusted EBITDA margin and 77% growth over the same period in the prior year. Net income for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 was $51.9 million, representing 19% of revenue and a 92% increase over the same period in 2013. Adjusted EBITDA is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to net income, see "Selected Consolidated Financial Data."


Trends and Factors Affecting Our Future Performance

          A number of factors influence our growth and performance. We see many of these factors as being more quantitatively driven, such as the rate of growth of the underlying data counts within our datasets, the ongoing investment in innovation, the number of statement of work contracts maintained by us, and our level of analytical activity. Additionally, there are several factors that influence our growth and performance that are less quantitatively driven, including seasonality, macro-economic forces, and trends within healthcare (such as payment models, incentivization, and regulatory oversight), that can be driven by changes in federal and state laws and regulations, as well as private sector market forces.

          Growth of Datasets.     Healthcare costs in the United States have been increasing significantly for many years. This rise in healthcare costs has driven a broad transition from consumption-based

51


Table of Contents

payment models to quality and value-based payment models across the healthcare landscape. As a result, the specific disease and comorbidity status, clinical and quality outcomes, resource utilization, and care details of the individual patient have become increasingly relevant to the various constituents across the healthcare delivery system. Concurrently, the count and complexity of diseases, diagnostics, and treatments  — as well as payment models and regulatory oversight requirements  — have soared. In this setting, granular data has become critical to determining and improving quality and financial performance in healthcare. Our MORE 2 Registry is our largest principal dataset and serves as a proxy for our general growth of datasets within Inovalon. It has expanded at a rate of approximately 3.0% compounding monthly, or 43.3% annually, since 2000 as illustrated below. The growth of our datasets that inform our analytical capabilities and comparative analytics is a key aspect of our provision of value to our clients and is indicative of our overall growth and capabilities.

GRAPHIC

          For more information regarding the growth of our MORE 2 Registry, including our calculations of patient count and medical event count, see "Prospectus Summary — Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data."

          Innovation and Platform Development.     Our business model is based upon our ability to deliver value to our clients through the combination of advanced, cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms focused on the achievement of meaningful and measureable improvements in clinical quality outcomes and financial performance in healthcare. Our ability to deliver this value is dependent in part on our ability to continue to innovate, design new capabilities, and bring these capabilities to market in an enterprise scale. Our continued ability to innovate our platform and bring differentiated capabilities to market is an important aspect of our business success. Our investment in innovation includes costs for research and development, capitalized software development, and capital expenditures related to hardware and software

52


Table of Contents

platforms on which our data analytics and data-driven interventions capabilities are deployed as summarized below (in thousands, except percentages).

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
  Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 

Investment in Innovation

                               

Research and development(1)

  $ 14,855   $ 15,499   $ 21,192   $ 16,171   $ 17,376  

Capitalized software development(2)

    5,778     10,070     10,304     7,341     11,758  

Research and development infrastructure investments(3)

    421     1,759     3,565     2,853     4,567  
                       

Total investment in innovation

  $ 21,054   $ 27,328   $ 35,061   $ 26,365   $ 33,701  
                       
                       

As a percentage of revenue

                               

Research and development(1)

    6 %   5 %   7 %   7 %   6 %

Capitalized software development(2)

    2 %   3 %   3 %   3 %   4 %

Research and development infrastructure investments(3)

    0 %   1 %   1 %   1 %   2 %
                       

Total investment in innovation

    8 %   9 %   11 %   11 %   12 %
                       
                       

(1)
Research and development primarily includes employee costs related to the development and enhancement of our service offerings.

(2)
Capitalized software development includes capitalized costs incurred to develop and enhance functionality for our data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms.

(3)
Research and development infrastructure investments include strategic capital expenditures related to hardware and software platforms under development or enhancement.

          Data Analytics and Data-Driven Intervention Mix.     Our business and operational models are highly scalable and leverage variable costs to support revenue generating activities. Our data analytic service costs are less variable in nature and require lower incremental capital expenditures. As a result, following initial development and deployment investments, our big data analytics platform and data technology capabilities allow us to process significant volumes of transactions with lower incremental costs. Conversely, our data-driven intervention service costs are generally variable in nature and require incremental costs to generate additional revenue. As a result, the mix of our data analytics and data interventions activities affects our financial performance. Over the past several years the percentage of our business which is derived from data and analytics subscription fees has been increasing, as has the portion of the data-driven intervention platform services that are fully automated. The chart below illustrates the mix of revenue we have generated

53


Table of Contents

from data analytics subscriptions, fully automated data-driven intervention platform services, and partially automated data-driven intervention platform services for the periods presented.

GRAPHIC

          For more information regarding our data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services revenue mix, see "Prospectus Summary — Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data."

          Client and Analytical Process Count Growth.     Our business is generally driven by the number of underlying patients for which our analytics and data-driven intervention platforms are being utilized. In addition to this patient count, however, the number of specific analytical processes and data-driven interventions services for which any one specific patient population is engaged, is also a driver. As such, increasing the size, number, and analytical portfolio penetration of populations for which we provide our analytics and data-driven intervention platform services is important to the overall growth of our business. In general, as the application of our analytics and data-driven intervention platform services deliver value, our clients often engage with us to utilize additional analytics and data-driven intervention platform services. Our ability to deliver demonstrable value, retain clients, add new clients, and realize growth within existing clients affects our financial performance. As such, on an annual basis (and produced here for the period ending September 30, 2014 for the purposes of this prospectus) we track the number of patient populations for which we are engaged to provide data analytics and provide data-driven

54


Table of Contents

intervention services (each engagement memorialized with a contracted statement of work, or SOW).

GRAPHIC

          For more information regarding patient population statements of work, see "Prospectus Summary — Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data."

          In addition, we track the number of analytical processes that we run on patients each month in fulfillment of our client contracts, as totaled for the trailing 12 months. This metric, referred to as the Trailing 12 Month Patient Analytical Months, or PAM, is displayed through the quarter ending September 30, 2014 in the figure below. We believe that PAM is indicative of our overall level of analytical activity, and we expect our period-to-period comparisons of our PAM to be indicative of underlying growth of our business, although changes in levels of analytical activity do not always directly translate to changes in financial performance of our business. Differences in fees charged for different analytical packages exist and differences in how analytics trigger the applicability of our data-driven intervention platforms may result in increases in analytical activity that do not result in proportional increases in revenue, Adjusted EBITDA or net income (and vice versa). Therefore, in situations in which a new engaged client SOW is initiated for analytical processes that have a higher than average fee rate, revenue could expand disproportionately faster than the increase in PAM. Likewise, as was the case in the year ended December 31, 2013, the loss of an engaged client SOW for analytical processes that have a higher than average fee rate can negatively affect revenue disproportionately more than PAM. Further, in 2013, the initiation of several new engaged client SOWs for various analytical processes that commanded, when taken together, a lower than

55


Table of Contents

average fee rate offset the reduction in revenue from the aforementioned terminated client SOW, while PAM was more than offset, and thus increased.

Trailing 12 Month Patient Analytics Months (PAMs)

GRAPHIC

          For more information regarding Trailing 12 month patient analytics months (PAM), see "Prospectus Summary — Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data."

          Seasonality.     We typically experience the highest level of revenue in the second quarter of each year, which coincides with specific accreditation and regulatory deadlines. In particular, as a result of certain data filing deadlines established by CMS, state departments of health, and the National Committee for Quality Assurance, or NCQA, clients typically engage us to perform higher levels of data-driven analytics and data-driven interventions during the first two quarters of each year when compared to other quarters of the year. Conversely, the third quarter of the year has relatively few such deadlines and, as such, typically has lower levels of analytics engagement activity than other quarters of the year.

          Macro-Economic and Macro-Industry Trends.     Our clients are affected, sometimes directly, and sometimes counter-intuitively, by macro-economic trends such as economic growth (or economic recession), inflation, and unemployment. Further, industry trends in federal and state laws and regulations, as well as emerging trends in private sector payment models, affect our clients' businesses and their need for technologies and services to support these challenges. These factors have various effects on our business, and on occasion have resulted in the slowing or cessation of the decision-making process by clients adopting our technologies and services. On the other hand, changes in macro-economic trends and the industry landscape have accelerated the need for our technologies and services from time-to-time, particularly as regulators introduce complex requirements with which our clients must comply.

Components of Results of Operations

Revenue

          We earn revenue through the sale or subscription licensing of our cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services.

          Cloud-based data analytics solution revenue accounted for approximately 42.3%, 45.3%, and 48.6% of our consolidated revenue during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively, and approximately 47.0% and 56.3% of our consolidated revenue during the nine

56


Table of Contents

months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. These percentages include software subscription licensing revenue of approximately 2.9%, 2.6%, and 3.6% of our consolidated revenue during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively, and approximately 3.5% and 3.7% of our consolidated revenue for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Our cloud-based data analytics services are performed either at the beginning of a data-driven intervention process, which typically aligns with regulatory submission deadlines, or on a monthly basis, depending on the particular client's needs. Data analytics revenue is driven primarily by the number of identified gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance identified in a client's dataset, the number of unique patients in a client's dataset, a minimum data analytics processing fee, and a contractually negotiated transactional price for each identified gap or unique patient. Subscription licensing revenue is driven primarily by the number of clients, the number of unique patients in a client's population dataset, the number of analytical services contracted for by a client, and the contractually negotiated price of such services.

          Cloud-based data-driven intervention platform services revenue accounted for approximately 57.7%, 54.7%, and 51.4% of our consolidated revenue during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively, and approximately 53.0% and 43.7% of our consolidated revenue during the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Data-driven intervention platform service revenue is further broken down into revenue that is generated from fully automated processes (i.e., those processes that require no material variable-based labor components) and partially automated processes (i.e., those processes that require certain material variable-based labor components). For the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, and the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively, revenue from fully automated processes accounted for 1.5%, 4.2%, 4.3%, 4.8%, and 7.1% of data-driven intervention platform services revenue and revenue from partially automated processes accounted for 56.2%, 50.5%, 47.1%, 48.2%, and 36.6% of data-driven intervention platform services revenue.

          Our data-driven intervention platform services include medical record data abstraction and review services, encounter decision support, encounter facilitation, outbound telephonic and written communications, and supplemental patient encounter services. Data-driven intervention platform service revenue is driven primarily by the results of our data analytic processes, the quantity and assortment of completed interventions, and a contractually negotiated transactional price for each intervention performed by us.

          See "— Critical Accounting Policies — Revenue Recognition" for a more detailed discussion of our revenue recognition policy.

Cost of Revenue

          Cost of revenue consists primarily of expenses for employees who provide direct contractual services to our clients, including salaries, benefits, discretionary incentive compensation, employment taxes, severance, and equity compensation costs. Cost of revenue also includes expenses associated with the integration, and verification of data and other service costs incurred to fulfill our revenue contracts. Cost of revenue does not include allocated amounts for occupancy expense and depreciation and amortization. Many of the elements of our cost of revenue are relatively variable and semi-variable, and can be reduced in the near-term to offset any decline in our revenue.

          Our business and operational models are designed to be highly scalable and leverage variable costs to support revenue generating activities. While we expect to grow our headcount over time to capitalize on our market opportunities, we believe our increased investment in automation, electronic health record integration capabilities, and economies of scale in our operating model, will position us to grow our revenue at a greater rate than our cost of revenue.

57


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing

          Sales and marketing expense consists primarily of employee-related expenses, including salaries, benefits, commissions, discretionary incentive compensation, employment taxes, severance, and equity compensation costs for our employees engaged in sales, sales support, business development, and marketing. Sales and marketing expense also includes operating expenses for marketing programs, research, trade shows and brand messages, and public relations costs. Our sales and marketing expense excludes any allocation of occupancy expense and depreciation and amortization.

          We expect our sales and marketing expenses to increase as we strategically invest to expand our business. We expect to hire additional sales personnel and related support personnel to capture an increasing amount of our market opportunity. As we scale our sales and marketing activities in the short to medium term, we expect these expenses to increase in both absolute dollars and as a percentage of revenue.

Research and Development

          Research and development expense (one component of our investment in innovation) consists primarily of employee-related expenses, including salaries, benefits, discretionary incentive compensation, employment taxes, severance, and equity compensation costs for our software developers, engineers, analysts, project managers, and other employees engaged in the development and enhancement of our service offerings. Research and development expense also includes certain third party consulting fees. Our research and development expense excludes any allocation of occupancy expense and depreciation and amortization.

          We expect to continue our focus on developing new data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms and enhancing our existing data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms. As a result, we expect our research and development expense to continue to increase in absolute dollars, although it may vary from period to period as a percentage of revenue.

General and Administrative

          Our general and administrative expense consists primarily of employee-related expenses including salaries, benefits, discretionary incentive compensation, employment taxes, severance, and equity compensation costs, for employees who are responsible for management information systems, administration, human resources, finance, legal, and executive management. General and administrative expense also includes occupancy expenses (including rent, utilities, communications, and facilities maintenance), professional fees, consulting fees, insurance, travel, and other expenses. Our general and administrative expense excludes depreciation and amortization.

          We expect our general and administrative expense to increase as we expand our business and incur the incremental costs associated with being a public company. However, excluding certain increases as a result of being a public company, we expect our general and administrative expense to grow at a lower rate than revenue.

Depreciation and Amortization Expense

          Our depreciation and amortization expense consists primarily of depreciation of fixed assets, amortization of capitalized software development costs, and amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets.

Provision for Income Taxes

          Provision for income taxes consists of federal and state income taxes in the United States and foreign income taxes from the territory of Puerto Rico, including deferred income taxes reflecting the net tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes.

58


Table of Contents


Results of Operations

          The following tables set forth our consolidated statement of operations data for each of the periods presented (in thousands):

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revenue

  $ 239,685   $ 300,275   $ 295,798   $ 231,264   $ 271,622  

Expenses:

                               

Cost of revenue

    102,695     101,188     120,054     94,869     85,065  

Sales and marketing

    6,752     6,793     5,952     4,597     5,355  

Research and development

    14,855     15,499     21,192     16,171     17,376  

General and administrative

    63,184     72,661     80,638     60,266     62,920  

Depreciation and amortization

    11,229     12,899     15,517     11,105     15,012  
                       

Total operating expenses

    198,715     209,040     243,353     187,008     185,728  
                       

Income from operations

    40,970     91,235     52,445     44,256     85,894  
                       

Other income and (expenses):

                               

Interest income

    10     11     9     6     4  

Interest expense

    (62 )   (129 )   (79 )   (61 )   (209 )
                       

Income before taxes

    40,918     91,117     52,375     44,201     85,689  

Provision for income taxes

    15,991     35,962     19,657     17,218     33,836  
                       

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  
                       
                       

          The following table sets forth our consolidated statement of operations data for each of the periods presented as a percentage of revenue:

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revenue

    100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %

Expenses:

                               

Cost of revenue

    43 %   34 %   41 %   41 %   31 %

Sales and marketing

    3 %   2 %   2 %   2 %   2 %

Research and development

    6 %   5 %   7 %   7 %   6 %

General and administrative

    26 %   24 %   27 %   26 %   23 %

Depreciation and amortization

    5 %   4 %   5 %   5 %   6 %
                       

Total operating expenses

    83 %   69 %   82 %   81 %   68 %
                       

Income from operations

    17 %   31 %   18 %   19 %   32 %
                       

Other income and (expenses):

                               

Interest income

                     

Interest expense

                     
                       

Income before taxes

    17 %   31 %   18 %   19 %   32 %
                       

Provision for income taxes

    7 %   12 %   7 %   7 %   12 %
                       

Net income

    10 %   19 %   11 %   12 %   19 %
                       
                       

59


Table of Contents

Nine Months Ended September 30, 2013 and 2014

Revenue

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Revenue

  $ 231,264   $ 271,622   $ 40,358     18 %

          Revenue for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 increased by approximately $40.4 million, or 18%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The increase was primarily attributable to an increase in revenue from new clients of $29.7 million along with a net increase of $10.7 million from existing clients.

Cost of Revenue

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 94,869   $ 85,065   $ (9,804 )   (10 )%

Cost of revenue as a percentage of revenue

    41 %   31 %            

          For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, cost of revenue decreased by $9.8 million, or 10%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The $9.8 million decrease was driven by a $10.7 million reduction in employee-related expenses due to our continued focus on technology implementation, standardization of services, and operational process automation. The decrease was partially offset by an increase of $1.6 million in costs for third-party services which enable our data-driven intervention services. Cost of revenue as a percentage of revenue was 31% for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 compared to 41% for the nine months ended September 30, 2013. This decrease was primarily the result of revenue mix shifting toward more data-driven analytical solution activities from data-driven intervention services, which are more employee-intensive. Data analytics revenue as a percentage of total revenue was 56% for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 compared to 47% for the nine months ending September 30, 2013.

Sales and Marketing

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  % Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Sales and marketing

  $ 4,597   $ 5,355   $ 758     17 %

Sales and marketing as a percentage of revenue

    2 %   2 %            

          In the nine months ended September 30, 2014, sales and marketing expenses increased by $0.8 million, or 17%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The increase primarily was attributable to an increase in marketing expense associated with our annual client conference of $0.3 million and employee related costs of $0.4 million.

60


Table of Contents

Research and Development

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  % Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Research and development

  $ 16,171   $ 17,376   $ 1,205     8 %

Research and development as a percentage of revenue

    7 %   6 %            

          For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, research and development expense increased by $1.2 million, or 8%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The increase was primarily attributable to a $0.7 million increase in third-party software developer fees, together with an increase of $0.3 million in employee related costs.

General and Administrative

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

General and administrative

  $ 60,266   $ 62,920   $ 2,654     4 %

General and administrative as a percentage of revenue

    26 %   23 %            

          For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, general and administrative expense increased by approximately $2.7 million, or 4%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The increase was primarily attributable to an increase in professional fees of $1.3 million, software licensing and maintenance expenses of $0.3 million, occupancy costs of $0.3 million and employee related costs of $0.5 million.

Depreciation and Amortization

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Depreciation and amortization

  $ 11,105   $ 15,012   $ 3,907     35 %

Depreciation and amortization as a percentage of revenue

    5 %   6 %            

          For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, depreciation and amortization expense increased by approximately $3.9 million, or 35%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The increase in depreciation and amortization expense primarily was attributable to an increase in amortization expense of capitalized software of $3.4 million as a result of accelerating amortization on software expected to be decommissioned due to the successful development of a next generation software service.

Provision for Income Taxes

 
  Nine Months Ended
September 30,
  Change  
 
  2013   2014   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Provision for income taxes

  $ 17,218   $ 33,836   $ 16,618     97 %

Effective tax rate

    39 %   39 %            

61


Table of Contents

          Income tax expense for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 increased by approximately $16.6 million, or 97%, compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The increase in period-over-period income tax expense was attributable to our increase in income from operations resulting from our increase in revenues and our decrease in cost of revenue. Our effective income tax rate for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 remained relatively stable at 39% as compared to the same period in 2013.

Years Ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013

Revenue

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012
Change
  2012 to 2013
Change
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   $   %   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Total revenue

  $ 239,685   $ 300,275   $ 295,798   $ 60,590     25 % $ (4,477 )   (1 )%

          2013 Compared to 2012.     Revenue during the year ended December 31, 2013 decreased by approximately $4.5 million, or 1%, as compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease was primarily attributable to a client's decision to discontinue several integrated solution engagements during the second quarter of 2013 subsequent to an acquisition by the client. This resulted in a year-over-year reduction of revenue of approximately $38.9 million. The aforementioned decrease was almost entirely offset by an increase in revenue from new clients of $9.1 million along with a net increase of $25.3 million from other existing clients.

          2012 Compared to 2011.     Revenue during the year ended December 31, 2012 increased by approximately $60.6 million, or 25%, as compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily driven by an increase in revenue from new clients of $38.2 million along with a net increase of $22.4 million (inclusive of a $21.9 million discontinuation of a service offering) from existing clients.

Cost of Revenue

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012
Change
  2012 to 2013
Change
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   $   %   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Cost of revenue

  $ 102,695   $ 101,188   $ 120,054   $ (1,507 )   (1 )% $ 18,866     19 %

Cost of revenue as a percentage of revenue

    43 %   34 %   41 %                        

          2013 Compared to 2012.     Cost of revenue during the year ended December 31, 2013 was $120.0 million, or 41% of revenue, which represented a year-over-year increase of approximately $18.9 million, or 19%, over our cost of revenue of $101.2 million, or 34% of revenue, during the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase was attributable primarily to increased employee-related costs of $11.0 million, as well as increased costs for third-party services which enable our data-driven intervention services of $6.8 million. Cost of revenue as a percentage of revenue increased as a result of management's conscious decision to not fully implement certain cost reduction strategies as a result of a client loss but rather substantially maintain its cost infrastructure to support anticipated near-term revenue growth driven by demand for analytics and data-driven intervention services in association with the launch of the Federal and State commercial exchanges.

62


Table of Contents

          2012 Compared to 2011.     Cost of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $101.2 million, or 34% of revenue, which represented a year-over-year decrease of approximately $1.5 million over our cost of revenue of approximately $102.7 million, or 43% of revenue, during the year ended December 31, 2011. The improvement in the costs of revenue as a percentage of revenue was attributable to a decrease in employee related costs of $14.2 million, partially offset by an increase of $12.9 million in costs for third-party services which enable our data-driven intervention services.

Sales and Marketing

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012
% Change
  2012 to 2013
% Change
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   $   %   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Sales and marketing

  $ 6,752   $ 6,793   $ 5,952   $ 41       $ (841 )   (12 )%

Sales and marketing as a percentage of revenue

    3 %   2 %   2 %                        

          2013 Compared to 2012.     In 2013, sales and marketing expense decreased by $0.8 million, or 12%, compared to 2012. The decrease was primarily attributable to costs associated with a corporate rebranding initiative of $1.3 million incurred in 2012, which was not incurred again in 2013, partially offset by additional investments in conference and advertising activities of $0.4 million in 2013.

          2012 Compared to 2011.     In 2012, sales and marketing expenses remained constant compared to 2011. During 2012, we incurred costs associated with a corporate rebranding initiative of $1.3 million, partially offset by lower employee-related costs of $0.6 million, lower advertising and marketing costs of $0.4 million, and lower travel related costs of $0.2 million.

Research and Development

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012
% Change
  2012 to 2013
% Change
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   $   %   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Research and development

  $ 14,855   $ 15,499   $ 21,192   $ 644     4 % $ 5,693     37 %

Research and development as a percentage of revenue

    6 %   5 %   7 %                        

          2013 Compared to 2012.     In 2013, research and development expenses increased by $5.7 million, or 37%, compared to 2012. The increase was primarily attributable to a $5.6 million increase in employee-related costs.

          2012 Compared to 2011.     In 2012, research and development expenses increased by $0.6 million, or 4%, compared to 2011. The increase was attributable to an increase in third-party software developer costs.

63


Table of Contents

General and Administrative

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012
Change
  2012 to 2013
Change
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   $   %   $   %  
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

General and administrative

  $ 63,184   $ 72,661   $ 80,638   $ 9,477     15 % $ 7,977     11 %

General and administrative as a percentage of revenue

    26 %   24 %   27 %                        

          2013 Compared to 2012.     During the year ended December 31, 2013, general and administrative expense increased by approximately $8.0 million, or 11%, compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. The year-over-year increase in general and administrative expense was driven primarily by an increase in employee-related expenses of approximately $5.7 million as a result of growth in average employee headcount during 2013 as compared to 2012 in order to manage new customer additions and expected future revenue growth.

          2012 Compared to 2011.     During the year ended December 31, 2012, general and administrative expense increased by approximately $9.5 million, or 15%, compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. This increase was driven by increased employee-related costs of approximately $9.5 million as a result of increased headcount to manage realized and expected revenue growth.

Depreciation and Amortization

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012 Change   2012 to 2013
Change
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   $   %   $   %  

Depreciation and amortization

  $ 11,229   $ 12,899   $ 15,517   $ 1,670     15 % $ 2,618     20 %

Depreciation and amortization as a percentage of revenue

    5 %   4 %   5 %                        

          2013 Compared to 2012.     Depreciation and amortization during the year ended December 31, 2013 increased approximately $2.6 million, or 20%, compared to the year ended 2012. The increase was attributable primarily to an increase of $2.6 million of amortization expense from capitalized software.

          2012 Compared to 2011.     Depreciation and amortization during the year ended December 31, 2012 increased approximately $1.7 million, or 15%, compared to the year ended 2011. The increase was attributable primarily to an increase of amortization expense from capitalized software of $1.2 million.

Provision for Income Taxes

 
  Year Ended December 31,   2011 to 2012
Change
  2012 to 2013
Change
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
$
 
%
 
$
 
%
 
 
  (dollars in thousands)
 

Provision for income taxes

  $ 15,991   $ 35,962   $ 19,657   $ 19,971     125 % $ (16,305 )   (45 )%

Effective tax rate

    39 %   39 %   38 %                        

64


Table of Contents

          2013 Compared to 2012.     Our provision for income taxes during the year ended December 31, 2013 was approximately $19.7 million compared to approximately $36.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2012. Our effective income tax rate was 38% for the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to 39% for the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease in our effective income tax rate was due primarily to the recognition of the 2012 and 2013 federal research and development tax credits during the year ended December 31, 2013 and a decrease in state income taxes.

          2012 Compared to 2011.     Our provision for income taxes during the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $36.0 million compared to approximately $16.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2011. Our effective income tax rate was 39% for both 2012 and 2011. The approximately $20.0 million increase in our provision for income taxes during the year ended December 31, 2012 as compared to the year ended December 31, 2011 was due primarily to our increase in income from operations resulting from our increase in revenues and our decrease in cost of revenue.

Quarterly Results of Operations

          The following table sets forth our unaudited consolidated statement of operations data for each of the seven quarters in the period ended September 30, 2014. The unaudited quarterly statement of operations data set forth below have been prepared on a basis consistent with our audited annual consolidated financial statements and include, in our opinion, all normal recurring adjustments necessary for a fair statement of the financial information contained in those statements. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected in the future. The following quarterly financial data should be read in conjunction with our audited consolidated financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

          We typically experience the highest level of revenue in the second quarter of each year, which coincides with specific accreditation and regulatory deadlines. See "Management's Discussion and

65


Table of Contents

Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Trends and Factors Affecting Our Future Performance — Seasonality."

 
  Three Months Ended  
Consolidated Statement of Operations Data:
 
March 31,
2013
 
June 30,
2013
 
September 30,
2013
 
December 31,
2013
 
March 31,
2014
 
June 30,
2014
 
September 30,
2014
 
 
  (unaudited, in thousands)
 

Revenue

  $ 75,036   $ 81,224   $ 75,004   $ 64,534   $ 84,674   $ 100,957   $ 85,991  

Expenses:

                                           

Cost of revenue

    32,210     33,278     29,381     25,185     28,587     28,899     27,579  

Sales and marketing

    1,087     1,982     1,528     1,355     1,333     1,612     2,410  

Research and development

    5,673     5,248     5,250     5,021     6,048     5,144     6,184  

General and administrative

    20,892     20,006     19,368     20,372     19,934     21,341     21,645  

Depreciation and amortization

    3,529     3,642     3,934     4,412     4,855     5,114     5,043  
                               

Total operating expenses

    63,391     64,156     59,461     56,345     60,757     62,110     62,861  
                               

Income from operations

    11,645     17,068     15,543     8,189     23,917     38,847     23,130  
                               

Other income and (expenses):

                                           

Interest income

    3     2     1     3     2     1     1  

Interest expense

    (16 )   (24 )   (21 )   (18 )   (13 )   (49 )   (147 )
                               

Income before taxes

    11,632     17,046     15,523     8,174     23,906     38,799     22,984  

Provision for income taxes

    4,532     6,640     6,046     2,439     9,349     15,169     9,318  
                               

Net income

  $ 7,100   $ 10,406   $ 9,477   $ 5,735   $ 14,557   $ 23,630   $ 13,666  
                               
                               

Other Financial Data

                                           

Adjusted EBITDA(1)

  $ 16,146   $ 22,372   $ 19,816   $ 13,513   $ 29,412   $ 44,989   $ 28,658  
                               
                               

(1)
The following table presents a reconciliation of net income to Adjusted EBITDA for each of the periods indicated:

 
  Three Months Ended  
 
 
March 31,
2013
 
June 30,
2013
 
September 30,
2013
 
December 31,
2013
 
March 31,
2014
 
June 30,
2014
 
September 30,
2014
 
 
  (unaudited, in thousands)
   
 

Reconciliation of net income to Adjusted EBITDA:

                                           

Net income

  $ 7,100   $ 10,406   $ 9,477   $ 5,735   $ 14,557   $ 23,630   $ 13,666  

Depreciation and amortization

    3,529     3,642     3,934     4,412     4,855     5,114     5,043  

Interest expense

    16     24     21     18     13     49     147  

Interest (income)

    (3 )   (2 )   (1 )   (3 )   (2 )   (1 )   (1 )

Provision for income taxes

    4,532     6,640     6,046     2,439     9,349     15,169     9,318  
                               

EBITDA

    15,174     20,710     19,477     12,601     28,772     43,961     28,173  

Stock-based compensation

    736     285     387     434     386     436     518  

Other non-comparable items

    236     1,377     (48 )   478     254     592     (33 )
                               

Adjusted EBITDA

  $ 16,146   $ 22,372   $ 19,816   $ 13,513   $ 29,412   $ 44,989   $ 28,658  
                               
                               

66


Table of Contents


Liquidity and Capital Resources

          The following table presents a summary of our cash flow activity for the periods set forth below (in thousands):

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   2013   2014  

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows Data:

                               

Net cash provided by operating activities

  $ 46,184   $ 53,705   $ 66,015   $ 45,288   $ 49,848  

Net cash used in investing activities

  $ (12,859 ) $ (15,084 ) $ (18,863 ) $ (14,310 ) $ (17,608 )

Net cash used in financing activities

  $ (18,641 ) $ (47,132 ) $ (42,919 ) $ (26,448 ) $ (10,887 )

Sources of Liquidity

          Our principal source of liquidity has been cash generated by operating activities. Our cash generated from operations has been sufficient to fund our growth, including our capital expenditures. Additionally, our cash generation has allowed us to repurchase certain amounts of our outstanding stock and pay dividends to our stockholders in the amount of $421.0 million from January 1, 2011 through September 30, 2014. In addition, on September 19, 2014, we redeemed $300.0 million of our common stock with proceeds from our Term Loan Facility. Prior to this redemption, we had not historically incurred debt nor have we recently generated liquidity through equity sales. As of September 30, 2014, we had a cash and cash equivalent balance of $131.9 million.

          We believe our current cash and cash equivalent balance, expected cash generated by operating activities and availability under our Credit Facilities (defined below) is sufficient to fund our liquidity needs for the foreseeable future.

Debt

          On September 19, 2014, we and our subsidiaries entered into the Credit Agreement. The terms of the Credit Agreement provide for credit facilities in the aggregate maximum principal amount of $400.0 million, consisting of the Term Loan Facility and the Revolving Credit Facility. Proceeds of the Revolving Credit Facility may be used for our working capital and general corporate purposes. The obligations under the Credit Facilities are guaranteed by our domestic, wholly owned subsidiaries. The Credit Facilities contain customary affirmative and negative covenants, including limitations on negative pledges and liens. In addition, under the Credit Agreement, we are required to maintain certain minimum liquidity levels ($50.0 million while the Term Loan Facility remains available, or, if the Term Loan Facility has been repaid, $20.0 million), measured at the end of each of our fiscal quarters. In addition, our ability to incur debt is subject to compliance with a 4.00 to 1.00 leverage ratio under certain circumstances. The Credit Agreement also contains certain mandatory prepayment requirements in connection with certain assets sales and customary events of default, including as a result of certain specified change of control events.

Term Loan Facility

          We utilized the entire principal amount of the Term Loan Facility to redeem approximately 8.33% of our Class B common stock on a pro rata basis. As of September 30, 2014, the principal amount outstanding under the Term Loan Facility was $300.0 million. The Term Loan Facility has a five-year term. The Term Loan Facility is an amortizing facility and payments of principal and interest are payable quarterly, beginning March 31, 2015. The outstanding principal amount of the Term

67


Table of Contents

Loan Facility will amortize as follows: $15.0 million in year one, $15.0 million in year two, $26.3 million in year three, $41.3 million in year four, and the remaining principal balance in year five. The interest rate for the Term Loan Facility is LIBOR plus 1.25% per annum or the base rate plus 0.25% per annum (at our election).

Revolving Credit Facility

          Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility will become available, subject to compliance with the terms and conditions set forth in the Credit Agreement, beginning (at our option) at any time after (a) the consummation of this offering or (b) the date on which the aggregate principal amount of Term Loans then outstanding is not greater than $200.0 million. The Revolving Credit Facility is scheduled to mature on March 31, 2020. The interest rate for the Revolving Credit Facility is LIBOR plus 1.25% per annum or the base rate plus 0.25% per annum (at our election).

Cash Flows

Operating Activities

          Cash provided by operating activities consisted of net income adjusted for certain non-cash items, including depreciation and amortization, stock-based compensation, and deferred income taxes, as well as the effect of changes in working capital and other activities.

          Cash provided by operating activities in the nine months ended September 30, 2014 was approximately $49.8 million, an increase in cash inflow of approximately $4.6 million compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. Cash provided by operating activities was driven by net income of approximately $51.9 million and an increase of approximately $15.0 million of non-cash depreciation and amortization expenses, partially offset by increased accounts receivable of approximately $18.6 million.

          Cash provided by operating activities during the year ended December 31, 2013 was approximately $66.0 million, an increase of approximately $12.3 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. Cash provided by operating activities was driven by net income of approximately $32.7 million, as adjusted for the exclusion of non-cash expenses totaling approximately $17.3 million, and the effect of changes in working capital and other balance sheet accounts resulting in cash inflows of approximately $66.0 million.

          Cash provided by operating activities during the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $53.7 million, an increase in cash inflow of approximately $7.5 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. Cash provided by operating activities was driven by net income of approximately $55.2 million, as adjusted for the exclusion of non-cash expenses totaling approximately $15.5 million and the effect of changes in working capital and other balance sheet accounts.

Investing Activities

          Our primary investing activities consisted of purchases of property and equipment, investments in internally developed capitalized software, and leasehold improvements for our facilities.

          Cash used in investing activities in the nine months ended September 30, 2014 was approximately $17.6 million, an increase in cash outflow of approximately $3.3 million compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The slight increase in cash outflow was due to an increase in the investment in capitalized software of approximately $3.8 million, which was partially offset by a decrease in purchases of property and equipment of approximately $0.5 million.

68


Table of Contents

          Cash used in investing activities during the year ended December 31, 2013 was approximately $18.9 million, an increase in cash outflow of approximately $3.8 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase in cash outflow was primarily due to the purchase of property and equipment of approximately $9.2 million during the year ended December 31, 2013 as compared to approximately $5.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2012.

          Cash used in investing activities during the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $15.1 million, an increase in cash outflow of approximately $2.2 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in cash outflow was due to an increase in investment in capitalized software of approximately $3.8 million, which was partially offset by a decrease in purchases of property and equipment of approximately $1.6 million.

Financing Activities

          Our primary financing activities have consisted of private sales of common stock resulting from stock option exercises by employees. In 2011, 2012, and 2013 and the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, we paid dividends to our stockholders in the aggregate amount of $18.6 million, $47.0 million $23.5 million, $6.4 million, and $2.9 million, respectively. Additionally, in 2013 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2014, we completed a net repurchase of our common stock of $20.0 million and $309.1 million, respectively.

          Cash used in financing activities during the nine months ended September 30, 2014 was approximately $10.9 million, a decrease of approximately $15.6 million in cash outflow compared to the nine months ended September 30, 2013. The cash used in financing activities during the nine months ended September 30, 2014 is primarily comprised of $309.1 million for the repurchase of common stock, and $2.9 million for the payment of previously declared dividends, partially offset by $300.0 million from proceeds of the Term Loan and $0.7 million from the exercise of employee stock options.

          Cash used in financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2013 was approximately $42.9 million, a decrease in cash outflow of approximately $4.2 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease in cash outflow was primarily due to the net repurchase of common stock of $20.0 million, which was offset by a decrease in dividends paid of approximately $23.5 million.

          Cash provided by financing activities during the year ended December 21, 2012 was approximately $47.1 million, an increase in cash outflow of approximately $28.5 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in cash outflow was primarily due to an increase in dividends paid of approximately $28.4 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011.

Off Balance Sheet Arrangements

          We do not have any off-balance sheet arrangements and did not have any such arrangements in the nine months ended September 30, 2014 or during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013.

Contractual Obligations

          Our principal commitments consist of obligations under capital and operating leases for equipment, office space, and co-located data center facilities. The following table summarizes our commitments to settle contractual obligations in cash as of December 31, 2013. The following table does not reflect our new $300.0 million Term Loan Facility, which matures in 2019. The outstanding principal amount of the Term Loan Facility will amortize as follows: $15.0 million in year one,

69


Table of Contents

$15.0 million in year two, $26.3 million in year three, $41.3 million in year four, and the remaining principal balance in year five.

 
  Payments Due by Period  
 
  (in thousands)
 
 
 
Total
 
Less than
1 year
 
1-3 years
 
3-5 years
 
More than
5 years
 

Operating lease obligations

  $ 32,328   $ 7,564   $ 13,007   $ 10,913   $ 844  
                       
                       

          Our existing operating lease agreements may provide us with the option to renew. Our future operating lease obligations would change if we entered into additional operating lease agreements and if we exercised renewal options.

          Contractual obligations represent future cash commitments and liabilities under agreements with third parties, and exclude purchase orders for goods and services. Purchase orders are not included in the table above. Our purchase orders represent authorizations to purchase rather than legally binding agreements. The contractual commitment amounts in the table above are associated with agreements that are legally binding and enforceable, and that specify all significant terms, including fixed or minimum services to be used, fixed, minimum or variable price provisions and the approximate timing of the transaction.


Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

          We prepare our consolidated financial statements in accordance with GAAP. The preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect our reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses, as well as related disclosures. To the extent that there are material differences between these estimates and actual results, our financial condition or operating results would be affected. We base our estimates on past experience and other assumptions that we believe are reasonable under the circumstances, and we evaluate these estimates on an ongoing basis. We refer to accounting estimates of this type as critical accounting policies and estimates, which we discuss further below.

Revenue Recognition

          We recognize revenue when it is realized (or realizable) and earned (i.e., when services have been rendered or delivery of applicable deliverables has occurred). This occurs when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, the product or service has been performed or delivered, fees are fixed or determinable, and collection is reasonably assured. When collectability is not reasonably assured, revenue is recognized when cash is collected. Cash collections and invoices generated in excess of revenue recognized are recorded as deferred revenue until the revenue recognition criteria are met.

          We primarily derive our revenue from sales of our data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services. We allocate revenue to our data-driven analytics and data-driven intervention platform services using the relative selling price method. We have generally been unable to establish vendor-specific objective evidence of fair value and, while we continually seek third-party evidence of fair value, meaningful data have generally been unavailable as our services are unique and visibility into our competitors' pricing is unavailable. As a result, we use our best estimate of selling price to allocate arrangement consideration to its contractual service elements.

          We have determined an estimated selling price by considering several external and internal factors, including, but not limited to pricing practices, margin objectives, competition, customer

70


Table of Contents

demand, internal costs, and overall economic trends. Generally, the best estimate of selling price is consistent with the contractual arrangement fee for each element.

          Revenue is recognized as cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention services are performed and information is delivered to clients, which generally align with our right to invoice our clients. Cloud-based data analytics services are considered performed when gaps in care, quality, data integrity, or financial performance, and summarized key analytics and benchmarking analytics reports are delivered to its clients, provided that all contractual performance requirements and other revenue recognition criteria are met. Data-driven intervention services are considered performed upon the completion of each medical record data abstraction and review service, encounter decision support, encounter facilitation, outbound telephonic and written communication, and supplemental patient encounter service, provided that all contractual performance requirements and other revenue recognition criteria are met.

          We also enter into multiple-element software arrangements, which are recognized under ASC 985-605, Software Revenue Recognition, when a software subscription license is provided to customers. Under these arrangements, we provide post-contract support, including help desk support and unspecified upgrades. Vendor-specific objective evidence of fair value has not been established for maintenance as maintenance is not renewed separately from the license fees. As a result, under these subscription software license agreements, we recognize revenue from the license of software ratably over the life of the agreement. We begin to recognize revenue upon execution of a signed agreement and delivery of the software, provided that the software license fees are fixed and determinable, and collection of the resulting receivable is reasonably assured.

          Certain of our arrangements entitle a client to receive a refund if we fail to satisfy contractually specified performance obligations. The refund is limited to a portion or all of the consideration paid. In this case, revenue is recognized when any and all performance obligations are satisfied.

          We maintain an allowance, charged to revenue, which reflects our estimated future billing adjustments resulting from client concessions or resolutions of billing disputes.

Income Taxes

          We account for income taxes using the asset and liability approach, which requires the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities related to the expected future tax consequences of events that have been recognized between financial reporting and income tax reporting. We measure deferred tax assets and liabilities using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled.

          We make estimates, assumptions and judgments to determine our provision for income taxes and also for deferred tax assets and liabilities and any valuation allowances recorded against our deferred tax assets. We assess the likelihood that our deferred tax assets will be recovered from future taxable income and, to the extent we believe that recovery is not likely, we establish a valuation allowance.

          We have adopted ASC 740-10, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes , that prescribes a recognition threshold of more-likely-than-not, and a measurement attribute for all tax positions taken or expected to be taken on a tax return, in order for those positions to be recognized in the financial statements. We continually review tax laws, regulations and related guidance in order to properly record any uncertain tax liability positions. We adjust these reserves in light of changing facts and circumstances.

71


Table of Contents

Stock-Based Compensation

          All stock-based award transactions, including employee stock option grants, are measured and recognized in the financial statements at fair value as of the grant date in accordance with ASC 718, Compensation — Stock Compensation . We estimate the fair value of each award on the grant date using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. We recognize stock-based compensation expense, net of estimated forfeitures based on historical and anticipated turnover data, using the straight-line basis over the service period of the applicable award, which is generally five years.

          The Black-Scholes option-pricing model requires the input of estimates, including the fair market value of our common stock, the expected volatility of the price of our common stock, expected life, the risk free interest rate, and the expected dividend yield of our common stock. The input assumptions used in the Black-Scholes option-pricing model represent management's best estimates. These estimates involve inherent uncertainties and the application of management's judgment. If factors change and different assumptions are used, the amount of stock-based compensation expense could be materially different in the future.

          We estimate the expected volatility of our stock options by using data for several unrelated public companies within our industry that are considered to be comparable to our company and for which historical information was available. The average expected term was determined under the simplified calculation as provided by the SEC Staff's Accounting Bulletin No. 107, Share-Based Payment , which is the mid-point between the vesting date and the end of the contractual term. We determine the risk-free interest rate by reference to the U.S. Treasury yield curve rates with the remaining term commensurate with the expected life assumed at the date of grant. The dividend yield assumption of zero is based upon the fact that we do not have a formal dividend payment policy, we do not intend to continue to pay cash dividends on our common stock in the future, and, to the extent we pay dividends in the future, there is no assurance that any such dividends will be comparable to those previously declared. We estimate the forfeiture rate of our stock-based awards based on historical experience and adjustments are made annually to reflect actual forfeiture experience. We will continue to use judgment in evaluating the assumptions related to our stock-based compensation on a prospective basis. As we continue to accumulate additional data related to our common stock, we may have refinements to our estimates, which could materially impact our future stock-based compensation expense.

          Since January 2013, we have granted options to purchase shares of common stock as follows:

Grant date
 
Number of
options
granted
 
Option exercise
price(s)
 
Fair value of
common stock
per share(1)
 
Fair value of
common stock
option per
share(2)
 
Grant date
fair value
 
 
   
   
   
   
  (in thousands)
 

January 2013

    3,391   $ 32.09   $ 37.19   $ 18.11   $ 61  

April 2013

    19,508     37.19     37.19     15.04     293  

May 2013

    15,009     38.68     38.68     14.61     219  

August 2013

    8,157     35.58     35.58     14.25     116  

September 2013

    125,776     33.39 - 35.58     33.39 - 35.58     14.15 - 14.96     1,863  

October 2013

    36,931     33.39 - 35.58     33.39 - 35.58     13.94 - 13.99     516  

November 2013

    11,419     35.58     35.58     13.96     159  

December 2013

    29,206     33.19     33.19     14.79     432  

May 2014

    230,637     35.15 - 37.51     35.15 - 37.51     17.24 - 18.02     4,008  

August 2014

    98,307     39.44     39.44     17.88     1,758  

(1)
The fair value of common stock per share is used for financial reporting purposes.

72


Table of Contents

(2)
The weighted average grant date value of the options granted were calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model used to record stock-based compensation expense.

Valuation of Our Common Stock

          Historical valuations of our common stock were determined in accordance with the guidelines outlined in the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Practice Aid, Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation . Given the absence of a public trading market for our common stock, we exercised reasonable judgment and considered all relevant objective and subjective factors and circumstances known at the time of each valuation, which were used to determine the fair value of our common stock. The factors considered in determining the fair value of our common stock include, but are not limited to, the following:

    contemporaneous valuations of our common stock performed by an unrelated third-party specialist;

    our actual operating and financial performance;

    current business conditions and projections;

    developments in the business;

    the lack of marketability of our common stock;

    our share repurchase arrangements;

    the status of our sales efforts;

    anticipated revenue growth rates;

    valuations of comparable companies;

    the overall economic and industry conditions and outlook; and

    additional objective and subjective factors relating to our business.

          In valuing our common stock, our compensation committee determines the equity value of our business generally using a combination of the income approach and the market approach, and then discounts these amounts for the lack of marketability and minority interest ownership considerations of our common stock.

          We estimate fair value under the income approach based on the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we anticipate to generate into perpetuity. We determine our discount rate using an average cost of capital of unrelated public companies within our industry as of each valuation date, adjusted to reflect the inherent risks in our future cash flow projections.

          We estimate fair value using the comparable company market approach based on our comparison to several unrelated public companies and recent acquisitions of companies within our industry that we consider to be comparable to us. From these unrelated companies, we determine a representative market value multiple, which we apply to our revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and EBITDA amounts.

          A brief narrative of the specific factors considered by our compensation committee in determining the fair value of our common stock as of the date of grant is set forth below.

December 31, 2012 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $37.19 per share as of December 31, 2012. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into

73


Table of Contents

perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 26% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of December 31, 2012.

March 31, 2013 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $35.58 per share as of March 31, 2013. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and EBITDA respective multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 26% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of March 31, 2013.

June 30, 2013 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $33.39 per share as of June 30, 2013. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 24% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of June 30, 2013.

September 30, 2013 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $33.19 per share as of September 30, 2013. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 24% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of September 30, 2013.

December 31, 2013 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $35.15 per share as of December 31, 2013. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 23% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of December 31, 2013.

74


Table of Contents

March 31, 2014 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $37.51 per share as of March 31, 2014. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 24% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of March 31, 2014.

June 30, 2014 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $39.44 per share as of June 30, 2014. Our estimated fair market valuation applied 55% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 45% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied a lack of marketability discount of 24% and minority interest discount of 20% to arrive at the fair value of our common stock as of June 30, 2014.

September 30, 2014 Valuation

          We determined the fair value of our common stock to be $113.01 per share as of September 30, 2014. Our estimated fair market valuation utilized a hybrid approach that considered two scenarios: (1) we assumed we would achieve an initial public offering ("IPO Scenario"), and (2) we assumed we would remain a private company ("Non-IPO Scenario"). We attributed equal weighting to the IPO Scenario and the Non-IPO Scenario. The IPO Scenario assumed an estimated public market fair value. The Non-IPO Scenario assumed our estimated fair market valuation based on an applied 20% weighting to an income approach, which considered the present value of the discounted future cash flows that we estimated to generate into perpetuity at that point in time, and a 80% weighting to the comparable company market approach, which considered comparable companies' trailing and forward revenue, earnings before interest and taxes, and respective EBITDA multiples and our actual and forward estimate amounts. We then applied minority interest discount of 20% and a lack of marketability discount of 10%.

Goodwill

          Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition costs over the fair value of tangible net assets and identifiable intangible assets of the businesses acquired. Goodwill is not amortized. Goodwill is subject to impairment testing annually as of December 31st, or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be fully recoverable. Our impairment tests are based on a single operating segment and reporting unit structure. This test compares a reporting unit's carrying value to its fair value. If the fair value of the reporting unit exceeds the carrying value of the net assets, including goodwill assigned to that reporting unit, goodwill is not impaired. If the carrying value of the reporting unit's net assets, including goodwill, exceeds the fair value of the reporting unit, then we are required to determine the implied fair value of the reporting unit's goodwill. If the carrying value of a reporting unit's goodwill exceeds its implied fair value, then an impairment loss is recorded for the difference between the carrying amount and the implied fair value of the goodwill.

75


Table of Contents

          As of September 30, 2014, we had goodwill of approximately $62.3 million, which represented 20% of our consolidated total assets. There are many assumptions and estimates used that directly impact the results of impairment testing, including an estimate of future expected revenues, earnings and cash flows, the determination of reporting unit(s), and discount rates applied to such expected cash flows in order to estimate fair value. The determination of whether or not goodwill has become impaired involves a significant level of judgment in the assumptions and estimates underlying the approach used to determine the value of our reporting unit. Actual results could differ from management's estimates, and such differences could be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.

          The fair value of our reporting unit significantly exceeded its respective carrying value at December 31, 2013, and we concluded the recoverability of goodwill would not have been impacted by a 10% change in fair value. Accordingly, we did not record any goodwill impairments amounts for any period presented.

JOBS Act Accounting Election

          We are an "emerging growth company," as defined in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or the JOBS Act. Under the JOBS Act, emerging growth companies can delay adopting new or revised accounting standards issued subsequent to the enactment of the JOBS Act until such time as those standards apply to private companies. We have irrevocably elected not to avail ourselves of this exemption from new or revised accounting standards and, therefore, will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.


Recently Issued Accounting Standards

          In July 2013, the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or the FASB, issued authoritative guidance containing changes to the presentation of an unrecognized tax benefit when a loss or credit carry forward exists. This statement is effective for financial statements issued for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2013, with early adoption permitted. Adoption of the standard is not expected to materially impact our financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

          In May 2014, the FASB issued updated guidance on revenue from contracts with customers. This revenue recognition guidance supersedes existing GAAP guidance, including most industry-specific guidance. The core principle is that an entity should recognize revenue to depict the transfer of promised goods or services to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. The guidance identifies steps to apply in achieving this principle. This updated guidance is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2016. We are currently evaluating the potential impact of this guidance on our financial disclosures and results, including whether we elect retrospective, or modified retrospective, adoption methods.

          In June 2014, the FASB issued stock compensation guidance requiring that a performance target that affects vesting and that could be achieved after the requisite service period be treated as a performance condition. The amendments in this guidance are effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2015. We are currently evaluating the potential impact of this guidance on our financial disclosures and results.


Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

          Market risk includes risks that arise from changes in interest rates, equity prices and other market changes that affect market sensitive instruments. Our primary market risk exposure is to changes in interest rates on our variable rate debt, which includes our Term Loan and our Revolving Credit Facility. As of the date of this prospectus, we had $300.0 million outstanding under our Term Loan at an effective interest rate of 1.4%. As a result, if market interest rates were to increase by 1.0%, or 100 basis points, interest expense would decrease future earnings and cash flows, net of estimated tax benefits, by approximately $1.8 million annually, assuming that we do not enter into contractual hedging arrangements.

76


Table of Contents


BUSINESS

Overview

          We are a leading technology company that combines advanced cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms to achieve meaningful insight and improvement in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance across the healthcare landscape. Our powerful platform drives high-value impact, improving quality and economics for health plans, hospitals, physicians, patients, pharmaceutical companies, and researchers. The value we deliver to our clients is achieved by turning data into insights and those insights into action. Through our large proprietary datasets, advanced integration technologies, sophisticated predictive analytics, and deep subject matter expertise, we deliver seamless, end-to-end platforms that bring the benefits of big data and large-scale analytics to the point of care. Our analytics identify gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance, while providing clients with differentiated capabilities to resolve these gaps. During 2014, we provided these services to nearly 100 clients representing approximately 200 patient populations, providing analytics informed by our data and insight on more than 744,000 physicians, 244,000 clinical facilities, 118 million unique patients (covering approximately 98.2% of all U.S. counties), and 9.1 billion medical events, a number that has been increasing at a rate of approximately 3.0% compounding monthly, or 43.3% annually, since 2000.

          Healthcare costs in the United States have been increasing significantly for many years, currently approaching almost $3 trillion annually. This rise in healthcare costs has driven a broad transition from consumption-based payment models to value-based payment models across the healthcare landscape. As a result, the specific disease and comorbidity status, clinical and quality outcomes, resource utilization, and care details of the individual patient have become increasingly relevant to the various constituents of the healthcare delivery system. Concurrently, the count and complexity of diseases, diagnostics, and treatments — let alone payment models and regulatory oversight requirements — have soared. In this setting, granular data has become critical to determining and improving quality and financial performance in healthcare.

          We believe that the opportunity before us is substantial as data increasingly becomes the lynchpin in healthcare — from clinical quality outcomes and financial performance, to the consumer experience and drug discovery. A January 2013 McKinsey report estimates that utilizing data analytics could drive improvements in healthcare resulting in a beneficial economic impact of $300 billion to $450 billion annually. As a reflection of the increasing need for data analytics, in the last several years, our advanced analytics and data-driven intervention platforms have been driving significant economic impact through improvements in clinical and quality outcomes, disease and comorbidity data accuracy, and utilization, achieving hundreds of millions of dollars per year in quantified beneficial financial improvement for our clients.

          At the core of our enabling capabilities is a long history of innovation and profitable growth, positioning us to deliver value to our clients and capitalize on the confluence of recent changes in the healthcare industry that many describe as historically unprecedented. Our ability to rapidly innovate is enabled by the depth and breadth of our industry expertise, large-scale proprietary datasets, advanced analytical prowess, highly flexible platform components, a common native code base, and experience across the entire healthcare landscape.

          The value we deliver to our clients through our data analytics and intervention platforms are comprised of four primary components:

    Data Integration:   Highly efficient and effective data assimilation of structured and unstructured healthcare data in any format from highly disparate and disconnected sources;

77


Table of Contents

    Advanced Analytics:   Data analysis using big-data processing to yield highly actionable insights identifying gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance;

    Intervention Platforms:   Software and services that allow our clients to take the insights derived from our analytics to address and resolve the identified gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance;

    Business Processing:   Powerful business intelligence tools that summarize key analytics and benchmarking information as well as a comprehensive claims data warehouse that helps our clients comply with government mandated reporting requirements.

          Our ability to deliver value to our clients through our advanced analytics and intervention platforms has allowed us to achieve significant growth since our company's organization. Over the last three years, our revenue has increased at a compounded annual growth rate of 19%, Adjusted EBITDA at a compounded annual growth rate of 20%, and net income at a compounded annual growth rate of 33%. For the nine months ended September 30, 2014, our revenue was $271.6 million, representing 17% growth over the same period of the prior year. In this same period, we generated Adjusted EBITDA of $103.1 million, representing 38% of revenue and 77% growth over the same period in the prior year. Net income for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 was $51.9 million, representing 19% of revenue and a 92% increase over the same period in 2013. Adjusted EBITDA is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to net income, see "Selected Consolidated Financial Data."

Industry Overview

          We believe that the increasing demand for our platform is driven by the confluence of four fundamental healthcare industry trends:

          Unsustainable Rise in Healthcare Costs.     Rising healthcare expenditures are widely recognized to be at the core of several challenges facing the United States, including the nation's long-term fiscal gap. Healthcare spending in the U.S. was almost $3 trillion in 2012, or more than 17% of GDP, according to CMS's 2012 National Health Expenditure Highlights, up substantially from the share of 10% of GDP in 1985. Under the 2014 set of extended baseline projections from the CBO, national healthcare spending is projected to increase further to approximately 22% of GDP by 2039. According to an August 2013 Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation report, the average annual family health insurance premium in 2013 was 29% higher than the average family health insurance premium in 2008 and 80% higher than the average family health insurance premium in 2003. To address this expected substantial rise in healthcare costs, the U.S. healthcare market is seeking more effective methods of delivering care, leading to a transformation in payment models and care delivery. This same trend is also playing out across modernized nations around the globe.

          Shift to Value-Based Healthcare.     The traditional fee-for-service reimbursement model in healthcare has played a major role in elevating both the level and growth rate of healthcare spending. In response, both the public and private sectors are shifting away from the historical fee-for-service models. In the public sector, rising healthcare costs and tight government budgets have driven both federal and state government agencies to expand the role of value-based, capitated payment models through programs such as Medicare Advantage and managed Medicaid. These programs are designed to incentivize value and quality at an individual patient level. Both federal and state governments are also directly trying to influence the payment model by promoting Accountable Care Organizations, or ACOs, including Medicare Shared Savings Programs and bundled payments, which shift the incentives for practice groups away from volume and toward quality and value. The private sector is acting in parallel, with private payors setting up their own accountable care and bundled payment structures with practice groups, and employers seeking to control costs through the creation of private healthcare exchanges, which have already been

78


Table of Contents

embraced by several large employers, including Sears, Darden Restaurants, Walgreens and Aramark. As quality and value-based care also takes hold in the pharmaceutical industry, manufacturers will need to better understand the efficacy, cost, and benefit of products currently in the market, explore new business models, and have better data to assess the commercial viability of new products.

          Since the emergence of fixed payment models and quality outcomes reporting in the early 1990s, the progressive expansion of capitated payment models, oversight regulations, and private sector focus on value-based healthcare has been significant and hallmarked by a substantial number of transformative events at the federal, state, private-sector, and consumer sentiment level. The implementation of the Affordable Care Act has been just one among several changes in how managed care reforms have been implemented in the U.S. As seen in the figure below, the number of Americans covered by capitated payment programs has been increasing rapidly and, according to industry sources and our internal estimates, is anticipated to increase from approximately 80 million at the start of 2014 to over 150 million by 2019. This increase is expected to further drive the critical importance to accurately measure, analyze, report, and improve patient disease and comorbidity conditions, utilization rates, and clinical quality outcomes. This increase has been caused by not just one event but multiple events over time, many of which are illustrated in the figure below.

GRAPHIC


(1)
New York Launches Quality Assurance Reporting Requirements — New York developed its own set of Quality Assurance Reporting Requirements (QARR), which includes a number of HEDIS measures as well as state-specific quality measures focusing on effectiveness, access/availability, and satisfaction with care as well as utilization and information on quality improvement initiatives.

(2)
HEDIS 2.0 — Healthcare Effectiveness Data and Information Set (HEDIS) is a standardized set of performance measures that could be used by various constituencies to compare health plans and help

79


Table of Contents

    drive quality improvement in the market. In 1993, Version 2.0 of HEDIS known as the "Health Plan Employer Data and Information Set" was released by National Committee for Quality Assurance

(3)
Adjusted Clinical Groups Risk Adjustment Model — Released in 1992, the Adjusted Clinical Groups system is an industry standard risk adjustment and predictive modeling software originally developed by faculty at the Johns Hopkins Bloomberg School of Public Health.

(4)
Oregon Healthplan Waiver to Reimburse Based on Patient Level Data — The Oregon Health Plan, or OHP, was implemented by creating a prioritized list of diagnosis-treatment pairs in order to ensure that benefit reductions eliminate only the least effective and least valuable treatments. Because Medicaid services were to be provided through managed care plans under the OHP, the Oregon Medical Assistance Program (OMAP) acquired a federal waiver, which allowed the state to require Medicaid recipients to enroll in capitated managed care plans to improve access to care and control costs in comparison to traditional Medicaid plans.

(5)
The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) — HIPAA is the federal Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996. The primary goal of the law is to make it easier for people to keep health insurance, protect the confidentiality and security of healthcare information and help the healthcare industry control administrative costs.

(6)
The Chronic Illness and Disability Payment System (CDPS) — The Chronic Illness and Disability Payment System is a diagnostic classification system that Medicaid programs can use to make health-based capitated payments for Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF) and disabled Medicaid beneficiaries.

(7)
Balanced Budget Act — The Balanced Budget Act of 1997 was an omnibus legislative package enacted using the budget reconciliation process and designed to balance the federal budget by 2002. The law contained major Medicare reforms.

(8)
Medicare + Choice — The Medicare + Choice program is the name for managed care provider options to the traditional Medicare Part A and Part B programs. A Medicare beneficiary may choose to participate in this Medicare program instead of the traditional Medicare program.

(9)
California P4P Program — The California Pay for Performance program is the largest non-governmental physician incentive program in the United States and was founded in 2001.

(10)
Medicare Modernization Act — The Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act (also called the Medicare Modernization Act or MMA) is a federal law enacted in 2003. It produced the largest overhaul of Medicare in the public health program's 38-year history, the most important being the introduction of an entitlement benefit for prescription drugs through tax breaks and subsidies.

(11)
Bridges to Excellence — A family of programs by Health Care Incentives Improvement Institute to reward recognized physicians, nurse practitioners, and physician assistants who meet certain performance measures.

(12)
Premier Hospital Quality Incentive — Premier Hospital Quality Incentive Demonstration is a CMS program for improving quality of inpatient care by awarding quality data on the CMS website. The demonstration rewards participating top performing hospitals by increasing their payment for Medicare patients.

(13)
National Committee on Evidence Based Benefit Design — The National Committee on Evidence-Based Benefit Design, established by National Business Group on Health, seeks to improve quality of care and promote value by using benefit design to encourage and reward effective care and discourage ineffective care. The Committee is made up of large employers and national experts representing research, accreditation, physicians, health plans, and consumers.

(14)
Medicare Part D — The Part D drug benefit (also known as "Medicare Rx") helps Medicare beneficiaries to pay for outpatient prescription drugs purchased at retail, mail order, home infusion, and long-term care pharmacies. Medicare did not cover outpatient prescription drugs until January 1, 2006, when it implemented the Medicare Part D prescription drug benefit.

80


Table of Contents

(15)
Physician Quality Reporting Initiative (PQRI) — A program sponsored by CMS to provide incentive payments to physicians who choose to participate and successfully report on a designated set of quality measures for services paid under the Medicare Physician Fee Schedule and provided between July 1 and December 31, 2007.

(16)
Affordable Care Act — The Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, commonly called the Affordable Care Act (ACA) or "Obamacare." The goals of the ACA are to increase the quality and affordability of health insurance, and to lower the uninsured rate by expanding public and private insurance coverage.

(17)
Aon Hewitt Private Exchange — The first national multi-carrier fully insured private health exchange, which offers group health insurance to employers with more than 100 workers who are not eligible to use the state or federally operated exchanges.

(18)
Blue KC Exchange — Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Kansas City launched the area's first private insurance Exchange marketplace in November 2011, specifically designed to help small businesses manage their healthcare costs.

(19)
Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Star Ratings Launch — The Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services uses a five-star quality rating system to measure Medicare beneficiaries' experience with their health plans and the health care system and use the ratings for Medicare Advantage plans to award quality-based bonus payments, beginning in 2012. This rating system applies to all Medicare Advantage lines of business: Health Maintenance Organizations (HMO), Preferred Provider Organization (PPO), Private Fee-For-Service (PFFS), and prescription drug plans (PDP).

(20)
Accountable Care Organization Launch — Accountable Care Organizations (ACOs) are groups of doctors, hospitals, and other health care providers, who come together voluntarily to give coordinated high quality care to the Medicare patients they serve. Coordinated care helps ensure that patients, especially the chronically ill, get the right care at the right time, with the goal of avoiding unnecessary duplication of services and preventing medical errors.

(21)
Sears, IBM & Walgreens Move to Exchanges — Sears, IBM, and Walgreens have moved their employees and retirees to private exchanges such as the Aon Hewitt and Extend Health.

(22)
Commercial HIX Marketplace Launch — Health insurance marketplaces, also called health exchanges, are organizations set up to facilitate the purchase of health insurance in each state in accordance with the ACA. Marketplaces provide a set of government-regulated and standardized health care plans from which individuals may purchase health insurance policies eligible for federal subsidies.

          Digitization of Healthcare Information.     Across the healthcare landscape, a significant amount of data is being created every day driven by patient care, payment systems, regulatory compliance, and record keeping. These data include information within patient health records, clinical trials, pharmacy benefit programs, imaging systems, sensors and monitoring platforms, laboratory results, patient reported information, hospital and physician performance programs, and billing and payment processing. Large amounts of these data continue to be stored on paper and processed manually. In this setting, significant investments are being made to digitize all parts of the healthcare landscape. For example, under HITECH, which was signed into law in 2009, the federal government committed $30 billion to incentivize healthcare practice groups to adopt electronic health records, or EHRs. The share of hospitals with at least a basic electronic health record system jumped from approximately 10% in 2008 to almost 60% by 2013, according to a 2014 Robert Wood Johnson Foundation report. Despite significant investments by public and private sources within the industry, however, the digitized healthcare data remain largely stored in "walled gardens" — data that is static and not easily shared or interpreted. Without clear standards for exchanging information between medical applications, the growing pool of important clinical data that is being generated is difficult to share and interpret. As the amount of data in healthcare continues to grow, we believe it will be critical for the healthcare industry to be able to use this disparate data to better achieve the goals of higher quality and more efficient costs of care.

81


Table of Contents

          Increasing Complexity.     Healthcare is on a course of dramatically progressive complexity. As technology employed in the healthcare space has become increasingly sophisticated, new diagnostics and treatments have been introduced, the pool of clinical research has expanded, and the paradigms dictating payment and regulatory oversight have multiplied. In addition, physicians face an increasing number of options for addressing the complex needs of their patients who expect increasing personalization of their care. Over time, the number of diseases being described and sub-classified, diagnostic tests available, medication discoveries, and clinical research studies continue to rise. For example, with the introduction of the new ICD-10 coding framework in 2015, physicians are expected to characterize the specific conditions of patients among more than 90,000 discrete descriptions, a number that is up from nearly 15,000 under the existing ICD-9 framework. Furthermore, the New England Journal of Medicine reports that it receives close to 5,000 submissions for publication each year. This increasing breadth and depth of research, combined with the increased detail of how healthcare can be delivered and documented, is also expanding the amount of data and information available. Continuous interplay between technology and research is generating vast amounts of information that needs to be aggregated and analyzed in order to inform clinical decision-making which can help drive higher quality and more efficient care.

          In addition, we believe that improved data analytics based off augmented datasets are further enabling improved treatment options. Beyond the depth and breadth of the science of healthcare itself, is the increased complexity in its payment, oversight, and regulation. Since the advent of risk adjustment, quality oversight, utilization monitoring, and compliance systems, the complexity continues to climb. Risk adjustment has introduced a broad set of payment-relevant systems that utilize over 15,000 disease classifications, a number which is expected to grow with the shift to ICD-10. Quality programs such as Healthcare Effectiveness Data and Information Set, or HEDIS, (which contains 83 measures of quality), Quality Assurance Reporting Requirements, or QARR (containing 67 measures), group practice reporting option (containing 33 measures) and Medicare's Star program (containing 46 measures) add further complexity. Describing the regulatory requirements surrounding these programs requires more than 20,000 pages. All these factors combined are resulting in an increasingly complex healthcare landscape where participants need to be equipped with the appropriate toolsets, so as to allow for intuitive information consumption in order to simplify and streamline decision making.

          The shift to value-based healthcare combined with increasing digitization and complexity drives a growing and continuous need for analysis of the underlying and resulting data in order to inform clinical, research, and business decision-making with actionable, data-driven insights.

Problems Our Clients Face

          As the U.S. healthcare market continues to transform, the aforementioned industry trends are driving fundamental changes in payment and delivery models, as well as technology requirements. These changes have set into motion a number of significant challenges faced by our clients. We believe that we are well-positioned and have the solutions to help clients not only adapt to, but thrive within, the new healthcare landscape.

          Understanding and Improving Clinical Quality Outcomes.     Quality and value-based, capitated programs are directly tied to clinical and quality outcomes which need to be measured at the individual patient level. These outcome requirements are designed to monitor a populations' compliance with industry accepted healthcare processes and healthcare outcomes goals, patients' satisfaction with the healthcare that they receive, and the effective operation of healthcare practice groups. Clinical and quality outcomes measurement programs require the detailed and highly granular reporting of the care sought and delivered to each patient within an overall population to allow for the accurate calculation of population quality metrics. Industry accreditation organizations such as NCQA, Utilization Review Accreditation Committee, or URAC, Pharmacy Quality Alliance, or

82


Table of Contents

PQA, National Quality Forum, or NQF, and medical societies looking to provide thought leadership on behalf of their patients, produce quality measures utilized by the industry. These measures have been adopted directly or in modified versions by federal and state regulations, private sector employers, and in shared-risk and accountable care contracts, in ways that drive significant financial incentives and consequences in the setting of strong positive or negative performance respectively. The results of these quality measurements drive significant incentives and consequences, influencing more than an estimated $3 billion in quality-related payments annually.

          Understanding the True Health Status of Patients.     The ability to establish the appropriate treatment protocol among multiple physicians, ensure that patients are supported with the correct care resources, monitor for the proper patient-relevant quality metrics, and determine the overall population risk is contingent on the ability to become accurately aware of a patients' disease and comorbidity status. Additionally, inaccuracies in disease status awareness impede resource planning, provider network design efforts, and financial projections. Furthermore, new payment models are designed to adjust the payments based upon the overall population illness burden of the patients in any particular plan. This is known as risk adjustment payments. There are multiple risk adjustment payment models across Medicare Advantage, managed Medicaid, ACA Health Insurance Exchanges, or HIX, and private sector contracts. Risk adjustment also impacts ACO shared savings calculations. Risk adjustment payments are governed by a complex set of rules using thousands of diagnosis and procedure codes, depending on the specific risk adjustment model. All together, having detailed and highly granular reporting of the disease and comorbidities of each patient is essential for care, quality, and financial performance today.

          Understanding and Improving Utilization.     Utilization, which is the cost incurred in the delivery of care, has increasingly become a focus in healthcare. Within fixed payment models, the ability to pass cost increases onto customers has materially decreased or altogether disappeared. Under new legislation, health plans are required to submit data on the percentage of revenue collected from health insurance premiums that is spent on clinical services and quality improvement, which is also more commonly known as the MLR. The MLR rules are designed to ensure that premiums received by insurers are primarily spent towards patient care and not directed towards administrative activities or excess profit. If health plans fail to meet the MLR thresholds, they are required to rebate the customer. If the cost of care exceeds the MLR threshold, however, health plans must absorb the shortfall. Given the importance of accurately reporting the MLR and managing the underlying healthcare costs, many health plans enter into complex arrangements with key providers in their networks through shared risk arrangements and performance bonus programs to help manage costs, to drive improvements in patient health, and to achieve long-term utilization containment and quality goals. As a result, the MLR rules impact multiple constituents of the healthcare community, from payors and providers to pharmaceutical companies, PBMs, and other cost-center elements of the healthcare landscape.

          Complying with Increasingly Complex Regulatory Requirements.     Federal and state regulation and compliance is increasing and becoming ever more complex. The regulatory obligations are impacting the entire healthcare delivery landscape, from individual practice groups and payors, to process and technology support vendors, all with the responsibility to adequately protect the privacy of patients and the manner in which services are provided, payments are made, and data is utilized, among other goals. This regulatory burden is intense, with agencies at nearly every level of government regulating the activities of organizations participating within the healthcare marketplace. The breadth, complexity, and intensity of regulation require these organizations to focus nearly every activity through a compliance lens in order to meet the data-intensive regulatory reporting requirements.

83


Table of Contents

          Enabling and Empowering the Consumer.     Historically, insurance companies did not offer healthcare plans directly to the consumer, but typically through larger programs sponsored by an employer or government agency. That has changed where now individuals can buy coverage, select clinicians and hospitals, and directly research implications of specific medications, procedures, and treatment courses. As a result, new solutions are put in place to assist the consumer. For example, the U.S. government has created a Five-Star Quality Rating system designed specifically to help consumers compare the quality of the different types of services a healthcare plan offers in order to make a more informed purchasing decision. Payors are now incentivized to engage with customers on an individual level and use the increasingly granular data around personal demographics and preferences to design new plans. Physicians and hospitals are now incentivized to pay attention to quality, cost, and outcome metrics which are increasingly available to consumers. In addition, through the advancement of technology, individuals are increasingly participating in the quantified-self movement in which they can self-monitor their key health metrics, creating immense amounts of new health data that can assist in providing higher quality care. This shift to a more informed and engaged consumer is resulting in new challenges and opportunities for how practice groups, payors, employers, pharmaceutical companies, retail pharmacies, and other healthcare constituents interact with consumers.

          Unlocking the Value of Data through Actionable Interventions.     The key commonality among the changes in the healthcare landscape is the importance of highly granular data. However, data by itself has limited usefulness without the right technology and systems in place to analyze and act on it and drive meaningful action. We believe that the leveraging of data is the critical differentiator for deriving meaningful insight and turning that insight into action to drive valuable impact across the healthcare landscape. However, in today's healthcare technology environment, much of this data goes unrecorded in a structured or meaningful way in paper based and electronic medical record systems, unintegrated with other pertinent data related to the patient's events or conditions, and unanalyzed for the purposes of driving improvements in care and affordability.

          Easily Deploying and Interoperating Platforms at Scale.     The ability to receive, seamlessly integrate, and accurately process extremely large-scale data flows efficiently and at high speeds is increasingly important and necessary for the healthcare industry. Data integration and processing in massive scale within the healthcare landscape is plagued by issues of highly disparate and "dirty" data characteristics. This is a significant barrier which prevents the various components of the healthcare landscape from effectively communicating and coordinating with one another to deliver higher quality care. For example, hospitals and insurance companies which have business across different states and markets face an increasingly uphill task of establishing an infrastructure and capability to assimilate, integrate and process all the disparate healthcare data they are generating. Despite billions of dollars in investment, the data and information systems resident within hospitals, physician practices, pharmacy benefit programs, urgent care centers, laboratory systems, and the other components of the healthcare landscape remain largely disconnected from each other. Interoperability frequently requires systems that add additional cost, time delay, or actions outside of the ordinary workflow. Overcoming this in scale is integral to managing large patient populations efficiently and effectively.

          The need to fully aggregate, organize, integrate, and analyze healthcare data — and translate the resulting insight into actionable and meaningful impact — is a critical challenge that the healthcare industry will continue to face for years to come. Our platform provides a solution to help address our clients' challenges and drive meaningful improvements in the clinical quality outcomes and financial performance across a wide expanse of our society's healthcare landscape.

84


Table of Contents

Our Market Opportunity

          We believe that our opportunity is significant and growing. According to a January 2013 McKinsey report, utilizing data analytics could reduce healthcare costs in the United States by $300 billion to $450 billion, or 12% to 17% of the total U.S. healthcare costs today. The McKinsey illustration below, from a January 2013 report, describes the five key areas where using advanced analytics can impact the healthcare system.

GRAPHIC

          The ability to aggregate, integrate, and analyze data in massive scale and apply garnered insights in a manner that achieves meaningful impact is crucial for healthcare payors (e.g., health plans and integrated health delivery systems), clinical providers (e.g., hospitals, ACOs, and physicians), pharmaceutical and life sciences companies, and consumers. We estimate that our addressable market for these capabilities serving these healthcare constituents to be approximately $83.8 billion. We believe that the market opportunity for our current platform offering within the payor market, the historical focus of our company, is approximately $10.6 billion. This does not include our current platform offering being applied to other segments of the market, in which, with respect to clinical providers and pharmaceutical and life sciences companies, we have begun to provide, and are actively providing, services to clients. According to industry sources, the market for software and related services is approximately $14.0 billion within the U.S. payor market. We believe that as analytics continue to demonstrate greater value within the U.S. payor landscape, the market will expand commensurately. As we continue to build and launch new capabilities, we believe it will provide a significantly larger value opportunity within this same payor space. For providers, industry sources estimate that software and related services represent a $32.3 billion U.S. market size. In the global pharmaceutical and life-sciences market, IDC, in a 2013 report, estimates a $30.9 billion market size for total software and services spend in 2013. In the consumer market an October 2013 Research and Markets report estimates a $6.6 billion global market size for mobile health

85


Table of Contents

applications and solutions. As with our other market segments, we believe that analytics will also drive a significant expansion in the consumer market.

GRAPHIC

          In addition, the pressures that face the U.S. healthcare market are not unique, as other communities around the world are facing aging populations and growing pressures in the sustainable affordability of healthcare. With aging populations, an increase in those inflicted with chronic ailments that require more healthcare spending, government initiatives to increase the access to care in both industrialized and emerging markets, and treatment advancements expected to drive sector expansion, the pressure to reduce healthcare costs is escalating. We believe that our capabilities are highly applicable to other developed and developing countries around the globe, which we believe presents a significant future opportunity for us.

Our Platforms

          Our platforms are informed by deep clinical insights through our combination of industry-leading subject matter expertise and extensive proprietary datasets. Through the application of our

86


Table of Contents

platforms, we help our clients achieve large-scale insight and meaningful improvement in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance.

GRAPHIC

          In deploying our technology, our clients want us to synthesize opaque, convoluted, and disparate data into actionable information aligned with individualized goals and, in turn, empower a patient and provider intervention platform that achieves the realization of their goals in a measurable way. The diagram below illustrates the components of our technology platforms.

GRAPHIC

87


Table of Contents

          Our platforms' capabilities are currently engaged by nearly 100 clients supporting approximately 200 patient populations that leverage our ability to analyze and improve clinical and quality outcomes and financial performance. These platforms are applied in a variety of environments with many additional applications of the technologies being planned.

          Data Integration.     Datasets and the management of data are part of our core strengths, which give us insight into how a patient, provider, or population is doing. It grants us both relative and absolute insight, and informs the construction of new capabilities, predictive models, and impact predictions. It speeds our time to client impact, decreases the burden on clients choosing to do business with us, and empowers our achievement of mission and results.

          We believe that our enterprise-scale data integration and management processes are a critical capability in achieving a material improvement in clinical quality outcomes and financial performance in healthcare. We integrate data seamlessly and securely into our systems through our proprietary ETL tools and processes. This system manages the process of defining and configuring thousands of industry data feeds from our clients and partners (depicted in the second diagram on page 86 above as EHR, laboratory, pharmacy, patient reported, claims, paper-based medical records, biometric, and hospital data feeds respectively, as examples), manages the data processing workflow, and monitors the ongoing provision and quality of data through the application of more than 2,000 data integrity checks.

          In addition to being maintained and tagged within client-specific data lakes, data we receive in the course of providing our services are statistically de-identified and stored in our MORE 2 Registry. As of September 30, 2014, this registry contained more than 9.1 billion medical events from more than 118 million unique patients, 744,000 physicians, and 244,000 clinical facilities, touching 98.2% of all U.S. counties and Puerto Rico and growing at a rate of approximately 43.3% annually since 2000. The MORE 2 Registry goes beyond just claims data to include information about demographics, enrollment, diagnoses, procedures, pharmacy, laboratory results, and deep medical record clinical data and presents a significant representative mix of commercial, HIX Marketplace, Medicare Advantage, and managed Medicaid care plan patients. The following is a sample of various components within our MORE 2 Registry.

 

Patient Demographic Data

 

Benefits Data

 

Medical Record Documentation

 

Encounter and Procedural Data

 

Operating Room, Procedure,

 

Pharmacy Data

 

Discharge Summary,

 

Imaging Report Data

 

Emergency Room Records

 

Laboratory & Pathology Data

 

Electronic Health Record Data

 

Durable Medical Equipment Data

 

Health Risk Assessment Data

 

Self-Reported Data

 

Practitioner Profile Data

 

Social History Data

 

Claim Diagnostic Data

 

Activities of Daily Living (ADL)

 

Eligibility and Enrollment Data

 

Cost Data

          Advanced Analytics.     For years we have developed, honed, and scaled a portfolio of sophisticated analytics. Applying our team's deep subject matter expertise in compute processing, data architecture, statistics, medical sciences, healthcare policy, and leveraging the billions of medical events within our significant propriety datasets, we believe that we have developed one of the most advanced analytical platforms within the industry, as well as a culture and set of analytical toolsets that serve to rapidly innovate and expand our platform. Examples of the innovative analytics powered by this combination of data and processing capabilities include:

    Disease and comorbidity presence and closure probability determination analytics:   Arriving at an accurate understanding, documentation, and codification of the disease states of patients is critical. In addition, through a proper understanding of each patient's needs, care

88


Table of Contents

      can be more effectively guided and delivered, quality achieved, and financial implications understood. In order to guide the efficient use of resources to clarify the disease state of each patient across the landscape of tens of thousands of codes, analytics are employed to predictively determine whether a disease or comorbidity is being overlooked or is progressing at a rate or severity otherwise not noted. Analytics that transcend a single point in time, location, or point of view to take into consideration a more holistic view both in absolute terms (i.e. solely with the patient data in mind) and relative terms (i.e. taking into consideration millions of other similar and different cases) can be achieved. In addition to determining the potential presence of specific disease and comorbidities, our analytics can be applied to determine the statistical probability of successfully confirming and resolving such a potential gap between known and suspected disease conditions. In this way, resource prioritization can be achieved.

    Clinical and quality outcomes gap presence and closure probability determination analytics:   Every patient, whether healthy or acutely, or chronically ill, needs a specific set of preventative or treatment-based healthcare services in periods specific to each patient's clinical profile. Additionally, patients with specific conditions, such as diabetes, need specific elements of care such as blood sugar testing, medication compliance, and examinations to detect complications of diabetes. Standards within the industry around quality of care have been created by organizations such as NCQA, URAC, PQA, NQF, and medical societies looking to provide thought leadership on behalf of their patients. In order to help guide patients and their physicians in addressing the preventative care and treatment needs of each patient, our predictive analytics are employed to determine each patient's clinical profile, their compliance with treatment protocols and quality measure standards, and how these match up to established quality standards. Further, our analytics are not only focused on determining accurate quality measure profiles, but also on predicting which measures that are unfulfilled today will become resolved on their own by the actions of the patient or provider independent of any new intervention. Not only do these analytics empower better quality care, but they make care more cost effective, by suggesting the avoidance of unnecessary testing, diagnostics, or treatment, that may not benefit the patient or change the patient's clinical course based upon historical patient behavior.

    Medication compliance and persistence analytics:   Critical management of many chronic conditions is the effective utilization of prescription drugs to stabilize disease progression, ease symptoms, and facilitate healing. However, many barriers exist to patients reliably filling their prescriptions and taking the medications that their physician has prescribed, including the cost of treatment, the side effects of treatment, and the patient's engagement in the treatment process. In order to determine which patients are the most likely to achieve compliance with their prescribed treatment, the least likely, and susceptible to influence, we apply predictive models that examine patients against their historical behavior patterns and clinical profiles to guide the right resources to the right patient in order to maximize medication compliance and persistence.

    Principally Relevant Provider (PRP) determination analytics:   In order to best engage a patient with the healthcare delivery system, it is important to identify the physician whom the patient considers to be his or her PRP with respect to specific issues needing attention. Particularly important for patients with chronic conditions or complex issues that see multiple physicians, the determination of which physician possesses the greatest bond can make a significant difference when seeking to assist the patient with resolution of an identified concern. In some cases, for instance, the patient's health plan assigned primary care provider may or may not be the physician that has established a trusted care provider relationship with the patient. Rather, a patient's key specialist may be most applicable to

89


Table of Contents

      address the patient's needs and to engage the patient in effective self-management. We analyze utilization patterns, follow-up patterns, treatment compliance patterns, and other patient behaviors to help identify the provider that is most relevant to address specific issues which the patient may need addressed within their care plan.

    Targeted intervention timing optimization analytics:   While the clinical lives of patients always present opportunities for improvement, the presence of a gap does not necessarily mean that such gap should be acted upon with high intensity, or even acted upon at all depending upon the historical utilization patterns of the patient. Through predictive models that examine the historical behavior patterns of the patient in combination with the gaps that need to be addressed, optimal intervention timing can be achieved to allow the patient to address his or her gap without external intervention based upon their preferences in utilizing the healthcare system, suggesting the intervention occur only after the patient would have been expected to act on their own. Often watchful waiting may be the most appropriate recommendation. By watchfully waiting and evaluating the patient's self-management of his or her issue, resources can be applied only after the patient has demonstrated a failure or delay in acting themselves. Through successful intervention timing analytics, multiple goals can be achieved: cost avoidance (by not undertaking costly interventions that may not have been needed), confusion and frustration avoidance (by not accidently directing a patient or provider to undergo an intervention when the same was imminently being done), and resource planning (by having insight into when during a year an intervention is most likely expected to be needed).

    Targeted intervention venue and logistics optimization analytics:   For those patients who have been identified with a gap that needs to be addressed, in order to cost effectively deliver the appropriate care and achieve gap closure, the right intervention tool must be selected and deployed to effectively address the specific patient and their needs. This avoids deploying a low cost activity, such as a message or phone call, when such an intervention has little or no likely or predictable ability to achieve gap closure, while also avoiding deploying high cost activities, such as a home visit or emergency room visit, when the gap could have been easily addressed through a scheduled appointment at a convenient retail clinic or provider office. Applying analytics to determine the right venue for gap closure, sensitive to the cost profile and effectiveness of each, is critical for achieving cost effective and high quality healthcare.

    Gap resolution valuation determination and prioritization analytics:   Because patients have multiple gaps and needs, particularly those patients with chronic conditions, it is important to prioritize which gaps need to be understood by the patient and addressed in a manner that increases their engagement and self-management capability, without overwhelming the patient or provider. As such, analytics must be employed throughout the year to evaluate the unresolved gaps of each patient and prioritize the resolution of such gaps based upon the combined likelihood of closure and the ultimate value of closure to the patient and their health plan. By understanding the context of each gap in light of the patient's full clinical profile and by understanding the patient's situation in light of the health plan's quality metrics and financial performance, gaps can be valued and prioritized to make sure that the most important gaps are known and addressed at the right time for each patient.

    Population simulation analytics:   We apply analytical processes to create propensity-matched patient cohorts from our MORE 2 Registry to simulate the characteristics of patients, their behavior, their providers, and how these factors translate into their utilization of healthcare resources, financial performance, and the achievement of clinical quality and outcomes goals. This simulation process allows us to effectively provide a control group for demonstrating the outcomes trajectory of such patients in comparison to populations that

90


Table of Contents

      we manage to highlight performance variations. This simulation process also allows us to understand these populations and design effective tools for improving their quality of care and clinical outcomes. Additionally, these simulations allow us to bring new technology capabilities and associated products to market more quickly, accurately, and cost effectively. Lastly, these simulations allow us to gain insight into how a potential client population may perform, enabling us to have an additional differentiator during a sales process.

    Relative Comparative Analytics:   An increasing number of measurement, incentive, shared savings and reimbursement programs are based upon "budget neutral," "zero sum games," and other relative or comparative models. Using our data and analytics capabilities, we can inform the relative comparison of population and cohort performance levels to assist in guiding strategic investment decisions. More importantly, we can perform these analytics during a relevant date of service period so that our clients can gain insight into how they are performing and how they can make changes within their patient and provider groups to improve their outcomes while there is still time within the relevant date of service period to achieve improvement. In the absence of comparative analytics, many organizations would otherwise use a previous year's results to guide changes — a set of data that often does not even become available until well into a year, let alone representing information that is long outdated and largely irrelevant when performance is not only based upon how one is doing, but moreover based upon how one is doing in comparison to others.

          Intervention Platforms.     Our data-driven intervention platforms are toolsets and services that enable our clients to take the insights derived from our analytics and implement solutions at the patient and provider level (depicted in the second diagram on page 86 above as being via hard copy and electronic mail, interconnected EHR systems, telephonic interactions, in patients' homes, through mobile devices, at dedicated patient centers, through web-enabled decision support tools, in retail pharmacies, and in traditional clinical locations, as examples) in order to achieve meaningful impact with the patient and provider. Some clients utilize our analytical outputs to achieve value on their own. Others license our data-driven intervention platform to support their ability to achieve data-driven impact. Yet others engage us to not only license our data-driven intervention platform, but also provide the personnel services necessary to leverage these toolsets and actually achieve the patient and provider-level impact. Examples of our data-driven intervention platform tools include:

    point of care tools that provide patient-level insight to the healthcare provider, which guides the provider through precise data-driven topics, issues, and decision support to aid in the assessment, documentation, and care of a specific respective patient. For example, our analytics may identify that a patient's diabetes has potentially progressed — possibly due to a non-compliance with their medications. Our decision support tools provide a mechanism for this information to be made known to a provider in such a way as to help them know that a patient visit may be warranted, aid them during the patient clinical encounter to efficiently determine the situation with the patient, support proper documentation, reporting, and outcomes measurement;

    communication tools that support a wide range of notifications and interactions with patients and providers via phone calls, mail, SMS messages, e-mails, etc., at the appropriate level of implied education and language to aid in the process of achieving patient and provider actions. It also may include education outreach which coordinates the communications with health plan patients regarding their health issues and to support self-management of their conditions by guiding them to supplemental resources, coaching and health literacy;

91


Table of Contents

    supplemental patient encounter tools that facilitate the coordination of data-driven patient encounters for those who are unable to participate in traditional office encounter venues; and

    medical record data tools that facilitate electronic medical record data pulls, remote accessing, and clinical facility communications for site, scheduling, medical record data collection, abstraction, review, quality control, archiving, and process tracking — regardless of the underlying medical record data medium (e.g., digital or paper).

          Business Processing.     Our business processing toolsets are made up of a powerful business intelligence system and comprehensive data warehousing to provide historical and current data insight, reporting, and benchmarking to support multiple client business needs such as government-mandated data filings, financial planning, and compliance requirements. Examples of our business processing tools include:

    Data Warehousing and Business Intelligence.   We provide toolsets that enable comprehensive warehousing and management of healthcare data in raw, native formats as well as processed, high-integrity data. We provide the flexibility and accommodation for healthcare practice groups who have varying levels of data sophistication — from advanced electronic connectivity (i.e. remote medical practices) to onsite digitization and collection, to self-provision of medical records via fax, mail and electronic mail allowing for clinical data collection throughout the U.S. These datasets are presented to our clients' users through business intelligence systems that include flexible dashboards, parameterized reports, and ad hoc querying capabilities for summarizing key analytics, allowing for the investigation of data trends and deeper data segregation and analyses, and access to key benchmarking information. These data warehousing and business intelligence toolsets are built on industry leading technologies to integrate our clients' data (e.g., provider, facility, patient, enrollment, benefits, lab results, pharmacy, claims, quality scores, financial metrics, performance forecasts, etc.) and the data results and benchmark information from our MORE 2 Registry. We are able to provide our clients with the ability to gain insight into both their own data and their own data in comparison to our large integrated dataset to help improve the quality of care provided to patients, drive financial performance, and aid in strategic business processes of the client organization.

    Data Management and Submission.   Leveraging our data warehousing toolsets, our solutions help our clients to manage their data and translate their data into the formats necessary for, among other needs, submission to government entities in support of quality and outcomes measurement and revenue determinations, and provision to their various internal and external business processes. These data management solutions address the formulation of data submission files in summary and patient level-data format as required by regulatory bodies, as well as the workflow processes to receive submission response files to support the reconciliation of data submissions, corrections to data submitted with response issues, and resubmission processes. These processes operate in an integrated manner with our business intelligence solutions to provide our clients visibility into the details of their data submissions at the population level, the patient level, the attributed provider level, and for user defined custom cohorts.

Illustrative Workflow and Patient Case Study

          The following is an illustrative workflow of how a healthcare organization (whether a public or private health plan, integrated healthcare delivery system, independent physician or practice association, or other provider/patient organization) may leverage our platforms.

92


Table of Contents

    Stage 1: Data Integration.   Following the engagement of a new healthcare organization client, large amounts of data are integrated from multiple disparate sources within the healthcare organization related to patients, physicians, quality, payments, regulatory files, and clinical facilities. Other data sources are interconnected from sources such as hospitals, laboratories, pharmacy benefit plans, EHRs, and physicians. The initial data feeds typically "backfill" (i.e. provide for data pertaining to prior periods of time) for several years. Our platform facilitates rapid initial integration of this data, applying more than 1,100 data integrity checks. The data integrity analyses compare the potential erroneous presence, accidental absence, and potential errors within the data to our large scale comparative data sources containing billions of medical events from thousands of current and historical sources to aid in improving data quality and identifying potential gaps and errors within the new client data flows. Once integrated, data flows are scheduled at standard intervals thereafter. Some data are scheduled for monthly updates while other data flows update transactionally, whenever a data source event occurs such as a patient clinical encounter. All data connecting through our data integration platform, both structured and unstructured, drop into our data repository, which we call our data lake, where they can easily be accessed by all of our platforms — analytical platform, intervention platform, and business processes platform.

    Stage 2: Advanced Analytics.   With data resident within our data lake, a series of analytical processes are applied. Key analytics begin determining the current disease status, comorbidity status, quality status, and utilization status of the patient, provider, facility, or population based on actual available data (referred to as the known current state of the patient, provider, facility, or population). A set of predictive analytics is then applied to derive models for where the broader datasets suggest the patient, provider, facility, or population have progressed to outside of the otherwise obvious data indications (referred to as the predicted current state of the patient, provider, facility, or population). Informed by our broader datasets, yet another set of predictive analytics is then applied to derive models suggesting where the patient, provider, facility, or population will progress to with respect to the analyzed conditions or issues (referred to as the predicted future state of the patient, provider, facility, or population). Examining differences between known current state, predicted current state, predicted future state, and what is referred to as the desired state pertaining to the respective goal, allows for gaps between those various states to be identified. Each gap between a current or predicted state and a desired state can then be analyzed further. To do this, for each gap, a series of analytics is undertaken to determine the (i) probability that the gap is a real gap, (ii) the value of the gap being resolved, (iii) the way through which the gap would be most likely able to be resolved, (iv) the venue at which the gap would best be resolved, (v) the timing which would be best for resolving the gap, and (vi) the predictability of the gap being able to be resolved. By undertaking these various analytical processes, not only can the field of opportunities for improvement be identified and the concrete approaches to their resolution be weighed, but also the business rules pertaining to prioritization and return on investment, or ROI, thresholds can be calculated and applied.

    Stage 3: Intervention Platforms.   With gaps identified for resolution and concrete approaches to their resolution determined, a series of platforms can then support the resolution process. For some clients this stage may be handled through their in-house resources, while for others, the client requests us to leverage our intervention platforms to achieve the realization of impact value sought by the analytical processes. For these, guided by the insights garnered from the various analytical processes, the appropriate intervention platforms can be employed to interface the right resources with the patient, provider, facility, or population

93


Table of Contents

      to achieve the desired goal within the business rules pertaining to prioritization and ROI thresholds.

    Stage 4: Business Processes.   With actions taken by the various intervention platforms (or, in some cases, by the client's resources), resulting outcome data is then re-combined with the data resulting from all stages of our processes to inform business intelligence platforms, regulatory data submission processes, financial reporting processes, and other business processes that ultimately reflect the value achieved and complete the process initially sought by the client.

          The following is an illustrative example of how this translates to an individual patient.

          Applying the stages of our platforms, a client engaged us for the improvement of quality and financial performance within their managed Medicaid population. Following data integration, our analytics identify that a patient's diabetes is believed to be worsening rapidly. Analytics predict that the diabetes is now likely out of control and has likely progressed to where there is concern for kidney, eye, and nerve complications. Unfortunately, the analytics also identify that there is no significant evidence that these predicted comorbidities have yet been identified or addressed by the physicians within the health plan's physician network.

          Our models gain a high level of confidence that these concerns are valid and that the value to the patient, physician, and health plan is significant. Further analytics determine that historical care patterns and the patient's activities strongly suggest that the patient has the strongest relationship for diabetes-related matters with their OB/GYN (and not their endocrinologist, dermatologist, internist, or cardiologist). The information is sent to our data-driven intervention platforms. The platforms rely on analytical outputs which predicted that this patient would respond best to a phone call encouraging a physician visit with her OB/GYN while the information is concurrently made available within ePASS®, our provider portal for patient clinical encounters. Alternatively, the patient could have been seen at a retail pharmacy with a walk-in clinic utilizing our technology platform or the physician could have received notification and accessed the information within their EHRs. During the encounter, a patient profile constructed by our data and analytics provides the OB/GYN with past medical history, medications, laboratory results, and the analytical outputs determined by our analytical platform indicating the specific areas for assessment concern, pointing out gaps in quality measures, indicating and supporting important relevant screening.

          Supported by the data and insights of our platform, the patient's diabetes progression is diagnosed. Additional goals set by the health plan around quality, screening, and patient education are achieved. A care plan is put into place. The patient gains an increased bond with his or her provider and health plan. The patient's data continues to be analyzed in the days, weeks, and months that follow. The impact results are made available to the healthcare organization showing the decreased use of the emergency room and hospital admissions by the patient, improved quality scores, and greater risk score data accuracy. The resulting decreased utilization costs, improved premium payments, incremental quality incentive payments, and improved patient retention drive material financial impact for the healthcare organization — allowing them to improve benefits, lower premiums, and, together with enhanced patient quality scores, better succeed in competitive marketing.

          While the illustrative example was focused upon managed care client applications, our platforms also support multiple additional client examples as presented below in shorter form:

    Pharmaceutical Industry.   For the pharmaceutical company seeking to successfully transition from the consumption-based industry model to the performance-based industry model, our platforms can assist in empowering pharmaceutical companies to construct highly focused programs specifically aimed at patients who are failing to be identified as candidates for

94


Table of Contents

      improved diagnostics or treatments; are at high risk of complications or poor outcomes; or are non-compliant on specific treatment programs.

    Research.   For the contract research organization, or CRO, seeking to increase its speed, efficiency, and capabilities in a highly competitive marketplace, our platforms provide a deep and unique data source for research, clinical trial design modeling, and physician identification. Our intervention platforms can support Phase 3 and Phase 4 clinical trial processes, highly granular clinical data abstraction, directed clinical encounter activities, and a network of near-real time data aggregation that can dramatically differentiate a CRO.

Our Competitive Strengths

          We believe that our operational and financial success is based on the following key strengths:

          Industry-Leading Analytics.     We have over a decade of demonstrated performance and leadership in disease and comorbidity identification analytics, predictive model analytics, patient and provider intervention prioritization analytics, quality outcomes analytics, and a host of additional analytical and data-driven processes. Based on our experience in the industry and our interactions with existing and prospective clients, we believe that very few other organizations, if any, are able to offer the depth and breadth of data-driven analytical insights, tools, and actionable interventions that our platforms are able to offer.

          Industry-Leading Data Asset.     We maintain one of the industry's largest independent datasets in our MORE 2 Registry, representing, as of September 30, 2014, more than 118 billion medical events from more than 9.1 million unique patients, 744,000 physicians, and 244,000 clinical facilities, touching 98.2% of all U.S. counties and Puerto Rico. The primary source nature of the contributing data, the clinical content depth of certain elements, the analytically-derived enrichments, the significant data integrity, and the ability to maintain accurate identification of entries and patient matching over time regardless of data source and chronology (a valuable characteristic within our datasets known as longitudinal matching) — all combine to create a unique and valuable asset. We believe that these datasets serve as a significant differentiator, informing analytical and product strength design, population simulations, health outcomes research, patient engagement, and both speed-to-market and speed-to-impact capabilities. As of September 30, 2014, our MORE 2 Registry has expanded at a rate of approximately 3.0% compounding monthly, or 43.3% annually, since 2000 as illustrated below.

GRAPHIC

95


Table of Contents

          Fully Integrated End-To-End Solution Delivery.     Our platform is able to turn data into insights and insights into actionable interventions. Our platform covers a comprehensive range of services for our clients turning raw data into meaningful impact and allowing our clients to realize intervention benefits immediately following integration of our platform. The ability of our platform to integrate disparate and highly complex data to derive impactful and actionable insights has enabled us to bridge the gap from analytics to practical applications on a vast scale.

          Scale of Organically Developed Platform.     We have developed a highly efficient and scalable data and analytics platform that has successfully scaled to serve many of the nation's largest health plans as well as hundreds of separate patient populations concurrently. This platform has been developed on one common code base, supporting strong interoperability within our platform, efficiency in association with innovating and expanding our platform capabilities, and establishing both beneficial predictability and reliability when operated at high levels of load. We operate enterprise-grade datacenters complemented by a cloud technology based architecture that allows massive, on-demand capacity expansion and speed of execution. We integrate directly with the EHRs of many clinical facilities, bringing analytics and insight to the point of care and decreasing the process burden on providers and clinical facilities. We have a leading nationwide intervention platform services footprint and are able to support our client partners in more than 98.2% of all U.S. counties and Puerto Rico, as of September 30, 2014.

          Subject Matter Expertise.     We have, and plan to continue to cultivate, a culture of fostering domain expertise. We maintain a dedicated research team comprised of industry experts and thought leaders, including physicians, as well as clinical, statistical, economical, and data research scientists, and field practitioners who focus on next-generation healthcare solutions and data applications. In addition, we empower our product groups with their own industry experts who focus on research and development in their respective product domains. This subject matter expertise and leading research capabilities position us to stay at the forefront of industry innovations in data-driven healthcare interventions. This concentration of highly relevant subject matter expertise is uncommon in the market, and contributes to both our capabilities and our being called upon by clients, partners, and industry-leaders to address challenging and important questions.

          Industry Innovator and Thought-Leader.     We invest considerable time and resources to produce ground-breaking research and strategically share it through industry publications, peer presentations, strategic relationships, and the media. Leveraging our MORE 2 Registry, we provide healthcare insights for diverse audiences, thus driving visibility and credibility, and providing significant recognition for our toolsets, capabilities and innovation. Our MORE 2 Registry is routinely featured at high-profile industry events and within influential publications, which we believe further reinforces our brand as an industry innovator and thought-leader.

          Long, Successful, Profitable Operating History.     We have been delivering value to our clients while gaining scale and profitability since 2006, the year of our reorganization as a C corporation. This scale and profitability has provided organizational stability, an empowerment to invest in ongoing research and development, an element of reassurance for existing clients and potential clients, and ready access to resources to meet our clients' needs. We have been able to accomplish this in a manner conducive to client partnership through a variety of means, including the self-financing of individual client upfront project integration and start-up fees.

          Trusted, Independent, and Unbiased Partner.     We are not owned or influenced by a health plan or private equity organization. As a result, our data and analyses remain truly independent, not biased to any single patient base, we are incentivized to be transparent with our clients, and we believe our goals are more fully aligned with the success of our clients.

96


Table of Contents

          We have grown by attracting clients, accumulating larger and more robust datasets, and developing more advanced analytics from this growing dataset that deliver increasingly valuable insights and impact. By providing increasingly valuable insights and performing increasingly effective patient and provider interventions we are able to deliver greater value to our clients. As our data asset continues to grow, our analytics and intervention solutions become even more effective and our clients realize even more value from our solutions. This in turn results in greater demand for our solutions and attracts new clients. We believe that this virtuous cycle provides us with a competitive position that cannot be easily replicated.

Growth Strategies

          Our objective is to continue to provide leading analytics and interventions platforms across the healthcare landscape while continuing to grow profitably. We intend to achieve this objective through the following key strategies:

          Deliver Increasing Value to Existing Clients.     We enjoy long term client relationships which entail multiple separate product engagements demonstrated by our average 4.7-year tenure for our top 10 clients with an aggregate of over 75 separate statements of work as of September 30, 2014. Additionally, we have approximately 80 client organizations that currently have only a limited number of services with us. Frequently we see clients that started with just one service with us realize the value that we are delivering and then expand their business with us to add additional services. We believe that we have a significant opportunity to deliver increasing value to our existing clients and this, in turn, will drive continued growth for us. As our clients recognize value and success as a result of working with our platforms, we frequently see them grow in their patient count and increase the number of products engaged with us — both of which result in our mutual success and growth. As we continue to deliver value to our clients, we plan to increase revenue from our existing clients by expanding their use of our platform, selling to other parts of their organizations, and selling additional analytical toolsets and services to them. Our pricing model allows us to grow incrementally along with our clients' growth. We are also able to introduce new healthcare plans that require additional functionality and insights as the healthcare market becomes more complex and the regulatory environment evolves, providing us with a substantial opportunity to increase the value of our client relationships.

          Continue to Grow Our Client Base.     We believe that we are still in the early stages of realizing our substantial opportunity to grow our client base. We intend to leverage our expertise and experience from the existing large client base to gain new clients through increased investment in our sales force and marketing efforts. In addition, by leveraging our sector expertise and thought leadership, we believe that we can increasingly become the partner of choice for our existing clients. The network effect created by delivering increasing client value and consequently expanding our brand and service value, coupled with our industry expertise, is also driving substantial inbound client interest.

          Continue to Innovate.     Our strength in applying advanced, big data, cloud-based data analytics and our proprietary datasets enable us to achieve increasingly more impactful results for our clients. In order to continue delivering meaningful results in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance across the healthcare landscape, we intend to continue to invest in research and development to further enhance our data analytics and intervention platforms. For example, we recently announced the acceleration of big data processing empowering our QSI® platform, enabling a significant functionality expansion in our clinical quality outcomes measurement capabilities supporting accelerated performance for HEDIS, Stars, QARR and other measurement and reporting standards. This advancement will also support the acceleration of our related predictive analytics capabilities. As a result, we expect our clients to experience significantly reduced cycle times, allowing for complex measure calculations at speeds

97


Table of Contents

which are more than 10 times faster than any other comparable solution which we are aware of in the healthcare industry.

          Continue Expanding into Adjacent Verticals.     We believe the application of advanced analytics and data extends well beyond our current market opportunities and provides additional adjacent market verticals for growth which include:

    Providers:   Physicians, practice groups, hospitals, and combinations of such providers are making a transition from a fee-for-service based healthcare model environment to a quality and value based healthcare model environment. As part of this, providers are entering into shared savings, shared risk, and other forms of arrangements with private and government payors. They are investing in the technology infrastructure needed to compete and survive in the changing healthcare environment. Many of the forces being applied to healthcare payors are being pushed downstream to the provider marketplace directly through contractual arrangements, and indirectly through traditional competitive forces. Our business intelligence platforms assist providers and provider organizations to understand the current status and projected implications of the complex arrangements that are increasingly governing their marketplace. In addition, our datasets, analytical tools, and clinical encounter engagement platforms can be applied to assist these providers and provider organizations to focus on delivery of high quality care and to succeed under the increasing pressure of these market forces.

    Pharmaceutical and Life Sciences:   The significant investment in drug and treatment development pipelines creates pressure within life sciences companies to focus on the areas of greatest need and opportunity, while growing their presence in the treatment process, from simply the creation of treatments, to the ongoing delivery and support of treatments that achieve desired outcomes. Our deep and growing healthcare datasets, analytical tools, and clinical encounter engagement platforms can be applied to assist life science companies in advancing their missions to improve healthcare by providing them the insights necessary for them to provide safe, effective, and affordable treatments for individuals and populations, informing the growth of their treatment portfolios and assisting in the delivery of treatment programs.

    Employer and Private Exchanges:   The growing cost of healthcare is putting pressure on employers to find creative ways to control costs while continuing to offer competitive benefits and attractive healthcare options to their employees. Our capabilities in analytics supporting the advancement of quality of care and cost effectiveness in healthcare can be applied to assisting employers in understanding and improving their populations' utilization of healthcare services to advance the design of innovative plan benefit packages, provider networks, and population management support programs.

    Direct-To-Consumer:   As consumers become increasingly interested in quantifying and improving their health, our capabilities can help them understand their relevant data and empower their ability to make better decisions in a broad range of health-related areas from informing and managing their own health-related decisions to selecting physicians, hospitals, and treatments that best fit their individual needs. Further, our datasets and connectivity with the payor and provider landscape can provide a valuable element to the consumer's increasing desire to monitor and manage their holistic healthcare profile.

          Expand Reach through Growing our Channel Partnerships.     While we have been successful in growing our business through our direct sales efforts, we believe there is a significant opportunity that exists for us to further expand our reach through channel partnerships. There are many organizations in the healthcare space outside of the traditional payor and provider space that have meaningful impact on the quality of healthcare, such as retail clinics, pharmaceutical companies,

98


Table of Contents

CROs, large technology solution providers, and consulting firms. We believe our platform is well positioned to empower these organizations with powerful data-driven analytics and intervention insights, which can benefit their end consumers through improved care and better outcomes. For example, we recently launched a partnership with Walgreens, the nation's largest drugstore chain. This partnership has allowed us to leverage our proprietary data assets and distinctive analytics capabilities to bolster Walgreens' Clinics point-of-care solutions by providing clinicians with access to predictive insights about a patient's health status and data-driven intervention considerations, resulting in more efficient and higher quality standard of patient care while reducing the cost of care.

          Continue to Leverage our Technology Partnerships.     The healthcare industry has traditionally lagged behind the technology innovation curve. Big data and high-performance analytics frameworks have not yet been widely adopted by the healthcare industry. We have been a leader in the use of these high-performance technologies and analytics in the healthcare industry. We have been closely collaborating with EMC and their federated companies of VMware and Pivotal on numerous infrastructure projects to integrate and enable modern high-performance compute and storage frameworks at the point of care. Our advanced data processing and analytics capabilities, coupled with infrastructure thought leadership from leading vendors such as EMC has enabled us to empower our clients with powerful data-driven solution offerings and further transform the use case of modern technologies across the evolving IT healthcare landscape.

          Expand Internationally.     Governments, corporations, and consumers worldwide face similar pressures as within the U.S. with respect to their healthcare systems. We believe that our capabilities are highly applicable to other countries around the world and we intend to invest in replicating our success in the U.S. market to other strategic countries and regions.

          Selectively Pursue Acquisitions.     We plan to selectively pursue acquisitions of complementary businesses, technologies, and teams that we expect to allow us to add new features and functionalities to our platform and accelerate the pace of our innovation and expansion into adjacent market spaces beyond what we can achieve organically.

          Leverage our Dynamic, Passionate, and Mission-Focused Culture.     We believe that our work must meet a higher standard. We believe that the analytics that we design, deliver, and support achieve an impact in the lives of real people — parents, spouses, partners, siblings, and children — making integrity and quality cornerstones of our culture. Our dedication to integrity and quality extends to the proprietary technology used for medical data integration, analysis, abstraction, and reporting. Even more importantly, this culture is embraced throughout our company.

          We hold ourselves to a high standard. We strive to ensure that each report, file, and dataset delivered to clients meets or exceeds superior standards of quality. We strive to ensure that each phone call, every patient encounter, and each customer encounter informed and supported by our analytics and platform meets or exceeds superior standards of quality. These values permeate our organization and drive our identity as a company that we believe drives growth and how we innovate, deliver our solutions to our clients, and attract and retain the best talent.

Our Technology

Big Data Platform

          Throughout the healthcare industry, data is captured from many different sources, and while standards for exchanging information between healthcare applications are emerging, much of the data associated with population health remains in disparate silos, in various formats, on paper, and is both interchanged and processed without automation. Where investments have been made in the

99


Table of Contents

digitization of health data, many of the resulting solutions remain "walled gardens" of information — data that is static and not easily shared or interpreted.

          Our big data technology platform was designed and developed to address these challenges. Our platform enables integration of any data source, on any hardware platform, in any data format at extremely high speeds. This advanced approach to delivering technology is comprehensive in that it provides for real-time capture, extremely rapid analytical processing and redistribution of health data. We believe that very few other healthcare technology platforms, if any, so effectively address the integration of the payor, the provider, and the patient, with high volume, at rapid velocity, with the same depth of data.

          We believe that our big data capabilities enable us to receive, integrate, and process extremely large-scale data flows at truly industry-leading speeds, creating what we believe to be a material market differentiator and value creator for us and our clients. While data integration and processing at scale within the healthcare landscape (known for its highly disparate and "dirty" data characteristics) are key technology barriers to many organizations, we believe that we have made these capabilities a true differentiator — we are able to onboard clients and maintain high velocity computes in industry-leading times.

          Our big data platform has been created through the use of internally created software coupled with industry-leading technology frameworks that are vendor-agnostic. We leverage modern big data frameworks such as Hadoop Distributed File System and Hadoop which enable our platform to store structured and unstructured data while making it readily accessible by our analytics engine. Our big data processing capabilities enable dramatic improvements in data integration and analytical cycle speed to value recognition to empower improvements for intelligent product development through the "real world" functional application. Our big data platform laid the foundation of the data fabric allowing integration into our analytical capabilities. We have moved analytics to the data instead of requiring the data to be brought to the analytics platform.

Data Intake

          Our platform receives information from multiple external sources that are loaded into our "data lake" in its native format. Files may be received through secure FTP, web services, and direct connections to external systems. Loading the data into the data lake in its native format ensures that we maintain all data as it is received and allows users to query the data directly in its structured or unstructured format.

          Processing data in its raw format presents many technological challenges. We have developed interactive data mapping technologies to support the mapping of the raw data files to staging structures used by our platform to convert data from its native format into a structured format that can be used by all processes on our platform. Once mapped, the data is run through multiple processes to standardize the data and perform data verification and integrity checks. For example, one source may provide person's gender using code values of "1" for male and "2" for female. Other clients may use values of "M" and "F" to represent the same data. Similarly, one source may send a specific laboratory result value as 7.25 while another source may fill in significant digits and send 7250. Our platform applies our data integrity analytics to convert the incoming data to values that are uniform across our entire platform.

          Our technology platform is built upon modern big data frameworks such as Hadoop Distributed File System and Hadoop which enables our platform to store structured and unstructured data while making it readily accessible by our analytics engine.

          Data access provided by our data lake leverages scalable application program interfaces, or APIs, and service based architecture techniques enabling access to the contextual data needed to perform many different types of analytics. An API is an application program interface, or software

100


Table of Contents

intermediary, that makes it possible for disparate systems to communicate and function with each other. Ultimately, data is provided to the analytics process and results are stored via service based requests to provide a scalable repository of source and results data.

Technology Infrastructure

          We believe that our track record of strong service is the result of our commitment to excellence and our devotion to maintaining one of the industry's most sophisticated technology infrastructures. We have made significant investments over the past decade to build an industry-leading enterprise-scale infrastructure capable of managing the heavy computing and storage requirements of our data-driven business. Today, we employ a combination of owned, virtualized data centers along with hosted facilities to enable seamless, secure, and scalable solutions nationwide.

          Our physical compute and storage infrastructure is deployed with a hybrid approach to cloud computing. Leveraging heavily virtualized infrastructure together with orchestration and automation tools, we have achieved tremendous capabilities within our private cloud environment. The following diagram provides a high-level overview of our key infrastructure elements.

GRAPHIC

      Our data and compute capacity is maintained within an interconnected set of infrastructure sets made up of two principal datacenters owned by us in the Washington Metro and Atlanta Metro region, and one co-located datacenter facility located in Northern Virginia, with the ability to interconnect agnostically to third-party cloud capacity providers such as those shown within the diagram. This macro architecture provides us a significant ability to maintain both enterprise-level capacity and redundancy, while also achieving significant flexibility and cost effectiveness for burst capacity needs.

          We have a proven track record in implementing virtualization as our current datacenters are over 85% virtualized using VMware technologies. Operations of the virtualization technologies are streamlined by the orchestration, automation, and reporting capabilities provided by our private cloud and integration with public cloud service providers. These technologies will be used to provide computing, storage, and networking components to the hosting environment and provide operational efficiencies and cost optimization for the corporation.

101


Table of Contents

          In partnership with EMC, VMware, and Pivotal, we have implemented a sophisticated hybrid cloud and service based application stack design, enabling "burst" capacity architecture to allow provider-agnostic utilization of public cloud capacity if such capacity is required. Our virtualization technology has been integrated with automation and orchestration technology to create a cloud environment that provides both Infrastructure and Platform as Service capabilities. These service based capabilities allow us to dynamically expand our compute capacity in real time and provide the business with a cost effective and nimble platform. By leveraging both private and public cloud offerings, we can provide efficient, elastic, and cost effective compute resources based on the operational needs of our clients. We believe we are pioneers in the use of big data technology and high performance compute technology stack at the point of care in our industry.

          Our platform is built utilizing an innovative enterprise infrastructure platform enabling robust performance scaling, strong security, high availability, and advanced business continuity options. The building blocks of this infrastructure consist of the following:

    Multiple data centers connected by redundant high-speed WAN connections;

    High competency and utilization of virtualization technologies;

    Rapid provisioning of computing capabilities to support the dynamic elasticity needed to support the variable computing needs of the application;

    Measured service to optimize resource utilization and provide transparency of the utilized services; and

    Available hosting facilities providing physical structure compliance with Federal Information Security Management Act, or FISMA, standards.

The following diagram provides a high-level view of our key platform elements.

GRAPHIC

102


Table of Contents

Disaster Recovery

          Our contingency program is designed to provide an immediate response and subsequent recovery from unplanned business disruptions. Supported by our Washington, DC Metro, Atlanta Metro, and Northern Virginia data centers, our contingency program provides a coordinated emergency response foundation across the organization. The program includes business continuity, emergency occupant, security incident response, and disaster recovery plans that encompass all areas of our technology and business operations. These interrelated processes align to provide maximum protection and risk mitigation. In addition to company-wide plans, specific details on event response and subsequent business recovery actions and activities are included within each respective business unit plan.

Network Operations Center

          We maintain a central network operations center, or NOC, where systems are monitored to ensure proper operation and capacity utilization. The NOC monitors and collects information about a multitude of technology operating metrics regarding system load and status. In conjunction with the rapid provisioning capability, automation, and standardization, the NOC provides us with the automated capabilities to oversee and manage our technology resources in order to meet business demands.

Infrastructure Certification and Compliance

          We leverage third party attestations to test and validate our technology controls and operating framework. Among these attestations, a nationally recognized professional services firm has conducted an annual Statement on Standards for Attestation Engagements, or SSAE, No. 16, Reporting on Controls at a Service Organization audit of our toolsets and infrastructure for the last several years. We also undergo third party audits and assessments as required by our clients.

Privacy Management and Data Security

          Protected health information is perhaps the most sensitive component of personal information. It is highly important that information about an individual's healthcare is properly and thoroughly protected from any inappropriate access, use and disclosure. Given the industry vertical in which we operate, we realize the importance of the safety and sensitivity of personal health information. We have been a trusted partner to our clients and are committed to ensuring the security and privacy of our client data, enterprise data, and our systems through the application of highly trained personnel, robust processes, and technology. Our privacy and security management includes:

    governance, frameworks, and models to promote good decision making and accountability. Our comprehensive privacy and security program is based on industry practices including those of the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the Control Objectives for Information and Related Technology, Defense Information Systems Agency, and FISMA;

    an internal security council, which advises on and prioritizes the development of information security initiatives, projects, and policies;

    a layered approach to privacy and security management to avoid single points of failure;

    ongoing evaluation of privacy and security practices to promote continuous improvement;

    use of safeguards and controls including: administrative, technical, and physical safeguards;

    collaboration with our clients on best security and privacy practices; and

    working closely with leading researchers, thought leaders, and policy makers.

103


Table of Contents

Our Platforms' Components

          Our platforms are composed of analytical and data-driven intervention components that collectively comprise a fully integrated suite of systems designed, developed, and maintained to achieve client value. The following are our key toolsets that we use to deliver our client solutions.

Data Integration Toolsets

          iPort™:     iPort is our data integration and management process toolset. This proprietary toolset leverages a decade of dataset extraction, transform, and load experience, in combination with data format insights gained from analysis of our extensive MORE 2 Registry dataset, to enable high volume data integration at enterprise scale. Applying more than 1,100 data integrity checks constructed from the analysis of data feeds that have constituted the 8.7 billion medical events within the MORE 2 Registry, iPort is able to manage data integration through an advanced exception rules processing — thus empowering both high throughput rates and accuracy. With data feed profiles monitoring for characteristics ranging from receipt timing, content, and format, to referential integrity, and trend consistency, iPort processes the integration of thousands of data feeds received by us while maintaining state-of-the-art security protocols and HIPAA compliance.

          EHR Integration Engine:     Our EHR interoperability is a capability that enables us to both (a) push patient-specific and provider-specific data and analytical results to EHR platforms, and (b) aggregate clinical data from patient-specific and provider-specific content within EHR platforms in a highly efficient manner. Designed to achieve these tasks within both cloud-based and single-install EHR environments, our interoperability enables both the capture of clinical data and the delivery of data-driven interventions at the clinical point-of-care within the workflow of the clinical environment.

Advanced Analytics Toolsets

          In addition to the innovative analytics capabilities discussed above under "— Our Platforms — Advanced Analytics," our data analytics platform includes the following key toolsets to facilitate our provision of data analytics services to our clients:

          Predictive Clinical Insight System (PCIS™).     PCIS identifies the diagnoses and comorbidities that may exist for a patient but which are incompletely or improperly reflected within the clinical profile of the patient as known to the patient's health plan. The PCIS system is designed to evaluate patients for undocumented conditions, worsening conditions, and uncoded conditions that are important for the effective ongoing management of the patient. Each of these gaps represents a potential incongruence between the "data picture" and the "true clinical picture" of the patient. These gaps, if unresolved, can prevent the proper care and resources to be directed to the respective patient, as well as cause health plans to recognize significant financial losses due to reimbursement inaccuracy, failed quality improvement goals, and utilization waste. Upon identifying each disease and comorbidity incongruence, PCIS generates and reports a potential impact, probability, and prioritization for the resolution of each gap. Evidence of unconfirmed diagnosis, worsening disease states, overlooked chronic conditions, implications of durable medical equipment, absences of coding specificity, and coding combinations are but a few examples of categorical analysis that are undertaken by PCIS.

          Quality Spectrum Insights Suite (QSI, QSFD and QSCL).     These toolsets provide a flexible run-time engine and user-friendly tools for the design, development, and deployment of a broad set of healthcare data analytics across the spectrum of clinical and quality outcomes, healthcare utilization, spending patterns, provider and network performance, and patient risk profiles. The advanced graphical user interface (provided through Quality Spectrum Flowchart Designer, or

104


Table of Contents

QSFD) empowers clients' clinical, product development, and research staff to achieve superior analytical functionality without having advanced statistical, epidemiological, or programming experience.

          Core to its architecture is a proprietary Massively Parallel Processing (MPP) engine utilizing a Shared Nothing processing approach that scales linearly with additional processors, and a highly scalable grid storage array, enabling the development of an exceptional generation of toolsets driven by near-real time analytics across extremely large datasets.

          Monthly Member Detail Map (MMDM™).     The MMDM aggregates analytical outputs of other analytical toolsets to arrive at a coordinated gap resolution plan informing intervention strategies to resolve gaps in care, quality, and financial performance across large populations. To achieve this, the MMDM uses targeted patient-specific, site-specific, and provider-specific predictive analytics to enable and direct the right intervention for the right patient, in the right venue, at the right time. In addition to layering, prioritizing, and chronologically orchestrating data-driven intervention plans, the MMDM also enables the coexistence of Inovalon-driven analytics alongside client and third-party initiatives. The analytical processes necessary to assemble the separate outputs of other analytical toolsets and creating the MMDM output are highly complex but highly valuable in translating such disparate analyses into a practical operating plan to achieve positive impact for the provider and patient.

Intervention Toolsets

          ePASS:     Our electronic patient assessment solution suite, or ePASS, is a web-enabled, point-of-care decision support tool designed to deliver both patient-level insight and guided clinical decision support. Through the use of ePASS, the point-of-care clinical provider is able to access patient-specific information and is guided through data-driven topics for their consideration.

          The ePASS tool offers clinicians insight into the patient profile analytically compiled from claims data (e.g., procedures, admissions, diagnoses, durable medical equipment, nursing homes, etc.), prescription drug data, laboratory data, clinical data, and patient reported data. Additionally, the outputs from our analytical processes translate into patient-specific questions and guidance within the ePASS toolset availing the clinician to potential concerns around disease, quality, utilization, medication adherence, preventative medicine, patient education, and many other areas of focus. In addition to its core functionality, ePASS is easily configured to allow custom analytics, question sets, and testing follow-up to be incorporated for specific needs. ePASS' patient-specific, point-of-care documentation and decision support capabilities generates medical record documentation in a regulatory-compliant format to support treatment plans, continuity of care, and patient data accuracy. Ultimately, the use of ePASS' patient data access and decision support capability results in not only a more comprehensive clinical encounter, but a more efficient encounter.

          Site Review Support Application (SRSA™):     SRSA coordinates clinical data collection at facilities across the nation. To achieve this, as a first step, SRSA orchestrates the determination of which clinical data medium and transfer modality may be most efficiently achieved (e.g., remote EHR access, EHR data export, fully integrated EHR interoperability, paper-based medical records, etc.). Once data mediums are determined, SRSA undertakes necessary steps of facility communications, onsite scheduling, data abstraction, review, and quality control.

          Integrated Data Collection Tool (iDCT™).     The iDCT facilitates the accurate and efficient recordation of clinical information into discrete data elements from a wide variety of clinical data sources. The iDCT incorporates both hard and soft error correction and quality control capabilities supporting the comprehensive data review and audit trail development process. Deployed in both

105


Table of Contents

cloud-based configurations and through an "occasionally connected" mobile configuration, the iDCT allows for clinical data abstraction in large volumes.

          Integrated Telephonic Communication Coordinator (iTCC™).     In order to achieve effective provider and patient engagement, outbound and inbound communications must be highly targeted based upon analytics and informed with integrated patient and provider profiles to make communications effective and efficient. iTCC supports this communication to ensure that value is delivered and program goals are achieved for clients. The iTCC manages the communications and logistics of the following value delivery modalities:

    Encounter Facilitation: Through traditional and electronically generated letters and targeted telephonic outreach, iTCC connects patients with providers to improve care management, clinical outcomes, and prospective reimbursement rates.

    Supplemental Patient Encounter: In certain situations, patients are unable to participate in a traditional office encounter within a desired or optimal timeline. For these cases, a Supplemental Patient Encounter (e.g., in-home encounter, retail clinic encounter, or other facility enabling a clinician and patient face-to-face encounter opportunity to occur) can be performed to achieve patient assessment, care, quality, documentation, and other goals of an analytically-driven and data-driven encounter. iTCC manages the process of coordinating such encounters when this type of intervention is indicated by our analytics.

    Patient Education Outreach: iTCC supports data-driven outreach in written and telephonic modalities to educate a patient regarding their health issues and to support patient-specific self-management of their conditions by guiding patients to community resources, providing coaching, and providing health education and health literacy support.

Business Processing Toolsets

          Claims Aggregation, Analysis and Submissions system, or CAAS™.     CAAS provides comprehensive claims data warehousing and processing to support government-mandated data submissions and cost reporting. It supports the integration of data in the raw, native format with strong data quality oversight to ensure ETL data accuracy. As a component of regulatory compliance, the CAAS system manages the formulation of de-identified patient-level datasets and provides a solution to manage and respond in a timely manner to rejected, edited records/reports from HHS.

          CAAS serves as a staging warehouse and processing system where all pertinent submission data is stored, and on which analytics are run to identify the data appropriate for submission including:

    The maintenance of longitudinal matching between the de-identified submission data and the identified data within the CAAS data warehouse to achieve full lineage and auditability;

    The identification of eligible claims for risk adjustment calculations, and codification/indexing of claims excluded from calculations for quality assurance analysis;

    The replication of HHS risk models to calculate risk scores based upon available data;

    The assignment of patients into models and risk score calculation categories;

    The calculation of risk score components including demographic factors, Hierarchical Condition Categories, or HCCs, HCC groups, interactions, severity adjustment, and cost sharing reduction adjustments; and

    Accumulation calculations of patient-specific costs against attachment points and caps for reinsurance submissions.

106


Table of Contents

          INDICES TM .     Our INDICES toolset is an enterprise-level, web-enabled business intelligence reporting toolset that provides visualization of data and results to authorize client users via dashboards, reports, and ad hoc queries. INDICES is built on online analytical processes (OLAP) technologies to integrate our clients' data (e.g., patient, enrollment, lab results, pharmacy, claims, etc.), the results from our data analytics and data-driven interventions, and benchmark information from our MORE 2 Registry, to provide our clients with the ability to gain insight into the multiple facets of their patients, providers, and facility network. INDICES supports our clients' goals to improve the quality of care provided to patients, drive financial performance, and aid in the support of their strategic business and care decisions.

          In addition to enabling real-time insight into common considerations such as utilization, member demographics, and financial performance across populations and customized cohorts, the INDICES toolset also provides valuable business intelligence into the analysis of highly complex and valuable considerations in healthcare. For example, INDICES can provide users patient-level risk sub-segmented by plan-defined characteristics; population, cohort, and patient-level premium revenue and risk-adjusted revenue sub-segmented by plan-defined characteristics; population, cohort, and patient-level reinsurance accumulation sub-segmented by plan-defined characteristics; population, cohort, and patient-level medical loss ratios sub-segmented by plan-defined characteristics; and population, cohort, and patient-level Edge Server processing analysis and results reconciliation. Further, INDICES provides insight into highly sophisticated analytics such as quality outcome score projections for future reporting periods which necessarily take into consideration the impact of national score projections on individual Star rating thresholds as set by CMS.

Our Clients

          For over 16 years, we have provided quality services to our clients. During that time, we have built a leading position and have become a true thought leader and innovator in our industry. We have achieved significant scale, and we believe that we play a key role in the U.S. healthcare market. During 2014, we had nearly 100 clients providing services to approximately 200 patient populations through hundreds of separate statements of work. Our clients include the largest health plans in the nation, 17 of the top 25 health plans by size as reported by Atlantic Information Services, accreditation organizations, physician organizations, pharmaceutical companies, academic institutions, and group purchasing organizations. For the year ended December 31, 2013, Blue Cross Blue Shield of Michigan, EmblemHealth, HealthFirst, and WellCare each accounted for between 10% and 12% of our total revenue. As of the date of this prospectus, we expect that Independence Blue Cross and Anthem (formerly known as WellPoint) could each account for between 10% and 11% of our total revenue for the year ending December 31, 2014, with no other client currently expected to account for 10% or more of our total revenue. During 2014, we provided

107


Table of Contents

services to a broad and diverse group of clients of various sizes in markets around the country, including, among others, the following clients:

Access Medicare
Amerigroup Corporation
    Amerigroup Georgia
    Amerigroup Nevada
    Amerigroup Virginia
    Amerigroup New Mexico, Inc.
    Amerigroup Texas, Inc.
America's Health Insurance Plans (AHIP)
AmeriHealth Caritas (the new name of Amerihealth
    Mercy Health Plan)
Arkansas BlueCross BlueShield
AultCare Corporation
    McKinley Life Insurance Company
    Aultra Administrative Group
Blue Cross Blue Shield Alabama
Blue Cross Blue Shield of Minnesota
Blue Cross Blue Shield of North Carolina
Blue Cross of Idaho Health Services, Inc.
Blue Cross Blue Shield of South Carolina
Blue Cross of Northeastern Pennsylvania
Boston Health Economics, Inc.
Boston Medical Center HealthNet Plan
Orange County Health Authority, a public agency dba
    Orange Prevention and Treatment Integrated
    Medical Assistance dba CalOptima (CalOptima)
Cardinal Health
CareFirst BlueCross BlueShield of Maryland
CareMore Health Plan
Cigna Corporate Services, LLC (Health Spring, Inc.)
Cirdan Health Systems
Citizens Choice Healthplan
Community First Health Plans, Inc.
Community Health Alliance Mutual Insurance Company
    D/B/A Community Health Alliance (CHA)
Comprehensive Health Management, Inc. (WellCare)
Consumer's Choice Health Plan
Coventry Management Services, LP
Easy Choice Health Plan, Inc.
Easy Choice New York
Elderplan, Inc.
EmblemHealth, Inc.
    Health Insurance Plan of Greater New York (HIP)
    Group Health Incorporated (GHI)
    Connecticare of New York, Inc.
Family Care, Inc.
First Medical Health Plan, Inc. (d/b/a First Plus)
Global TPA, LLC (Freedom Health, Inc., Optimum
    HealthCare, Inc., America's 1st Choice
    Insurance Company of NC, Inc., and
    America's 1st Choice Health Plans, Inc.)
Geisinger Health Plan
    Geisinger Indemnity Insurance Company
    Geisinger Quality Options, Inc
Government Employees Health Association. Inc. (GEHA)
Health Care Services Corporation (HCSC)
    Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Illinois
    Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Texas
    Blue Cross and Blue Shield of New Mexico
        (including Lovelace Health Plan of New Mexico)
    Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Oklahoma
Health Partners of Philadelphia, Inc.
Healthfirst Health Plan of New Jersey, Inc.

Healthfirst PHSP, Inc.
HealthNow New York, Inc. (d/b/a BlueCross BlueShield
    of Western New York and Blue Shield of Northeastern
    New York)
HealthPlus PHSP, Inc.
Heart Rhythm Society
Independence Blue Cross (IBC)
Independent Care Health Plan (iCARE)
Indiana University Health Plans, Inc. (f/k/a Clarian Health
    Plans, Inc.)
Inland Empire Health Plan
The University of Florida Board of Trustees on Behalf of
    the Institute for Child Health Policy
INTotal Health
Johns Hopkins HealthCare, LLC
    Johns Hopkins Health System Corporation
L.A. Care Health Plan
Managed Health, Inc.
    Healthfirst, Inc. of New York
Medicaid Health Plans of America (MHPA)
    Medicaid Health Plans of America
    Center for Best Practices (MHPA-CBP)
Medical Mutual of Ohio
Mercy Care Insurance Company, Inc.
MetroPlus Health Plan, Inc.
Moda Health (ODS Health Plan)
Molina Healthcare, Inc.
Montefiore HMO, LLC
National Committee for Quality Assurance (NCQA)
Neighborhood Health Plan of Rhode Island
New West Health Services
Uniform Services Family Health Plan at Pacific Medical
    Centers
URAC
Paramount Health Care
Partnership Health Plan of California
ProCare Health Plan
Qualchoice of Arkansas, Inc.
Rocky Mountain Health Maintenance Organization, Inc.
Royal Health Care, Inc.
Scott and White Health Plan
Security Health Plan of Wisconsin, Inc.
Sentara Health Plans, Inc.
South Country Health Alliance
South Florida Community Care Network (SFCCN)
SummaCare Health Plan, Inc.
Time Insurance Company (Assurant Health)
    John Alden Life Insurance Company
    Union Security Insurance Company
Total Health Care, Inc.
    Total Health Choice
Touchstone HMO Health Plan
Trillium Community Health Plan, Inc.
Triple-S Salud, Inc.
    Socios Mayores en Salud, Inc.
    American Health Inc.
Trusted Health Plans, Inc.
University of Utah
University Physicians Health Plans
    University Physicians Healthcare
Vertex Pharmaceuticals
Virginia Premier Health Plan

108


Table of Contents

Client Case Studies

          The following examples illustrate how we bring together our deep analytics and intervention platform.

          Regional Medicare Advantage Health Plan.     A regional provider-owned organization operating Medicare Advantage health plans and managed Medicaid health plans was facing rising financial pressures from increasing healthcare cost trends, combined with structural reimbursement constraints from government payors. Further, the mix of highly ill, dual eligible Medicare and Medicaid patients was driving average costs higher than expected due to the illness level of this population, while hindering the plan's ability to achieve its quality goals of achieving 4 out of 5 Stars in the CMS Five-Star program, having achieved only 3 out of 5 Stars at the time of our engagement.

          This organization started working with our platforms for its Medicare Advantage membership in 2009. In 2011, they expanded their relationship with us applying our platforms to their managed Medicaid membership while also expanding their use of our prospective predictive analytics capabilities. These services deployed the combined set of the following integrated toolsets to achieve the goals of the organization: iPORT data integration toolset, PCIS disease and comorbidity predictive analytics toolset, QSI clinical and quality outcomes analytical toolset, MMDM intervention activity planning analytical toolset, ePASS clinical encounter support toolset, iTCC patient and provider communication coordination toolset, and INDICES business intelligence toolset.

          Supported by our solutions, this organization has grown its Medicare Advantage footprint from approximately 80,000 members to nearly 150,000 members over the course of our engagement, and has improved its CMS Five-Star rating from 3 to 4 Stars. The financial performance of its managed Medicaid population has increased, membership has expanded, and the organization has successfully acquired an additional health plan, increasing its total managed Medicaid population from approximately 250,000 members at the beginning of our relationship to nearly 600,000 members today. Further, this organization has launched a commercial Qualified Health Plan on its State Exchange, and has begun to enroll patients and has decided to apply our platforms to this population of patients as well.

           National Commercial Individual and Small Group Health Plan .    A nationwide organization providing commercial insurance coverage for the individual and small group markets was facing a sea-change in how these populations are obtained and serviced in light of the Affordable Care Act, and the pressures introduced therein to drive improvements in clinical quality, data accuracy, and medical loss ratio limitations. Serving tens of thousands of customers representing hundreds of thousands of patients, this organization needed support in effectively managing data and utilizing tools to understand each patient, their needs, their transition from legacy coverage to ACA compliant coverage, and the need to properly understand the risk burden of their population to ensure that data needed for government premium stabilization programs is properly submitted.

          This organization selected our commercial ACA analytics and data-driven intervention platforms to drive improvements in data accuracy to clarify the illness burden of its patients and to assist the health plan's physicians in understanding the illnesses of the patients and to ensure that such information is properly submitted to the Federal Government. These services deployed the combined set of the following integrated toolsets to achieve the goals of the organization: iPORT data integration toolset, PCIS disease and comorbidity predictive analytics toolset, MMDM™ intervention activity planning analytical toolset, ePASS clinical encounter support toolset, iTCC patient and provider communication coordination toolset, CAAS business processing toolset, and INDICES business intelligence toolset.

109


Table of Contents

          Supported by our platforms, this organization is working to begin transitioning its legacy commercial customers into Qualified Health Plans, is engaging with practice groups to more fully understand its patient population so that the accurate complexity of its patient's illness levels can be understood and properly reported, and will begin to enroll patients on multiple State and Federal Exchanges in the 2015 open enrollment cycle.

          Pharmaceutical Research Support Entity.     A nationally recognized academic research institution was engaged by a global pharmaceutical company to investigate the potential difference in the observed incidence of cancer following treatment with alternative long-acting insulin regimens. This pharmaceutical company was concerned with the potential side effects of these drugs and the assurance that that such drugs are not inappropriately removed from treatment without strong scientific rigor to inform such decisions.

          This organization engaged us to study the outcomes and cancer incidence rates observed within our MORE 2 Registry. This service deployed the combined set of the following integrated toolsets to achieve the goals of the organization: iPORT data integration toolset, the QSI clinical and quality outcomes analytical toolset, and the QSCL big data analytics engine, empowered by the millions of de-identified and longitudinally matched patient lives resident within the MORE 2 Registry.

          Supported by our platforms, this organization published the results of this scientific study in the Journal Diabetes Care in July 2013, disproving the hypotheses of increased cancer incidence rates associated with long-acting insulin regimens, which was co-authored by our research staff.

Client Services Support

          Because our analytics and data-driven intervention services speak to a complex set of industry pressures, we have chosen to structure our client services organization around associates with industry-leading subject matter expertise. This approach affords our clients the opportunity to leverage their client services support as consultative partners, providing greater opportunity to maximize the value clients receive from our platforms. By interacting with our clients in this manner, we are able to leverage our associate industry-specific knowledge to better anticipate client needs and identify opportunities for our clients in the markets they serve. We believe our clients highly value this differentiated approach and, along with it, the industry, technological, and product expertise our associates possess.

          Client services support teams are assigned to our clients, and receive support from client service general managers and their teams of subject matter experts. The client service general managers are responsible for the end-to-end delivery of our solutions and contractual commitments.

Sales and Marketing

          We believe that our sales and marketing initiatives are key to capitalizing on our significant market and growth opportunities. While we have successfully leveraged our sales and marketing as we have grown, we believe that additional strategic investments in sales and marketing will enable us to increasingly seize on the healthcare industry's need for data analytics and data-driven intervention services.

          We sell our platform primarily through three avenues:

    Business development led by product and management personnel:   We benefit significantly from the subject matter expertise, market credibility, thought leadership, and relationships of our executives, senior management, and product leaders within the industry. They have played, and are expected to continue to play, a significant role in the establishment and ongoing development of our client relationships.

110


Table of Contents

    Business Development led by dedicated sales personnel:   We have a dedicated, direct sales team which is comprised of focused field sales professionals who are organized principally by geography and product type. Our dedicated sales personnel are supported by a sales operations staff, including product technology experts, lead generation personnel, and sales data personnel.

    Business development led by strategic channel relationships:   We increasingly are developing and expect to expand our use of strategic partnerships and channel relationships for the establishment and development of new and existing clients.

          Our marketing and communications strategies are centered on initiatives that drive awareness of our company and capabilities. These initiatives include: educating the market about our company broadly; hosting speaking engagements; disseminating articles discussing data trends and metrics, and strategic interfacing with key business and trade media personnel. We employ a broad array of specific events to facilitate these initiatives, including but not limited to:

    Sponsorship and partnership of key industry conferences;

    Client-focused events and programs;

    Hosting our annual Client Congress highlighted by healthcare leaders, industry icons and senior government officials sharing best practices, strategies, and trends;

    Web and social properties, digital and video content marketing, creative online advertising, and blogs; and

    Hosted webinars, direct mail, analyst relations, and media relations.

          In addition, in order to enhance our value proposition, our sales and marketing staff develop best practices tools, case studies, and educational materials to drive deeper client utilization and engagement.

Our Name and Logo

          "Innovation" is not an occasional formulation for us, but a deliberate and persistent signature form. It is built in a causal sequence on three principles: Insight, Intervention, and Impact. "Inovalon" binds these foundations — conveying what we are — and the culture we bring forward and champion.

GRAPHIC

          Our logo illustrates our company's process in a highly visual manner. The spiral represents the face of a complex mechanical watch, interconnectivity underneath and a simple display on the

111


Table of Contents

front. This symbolizes Inovalon. We are committed to bringing together the complex array of data-driven solutions which are driving meaningful insight and improvement in healthcare — and doing so in a way that appears effortless.

LOGO

Operations

          Our operations are divided into two groups. Our IT operations group manages the process steps from data receipt through to the generation of analytical outputs. Our services operations group manages the process steps applied to achieve impact through our data-driven intervention platforms.

IT Operations Group

          We achieve excellence in the operation of our technology based on a foundation of service management aligned with data integration, data provisioning, system support, and security operations. These operational processes are measured clearly through a framework of key performance indicators, which seek to provide an optimal level of transparency and control. The figure below provides an illustrative overview of our IT operations group's processes:

GRAPHIC

          We have implemented a rigorous command and control structure for maintaining availability of production systems and ensuring the security of technology infrastructure. Our NOC is responsible for monitoring network and systems, security incident response, and management and communication as well as the oversight of planned system maintenance. The personnel of the NOC are also responsible for invoking our business continuity plan when appropriate.

          The security operations within our NOC maintains the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of our production systems and technology infrastructure by maintaining security situational awareness, as well as coordinating security incident response and proactively protecting sensitive data. The security operations team utilizes a variety of tools and techniques to identify, contain, remediate, and gather intelligence on both known and emerging technology threats. Reports are tracked through automated event management triggers and communicated to leadership through our business service management layer.

112


Table of Contents

          We have a comprehensive framework for managing change control, problem management, incident and event management, service management, and production operations. We use a defined quality change control management system for managing technology changes.

          Product support integration across all of our solutions enables commonality of processes — allowing our clients to benefit from increased technology operational efficiencies. Regardless of the efficiences achieved, we are continuously enhancing our technology product operations through the dedication of the process automation and performance assurance team focused on designing and deploying zero-touch capabilities while ensuring that systems and support processes achieve service level agreements (SLAs).

Services Operations Group

          Many of our clients utilize the analytical outputs of our platform to feed into their own internal systems to achieve value within the provider and patient base. Other clients license our data-driven intervention platforms to facilitate the realization of value from our analytics. For still other clients, our service support personnel operate our data-driven intervention platforms to deliver end-to-end value realization. For these clients, through the implementation of our sophisticated platforms, we leverage our analytical output to provide data-driven intervention support services at the varying points of care necessary to achieve the goals of our clients. This unique end-to-end approach implements the solutions necessary to turn insight into meaningful impact and realized value on a national scale.

GRAPHIC

          One of the centerpieces of our services operations is our strong management systems which serve as vehicles to drive transparency, ownership and execution. We enable our management systems to allow general managers and operational Leaders the ability to "see around the corner," and be ambidextrous in how they balance achieving efficiency gains while also focusing on exceptional client value delivery.

Competition

          We compete with a broad and diverse set of businesses. We believe the competitive landscape is highly fragmented with no single competitor offering similarly expansive capabilities and solution offerings in healthcare data analytics and data-driven interventions. Our primary

113


Table of Contents

competitive challenge is to demonstrate to our existing and potential clients the value of utilizing our platforms rather than developing or assembling their own alternative capabilities. However, we believe that the combination of our competitive strengths and successful culture of innovation, including our industry-leading analytics and data asset, the time-tested and real-world-tested nature of our platforms, and subject-matter expertise of our associates, make it time and cost prohibitive for our clients to replace or replicate all that we offer without facing material risk.

          The competitive landscape can be characterized by the following categories of companies that provide capabilities or solutions that compete with one or more components of our platforms:

    Providers of enterprise-scale, industry agnostic IT solutions, such as Oracle, Dell, SAP, SAS, and IBM;

    Large-scale IT consultants and third-party service providers, such as Accenture and Deloitte Consulting;

    Large-scale healthcare-specific solutions providers, such as McKesson, OptumHealth, Truven, and Verisk;

    Point solution providers, such as DST Health, The Advisory Board, Alere, Altegra, Matrix, edifecs, and Sliverlink.

Thought Leadership and Subject Matter Expertise

          Industry-Leading Research Team.     Our research team has significant research experience that includes advanced econometric and predictive modeling expertise, and the development and implementation of clinical research designs. The team includes PhDs in Economics/Econometrics, Pharmacy, Molecular Genetics, Psychology, and Public Health, multiple MS degrees in Social Medicine and Healthcare Administration, Experimental Psychology, Economics, and Biostatistics, experienced in big data and geo-mapping. In addition, dedicated medical doctors on the team and contributing medical doctor personnel within the broader company are dedicated to the research and development of our technologies.

          Our subject-matter experts are sought-after for research focusing on:

    Health economics and outcomes research and population health studies;

    Evaluating comparative effectiveness of health plan programs, practice groups, and treatments;

    Development and testing of new quality performance measures;

    Assessing cost effectiveness of medical care and interventions; and

    Identifying meaningful impact in clinical outcomes and financial performance.

          Industry-Leading Database Resources.     Our research group combines advanced modeling and statistical analysis expertise with the power of our MORE 2 Registry. Additionally, the research team leverages a wide range of healthcare database resources, including PHARM data, Area Health Resource Files, survey databases, market source geo data including detailed socioeconomic and sociodemographic data at the zipcode level, household and individual level, cost data, and other health data files.

          Strategic Partnerships.     Our research team has developed relationships throughout the healthcare service delivery community. This has resulted in a variety of funded research engagements that have provided valuable insight into the healthcare challenges facing stakeholders within the healthcare industry from payors to regulators, health plans to practice groups, and pharmaceutical companies to trade associations. The following highlights some of this work.

114


Table of Contents

          National Committee for Quality Assurance:     NCQA is a not-for-profit organization dedicated to improving healthcare quality. NCQA has played a key role in driving improvement throughout the healthcare system and helping to elevate the issue of healthcare quality to the top of the national agenda. NCQA has repeatedly contracted our research team to assist with quality measure testing work beginning in 2010. The research team has utilized our large nationally representative Medicare Advantage database to develop and/or validate several key quality measures for NCQA:

          For a CMS contract, NCQA subcontracted with us to assist with testing and refining the high profile quality measure, Health Plan All-Cause Hospital Readmission measure, or PCR, which has been adopted by CMS for the Five Star quality measurement program, giving purchasers, including CMS, additional insight into the quality of care provided to Medicare beneficiaries.

          NCQA has also subcontracted with us to assist in testing and refining a new measure of hospitalizations for potentially preventable complications (HPC) by testing alternate statistical models. The final coefficients will be used by NCQA to calculate case-mix adjusted rates, or expected rates, for PCR and PAH measures at the H-contract level to measure plan performance.

          We supported NCQA to test two new overuse measures: (1) Non-Recommended PSA-Based Screening in Older Men and (2) Non-Recommended Colorectal Cancer Screening in Older Adults. This work was presented jointly at the Academy Health Annual Research Meeting in San Diego in June 2014.

          Industry Dual Eligible Study:     Patients who are eligible for both Medicare and Medicaid, referred to as Dual Eligibles, have been found to suffer from health disparities in achieving high quality outcomes of care compared to non-dual patients. In 2013 we investigated this issue and published the industry's largest study on this phenomena, entitled "The Impact of Dual Eligible Populations on CMS Five-Star Quality Measures and Patient Outcomes in Medicare Advantage Health Plans," released on October 30, 2013. This study was widely reviewed and prompted several industry leaders to approach the company and request further analysis into factors within the vulnerable population that statistically impact the achievement of certain quality outcomes given the same quality of care. Working with the senior management of multiple health plans (encompassing large, small, national, regional, publicly traded, and non-profit organizations) and in consultation with CMS and other key stakeholders, Inovalon is undertaking a more in-depth analysis of 2.3 million Medicare Advantage patients (28% of whom are dual eligible) making it the largest study of its type ever undertaken by the industry to examine these issues.

          America's Health Insurance Plan, or AHIP:     This is the national trade association representing the health insurance industry. AHIP's members provide health and supplemental benefits to more than 200 million Americans through employer-sponsored coverage, the individual insurance market, and public programs such as Medicare and Medicaid. AHIP's Center for Policy and Research conducts and publishes original research and provides analysis and commentary on the research of others. We have been asked to collaborate with AHIP on a variety of research efforts, including the study of Medicare Advantage readmissions which became one of the largest studies of this type ever performed. This work resulted in the publication of this research within the American Journal of Managed Care in 2012: Lemieux J, Sennett C, Wang R, Mulligan T, Bumbaugh J.; Hospital Readmission Rates in Medicare Advantage Plans . American Journal of Managed Care . 18(2) 2012: 96-104.

          The Heart Rhythm Society, or HRS:     This is a leading international organization in science, education, and advocacy for cardiac arrhythmia professionals and patients. HRS engaged our research team to test a new measure for heart rhythm care, " cardiac tamponade and/or pericardiocentesis following atrial fibrillation ablation." Our team leveraged our datasets and analytical platforms to generate physician and facility level measure scores using a three year

115


Table of Contents

rolling average criteria to support performance gap, validity, and reliability testing for submission to the NQF. This research was presented at the American Heart Association annual Quality Care Outcomes Research conference in Baltimore in June 2014.

          Inovalon Research Team Conference Presentations:     The research team further enhances our contribution to improvement of health care by publishing and presenting results impacting many diverse areas of the nation's health care delivery system. Over the past two years we have presented at over 20 major academic, research, and healthcare-related conferences and have published multiple peer-reviewed manuscripts in widely cited industry journals.

Intellectual Property

          We rely on copyright, trademark, and trade secret laws as well as confidentiality agreements, licenses, and other agreements with employees, consultants, vendors, and customers. We also seek to control access to and distribution of our proprietary software, confidential information and know-how, technology, and other intellectual property. Historically, because our initial technological innovations were primarily algorithmic in nature, these innovations were well suited to trade secret protection. Accordingly, and due to the complex, time intensive, and costly patent process, with somewhat limited utility for business processes, the use of patents has not been compelling for us. However, we have begun to seek patents recently and expect to continue to do so in the future.

          We own and use trademarks in connection with our applications and services, including both unregistered common law marks and issued trademark registrations in the United States. Our material trademarks, service marks and other marks include: CAAS, CARA®, Caresync Advantage, CCS Advantage®, CEDI TM , ChaseWise TM , Circle Logo®, Data-Driven Improvements in Health Care TM , Distributed Analytics TM , EMR Acceleration TM , eCAAS Advantage®, ePASS, Healthcare Empowered®, Healthier Members, Healthier Business®, HEDIS Advantage, HCC Surveillance TM , HIX Foundation®, iDCT, INDICES, Inovalon, Inovalon — US, Inovalon — EU, Inovalon Healthcare Empowered (and Spiral Design to left) — EU, Inovalon (and Spiral Design on top), Inovalon (and Spiral Design to left), Inovalon Healthcare Empowered (and Spiral Design on top), Inovalon Healthcare Empowered (and Spiral Design to left) — US, Inovalon Healthcare Empowered (wordmark), Insights: a business intelligence solution, iPORT, iTCC, MORE 2 Registry, PCIS, Prospective Advantage®, QSCL TM , QSFD, QSI TM , SRSA, Star Advantage®, Turning Data into Insight and Insight into Action®, and We See Solutions TM . We also have trademark applications pending to register marks in the United States and European Union.

Our Employees

          As of September 30, 2014, we had a total of 2,456 associates across four areas: Technology, Innovation and Product, Data-driven Client Services, and Selling, General and Administrative. There were 1,467 full-time associates and 989 part-time associates. None of our associates are represented by a labor union, and all of our associates currently work in the U.S. and its territories (Puerto Rico), and we consider our current relations with our associates to be good.

Requirements Regarding the Privacy and Security of Personal Information

          HIPAA and Other Privacy and Security Requirements.     There are numerous U.S. federal and state laws and regulations related to the privacy and security of personal information. In particular, regulations promulgated pursuant to HIPAA establish privacy and security standards that limit the use and disclosure of PHI and require the implementation of administrative, physical, and technical safeguards to ensure the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of individually identifiable health information in electronic form. Our health plan customers, as well as healthcare clearinghouses and certain providers with which we may have or may establish business relationships, are covered

116


Table of Contents

entities that are regulated under HIPAA. HITECH and the Omnibus Final Rule significantly expanded HIPAA's privacy and security requirements. Among other things, HITECH and the Omnibus Final Rule make HIPAA's privacy and security standards directly applicable to "business associates," which are independent contractors or agents of covered entities that create, receive, maintain, or transmit PHI in connection with providing a service for or on behalf of a covered entity. Under HIPAA and our contractual agreements with our customers, we are considered a "business associate" to our customers and thus are directly subject to HIPAA's privacy and security standards. In order to provide our covered entity clients with services that involve the use or disclosure of PHI, HIPAA requires our clients to enter into business associate agreements with our clients. Such agreements must, among other things, require us to:

    limit how we will use and disclose PHI;

    implement reasonable administrative, physical, and technical safeguards to protect such information from misuse;

    enter into similar agreements with our agents and subcontractors that have access to the information;

    report security incidents, breaches, and other inappropriate uses or disclosures of the information; and

    assist the customer in question with certain of its duties under the privacy standards.

          In addition to HIPAA, HITECH, and their implementing regulations, we may be subject to other state and federal privacy laws, including laws that prohibit unfair privacy and security practices and deceptive statements about privacy and security and laws that place specific requirements on certain types of activities, such as data security and texting. We may also be subject to state medical record privacy laws, which may be more strict than HIPAA, including the laws of the state of California.

          Data Protection and Breaches.     In recent years, there have been a number of well-publicized data breaches involving the improper use and disclosure of individuals' personal information. Many states have responded to these incidents by enacting laws requiring holders of personal information to maintain safeguards and to take certain actions in response to a data breach, such as providing prompt notification of the breach to affected individuals and state officials. In addition, under HIPAA and pursuant to our business associate agreement obligations, we must report breaches of unsecured PHI to our contractual partners following discovery of the breach. Notification must also be made in certain circumstances to affected individuals HHS and the media.

          We have implemented and maintain physical, technical, and administrative safeguards intended to protect individually identifiable health information and have processes in place to assist us in complying with all applicable laws, regulations, and contractual requirements regarding the protection of these data and properly responding to any security breaches or incidents. Furthermore, in many cases, applicable state laws, including breach notification requirements, are not preempted by the HIPAA privacy and security standards and are subject to interpretation by various courts and other governmental authorities, thereby complicating our compliance efforts. Where a state law is not preempted by HIPAA, we may also be subject to that state law's requirements, in addition to our obligations under HIPAA, HITECH, and their implementing regulations. Additionally, state and federal laws regarding deceptive practices may apply to public assurances we give to individuals about the security of services we provide on behalf of our contractual customers.

          Other Requirements.     In addition to HIPAA, numerous other U.S. state and federal laws govern the collection, dissemination, use, access to, and confidentiality of individually identifiable

117


Table of Contents

health information and healthcare provider information. Some states also are considering new laws and regulations that further protect the confidentiality, privacy, and security of medical records or other types of medical information. Further, Congress and a number of states have considered or are considering prohibitions or limitations on the disclosure of medical or other information to individuals or entities located outside of the United States.

Facilities

          Our corporate headquarters is located in Bowie, Maryland, where we occupy approximately 105,000 square feet under a lease agreement that expires in August 2018. In addition, we lease an aggregate of approximately 230,000 square feet at the following locations: Columbia, Maryland; a second facility in Bowie, Maryland; Annapolis, Maryland; Herndon, Virginia; Lansing, Michigan; Tampa, Florida; and Phoenix, Arizona. We own one property in Snellville, Georgia, which is approximately 12,000 square feet. In addition, we maintain a number of leases for smaller office facilities in various locations in the regions of our clients coinciding with specific client needs.

          We currently have two expiring leases, one in Annapolis, Maryland in February 2015 and the other in Tampa, Florida in June 2015, neither of which we intend to renew. These lease expirations will reduce our square footage under lease by approximately 55,000 square feet. We believe our facility footprint is adequate to meet our needs for the immediate future. Suitable facilities should be available at reasonable market terms should additional space be required.

Legal Proceedings

          From time to time, we may be involved in various legal proceedings and subject to claims that arise in the ordinary course of business. Although the results of litigation and claims are inherently unpredictable and uncertain, we are not currently a party to any legal proceedings the outcome of which, if determined adversely to us, are believed to, either individually or taken together, have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results, cash flows or financial condition. Regardless of the outcome, litigation has the potential to have an adverse impact on us because of defense and settlement costs, diversion of management resources, and other factors.

118


Table of Contents


MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors:

          The following table provides information regarding our executive officers and directors as of the date of this prospectus:

Name
 
Age
 
Position

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D. 

  45   Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board

Robert A. Wychulis

  59   President

Christopher E. Greiner

  39   Chief Product and Operations Officer

Thomas R. Kloster

  54   Chief Financial Officer

Daniel L. Rizzo

  37   Chief Innovation Officer

Jason Z. Rose

  43   Chief Strategic Development Officer

Joseph R. Rostock

  52   Chief Technology Officer

Shauna L. Vernal

  45   Chief Legal Officer and Corporate Secretary

Denise K. Fletcher(1)

  66   Director

André S. Hoffmann(1)

  56   Director

Lee D. Roberts(1)

  61   Director

William J. Teuber Jr.(1)

  63   Director

(1)
Independent within the meaning of NASDAQ Marketplace Rule 5605(a)(2).

Executive Officers

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D., Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board

          Dr. Dunleavy has served as our Chief Executive Officer since his organization of the company's predecessor companies in 1998, as Chairman of the board of directors since the creation of the board in 2006, and as President from the company's foundation until May of 2014. Dr. Dunleavy is responsible for the overall execution of the company's business plan, strategic relationships, and the identification and realization of company product strategy and vision. During his tenure building Inovalon, Dr. Dunleavy has worked extensively with a wide array and number of healthcare organizations, regulatory and oversight bodies, and technology companies examining the growing role of data within healthcare, and its ability to drive meaningful insight and improvement for its constituents. Dr. Dunleavy serves as a Director on the Dartmouth Medical School Board of Overseers, has authored or co-authored a number of scientific journal articles, abstracts, and proprietary research papers, and has presented his work and materials at multiple national and international conferences. Dr. Dunleavy received a Bachelor's degree in Biology modified with Engineering with High Honors from Dartmouth College, where his studies and work focused upon the neurosciences, computer sciences and engineering with his honors thesis focused on the computer simulation of artificial human cerebellar functional units. He earned his doctorate in medicine from Harvard Medical School, completed his medical residency at The Johns Hopkins Hospital in Baltimore, Maryland, and practiced and was Board Certified in Internal Medicine.

          We believe that Dr. Dunleavy's knowledge of our company and its business and his extensive experience in the healthcare industry qualifies him to serve as the chairman of our board of directors.

Robert A. Wychulis, President

          Mr. Wychulis has served as our President since May 2014. In this role, Mr. Wychulis serves as the general manager of the company, ultimately responsible for all aspects of the company's goals

119


Table of Contents

and commitments around day-to-day product and service delivery, performance, support, and client value achievement. Prior to joining Inovalon, from 2008 to May 2014, Mr. Wychulis served as the President of the WellPoint New York government program health plan, HealthPlus, an Amerigroup company, where he was responsible for the management of the company's product portfolio within the New York region. Prior to joining WellPoint/Amerigroup, from 2003 to 2008, Mr. Wychulis served as President and CEO of the Florida Association of Health Plans, where he grew the association from eight to 26 plans in four years. From 1995 to 2002, Mr. Wychulis served as President and CEO of HealthPlan Southeast, a North Florida managed care company comprised of state employee, commercial and Medicaid/CHP contracts.

          Mr. Wychulis received his Bachelor of Political Science degree from the City College of New York and his Masters of Health Administration and Planning from the Wagner School of Public Administration at New York University.

Christopher E. Greiner, Chief Product and Operations Officer

          Mr. Greiner has served as our Chief Product and Operations Officer since May 2014. In this role, Mr. Greiner is responsible for managing and overseeing the implementation, service delivery, performance and reporting of all of our developed product and solution groups of the company. Prior to joining Inovalon as Chief Product Officer in May 2013, from November 2012 to April 2013, Mr. Greiner served as a Vice President at Computer Sciences Corporation, where he was responsible for financial management of the company's commercial portfolio. From April 1999 to November 2012, Mr. Greiner served as the combined Chief Operating Officer and Chief Financial Officer of IBM's Business Analytics division, formally known as Cognos. Prior to this position, Mr. Greiner was responsible for IBM's global services business based in Shanghai, China, and Tokyo, Japan. Additionally, Mr. Greiner fulfilled multiple roles in finance and operations both within IBM's U.S. business and overseas operations in Australia, India, China, Hong Kong, Taiwan, and Singapore.

          Mr. Greiner received a Bachelor of Business Administration in Finance and Economics from Baylor University.

Thomas R. Kloster, C.P.A. (inactive), Chief Financial Officer

          Mr. Kloster has served as our Chief Financial Officer since March 2014. In this role, Mr. Kloster is responsible for the oversight of all financial activities, including financial reporting, treasury, tax, budgeting and forecasting, and audit, as well as facility management. Prior to joining Inovalon, from August 2011 to January 2014, Mr. Kloster served as the Chief Financial Officer at Algeco Scotsman, where he led all financial aspects of this $2.1 billion private-equity-owned entity operating in 35 countries. Prior to Algeco Scotsman, from September 2010 to July 2011, Mr. Kloster was the sole managing partner of Austin Partners, LLC, a financial and accounting project based consuting firm. From May 1996 to May 2000 and from August 2003 to September 2010, Mr. Kloster served in various financial roles, including as Chief Financial Officer from January 2005 to September 2010 for Primus Telecommunications Group, Inc. (now HC2 Holdings Inc.), where he oversaw the financial growth of the company from a private start-up to a publicly traded multinational corporation. Primus Telecommunications Group, Incorporated filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy on March 16, 2009, but re-emerged from bankruptcy on July 1, 2009. From 2001 to 2003, Mr. Kloster served in senior operations and accounting positions at Sprint Corporation and, from 1994 to 1996, in senior accounting positions with MCI Communications Corporation. Mr. Kloster also served as the Chief Financial Officer for Cidera, Inc. from 2000 to 2001, where he was responsible for the operation of all financial functions, capital financings, investor relations, and banking relationships. Prior to his tenure in finance positions within the telecommunications industry, Mr. Kloster held roles

120


Table of Contents

focusing on auditing within PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and Ernst & Whinney LLP from 1982 to 1994.

          Mr. Kloster earned a Bachelor of Science degree in business administration from the University of Texas, and he is a certified public accountant (inactive).

Daniel L. Rizzo, Chief Innovation Officer

          Mr. Rizzo has served as our Chief Innovation Officer since March 2012. In this role, Mr. Rizzo is responsible for the coordination and oversight of new product development and material product updates and expansions of capability, including design, functionality, development, quality testing processes, and modularized rollouts and operational expansions. Mr. Rizzo is also responsible for all aspects of our dataset assets, including processes to support and achieve the high integrity, reliability, and security; accuracy and efficiency of integration; comprehensive policies and procedures for the access and utilization; and ultimate realization of value for the company, clients, and the healthcare community. In addition to these roles, Mr. Rizzo serves as our Security Officer. Prior to assuming his current position with Inovalon, from January 2010 to March 2012, Mr. Rizzo served as our Chief Product Officer. Before serving as our Chief Product Officer, from May 2008 to January 2010, Mr. Rizzo served as our Chief Product Technology Officer. Prior to joining Inovalon, Mr. Rizzo served in various roles for Founding Advisors, Inc., a specialized management consulting firm. Before joining Founding Advisors, Mr. Rizzo was a senior consultant at Arthur Andersen, LLP where he advised clients in the healthcare, telecommunications, and insurance industries.

          Mr. Rizzo holds the Chartered Financial Analyst designation, and he graduated Summa Cum Laude with a bachelor of arts degree in Business Administration from Loyola College in Maryland.

Jason Z. Rose, Chief Strategic Development Officer

          Mr. Rose has served as our Chief Strategic Development Officer since September 2013. In this role, Mr. Rose is responsible for all aspects of introducing, launching and expanding the company's product and technology presence within the healthcare marketplace. Previously, from 2012 to September 2013, Mr. Rose served as our Senior Vice President, Business Development, and prior to that as our Vice President, Care and Quality Management. In this role, he was responsible for the execution of product design, implementation and business development and expansion of the company's care and quality management product solutions. Prior to joining Inovalon, from 2007 to 2008, Mr. Rose served as Senior Vice President of Public Programs Health and Disease Management Services for APS Healthcare, Inc., a provider of specialty healthcare solutions, where he was responsible for overseeing all aspects of Health and Disease Management programs across the Public Programs division. Prior to joining APS Healthcare, from 2004 to 2007, Mr. Rose served as Vice President for INSPIRIS, Inc. where he was responsible for the creation and management of the suite of care management offerings for improving continuity of care across acute and post-acute settings. Before joining INSPIRIS, Mr. Rose served as Assistant Vice President, Information Technology for Ardent Health Services from May 2002 to March 2004. Prior to joining Ardent Health Services, Mr. Rose served as a senior consultant for Cap Gemini Ernst & Young (now Accenture) in addition to Cerner Corporation.

          Mr. Rose earned his Masters of Health Services Administration (MHSA) degree from The George Washington University School of Business. Mr. Rose received a Bachelor of Science degree in Psychology from Radford University.

Joseph R. Rostock, Chief Technology Officer

          Mr. Rostock has served as our Chief Technology Officer since May 2013. In this role, Mr. Rostock is responsible for the oversight of all design, maintenance, security, connectivity,

121


Table of Contents

redundancy, operations, and support of all technology requirements of both internal operations and the services of the company. Prior to joining Inovalon, from July 2011 to April 2013, Mr. Rostock served as the Vice President and Chief Technologist for The Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions, a technology and solutions development organization for the telecommunications industry. From May 1986 to June 2011, Mr. Rostock served in many ascending roles at Verizon Communications Inc., most recently Senior Fellow, a position reserved for executives possessing both deep technology expertise and broad management and leadership skills.

          Mr. Rostock received a Bachelor of Arts Degree from Temple University and completed graduate studies in Computer Science at St. Joseph's University.

Shauna L. Vernal, Chief Legal Officer

          Ms. Vernal has served as our Chief Legal Officer and Corporate Secretary since August 2013. In this role, she holds responsibility for the planning, management, execution, and oversight of all legal, liability, regulatory, intellectual property, and risk management matters across all aspects of the company. Prior to joining Inovalon, Ms. Vernal served as Chief Legal Officer for Falck USA, a large provider of emergency medical services, from April 2012 to April 2013, where she oversaw all legal aspects of Falck USA's operations, including mergers and acquisitions and other strategic matters. Prior to her tenure at Falck, from September 2000 to March 2012, Ms. Vernal served in various senior strategic legal roles at Microsoft Corporation, including, for nearly nine years, mergers and acquisitions, corporate governance, and securities matters, and lastly, serving as the lead attorney and part of the leadership team for Microsoft's Worldwide Public Sector. Prior to her tenure at Microsoft, from January 1998 to August 2000, Ms. Vernal served as Senior Vice President, Chief Legal Officer, and Corporate Secretary of West Coast Bancorp. Ms. Vernal began her career as an attorney at the law firm of Graham & Dunn, P.C. in Seattle, Washington.

          Ms. Vernal received her Juris Doctorate with honors from the University of Washington and her Bachelors of Business Administration, Summa Cum Laude, from California Lutheran University. She also graduated with Honors from Pacific Coast Banking School, executive business management training for financial institution executives and regulators.

Non-Employee Directors

Denise K. Fletcher, Director

          Ms. Fletcher has served as a director of Inovalon since 2012. Ms. Fletcher is a former Executive Vice President, Finance of Vulcan Inc., an investment and project company organized by Microsoft co-founder Paul Allen, a position she held from 2005 to 2008. From 2004 to 2005, she served as chief financial officer of DaVita, Inc., a provider of dialysis services in the United States. From 2000 to 2003, she was executive vice president and chief financial officer of MasterCard International, an international payment solutions company. Before joining MasterCard, she served as chief financial officer of Bowne Inc., a global document management and information services provider. Ms. Fletcher is a director of Unisys, a worldwide information technology company, and a member of the supervisory board of Mazars Group, an international organization that specializes in audit, accounting, tax, legal, and advisory services. During 2004 and 2005, she served as a director of Sempra Energy and of Orbitz, Inc.

          We believe Ms. Fletcher's significant achievements as a senior corporate financial and operating officer with a wide range of industry experiences, coupled with her service as a director for other public companies, qualifies her to serve as one of our directors and the chairperson of our audit committee. Ms. Fletcher graduated Phi Beta Kappa from Wellesley College and received her master's degree from Harvard University.

122


Table of Contents

André S. Hoffmann, Director

          Mr. Hoffmann has served as a director of Inovalon since 2008. Since 2006, Mr. Hoffmann has served as the Vice Chairman of the board of Roche Holding, Ltd., one of the world's largest diversified healthcare companies focused on medical diagnostics and treatments, and has served as a board member since 1996. Mr. Hoffmann also has served as Non-Executive Vice Chairman of Givaudan SA, the world's leading flavor and fragrance company, since 2008 and as a non-executive member of the board of directors since 2000. Since 1999, Mr. Hoffmann also has served as the Chairman and owner of Massellaz S.A., a research and advisory company, and, from 2005 to 2013, served as the Chairman and owner of Nemadi Advisors Ltd., a private equity advisory company. Mr. Hoffmann also serves as a director for Genentech Inc., one of the world's largest biotechnology companies, ultimately acquired by Roche, Amazentis SA, a private therapeutics and diagnostics company, and Glyndebourne Productions Ltd., a service company.

          We believe that Mr. Hoffmann's experience as the Vice Chairman of one of the world's largest diversified healthcare companies and his significant industry expertise qualify him to serve as one of our directors. Mr. Hoffmann studied economics at the University of St. Gallen and holds a Master of Business Administration from INSEAD.

Lee D. Roberts, Director

          Mr. Roberts has served as a director of Inovalon since 2012. Since 2008, Mr. Roberts has served as President and Chief Executive Officer of Bluewater Consulting, an information technology management consulting company. From 2006 to 2008, Mr. Roberts was the Vice President and General Manager, IBM Document & Content Management for IBM Corporation. In 2006, IBM acquired FileNET Corporation, where Mr. Roberts had served as President and Chief Executive Officer from 1997 through 1999, and as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer from 2000 until its acquisition in 2006. Mr. Roberts currently serves on the boards of QAD, Inc., a publicly-traded provider of enterprise resource planning and supply chain software, and Unisys, a worldwide information technology company. Mr. Roberts has also served on the boards of a number of other public and private companies, including, most recently, Varolii Corporation, a privately-held provider of on-demand communications software services.

          We believe Mr. Roberts' decades of leadership experience with technology companies and deep understanding of information technology, technology trends and customer requirements qualify him to serve as one of our directors. Mr. Roberts earned Bachelor's degrees in Economics, Biology, and Chemistry at California State University, San Bernardino and his MBA degree with honors at the University of California, Riverside. He completed IBM's Executive International Management Program in Belgium and Executive Management Development programs at Harvard University.

William J. Teuber Jr., Director

          Mr. Teuber has served as a director of Inovalon since 2013. Since 2006, Mr. Teuber has served as Vice Chairman of EMC Corporation, a world leader in information infrastructure technology, big data, cloud computing, and data security solutions, where he assists the Chairman, President, and Chief Executive Officer in the day-to-day management of EMC. From 2006 to 2012, Mr. Teuber oversaw EMC Customer Operations, the company's global sales and distribution organization. Mr. Teuber additionally serves as a member of the board of Pivotal Software, a big data and cloud computing company and member of the EMC federation structure. Prior to being appointed Vice Chairman of EMC, Mr. Teuber served as Chief Financial Officer of EMC from 1996 to 2006, where he was responsible for leading the company's worldwide finance operation. Prior to joining EMC, Mr. Teuber was a partner in the Audit and Financial Advisory Services practice of Coopers &

123


Table of Contents

Lybrand L.L.P. from 1988 to 1995. Mr. Teuber is the lead director of Popular, Inc., a diversified financial services company that includes Banco Popular as a holding. He is also a Trustee of the College of the Holy Cross.

          We believe that Mr. Teuber's significant financial and accounting expertise, his extensive insight into the global big data and cloud computing technology marketplace, and his experience providing strategic direction to a large public technology company, qualify Mr. Teuber to serve as one of our directors. Mr. Teuber holds a Master of Business Administration from Babson College, a Master of Science in Taxation from Bentley College, and a Bachelor's degree from the College of the Holy Cross.


Election of Officers

          Our executive officers are elected by, and serve at the discretion of, our board of directors. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.


Board of Directors

Role of the Board in Risk Oversight

          One of the key functions of our board of directors is informed oversight of our risk management process. Our board of directors administers this oversight function directly, with support from its four standing committees, the audit committee, the compensation committee, the nominating and corporate governance committee, and the security and compliance committee, each of which addresses risks specific to their respective areas of oversight. In particular, our audit committee has the responsibility to consider and discuss our major financial risk exposures and the steps our management has taken to monitor and control these exposures, including guidelines and policies to govern the process by which risk assessment and management is undertaken. Our compensation committee assesses and monitors whether any of our compensation policies and programs have the potential to encourage excessive risk-taking. Our nominating and corporate governance committee monitors the effectiveness of our corporate governance guidelines and code of business conduct and ethics, including whether they are successful in preventing illegal or improper liability-creating conduct. Our security and compliance committee monitors the effectiveness of our physical and cybersecurity and related policies, as well as our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements.

Director Independence

          In connection with this offering, we have applied for listing of our Class A common stock on the NASDAQ Global Select Market. The listing rules of NASDAQ generally require that a majority of the members of a listed company's board of directors be independent within specified periods following the closing of an initial public offering. Our board of directors has determined that none of our non-employee directors has a relationship that would interfere with the exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the responsibilities of a director and that each of these directors is "independent" as that term is defined under NASDAQ Marketplace Rule 5605(a)(2).

          Audit committee members must also satisfy the independence criteria set forth in Rule 10A-3 under the Exchange Act. In order to be considered independent for purposes of Rule 10A-3, a member of an audit committee of a listed company may not, other than in his or her capacity as a member of the audit committee, the board of directors, or any other board committee: accept, directly or indirectly, any consulting, advisory, or other compensatory fee from the listed company or any of its subsidiaries; or be an affiliated person of the listed company or any of its subsidiaries. We intend to satisfy the audit committee independence requirements of Rule 10A-3 as of the closing of this offering.

124


Table of Contents

Board Committees

          Our board of directors has established an audit committee, a compensation committee, a nominating and corporate governance committee, and a security and compliance committee. Each of these committees will have the composition and responsibilities described below as of the closing of this offering. Members serve on these committees until their resignations or until otherwise determined by our board of directors.

Audit Committee

          Our audit committee is comprised of Denise K. Fletcher, William J. Teuber, Jr. and Lee D. Roberts. Ms. Fletcher is the chairperson of our audit committee. The composition of our audit committee meets the requirements for independence under the current NASDAQ and SEC rules and regulations. Each member of our audit committee can read and understand fundamental financial statements in accordance with applicable requirements. In addition, our board of directors has determined that                          and                           are "audit committee financial experts" as defined in Item 407(d)(5)(ii) of Regulation S-K promulgated under the Securities Act. This designation does not impose on them any duties, obligations, or liabilities that are greater than are generally imposed on members of our audit committee and our board of directors. Our audit committee is directly responsible for, among other things, oversight related to:

    our accounting and financial reporting processes;

    the integrity of our financial statements;

    our policies and procedures to fulfill our responsibilities regarding the fair and accurate presentation of our financial statements;

    our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements;

    the audit of our financial statements;

    major issues regarding accounting principles and financial statement presentations;

    our accounting firm's performance and qualifications; and

    the review of all related party transactions for potential conflict of interest situations on an ongoing basis and the approval of all such transactions.

          The audit committee will also be responsible for the appointment, compensation, retention, and oversight of the work of any accounting firm engaged (including resolution of disagreements between management and such firm regarding financial reporting) for the purpose of performing audit, review, or attest services for the company, and for the review with the company's accounting firm of any audit problems or difficulties and management's response. The audit committee also will prepare the audit committee report required by SEC regulations to be included in our annual proxy statement.

Compensation Committee

          Our compensation committee is comprised of Lee D. Roberts, Denise K. Fletcher and William J. Teuber, Jr. Mr. Roberts is the chairman of our compensation committee. The composition of our compensation committee meets the requirements of independence under NASDAQ Marketplace Rule 5605(a)(2). Each member of this committee is an outside director, as defined

125


Table of Contents

pursuant to Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or Code. Our compensation committee is responsible for, among other things:

    Based on the evaluation of the performance of the Chief Executive Officer and other officers, approve and recommend to the Board for review and approval by a majority of the independent directors, the annual compensation of the CEO and other officers, including salary, bonus, equity compensation awards and other benefits;

    determining the objectives of our officer compensation programs, identifying what the programs are designed to reward, and modifying (or recommending that the Board modify) the programs as necessary consistent with such objectives and intended rewards;

    ensuring appropriate corporate performance objectives regarding compensation of our officers are set and determining the extent to which they are achieved and any related compensation earned;

    administering our incentive-compensation plans and equity-based plans as in effect and as adopted from time to time by the Board; and

    reviewing approving, or recommending to the Board for approval any new equity compensation plan or any material change to an existing plan and conducting any valuations required under an equity compensation plan.

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

          Our nominating and corporate governance committee is comprised of André S. Hoffmann, Denise K. Fletcher and William J. Teuber, Jr. Mr. Hoffmann is the chairman of our nominating and corporate governance committee. The composition of our nominating and corporate governance committee meets the requirements of independence under Nasdaq Marketplace Rule 5605(a)(2). Our nominating and corporate governance committee is responsible for, among other things:

    identifying and recommending candidates for membership on our board of directors;

    reviewing and recommending our corporate governance guidelines and policies;

    reviewing proposed waivers of the code of conduct for directors and executive officers;

    overseeing the process of evaluating the performance of our board of directors; and

    assisting our board of directors on corporate governance matters.

Security and Compliance Committee

          Our security and compliance committee is comprised of William J. Teuber Jr., Denise K. Fletcher and Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D. Mr. Teuber is the chairman of our security and compliance committee. Our security and compliance committee is directly responsible for, among other things, oversight related to:

    our compliance with law, rules and regulations, including HIPAA;

    our privacy and security programs, including:

    the security and protection of PHI;

    physical security of our properties, including our datacenters; and

    security of platform, network and big data systems and software;

    the periodic review and assessment of the adequacy and functionality of our privacy and security programs;

126


Table of Contents

    ensuring that our privacy and security programs are aligned with our and our clients' business objectives and goals;

    our disaster recovery and business continuity plans; and

    in conjunction with the board of directors and our Chief Executive Officer, the roles and responsibilities of our Chief Technology Officer, Chief Security Officer, Chief Compliance Officer, and Chief Privacy Officer.


Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

          Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D., our Chief Executive Officer and Chairman, served on our compensation committee during the year ended December 31, 2013. By his choice, at no time during which Dr. Dunleavy served on our compensation committee did he receive any annual bonus, incentive equity, salary increase, or any other provision or change of compensation. For certain agreements between Dr. Dunleavy and us, see "Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions." None of our executive officers has served as a member of the board of directors, or as a member of the compensation or similar committee, of any entity that has one or more executive officers who served on our board of directors or compensation committee during the year ended December 31, 2013.


Code of Business Conduct and Ethics

          Our board of directors has adopted a code of business conduct and ethics that applies to all of our employees, officers, and directors. Additionally, the Board has adopted a supplemental code of ethics for senior financial officers, which applies to our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, and other senior financial officers, who have been designated by our Chief Executive Officer. Among other matters, our code of business conduct and ethics and supplemental code of ethics for senior financial officials are designed to deter wrongdoing and to promote:

    honest and ethical conduct, including the ethical handling of actual or apparent conflicts of interest between personal and professional relationships;

    full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosures in our SEC reports and other public communications;

    compliance with applicable laws, rules, and regulations;

    prompt internal reporting of violations of the code to appropriate persons identified in the code; and

    accountability for adherence to the code of business conduct and ethics.

          Any waiver of the code of business conduct and ethics for our executive officers or directors must be approved by the Board or a committee thereof, and any such waiver will be promptly disclosed as required by law, or NASDAQ regulations.

          The full text of our code of business conduct and ethics and supplemental code of ethics for senior financial officers will be posted on the Investor Relations section of our website at www.inovalon.com. The reference to our website address in this prospectus does not include or incorporate by reference the information on our website into this prospectus. We intend to disclose future amendments to our code of conduct, or waivers of these provisions, that are required to be disclosed under the rules of the SEC or NASDAQ on our website or in public filings.

127


Table of Contents


Director Compensation

          The following table shows information regarding the compensation earned by our non-employee directors for the year ended December 31, 2014. Dr. Dunleavy, who is our Chief Executive Officer, receives no compensation for his service as a director. The compensation received by Dr. Dunleavy as an employee is described in "Executive Compensation — Summary Compensation Table."

Name
 
Fees Earned or
Paid in Cash (1)
 
Option
Awards (2)(3)
 
All Other
Compensation
 
Total
 

Denise K. Fletcher

  $ 50,000   $ 52,994   $   $ 102,994  

André S. Hoffmann

    25,000 (4)   52,994         77,994  

Lee D. Roberts

    50,000     52,994         102,994  

William J. Teuber Jr. 

    50,000     52,994         102,994  

(1)
Represents retainer for service as a director, which is paid in equal quarterly installments of $12,500.

(2)
The amounts reported in the Option Awards column represent the grant date fair value of the stock options granted to the directors during 2014, computed in accordance with Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification Topic 718, or FASB ASC Topic 718. The assumptions used in calculating the grant date fair value of the stock options reported in the Option Awards column are set forth in Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements included in this prospectus and "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Critical Accounting Policies — Stock-Based Compensation." Note that the amounts reported in this column reflect the accounting cost for these stock options and do not correspond to the actual economic value that may be received by the directors upon exercise of the options.

(3)
The shares underlying these options vest in full on the first anniversary of the date of grant.

(4)
Mr. Hoffmann waived his right to receive compensation as a director through June 30, 2014.

          We have adopted a policy with respect to the compensation payable to our non-employee directors, which will become effective upon the closing of this offering. Under this policy, each non-employee director will receive an annual cash retainer of $             , an annual award of $             payable in equity and reimbursement for his or her reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred in attending meetings of our board of directors and its committees. Directors are also entitled to the protection provided by their indemnification agreements and the indemnification provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws.

128


Table of Contents


EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Overview

          As an emerging growth company, we have opted to comply with the executive compensation disclosure rules applicable to "smaller reporting companies," as such term is defined in the rules promulgated under the Securities Act. For the year ended December 31, 2014, our named executive officers are:

    Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D., our Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board;

    Robert A. Wychulis, our President;

    Christopher E. Greiner, our Chief Product and Operations Officer;

    Thomas R. Kloster, our Chief Financial Officer; and

    Joseph R. Rostock, our Chief Technology Officer.


Summary Compensation Table

          The following table sets forth a summary of all compensation that was awarded to, earned by or paid to, as applicable, each of our named executive officers for the year ended December 31, 2014.

Name and Principal Position
  Salary   Bonus
(1)
  Option
Awards
(2)(3)
  All Other
Compensation
(4)
  Total  

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D. 

  $ 205,000   $   $   $ 4,891   $ 209,891  

Chief Executive Officer

                               

Robert A. Wychulis
President

    201,923 (4)       989,302     105     1,191,330  

Christopher E. Greiner
Chief Product and Operations Officer

    306,058         394,119     107,310     807,487  

Thomas R. Kloster
Chief Financial Officer

    255,769 (5)       999,916     143     1,255,828  

Joseph R. Rostock
Chief Technology Officer

    331,563             10,595     342,158  

(1)
Bonuses are determined at the discretion of the Board of Directors after the end of the fiscal year and are not calculable as of the date of this prospectus. The Board of Directors may consider a variety of factors in determining the amount of bonus awards, including, among other factors, the achievement of revenue and Adjusted EBITDA targets and broad corporate objectives, but the Board of Directors retains discretion to award bonuses even when these objectives have not been achieved.

(2)
The amounts reported in the Option Awards column represent the grant date fair value of the stock options granted to the named executive officers during 2014, computed in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 718. The assumptions used in calculating the grant date fair value of the stock options reported in the Option Awards column are set forth in Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements included in this prospectus and "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Critical Accounting Policies — Stock-Based Compensation." Note that the amounts reported in this column reflect the accounting cost for these stock options and do not correspond to the actual economic value that may be received by the named executive officers upon exercise of the options.

129


Table of Contents

(3)
Messrs. Wychulis and Kloster were awarded options to purchase 55,053 and 57,899 shares, respectively, in connection with the commencement of their employment in May 2014 and March 2014, respectively. Mr. Greiner was awarded options to purchase an aggregate of 31,919 shares in connection with his hiring as Chief Product Officer in May 2013 and his promotion to Chief Product and Operations Officer in May 2014.

(4)
For Dr. Dunleavy and Mr. Rostock, represents matching contributions under our 401(k) plan and premium payments for life insurance, and for Messrs. Wychulis and Kloster, represents premium payments for life insurance and for Mr. Greiner it represents relocation expense reimbursement, matching contributions under our 401(k) plan and premium payments for life insurance.

(5)
Represents the pro rata portion of Mr. Wychulis' $350,000 base salary, based on his start date of May 19, 2014.

(6)
Represents the pro rata portion of Mr. Kloster's $350,000 base salary, based on his start date of March 24, 2014.


Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End

          The following table presents, for each of the named executive officers, information regarding outstanding stock options held as of December 31, 2014.

Name
  Grant Date   Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options
Exercisable
Shares
  Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options
Unexercisable
Shares
  Option
Exercise
Price
  Option
Expiration
Date
 

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D.
Chief Executive Officer

              $      

Robert A. Wychulis
President

   
8/15/2014
   
   
55,053

(1)
 
39.44
   
8/14/2024
 

Christopher E. Greiner

   
6/30/2013
   
9,289
   
37,158
   
33.39
   
6/29/2023
 

     Chief Product and

    5/2/2014         22,821     35.15     5/1/2024  

     Operations Officer

    5/14/2014         9,098     37.51     5/13/2024  

Thomas R. Kloster
Chief Financial Officer

   
5/14/2014
   
   
57,899

(1)
 
37.51
   
5/13/2024
 

Joseph R. Rostock

   
6/30/2013
   
9,289
   
37,158
   
33.39
   
6/29/2023
 

     Chief Technology Officer

    5/14/2014         8,271     37.51     5/13/2024  

(1)
The shares underlying these options vest 20% on each of the first five anniversaries of the date of grant.


Employment Agreements

          We have entered into employment agreements with each of our named executive officers, which may be terminated at any time by the named executive officer or us for any reason. The agreements provide for the principal terms and conditions of our named executive officers' employment, including their base salary, an indication of eligibility for an annual bonus opportunity (except with respect to Dr. Dunleavy), participation in our employee benefit plans as may be in effect from time to time, paid time off, and reimbursement of reasonable business expenses.

130


Table of Contents

Pursuant to the employment agreements, the base salary and target bonus amounts for each of our named executive officers is as follows:

Named Executive Officer
  Base Salary  
Target Bonus
(% of Base Salary)
 
Target Bonus
Amount(1)
 

Dr. Keith R. Dunleavy
Chief Executive Officer

  $ 205,000       $ —      

Robert A. Wychulis
President

    350,000     100     350,000  

Christopher E. Greiner
Chief Product and Operations Officer

    307,500     100     307,500  

Thomas R. Kloster
Chief Financial Officer

    350,000     100     350,000  

Joseph R. Rostock
Chief Technology Officer

    333,125     100     333,125  

(1)
Bonus awards generally are paid out one-third in cash and two-thirds in equity awards.

          If we terminate the employment of our named executive officers (with the exception of Dr. Dunleavy) other than for "cause" (as defined in the employment agreements), subject to the named executive officer's execution and non-revocation of a release in favor of us, we will provide the named executive officer with a lump-sum cash severance benefit equal to the greater of (i) one month's base salary or (ii) one month's base salary per each full year of their service with us, subject to a maximum of six months' base salary.

          Under the employment agreements, in the absence of express written consent by us to the contrary, each of our named executive officers will devote the entirety of their professional and business time, attention, skill, and energy exclusively to our business and will adhere to certain non-competition, confidentiality, and non-disclosure provisions.

          Our compensation committee intends to review the compensation of our executive officers in the second quarter of 2015. In connection with this review, the committee expects to conduct a review and analysis of our executive compensation levels and practices, peer group composition, long-term incentive plan design and grant practices, and change in control and severance practices, including an assessment of market data in order to help ensure that our compensation metrics and methods are appropriate following this offering. The committee intends to focus its analysis in order to ensure that our executive compensation program:

    permits us to recruit talented and well-qualified executives to serve in leadership positions, including through peer benchmarking;

    helps us retain such experienced executives to lead our organization over the long term; and

    motivates our executives to succeed by providing compensation that is based on performance and aligned with the interests of our stockholders.

          In connection with this analysis, the committee may determine to adjust one or more components of the compensation of our executive officers in order to achieve those goals.


Employee Benefit Plans

          Our named executive officers are eligible to participate in our employee benefit plans, including our medical, dental, vision, group life and accidental death and dismemberment insurance plans, short-term and long-term disability insurance, and flexible spending accounts, in each case,

131


Table of Contents

on the same basis as all of our other employees. We do not provide perquisites or personal benefits to our named executive officers.

401(k) Plan

          We sponsor a Profit Sharing Plan and Trust, or 401(k) Plan, which is intended to meet the requirements of Section 401(k) of the Code. Our employees generally are eligible to participate in the 401(k) Plan upon the completion of 30 days of service with us. We match employee contributions up to 4.0% of their compensation and our matching contributions vest immediately.

Pension Benefits

          Aside from our 401(k) Plan, we do not maintain any pension plan or arrangement under which our named executive officers are entitled to participate or receive post-retirement benefits.


Equity Incentive Plans

          The principal features of our equity incentive plans are summarized below. These summaries are qualified in their entirety by reference to the actual text of the plans, which are filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

Pre-IPO Long-Term Incentive Plan

          Our Amended and Restated Long-Term Incentive Plan (as last amended on October 7, 2010), or the Pre-IPO Plan, was assumed by us in connection with the Corporate Reorganization, and, as a result, options to purchase common stock of Inovalon, Inc. were assumed by us. The Pre-IPO Plan provides for the grant of incentive stock options, which qualify for favorable tax treatment to their recipients under Section 422 of the Code, and nonstatutory stock options, as well as for the issuance of shares of common stock, performance units, "phantom" units, stock appreciation rights, or SARs, and other rights containing such terms, benefits, or restrictions as specified by the committee administering the Pre-IPO Plan. We may grant incentive stock options only to our employees. We may grant nonstatutory stock options to our employees, directors, consultants, and advisors. The exercise price of each stock option must be at least equal to the per share fair market value of our common stock underlying the option on the date of grant. The exercise price of each incentive stock option granted to 10% stockholders must be at least equal to 110% of the fair market value of our common stock underlying the option on the date of grant. The maximum permitted term of options granted under our Pre-IPO Plan is 10 years, except that the maximum permitted term of incentive stock options granted to 10% stockholders is 5 years. In the event of certain changes of control (as defined in the Pre-IPO plan), the committee administering the Pre-IPO Plan may take whatever actions it deems necessary or desirable with respect to any of the options outstanding or awards granted thereunder, including, without limitation, accelerating the expiration of options to a date no earlier than 30 days after notice of such acceleration or accelerating the exercisability of options. After the continuous service of an employee, director, consultant or advisor terminates, he or she may exercise his or her option, to the extent vested, only to the extent provided in the stock option agreement. As of September 30, 2014, we had reserved 2,055,000 shares of our Class B common stock for issuance under our Pre-IPO Plan. As of September 30, 2014, we had granted options to purchase 3,488,425 shares, options to purchase 283,902 of these shares had been exercised, options to purchase 1,914,268 shares have expired and returned to the pool, and as a result 480,843 of these shares remained available for future grant. The options to purchase 1,290,255 shares outstanding as of September 30, 2014 had a weighted-average exercise price of $29.86 per share. In November 2014, restricted stock unit awards with respect to 97,756 shares were granted under the Pre-IPO Plan. We will cease issuing awards under our Pre-IPO Plan upon the implementation of the 2015 Plan (as defined below). Our

132


Table of Contents

2015 Plan will become effective on the date of the completion of this offering. As a result, we will not grant any additional awards under the Pre-IPO Plan following that date, and the Pre-IPO Plan will terminate at that time. However, any outstanding awards granted under the Pre-IPO Plan will remain outstanding, subject to the terms of our Pre-IPO Plan and applicable agreements, until such outstanding awards are exercised (if applicable) or terminate or expire by their terms.

2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan

          Our 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan, or the 2015 Plan, was adopted by our board of directors on             , 2014 and approved by our stockholders on                          , 2014. The 2015 Plan will become effective on the date of the completion of this offering. The 2015 Plan will provide for the grant of incentive stock options, within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, to our employees and any parent and subsidiary employees, and for the grant of non-qualified stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, restricted stock units, dividend equivalent rights, cash-based awards (including annual cash incentives and long-term cash incentives), and any combination thereof to our employees, directors, and consultants and to employees, directors, and consultants of certain affiliated entities.

          In connection with this offering, we will reserve for issuance under the 2015 Plan shares of our Class A common stock equal to the sum of: (i)                            shares of Class A common stock; (ii) the number of shares of our Class A common stock (                          as of             ) in respect of the number of shares of our common stock that remain available for grant under our Pre-IPO Plan; and (iii) the number of shares of our Class A common stock in respect of awards granted under the Pre-IPO Plan (             as of              ) that are forfeited, canceled, or expire (whether voluntarily or involuntarily).

          Our board of directors or a committee of our board of directors will administer the 2015 Plan. In the case of awards intended to qualify as "performance-based compensation" within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code, the compensation committee consists of two or more "outside directors" within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code. The compensation committee will have the power to determine and interpret the terms and conditions of the awards, including the employees, directors, and consultants who will receive awards, the exercise price, the number of shares subject to each such award, the vesting schedule and exercisability of the awards, the restrictions on transferability of awards, and the form of consideration payable upon exercise. The compensation committee also will have the authority to reduce the exercise prices of outstanding stock options and the base appreciation amount of any stock appreciation right if the exercise price or base appreciation amount exceeds the fair market value of the underlying shares, and to cancel such options and stock appreciation rights in exchange for new awards, in each case without stockholder approval.

          The 2015 Plan will allow for the grant of incentive stock options that qualify under Section 422 of the Code only to our employees and employees of any of our parents or subsidiaries. Non-qualified stock options may be granted to our employees and directors and those of certain of our affiliates. The exercise price of all options granted under the 2015 Plan must be equal to at least the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the date of grant. The term of an incentive stock option may not exceed 10 years, except that with respect to any employee who owns more than 10% of the voting power of all classes of our outstanding stock or any parent or subsidiary corporation as of the grant date, the term must not exceed 5 years, and the exercise price must equal at least 110% of the fair market value on the grant date.

          After the continuous service of an employee, director, or consultant terminates, he or she may exercise his or her option, to the extent vested, for the period of time specified in the option agreement. However, an option may not be exercised later than the expiration of its term.

133


Table of Contents

          The 2015 Plan will allow for the grant of stock appreciation rights. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of our Class A common stock between the date of grant and the exercise date. The compensation committee will determine the terms of any stock appreciation rights, including when such rights become exercisable and whether to pay the increased appreciation in cash or with shares of our Class A common stock, or a combination thereof, except that the base appreciation amount used to determine the cash or shares to be issued pursuant to the exercise of a stock appreciation right will be no less than 100% of the fair market value per share on the date of grant. After the continuous service of an employee, director or consultant terminates, he or she may exercise his or her stock appreciation right, to the extent vested, only to the extent provided in the stock appreciation right agreement.

          The 2015 Plan will allow for the grant of restricted stock. Restricted stock awards are shares of our Class A common stock that vest in accordance with terms and conditions established by the compensation committee. The compensation committee will determine the number of shares of any restricted stock granted to any employee, director or consultant. The compensation committee may impose whatever conditions on vesting it determines to be appropriate. For example, the compensation committee may set restrictions based on the achievement of specific performance goals. Shares of restricted stock that do not vest are subject to our right of repurchase or forfeiture.

          The 2015 Plan will allow for the grant of restricted stock units. Restricted stock units are awards that will result in payment to a recipient at the end of a specified period only if the vesting criteria established by the compensation committee are achieved or the award otherwise vests. The compensation committee may impose whatever conditions to vesting, or restrictions and conditions to payment that it determines to be appropriate. The compensation committee may set restrictions based on the achievement of specific performance goals or on the continuation of service or employment. Payments of earned restricted stock units may be made, in the compensation committee's discretion, in cash, with shares of our Class A common stock or other securities, or a combination thereof.

          The 2015 Plan also will allow for the grant of awards denominated in cash that may be settled in cash or shares of Class A common stock, which may be subject to restrictions as established by the compensation committee. Prior to the first stockholder meeting at which directors are to be elected to our board of directors that occurs after the close of the third calendar year following the calendar year in which this offering occurs, the maximum aggregate amount of cash that may be issued pursuant to awards under the 2015 Plan to employees who would otherwise be covered by Section 162(m) of the Code will be $             . Section 162(m) generally applies to a public company's chief executive officer and its three other most highly compensated executive officers, other than its chief financial officer.

          The compensation committee will determine the provisions, terms, and conditions of each award including vesting schedules, forfeiture provisions, form of payment (cash, shares, or other consideration) upon settlement of the award, payment contingencies, and satisfaction of any performance criteria. The performance criteria established by the compensation committee for any awards intended to qualify as "performance-based compensation" for purposes of Section 162(m) of the Code, will be one of, or combination of, the following: net earnings or net income (before or after taxes); earnings per share; revenues or sales (including net sales or revenue growth); net operating profit; return measures (including return on assets, net assets, capital, invested capital, equity, sales, or revenue); cash flow (including operating cash flow, free cash flow, cash flow return on equity, and cash flow return on investment); earnings before or after taxes, interest, depreciation, or amortization; gross or operating margins; productivity ratios; share price (including growth measures and total stockholder return); expense targets; margins; operating efficiency; market share; working capital targets and change in working capital; economic value added or EVA® (net operating profit after tax minus the sum of capital multiplied by the cost of capital); or net operating

134


Table of Contents

income. The performance criteria may be applicable to our company, our affiliates and any individual business units of our company or any affiliate and may be measured annually or cumulatively over a period of years, on an absolute basis or relative to a pre-established target, to previous years' results or to a designated comparison group, in each case as specified by the compensation committee.

          The 2015 Plan will allow for the transfer of awards under the 2015 Plan only (i) by will, (ii) by the laws of descent and distribution, and (iii) for awards other than incentive stock options, to the extent authorized by the compensation committee to certain persons or entities. Only the recipient of an incentive stock option may exercise such award during his or her lifetime.

          In the event of certain changes in our capitalization, to prevent enlargement of the benefits or potential benefits available under the 2015 Plan, the compensation committee will make adjustments to one or more of the number of shares that are covered by outstanding awards, the exercise or purchase price of outstanding awards, the numerical share limits contained in the 2015 Plan, and any other terms that the compensation committee determines require adjustment.

          The 2015 Plan provides that in the event of certain corporate transactions, as such term is defined in the 2015 Plan, the portion of each outstanding award that is neither continued by us nor assumed or replaced by the successor entity or its parent will automatically terminate. Except as provided otherwise in an individual award agreement, in the event of a corporate transaction, the portion of each award that is continued by us or assumed or replaced by the successor entity or its parent automatically will become fully vested immediately upon termination of the holder's continuous service if such continuous service is terminated by the successor company or us without cause (as defined in the 2015 Plan) or voluntarily by the holder with good reason (as defined in the 2015 Plan), in each case within 12 months after the corporate transaction. Except as provided otherwise in an individual award agreement, in the event of a change of control, as such term is defined in the 2015 Plan, each award will become fully vested immediately upon termination of the holder's continuous service if such continuous service is terminated by us without cause or voluntarily by the holder with good reason, in each case within 12 months after the change of control.

          The 2015 Plan will automatically terminate 10 years following the date it becomes effective, unless we terminate it sooner. In addition, our board of directors has the authority to amend, suspend or terminate the 2015 Plan provided such action does not impair the rights under any outstanding award.


Limitations on Liability and Indemnification Matters

          Our restated certificate of incorporation that will become effective upon the closing of this offering contains provisions that limit the liability of our directors for monetary damages to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law. Consequently, our directors will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages for any breach of fiduciary duties as directors, except liability for:

    any breach of the director's duty of loyalty to us or our stockholders;

    any act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

    unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions as provided in Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law; or

    any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.

135


Table of Contents

          Our restated certificate of incorporation and our restated bylaws that will become effective upon the closing of this offering require us to indemnify our directors and officers to the maximum extent not prohibited by the Delaware General Corporation Law and allow us to indemnify other employees and agents as set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law. Subject to certain limitations, our restated bylaws also require us to advance expenses incurred by our directors and officers for the defense of any action for which indemnification is required or permitted.

          We have entered, and intend to continue to enter, into separate indemnification agreements with our directors, officers and, certain of our key employees, in addition to the indemnification provided for in our restated bylaws. These agreements, among other things, require us to indemnify our directors, officers, and key employees for certain expenses, including attorneys' fees, judgments, penalties fines, and settlement amounts actually and reasonably incurred by such director, officer, or key employee in any action or proceeding arising out of their service to us or any of our subsidiaries or any other company or enterprise to which the person provides services at our request. Subject to certain limitations, our indemnification agreements also require us to advance expenses incurred by our directors, officers, and key employees for the defense of any action for which indemnification is required or permitted.

          We believe that these charter provisions and indemnification agreements are necessary to attract and retain qualified persons such as directors, officers, and key employees. We also maintain directors' and officers' liability insurance.

          The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions in our restated certificate of incorporation and restated bylaws may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our directors and officers for breach of their fiduciary duty. They may also reduce the likelihood of derivative litigation against our directors and officers, even though an action, if successful, might benefit us and other stockholders. Further, a stockholder's investment may be adversely affected to the extent that we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers as required by these indemnification provisions.

          At present, there is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors or executive officers as to which indemnification is required or permitted, and we are not aware of any threatened litigation or proceeding that may result in a claim for indemnification.

          Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, executive officers or persons controlling us, we have been informed that in the opinion of the SEC such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore, in the opinion of the SEC, unenforceable.

136


Table of Contents


CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

          In addition to the executive officer and director compensation arrangements discussed above under "Management — Director Compensation" and "Executive Compensation," the following is a description of transactions since January 1, 2013 to which we have been a participant, in which the amount involved in the transaction exceeds or will exceed $120,000 and in which any of our directors, executive officers, or holders of more than 5% of our capital stock, or any immediate family member of, or person sharing the household with, any of these individuals, had or will have a direct or indirect material interest.


Stockholders' Agreement

          We are a party to the Second Amended and Restated Stockholders Rights Agreement, dated September 15, 2014, or Stockholders' Agreement, with the existing holders of our Class B common stock, including Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D., our Chief Executive Officer and Chairman, André S. Hoffmann, a member of our board of directors, Denise K. Fletcher, a member of our board of directors, William J. Teuber, a member of our board of directors, and Daniel L. Rizzo, our Chief Innovation Officer. In addition, any of our executive officers or directors who exercise options to purchase our Class B common stock subsequent to the date of this prospectus will become a party to the Stockholders' Agreement at such time. These stockholders are entitled to rights with respect to the registration of their shares for resale following this offering under the Securities Act. For a description of these registration rights, see "Description of Capital Stock — Registration Rights."


Indemnification Agreements

          Concurrently with the completion of this offering, we will enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers. The indemnification agreements and our bylaws require us to indemnify our directors to the fullest extent not prohibited by Delaware law. Subject to certain limitations, our restated bylaws also require us to advance expenses incurred by our directors and officers. For more information regarding these agreements, see "Executive Compensation — Limitations on Liability and Indemnification Matters."


Shareholders Voting Agreement

          We are party to the Shareholders Voting Agreement, dated September 15, 2008, with the holders of a majority of our Class B common stock, including Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D., our Chief Executive Officer and Chairman, André S. Hoffmann, a member of our board of directors, and Daniel L. Rizzo, our Chief Innovation Officer, or entities controlled by them. Under the Shareholders Voting Agreement, the parties agreed to vote all shares of our voting capital stock then owned and subsequently acquired by them to elect André Hoffmann (or another individual mutually agreed upon by the parties) to our board of directors. Unless otherwise agreed by the holders of a majority of the shares subject to the agreement, the Shareholders Voting Agreement will terminate on the earliest to occur of the following: (i) as to Mr. Hoffmann, at such time as he owns less than 10% of the outstanding capital stock of our company on a fully diluted basis; (ii) as to the other parties to the agreement, at such time as they own, in the aggregate, less than 50% of the outstanding capital stock of our company on a fully diluted basis; and (iii) September 15, 2018.


Equity Grants to Executive Officers and Directors

          We have granted stock options to our executive officers and directors, as more fully described in the sections entitled "Executive Compensation" and "Management — Director Compensation," respectively.


Review, Approval, or Ratification of Transactions with Related Parties

          Our policy and the charters of our audit committee and our nominating and corporate governance committee that will become effective upon the closing of this offering require that any transaction with a related party that must be reported under applicable rules of the SEC (other than compensation-related matters) must be reviewed and approved or ratified by the audit committee, unless the related party is, or is associated with, a member of that committee, in which event the transaction must be reviewed and approved by the nominating and corporate governance committee.

137


Table of Contents


PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

          The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the beneficial ownership of our Class A and Class B common stock as of September 30, 2014, and as adjusted to reflect the sale of Class A common stock offered by us in this offering, for:

    each stockholder known by us to be the beneficial owner of more than 5% of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock or Class B common stock;

    each of our directors;

    each of our named executive officers; and

    all of our directors and executive officers as a group.

          The SEC has defined "beneficial ownership" of a security to mean the possession, directly or indirectly, of voting power or investment power over such security. A stockholder is also deemed to be, as of any date, the beneficial owner of all securities that such stockholder has the right to acquire within 60 days after that date through (1) the exercise of any option, warrant, or right, (2) the conversion of a security, (3) the power to revoke a trust, discretionary account, or similar arrangement, or (4) the automatic termination of a trust, discretionary account, or similar arrangement.

          Applicable percentage ownership prior to this offering is based on no shares of Class A common stock and 24,451,429 shares of Class B common stock outstanding as of September 30, 2014. Applicable percentage ownership after this offering is based on                          shares of Class A common stock and 24,451,429 shares of Class B common stock outstanding immediately after the closing of this offering (assuming no exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock). In computing the number of shares of common stock beneficially owned by a person and the percentage ownership of that person, we deemed to be outstanding (as shares of Class B common stock) all shares of common stock subject to options held by that person or entity that were exercisable on September 30, 2014, or that will become exercisable within 60 days thereafter, while such shares are not deemed outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage ownership of any other person.

          Unless otherwise indicated, the address of each beneficial owner listed in the table below is c/o Inovalon Holdings, Inc., 4321 Collington Road, Bowie, Maryland 20716. Except as indicated by the footnotes below, we believe, based on the information furnished to us, that the persons and entities named in the table below have sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares of common stock that they beneficially own, subject to applicable community property laws. No

138


Table of Contents

shares of common stock beneficially owned by any executive officer or director have been pledged as security for a loan.

 
  Shares Beneficially Owned
Prior to this Offering
 
% of
Total
Voting
Power
Before
this
Offering(1)
  Shares Beneficially Owned
After this Offering
 
% of
Total
Voting
Power
Before
this
Offering(1)
 
 
  Class A   Class B   Class A   Class B  
Name of Beneficial Owner
 
Shares
 
%
 
Shares
 
%
 
Shares
 
%
 
Shares
 
%
 

Named Executive Officers and Directors

                                                             

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D.(2)

            10,989,451     44.9     44.9                                

Robert A. Wychulis

                                                   

Christopher E. Greiner(3)

            9,289     *     *                                

Thomas R. Kloster

                                                   

Daniel L. Rizzo(4)

            1,085,086     4.5     4.5                                

Jason Z. Rose(3)

            54,093     *     *                                

Joseph R. Rostock(3)

            9,289     *     *                                

Shauna L. Vernal(3)

            5,841     *     *                                

Denise K. Fletcher(3)

            6,303     *     *                                

André S. Hoffmann(5)

            5,746,939     23.5     23.5                                

Lee D. Roberts(3)

            6,875     *     *                                

William J. Teuber Jr. 

            3,194     *     *                                

All executive officers and directors as a group (12 persons)

            17,916,360     73.0     73.0                                

5% Stockholders

                                                             

Meritas Group, Inc.(2)

            9,495,364     38.8     38.8                                

Lapis Ventures SAC Limited(5)

            3,931,129     16.1     16.1                                

Meritas Holdings, LLC(2)

            1,494,087     6.1     6.1                                

Rick W. Lasch(6)

            1,403,512     5.8     5.8                                

Suzanne C.E. Lasch(6)

            1,403,512     5.8     5.8                                

*
Represents beneficial ownership of less than 1% of our outstanding shares of common stock.

(1)
Percentage of total voting power represents voting power with respect to all shares of our Class A and Class B common stock, as a single class. Holders of our Class B common stock are entitled to ten votes per share and will be convertible at any time into one share of Class A common stock, which will be entitled to one vote per share. For more information about the voting rights of our Class A and Class B common stock, see "Description of Capital Stock — Common Stock."

(2)
Consists of (a) 9,495,364 shares of Class B common stock held directly by Meritas Group, Inc. and (b) 1,494,087 shares held by Meritas Holdings, LLC. Dr. Dunleavy, as the sole officer and sole director of Meritas Group, Inc. and as sole non-member manager of Meritas Holdings, LLC, maintains sole voting and dispositive control over such shares. All ownership interests in Meritas Group, Inc. and Meritas Holdings, LLC are owned by an irrevocable trust for the sole benefit of Dr. Dunleavy's descendants and in which Dr. Dunleavy has no pecuniary interest.

(3)
Consists of shares issuable upon the exercise of options exercisable within 60 days of the date of this prospectus.

(4)
Includes (i) 12,242 shares issuable upon the exercise of options exercisable within 60 days of the date of this prospectus, (ii) 68,753 shares owned by an irrevocable charitable trust with an unrelated trustee over which shares Mr. Rizzo maintains dispositive control, and (iii) 275,010 shares owned by an irrevocable trust for the sole benefit of Mr. Rizzo's son.

(5)
Includes (i) 3,931,129 shares of Class B common stock held by Lapis Ventures, SAC Limited on behalf of Lapis Healthcare, (ii) 744,238 shares of Class B common stock held by Lapis Ventures Limited SAC on behalf of Lapis Data, and (ii) 167,053 shares of Class B common stock held by Lapis Ventures, SAC Limited on behalf of Lapis Medical. Mr. Hoffmann maintains sole voting and dispositive power over the shares held by Lapis Ventures, SAC Limited.

(6)
Richard W. Lasch and Suzanne C.E. Lasch are husband and wife. Share numbers include (i) 481,249 shares of Class B Common Stock ("Shares") owned by Mr. Lasch and as to which he has sole investment discretion and voting power, (ii) an aggregate of 354,226 Shares held by three trusts of which Mr. Lasch is the trustee and as to which he has sole investment discretion and voting power and (iii) an aggregate of 568,037 shares held by two trusts of which Mrs. Lasch is the trustee and as to which she has sole investment discretion and voting power.

139


Table of Contents


DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

          Our authorized capital stock consists of 50,000,000 shares of Class A common stock, $0.000025 par value per share, 50,000,000 shares of Class B common stock, $0.000025 par value per share, 100,000,000 shares of common stock, $0.000025 par value per share, and 100,000,000 shares of undesignated preferred stock, $0.0001 par value per share. No shares of common stock will be issued or outstanding until the date on which the number of outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represents less than 10% of the aggregate combined number of outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock, at which time all outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock will automatically convert into shares of common stock. The following description summarizes the most important terms of our capital stock. Because it is only a summary, it does not contain all the information that may be important to you and is qualified in its entirety by reference to our restated certificate of incorporation and restated bylaws, which are included as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part, and to the applicable provisions of Delaware law.


Corporate Reorganization

          Effective September 17, 2014, in order to facilitate the administration, management and development of our business and this offering, Inovalon, Inc. implemented a holding company reorganization, or the Corporate Reorganization, pursuant to which we became the new parent company and Inovalon, Inc. became our direct, wholly owned subsidiary. To implement the Corporate Reorganization, Inovalon, Inc. formed our company and we, in turn, formed Inovalon Merger Sub, Inc., or the Merger Sub. The holding company structure was implemented by the merger of Merger Sub with and into Inovalon, Inc. with Inovalon, Inc. surviving the merger as a direct, wholly-owned subsidiary of our company. As a result of the Corporate Reorganization each share of Inovalon, Inc. issued and outstanding immediately prior to the merger automatically converted into one share of common stock of our company.

          After the Corporate Reorganization, our capital stock was reclassified to implement a dual class capital structure providing for two classes of common stock, with each share of common stock held by our existing stockholders reclassified as Class B common stock. Following the reclassification, we redeemed approximately 8.33% of our Class B common stock on a pro rata basis among our stockholders for an aggregate amount of $300.0 million using the proceeds from the Term Loan Facility, as more fully described in "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations — Liquidity and Capital Resources — Debt."


Class A and B Common Stock

General

          As of the date of this prospectus, no shares of Class A common stock are outstanding and 24,451,429 shares of Class B common stock are outstanding. Upon the completion of this offering, there will be             shares of Class A common stock outstanding (assuming no exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares) and 24,451,429 shares of Class B common stock outstanding.

Voting Rights

          Holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock have identical voting rights, except that holders of our Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share and holders of our Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share. Holders of shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock will vote together as a single class on all matters (including the election of directors) submitted to a vote of stockholders, except that there will be

140


Table of Contents

separate votes of holders of shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock in the following circumstances:

    if we propose to treat the shares of a class of our stock differently with respect to any dividend or distribution of cash, property, or shares of our stock paid or distributed by us;

    if we propose to treat the shares of a class of our stock differently with respect to any subdivision or combination of the shares of a class of our stock; or

    if we propose to treat the shares of a class of our stock differently in connection with a change of control with respect to any consideration into which the shares are converted or any consideration paid or otherwise distributed to our stockholders.

          Under our restated certificate of incorporation, we may not increase or decrease the authorized number of shares of Class A common stock or Class B common stock without the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the combined voting power of the outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock.

          Under our restated certificate of incorporation, we may not issue any shares of Class B common stock, other than upon exercise of options, warrants, or similar rights to acquire shares of Class B common stock outstanding at the time of this offering and in connection with stock dividends and similar transactions, unless that issuance is approved by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of Class B common stock.

Dividend Rights

          Subject to preferences that may apply to any shares of preferred stock outstanding at the time, the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock are entitled to share equally, identically and ratably, on a per share basis, with respect to any dividend or distribution of cash, property or shares of our capital stock paid or distributed by the company, unless different treatment of the shares of each such class is approved by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, each voting separately as a class. In the event a dividend or distribution is paid in the form of shares of Class A common stock or Class B common stock or rights to acquire shares of stock, the holders of Class A common stock will receive Class A common stock, or rights to acquire Class A common stock, and the holders of Class B common stock will receive Class B common stock, or rights to acquire Class B common stock.

No Preemptive or Similar Rights

          Upon the completion of this offering, our common stock will not be entitled to preemptive rights and will not be subject to conversion, redemption or sinking fund provisions, except for the conversion provisions of our Class B common stock discussed below.

Right to Receive Liquidation Distributions

          Upon our liquidation, dissolution or winding-up, the holders of Class A common stock and Class B common stock will be entitled to share equally, ratably, and identically, on a per share basis, in all assets remaining after the payment of any liabilities and the liquidation preferences on any outstanding preferred stock, unless different treatment of the shares of such class is approved by the affirmative vote of the holders of the majority of the outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, each voting separately as a class.

141


Table of Contents

Conversion

          Each outstanding share of Class B common stock is convertible at any time at the option of the holder into one share of Class A common stock. In addition, each share of Class B common stock will convert automatically into one share of Class A common stock upon any transfer, whether or not for value, except for certain transfers described in our restated certificate of incorporation, including, without limitation, transfers for tax and estate planning purposes, so long as the transferring holder of Class B common stock continues to hold exclusive voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares transferred, and transfers to persons or entitities who are Class B stockholders at the time of the transfer. Also, each share of Class B common stock held of record by a natural person, other than a natural person who held the shares as of our initial public offering, will convert automatically into one share of Class A common stock upon the death of the holder. Once converted into Class A common stock, a share of Class B common stock may not be reissued.

          Upon the date on which the number of outstanding shares of Class B common stock represents less than 10% of the aggregate combined number of outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock or upon a two-thirds vote by all holders of Class B common stock, all outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock will convert automatically into a single class of common stock, and no additional shares of Class A common stock or Class B common stock will be issued.


Preferred Stock

          Following this offering, no shares of preferred stock will be outstanding. Pursuant to our restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will be authorized, subject to limitations prescribed by Delaware law, to issue up to 100,000,000 shares of preferred stock in one or more series, to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each series, and to fix the designation, powers, preferences and rights of the shares of each series and any of its qualifications, limitations or restrictions, in each case without further vote or action by our stockholders. Our board of directors can also increase or decrease the number of shares of any series of preferred stock, but not below the number of shares of that series then outstanding, without any further vote or action by our stockholders. Our board of directors may authorize the issuance of preferred stock with voting or conversion rights that could adversely affect the voting power or other rights of the holders of our common stock. The issuance of preferred stock, while providing flexibility in connection with possible acquisitions and other corporate purposes, could, among other things, have the effect of delaying, deferring, or preventing a change in control of our company and might adversely affect the market price of our Class A common stock and the voting and other rights of the holders of our common stock. We have no current plan to issue any shares of preferred stock.


Options

          As of September 30, 2014, we had outstanding options to purchase an aggregate of 1,290,255 shares of our Class B common stock, with a weighted-average exercise price of $29.86, of which 753,197 were vested and exercisable.


Restricted Stock Units

          Upon completion of this offering, we will have 97,756 restricted stock units outstanding.

142


Table of Contents


Stock Awards Available For Future Issuance

          Upon completion of this offering, a total of             shares of Class A common stock remain available for future issuance under our 2015 Plan. No awards will be granted under the Pre-IPO Plan after the completion of this offering.


Registration Rights

          Pursuant to the terms of the Stockholders' Agreement, immediately following this offering, the holders of 24,451,429 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to rights with respect to the registration of these shares under the Securities Act, as described below. We refer to these shares collectively as registrable securities. The description below is only a summary, does not contain all the information that may be important to you and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the Stockholders' Agreement, a copy of which is included as an exhibit to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part.

          Registration of the resale of any of the shares of common stock held by security holders with registration rights would result in such shares becoming freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act immediately upon effectiveness of such registration.

Demand Registration Rights

          Under the Stockholders' Agreement, the holders of at least 40% of the then-outstanding registrable securities may make a written request to us to register the resale of at least 40% of the registrable securities then outstanding. We are only required to file two registration statements that are declared effective upon exercise of these demand registration rights. We may postpone the filing of a registration statement for up to 180 days in any 12-month period if our board of directors determines in good faith, among other things, that the filing would be materially detrimental to us and our stockholders.

Piggyback Registration Rights

          Under the Stockholders' Agreement, if, after the completion of this offering, we propose to file a registration statement in connection with an underwritten public offering of our securities for cash, we will have to use our reasonable best efforts to include in the registration statement all registrable securities that the holders request in writing be registered for resale within 20 days of mailing of notice by us to all holders of the proposed public offering. However, this right does not apply to a registration statement relating to, among other transactions, the issuance of securities under any of our stock plans, a corporate reorganization, or other transaction under Rule 145 of the Securities Act, or a registration on any registration form that does not include substantially the same information as would be required to be included in a registration statement covering the sale of the registrable securities. The underwriters of any underwritten offering will have the right to limit the number of registrable securities to be sold pursuant the holders' piggyback registration rights if they determine, in their reasonable discretion, that the inclusion of such shares would jeopardize the success of the public offering. However, in no event will the number of shares registered by these holders be limited by the underwriters to less than 20% of the total shares offered by the registration statement.

Form S-3 Registration Rights

          Under the Stockholders' Agreement, the holders of at least 15% of the then-outstanding registrable securities can request that we register all or part of their shares on Form S-3 if we are eligible to file a registration statement on Form S-3 and if the aggregate price to the public of the shares offered, net of any underwriters' discounts or commissions, is at least $25.0 million. The

143


Table of Contents

stockholders may only require us to effect two registration statements on Form S-3 in any 12-month period. We may postpone the filing of a registration statement on Form S-3 twice during any 12-month period, in each case for not more than 90 days, if our board of directors determines in good faith, among other things, that the filing would be materially detrimental to us and our stockholders. In addition, holders with registration rights may not request that we register their registrable securities for resale on a Form S-3 during the 180-day period following the filing of a registration statement by us for our own account or pursuant to the holders' registration rights.

Expenses of Registration Rights

          We are generally required to bear all of the expenses of such registrations, including reasonable fees of a single counsel acting on behalf of all selling holders, except underwriting discounts and selling commissions.

Expiration of Registration Rights

          The registration rights described above will expire five years after the completion of this offering and, as long as we are subject to the periodic reporting requirements under the Exchange Act, will not be exercisable as to any holder if the holder's registrable securities could otherwise be sold without restriction under Rule 144 under the Securities Act within a 90-day period.


Anti-Takeover Provisions

          So long as the outstanding shares of our Class B common stock represent at least 10% of the combined number of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, the holders of the shares of our Class B common stock will effectively control all matters submitted to our stockholders for a vote, as well as the overall management and direction of our company. Upon completion of this offering, holders of our Class B common stock will beneficially own an aggregate of          % of the voting power of our common stock (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares). In particular, Dr. Dunleavy will beneficially own an aggregate of         % (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares), and Mr. Hoffmann will beneficially own an aggregate of         % (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares). The voting power of our Class B common stockholders could have the effect of delaying, deferring or discouraging another person from acquiring control of our company.

          After such time as the shares of our Class B common stock no longer represent at least 10% of the combined number of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, certain provisions of our restated certificate of incorporation and our restated bylaws will become effective. Those provisions, together with certain provisions of Delaware law, may further have the effect of delaying, deferring or discouraging another person from acquiring control of our company.

Delaware Law

          Upon the closing of our initial public offering, we will be governed by the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law regulating corporate takeovers. This section prevents some Delaware corporations from engaging, under some circumstances, in a business combination, which includes a merger or sale of at least 10% of the corporation's assets with any interested stockholder, meaning a stockholder who, together with affiliates and associates, owns or,

144


Table of Contents

within three years prior to the determination of interested stockholder status, did own 15% or more of the corporation's outstanding voting stock, unless:

    the transaction is approved by the board of directors prior to the time that the interested stockholder became an interested stockholder;

    upon consummation of the transaction which resulted in the stockholder's becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction commenced, excluding stock owned by directors who are also officers of the corporation; or

    subsequent to such time that the stockholder became an interested stockholder, the business combination is approved by the board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders by at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock which is not owned by the interested stockholder.

          A Delaware corporation may "opt out" of these provisions with an express provision in its original certificate of incorporation or an express provision in its certificate of incorporation or bylaws resulting from a stockholders' amendment approved by at least a majority of the outstanding voting shares. We have not opted out of these provisions. As a result, mergers or other takeover or change in control attempts of us may be discouraged or prevented.

Restated Certificate of Incorporation and Restated Bylaw Provisions

          Our restated certificate of incorporation and our restated bylaws include a number of provisions that could deter hostile takeovers or delay or prevent changes in control of our company, some of which are effective today and others of which will become effective after such time as the shares of our Class B common stock no longer represent at least 10% of the combined number of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, including the following:

    Dual Class Stock.   As described above in "— Class A and B Common Stock — Voting Rights," our restated certificate of incorporation provides for a dual class common stock structure, which provides holders of our Class A common stock with one vote per share and holders of our Class B common stock with 10 votes per share, giving holders of our Class B common stock the ability to control the outcome of matters pertaining to change in control matters, even if they own significantly less than a majority of the shares of our outstanding Class A and Class B common stock. As a result, our executive officers, directors and their affiliates will have the ability to exercise significant influence over those matters. Upon completion of this offering, holders of our Class B common stock will beneficially own an aggregate of         % of the voting power of our common stock (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares). In particular, Dr. Dunleavy will beneficially own an aggregate of         % (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares), and Mr. Hoffmann will beneficially own an aggregate of          % (or         % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares).

    Number of Directors; Vacancies.   Our restated certificate of incorporation provides that the number of our directors can be set by the board of directors. Vacancies on the board of directors may be filled only by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office and not by the stockholders. These provisions will prevent a stockholder from increasing the size of our board of directors and gaining control of our board of directors by filling the resulting vacancies with its own nominees.

145


Table of Contents

    Classified Board.   Our board of directors will not initially be classified. Our restated certificate of incorporation and restated bylaws provide that when the shares of our Class B common stock represent less than 10% of the combined number of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, our board of directors will be classified into three classes of directors, each of which will hold office for a three-year term. In addition, thereafter, directors may only be removed from the board of directors for cause. The existence of a classified board could delay a successful tender offeror from obtaining majority control of our board of directors, and the prospect of that delay might deter a potential offeror.

    Stockholder Action; Special Meetings of Stockholders.   Our restated certificate of incorporation provides that stockholders are able to take action by written consent. When the shares of our Class B common stock no longer represent at least 10% of the combined number of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, our stockholders will no longer be able to take action by written consent, and will only be able to take action at annual or special meetings of our stockholders. Our restated bylaws further provide that so long as the shares of our Class B common stock represent at least 10% of the combined number of our outstanding shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock, special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by a majority of our board of directors, the chairman of our board of directors or our chief executive officer and may also be called by stockholders holding shares that represent at least 50% of the combined voting power of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock. Thereafter, special meetings of our stockholders may only be called by a majority of our board of directors, the chairman of our board of directors or our chief executive officer.

    Advance Notice Requirements for Stockholder Proposals and Director Nominations.   Our restated bylaws provide advance notice procedures for stockholders seeking to bring business before our annual meeting of stockholders, or to nominate candidates for election as directors at any meeting of stockholders. Our restated bylaws also specify certain requirements regarding the form and content of a stockholder's notice. These provisions may preclude our stockholders from bringing matters before our annual meeting of stockholders or from making nominations for directors at our meetings of stockholders.

    No Cumulative Voting.   The Delaware General Corporation Law provides that stockholders are not entitled to the right to cumulate votes in the election of directors unless a corporation's certificate of incorporation provides otherwise. Our restated certificate of incorporation and restated bylaws do not provide for cumulative voting.

    Issuance of Undesignated Preferred Stock.   Our board of directors has the authority, without further action by the stockholders, to issue up to 100,000,000 shares of undesignated preferred stock with rights and preferences, including voting rights, designated from time to time by the board of directors. The existence of authorized but unissued shares of preferred stock enables our board of directors to render more difficult or to discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a merger, tender offer, proxy contest, or otherwise.

    Amendments.   Amendments to our restated bylaws require the approval of a majority of the combined voting power of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock. When the outstanding shares of our class B common stock represent less than 10% of the total outstanding shares, certain amendments to our restated bylaws will require the approval of two-thirds of the voting power of our then-outstanding shares of common stock.

146


Table of Contents

Choice of Forum

          Our restated certificate of incorporation provides that the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware will be the exclusive forum for any derivative action or proceeding brought on our behalf; any action asserting a breach of fiduciary duty; any action asserting a claim against us arising pursuant to the Delaware General Corporation Law, our restated certificate of incorporation or our restated bylaws; or any action asserting a claim against us that is governed by the internal affairs doctrine.


Listing

          We have applied to list our Class A common stock on the NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol "INOV."


Transfer Agent and Registrar

          The transfer agent and registrar for our Class A common stock will be                    . The transfer agent's address is                           . Our shares of Class A common stock will be issued in uncertificated form only, subject to limited circumstances.

147


Table of Contents


SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

          Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock, and we cannot predict the effect, if any, that market sales of shares of our Class A common stock or the availability of shares of our Class A common stock for sale will have on the market price of our Class A common stock prevailing from time to time. Nevertheless, sales of substantial amounts of our Class A common stock, including shares issued upon exercise of outstanding options, in the public market following this offering could adversely affect market prices prevailing from time to time and could impair our ability to raise capital through the sale of our equity securities.

          Upon the closing of this offering, we will have outstanding             shares of our Class A common stock and 24,451,429 shares of our Class B common stock, based on the number shares outstanding as of the date of this prospectus and assuming no exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase additional shares. This includes the             shares of Class A common stock that we are selling in this offering, which shares may be resold in the public market immediately, and assumes no additional exercise of outstanding options other than as described elsewhere in this prospectus. Shares of our Class B common stock are convertible into an equivalent number of shares of our Class A common stock and generally convert into shares of our Class A common stock upon sale or transfer.

          Of these outstanding shares, all of the             shares of Class A common stock sold in this offering will be freely tradeable, except that any shares purchased in this offering by our affiliates, as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act, would only be able to be sold in compliance with the Rule 144 limitations described below.

          All of our security holders are subject to lock-up or market stand-off agreements in favor of the underwriters under which they have agreed, subject to specific exceptions, not to sell, dispose of or transfer their shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus, as described below. As a result of these agreements and the provisions of the Stockholders' Agreement described above under "Description of Capital Stock — Registration Rights," subject to the provisions of Rule 144 or Rule 701, shares will be available for sale in the public market as follows:

    Beginning on the date of this prospectus, all of the shares sold in this offering will be immediately available for sale in the public market; and

    Beginning 181 days after the date of this prospectus,             additional shares will become eligible for sale in the public market, of which             shares will be held by affiliates and subject to the volume and other restrictions of Rule 144, as described below.


Lock-Up and Market Stand-Off Agreements

          Pursuant to lock-up or market stand-off agreements in favor of the underwriters, we, our executive officers and directors, and holders of all of our common stock and securities convertible into or exchangeable for our common stock have agreed, subject to certain exceptions, not to sell, dispose of, or transfer their shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus.

          The contractual lock-up agreements with the underwriters, subject to specific exceptions described in the section entitled "Underwriting" below, prohibit the offering for sale, selling, contracting to sell, granting any option for the sale of, pledging, transferring, or otherwise disposing of any shares of our common stock, options to acquire shares of our common stock or any security or instrument related to our common stock, option or warrant, or entering into any swap, hedge, or other arrangement that transfers to another any of the economic consequences of ownership of the

148


Table of Contents

common stock, for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus without the prior written consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co. See "Underwriting."

          In addition, all of our stockholders are subject to our Stockholders' Agreement, which contains a market stand-off agreement imposing restrictions on the ability of our stockholders to lend, offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contact to purchase, purchase any option or contact to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus. Pursuant to the Stockholders' Agreement, the underwriters are express, third-party beneficiaries of the market stand-off agreement and can enforce the restrictions on sales of our securities. In addition, we have agreed with the underwriters that we will not take any action to modify the market stand-off agreement or waive the restrictions on sales of our securities during the 180 days after the date of this prospectus, without the prior written consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co. See "Underwriting."


Rule 144

          In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, once we have been subject to public company reporting requirements for at least 90 days, a person who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates for purposes of the Securities Act at any time during the 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, is entitled to sell those shares without complying with the manner of sale, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144, subject to compliance with the public information requirements of Rule 144. If such a person has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least one year, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, then that person would be entitled to sell those shares without complying with any of the requirements of Rule 144.

          In general, under Rule 144, as currently in effect, our affiliates or persons selling shares on behalf of our affiliates are entitled to sell upon expiration of the lock-up and market standoff agreements described above, within any three-month period, a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

    1% of the number of shares of our Class A common stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately              shares immediately after this offering; or

    the average weekly trading volume of our Class A common stock during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to that sale.

          Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates or persons selling shares on behalf of our affiliates are also subject to certain manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.


Rule 701

          Rule 701 generally allows a stockholder who purchased shares of our common stock pursuant to a written compensatory plan or contract and who is not deemed to have been an affiliate of our company during the immediately preceding 90 days to sell these shares in reliance upon Rule 144, but without being required to comply with the public information, holding period, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144. Rule 701 also permits affiliates of our company to sell their Rule 701 shares under Rule 144 without complying with the holding period requirements of Rule 144. All holders of Rule 701 shares, however, are required by that rule to wait until 90 days after the date of this prospectus before selling those shares pursuant to Rule 701.

149


Table of Contents


Stock Options

          Concurrently with or shortly after the closing of this offering, we intend to file one or more registration statements on Form S-8 under the Securities Act covering all of the shares of our common stock subject to outstanding options and other equity awards and the shares of our Class A common stock reserved for issuance under our stock plans. In addition, we intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 or such other form as may be required under the Securities Act for the resale of shares of our common stock issued upon the exercise of options that were not granted under Rule 701. We expect to file this registration statement as soon as permitted under the Securities Act. However, the shares registered on Form S-8 may be subject to the volume limitations and the manner of sale, notice and public information requirements of Rule 144 and will not be eligible for resale until expiration of the lock-up and market standoff agreements to which they are subject.


Registration Rights

          We have granted demand, piggyback, and Form S-3 registration rights to certain of our Class B stockholders to sell our common stock. Registration of the sale of these shares under the Securities Act would result in these shares becoming freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act immediately upon the effectiveness of the registration, except for shares purchased by affiliates. For a further description of these rights, see "Description of Capital Stock — Registration Rights."

150


Table of Contents


MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS
FOR NON-U.S. HOLDERS OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK

          This section summarizes the material U.S. federal income tax considerations for "non-U.S. holders" (as defined below) relating to the acquisition, ownership, and disposition of our Class A common stock issued pursuant to this offering. This summary does not provide a complete analysis of all potential U.S. federal income tax considerations relating thereto. The information provided below is based upon provisions of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code, Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder, administrative rulings and judicial decisions currently in effect. These authorities may change at any time, possibly retroactively, or the Internal Revenue Service, or IRS, might interpret the existing authorities differently. In either case, the tax considerations of acquiring owning, or disposing of our Class A common stock could differ from those described below. As a result, we cannot assure you that the tax consequences described in this discussion will not be challenged by the IRS or will be sustained by a court if challenged by the IRS.

          This summary does not address the tax considerations arising under the laws of any non-U.S., state or local jurisdiction, the potential application of the Medicare contribution tax, or tax considerations arising under U.S. federal gift and estate tax laws. In addition, this discussion does not address tax considerations applicable to an investor's particular circumstances or to investors that may be subject to special tax rules, including, without limitation:

    banks, insurance companies, or other financial institutions;

    corporations that accumulate earnings to avoid U.S. federal income tax;

    persons subject to the alternative minimum tax;

    tax-exempt organizations or tax-qualified retirement plans;

    real estate investment trusts or regulated investment companies;

    controlled foreign corporations or passive foreign investment companies;

    persons who acquired our Class A common stock as compensation for services;

    dealers in securities or currencies;

    traders in securities that elect to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for their securities holdings;

    persons that own, or are deemed to own, more than 5% of our capital stock (except to the extent specifically set forth below);

    certain former citizens or long-term residents of the United States;

    persons who hold our Class A common stock as a position in a hedging transaction, "straddle," "conversion transaction," or other risk reduction transaction;

    persons who do not hold our Class A common stock as a capital asset within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Code (generally, for investment purposes); or

    persons deemed to sell our Class A common stock under the constructive sale provisions of the Code.

          In addition, if a partnership or entity classified as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes is a beneficial owner of our Class A common stock, the tax treatment of a partner in the partnership or an owner of the entity will depend upon the status of the partner or other owner and the activities of the partnership or other entity. Accordingly, this summary does not address tax

151


Table of Contents

considerations applicable to partnerships that hold our Class A common stock, and partners in such partnerships should consult their tax advisors.

           INVESTORS CONSIDERING THE PURCHASE OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK SHOULD CONSULT THEIR OWN TAX ADVISORS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF THE U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX LAWS TO THEIR PARTICULAR SITUATIONS AND THE TAX CONSEQUENCES OF THE PURCHASE, OWNERSHIP, OR DISPOSITION OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK UNDER ANY OTHER FEDERAL OR ANY FOREIGN, STATE, OR LOCAL LAWS OR UNDER ANY APPLICABLE TAX TREATIES.


Non-U.S. Holder

          For purposes of this summary, a "non-U.S. holder" is a beneficial owner of our Class A common stock, other than a partnership, that is not, for U.S. federal income tax purposes:

    an individual who is a citizen or resident of the United States;

    a corporation, or other entity taxable as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes, created or organized under the laws of the United States, any state therein or the District of Columbia;

    a trust if it (i) is subject to the primary supervision of a U.S. court and one of more U.S. persons have authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust or (ii) has a valid election in effect under applicable U.S. Treasury regulations to be treated as a U.S. person; or

    an estate whose income is subject to U.S. income tax regardless of source.

          If you are a non-U.S. citizen that is an individual, you may, in many cases, be deemed to be a resident alien, as opposed to a nonresident alien, by virtue of being present in the United States for at least 31 days in the calendar year and for an aggregate of at least 183 days during a three-year period ending in the current calendar year. For these purposes, all the days present in the current year, one-third of the days present in the immediately preceding year, and one-sixth of the days present in the second preceding year are counted. Resident aliens are subject to U.S. federal income tax as if they were U.S. citizens. Such an individual is urged to consult his or her own tax advisor regarding the U.S. federal income tax consequences of the ownership or disposition of our Class A common stock.


Dividends

          We do not expect to declare or make any distributions on our Class A common stock in the foreseeable future. However, if we do make distributions of cash or other property on shares of our Class A common stock, such distributions will constitute dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. Distributions in excess of our current and accumulated earnings and profits will constitute a return of capital that is applied against and reduces, but not below zero, a non-U.S. holder's adjusted tax basis in shares of our Class A common stock. Any remaining excess will be treated as gain realized on the sale or other disposition of our Class A common stock. See "— Sale of Class A Common Stock."

          Any dividend paid to a non-U.S. holder on our Class A common stock that is not effectively connected with a non-U.S. holder's conduct of a trade or business in the United States will generally be subject to U.S. withholding tax at a 30% rate. The withholding tax might not apply, however, or might apply at a reduced rate, under the terms of an applicable income tax treaty between the United States and the non-U.S. holder's country of residence. You should consult your

152


Table of Contents

tax advisors regarding your entitlement to benefits under a relevant income tax treaty. Generally, in order for us or our paying agent to withhold tax at a lower treaty rate, a non-U.S. holder must certify its entitlement to treaty benefits. A non-U.S. holder generally can meet this certification requirement by providing a Form W-8BEN or Form W-8BEN-E (or any successor form) or appropriate substitute form to us or our paying agent. If the non-U.S. holder holds the stock through a financial institution or other agent acting on the holder's behalf, the holder will be required to provide appropriate documentation to the agent. The holder's agent will then be required to provide certification to us or our paying agent, either directly or through other intermediaries. If you are eligible for a reduced rate of U.S. federal withholding tax under an income tax treaty, you may obtain a refund or credit of any excess amounts withheld by filing an appropriate claim for a refund with the IRS in a timely manner.

          Dividends received by a non-U.S. holder that are effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business conducted by the non-U.S. holder, and if required by an applicable income tax treaty between the United States and the non-U.S. holder's country of residence, are attributable to a permanent establishment maintained by the non-U.S. holder in the United States, are not subject to U.S. withholding tax. To obtain this exemption, a non-U.S. holder must provide us or our paying agent with an IRS Form W-8ECI properly certifying such exemption. Such effectively connected dividends, although not subject to withholding tax, are taxed at the same graduated rates applicable to U.S. persons, net of certain deductions and credits. In addition to being taxed at graduated tax rates, dividends received by corporate non-U.S. holders that are effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business of the corporate non-U.S. holder may also be subject to a "branch profits tax." The branch profits tax rate is 30%, although an applicable income tax treaty between the United States and the non-U.S. holder's country of residence might provide for a lower rate.


Sale of Class A Common Stock

          Except as otherwise described below, non-U.S. holders will generally not be subject to U.S. federal income tax on any gains realized on the sale, exchange, or other disposition of our Class A common stock unless:

    the gain (i) is effectively connected with the conduct by the non-U.S. holder of a U.S. trade or business and (ii) if required by an applicable income tax treaty between the United States and the non-U.S. holder's country of residence, is attributable to a permanent establishment (or, in certain cases involving individual holders, a fixed base) maintained by the non-U.S. holder in the United States (in which case the special rules described below apply);

    the non-U.S. holder is a nonresident alien individual who is present in the United States for 183 days or more in the taxable year of the sale, exchange or other disposition of our Class A common stock and certain other requirements are met (in which case the gain would be subject to a flat 30% tax, or such reduced rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty, which may be offset by U.S. source capital losses, even though the individual is not considered a resident of the United States); or

    the rules of the Foreign Investment in Real Property Tax Act, or FIRPTA treat the gain as effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business.

          The FIRPTA rules generally treat the gain on a sale, exchange, or other disposition of our Class A common stock as effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business if our Class A common stock constitutes U.S. real property interests by reason of us being, or having been within the shorter of the five-year period preceding the disposition and the non-U.S. holder's holding period, a "U.S. real property holding corporation," or USRPHC. In general, we would be a USRPHC if interests in U.S. real property comprised at least half of the value of our business assets. We do not believe that we are a USRPHC and we do not anticipate becoming one in the future. Even if we

153


Table of Contents

become a USRPHC, as long as our Class A common stock is regularly traded on an established securities market, our Class A common stock will be treated as U.S. real property interests with respect to a particular non-U.S. holder only if beneficially owned by such non-U.S. holder that actually or constructively owned more than 5% of our outstanding Class A common stock at some time within the shorter of the five-year period preceding the disposition or the non-U.S. holder's holding period.

          If any gain from the sale, exchange, or other disposition of our Class A common stock (i) is effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business conducted by a non-U.S. holder, and (ii) if required by an applicable income tax treaty between the United States and the non-U.S. holder's country of residence, is attributable to a permanent establishment (or, in certain cases involving individuals, a fixed base) maintained by such non-U.S. holder in the United States, then the gain generally will be subject to U.S. federal income tax at the same graduated rates applicable to U.S. persons, net of certain deductions and credits. If the non-U.S. holder is a corporation, under certain circumstances, that portion of its earnings and profits that is effectively connected with its U.S. trade or business, subject to certain adjustments, generally also would be subject to a branch profits tax. The branch profits tax rate is 30%, although an applicable income tax treaty between the United States and the non-U.S. holder's country of residence might provide for a lower rate.


Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

          The Code and the Treasury regulations require those who make specified payments to report the payments to the IRS. Among the specified payments are dividends and proceeds paid by brokers to their customers. The required information returns enable the IRS to determine whether the recipient properly included the payments in income. This reporting regime is reinforced by "backup withholding" rules. These rules require the payors to withhold tax from payments subject to information reporting if the recipient fails to cooperate with the reporting regime by failing to provide his taxpayer identification number to the payor, furnishing an incorrect identification number, or failing to report interest or dividends on his returns. The backup withholding tax rate is currently 28%. The backup withholding rules do not apply to payments to corporations, whether domestic or foreign, provided they establish such exemption.

          Payments to non-U.S. holders of dividends on Class A common stock generally will not be subject to backup withholding, and payments of proceeds made to non-U.S. holders by a broker upon a sale of Class A common stock will not be subject to information reporting or backup withholding, in each case so long as the non-U.S. holder certifies its nonresident status (and we or our paying agent do not have actual knowledge or reason to know the holder is a U.S. person or that the conditions of any other exemption are not, in fact, satisfied) or otherwise establishes an exemption. The certification procedures to claim treaty benefits described under "— Dividends" will generally satisfy the certification requirements necessary to avoid the backup withholding tax. We must report annually to the IRS any dividends paid to each non-U.S. holder and the tax withheld, if any, with respect to these dividends. Copies of these reports may be made available to tax authorities in the country where the non-U.S. holder resides.

          Under the Treasury regulations, the payment of proceeds from the disposition of shares of our Class A common stock by a non-U.S. holder made to or through a U.S. office of a broker generally will be subject to information reporting and backup withholding unless the beneficial owner certifies, under penalties of perjury, among other things, its status as a non-U.S. holder (and the broker does not have actual knowledge or reason to know the holder is a U.S. person) or otherwise establishes an exemption. The payment of proceeds from the disposition of shares of our Class A common stock by a non-U.S. holder made to or through a non-U.S. office of a broker generally will not be subject to backup withholding and information reporting, except as noted below. Information reporting, but not backup withholding, will apply to a payment of proceeds, even if that payment is

154


Table of Contents

made outside of the United States, if you sell our Class A common stock through a non-U.S. office of a broker that is:

    a U.S. person (including a foreign branch or office of such person);

    a "controlled foreign corporation" for U.S. federal income tax purposes;

    a foreign person 50% or more of whose gross income from certain periods is effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business; or

    a foreign partnership if at any time during its tax year (a) one or more of its partners are U.S. persons who, in the aggregate, hold more than 50% of the income or capital interests of the partnership or (b) the foreign partnership is engaged in a U.S. trade or business;

unless the broker has documentary evidence that the beneficial owner is a non-U.S. holder and certain other conditions are satisfied, or the beneficial owner otherwise establishes an exemption (and the broker has no actual knowledge or reason to know to the contrary).

          Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Any amounts withheld from a payment to a non-U.S. holder of Class A common stock under the backup withholding rules can be credited against any U.S. federal income tax liability of the non-U.S. holder and may entitle the non-U.S. holder to a refund, provided that the required information is furnished to the IRS in a timely manner.


Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act

          Withholding taxes may be imposed under the Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act, or FATCA, on certain types of payments made to non-U.S. financial institutions and certain other non-U.S. entities. Specifically, subject to certain exceptions, Sections 1471 to 1474 of the Code generally impose a 30% withholding tax on dividends paid with respect to, and the gross proceeds from a sale or other disposition of, our Class A common stock, in each case paid to (i) a "foreign financial institution" (as defined in the Code), or FFI, unless the FFI enters into an agreement with the U.S. Treasury Department to perform due diligence and collect and report detailed information regarding its U.S. accounts and their holders (including certain account holders that are foreign entities that have U.S. owners), and satisfies certain other requirements and (ii) a "non-financial foreign entity" (as defined in the Code), or NFFE, unless the NFFE either certifies it does not have any "substantial United States owners" (as defined in the Code) or furnishes identifying information regarding each substantial United States owner, and complies with certain other requirements. An intergovernmental agreement implementing FATCA between the United States and an applicable non-U.S. jurisdiction may modify these requirements.

          Withholding under FATCA (i) generally applies to payments of dividends on our Class A common stock and (ii) will apply to payments of gross proceeds from the sale or other disposition of such stock occurring on or after January 1, 2017. Under certain circumstances, a non-U.S. holder of shares of our Class A common stock might be eligible for refunds or credits of the tax. Prospective investors are encouraged to consult their tax advisors regarding the potential application of withholding under FATCA to their investment in our Class A common stock, including, without limitation, the interaction of FATCA withholding with the other withholding rules discussed above.

           EACH PROSPECTIVE INVESTOR SHOULD CONSULT ITS OWN TAX ADVISOR REGARDING THE PARTICULAR U.S. FEDERAL, STATE, LOCAL AND FOREIGN TAX CONSEQUENCES OF PURCHASING, HOLDING AND DISPOSING OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK, INCLUDING THE CONSEQUENCES OF ANY PROPOSED CHANGE IN APPLICABLE LAWS.

155


Table of Contents


UNDERWRITING

          The company and the underwriters named below have entered into an underwriting agreement with respect to the shares of Class A common stock being offered. Subject to certain conditions, each underwriter has severally agreed to purchase the number of shares of Class A common stock indicated in the following table. Goldman, Sachs & Co., Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and Citigroup Global Markets Inc. are the representatives of the underwriters.

Underwriters
 
Number of Shares of
Class A Common
Stock
 

Goldman, Sachs & Co. 

       

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC. 

       

Citigroup Global Markets Inc. 

       

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith
                     Incorporated

       

UBS Securities LLC

       

Piper Jaffray & Co. 

       

Robert W. Baird & Co. Incorporated

       

Wells Fargo Securities, LLC

       

William Blair & Company, L.L.C. 

       
       

Total

       
       
       

          The underwriters are committed to take and pay for all of the shares of Class A common stock being offered, if any are taken, other than the shares of Class A common stock covered by the option described below unless and until this option is exercised.

          The underwriters have an option to buy up to an additional                          shares of Class A common stock from the company to cover sales by the underwriters of a greater number of shares of Class A common stock than the total number set forth in the table above. They may exercise that option for 30 days. If any shares of Class A common stock are purchased pursuant to this option, the underwriters will severally purchase shares of Class A common stock in approximately the same proportion as set forth in the table above.

          The following table shows the per share and total underwriting discounts and commissions to be paid to the underwriters by the company. Such amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters' option to purchase                          additional shares of Class A common stock.

Paid by the Company
 
No Exercise
 
Full Exercise
 

Per Share

  $     $    

Total

  $     $    

          Shares of Class A common stock sold by the underwriters to the public will initially be offered at the initial public offering price set forth on the cover of this prospectus. Any shares of Class A common stock sold by the underwriters to securities dealers may be sold at a discount of up to $             per share from the initial public offering price. After the initial offering of the shares of Class A common stock, the representatives may change the offering price and the other selling terms. The offering of the shares of Class A common stock by the underwriters is subject to receipt and acceptance and subject to the underwriters' right to reject any order in whole or in part.

          Pursuant to lock-up or market stand-off agreements in favor of the underwriters, we, our executive officers and directors, and holders of all of our common stock and securities convertible

156


Table of Contents

into or exchangeable for our common stock have agreed, subject to certain exceptions, not to sell, dispose of, or transfer their shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus.

          The contractual lock-up agreements with the underwriters, subject to certain customary exceptions, prohibit the offering for sale, selling, contracting to sell, granting any option for the sale of, pledging, transferring, or otherwise disposing of any shares of our common stock, options to acquire shares of our common stock or any security or instrument related to our common stock, option or warrant, or entering into any swap, hedge, or other arrangement that transfers to another any of the economic consequences of ownership of the common stock, for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus without the prior written consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co. This agreement does not apply to any existing employee benefit plans. See "Shares Eligible for Future Sale" for a discussion of certain transfer restrictions.

          In addition, all of our stockholders are subject to our Stockholders' Agreement, which contains a market stand-off agreement imposing restrictions on the ability of our stockholders to lend, offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contact to purchase, purchase any option or contact to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our common stock for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus. Pursuant to the Stockholders' Agreement, the underwriters are express, third-party beneficiaries of the market stand-off agreement and can enforce the restrictions on sales of our securities. In addition, we have agreed with the underwriters that we will not take any action to modify the market stand-off agreement or waive the restrictions on sales of our securities during the 180 days after the date of this prospectus, without the prior written consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co.

          Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for the shares of Class A common stock. The initial public offering price has been negotiated among the company and the representatives. Among the factors to be considered in determining the initial public offering price of the shares of Class A common stock, in addition to prevailing market conditions, will be the company's historical performance, estimates of the business potential and earnings prospects of the company, an assessment of the company's management and the consideration of the above factors in relation to market valuation of companies in related businesses.

          We have applied to list the common stock on the NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol "INOV".

          In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell shares of Class A common stock in the open market. These transactions may include short sales, stabilizing transactions, and purchases to cover positions created by short sales. Short sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares of Class A common stock than they are required to purchase in the offering, and a short position represents the amount of such sales that have not been covered by subsequent purchases. A "covered short position" is a short position that is not greater than the amount of additional shares of Class A common stock for which the underwriters' option described above may be exercised. The underwriters may cover any covered short position by either exercising their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock or purchasing shares of Class A common stock in the open market. In determining the source of shares of Class A common stock to cover the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares of Class A common stock available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase additional shares of Class A common stock pursuant to the option described above. "Naked" short sales are any short sales that create a short position greater than the amount of additional shares of Class A common stock

157


Table of Contents

for which the option described above may be exercised. The underwriters must cover any such naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of the Class A common stock in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering. Stabilizing transactions consist of various bids for or purchases of Class A common stock made by the underwriters in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.

          The underwriters may also impose a penalty bid. This occurs when a particular underwriter repays to the underwriters a portion of the underwriting discount received by it because the representatives have repurchased shares of Class A common stock sold by or for the account of such underwriter in stabilizing or short covering transactions.

          Purchases to cover a short position and stabilizing transactions, as well as other purchases by the underwriters for their own accounts, may have the effect of preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of the company's stock, and together with the imposition of the penalty bid, may stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the market price of the common stock. As a result, the price of the Class A common stock may be higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open market. The underwriters are not required to engage in these activities and may end any of these activities at any time. These transactions may be effected on the exchange on which our shares are listed or quoted, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise.

          In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive, each a Relevant Member State, each underwriter has represented and agreed that with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Relevant Member State, the Relevant Implementation Date, it has not made and will not make an offer of shares of Class A common stock to the public in that Relevant Member State prior to the publication of a prospectus in relation to the shares of Class A common stock which has been approved by the competent authority in that Relevant Member State or, where appropriate, approved in another Relevant Member State and notified to the competent authority in that Relevant Member State, all in accordance with the Prospectus Directive, except that it may, with effect from and including the Relevant Implementation Date, make an offer of shares of Class A common stock to the public in that Relevant Member State at any time:

    (a)
    to legal entities which are authorised or regulated to operate in the financial markets or, if not so authorised or regulated, whose corporate purpose is solely to invest in securities;

    (b)
    to any legal entity which has two or more of (1) an average of at least 250 employees during the last financial year; (2) a total balance sheet of more than €43,000,000 and (3) an annual net turnover of more than €50,000,000, as shown in its last annual or consolidated accounts;

    (c)
    to fewer than 100 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive) subject to obtaining the prior consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co. for any such offer; or

    (d)
    in any other circumstances which do not require the publication by the Issuer of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

          For the purposes of this provision, the expression an "offer of shares to the public" in relation to any shares of Class A common stock in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the shares of Class A common stock to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe the shares of Class A common stock, as the same may be varied in that Relevant Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Relevant Member

158


Table of Contents

State and the expression Prospectus Directive means Directive 2003/71/EC and includes any relevant implementing measure in each Relevant Member State.

          Each underwriter has represented and agreed that:

    (a)
    it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the FSMA) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of the shares of Class A common stock in circumstances in which Section 21(1) of the FSMA does not apply to the company; and

    (b)
    it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to the shares of Class A common stock in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

          The shares of Class A common stock may not be offered or sold by means of any document other than (i) in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), or (ii) to "professional investors" within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap.571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder, or (iii) in other circumstances which do not result in the document being a "prospectus" within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), and no advertisement, invitation or document relating to the shares of Class A common stock may be issued or may be in the possession of any person for the purpose of issue (in each case whether in Hong Kong or elsewhere), which is directed at, or the contents of which are likely to be accessed or read by, the public in Hong Kong (except if permitted to do so under the laws of Hong Kong) other than with respect to shares of Class A common stock which are or are intended to be disposed of only to persons outside Hong Kong or only to "professional investors" within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap. 571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder.

          This prospectus has not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, this prospectus and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of the shares of Class A common stock may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the shares of Class A common stock be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of Singapore, or SFA, (ii) to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA, or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA.

          Where the shares of Class A common stock are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 by a relevant person which is: (a) a corporation (which is not an accredited investor) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or (b) a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary is an accredited investor, shares, debentures and units of shares and debentures of that corporation or the beneficiaries' rights and interest in that trust shall not be transferable for 6 months after that corporation or that trust has acquired the shares of Class A common stock under Section 275 except: (1) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the SFA or to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA; (2) where no consideration is given for the transfer; or (3) by operation of law.

159


Table of Contents

          The securities have not been and will not be registered under the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law of Japan, or Financial Instruments and Exchange Law, and each underwriter has agreed that it will not offer or sell any securities, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to, or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan (which term as used herein means any person resident in Japan, including any corporation or other entity organized under the laws of Japan), or to others for re-offering or resale, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to a resident of Japan, except pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of, and otherwise in compliance with, the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law and any other applicable laws, regulations and ministerial guidelines of Japan.

          The shares may not be publicly offered in Switzerland and will not be listed on the SIX Swiss Exchange, or SIX, or on any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. This document has been prepared without regard to the disclosure standards for issuance prospectuses under art. 652a or art. 1156 of the Swiss Code of Obligations or the disclosure standards for listing prospectuses under art. 27 ff. of the SIX Listing Rules or the listing rules of any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the shares or the offering may be publicly distributed or otherwise made publicly available in Switzerland.

          Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the offering, the company, the shares have been or will be filed with or approved by any Swiss regulatory authority. In particular, this document will not be filed with, and the offer of shares will not be supervised by, the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority, and the offer of shares has not been and will not be authorized under the Swiss Federal Act on Collective Investment Schemes, or the CISA. The investor protection afforded to acquirers of interests in collective investment schemes under the CISA does not extend to acquirers of shares.

          This prospectus relates to an Exempt Offer in accordance with the Offered Securities Rules of the Dubai Financial Services Authority, or DFSA. This prospectus is intended for distribution only to persons of a type specified in the Offered Securities Rules of the DFSA. It must not be delivered to, or relied on by, any other person. The DFSA has no responsibility for reviewing or verifying any documents in connection with Exempt Offers. The DFSA has not approved this prospectus nor taken steps to verify the information set forth herein and has no responsibility for the prospectus. The shares to which this prospectus relates may be illiquid and/or subject to restrictions on their resale. Prospective purchasers of the shares offered should conduct their own due diligence on the shares. If you do not understand the contents of this prospectus you should consult an authorized financial advisor.

          No placement document, prospectus, product disclosure statement or other disclosure document has been lodged with the Australian Securities and Investments Commission, or ASIC, in relation to the offering. This prospectus does not constitute a prospectus, product disclosure statement, or other disclosure document under the Corporations Act 2001, or the Corporations Act), and does not purport to include the information required for a prospectus, product disclosure statement or other disclosure document under the Corporations Act.

          Any offer in Australia of the shares may only be made to persons (the Exempt Investors) who are "sophisticated investors" (within the meaning of section 708(8) of the Corporations Act), "professional investors" (within the meaning of section 708(11) of the Corporations Act) or otherwise pursuant to one or more exemptions contained in section 708 of the Corporations Act so that it is lawful to offer the shares without disclosure to investors under Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act.

          The shares applied for by Exempt Investors in Australia must not be offered for sale in Australia in the period of 12 months after the date of allotment under the offering, except in

160


Table of Contents

circumstances where disclosure to investors under Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act would not be required pursuant to an exemption under section 708 of the Corporations Act or otherwise or where the offer is pursuant to a disclosure document which complies with Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act. Any person acquiring shares must observe such Australian on-sale restrictions.

          This prospectus contains general information only and does not take account of the investment objectives, financial situation or particular needs of any particular person. It does not contain any securities recommendations or financial product advice. Before making an investment decision, investors need to consider whether the information in this prospectus is appropriate to their needs, objectives and circumstances, and, if necessary, seek expert advice on those matters.

          The underwriters do not expect sales to discretionary accounts to exceed 5% of the total number of shares of Class A common stock offered.

          The company estimates that its share of the total expenses of the offering, excluding underwriting discounts and commissions, will be approximately $             .

          The company has agreed to indemnify the several underwriters against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.

          The underwriters and their respective affiliates are full service financial institutions engaged in various activities, which may include sales and trading, commercial and investment banking, advisory, investment management, investment research, principal investment, hedging, market making, brokerage, and other financial and non-financial activities and services. Certain of the underwriters and their respective affiliates have provided, and may in the future provide, a variety of these services to the issuer and to persons and entities with relationships with the issuer, for which they received or will receive customary fees and expenses. In particular, affiliates of each of Goldman, Sachs & Co., Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Citigroup Global Markets Inc., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated, and UBS Securities LLC are agents and lenders under our Term Loan Facility and our Revolving Credit Facility, for which they have received, and will receive, customary fees from us.

          In the ordinary course of their various business activities, the underwriters and their respective affiliates, officers, directors, and employees may purchase, sell, or hold a broad array of investments and actively trade securities, derivatives, loans, commodities, currencies, credit default swaps, and other financial instruments for their own account and for the accounts of their customers, and such investment and trading activities may involve or relate to assets, securities or instruments of the issuer (directly, as collateral securing other obligations or otherwise) or persons and entities with relationships with the issuer. The underwriters and their respective affiliates may also communicate independent investment recommendations, market color or trading ideas or publish or express independent research views in respect of such assets, securities or instruments and may at any time hold, or recommend to clients that they should acquire, long, or short positions in such assets, securities, and instruments.

161


Table of Contents


LEGAL MATTERS

          The validity of the shares of Class A common stock offered by this prospectus will be passed upon for us by Morrison & Foerster LLP. Certain legal matters relating to the offering will be passed upon for the underwriters by Latham & Watkins LLP.


EXPERTS

          The consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2012 and 2013, and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2013, and the related consolidated financial statement schedule included in this prospectus, have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein. Such consolidated financial statements and the consolidated financial statement schedule have been so included in reliance upon the report of such firm given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.


WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

          We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of Class A common stock offered hereby. This prospectus, which constitutes a part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement or the exhibits filed therewith. For further information about us and our Class A common stock offered hereby, reference is made to the registration statement and the exhibits filed therewith. Statements contained in this prospectus regarding the contents of any contract or any other document that is filed as an exhibit to the registration statement are not necessarily complete, and in each instance we refer you to the copy of such contract or other document filed as an exhibit to the registration statement. A copy of the registration statement and the exhibits filed therewith may be inspected without charge at the public reference room maintained by the SEC, located at 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549, and copies of all or any part of the registration statement may be obtained from that office. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information about the public reference room. The SEC also maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. The address of that website is www.sec.gov.

          We currently do not file periodic reports with the SEC. Upon the closing of this offering, we will be required to file periodic reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC pursuant to the Exchange Act. These periodic reports, proxy statements and other information will be available for inspection and copying at the SEC's public reference facilities and the website of the SEC referred to above.

          We also maintain a website at www.inovalon.com. Upon completion of this offering, you may access these materials at our website free of charge as soon as reasonably practicable after they are electronically filed with, or furnished to, the SEC. Information contained on our website is not a part of this prospectus and the inclusion of our website address in this prospectus is an inactive textual reference only.

162


Table of Contents

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

  F-2

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2012 and 2013, and September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

 
F-3

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013, and for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 (unaudited)

 
F-4

Consolidated Statements of Stockholders' Equity (Deficit) for the years ended December 31, 2011, December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, and for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

 
F-5

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 (unaudited)

 
F-6

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 
F-8

Consolidated Financial Statement Schedule

 
F-32

F-1


Table of Contents


Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
Inovalon Holdings, Inc.
Bowie, Maryland

          We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and subsidiaries (the "Company") as of December 31, 2012 and 2013, and the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholders' equity (deficit), and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2013. Our audits also included the consolidated financial statement schedule listed in the Index at Page F-1. These consolidated financial statements and consolidated financial statement schedule are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and consolidated financial statement schedule based on our audits.

          We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

          In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012 and 2013, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2013, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also, in our opinion, such consolidated financial statement schedule, when considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly in all material respects the information set forth therein.

/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

McLean, VA
October 10, 2014

F-2


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Consolidated Balance Sheets

(in thousands, except share amounts)

 
  December 31,    
 
 
 
September 30,
2014
 
 
 
2012
 
2013
 
 
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

ASSETS

 

Current assets:

                   

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 106,361   $ 110,594   $ 131,947  

Accounts receivable (net of allowances of $451, $1,484, and $1,289 at December 31, 2012, 2013 and September 30, 2014 (unaudited), respectively)

    62,899     33,398     52,037  

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

    2,350     2,531     5,151  

Income tax receivable

    1,651     4,772     6,319  

Deferred income taxes

        580     580  
               

Total current assets

    173,261     151,875     196,034  

Non-current assets:

                   

Property, equipment and capitalized software, net

    34,170     43,050     49,126  

Goodwill

    62,269     62,269     62,269  

Intangible assets, net

    15,414     11,815     7,988  

Other assets

    541     737     1,928  
               

Total assets

  $ 285,655   $ 269,746   $ 317,345  
               
               

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)

 

Current liabilities:

                   

Accounts payable

  $ 9,010   $ 7,973   $ 9,826  

Accrued compensation

    13,616     6,917     10,343  

Other current liabilities

    911     678     1,754  

Deferred rent

    1,777     445     709  

Deferred revenue

    4,350     2,316     1,851  

Dividend payable

    6,363     2,852      

Income tax payable

             

Deferred income taxes

    183          

Credit facilities

            15,000  

Capital lease obligation

    118     132     105  
               

Total current liabilities

    36,328     21,313     39,588  

Non-current liabilities:

                   

Credit facilities, less current portion

            285,000  

Capital lease obligation

    168     279     191  

Deferred revenue

        200      

Deferred rent

        3,098     2,681  

Deferred income taxes

    12,330     13,122     13,246  
               

Total liabilities

    48,826     38,012     340,706  
               

Commitments and contingencies (Note 6)

                   

Stockholders' equity (deficit):

                   

Common stock, $0.000025 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, zero shares issued and outstanding at each of December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

             

Class A common stock, $0.000025 par value, 50,000,000 shares authorized, zero shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2012 and 2013, and 2,221,857 and zero shares issued and outstanding at September 30, 2014 (unaudited), respectively

             

Class B common stock, $0.000025 par value, 50,000,000 shares authorized, 27,573,915, 26,928,356, and 24,451,429 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014 (unaudited), respectively        

    1     1     1  

Preferred stock, $0.0001 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, zero shares issued and outstanding at each of December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

             

Additional paid-in-capital

    107,769     107,553     108,677  

Retained earnings

    129,059     124,180     167,978  

Treasury stock, at cost, zero shares at December 31, 2012 and 2013 and 2,221,857 at September 30, 2014 (unaudited), respectively

            (300,017 )
               

Total stockholders' equity (deficit)

    236,829     231,734     (23,361 )
               

Total liabilities and stockholders' equity (deficit)

  $ 285,655   $ 269,746   $ 317,345  
               
               

F-3


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Operations

(In thousands, except per share amounts)

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Revenue

  $ 239,685   $ 300,275   $ 295,798   $ 231,264   $ 271,622  

Expenses:

                               

Cost of revenue

    102,695     101,188     120,054     94,869     85,065  

Sales and marketing

    6,752     6,793     5,952     4,597     5,355  

Research and development

    14,855     15,499     21,192     16,171     17,376  

General and administrative

    63,184     72,661     80,638     60,266     62,920  

Depreciation and amortization

    11,229     12,899     15,517     11,105     15,012  
                       

Total operating expenses

    198,715     209,040     243,353     187,008     185,728  
                       

Income from operations

    40,970     91,235     52,445     44,256     85,894  
                       

Other income and (expenses):

                               

Interest income

    10     11     9     6     4  

Interest expense

    (62 )   (129 )   (79 )   (61 )   (209 )
                       

Income before taxes

    40,918     91,117     52,375     44,201     85,689  

Provision for income taxes

    15,991     35,962     19,657     17,218     33,836  
                       

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  
                       
                       

Basic net income per share

  $ 0.90   $ 2.00   $ 1.21   $ 1.00   $ 1.94  
                       
                       

Diluted net income per share

  $ 0.90   $ 1.98   $ 1.20   $ 0.99   $ 1.91  
                       
                       

Weighted average shares of common stock outstanding:

                               

Basic

    27,573     27,573     27,061     27,111     26,728  
                       
                       

Diluted

    27,771     27,808     27,275     27,346     27,168  
                       
                       

Cash dividend declared per share

  $ 0.73   $ 1.81   $ 0.74   $   $  
                       
                       

   

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-4


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)

(in thousands, except share amounts)

 
   
   
   
  Issued
Common Stock
  Issued
Class A
Common Stock
  Issued
Class B
Common Stock
   
   
   
   
   
 
 
  Preferred Stock  

  Treasury Stock  
Additional
Paid-in
Capital
   
 
Total
Stockholders'
Equity
(Deficit)
 
 
 
Retained
Earnings
 
 
 
Shares
 
Amount
   
 
Shares
 
Amount
 
Shares
 
Amount
 
Shares
 
Amount
 
Shares
 
Amount
 

Balance — January 1, 2011

      $           $       $     27,540,925   $ 1       $   $ 101,313   $ 118,977   $ 220,291  

Exercise of stock options

                                31,890                       120         120  

Compensation expense — vested restricted stock

                                                80         80  

Stock compensation expense — options

                                                3,687         3,687  

Dividends declared

                                                    (20,000 )   (20,000 )

Net income

                                                    24,927     24,927  
                                                           

Balance — December 31, 2011

      $           $       $     27,572,815   $ 1       $   $ 105,200   $ 123,904   $ 229,105  

Exercise of stock options

                                1,100                 9         9  

Stock compensation expense — options

                                                2,560         2,560  

Dividends declared

                                                    (50,000 )   (50,000 )

Net income

                                                    55,155     55,155  
                                                           

Balance — December 31, 2012

      $           $       $     27,573,915   $ 1       $   $ 107,769   $ 129,059   $ 236,829  

Repurchase of common stock for treasury

                                        (2,140,672 )   (72,114 )           (72,114 )

Sale of common stock from treasury

                                        1,443,322     52,114             52,114  

Retirement of common stock

                                (697,350 )       697,350     20,000     (2,403 )   (17,597 )    

Exercise of stock options

                                51,791                   270         270  

Tax benefit from exercise of non-qualified stock options

                                                437         437  

Forfeiture of fully vested non-qualified stock options

                                                (362 )       (362 )

Stock compensation expense — options

                                                1,842         1,842  

Dividends declared

                                                    (20,000 )   (20,000 )

Net income

                                                    32,718     32,718  
                                                           

Balance — December 31, 2013

      $           $       $     26,928,356   $ 1       $   $ 107,553   $ 124,180   $ 231,734  

Repurchase of Class B common stock for treasury (unaudited)

                                        (2,514,321 )   (309,083 )           (309,083 )

Conversion Class B to Class A common stock (unaudited)

                                2,221,857           (2,221,857 )                                    

Retirement of treasury stock (unaudited)

                                (292,464 )       292,464     9,066     (1,011 )   (8,055 )    

Exercise of stock options (unaudited)

                                        37,394                   720         720  

Stock compensation expense — options (unaudited)

                                                1,340         1,340  

Tax benefit from exercise of non-qualified stock options (unaudited)

                                                429         429  

Forfeiture of vested non-qualified stock options (unaudited)

                                                (354 )       (354 )

Net income (unaudited)

                                                    51,853     51,853  
                                                           

Balance — September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

      $         0   $ 0     2,221,857   $ 0     24,451,429   $ 1     (2,221,857 ) $ (300,017 ) $ 108,677   $ 167,978   $ (23,361 )
                                                           
                                                           

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-5


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

(in thousands)

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
  Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Cash flows from operating activities:

                               

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

                               

Stock-based compensation expense                     

    3,767     2,560     1,842     1,408     1,340  

Bad debt expense

    (240 )   45              

Depreciation

    7,979     9,777     11,918     8,801     11,185  

Amortization of intangibles        

    3,250     3,122     3,599     2,304     3,827  

Deferred income taxes

    842     1,395     (333 )   1,064     (230 )

Loss on impairment of intangible asset

    1,212                  

Loss on disposal of long-lived assets

    128     160     250     23     165  

Loss on impairment of long-lived assets

                    109  

Changes in assets and liabilities:

                               

Accounts receivable

    (5,813 )   (26,179 )   29,502     19,667     (18,638 )

Prepaid expenses and other current assets                     

    92     (549 )   (181 )   (723 )   (2,620 )

Income taxes receivable        

    7,211     (1,651 )   (3,121 )   (2,349 )   (1,547 )

Other assets

    26     (261 )   (197 )   (22 )   (822 )

Accounts payable

    (2,637 )   5,758     (1,468 )   (2,272 )   1,455  

Accrued compensation

    3,702     4,092     (6,677 )   (7,358 )   3,513  

Other liabilities

    (364 )   (34 )   (233 )   205     1,076  

Deferred rent

    (438 )   7     230     163     (153 )

Deferred revenue

    237     2,953     (1,834 )   (2,606 )   (665 )

Income taxes payable

    2,303     (2,645 )            
                       

Net cash provided by operating
activities                     

    46,184     53,705     66,015     45,288     49,848  
                       

Cash flows from investing activities:

                               

Purchases of property and equipment           

    (7,091 )   (5,503 )   (9,202 )   (6,807 )   (6,347 )

Investment in capitalized software

    (5,778 )   (9,581 )   (9,664 )   (7,506 )   (11,283 )

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

    10         3     3     22  
                       

Net cash used in investing activities

    (12,859 )   (15,084 )   (18,863 )   (14,310 )   (17,608 )
                       

Cash flows from financing activities:

                               

Repurchase of common stock

            (72,114 )   (72,114 )   (309,083 )

Sale of common stock

            52,114     52,114      

Proceeds from credit facility borrowings

                    300,000  

Dividends paid

    (18,604 )   (46,963 )   (23,511 )   (6,363 )   (2,852 )

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

    120     9     270     19     720  

Capital lease obligations paid

    (157 )   (178 )   (115 )   (104 )   (101 )

Excess tax benefits from share-based compensation

            437         429  
                       

Net cash used in financing activities

    (18,641 )   (47,132 )   (42,919 )   (26,448 )   (10,887 )
                       

Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents           

    14,684     (8,511 )   4,233     4,530     21,353  

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period           

    100,188     114,872     106,361     106,361     110,594  
                       

Cash and cash equivalents, end of period

  $ 114,872   $ 106,361   $ 110,594   $ 110,891   $ 131,947  
                       
                       

   

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-6


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows (Continued)

(in thousands)

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
  Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Supplementary cash flow disclosure:

                               

Cash paid during the year for income taxes, net of refunds

  $ 5,635   $ 38,868   $ 22,723   $ 18,265   $ 35,186  

Non-cash investing activities:

                               

Tenant improvement allowance

    103         1,536     1,449      

Capital lease obligations incurred                

    172     16     240     135     14  

Accounts payable for purchases of and investment in property, equipment and capitalized software

    13     778     1,209     184     1,606  

Accrued compensation for investment in capitalized software                

        298     276     213     189  

Other current liability for purchases of property, equipment and capitalized software

    240                  

Non-cash financing activities:

                               

Dividends declared, not paid

    3,326     6,363     2,852          

   

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-7


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

1. NATURE OF OPERATIONS

          On September 17, 2014, Inovalon, Inc. implemented holding company reorganization, pursuant to which Inovalon Holdings, Inc. (together with its wholly owned subsidiaries, Inovalon or the Company) became the new parent company of Inovalon, Inc. and Inovalon, Inc. became the direct, wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. The Company was incorporated in the state of Delaware on September 11, 2014. Inovalon, Inc. was incorporated in the state of Delaware on November 18, 2005. The impact of the holding company reorganization is retrospectively presented in the accompanying consolidated financial statements by recognizing the entity as Inovalon Holdings, Inc. The consolidated balance sheet and consolidated statement of stockholders' equity (deficit) depict the newly authorized classes of stock. Additionally, earnings per share is calculated based upon the newly created Class B common stock (refer to Notes 3 and 10 for additional information).

          The Company is a leading technology company that combines advanced cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platforms to achieve meaningful impact in clinical and quality outcomes, utilization, and financial performance across the healthcare landscape. The value we deliver to our customers is achieved by turning data into insights and those insights into action. Through our large proprietary datasets, advanced integration technologies, sophisticated predictive analytics, and deep subject matter expertise, we deliver a seamless, end-to-end platform that brings the benefits of big data and large-scale analytics to the point of care. Our analytics identify gaps in care, quality, data integrity, and financial performance, while also bringing to bear the unique capabilities to resolve those gaps. This differentiating combination provides a powerful platform that drives high-value impact, improving quality and economics for health plans, hospitals, physicians, patients, pharmaceutical companies and researchers.

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

          Principles of Consolidation  — The accompanying consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Inovalon Holdings,  Inc. and its wholly owned subsidiaries. All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

          The accompanying interim consolidated balance sheet as of September 30, 2014, and the consolidated statements of operations, consolidated statement of cash flows for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated statement of stockholders' equity (deficit) for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 and the related footnote disclosures are unaudited. These unaudited interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, or GAAP. The unaudited interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the audited financial statements and reflect, in management's opinion, include all adjustments of a normal, recurring nature that are necessary for the fair statement of the Company's financial position as of September 30, 2014 and its consolidated results of operations and cash flows for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014. The results for the nine months ended September 30, 2014 are not necessarily indicative of the results expected for the full fiscal year or any other period.

          Basis of Presentation and Use of Estimates  — These consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with GAAP. The preparation of consolidated financial statements in conformity with GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the

F-8


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

reported amounts of assets and liabilities, disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the reported period.

          Significant estimates made by management include, but are not limited to: revenue recognition, specifically selling prices associated with the individual elements in multiple element arrangements; accounts receivable allowances; estimates of the fair value of the Company's common stock and the related estimates of the fair value of stock-based awards; fair value of intangibles and goodwill; depreciable lives of property, equipment and capitalized software; and useful lives of intangible assets. Actual results could differ from management's estimates, and such differences could be material to the Company's consolidated financial position and results of operations.

          Cash and Cash Equivalents  — Cash and cash equivalents consist of highly liquid investments comprised of money market instruments with original maturities of three months or less at the time of purchase, and demand deposits with financial institutions.

          Concentrations of Credit Risk  — Accounts receivable and cash and cash equivalents subject the Company to its highest potential concentrations of credit risk. Although the Company deposits its cash and cash equivalents with multiple financial institutions, the Company's deposits may exceed federally insured limits. The Company has not experienced any losses on cash and cash equivalent accounts to date, and management believes the Company is not exposed to any significant credit risk related to cash and cash equivalents.

          The Company sells products and services to clients without requiring collateral, based on an evaluation of the client's financial condition. Exposure to losses on receivables is principally dependent on each client's financial condition. The Company monitors its exposure for credit losses and maintains allowances for anticipated losses.

          Revenue from significant clients, those representing 10% or more of total revenue for the respective periods, is summarized as follows:

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
  Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
Revenue:
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
   
   
   
  (Unaudited)
 

Client A

    17 %   *     10 %   10 %   *  

Client B

    15 %   17 %   *     *     *  

Client C

    12 %   *     *     *     *  

Client D

    11 %   11 %   11 %   11 %   *  

Client E

    *     11 %   12 %   11 %   *  

Client F

    *     *     11 %   11 %   *  

*
Less than 10%

F-9


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

          Accounts receivable from significant clients, those representing 10% or more of total accounts receivable for the dates noted, is summarized below:

 
  December 31,    
 
 
 
September 30,
2014
 
Accounts Receivable:
 
2012
 
2013
 
 
   
   
  (Unaudited)
 

Client A

    *     *     *  

Client B

    18 %   *     *  

Client D

    *     *     15 %

Client E

    14 %   21 %   *  

Client F

    *     *     11 %

Client G

    13 %   *     13 %

Client I

    *     *     *  

Client J

    *     12 %   *  

*
Less than 10%

          Accounts Receivable and Allowances  — Accounts receivable consists primarily of amounts due to the Company from its normal business activities. The Company provides an allowance for estimated losses resulting from the failure of clients to make required payments (credit losses) and a sales allowance for estimated future billing adjustments resulting from client concessions or resolutions of billing disputes. The provision for sales allowances are charged against revenue while credit losses are recorded in general and administrative expenses.

          Fair Value Measurements  — The Company applies the Accounting Standards Codifications, or ASC, 820-10, Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures , ASC 820-10. ASC 820-10 defines fair value, establishes a fair value hierarchy for assets and liabilities measured at fair value, and expands required disclosures about fair value measurements. This guidance requires the Company to classify and disclose assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis, as well as fair value measurements of assets and liabilities measured on a nonrecurring basis in periods subsequent to initial measurement, in a three-tier fair value hierarchy as described below.

          The guidance defines fair value as the exchange price that would be received for an asset or paid to transfer a liability in the principal or most advantageous market for the asset or liability in an orderly transaction between market participants on the measurement date. Valuation techniques used to measure fair value must maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs. The guidance describes three levels of inputs that may be used to measure fair value:

    Level 1 — Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the reporting entity can access at the measurement date.

    Level 2 — Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly.

F-10


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

    Level 3 — Financial assets and liabilities whose values are based on unobservable inputs for the asset or liability.

          As of December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company measured its money market investment balances at fair value based on quoted prices that are equivalent to cost (Level 1). The Company did not have any assets measured at fair value on a recurring basis using significant other observable inputs (Level 2), or significant unobservable inputs (Level 3), or any liabilities measured at fair value as prescribed by ASC 820-10.

          Financial instruments are defined as cash, evidence of an ownership interest in an entity or contract that imposes an obligation to deliver cash, or other financial instruments to a third party. The carrying amounts of accounts receivable, accounts payable, other accrued expenses and capital lease obligations approximate fair value because of the short-term maturity of these instruments. The Company's policy with respect to derivative financial instruments is to record them at fair value with changes in value recognized in earnings during the period of change. At December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014, the Company had no derivative financial instruments.

          Property, Equipment and Capitalized Software, net  — Property and equipment are stated at cost, less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization on property, leasehold improvements, equipment, and software is computed on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the assets, as follows:

 
 
Useful Life
 

Office and computer equipment

    3-5 years  

Purchased software

    5 years  

Capitalized software

    3-5 years  

Furniture and fixtures

    7 years  

Building

    40 years  

Leasehold improvements

    *  

Assets under capital leases

    *  

(*)
lesser of lease term or economic life

          Expenses for repairs and maintenance that do not extend the life of property and equipment are charged to expense as incurred. Expenses for major renewals and betterments, which significantly extend the useful lives of existing property and equipment, are capitalized and depreciated. Upon retirement or disposition of property and equipment, the cost and related accumulated depreciation are removed from the accounts and any resulting gain or loss is recognized.

          In accordance with ASC 350-40, Internal-use Software , the Company capitalizes certain software development costs while in the application development stage related to software developed for internal use. All other costs to develop software for internal use, either in the preliminary project stage or post implementation stage, are expensed when incurred. Software development costs are amortized on a straight-line basis over a three to five year period, which management believes represents the useful life of these capitalized costs.

F-11


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

          In accordance with ASC 985-20, Software to be Sold, Leased, or Marketed , certain software development costs are expensed as incurred until technological feasibility has been established. Thereafter, all software development costs incurred through the software's general release date are capitalized and subsequently reported at the lower of amortized cost or net realizable value. Capitalized costs are amortized based on current and expected future revenue for each software solution with minimum annual amortization equal to the straight-line amortization over the estimated economic life, which is typically over a three to five year period, of the solution.

          Intangible Assets (in thousands, except years)  — Intangible assets consist of acquired technology, including developed and core technology, databases, non-competes, trade names, and customer relationships. Intangible assets are initially recorded at fair value and amortized on a straight line basis over their estimated useful lives. Acquired intangible assets are being amortized over the following periods:

 
 
Useful Life
 

Proprietary software technology

    2-10 years  

Trademark

    5 years  

Database

    10 years  

Covenant not to compete

    3.5 years  

Customer relationships

    4-15.75 years  

          On an annual basis, the Company reviews its intangible assets for impairment based on estimated future undiscounted cash flows attributable to the assets. In the event such cash flows are not expected to be sufficient to recover the recorded value of the assets, the assets are written down to their net realizable values. During fiscal year 2011, the Company made the decision to discontinue using the Catalyst Information Technologies, Inc. trade name, and recognized an impairment loss of $1,212 representing the remaining net carrying value at that time, which was reflected in general and administrative expense. There were no impairment charges on intangible assets for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2013 or the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014.

          Goodwill  — Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition costs over the fair value of tangible net assets and identifiable intangible assets of the businesses acquired. Goodwill is not amortized. Goodwill is subject to impairment testing annually as of December 31 st , or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be fully recoverable. The Company's impairment tests are based on a single operating segment and reporting unit structure. The Company completed its annual impairment test as of December 31, 2012 and 2013, which resulted in no impairment of goodwill. This test compares a reporting unit's carrying value to its fair value. If the fair value of the reporting unit exceeds the carrying value of the net assets, including goodwill assigned to that reporting unit, goodwill is not impaired. If the carrying value of the reporting unit's net assets, including goodwill, exceeds the fair value of the reporting unit, then the Company will determine the implied fair value of the reporting unit's goodwill. If the carrying value of a reporting unit's goodwill exceeds its implied fair value, then an impairment loss is recorded for the difference between the carrying amount and the implied fair value of the goodwill.

          Valuation of Long-Lived Assets (in thousands)  — The Company reviews long-lived assets for events or changes in circumstances that would indicate potential impairment. If the Company

F-12


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

determines that an asset may not be recoverable, an impairment charge is recorded. In 2011, the Company recorded an impairment charge of $19 for leasehold improvements. There were no impairment charges on long-lived assets for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2013. No impairment charges on long-lived assets occurred during the nine month period ended September 30, 2013, and a $109 impairment charges on long-lived assets was recognized in general as administrative expenses during the nine month period ended September 30, 2014.

          Revenue Recognition  — The Company recognizes revenue when it is realized (or realizable) and earned (i.e., when services have been rendered or delivery of applicable deliverables has occurred). This occurs when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, the product or service has been performed or delivered, fees are fixed or determinable, and collection is reasonably assured. When collectability is not reasonably assured, revenue is recognized when cash is collected. Cash collections and invoices generated in excess of revenue recognized are recorded as deferred revenue until the revenue recognition criteria are met.

          The Company primarily derives its revenue from multiple-element arrangement sales of its cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services. Revenue from these multiple element arrangements are recognized in accordance with ASC 605-25, Revenue Recognition — Multiple Element Arrangements . The Company allocates revenue to its cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services using the relative selling price method. The Company has generally been unable to establish vendor-specific objective evidence of fair value, and while the Company routinely seeks third party evidence of fair value, meaningful data has generally been unavailable as the Company's services are unique and visibility into competitors pricing is unavailable. As a result, the Company uses its best estimate of selling price to allocate arrangement consideration to its contractual service elements.

          The Company has determined an estimated selling price by considering several external and internal factors including, but not limited to, pricing practices, margin objectives, competition, customer demand, internal costs, and overall economic trends.

          Generally, the best estimate of selling price is consistent with the contractual arrangement fee for each element.

          Revenue is recognized as cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention services are performed and information is delivered to clients, which generally align with the Company's right to invoice its clients. Cloud-based data analytics services are considered performed when gaps in care, quality, data integrity, or financial performance, and summarized key analytics and benchmarking analytics reports are delivered to its clients, provided that all contractual performance requirements and other revenue recognition criteria are met. Data-driven intervention services are considered performed upon the completion of each medical record data abstraction and review service, encounter decision support, encounter facilitation, outbound telephonic and written communication, and supplemental patient encounter service, provided that all contractual performance requirements and other revenue recognition criteria are met.

          The Company also enters into multiple-element software arrangements, which are recognized under ASC 985-605, Software Revenue Recognition , when software subscription licenses are provided to clients. Under these arrangements, the Company provides post-contract support, or PCS, including help desk support and unspecified upgrades. Vendor-specific objective evidence of

F-13


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

fair value has not been established for PCS as PCS is not renewed separately from the license fees. As a result, under these subscription software license agreements, the Company recognizes revenue from the license of software ratably over the life of the agreement. The Company begins to recognize revenue upon execution of a signed agreement and delivery of the software, provided that the software license fees are fixed and determinable, and collection of the resulting receivable is reasonably assured.

          Certain of the Company's arrangements entitle a client to receive a refund if the Company fails to satisfy contractually specified performance obligations. The refund is limited to a portion or all of the consideration paid. In this case, revenue is recognized when performance obligations are satisfied.

          The Company maintains an allowance, charged to revenue, which reflects the Company's estimated future billing adjustments resulting from client concessions or resolutions of billing disputes.

          Cost of Revenue  — Cost of revenue consists primarily of expenses for employees who provide direct revenue-generating services to our clients, including salaries, benefits, discretionary incentive bonus compensation, employment taxes, equity compensation costs, and severance. Cost of revenue also includes expenses associated with the integration and verification of data and other service costs incurred to fulfill the Company's revenue contracts. Cost of revenue does not include allocated amounts for occupancy expense and depreciation and amortization.

          Research and Development  — Research and development expenses consist primarily of employee-related costs. All such costs are expensed as incurred, except for certain internal use software development costs that are capitalized. Research and development excludes any allocation of occupancy expense, depreciation and amortization.

          Selling and Marketing  — Sales and marketing expense consists primarily of employee-related expenses including salaries, benefits, discretionary incentive compensation, employment taxes, severance and equity compensation costs for employees engaged in sales, sales support, business development, and marketing. Sales and marketing expense also includes operating expenses for marketing programs, research, trade shows and brand messages, and public relations costs. Sales and marketing expense excludes any allocation of occupancy expense, depreciation and amortization.

          General and Administrative  — General and administrative expense consists primarily of employee-related expenses including salaries, benefits, discretionary incentive compensation, employment taxes, severance and equity compensation costs, for employees who are responsible for management information systems, administration, human resources, finance, legal, and executive management. General and administrative expense also includes occupancy expenses (including rent, utilities, communications, and facilities maintenance), professional fees, consulting fees, insurance, travel, and other expenses. General and administrative expense excludes any allocation of depreciation and amortization.

          Segments  — The Company operates its business as one operating segment: delivery of a seamless, end-to-end advanced cloud-based data analytics and data-driven intervention platform services that enables the Company's clients to achieve meaningful impacts in clinical and quality

F-14


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

outcomes, utilization, and financial performance. The Company's chief operating decision maker is the Chief Executive Officer, who reviews financial information presented on a consolidated basis for purposes of making operating decisions, assessing financial performance and allocating resources.

          Income Taxes  — The Company accounts for income taxes in accordance with Accounting Standards Codification ASC 740, Income Taxes , which prescribes the use of the asset and liability approach to the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities related to the expected future tax consequences of events that have been recognized in the Company's financial statements or income tax returns. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. Valuation allowances are established, when necessary, to reduce deferred tax assets when it is more likely than not that a portion or all of a given deferred tax asset will not be realized. In accordance with ASC 740, income tax expense includes (i) deferred tax expense, which generally represents the net change in the deferred tax asset or liability balance during the period plus any change in valuation allowances and (ii) current tax expense, which represents the amount of tax currently payable to or receivable from a taxing authority plus amounts accrued for expected tax contingencies (including both tax and interest). ASC 740 prescribes a recognition threshold of more-likely-than-not, and a measurement attribute for all tax positions taken or expected to be taken on a tax return, in order for those positions to be recognized in the financial statements. The Company continually reviews tax laws, regulations and related guidance in order to properly record any uncertain tax liability positions. The Company adjusts these reserves in light of changing facts and circumstances.

          Stock-Based Compensation  — All stock-based awards, including employee stock option grants, are recorded at fair value as of the grant date in accordance with ASC 713, Compensation — Stock Compensation , and recognized in the statement of operations over the service period of the applicable award using the straight-line method. The Company determines the fair value of its stock options on the date of grant, using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. The Company estimates the number of share-based awards that are expected to be forfeited based on historical and anticipated turnover data. The assumptions used in calculating the fair value of share-based awards represent management's best estimates.

          Net Income Per Share  — Basic and diluted net income per share, or EPS, are determined in accordance with ASC 260, Earnings Per Share , which specifies the computation, presentation and disclosure requirements for EPS. Basic EPS, excludes all dilutive common stock equivalents, is based upon the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the period. Diluted EPS, as calculated using the treasury stock method, reflects the potential dilution that would occur if the Company's dilutive outstanding stock options were exercised.

          The Company has issued Class A common stock and Class B common stock. Holders of Class A common stock generally have the same rights, including rights to dividends, as holders of Class B common stock, except that holders of Class A common stock have one vote per share while holders of Class B common stock have ten votes per share. Each share of Class B common stock will convert into one share of Class A common stock immediately upon its sale or transfer. As such, basic and fully diluted earnings per share for Class A common stock and Class B common stock are the same.

F-15


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

          Treasury Stock  — The Company records treasury stock activities under the cost method whereby the cost of the acquired stock is recorded as treasury stock. The Company's accounting policy upon the formal retirement of treasury stock is to deduct the par value from common stock and to reflect any excess of cost over par value as a reduction to additional paid-in capital (to the extent created by previous issuances of the shares) and then retained earnings.

          Comprehensive Income  — The Company's net income equals comprehensive income for all periods presented as the Company has no components of other comprehensive income. No accumulated comprehensive income has been recorded for the years presented.

          Deferred Rent  — Deferred rent consists of rent escalation payment terms, tenant improvement allowances and other incentives received from landlords related to the Company's operating leases for its facilities. Rent escalation represents the difference between actual operating lease payments due and straight-line rent expense, which is recorded by the Company over the term of the lease, including any construction period. The excess is recorded as a deferred credit in the early periods of the lease, when cash payments are generally lower than straight-line rent expense, and is reduced in the later periods of the lease when payments begin to exceed the straight-line expense. Tenant allowances from landlords for tenant improvements are generally comprised of cash received from the landlord as part of the negotiated terms of the lease or reimbursements of moving costs. These cash payments are recorded as deferred rent from landlords and are amortized as a reduction of periodic rent expense, over the term of the applicable lease.

          Deferred Initial Public Offering ("IPO") Issuance Costs (in thousands)  — The Company capitalizes deferred issuance costs, which primarily consist of direct incremental legal and accounting fees relating to the IPO. The deferred issuance costs will be offset against IPO proceeds upon the consummation of the offering. In the event the offering is terminated or materially delayed, deferred offering costs will be expensed. No amounts were deferred at December 31, 2012 or 2013, and $805 were deferred as prepaid expenses and other current assets at September 30, 2014.

          Recently Issued Accounting Standards  — In July 2013, the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, issued authoritative guidance containing changes to the presentation of an unrecognized tax benefit when a loss or credit carry forward exists. This statement is effective for financial statements issued for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2013, with early adoption permitted. Adoption of the standard is not expected to materially impact the Company's financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

          In May 2014, the FASB issued updated guidance on revenue from contracts with customers. This revenue recognition guidance supersedes existing GAAP guidance, including most industry-specific guidance. The core principle is that an entity should recognize revenue to depict the transfer of promised goods or services to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. The guidance identifies steps to apply in achieving this principle. This updated guidance is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2016. The Company is currently evaluating the potential impact of this guidance on the Company's financial disclosures and results, including whether the Company elects retrospective, or modified restrospective, method adoption.

F-16


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (Continued)

          In June 2014, the FASB issued stock compensation guidance requiring that a performance target that affects vesting and that could be achieved after the requisite service period be treated as a performance condition. The amendments in this guidance are effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2015. The Company is currently evaluating the potential impact of this guidance on the Company's financial disclosures and results.

3. NET INCOME PER SHARE (in thousands, except per share amounts)

          As discussed in Note 2, holders of all outstanding classes of common stock participate ratably in earnings on an indentical per share basis as if all shares were a single class. Basic EPS is computed by dividing net income by the weighted average number of shares of common stock, Class A common stock and Class B common stock outstanding during the period. Diluted EPS is computed by dividing net income by the sum of the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding and potentially dilutive securities outstanding during the period under the treasury stock method. Potentially dilutive securities include stock options. Under the treasury stock method, dilutive securities are assumed to be exercised at the beginning of the periods and as if funds obtained thereby were used to purchase common stock at the average market price during the period. Securities are excluded from the computations of diluted earnings per share if their effect would be anti-dilutive to EPS.

          The following table reconciles the weighted average shares outstanding for basic and diluted EPS for the periods indicated:

 
  Year Ended December 31,   Nine Months
Ended
September 30,
 
 
  2011   2012   2013   2013   2014  
 
   
   
   
  (Unaudited)
 

Net income

  $ 24,927   $ 55,155   $ 32,718   $ 26,983   $ 51,853  

Weighted average shares used in computing basic net income per share

    27,573     27,573     27,061     27,111     26,728  
                       

Net income per share — basic

  $ 0.90   $ 2.00   $ 1.21   $ 1.00   $ 1.94  
                       
                       

Net income

    24,927     55,155     32,718     26,983     51,853  

Weighted average shares used in computing basic net income per share

    27,573     27,573     27,061     27,111     26,728  

Effect of dilutive securities

    198     235     214     235     440  
                       

Weighted average shares used in computing diluted net income per share

    27,771     27,808     27,275     27,346     27,168  
                       

Net income per share — diluted

  $ 0.90   $ 1.98   $ 1.20   $ 0.99   $ 1.91  
                       
                       

          The computation of diluted EPS does not include 1,143, 1,061, and 981 stock options for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively, and 936 and 130 stock options for the nine month periods ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively, because their inclusion would have an anti-dilutive effect on EPS.

F-17


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

3. NET INCOME PER SHARE (in thousands, except share and per share amounts) (Continued)

          As discussed in Notes 1 and 10, in September 2014, the Company completed a holding company reorganization. As part of the reorganization, the Company implemented a multi-class stock structure. The Company has retrospectively presented the impact on EPS of this reorganization by calculating EPS based on the newly authorized, issued and outstanding Class A and Class B common stock. Only Class B common stock shares were outstanding for any of the periods presented.

4. PROPERTY, EQUIPMENT AND CAPITALIZED SOFTWARE (in thousands)

          Property, equipment and capitalized software consisted of the following:

 
  December 31,    
 
 
 
September 30, 2014
 
 
 
2012
 
2013
 
 
   
   
  (Unaudited)
 

Office and computer equipment

  $ 20,094   $ 23,345   $ 24,206  

Leasehold improvements

    10,933     13,374     13,852  

Purchased software

    6,436     8,563     9,891  

Capitalized software

    12,728     21,091     30,521  

Furniture and fixtures

    5,363     6,268     6,226  

Land

    390     390     390  

Building

    1,743     1,750     1,750  

Work in process

    3,729     5,897     7,102  
               

Total

    61,416     80,678     93,938  

Less: accumulated depreciation and amortization

    (27,246 )   (37,628 )   (44,812 )
               

Property, equipment and capitalized software, net

  $ 34,170   $ 43,050   $ 49,126  
               
               

          The Company leases certain office equipment under capital lease agreements, with bargain purchase options at the end of the lease term. Leased office equipment included in property and equipment at December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014 was $743, $996 and $961, respectively.

          Depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 was $7,979, $9,777, and $11,918, respectively, and for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 was $8,802 and $11,185, respectively. Amortization of the capital leases included in depreciation expense was $156, $172, $115 for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013, respectively, and $84 and $102 for the nine month periods ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. At December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014, the Company had unamortized capitalized software costs, including costs classified as work in progess, of $14,345, $20,657 and $26,208, respectively.

          At December 31, 2012 and 2013 and at September 30, 2014 work in process consisted primarily of purchased software licenses, computer equipment, and capitalized software, which was not placed into service.

F-18


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

5. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS (in thousands, except years)

Goodwill

          Goodwill is primarily derived from the Company's acquisitions of Medical Reliance Group, Inc. in 2006 and Catalyst Information Technologies, Inc. in 2009. Based on the results of the impairment assessment as of December 31, 2013, the Company determined that the fair value of its reporting unit exceeded its respective carrying value. There were no goodwill impairment indicators after the date of the last annual impairment test and no goodwill impairments recorded for any other period presented.

Intangible Assets

          Intangible assets at December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014 were as follows:

 
  December 31, 2012    
 
 
 
Weighted
Average Remaining
Useful Life (years)
 
 
 
Gross
 
Accumulated
Amortization
 
Net
 

Proprietary software technologies

  $ 16,077   $ (10,052 ) $ 6,025     3.7  

Trademark

    360     (238 )   122     1.7  

Database

    6,500     (2,147 )   4,353     6.8  

Covenant not to compete

    245     (231 )   14     0.2  

Customer relationships

    13,650     (8,750 )   4,900     12.5  
                     

Total

  $ 36,832   $ (21,418 ) $ 15,414        
                     
                     

 

 
  December 31, 2013    
 
 
 
Weighted
Average Remaining
Useful Life (years)
 
 
 
Gross
 
Accumulated
Amortization
 
Net
 

Proprietary software technologies

  $ 16,077   $ (12,521 ) $ 3,556     0.7  

Trademark

    360     (310 )   50     0.7  

Database

    6,500     (2,797 )   3,703     5.8  

Customer relationships

    13,650     (9,144 )   4,506     11.5  
                     

Total

  $ 36,587   $ (24,772 ) $ 11,815        
                     
                     

 

 
  September 30, 2014    
 
 
 
Weighted
Average Remaining
Useful Life (years)
 
 
 
Gross
 
Accumulated
Amortization
 
Net
 
 
  (unaudited)
   
 

Proprietary software technologies

  $ 16,077   $ (15,516 ) $ 561     0.5  

Trademark

    360     (360 )        

Database

    6,500     (3,284 )   3,216     5.0  

Customer relationships

    13,650     (9,439 )   4,211     10.7  
                     

Total

  $ 36,587   $ (28,599 ) $ 7,988        
                     
                     

F-19


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

5. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS (in thousands, except years) (Continued)

          Driven primarily by the accelerated arrival of advancing generations of technological software capabilities, management decided to discontinue the use of proprietary software technology, acquired in the Medical Reliance Group acquisition, with an initial expected useful life of ten years. The Company calculated no impairment and shortened the life of the intangible asset, and plans to accelerate straight-line amortization over the period of time the Company anticipates transitioning to an advanced software application, which is expected to occur during March 2015. At December 31, 2013 and September 30, 2014, the carrying value of this proprietary software technology was $3,368 and $561, respectively.

          Amortization expense for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 was $3,250, $3,122, $3,599, respectively, and for the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 was $2,303 and $3,827, respectively.

          Estimated future amortization expense of intangible assets, based upon the Company's intangible assets at December 31, 2013, is as follows:

 
 
Amount
 

Year ending December 31

       

2014

  $ 4,650  

2015

    1,044  

2016

    1,044  

2017

    1,044  

2018

    1,044  

Thereafter

    2,989  
       

Total

  $ 11,815  
       
       

          Estimated future amortization expense of acquired intangible assets, based upon the Company's intangible assets at September 30, 2014, is as follows:

 
  Amount  
 
  (unaudited)
 

Remaining three months ending December 31, 2014

  $ 541  

Year ending December 31

       

2015

    1,324  

2016

    1,044  

2017

    1,044  

2018

    1,044  

Thereafter

    2,991  
       

Total

  $ 7,988  
       
       

F-20


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

6. CREDIT FACILITIES (IN THOUSANDS)

          Credit facilities consisted of the following:

 
  December 31,    
 
 
 
September 30,
2014
 
 
 
2012
 
2013
 
 
   
   
  (Unaudited)
 

Revolving credit facility

  $   $   $  

Term loan

            300,000  
               

Total credit facilities

            300,000  

Less: current portion

            15,000  
               

Non-current credit facilities

    0     0     285,000  
               
               

          On September 19, 2014, the Company entered into a Credit and Guaranty Agreement ("Agreement"), with a group of lenders including Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as administrative agent, to provide credit facilities in the aggregate maximum principal amount of $400,000, consisting of a senior unsecured term loan facility in the original principal amount of $300,000 (the "Term Loan Facility"), and a senior unsecured revolving credit facility in the maximum principal amount of $100,000 (together with the Term Loan Facility, the "Credit Facilities").

          The revolving credit facility will be made available to the Company upon the earlier of the consummation by the Company of a qualified initial public offering, or the date on which the aggregate principal amount of the Term Loan Facility then outstanding does not exceed $200,000.

          The Company's borrowing rate under the Credit Facilities is based on either Eurodollar loans or base rate loans. Interest accrues on Eurodollar loans at a defined Eurodollar rate, defined as the London Interbank Offer Rate ("LIBOR") plus the applicable margin of 1.25%, as defined in the Credit Facility. Interest is payable monthly in arrears.

          The Credit Facility requires the Company to comply with specified financial covenants, including the maintenance of a $50,000 minimum cash and cash equivalents balance as of each calendar quarter end. The minimum cash and cash equivalents balance is not required to be held with any of the group of lenders and may be commingled with the Company's operating funds. The Credit Facility also contains various covenants, including affirmative covenants with respect to certain reporting requirements and maintaining certain business activities, and negative covenants that, among other things, may limit or impose restrictions on our ability to incur liens, incur additional indebtedness, make investments, make acquisitions and undertake certain additional actions. As of, and during, the nine months ended September 30, 2014, the Company was in compliance with our financial covenants under the Credit Facility.

F-21


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

6. CREDIT FACILITIES (IN THOUSANDS) (Continued)

          Scheduled maturity of the Credit Facilities follows:

(in thousands)
 
Amount
 
 
  (unaudited)
 

Remaining three months ending December 31, 2014

  $  

Year ending December 31,

       

2015

    18,750  

2016

    15,000  

2017

    30,000  

2018

    45,000  

Thereafter

    191,250  
       

Total

  $ 300,000  
       
       

7. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (in thousands)

          Operating Leases  — The Company leases office space under operating lease arrangements, some of which contain renewal options. Future non-cancellable lease payments as of December 31, 2013 are as follows:

 
 
Amount
 

Year ending December 31,

       

2014

  $ 7,564  

2015

    6,720  

2016

    6,287  

2017

    6,064  

2018

    4,849  

Thereafter

    844  
       

Total

  $ 32,328  
       
       

          Future non-cancellable lease payments as of September 30, 2014 are as follows:

 
  Amount  
 
  (unaudited)
 

Remaining three months ending December 31, 2014

  $ 1,976  

Years ending December 31,

       

2015

    6,720  

2016

    6,287  

2017

    6,064  

2018

    4,849  

Thereafter

    844  
       

Total

  $ 26,740  
       
       

          Total expense under operating leases was $5,484, $5,715, and $6,572 during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively, and was $4,739 and $5,663 during the nine

F-22


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

7. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (in thousands) (Continued)

month periods ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Certain operating leases contain rent escalation clauses, which are recorded on a straight-line basis over the initial term of the lease, with the difference between the rent paid and the straight-line rent recorded as a deferred rent liability. Lease incentives received from landlords are recorded as deferred rent liabilities and are amortized on a straight-line basis over the lease term as a reduction to rent expense. The deferred rent liability was $1,777, $3,543, and $3,390 at December 31, 2012 and 2013 and at September 30, 2014, respectively.

          Capital Leases  — The total capital lease liability at December 31, 2012 and 2013 and September 30, 2014 was $286, $411, and $296, respectively, which approximates fair value due to the short duration of the obligations.

          Letter of Credit  — The Company maintains a letter of credit with its primary commercial financial institution. During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013 and the nine months ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, the outstanding letter of credit was $247. The letter of credit is in lieu of a security deposit for the Company's corporate office.

          Litigation  — The Company is involved in various litigation matters arising out of the normal course of business. The Company consults with legal counsel on those issues related to litigation and seeks input from other experts and advisors with respect to such matters. Estimating the probable losses or a range of probable losses resulting from litigation, government actions and other legal proceedings is inherently difficult and requires an extensive degree of judgment, particularly where the matters involve indeterminate claims for monetary damages, may involve discretionary amounts, present novel legal theories, are in the early stages of the proceedings, or are subject to appeal. Whether any losses, damages or remedies ultimately resulting from such matters could reasonably have a material effect on the Company's business, financial condition, results of operation, or cash flows will depend on a number of variables, including, for example, the timing and amount of such losses or damages (if any) and the structure and type of any such remedies. The Company's management does not presently expect any of the current litigation matters to have a material adverse impact on the consolidated financial statements of the Company.

8. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION (in thousands, except share and per share amounts, years, and percentages)

Stock Options

          On December 31, 2006, the Company and its stockholders established the 2007 Long-Term Incentive Plan, or Plan, under which the Company's Board of Directors, at its discretion, can grant stock options to employees and certain directors of the Company. During 2009, the Plan was amended and currently authorizes the grant of stock options or other equity instruments for up to 2,055,000 shares of common stock. The stock options granted under the Plan generally expire at the earlier of a specified period after termination of service or the date specified by the Board of Directors at the date of grant, but not more than ten years from such grant date. Stock issued as a result of exercised stock options will be issued from the Company's authorized available stock. Effective June 5, 2012, the 2007 Long-Term Incentive Plan changed its name to the Inovalon, Inc. 2007 Long-Term Incentive Plan. Options granted under the Plan may be incentive stock options or non-qualified stock options under the applicable provisions of the Internal Revenue Code.

F-23


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

8. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION (in thousands, except share and per share amounts, years, and percentages) (Continued)

          The Company selected the Black-Scholes option-pricing model as the most appropriate model for determining the estimated fair value for stock-based awards. The Black-Scholes option-pricing model requires the use of estimates, including the fair market value of the Company's common stock, expected stock price volatility, expected term, estimated forfeitures and the risk free- interest rate. The fair value of stock option awards is amortized on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period of the awards, which is generally the vesting period. The amount of stock-based compensation expense recognized is based on the estimated portion of the awards that are expected to vest. Actual and anticipated forfeiture rates were applied in the expense calculation.

          Determining the fair value of the Company's common stock requires complex and subjective judgment and estimates. There is inherent uncertainty in making these judgments and estimates. Since the Company's share price is not publicly quoted and lacks an active trading market, the Company's Compensation Committee was required to estimate the fair value of the common stock at each meeting at which options were granted based on factors including, but not limited to, contemporaneous valuations of the Company's common stock performed by an unrelated third-party specialist, the lack of marketability of the Company's common stock, developments in the business, share repurchase arrangements, the status of the Company's development and sales efforts, revenue growth, valuations of comparable companies, and additional objective and subjective factors relating to the Company's business. The fair value of the underlying common stock will be determined by the Company's Compensation Committee until such time as the Company's common stock is listed on an established stock exchange.

          The fair value of each option grant is estimated on the date of grant applying the Black-Scholes option pricing model using the following assumptions:

 
  December 31,   September 30,  
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 
2013
 
2014
 
 
   
   
   
  (unaudited)
 

Expected stock price volatility

    42.0%     43.3%     41.5%     41.4%     42.3%  

Expected term

    6.5 Years     6.5 Years     6.5 Years     6.5 Years     6.5 Years  

Expected dividend yield

                     

Risk-free interest rate

    2.8%     1.1%     2.3%     1.9%     2.2%  

Weighted-average fair value of underlying common stock

  $ 32.97   $ 31.51   $ 34.49   $ 33.99   $ 37.92  

F-24


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

8. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION (in thousands, except share and per share amounts, years, and percentages) (Continued)

          Expected volatility was calculated as of each grant date based on reported data for several unrelated public companies within the Company's industry that are considered to be comparable to the Company and for which historical information was available. The average expected term was determined under the simplified calculation as provided by the Securities and Exchange Commission's Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107, Share-Based Payment , which is the mid-point between the vesting date and the end of the contractual term. The dividend yield assumption of zero is based upon the fact that the Company does not have a formal dividend payment policy, the Company does not intend to continue to pay cash dividends on its common stock in the future, and, to the extent the Company pays dividends in the future, there is no assurance that any such dividends will be comparable to those previously declared. Any declarations of dividends and the establishment of future record and payment dates are subject to the final determination of the Company's Board of Directors. The risk-free interest rate is determined by reference to the U.S. Treasury yield curve rates with the remaining term commensurate with the expected life assumed at the date of grant. Forfeitures are estimated based on historical experience and adjustments are made annually to reflect actual forfeiture experience.

F-25


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

8. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION (in thousands, except share and per share amounts, years, and percentages) (Continued)

          Activity under the Plan is as follows:

 
 
Shares
Available
for Grant
 
Number of
Shares
Outstanding
 
Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price
 
Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual Life
(in years)
 
Aggregate
Intrinsic Value
 

Balance at January 1, 2011

    395,216     1,498,057   $ 30.88     8.4   $ 12,367  

Stock options granted

    (321,868 )   321,868     32.97              

Stock options exercised

        (31,890 )   3.76              

Stock options cancelled

    393,914     (393,914 )   39.98              
                             

Balance at December 31, 2011

    467,262     1,394,121     29.84     7.0     7,551  

Stock options granted

    (249,523 )   249,523     31.51              

Stock options exercised

        (1,100 )   8.56              

Stock options cancelled

    364,936     (364,936 )   36.72              
                             

Balance at December 31, 2012

    582,675     1,277,608     28.15     6.2     14,557  

Stock options granted

    (249,397 )   249,397     34.49              

Stock options exercised

        (51,791 )   5.21              

Stock options cancelled

    293,307     (293,307 )   36.43              
                             

Balance at December 31, 2013

    626,585     1,181,907     28.44     5.7     10,471  

Stock options granted (unaudited)

    (328,944 )   328,944     37.92              

Stock options exercised (unaudited)

        (37,394 )   19.26              

Stock options cancelled (unaudited)

    183,202     (183,202 )   37.25              
                             

Balance at September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

    480,843     1,290,255     29.86     6.0     107,281  
                             

Exercisable at December 31, 2013

          779,778     25.17     4.3     9,798  

Vested and expected to vest at December 31, 2013

          1,037,140     27.56     5.3     10,229  

Exercisable at September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

          753,197     25.30     3.8     66,066  

Vested and expected to vest at September 30, 2014 (unaudited)

          1,096,914     28.73     5.5     92,443  

          The total grant-date fair value of stock options granted during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 and the nine month period ending September 30, 2014 was $4,609, $3,321, $3,661, and $5,766, respectively. The weighted average grant-date fair value of stock options granted during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, 2013 and the nine month period ended September 30, 2014 was $14.32 per share, $13.31 per share, $14.68 per share, and $17.53 per share, respectively.

          Total stock-based compensation expense recorded in general and administrative expenses for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, 2013 and for the nine month periods ended September 30, 2013 and 2014 was $3,687, $2,560, $1,842, $1,408, and $1,340, respectively. As of December 31, 2013, there is $5,521 of total unrecognized compensation expense related to

F-26


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

8. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION (in thousands, except share and per share amounts, years, and percentages) (Continued)

unvested stock options, and this expense is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 3.5 years. As of September 30, 2014, there is $8,498 of total unrecognized compensation expense related to unvested stock options, and this expense is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 4.0 years.

          The aggregate intrinsic value in the table above represents the total intrinsic value (the difference between the fair value of the Company's common stock and the exercise price, multiplied by the number of in-the-money options) that would have been received by the option holders had all option holders exercised their options. This amount is subject to change based on changes to the fair market value of the Company's common stock.

9. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN (in thousands)

          On June 1, 2007, the Company adopted a 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan and Trust, or 401(k) Plan. The 401(k) Plan was amended on February 1, 2010. The amended 401(k) Plan allows employees to become eligible to participate upon the completion of 30 days of service. The Company matches employee contributions up to 4.0% of their compensation and the employer contributions vest immediately. During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 and the nine month periods ended September 30, 2013 and 2014, total expense recorded for the Company's matching 401(k) contributions were $1,847, $2,254, $2,846, $2,233, and $2,186, respectively.

10. STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT) (in thousands, except share amounts)

          In February 2013, to provide liquidity to certain existing stockholders who desired liquidity and to reduce the number of stockholders and outstanding shares of common stock, the Company initiated a share repurchase and liquidity initiative for and among existing stockholders. During 2013, the Company repurchased 2,140,672 shares of common stock for aggregate consideration of $72,114 and sold 1,443,322 shares of common stock for $52,114, resulting in a net repurchase of 697,350 treasury stock shares at an aggregate net cost of $20,000. Upon repurchase, the treasury stock shares were immediately retired. In connection with the retirement, of the $20,000 value assigned to the treasury stock shares, $2,403 was allocated to additional paid-in capital and $17,597 was allocated to retained earnings. The amount allocated to additional paid-in capital was determined based on the paid-in capital per share generated from the historical issuances of these treasury stock shares.

          During June 2014, the Company repurchased 292,464 shares at a cost of $9,066. Upon repurchase, the shares were immediately retired. In connection with the retirement, of the $9,066 value assigned to the repurchased shares, $1,011 was allocated to additional paid-in capital and $8,055 was allocated to retained earnings. The amount allocated to additional paid-in capital was determined based on the paid-in capital per share generated from the historical issuances of these shares.

          On September 16, 2014, in connection with the holding company reorganization, the Company's common stock was reclassified to implement a multi-class capital structure providing for common stock, Class A common stock and Class B common stock. Each share of common stock

F-27


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

10. STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT) (in thousands, except share amounts) (Continued)

held by the then-existing stockholders of Inovalon, Inc. at the time of the holding company reorganization was reclassified as Class B common stock of the Company.

          On September 19, 2014, the Company authorized the pro-rata redemption of approximately 8.33% of the Company's outstanding Class B common stock from the then-existing holders. During September 2014, the Company completed the pro-rata redemption and repurchased 2,221,857 shares of Class B common stock for $300,000, which automatically converted from Class B common stock to Class A common stock. At September 30, 2014, these repurchased 2,221,857 Class A common stock shares were held as treasury shares by the Company.

11. INCOME TAXES (in thousands, except percentages)

          The provision for income taxes consisted of the following:

 
  Year Ended December 31,  
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 

Current:

                   

Federal

  $ 13,365   $ 28,749   $ 16,254  

State

    1,784     5,818     3,443  

Foreign (Puerto Rico)

            293  
               

Total current provision

    15,149     34,567     19,990  
               

Deferred:

                   

Federal

    613     437     (347 )

State

    229     958     14  
               

Total deferred provision

    842     1,395     (333 )
               

Total provision for income taxes

  $ 15,991   $ 35,962   $ 19,657  
               
               

          The provision for income taxes reconciles to the amount computed by applying the federal statutory rate (35.0%) to income before income taxes as follows:

 
  Year Ended December 31,  
 
 
2011
 
2012
 
2013
 

Expected federal income tax

    35.0 % $ 14,322     35.0 % $ 31,891     35.0 % $ 18,331  

State income taxes, net of federal income tax effect

    4.2     1,721     4.5     4,092     3.9     2,047  

Permanent items

    1.5     597     0.4     368     0.5     237  

Research and development tax credits

            (0.3 )   (293 )   (1.4 )   (744 )

Other

    (1.6 )   (649 )   (0.1 )   (96 )   (0.5 )   (214 )
                           

Income tax expense

    39.1 % $ 15,991     39.5 % $ 35,962     37.5 % $ 19,657  
                           
                           

          Deferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income

F-28


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

11. INCOME TAXES (in thousands, except percentages) (Continued)

tax purposes. Significant components of the Company's deferred tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 
  December 31,  
 
 
2012
 
2013
 

Components of deferred tax assets and liabilities

             

Deferred tax assets:

             

Accrued expenses and reserves

  $ 257   $ 830  

Stock-based compensation

    2,466     2,565  

Deferred rent

    692     1,385  

Other

        45  
           

Total deferred tax assets

  $ 3,415   $ 4,825  
           

Deferred tax liabilities:

             

Intangibles

  $ 6,000   $ 4,619  

Property, equipment and capitalized software

    9,490     12,318  

Prepaids and other

    438     430  
           

Total deferred tax liabilities

  $ 15,928   $ 17,367  
           
           

          In 2012, the Company recognized tax benefit of $293 related to the impact of the research and development, or R&D, tax credit for the tax year ended December 31, 2011. On January 2, 2013, the American Taxpayer Relief Act of 2012 was signed into law, which retroactively reinstated the R&D tax credit for two years, from January 1, 2012 through December 31, 2013. The financial impacts of tax law changes are recognized in the period in which new legislation is enacted. Accordingly, in 2013 the Company recognized a retroactive benefit of $409 for the U.S. R&D tax credit for the tax year ended December 31, 2012.

          Uncertain Tax Positions  — During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, and 2013, changes in the liability for gross unrecognized tax benefits, including interest, totaled $336, $12, and $48, respectively. At December 31, 2012 and 2013, the Company had a total liability for unrecognized tax benefits, including interest and penalties, of $48 and $0, respectively, which is recorded in other liabilities and other current liabilities on the Company's consolidated balance sheet.

          While the Company believes it has adequately provided for all tax positions, amounts asserted by taxing authorities could differ from the Company's accrued position. Accordingly, additional provisions on federal, state and foreign tax-related matters could be recorded in the future as revised estimates are made or the underlying matters are settled or otherwise resolved.

          The Company is subject to taxation in the U.S. and various state and foreign jurisdictions. The number of years with open tax audits varies depending on the tax jurisdiction.

F-29


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

12. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

          The Company has evaluated subsequent events through October 10, 2014, the date that the consolidated financial statements were issued. Other than events discussed below, no other events occurred through that date, which required disclosure.

Holding Company Reorganization

          On September 17, 2014, Inovalon, Inc. implemented a holding company reorganization, pursuant to which the Company became the new parent company of Inovalon, Inc. and Inovalon, Inc. became the direct, wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. As a result of the holding company reorganization, each share of Inovalon, Inc. that was issued and outstanding automatically converted into one share of common stock of the Company.

Multi-Class Structure

          On September 19, 2014, in connection with the holding company reorganization, the Company's common stock was reclassified to implement a multi-class capital structure providing for common stock, Class A common stock and Class B common stock. Each share of common stock held by the existing stockholders of Inovalon, Inc. at the time of the holding company reorganization was reclassified as Class B common stock. As discussed in Notes 1 and 3, the holding company reorganization is retrospectively presented in the consolidated financial statements.

Credit Agreement

          On September 19, 2014, the Company entered into a Credit and Guaranty Agreement, or Agreement, with a group of lenders with Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as administrative agent, to provide credit facilities in the aggregate maximum principal amount of $400 million, consisting of a senior unsecured term loan facility in the original principal amount of $300 million, the Term Loan Facility, and a senior unsecured revolving credit facility in the maximum principal amount of $100 million, together with the Term Loan Facility, the Credit Facilities. The Term Loan Facility was utilized to repurchase $300 million of the Company's outstanding Class B common stock, as described below. The obligations under the Credit Facilities are guaranteed by the Company's domestic, wholly owned subsidiaries.

Partial Redemption of Class B Common Stock

          On September 19, 2014, the Company announced that approximately 8.33% of the Company's outstanding Class B common stock will be redeemed on a pro rata basis among the then-existing holders of Class B common stock at a redemption price equal to $135.03 per share for an aggregate redemption amount of approximately $300 million. The pro-rata stock redemption was completed prior to September 30, 2014.

13. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS (UNAUDITED)

          The Company has evaluated subsequent events through December 30, 2014, the date that the unaudited interim consolidated financial statements were issued. Other than events discussed below, no other events occurred through that date which required disclosure.

F-30


Table of Contents


Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Continued)

13. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS (UNAUDITED) (Continued)

          On November 13, 2014, the Compensation Committee granted 97,756 restricted stock units ("RSUs") pursuant to the Company's Plan. RSUs are share awards that, upon vesting, will deliver to the holder shares of the Company's Class B common stock under the Plan. The awards granted vest over five years on the later of each annual anniversary of the award grant date and the earlier of an initial public offering or certain change of control events. Pursuant to the terms of the awards, the shares not vested terminate upon the RSU holders separation from the Company.

          The RSUs have a grant date fair value of $8,286. The Company estimated the fair value of these awards using a Black-Scholes put-option valuation model resulting in the fair value of $84.76 per RSU.

* * * * *

F-31


Table of Contents


INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.
Schedule II
Valuation and Qualifying Accounts and Reserves
(in thousands)

Description
 
Balance at
Beginning
of Year
 
Additions
Charged
Against
Revenue
 
Additions
Charged to
Cost and
Expense
 
Deductions
 
Balance at
End of Year
 

    Year Ended December 31, 2013  

Allowance for accounts receivable

  $ 451   $ 2,711   $   $ (1,678 ) $ 1,484  

   

Year Ended December 31, 2012

 

Allowance for accounts receivable

  $ 1,402   $ 1,297   $ 45   $ (2,293 ) $ 451  

   

Year Ended December 31, 2011

 

Allowance for accounts receivable

  $ 1,643   $ 986   $ (240 ) $ (987 ) $ 1,402  

F-32


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents


                  Shares

Class A Common Stock



LOGO



Goldman, Sachs & Co.   Morgan Stanley   Citigroup

BofA Merrill Lynch   UBS Investment Bank

Baird   Piper Jaffray   Wells Fargo Securities   William Blair

   


           Through and including                           , 2015 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in those securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to a dealer's obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to an unsold allotment or subscription.


Table of Contents


PART II
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

Item 13.    Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.

          The following table sets forth all costs and expenses, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, paid or payable by us in connection with the sale of the Class A common stock being registered. All amounts shown are estimates except for the SEC registration fee, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, or FINRA, filing fee and the NASDAQ Global Select Market listing fee:

 
 
Amount
Paid or
to Be Paid
 

SEC registration fee

  $ 58,100  

FINRA filing fee

    75,500  

NASDAQ Global Select Market listing fee

      *

Blue sky qualification fees and expenses

      *

Printing and engraving expenses

      *

Legal fees and expenses

      *

Accounting fees and expenses

      *

Transfer agent and registrar fees and expenses

      *

Miscellaneous expenses

      *
       

Total

  $   *
       
       

*
To be completed by amendment.

Item 14.    Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

          Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law authorizes a court to award, or a corporation's board of directors to grant, indemnity to directors and officers under certain circumstances and subject to certain limitations. The terms of Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law are sufficiently broad to permit indemnification under certain circumstances for liabilities, including reimbursement of expenses incurred, arising under the Securities Act.

          As permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, the Registrant's restated certificate of incorporation to be effective upon the closing of this offering contains provisions that eliminate the personal liability of its directors for monetary damages for any breach of fiduciary duties as a director, except liability for the following:

    any breach of the director's duty of loyalty to the Registrant or its stockholders;

    acts or omissions not in good faith or that involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

    under Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law (regarding unlawful dividends and stock purchases); or

    any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.

          As permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, the Registrant's restated bylaws to be effective upon the closing of this offering, provide that:

    the Registrant is required to indemnify its directors and executive officers to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, subject to very limited exceptions;

II-1


Table of Contents

    the Registrant may indemnify its other employees and agents as set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law;

    the Registrant is required to advance expenses, as incurred, to its directors and executive officers in connection with a legal proceeding to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, subject to very limited exceptions; and

    the rights conferred in the bylaws are not exclusive.

          Prior to the closing of this offering, the Registrant has entered into indemnification agreements with each of its current directors and executive officers to provide these directors and executive officers additional contractual assurances regarding the scope of the indemnification set forth in the Registrant's restated certificate of incorporation and restated bylaws and to provide additional procedural protections. There is no pending litigation or proceeding involving a director or executive officer of the Registrant for which indemnification is sought. Reference is also made to Section 9 of the underwriting agreement to be filed as Exhibit 1.1 to this registration statement, which provides for the indemnification of executive officers, directors and controlling persons of the Registrant against certain liabilities. The indemnification provisions in the Registrant's restated certificate of incorporation, restated bylaws and the indemnification agreements entered into or to be entered into between the Registrant and each of its directors and executive officers may be sufficiently broad to permit indemnification of the Registrant's directors and executive officers for liabilities arising under the Securities Act.

          The Registrant currently carries liability insurance for its directors and officers.

Item 15.    Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

          In the three years preceding the filing of this registration statement, we have issued the following securities that were not registered under the Securities Act:

          From November 1, 2011 to November 13, 2014, we granted stock options to purchase an aggregate of 786,505 shares of our Class B common stock to directors, officers, and employees with per share exercise prices ranging from $31.49 to $39.44 under our Pre-IPO Plan. The sales of securities described above were deemed to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Rule 701 promulgated under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act in that they were offered and sold either pursuant to written compensatory plans or pursuant to a written contract relating to compensation, as provided by Rule 701. All recipients have received the disclosure required under Rule 701.

          In February 2013, we sold an aggregate of 1,443,332 to six accredited investors at $36.11 per share in a transaction deemed to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act.

          In November 2014, we granted an aggregate of 97,756 restricted stock units to employees under our Pre-IPO Plan. The sales of securities described above were deemed to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Rule 701 promulgated under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act in that they were offered and sold either pursuant to written compensatory plans or pursuant to a written contract relating to compensation, as provided by Rule 701. All recipients have received the disclosure required under Rule 701.

          None of the foregoing transactions involved any underwriters, underwriting discounts or commissions, or any public offering, and the Registrant believes each transaction was exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act as stated above. All recipients of the foregoing transactions either received adequate information about the Registrant or had access, through their relationships with the Registrant, to such information. Furthermore, the Registrant affixed

II-2


Table of Contents

appropriate legends to the share certificates and instruments issued in each foregoing transaction setting forth that the securities had not been registered and the applicable restrictions on transfer.

Item 16.    Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

(a)    Exhibits.

          The list of exhibits filed with or incorporated by reference in this Registration Statement is set forth in the Exhibit Index following the signature page herein.

(b)    Financial Statement Schedules.

          All financial statement schedules are omitted because they are not applicable or the information is included in the Registrant's consolidated financial statements or related notes.

Item 17.    Undertakings.

          The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

          Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

          The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes that:

          (1)     For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

          (2)     For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

II-3


Table of Contents


SIGNATURES

          Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Bowie, State of Maryland, on this 30 th day of December, 2014.

    Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

 

 

By:

 

/s/ KEITH R. DUNLEAVY, M.D.

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D.
Chief Executive Officer and Chairman


POWER OF ATTORNEY

          KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature appears below hereby constitutes and appoints Keith R. Dunleavy or Thomas Kloster and each of them, his true and lawful attorney-in-fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him and in his name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to this registration statement (including post-effective amendments to the registration statement), and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, and any other documents in connection therewith, granting unto said attorneys-in-fact and agents full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in and about the premises, as fully to all intents and purposes as he might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys-in-fact and agents, or their substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.

          Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Name
 
Capacity
 
Date

 

 

 

 

 
/s/ KEITH R. DUNLEAVY, M.D.

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D.
  Chief Executive Officer and Chairman
(Principal Executive Officer)
  December 30, 2014

/s/ THOMAS R. KLOSTER

Thomas R. Kloster

 

Chief Financial Officer (Principal
Financial Officer and Principal
Accounting Officer)

 

December 30, 2014

/s/ DENISE K. FLETCHER

Denise K. Fletcher

 

Director

 

December 30, 2014

/s/ ANDRÉ S. HOFFMANN

André S. Hoffmann

 

Director

 

December 30, 2014

/s/ LEE D. ROBERTS

Lee D. Roberts

 

Director

 

December 30, 2014

/s/ WILLIAM J. TEUBER JR.

William J. Teuber Jr.

 

Director

 

December 30, 2014

Table of Contents


EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit
Number
 
Description of Document
  1.1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement.

  3.1*

 

Second Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation.

  3.2*

 

Second Amended and Restated Bylaws.

  4.1*

 

Form of Class A Common Stock Certificate.

  5.1*

 

Opinion of Morrison & Foerster LLP.

10.1

 

Form of Indemnification Agreement.

10.2

 

Inovalon, Inc. Amended and Restated Long-term Incentive Plan (as amended on October 7, 2010), as assumed by Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

10.3

 

Form of Stock Option Agreement under the Amended and Restated Long-term Incentive Plan (as amended on October 7, 2010), as assumed by Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

10.4

 

Form of Restricted Stock Units Agreement under the Amended and Restated Long-term Incentive Plan (as amended on October 7, 2010), as assumed by Inovalon Holdings, Inc.

10.5*

 

2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

10.6*

 

Form of Stock Option Award Agreement under the 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

10.7*

 

Form of Restricted Stock Agreement under the 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

10.9*

 

Form of Restricted Stock Unit Award Agreement under the 2015 Omnibus Incentive Plan.

10.12*

 

Second Amended and Restated Stockholders Rights Agreement, dated as of September 15, 2014, by and among Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and certain of its stockholders.

10.13

 

Shareholders Voting Agreement, dated as of September 15, 2008, by and among Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and those persons identified on Exhibit A thereto.

10.14

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement, dated as September 19, 2014 by and among Inovalon Holdings, Inc., certain subsidiaries of Inovalon Holdings, Inc., as guarantors, various lenders, Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as joint lead arranger and joint lead bookrunner, and Goldman Sachs Bank USA, as administrative agent.

10.15*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Dr. Keith R. Dunleavy.

10.16*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Robert A. Wychulis.

10.17*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Thomas R. Kloster.

10.18*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Christopher E. Greiner.

10.19*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Daniel L. Rizzo.

10.20*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Jason Z. Rose.

10.21*

 

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Joseph R. Rostock.

Table of Contents

Exhibit
Number
 
Description of Document
10.22*   Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated                          , by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and Shauna Vernal.

21.1

 

Subsidiaries of the Registrant.

23.1

 

Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP.

23.2*

 

Consent of Morrison & Foerster LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1).

24.1

 

Power of Attorney (included on signature page).

*
To be filed by amendment.



Exhibit 10.1

 

 

INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENT

 

This Indemnification Agreement (“Agreement”) by and between Inovalon Holdings, Inc. (“Inovalon”) and [officer/director] (“Indemnitee”) is entered into as of [              ], but is and becomes effective only upon the closing of Inovalon’s underwritten public offering of securities pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Effective Date”).

 

Recitals

 

A.             Inovalon believes it is essential to retain and attract qualified directors and officers.

 

B.             Indemnitee has agreed to serve, or to continue to serve, as a member of the Inovalon Board of Directors (“Board”), a director of an Inovalon affiliate, or an officer of Inovalon or an affiliate of Inovalon.

 

C.             Both Inovalon and Indemnitee recognize the increased risk of litigation and other claims being asserted against directors and officers of public companies.

 

D.             Inovalon’s Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation, as amended (the “Certificate”), allows, and Inovalon’s Amended and Restated Bylaws (the “Bylaws”) require, Inovalon to indemnify and advance expenses to its directors and officers to the extent permitted by Delaware General Corporation Law, as amended (the “Code”).

 

E.              Indemnitee, in agreeing to serve or continue to serve, as a director or an officer of Inovalon is in part doing so in reliance on the indemnification provisions of the Certificate and Bylaws.

 

F.               In recognition of Indemnitee’s need for (1) substantial protection against personal liability based on Indemnitee’s reliance on the Certificate of Incorporation, the Bylaws and the rights afforded under this Agreement, and (2) an inducement to provide effective services to Inovalon or an affiliate of Inovalon as a director or officer, Inovalon wishes to provide for the indemnification of Indemnitee and to advance expenses to Indemnitee to the fullest extent permitted by law, subject to certain exceptions contained in this Agreement, and, to the extent insurance is maintained by Inovalon, to provide for the continued coverage of Indemnitee under Inovalon’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policies.

 

Agreement

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and promises contained in this Agreement, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is acknowledged, the parties, intending to be legally bound, agree as follows:

 



 

1.      CERTAIN DEFINITIONS .

 

1.1.                 Change in Control ” means the occurrence of any of the following events:

 

(a)          Any “person” (as such term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Act”)) becomes the “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Act), directly or indirectly, of securities of Inovalon representing more than 20% of the total voting power represented by Inovalon’s then outstanding Voting Securities, other than:

 

(i)                          a trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under an employee benefit plan of Inovalon;

 

(ii)                       a corporation owned directly or indirectly by the stockholders of Inovalon in substantially the same proportions as their ownership of stock of Inovalon; or

 

(iii)                    any current beneficial stockholder or group, as defined by Rule 13d-5 of the Exchange Act, including the heirs, assigns and successors thereof, that, as of the Effective Date, is the beneficial owner, within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act, of securities possessing more than 20% of the total combined voting power of Inovalon’s outstanding securities.

 

(b)          There is (1) a sale of all or substantially all assets of Inovalon or (2) a merger, consolidation or similar transaction involving (directly or indirectly) Inovalon if, immediately after the consummation of such merger, consolidation or similar transaction, the stockholders of Inovalon immediately prior thereto do not own, directly or indirectly, either (A) outstanding Voting Securities representing more than 50% of the combined outstanding voting power of the surviving entity in such merger, consolidation or similar transaction or (B) more than 50% of the combined outstanding voting power of the parent of the surviving entity in such merger, consolidation or similar transaction.

 

1.2.                 Expenses ” will be broadly construed and will include, without limitation, all direct and indirect costs of any type or nature whatsoever (including, without limitation, judgments, fines or penalties and all attorneys’, witness, or other professional fees and related disbursements, and other out-of-pocket costs of whatever nature), actually and reasonably incurred by Indemnitee in connection with the investigation, defense or appeal of a Proceeding, participation in a Proceeding as a witness or establishing or enforcing a right to indemnification under this Agreement, the Code or otherwise, and amounts paid in settlement by or on behalf of Indemnitee, but will not include any judgments, fines or penalties actually levied against Indemnitee for such individual’s violations of law.

 

1.3.                 Independent Legal Counsel ” means an attorney or firm of attorneys, selected in accordance with the provisions of Section 5, who have not otherwise performed services for Inovalon (or for any entity that as of the time of selection of the attorney or firm of attorneys is controlled by, controlling or under common control with Inovalon) or Indemnitee within the last three years (other than with respect to matters concerning

 



 

the rights of Indemnitee under this Agreement, or of other indemnitees under similar indemnity agreements).

 

1.4.                 Proceeding ” means and includes, without limitation, any threatened, pending, or completed action, suit, arbitration, alternate dispute resolution mechanism, investigation, inquiry, administrative hearing, whether brought in the right of or by Inovalon or otherwise and whether of a civil, criminal, administrative or investigative nature, and whether formal or informal in any case, in which Indemnitee was, is or will be involved as a party or otherwise by reason of the fact that:

 

(a)          Indemnitee is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of Inovalon;

 

(b)          Indemnitee took an action while acting as director, officer, employee or agent of Inovalon; or

 

(c)           Indemnitee is or was serving at the request of Inovalon as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise, including as a deemed fiduciary thereto, and in any such case described above, whether or not serving in any such capacity at the time any Expense is incurred for which indemnification, reimbursement, or advancement of Expenses may be provided under this Agreement.

 

For the avoidance of doubt, an action by Indemnitee to enforce Indemnitee’s rights to indemnification under this Agreement will be a “Proceeding” for purposes of this Agreement.

 

1.5.                 Voting Securities ” means any securities of Inovalon which vote generally in the election of directors.

 

2.      SERVICES TO INOVALON.

 

Indemnitee will serve, at the will of Inovalon or under separate contract, if any such contract exists, as a director or officer of Inovalon or of an affiliate of Inovalon (including, but not limited to, any employee benefit plan of Inovalon) faithfully and to the best of Indemnitee’s ability so long as Indemnitee:  (a) remains an officer or director of Inovalon or an affiliate of Inovalon; and (b) if an employee of Inovalon or an affiliate of Inovalon, remains employed by Inovalon or such affiliate.  Indemnitee may at any time and for any reason resign from such position (subject to any contractual obligation that Indemnitee may be subject to apart from this Agreement), and Inovalon or any affiliate of Inovalon will have no obligation under this Agreement to continue Indemnitee in any such position.

 

3.      INDEMNITY OF INDEMNITEE.

 

Inovalon will hold harmless and indemnify Indemnitee to the fullest extent authorized or permitted by the Code, as the same may be amended from time to time (but only to the extent that such amendment permits Inovalon to provide broader indemnification rights than the Bylaws, the Certificate or the Code permitted prior to adoption of such amendment). These obligations and the other obligations of Inovalon in this Agreement apply regardless of whether the conduct giving rise to the obligations occurred before or occur after the date this Agreement

 



 

is executed. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, to the extent that Indemnitee has been successful on the merits or otherwise in defense of any Proceeding relating in whole or in part to an Indemnifiable Event or in defense of any issue or matter therein, Indemnitee will be indemnified against all Expenses incurred in connection therewith. For these purposes, Indemnitee will be deemed to have been “successful on the merits” upon termination of any Proceeding or of any claim, issue or matter therein, by the winning of a motion to dismiss (with or without prejudice), motion for summary judgment, or settlement (with or without court approval).

 

4.      PARTIAL INDEMNIFICATION.

 

Indemnitee will be entitled under this Agreement to indemnification by Inovalon for a portion of the Expenses that Indemnitee becomes legally obligated to pay in connection with any Proceeding even if not entitled hereunder to indemnification for the total amount thereof, and Inovalon will indemnify Indemnitee for the portion thereof to which Indemnitee is entitled.

 

5.      DETERMINATION OF ENTITLEMENT; CHANGE IN CONTROL.

 

(a)          If there is a Change in Control of Inovalon then, with respect to all matters thereafter arising concerning the rights of Indemnitee to indemnification (including, but not limited to, any right to advancement of Expenses) under this Agreement, any other agreement with Inovalon providing for indemnification, the Certificate, Bylaws and applicable law (collectively, the “Indemnification Provisions”) as now or hereafter in effect, Independent Legal Counsel may be selected by Indemnitee and approved by Inovalon (which approval will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed). Such Independent Legal Counsel will render its written opinion within 90 days to Inovalon and Indemnitee as to whether and to what extent Indemnitee would be permitted to be indemnified under the Indemnification Provisions before and after the completion of the Change in Control and such opinion will be binding upon Inovalon and Indemnitee. Inovalon will pay the reasonable fees and expenses of the Independent Legal Counsel referred to above and will fully indemnify such counsel against any and all Expenses arising out of or relating to this Agreement or its engagement under this Agreement.

 

(b)          In making any determination concerning Indemnitee’s right to indemnification, there will be a presumption that Indemnitee has satisfied the applicable standard of conduct, and Inovalon may overcome such presumption only by its adducing clear and convincing evidence to the contrary. Any determination by Inovalon (including without limitation by its directors or its stockholders) concerning Indemnitee’s right to indemnification that is adverse to Indemnitee may be challenged by Indemnitee in the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware.  No determination by Inovalon (including without limitation by its directors or its stockholders) that Indemnitee has not satisfied any applicable standard of conduct will be a defense to any Claim by Indemnitee for indemnification or reimbursement or advance payment of Expenses by Inovalon hereunder or create a presumption that Indemnitee has not met any applicable standard of conduct.

 

(c)           If the person or persons so empowered to make a determination under Section 5(b) fail to make the requested determination within ninety (90) days after any judgment, order, settlement, dismissal, arbitration award, conviction, acceptance of a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent , or other disposition or partial disposition of any Proceeding

 



 

or any other event that could enable Inovalon to determine Indemnitee’s entitlement to indemnification, the requisite determination that Indemnitee is entitled to indemnification will be deemed to have been made .

 

6.      NOTIFICATION AND DEFENSE OF CLAIM.

 

As promptly as practicable, but in any event not later than thirty (30) days after receipt by Indemnitee of notice of the commencement of any Proceeding, Indemnitee will, if a claim in respect thereof is to be made against Inovalon under this Agreement, notify Inovalon of the commencement thereof, provided that the failure so to notify Inovalon will not relieve Inovalon from any liability which it may have to Indemnitee under this Agreement or otherwise. With respect to any such Proceeding as to which Indemnitee notifies Inovalon of the commencement thereof:

 

(a)          Inovalon will be entitled to participate in the Proceeding at its own expense;

 

(b)          except as otherwise provided below, Inovalon may, at its option and jointly with any other indemnifying party similarly notified and electing to assume such defense, assume the defense thereof, with counsel reasonably satisfactory to Indemnitee. After notice from Inovalon to Indemnitee of its election to assume the defense thereof, Inovalon will not be liable to Indemnitee under this Agreement for any Expenses subsequently incurred by Indemnitee in connection with the defense thereof except for reasonable costs of investigation or otherwise as provided below. Indemnitee will have the right to employ separate counsel in such Proceeding but the Expenses of such counsel incurred after notice from Inovalon of its assumption of the defense thereof will be at the expense of Indemnitee;   provided ,   however , that the Expenses of Indemnitee’s separate counsel will be borne by Inovalon if (i) the employment of separate counsel by Indemnitee has been authorized by Inovalon and Inovalon has agreed in writing to bear such Expenses, (ii) Indemnitee reasonably will have concluded that there may be a conflict of interest between Inovalon and Indemnitee in the conduct of the defense of such Proceeding, or (iii) Inovalon in fact will not have employed counsel to assume the defense of such Proceeding or will at any time have ceased to actively pursue the defense thereof. Inovalon will not be entitled to assume the defense of any Proceeding brought by or on behalf of Inovalon or as to which Indemnitee will have made the conclusion provided for in clause (ii) above; and

 

(c)           Inovalon will not be liable to indemnify Indemnitee under this Agreement for any amounts paid in settlement of any Proceeding effected without its written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Inovalon will be permitted to settle any Proceeding except that it will not settle any Proceeding in any manner that would impose any penalty or limitation on Indemnitee without Indemnitee’s written consent, which may be given or withheld in Indemnitee’s sole discretion.

 

7.      EXPENSES.

 

Promptly following a request by Indemnitee for the advancement of Expenses, Inovalon will advance, prior to the final disposition of any Proceeding, all Expenses incurred by Indemnitee in connection with such Proceeding (through the final disposition of any such Proceeding from which all rights of appeal have either been exhausted or have lapsed) Indemnitee will qualify for

 



 

advances upon the execution and delivery to Inovalon of this Agreement, which will constitute an undertaking providing that Indemnitee undertakes to the fullest extent permitted by law to repay the advance (without interest) if and to the extent that Indemnitee is ultimately determined by a court of competent jurisdiction in a final judgment, not subject to appeal, that Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified by Inovalon. No other form of undertaking will be required other than the execution of this Agreement. Any advances and undertakings to repay under this Section will be unsecured and interest free. Prior to an ultimate determination by a court of competent jurisdiction in a final judgment, not subject to appeal, that Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified by Inovalon, Inovalon may not refuse to advance Expenses to Indemnitee under this Agreement on the grounds that Indemnitee has not satisfied any applicable standard of conduct or is not ultimately entitled to be indemnified, held harmless or exonerated under the other provisions of this Agreement.  Advances will be made without regard to Indemnitee’s ability to repay. Such advances are intended to be an obligation of Inovalon to Indemnitee hereunder and will in no event be deemed to be a personal loan. Without limiting the generality or effect of the foregoing, within thirty days after any request by Indemnitee, Inovalon will, in accordance with such request (but without duplication), (a) pay such Expenses on behalf of Indemnitee, (b) advance to Indemnitee funds in an amount sufficient to pay such Expenses, or (c) reimburse Indemnitee for such Expenses.

 

8.      ENFORCEMENT.

 

Any right to indemnification or advances granted by this Agreement to Indemnitee will be enforceable by or on behalf of Indemnitee in any court of competent jurisdiction if (a) the claim for indemnification or advances is denied, in whole or in part, or (b) no disposition of such claim is made within ninety (90) days of request therefor. Indemnitee, in such enforcement action, if successful in whole or in part, also will be entitled to be paid the Expense of prosecuting Indemnitee’s claim. Neither the failure of Inovalon (including its Board of Directors or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such enforcement action that indemnification of Indemnitee is proper in the circumstances, nor an actual determination by Inovalon (including its Board of Directors or its stockholders) that such indemnification is improper will be a defense to the action or create a presumption that Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification under this Agreement or otherwise.

 

9.      INSURANCE.

 

(a)          Unless otherwise approved by the Board of Directors prior to a Change in Control, Inovalon will obtain and maintain during the term of this Agreement directors’ and officers’ liability insurance (“D&O Insurance”) with respect to which Indemnitee will be named as an insured. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, Inovalon will not be obligated to indemnify Indemnitee for Expenses that have been previously paid directly to Indemnitee by D&O Insurance; but payment made to Indemnitee under an insurance policy purchased and maintained by Indemnitee at Indemnitee’s own expense of any amounts otherwise indemnifiable or obligated to be made under this Agreement will not reduce Inovalon’s obligations to Indemnitee under this Agreement, except to the extent of the amounts actually recovered by the Indemnitee from the personal insurance policy that the Indemnitee does not otherwise repay or reimburse on the terms of such insurance policy. If Inovalon has D&O Insurance in effect at the time Inovalon receives from Indemnitee any notice of the commencement of a Proceeding,

 



 

Inovalon will give prompt notice of the commencement of such Proceeding to the insurers in accordance with the procedures set forth in the policy. Inovalon will thereafter take all reasonably necessary action to cause such insurers to pay, on behalf of Indemnitee, all amounts payable as a result of such Proceeding in accordance with the terms of such policy.

 

(b)          In the event that (i) the D&O Insurance policy is renewed but the renewed policy does not provide for prior act’s coverage, (ii) Inovalon obtains a new D&O Insurance policy for any period following the termination of the prior D&O Insurance, and such new D&O Insurance policy does not provide for prior act’s coverage, or (iii) Inovalon does not renew the D&O Insurance policy or obtain a new D&O Insurance policy following the termination of a D&O Insurance policy, then unless otherwise determined by the Board of Directors, Inovalon will add to the D&O Insurance policy or the applicable successor D&O Insurance policy a run-off endorsement (the “Endorsement”) on the existing D&O Insurance policy (and in the case of (iii) above, do so prior to the termination of the existing D&O Insurance policy if necessary) or the applicable successor D&O Insurance policy subject to the same terms and conditions in all material respects. Unless otherwise approved by the Board of Directors prior to the date on which the Endorsement is obtained, the Endorsement will be non-cancelable and will provide for at least a six-year extended coverage period for any and all claims covered under the D&O Insurance policy. Inovalon will pay all premiums, commissions and other costs or charges incurred in obtaining the Endorsement.

 

(c)           In the event of a Change of Control (other than, at the discretion of a majority of the Board) or Inovalon’s becoming insolvent, Inovalon will maintain in force any and all insurance policies then maintained by Inovalon in providing insurance—directors’ and officers’ liability, fiduciary, employment practices or otherwise—in respect of the individual directors and officers of Inovalon and its affiliates, or will replace all such policies with insurance coverage substantially comparable in scope and amount as the expiring policies, in each case for a fixed period of six years thereafter.

 

10.       SUBROGATION.

 

In the event of payment under this Agreement, Inovalon will be subrogated to the extent of such payment to all of the rights of recovery of Indemnitee, who will execute all documents required and will do all acts that may be reasonably necessary to secure such rights, including the execution of such documents necessary to enable Inovalon effectively to bring suit to enforce such rights.

 

Inovalon’s obligation to indemnify, hold harmless, exonerate or advance Expenses hereunder to Indemnitee who is or was serving at the request of Inovalon as a director, officer, trustee, partner, managing member, fiduciary, employee or agent of any other enterprise will be reduced by any amount Indemnitee has actually received as indemnification, hold harmless or exoneration payments or advancement of expenses from such enterprise.  Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary, (i) Indemnitee will have no obligation to reduce, offset, allocate, pursue or apportion any indemnification, hold harmless, exoneration, advancement, contribution or insurance coverage among multiple parties possessing such duties to Indemnitee prior to Inovalon’s satisfaction and performance of all its obligations under this Agreement, and (ii) Inovalon will perform fully its obligations under this Agreement without

 



 

regard to whether Indemnitee holds, may pursue or has pursued any indemnification, advancement, hold harmless, exoneration, contribution or insurance coverage rights against any person or entity other than Inovalon.

 

11.       CONTRIBUTION.

 

To the fullest extent permissible under applicable law, if the indemnification provided for in this Agreement is unavailable to the Indemnitee, Inovalon, in lieu of indemnifying the Indemnitee, will contribute to Indemnitee’s Expenses in connection with any claim relating to any Proceeding, in such proportion as is deemed fair and reasonable in light of all of the circumstances of such proceeding in order to reflect:

 

(a)          the relative benefits received by Inovalon and Indemnitee as a result of the events and transactions giving rise to such Proceeding; and

 

(b)          the relative fault of Indemnitee and Inovalon (and its other directors, officers, employees and agents) in connection with the circumstances, events or transactions that gave rise to the Proceeding.

 

12.       NON-EXCLUSIVITY AND SURVIVAL OF RIGHTS.

 

(a)          All agreements and obligations of Inovalon contained in this Agreement will continue during the period Indemnitee is a director, officer, employee or other agent of Inovalon (or is or was serving at the request of Inovalon as a director, officer, employee or other agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise) and will continue thereafter so long as Indemnitee will be subject to any possible Proceeding. The benefits hereunder will inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors and administrators and assigns of Indemnitee. The rights conferred on Indemnitee by this Agreement will not be exclusive of any other right Indemnitee may have or hereafter acquire under any statute, provision of the Certificate or Bylaws, agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors, or otherwise, both as to action in Indemnitee’s official capacity and as to action in another capacity while holding office.

 

(b)          The obligations and duties of Inovalon to Indemnitee under this Agreement will be binding on Inovalon and its successors and assigns until terminated in accordance with its terms. Inovalon will require any successor (whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) to Inovalon or to all or substantially all of the business or assets of Inovalon, expressly to assume and agree to perform this Agreement and to indemnify Indemnitee to the fullest extent permitted by law.

 

(c)           No amendment, alteration or repeal of this Agreement or of any provision hereof will limit or restrict any right of Indemnitee under this Agreement in respect of any action taken or omitted by Indemnitee prior to such amendment, alteration or repeal. To the extent that a change in the Code, whether by statute or judicial decision, permits greater indemnification or advancement of Expenses than would be afforded currently under the Certificate, Bylaws and this Agreement, it is the intent of the parties hereto that Indemnitee will enjoy by this Agreement the greater benefits so afforded by such change. No right or remedy conferred in this Agreement is intended to be exclusive of

 



 

any other right or remedy, and every other right and remedy will be cumulative and in addition to every other right and remedy given hereunder or now or hereafter existing at law or in equity or otherwise. The assertion or employment of any right or remedy hereunder, or otherwise, by Indemnitee will not prevent the concurrent assertion or employment of any other right or remedy by Indemnitee.

 

13.       SEVERABILITY.

 

Each of the provisions of this Agreement is a separate and distinct agreement and independent of the others, so that if any provision is held to be invalid for any reason, such invalidity or unenforceability will not affect the validity or enforceability of the other provisions. Furthermore, if this Agreement is invalidated in its entirety on any ground, then Inovalon nevertheless will indemnify Indemnitee to the fullest extent provided by the Certificate, Bylaws, the Code or any other applicable law.

 

14.       GOVERNING LAW.

 

This Agreement will be governed exclusively by and construed according to the laws of the State of Delaware, as applied to contracts between Delaware residents entered into and to be performed entirely within Delaware.

 

15.       AMENDMENT, MODIFICATION, WAIVER AND TERMINATION.

 

No amendment, modification, termination or cancellation of this Agreement will be effective unless signed in writing by both parties hereto;   provided ,   however , that Inovalon will have the right to amend, modify, terminate or replace this Agreement if Inovalon amends, modifies, terminates or replaces its form of Indemnification Agreement for directors, officers, employees and other agents of Inovalon;   provided ,   further , that such amended or modified agreement or such new agreement does not diminish in any material respect the rights of Indemnitee hereunder. No waiver of any of the provisions of this Agreement will be deemed or will constitute a waiver of any other provision hereof (whether or not similar) nor will such waiver constitute a continuing waiver.

 

16.       ENTIRE AGREEMENT.

 

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior agreements, understandings and negotiations, written and oral, between the parties with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement; provided ,   however , that this Agreement is a supplement to and in furtherance of the Certificate, Bylaws, the Code and any other applicable law, and will not be deemed a substitute therefore, nor to diminish or abrogate any rights of Indemnitee thereunder.

 

17.       MONETARY DAMAGES INSUFFICIENT / SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE .

 

The parties agree that a monetary remedy for breach of this Agreement may be inadequate, impracticable, and difficult to prove and that such breach may cause Indemnitee irreparable harm.  Indemnitee may therefore enforce this Agreement by seeking injunctive relief and specific performance, without any necessity of showing actual damage or irreparable harm (since actual and irreparable harm will result if Inovalon does not specifically perform its obligations

 



 

under this Agreement).  Seeking injunctive relief or specific performance does not be preclude Indemnitee from seeking or obtaining any other relief to which Indemnitee may be entitled.  Indemnitee is entitled to specific performance and injunctive relief, including temporary restraining orders, preliminary injunctions and permanent injunctions, without the necessity of posting bonds or other undertakings in connection therewith.  Inovalon acknowledges that in the absence of a waiver, a bond or undertaking may be required of Indemnitee by the applicable court, and Inovalon hereby waives any such requirement of a bond or undertaking.

 

18.       DETERMINATION OF GOOD FAITH/SAFE HARBOR.

 

For purposes of any determination of “good faith,” to the extent permitted under the Code, Indemnitee will be presumed to have acted in good faith if Indemnitee’s action is based on reliance on the records or books of account of Inovalon and its affiliates, including financial statements, or on information supplied to Indemnitee by the officers of Inovalon or its affiliates in the course of their duties, or on the advice of legal counsel for Inovalon or its affiliates or for the Board or counsel selected by any committee of the Board or on information or records given or reports made to Inovalon or its affiliates by an independent certified public accountant or by an appraiser, investment banker, compensation consultant, or other expert selected with reasonable care by Inovalon or its affiliates or by the Board or any committee of the Board.   The provisions of this Section will not be deemed to be exclusive or to limit in any way the other circumstances in which Indemnitee may be deemed to have met the applicable standard of conduct.  Whether or not the foregoing provisions of this Section are satisfied, it will in any event be presumed that Indemnitee has at all times acted in good faith and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of Inovalon.

 

19.       INTERPRETATION OF AGREEMENT.

 

It is understood that the parties hereto intend this Agreement to be interpreted and enforced so as to provide indemnification to Indemnitee to the fullest extent now or hereafter permitted by law.

 



 

20.       IDENTICAL COUNTERPARTS.

 

This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed for all purposes to be an original but all of which together will constitute this Agreement.

 

21.       HEADINGS.

 

The headings of the Sections of this Agreement are inserted for convenience only and are not part of this Agreement or intended to affect the interpretation of this Agreement.

 

22.       NOTICES.

 

All notices, demands, and other communications required or permitted under this Agreement will be made in writing and will be deemed duly given if delivered by hand, against receipt, or mailed, postage prepaid, certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, and addressed to the parties at the Notice Addresses set forth on the signature page at the end of this Agreement.

 

Notice of change of address will be effective only when done in accordance with this Section.  All notices complying with this Section will be deemed received on the date of delivery or on the third business day after proper mailing.

 

[Signatures on Next Page]

 



 

Signed and delivered by the parties as of [                      ]:

 

 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.

“Inovalon”

 

 

By:

 

 

Printed Name:

 

Title:

 

 

Notice Address:

4321 Collington Road

Bowie, Maryland  20716

Attn:  Legal & Compliance Department

Tel:  301-809-4000

Email:  legal@inovalon.com

 

INDEMNITEE:

 

 

By:

 

 

Printed Name:

 

Notice Address:

[ADDRESS]

[ADDRESS]

Tel:  [CONTACT TEL]

Email:  [CONTACT EMAIL]

 




EXHIBIT 10.2

 

INOVALON, INC.

 

AMENDED & RESTATED
LONG-TERM INCENTIVE PLAN

 

As Adopted by the Board of Directors
and Stockholders

 

December 31, 2006
(as last amended October 7, 2010)

 

ARTICLE 1.
INTRODUCTION

 

Section 1.1.                Establishment .  Inovalon, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), established the Inovalon 2007 Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “Plan”) for certain employees, directors and consultants of the Company on December 31, 2006, and hereby amends and restates such Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “Plan”).  The Plan reflects the four-for-one stock split of the Common Stock effected on December 26, 2007.

 

Section 1.2.                Purpose .  The Plan is intended to recognize the contributions made to the Company by employees (including employees who are members of the Board of Directors) of the Company or any Affiliate to provide such persons with additional incentive to devote themselves to the future success of the Company or an Affiliate, and to improve the ability of the Company or an Affiliate to attract, retain and motivate individuals upon whom the Company’s sustained growth and financial success depend.  Through the Plan, the Company will provide such persons with an opportunity to acquire or increase their proprietary interest in the Company, and to align their interest with the interests of Stockholders, through receipt of rights to acquire the Company’s common stock, par value $0.000025 per Share (the “Common Stock”), and through the transfer or issuance of Common Stock or other Awards.  In addition, the Plan is intended as an additional incentive to directors of the Company who are not employees of the Company or an Affiliate to serve on the Board of Directors and to devote themselves to the future success of the Company by providing them with an opportunity to acquire or increase their proprietary interest in the Company through the receipt of rights to acquire Common Stock.  Furthermore, the Plan may be used to encourage consultants and advisors of the Company to further the success of the Company.

 

Section 1.3.                Effective Date .  The Plan was originally effective as of December 31, 2006, the date on which it was first adopted by the Board and the Stockholders.  No ISO may be granted under the Plan after date 10 years from effective date.

 



 

ARTICLE 2.
DEFINITIONS

 

Unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, the following terms will have the following meanings:

 

“Affiliate” means a corporation which is a parent corporation or a subsidiary corporation with respect to the Company within the meaning of Section 424(e) or (f) of the Code, or any successor provision.

 

“Award” means a transfer of Common Stock made pursuant to the terms of the Plan or the grant to a person of performance units, “phantom” units, SARs or other rights containing such terms, benefits or restrictions as specified by the Committee in the Award Agreement.

 

“Award Agreement” means the agreement between the Company and a Grantee with respect to an Award made pursuant to the Plan.

 

“Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

 

“Change of Control” has the meaning as set forth in Article 9 of the Plan.

 

“Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or any successor statute, and the rules and regulations issued pursuant to that statute or any successor statute.

 

“Committee” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.1(a) of the Plan.

 

“Common Stock” has the meaning set forth in Section 1.2 of the Plan.

 

“Company” means Inovalon, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

 

“Disability” means the inability of a Participant to perform the essential duties of his or her position with the Company, as determined in good faith by the Committee.

 

“Employee” means an employee of the Company or an Affiliate.

 

“Fair Market Value” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.3 of the Plan.

 

“Grantee” means a person to whom an Award has been granted pursuant to the Plan, which Award has not expired, terminated or been forfeited or repurchased.

 

“ISO” means an Option granted under the Plan which qualifies and is intended to qualify as an “incentive stock option” within the meaning of Section 422(b) of the Code.

 

“Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or any successor statute, and the rules and regulations issued pursuant to that statute or any successor statute.

 

2



 

“Non-Employee Director” means a member of the Board who is a “non-employee director” as that term is defined in paragraph (b)(3) of Rule 16b-3 and an “outside director” as that term is defined in Treasury Regulations Section 1.162-27 promulgated under the Code.

 

“Non-Employee Director Initial Option” or “Annual Option” means an Option pursuant to Section 8.1 or 8.2, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 5.2, granted to a Non-Employee Director.”

 

“Non-qualified Stock Option” means an Option granted under the Plan which is not intended to qualify, or otherwise does not qualify, as an ISO.

 

“Option” means either an ISO or a Non-qualified Stock Option granted under the Plan.

 

“Optionee” means a person to whom an Option has been granted under the Plan, which Option has not been exercised and has not expired or terminated.

 

“Option Agreement” means the document described in Section 6.1 of the Plan, which sets forth the terms and conditions of each grant of Options.

 

“Option Price” means the price at which Shares may be purchased upon exercise of an Option, as calculated pursuant to Section 6.3 of the Plan.

 

“Participant” means an Optionee who receives Options under this Plan or a Grantee who receives an Award under this Plan.

 

“Public Offering” means the initial public offering of the Company’s stock.  The provisions of the Plan that refer to a Public Offering, or that refer to or are applicable to Section 16 Officers or Section 162 of the Code, will be effective, if at all, upon the initial registration of such stock under Section 12(g) of the Exchange Act, and will remain effective thereafter for so long as such stock is so registered.

 

“Restriction Period” means the period of time during which an Award will remain subject to restrictions, as set forth in the Award Agreement.

 

“Rule 16b-3” means Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act, or any successor rule.

 

“SAR” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.2(a) of the Plan.

 

“Section 16 Officers” means any person who is an “officer” within the meaning of Rule 16a-1(f) promulgated under the Exchange Act or any successor rule, and who is subject to the reporting requirements under Section 16 of the Exchange Act with respect to the Company’s Common Stock.

 

3



 

“Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or any successor statute, and the rules and regulations issued pursuant to that statute or any successor statute.

 

“Shares” means the shares of Common Stock of the Company which are the subject of Options or granted as Awards under the Plan.

 

ARTICLE 3.
PLAN ADMINISTRATION

 

Section 3.1.                Administration of the Plan .

 

(a)      The Plan will be administered and interpreted by the Board or by a committee appointed from time to time by the Board, which will serve at the pleasure of the Board and may resign at any time upon written notice to the Board.  Any such committee designated by the Board, and the Board itself in its administrative capacity with respect to the Plan, is referred to as the “Committee.”

 

(b)      After a Public Offering of the Company’s stock, the Plan will be administered by a Committee, which may consist of Non-Employee Directors; provided, however, that to the extent that the Committee is empowered to grant options to Section 16 Officers or persons whose compensation might have limits on deductibility under Code Section 162(m), each member of the Committee designated by the Board will be a Non-Employee Director.  The Board may ratify or approve any grants as it deems appropriate.

 

Section 3.2.                Authority of the Committee .  The Committee will have the power and authority to (i) interpret the Plan, (ii) make factual determinations, (iii) adopt, amend and revoke rules and regulations for the administration of the Plan and for the conduct of its business as it deems necessary and advisable, that are not inconsistent with the express terms of the Plan including, without limitation, rules and interpretations to determine the number of shares remaining available for issuance under the Plan, and (iv) waive requirements relating to formalities or other matters that do not either modify the substance of the rights intended to be granted by Options and Awards or constitute a material amendment for any purpose under the Code.  Any such actions by the Committee will be final, binding and conclusive on all parties in interest.  All powers of the Committee will be executed in its sole discretion, in the best interest of the Company, not as a fiduciary, and in keeping with the objectives of the Plan.  For the sake of clarification and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, grants and Awards need not be uniform as to similarly situated individuals.

 

Section 3.3.                Amendment of Options and Awards .  Subject to the provisions of the Plan, the Committee will have the right to amend any Option Agreement or Award Agreement issued to a Participant, subject to the Participant’s consent if such amendment is not favorable to the Participant or if such amendment has the effect of changing an ISO to a Non-Qualified Stock Option; provided, however, that the consent of the Participant will not be required for any amendment made pursuant to Section 6.6(a)(iii) or Article 9 of the Plan, as applicable.

 

4



 

ARTICLE 4.
ELIGIBILITY

 

All Employees, members of the Board and consultants and advisors to the Company will be eligible to receive Options and Awards hereunder, provided that only Employees will be eligible to receive ISOs.  Consultants and advisors will be eligible only if they render bona fide services to the Company unrelated to the offer or sale of securities.  The Committee, in its sole discretion, will determine whether an individual qualifies as an Employee.

 

ARTICLE 5.
SHARES SUBJECT TO THE PLAN

 

Section 5.1.                Shares Authorized .  Subject to adjustment as provided below, the aggregate maximum number of Shares for which Awards or Options may be granted pursuant to the Plan is 2,055,000.  The Shares will be issued from authorized and unissued Common Stock or Common Stock held in or hereafter acquired for the treasury of the Company.  The Committee may adopt reasonable counting procedures to ensure appropriate counting, avoid double counting (as, for example, in the case of tandem or substitute Awards) and make adjustments if the number of shares of Common Stock actually delivered differs from the number of shares previously counted in connection with an Option or Award.  Shares subject to an Option or Award that is cancelled, expired, forfeited, settled in cash or otherwise terminated without a delivery of shares to the Participant will again be available for future awards under this Plan, and shares withheld in payment of the exercise price or taxes relating to an Option or Award, and shares equal to the number surrendered in payment of any exercise price or taxes relating to an Option or Award shall be deemed to constitute shares not delivered to the Participant and shall be deemed to again be available for future awards under this Plan.  In addition, in the case of any Option or Award granted in substitution for an award of a company or business acquired by the Company or any Affiliate, shares issued or issuable in connection with such substitute Option or Award shall not be counted against the number of shares reserved under the Plan, but shall be available under the Plan by virtue of the Company’s assumption of the plan or arrangement of the acquired company or business.  This Section 5.1 shall apply to the number of shares reserved and available for ISOs only to the extent consistent with applicable regulations relating to ISOs under the Code.  The Company, during the term of this Plan, shall at all times reserve and keep available such number of shares of Common Stock as shall be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of this Plan.

 

Section 5.2.                 Adjustments on Changes in Capitalization .

 

(a)      Subject to any required action by the stockholders of the Company, in the event of any merger, reorganization, consolidation, recapitalization, dividend (other than a dividend or its equivalent which is credited to a Participant or a regular cash dividend), stock split or other change in corporate structure affecting the Common Stock, the Committee shall substitute or adjust the maximum aggregate number of shares of Common Stock which may be issued under this Plan and the number and exercise price of shares of Common Stock subject to outstanding Options and Awards as it determines to be appropriate, in its sole discretion, to proportionately reflect such capitalization change; provided, however, that the number of shares of Common Stock subject to any Option or Award shall always be a whole number; and

 

5



 

provided, further, that no adjustment or action described in this Section 5.2(a) or in any other provision of this Plan shall be authorized to the extent that such adjustment or action would result in the imposition on any Participant of an excise tax pursuant to Code Section 409A(a)(1)(B).  Unless the Committee makes other provisions for the equitable settlement of outstanding Options and Awards, if the Company will be reorganized, consolidated, or merged with another corporation, or if all or substantially all of the assets of the Company will be sold or exchanged, a Participant will at the time of issuance of the stock under such corporate event be entitled to receive, upon the exercise of his or her Option or Award, as the case may be, the same number and kind of shares of stock or the same amount of property, cash or securities as the Participant would have been entitled to receive upon the occurrence of any such corporate event as if the Participant had been, immediately prior to such event, the holder of the number of shares covered by his or her Option or Award, as the case may be.

 

(b)      Any adjustment under this Section 5.2 in the number of Shares subject to Options will apply proportionately to only the unexercised portion of any Option granted hereunder.  If a fraction of a Share would result from any such adjustment, the fraction will be eliminated, unless the Committee otherwise determines.

 

(c)       The Committee will have authority to determine the adjustments to be made under this Section, and any such determination by the Committee will be final, binding and conclusive.

 

ARTICLE 6.
STOCK OPTIONS

 

Section 6.1.                Option Agreements and Terms .  Grants of Options under the Plan may be in the form of a Non-qualified Stock Option, an ISO or a combination thereof, at the discretion of the Committee.  If any Option is determined for any reason not to qualify as an incentive stock option within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, such Option will be treated as a Non-qualified Stock Option for all purposes under the provisions of the Plan.  Options granted pursuant to the Plan will be evidenced by the Option Agreements in such form as approved by the Committee from time to time, which Option Agreements will comply with and be subject to the following terms and conditions and such other terms and conditions as the Committee requires from time to time which are not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan.

 

Section 6.2.                Number of Option Shares .  Each Option Agreement will state the number of Shares to which it pertains.  An Optionee may receive more than one Option, which may include Options which are intended to be ISOs and Options which are not intended to be ISOs, but only on the terms and subject to the conditions and restrictions of the Plan.

 

Section 6.3.                Option Price .  Each Option Agreement will state the Option Price.  The Option Price for any Option will be at least 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Shares on the date the Option is granted as determined by the Committee in accordance with this Section 6.3; provided, however, that if an ISO is granted to an Optionee who then owns, directly or by attribution under Section 424(d) of the Code, shares possessing more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, then, to the extent required by Section 424(d) of the Code, the Option Price will be at least 110% of the Fair Market

 

6



 

Value of the Shares on the date the Option is granted.  If the Common Stock is traded in a public market, then the “Fair Market Value” per share will be: (i) if the Common Stock is listed on a national securities exchange or included in the NASDAQ System, the last reported sale price thereof on the relevant date, (ii) if the Common Stock is not so listed or included, the mean between the last reported “bid” and “asked” prices thereof on the relevant date, as reported on NASDAQ, or (iii) if not so reported, as reported by the National Daily Quotation Bureau, Inc. or as reported in a customary financial reporting service, as applicable and as the Committee determines.  If the Common Stock is not traded in a public market, then the “Fair Market Value” per share will be as the Committee determines in its sole discretion.

 

Section 6.4.                Exercise .  Options will become exercisable in accordance with such terms and conditions, consistent with the Plan, as may be determined by the Committee and set forth in the Option Agreement.  No Option will be deemed to have been exercised prior to the receipt by the Company of written notice of such exercise and, unless arrangements satisfactory to the Company have been made for payment through a broker in accordance with procedures permitted by rules or regulations of the Federal Reserve Board, receipt of payment in full of the Option Price for the Shares to be purchased.  Each such notice will specify the number of Shares to be purchased and, unless the Shares are covered by a then current registration statement or a notification under Regulation A under the Securities Act, will contain the Optionee’s acknowledgment, in form and substance satisfactory to the Company, that (i) such Shares are being purchased for investment and not for distribution or resale (other than a distribution or resale which, in the opinion of counsel satisfactory to the Company, may be made without violating the registration provisions of the Securities Act), (ii) the Optionee has been advised and understands that (A) the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act and are “restricted securities” within the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act and are subject to restrictions on transfer, and (B) the Company is under no obligation to register the Shares under the Securities Act or to take any action which would make available to the Optionee any exemption from such registration, (iii) such Shares may not be transferred without compliance with all applicable Federal and state securities laws, and (iv) an appropriate legend referring to the foregoing restrictions on transfer and any other restrictions imposed under the Option Agreements may be endorsed on the certificates.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Company determines that the issuance of Shares should be delayed pending registration under Federal or state securities laws, the receipt of an opinion of counsel satisfactory to the Company that an appropriate exemption from such registration is available, the listing or inclusion of the Shares on any securities exchange or an automated quotation system or the consent or approval of any governmental regulatory body whose consent or approval is necessary in connection with the issuance of such Shares, the Company may defer exercise of any Option granted hereunder until any of the events described in this sentence has occurred.

 

Section 6.5.                Payment Upon Exercise .  Subject to the terms of the applicable Option Agreement, an Optionee shall pay for Shares (i) in cash, (ii) by certified or cashier’s check payable to the order of the Company, or (iii) by such other mode of payment as the Committee may approve, including, without limitation, the Optionee’s note in form approved by the Committee and payment through a broker in accordance with procedures permitted by rules or regulations of the Federal Reserve Board.  In furtherance of the foregoing, the Committee may authorize loans by the Company to Optionee in connection with the exercise of an Option, upon such terms and conditions as the Committee, in its sole discretion, deems appropriate; provided,

 

7



 

however, that the Committee will not authorize any such loans that may be prohibited by law.  The Optionee may also exercise the Option in any manner contemplated by Section 7.2.  Furthermore, the Committee may provide in an Option Agreement that payment may be made in whole or in part in shares of the Company’s Common Stock held by the Optionee), including Common Stock issued under this Plan, or by reduction in the number of shares of Common Stock issuable upon such Option exercise, based on the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date of the payment.  If payment is made in whole or in part in shares of the Company’s Common Stock owned by the Optionee, then the Optionee shall deliver to the Company certificates registered in the name of such Optionee representing the shares owned by such Optionee, free of all liens, claims and encumbrances of every kind and having an aggregate Fair Market Value on the date of delivery that is at least as great as the Option Price of the Shares (or relevant portion thereof) with respect to which such Option is to be exercised by the payment in shares of Common Stock, endorsed in blank or accompanied by stock powers duly endorsed in blank by the Optionee.  In the event that certificates for shares of the Company’s Common Stock delivered to the Company represent a number of shares in excess of the number of shares required to make payment for the Option Price of the Shares (or relevant portion thereof) with respect to which such Option is to be exercised by payment in shares of Common Stock, the stock certificate or certificates issued to the Optionee will represent (x) the Shares in respect of which payment is made, and (y) such excess number of shares.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Committee may impose from time to time such limitations and prohibitions on the use of shares of the Common Stock to exercise an Option as it deems appropriate, including, without limitation, such limitations and prohibitions necessary or advisable in order to avoid adverse accounting consequences to the Company with respect to the Option.

 

Section 6.6.                Termination of Options; Death and Disability .

 

(a)      No Option will be exercisable after the first to occur of the following:

 

(i)         Expiration of the Option term specified in the Option Agreement, which, in the case of an ISO, will not occur after (1) ten years from the date of grant, or (2) five years from the date of grant if the Optionee on the date of grant owns, directly or by attribution under Section 424(d) of the Code, shares possessing more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or of an Affiliate;

 

(ii)        Except to the extent otherwise provided in an Optionee’s Option Agreement, a finding by the Committee, after full consideration of the facts presented on behalf of both the Company and the Optionee, that the Optionee has been engaged in disloyalty to the Company or an Affiliate, including, without limitation, fraud, embezzlement, theft, commission of a felony or proven dishonesty in the course of employment or service, or has disclosed trade secrets or confidential information of the Company or an Affiliate.  In such event, in addition to immediate termination of the Option, the Optionee shall automatically forfeit all Shares for which the Company has not yet delivered the share certificates upon refund by the Company of the Option Price.  Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Company may withhold delivery of share certificates pending the resolution of any inquiry that could lead to a finding resulting in a forfeiture;

 

8



 

(iii)       The date, if any, set by the Committee as an accelerated expiration date in the event of the liquidation or dissolution of the Company;

 

(iv)       The occurrence of such other event or events as may be set forth in this Plan or the Option Agreement as causing an accelerated expiration of the Option; or

 

(v)        Except as otherwise set forth in the Option Agreement and subject to the foregoing provisions, 30 days after the Optionee’s employment or service with the Company or its Affiliates terminates for any reason other than Disability or death or six months after such termination due to Optionee’s Disability or death.  With respect to this Sections 6.6(a)(v), the only Options that may be exercised during the 30-day or six-month period, as the case may be, are Options which were exercisable on the last date of such employment or service and not Options which, if the Optionee were still employed or rendering service during such 30-day or six-month period, would become exercisable, unless the Option Agreement specifically provides to the contrary or the Committee otherwise approves.  The terms of an executive severance agreement or other agreement between the Company and an Optionee, approved by the Committee or the Board, whether entered into prior or subsequent to the grant of an Option, which provide for Option exercise dates later than those set forth in this Section 6.6(a)(v) will be deemed to be Option terms approved by the Committee and consented to by the Optionee.

 

(b)      Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Committee may extend the period during which all or any portion of an Option may be exercised to a date no later than the Option term specified in the Option Agreement pursuant to Section 6.6(a)(i); provided, however, that any change pursuant to this Section 6.6(b) which would cause an ISO to become a Non-qualified Stock Option may be made only with the consent of the Optionee.

 

(c)       Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan or an Option Agreement, an ISO will be treated as a Non-qualified Stock Option to the extent such ISO is exercised at any time after the expiration of the time period permitted under the Code for the exercise of an ISO.

 

Section 6.7.                Transfers .  Except as otherwise provided in this Section 6.7, no Option granted under the Plan may be transferred, except by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, and, during the lifetime of the person to whom an Option is granted, such Option may be exercised only by the Optionee. Notwithstanding the foregoing, an Option, other than an ISO, will be transferrable pursuant to a “domestic relations order” as defined in the Code or Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act, or the rules thereunder, and also will be transferrable, without payment of consideration, to (a) immediate family members of the holder (i.e., spouse or former spouse, parents, issue, including adopted and “step” issue, or siblings), (b) trusts for the benefit of immediate family members, (c) partnerships whose only partners are such family members, and (d) to any transferee permitted by a rule adopted by the Committee or approved by the Committee in an individual case; provided, however, that if the Optionee is a party to the Stockholders’ Agreement referenced in Section 10.6 of this Plan, the provisions of such Stockholders’ Agreement regarding transfer of Common Stock shall control. Any transferee will be subject to all of the conditions set forth in the Option prior to its transfer.

 

9



 

Section 6.8.                Limitation on ISO Grants .  To the extent that the aggregate fair market value of the shares of Common Stock (determined at the time the ISO is granted) with respect to which ISOs under all incentive stock option plans of the Company or its Affiliates are exercisable for the first time by the Optionee during any calendar year exceeds $100,000, such ISOs will, to the extent of such excess, be treated as Non-qualified Stock Options.

 

Section 6.9.                Other Provisions .  Subject to the provisions of the Plan, the Option Agreements will contain such other provisions, including, without limitation, provisions authorizing the Committee to accelerate the exercisability of all or any portion of an Option granted pursuant to the Plan, additional restrictions upon the exercise of the Option or additional limitations upon the term of the Option, as the Committee deems advisable.

 

ARTICLE 7.
RESTRICTED STOCK AND OTHER AWARDS

 

Section 7.1.                Terms and Conditions of Awards .  Awards granted pursuant to the Plan will be evidenced by written Award Agreements in such form as approved by the Committee from time to time, which Award Agreements will comply with and be subject to the following terms and conditions and such other terms and conditions, including performance goals and objectives, which the Committee requires from time to time which are not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan.

 

(a)      Number of Shares .   Each Award Agreement will state the number of Shares or other units or rights to which it pertains.

 

(b)      Purchase Price .   Each Award Agreement will specify the purchase price, if any, which applies to the Award.  If the Board specifies a purchase price, the Grantee will be required to make payment on or before the payment date specified in the Award Agreement.  A Grantee shall make payment (i) in cash, (ii) by certified check payable to the order of Company, (iii) by delivery of shares of Common Stock with a Fair Market Value equal to such purchase price, or by “net settlement” of the Award or (iv) such other mode of payment as the Committee may approve.

 

(c)       Grant .  In the case of an Award which provides for a grant of Shares without any payment by the Grantee, the grant will take place on the date specified in the Award Agreement.  In the case of an Award which provides for a payment, the grant will take place on the date the initial payment is delivered to the Company, unless the Committee or the Award Agreement otherwise specifies.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, as a precondition to a grant, the Company may require an acknowledgment by the Grantee as required with respect to Options under Section 6.4.

 

(d)      Conditions .  The Committee may specify in an Award Agreement any conditions under which the Grantee of that Award will be required to convey to the Company the Shares covered by the Award.  Upon the occurrence of any such specified condition, the Grantee shall forthwith surrender and deliver to the Company the certificates evidencing such Shares as well as completely executed instruments of conveyance.  The Committee, in its discretion, may provide that certificates for Shares transferred pursuant to an Award be held in escrow by the

 

10


 

Company or its designee until such time as every condition has lapsed and that the Grantee be required, as a condition of the Award, to deliver to such escrow agent or Company officer stock transfer powers covering the Award Shares duly endorsed by the Grantee.  Unless otherwise provided in the Award Agreement or determined by the Committee, dividends and other distributions made on Shares held in escrow will be deposited in escrow, to be distributed to the party becoming entitled to the Shares on which the distribution was made.  Stock certificates evidencing Shares subject to conditions will bear a legend to the effect that the Shares evidenced thereby are subject to repurchase by, or conveyance to, the Company in accordance with the terms applicable to such Shares under an Award made pursuant to the Plan, and that the Shares may not be sold or otherwise transferred.

 

(e)       Lapse of Condition .  Upon termination or lapse of all forfeiture conditions, the Company shall cause certificates without the legend referring to the Company’s repurchase or acquisition right (but with any other legends that may be appropriate) evidencing the Shares covered by the Award to be issued to the Grantee upon the Grantee’s surrender to the Company of the legended certificates held by the Grantee.

 

(f)       Rights as Stockholder .  Upon payment of the purchase price, if any, for Shares covered by an Award and compliance with the acknowledgment requirement of Section 7.1(c), the Grantee will have all of the rights of a Stockholder with respect to the Shares covered thereby, including the right to vote the Shares and (subject to the provisions of Section 7.1(d)) receive all dividends and other distributions paid or made with respect thereto, except to the extent otherwise provided by the Committee or in the Award Agreement.

 

(g)       Requirement of Employment or Service .  If the Grantee ceases to be employed by, or provide service to, the Company during a period designated in the Award Agreement as the Restriction Period, or if other specified conditions are not met, the Award will terminate as to all Shares covered by the Award as to which the restrictions have not lapsed, and those Shares must be immediately conveyed to the Company.  The Committee may, however, provide for complete or partial exceptions to this requirement as it deems appropriate.  For purposes hereof, the phrase “employed by, or providing services to, the Company” means employment or service as an Employee, consultant or advisor of the Company, or a member of the Board (so that, for purposes of satisfying conditions with respect to Awards, a Grantee will not be considered to have terminated employment or service until such Grantee ceases to be an employee, consultant or advisor to the Company and a member of the Board), unless the Committee determines otherwise.

 

(h)      Restrictions on Transfer and Legend on Stock Certificate .  During the Restriction Period, a Grantee may not sell, assign, transfer, pledge or otherwise dispose of the Shares granted as an Award except as provided in Section 6.7 as if such Award was an Option.

 

Section 7.2.                Stock Appreciation Rights (SARs) .

 

(a)      In General .  Subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan, the Committee may, in its sole and absolute discretion, grant to an Optionee the right (which right will be referred to as an “SAR”) to surrender an Option to the Company, in whole or in part, and to receive in exchange therefor payment by the Company of an amount equal to the excess of the

 

11



 

Fair Market Value of the Shares subject to such Option, or portion thereof, so surrendered (determined in the manner described in Section 6.3 as of the date the SARs are exercised) over the exercise price to acquire such Shares.  Except as may otherwise be provided in an Option Agreement, such payment may be made, as determined by the Committee in accordance with Section 7.2 below and set forth in the Option Agreement, either in Shares or in cash or in any combination thereof.

 

(b)      Grant .  Each SAR will relate to a specific Option granted under the Plan and will be granted to the Optionee concurrently with the grant of such Option by inclusion of appropriate provisions in the Option Agreement pertaining thereto.  The number of SARs granted to an Optionee will not exceed the number of Shares which such Optionee is entitled to purchase pursuant to the related Option.  The number of SARs held by an Optionee will be reduced by (i) the number of SARs exercised under the provisions of the Option Agreement pertaining to the related Option, and (ii) the number of Shares purchased pursuant to the exercise of the related Option.

 

(c)       Payment .  Committee will have sole discretion to determine whether payment in respect of SARs exercised by any Optionee will be made in shares of Common Stock, in cash, or in a combination thereof.  If payment is made in Common Stock, the number of shares which will be issued pursuant to the exercise of SARs will be determined by dividing (i) the total number of SARs being exercised, multiplied by the amount by which the Fair Market Value (as determined under Section 6.3) of a share of Common Stock on the exercise date exceeds the exercise price for shares covered by the related Option, by (ii) the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock on the exercise date of the SARs.  No fractional share of Common Stock will be issued on exercise of an SAR; cash may be paid by the Company to the person exercising an SAR in lieu of any such fractional share, if the Committee so determines.  If payment on exercise of an SAR is to be made in cash, the person exercising the SAR will receive, in respect of each SAR to which such exercise relates, an amount of money equal to the difference between the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock on the exercise date and the then-applicable exercise price for Shares covered by the related Option.

 

(d)      Limitations .  SARs will be exercisable at such times and under such terms and conditions as determined by the Committee, in its sole and absolute discretion; provided, however, that an SAR may be exercised only at such times and by such individuals as the related Option may be exercised under the Plan and the Option Agreement.

 

ARTICLE 8.
SPECIFIC GRANTS FOR OUTSIDE DIRECTORS

 

Section 8.1.                Initial Option Grants .  A Non-Employee Director Initial Option will be automatically granted (i), at the commencement of a Public Offering to each Non-Employee Director at that date and to each other person who has agreed to become a director and who, if he or she were serving at the date of the commencement of the Public Offering, would qualify as a Non-Employee Director at that date, and (ii), after the Initial Public Offering, at the effective date of any other director’s initial election to the Board if he or she qualifies as a Non-Employee Director at that date. The foregoing notwithstanding, any Initial Option granted at the commencement of a Public Offering will be cancelled and forfeited if the Public Offering is not

 

12



 

consummated or if, in the case of an Initial Option granted to a person who has agreed to become a director, such person does not commence serving as a Non-Employee Director at or promptly following the closing of the Public Offering.

 

Section 8.2.                Annual Option Grants .  A Non-Employee Director Annual Option will be automatically granted at the close of business on the date of final adjournment of each annual meeting of Stockholders of the Company, to each member of the Board who then qualifies as a Non-Employee Director. The foregoing notwithstanding, any person who has been automatically granted a Non-Employee Director Initial Option under Section 8.1 will not be automatically granted a Non-Employee Director Annual Option at the first annual meeting of Stockholders following such grant of the Initial Option if such annual meeting takes place within three months after the effective date of such grant of the Initial Option.

 

Section 8.3.                Number of Shares Subject to Automatic Option Grants .  In the case of any Non-Employee Director Initial Option or Annual Option granted on or before the date of the first annual meeting of Stockholders following a Public Offering, the number of Shares to be subject to each Initial Option will be 10,000, and the number of shares of Stock to be subject to each Annual Option will be 5,000, in each-case subject to adjustment as provided in Section 5.2.  In the case of any Non-Employee Director Initial Option or Annual Option granted thereafter, the number of Shares to be subject to each Initial Option and Annual Option will be the applicable number specified in the preceding sentence or, if so determined by the Committee, such other number of Shares specified in the most recent resolution of the Board adopted on or prior to the date of the annual meeting of Stockholders that coincides with or most recently precedes the date of grant of the Option.

 

Section 8.4.                Other Non-Employee Director Initial Option and Annual Option Terms .  Other terms of Initial and Annual Options will be as follows:

 

(a)      The Option Price of a Non-Employee Director Initial or Annual Option will be equal to 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Shares on the date of grant of the Option.

 

(b)      A Non-Employee Director Initial or Annual Option will expire at the earlier of (i) 10 years after the date of grant or (ii) six months after the date the Participant ceases to serve as a director of the Company for any reason.

 

(c)       Each Non-Employee Director Initial Option or Annual Option may be exercised, prior to expiration, commencing one year after the date of grant, or at such earlier date as may be specified by the Board; provided, however, that an Option may be exercised following a Non-Employee Director’s termination of service as a director for reasons other than death or Disability only if the director served for at least 11 months after the date of grant or the Option was otherwise exercisable at the date of termination of service.

 

Section 8.5.                Method of Exercise .  A Non-Employee Director may exercise a Non-Employee Director Initial Option or Annual Option, in whole or in part, at such time as it is exercisable and prior to its expiration, by giving written notice of exercise to the Company, specifying the Option to be exercised and the number of Shares to be purchased, and paying in full the exercise price in cash (including by check) or by surrender of shares already owned by

 

13



 

the Non-Employee Director (except for shares acquired from the Company by exercise of option less than six months before the date of surrender) having a Fair Market Value at the time exercise equal to the exercise price, or by a combination of cash and shares.

 

Section 8.6.                Availability of Shares .  If an automatic grant of Options authorized under Section 8.1 or 8.2 cannot be made in full due to the limitation set forth in Section 5.1, such grant will be made (together with other automatic grants to occur at the same time) to the greatest extent then permitted under Section 5.1.

 

ARTICLE 9.
CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

Section 9.1.                General .  In the event of a Change of Control, the Committee may take whatever actions it deems necessary or desirable with respect to any of the Options outstanding or Award Shares not yet fully vested or paid for, all of which need not be treated identically, including, without limitation, accelerating (a) the expiration or termination date in the respective Option Agreements to a date no earlier than 30 days after notice of such acceleration is given to the Optionees, or (b) the exercisability of the Option.

 

Section 9.2.                Definition of Change of Control .  A “Change of Control” will be deemed to have occurred upon the earliest to occur of any of the following events, each of which will be determined independently of the others:

 

(a)      any Person (as defined below) becomes a “beneficial owner,” as such term is used in Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act, of 50 % or more (as determined by the Committee) of the Company’s stock entitled to vote in the election of directors.  For purposes of this Plan, the term “Person” is used as such term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act; provided, however, that, unless the Committee determines to the contrary, the term will not include the Company, any trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under an employee benefit plan of the Company, or any corporation owned, directly or indirectly, by the Stockholders of the Company in substantially the same proportions as their ownership of stock of the Company.

 

(b)      individuals who are Continuing Directors cease to constitute a majority of the members of the Board (“Continuing Directors” for this purpose being the members of the Board on the date of adoption of the Plan, provided that any person becoming a member of the Board subsequent to such date whose election or nomination for election was supported by two-thirds of the directors who then comprised the Continuing Directors will be considered to be a Continuing Director);

 

(c)       Stockholders of the Company adopt a plan of complete or substantial liquidation or an agreement providing for the distribution of all or substantially all of its assets;

 

(d)      the Company is party to a merger, consolidation, other form of business combination or a sale of all or substantially all of its assets, unless the business of the Company is continued following any such transaction by a resulting entity (which may be, but need not be, the Company) and the Stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such transaction (the “Prior Stockholders”) hold, directly or indirectly, at least two-thirds of the voting power of the

 

14



 

resulting entity (there being excluded from the voting power held by the Prior Stockholders, but not from the total voting power of the resulting entity, any voting power received by Affiliates of a party to the transaction (other than the Company) in their capacities as Stockholders of the Company); provided, however, that a merger or consolidation effected to implement a recapitalization of Company (or similar transaction) in which no Person acquires more than ten percent of the combined voting power of Company’s then outstanding securities will not constitute a Change in Control;

 

(e)       there is a Change of Control of the Company of a nature that would be required to be reported in response to item 1(a) of Current Report on Form 8-K or item 6(e) of Schedule 14A of Regulation 14A or any similar item, schedule or form under the Exchange Act, as in effect at the time of the change, whether or not the Company is then subject to such reporting requirement;

 

(f)       the Company is a subject of a “Rule 13e-3 transaction” as that term is defined in Exchange Act Rule 13e-3; or

 

(g)       there has occurred a “change of control,” as such term (or any term of like import) is defined in any of the following documents which is in effect with respect to the Company at the time in question: any note, evidence of indebtedness or agreement to lend funds to the Company, any option, incentive or employee benefit plan of the Company or any employment, severance, termination or similar agreement with any person who is then an employee of Company.

 

ARTICLE 10.
RIGHT OF FIRST REFUSAL; REPURCHASE RIGHT

 

Section 10.1.             Offer .  Prior to a Public Offering, if at any time an individual desires to sell, encumber, or otherwise dispose of shares of Company Stock that were distributed to him or her under this Plan and that are transferable, the individual may do so only pursuant to a bona fide written offer, and the individual shall first offer the shares to the Company by giving the Company written notice disclosing: (a) the name of the proposed transferee of the Company Stock; (b) the certificate number and number of shares of Company Stock proposed to be transferred or encumbered; (c) the proposed price; (d) all other terms of the proposed transfer; and (e) a written copy of the proposed offer.  Within 60 days after receipt of such notice, the Company shall have the option to purchase all or part of such Company Stock at the then current Fair Market Value (as defined in Section 6.3) and may pay such price in installments over a period not to exceed four years, at the discretion of the Board.

 

Section 10.2.             Sale .  In the event the Company (or a Stockholder, as described below) does not exercise the option to purchase Company Stock, as provided above, the individual shall have the right to sell, encumber, or otherwise dispose of the shares of Company Stock described in subsection (a) at the price and on the terms of the transfer set forth in the written notice to the Company, provided such transfer is effected within 15 days after the expiration of the option period.  If the transfer is not effected within such period, the Company must again be given an option to purchase, as provided above.

 

15



 

Section 10.3.             Assignment of Rights .  The Board, in its sole discretion, may waive the Company’s right of first refusal and repurchase right under this Article 10.  If the Company’s right of first refusal or repurchase right is so waived, the Board may, in its sole discretion, assign such right to the remaining Stockholders of the Company in the same proportion that each Stockholder’s stock ownership bears to the stock ownership of all the Stockholders of the Company, as determined by the Board.  To the extent that a Stockholder has been given such right and does not purchase his or her allotment, the other Stockholders shall have the right to purchase such allotment on the same basis.

 

Section 10.4.             Purchase by the Company .  Prior to a Public Offering, if a Participant ceases to be employed by, or provide service to, the Company, the Company shall have the right to purchase all or part of any Company Stock distributed to him or her under this Plan at its then current Fair Market Value (as defined in Section 6.3) (or at such other price as may be established in the Grant Instrument); provided, however, that such repurchase shall be made in accordance with applicable accounting rules to avoid adverse accounting treatment.

 

Section 10.5.             Public Offering .  On and after a Public Offering, the Company shall have no further right to purchase shares of Company Stock under this Article 10.

 

Section 10.6.             Stockholder’s Agreement .  Notwithstanding the provisions of this Article 10, if the Board requires that a Participant execute a Stockholder’s agreement with respect to any Company Stock distributed pursuant to this Plan, the provisions of this Article 10 shall not apply to such Company Stock.

 

ARTICLE 11.
AMENDMENTS

 

The Board may amend the Plan from time to time in such manner as it may deem advisable.  Nevertheless, the Board may not change the class of persons eligible to receive an ISO or increase the maximum number of Shares as to which Options may be granted under the Plan, or to any individual under the Plan in any year, without obtaining approval, within 12 months before or after such action, by the Stockholders in the manner required by state law.  No amendment to the Plan will adversely affect any outstanding Option or Award, however, without the consent of the Participant.

 

ARTICLE 12.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ISSUANCE OR TRANSFER OF SHARES

 

Section 12.1.             Stockholder Agreement .  The Board may require that a Participant execute a Stockholder agreement, with such terms as the Board deems appropriate, with respect to any Shares issued or distributed pursuant to this Plan.

 

Section 12.2.             Limitations on Issuance or Transfer of Shares .  No Shares shall be issued or transferred in connection with any Grant or Award hereunder unless and until all legal requirements applicable to the issuance or transfer of such Shares have been complied with to the satisfaction of the Board.  The Board shall have the right to condition any Grant or Award made to any Participant hereunder on such Participant’s undertaking in writing to comply with such restrictions on his or her subsequent disposition of such shares of Shares as the Board shall deem

 

16



 

necessary or advisable, and certificates representing such Shares may be legended to reflect any such restrictions.

 

Section 12.3.             Lock-Up Period .  If so requested by the Company or any representative of the underwriters (the “Managing Underwriter”) in connection with any registration of the offering of any securities of the Company under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), a Participant (including any successor or assigns) shall not sell or otherwise transfer any Shares or other securities of the Company during the 180-day period following the effective date of a registration statement of the Company filed under the Securities Act (or such other period as may be requested in writing by the Managing Underwriter and agreed to in writing by the Company) (the “Market Standoff Period”).  Such restriction shall apply only to the first registration statement of the Company to become effective under the Securities Act that includes securities to be sold on behalf of the Company to the public in an underwritten public offering under the Securities Act.  The Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to securities subject to the foregoing restrictions until the end of such Market Standoff Period.

 

ARTICLE 13.
MISCELLANEOUS

 

Section 13.1.             No Commitment to Retain .  The grant of an Option or Award pursuant to the Plan will not be construed to imply or to constitute evidence of any agreement, express or implied, on the part of the Company or any Affiliate to retain the Participant as an employee, director, consultant or advisor of the Company or any Affiliate, or in any other capacity.

 

Section 13.2.             Withholding of Taxes .  In connection with any event relating to an Option or Award, the Company will have the right to (a) require the recipient to remit or otherwise make available to the Company an amount sufficient to satisfy any Federal, state and/or local withholding tax requirements prior to the delivery or transfer of any certificates for such Shares, or (b) take whatever other action it deems necessary to protect its interests with respect to tax liabilities, including, without limitation, withholding any Shares, funds or other property otherwise due to the Participant; including, without limitation, the “net settlement” of any Option or Award; provided, however, for any Restricted Stock Award, the number of shares withheld shall not exceed the minimum federal withholding rate. The Company’s obligations under the Plan will be conditioned on the Participant’s compliance, to the Company’s satisfaction, with any withholding requirement.

 

Section 13.3.             Grants in Connection with Corporate Transactions and Otherwise .  Nothing contained in this Plan will be construed to (i) limit the right of the Board to make grants under this Plan in connection with the acquisition, by purchase, lease, merger, consolidation or otherwise, of the business or assets of any corporation, firm or association, including grants to employees thereof who become Employees of the Company, or for other proper corporate purposes, or (ii) limit the right of the Company to grant stock options or make other awards outside of this Plan.  Without limiting the foregoing, the Board may make a grant to an employee of another corporation who becomes an Employee by reason of a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of stock or property, reorganization or liquidation involving the Company or any of its subsidiaries in substitution for a stock option or stock awards grant made

 

17



 

by such corporation.  The terms and conditions of the substitute grants may vary from the terms and conditions required by the Plan and from those of the substituted stock incentives.  The Board shall prescribe the provisions of the substitute grants.

 

Section 13.4.             Compliance with Law .  The Plan, the exercise of Options and the obligations of the Company to issue or transfer Shares under Awards shall be subject to all applicable laws and to approvals by any governmental or regulatory agency as may be required.  With respect to persons subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, after a Public Offering it is the intent of the Company that the Plan and all transactions under the Plan comply with all applicable provisions of Rule 16b 3 or its successors under the Exchange Act.  In addition, it is the intent of the Company that the Plan and applicable grants under the Plan comply with the applicable provisions of Section 162(m) of the Code, after a Public Offering, and Section 422 of the Code.  To the extent that any legal requirement of Section 16 of the Exchange Act or Section 162(m) or 422 of the Code as set forth in the Plan ceases to be required under Section 16 of the Exchange Act or Section 162(m) or 422 of the Code, than Plan provision shall cease to apply.  The Committee may revoke any grant if it is contrary to law or modify a grant to bring it into compliance with any valid and mandatory government regulation.  The Committee may also adopt rules regarding the withholding of taxes on payments to Participants.  The Committee may, in its sole discretion, agree to limit its authority under this Section.

 

Section 13.5.             Funding of the Plan .  This Plan shall be unfunded.  The Company shall not be required to establish any special or separate fund or to make any other segregation of assets to assure the payment of any Grants under this Plan.  In no event shall interest be paid or accrued on any Grant, including unpaid installments of Grants.

 

Section 13.6.             Governing Document .  The Plan shall be the controlling document.  No other statements, representations, explanatory materials or examples, oral or written, may amend the Plan in any manner.  The Plan shall be binding upon and enforceable against the Company and its successors and assigns.

 

Section 13.7.             Governing Law .  The validity, construction, interpretation and effect of the Plan and Option Agreements and Award Agreements issued under the Plan will be governed and construed by and determined in accordance with the laws of the State of Delaware, without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions thereof.

 

18




Exhibit 10.3

 

GRAPHIC

 

INCENTIVE STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

 

Inovalon, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), hereby grants to the Optionee named below an ISO to purchase shares of its Common Stock, par value $0.000025 per share (the “Common Stock”), subject to the following:

 

Background

 

A.                       The Board of Directors desires to recognize the contributions made to the Company by Optionee and to provide Optionee with additional incentive to devote himself or herself to the future success of the Company.

 

B.                       This grant is made pursuant to the Inovalon 2007 Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “Plan”) a copy of which has been provided to Optionee.  All capitalized terms not defined herein will have the definitions given them in the Plan.

 

1.               Identifying Provisions :  As used in this Option, the following terms will have the following respective meanings:

 

1.1                  Optionee:

 

1.2                  Date of Grant:

 

1.3                  Number of Option Shares:

 

1.4                  Option Exercise Price:

 

1.5                  Expiration date:

 

2.               Exercise .  Optionee may exercise this Option, in one or more transactions, to the extent that it is vested and has not expired.  The method of exercise is set forth below in Section 6 below.

 

3.               Vesting .

 

3.1                  Normal Vesting .  Subject to provisions for termination and acceleration herein, this Option shall vest over five years and Optionee shall have the cumulative right to exercise the Option, and the Option is only exercisable, as follows: 20% of the Option Shares (rounding up for any fractional shares) will vest on each of the first, second, third, forth, and fifth anniversary dates of the Date of Grant.

 

3.2                  Employment Termination .  The Option can only vest when Optionee is employed full-time in active service by the Company or one of its Affiliates.  Vesting can only be reversed as provided under Section 4.  If Optionee’s employment terminates because of his or her death or Disability or for any other reason, including retirement, which is approved by the Committee (an “Allowed Termination”), the Option will remain vested to the extent it was vested on the date of such termination.

 



 

Employee Stock Option Agreement

 

4.               Expiration; Acceleration .  When this Option expires, any vested portions become unvested and can no longer be exercised.

 

4.1                  Normal Expiration .  The Option expires at 5:00 p.m. (local New York, NY time) on the Expiration Date, unless sooner terminated as provided below.

 

4.2                  Employment Termination .  This Option expires at midnight of the day before any termination of Optionee’s employment other than an Allowed Termination.  Portions of the Option not vested at midnight of the day of an Allowed Termination expire at that time.  Portions of the Option vested at midnight of the day of an Allowed Termination expire at midnight of (a) the 180 th  day after such termination date for termination resulting from Optionee’s death or Disability, or (b) the 30 th  day after such termination date for termination resulting from any other Allowed Termination, or (c) such other date (but not later than the Expiration Date provided above) as approved by the Committee.  For sake of clarity, during such 180 or 30-day period (as the case may be), Optionee (or Optionee’s heirs or legal representatives if Optionee is deceased) may purchase any remaining Option Shares which could have been purchased on the date Optionee’s employment terminated, but may not purchase any Option Shares which would otherwise first become purchasable during such period.

 

4.3                  Termination for Cause .  In addition to the termination of the Option as provided above, if Optionee is found by the Committee to have been dismissed for Cause, Optionee shall automatically forfeit all Option Shares for which the Company has not yet delivered the share certificates upon refund by the Company of the Option Price for such Option Shares.

 

4.4                  Change in Control .  In the event of a Change in Control (as defined in the Plan), the Committee may take whatever action with respect to Options outstanding it deems necessary or desirable, including without limitation, accelerating the expiration of the termination date of the Options to a date no earlier than 30 days after notice of such acceleration is given to the Optionee.  Upon the giving of any such acceleration notice, the Options shall become immediately exercisable in full or as otherwise provided in such notice.

 

5.               Continued Employment or Service .  So long as Optionee remains employed by the Company or one of its Affiliates, Optionee will use his or her full time, energy and skill to promote the interests of the Company and its Affiliates, subject to such vacations, personal days, and other excused absences under the standard policies of the Company or its Affiliate (as the case may be).  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the grant of this Option shall not be construed to imply or to constitute evidence of any agreement, express or implied, on the part of the Company or any Affiliate to retain Optionee in its employ or in any other capacity.

 

6.               Method of Exercise and Payment .

 

6.1                  Method of Exercise .  When exercisable, this Option may be exercised by written notice to the Company’s Chief Legal Officer, signed by the Optionee, specifying the number of Option Shares to be purchased and, unless the Option Shares are covered by a then current registration statement or a Notification under Regulation A under the Securities Act of 1933 (the “Act”) and current registrations under all applicable state securities

 

2



 

laws, containing the Optionee’s acknowledgment that (i) such Option Shares are being purchased for investment and not for distribution or resale (other than a distribution or resale which, in the opinion of counsel satisfactory to the Company, may be made without violating the registration provisions of the Act), (ii) the Optionee has been advised and understands that (A) the Option Shares have not been registered under the Act and are “restricted securities” within the meaning of Rule 144 under the Act and are subject to restrictions on transfer and (B) the Company is under no obligation to register the Option Shares under the Act or to take any action which would make available to the Optionee any exemption from such registration, (iii) such Option Shares may not be transferred without compliance with all applicable federal and state securities laws, and (iv) an appropriate legend referring to the foregoing restrictions on transfer may be printed on the certificates.  The notice shall contain the representation described in Section 14 and shall be accompanied by payment of the aggregate Option Price of the Option Shares being purchased.  Such exercise shall be effective upon the actual receipt by the Company’s Chief Legal Officer of such written notice and payment.  To be effective, any exercise of the Option must also be in accordance with such other procedures for the exercise of Options as the Committee may establish from time to time.

 

6.2                  Medium of Payment .  Optionee may pay for Option Shares (i) in cash, (ii) by certified check payable to the order of the Company, or (iii) by a combination of the foregoing.

 

6.3                  Taxes .  It shall be a condition to the performance of the Company’s obligation to issue or transfer Option Shares upon the exercise of the Option that the Optionee remit to the Company an amount sufficient to satisfy any federal, state and/or local tax withholding requirements arising in connection with the exercise of the Option or the issuance of Option Shares, other than stock transfer taxes.  If the Company for any reason does not require the Optionee to make a payment sufficient to satisfy such withholding requirements, any tax withholding payments made by the Company to any federal, state or local tax authority with respect to the exercise of the Option shall constitute a personal obligation of the Optionee to the Company, payable upon demand or, at the option of the Company, by deduction from future compensation payable to the Optionee.

 

6.4                  Stockholders Agreement .  Upon exercise of the Option, the Optionee shall execute and deliver to the Company, a counterpart to the Stockholders Rights Agreement of the Company (the “Stockholders Agreement”).  Execution and delivery of the Stockholders Agreement prior to the transfer or delivery of any Common Stock and prior to the expiration of the option period shall be a condition precedent to the right to purchase such shares.

 

7.               Rights as a Stockholder .  The Optionee shall have none of the rights of a stockholder with respect to the Option Shares unless and until such Option Shares shall be issued to the Optionee upon the exercise of the Option.

 

8.               Adjustments .  In the event of a reorganization, recapitalization, stock dividend, split or other increase or decrease in the number of issued and outstanding Common Stock resulting from a subdivision or consolidation of the Common Stock or other capital adjustment (not including the issuance of Common Stock on the conversion of other securities of the Company which

 

3



 

are convertible into Common Stock), the Committee may, in its sole discretion and in order to prevent the dilution or enlargement of the rights under this Option, may adjust the number and type of shares covered by this Option and the Option Price, in each case, in compliance with the Plan and applicable law.  The Committee shall have the authority to determine the adjustments to be made under this Section and any such determination by the Committee shall be final, binding and conclusive.

 

9.               Non-Transferability of the Option .  This Option is personal to Optionee and, except with the prior written consent of the Company, is not transferable by Optionee other than by will or pursuant to the laws of descent and distribution in the event of Optionee’s death, in which event the Option may be exercised by the heirs or legal representatives of the Optionee.  The Option may be exercised during the lifetime of the Optionee only by Optionee.  Any attempt at assignment, transfer, pledge or disposition of this Option contrary to the provisions hereof or the levy of any execution, attachment or similar process upon the Option shall be null and void and without effect.  Any exercise of this Option by a person other than Optionee shall be accompanied by appropriate proofs of the right of such person to exercise the Option.

 

10.        Legal Requirements .  If the listing, registration or qualification of the Option Shares upon any securities exchange or under any federal or state law, or the consent or approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary as a condition of or in connection with the purchase of such Option Shares, the Company shall not be obligated to issue or deliver the certificates representing the Option Shares as to which the Option has been exercised unless and until such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been effected or obtained.  If registration is considered unnecessary by the Company or its counsel, the Company may cause a legend to be placed on the Option Shares being issued calling attention to the fact that they have been acquired for investment and have not been registered.

 

11.        Public Offering Holdback .  Optionee agrees not to sell publicly or to distribute any equity security of the Company, or any security convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for such security, during the seven days prior to and the 180 days after the effectiveness of any underwritten public offering of any such equity security, except as part of such underwritten offering if so allowed by the Company.

 

12.        Administration; Conformity with the Plan .  This Option has been granted pursuant to, and is subject to the terms and provisions of, the Plan.  The Plan’s provisions will control in the event of any inconsistency between them and this Option.  All questions of interpretation and application of the Plan and the Option shall be determined by the Committee, and such determination shall be final, binding and conclusive.

 

13.        Notices .  All notices or other communications which are required to be given or may be given to either party pursuant to the terms of this Option shall be in writing and shall be delivered personally or by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the address of the parties as set forth on the signature page below.  Any notice to be given to the Company shall be addressed to the Chief Legal Officer of the Company at its principal executive office, and any notice to be given to the Optionee shall be addressed to the Optionee at the address then appearing on the personnel records of the Company or the Affiliate of the Company by which he or she is employed, or at such other address as either party hereafter may designate in writing to the other.  Notice shall be deemed given on the date of delivery in the case of personal delivery or on the delivery date as specified on the return receipt in the case of

 

4



 

registered or certified mail when deposited in the United States mail, addressed as aforesaid, and with proper postage and registration or certification fees prepaid.  Either party may change its address for such communications by giving notice thereof to the other party in conformity with this Section 13.

 

14.        Notice of Disposition .  As a condition to the grant of this Option, Optionee agrees to provide written notice to the Company if Optionee sells, transfers or otherwise disposes of any Option Shares on or prior to the later of (a) the date which is two years after the date this Option was granted or (b) the date which is one year after the date the Company transferred the Option Shares to Optionee.  The written notice of exercise described in Section 6.1 shall contain a representation that Optionee shall provide written notice to the Company if the Option Shares acquired upon such exercise are sold, transferred or otherwise disposed of within the period described in this Section 14.

 

15.        Definitions .  For purposes of this Option the following terms shall have the meanings set forth below:

 

(a)               “Affiliate” means a corporation which is a parent corporation or a subsidiary corporation with respect to the Company within the meaning of section 424(e) or (f) of the Code;

 

(b)               “Cause” for termination of employment shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in the Recipient’s employment agreement or, in the absence of such a definition, shall mean: (A) a breach by Optionee of his employment or service agreement with the Company or an Affiliate, (B) a breach of Optionee’s duty of loyalty to the Company or an Affiliate, including without limitation any act of dishonesty, embezzlement or fraud with respect to the Company or an Affiliate, (C) the commission by Optionee of a felony, a crime involving moral turpitude or other act causing material harm to the Company’s or an Affiliate’s standing and reputation, (D) Optionee’s continued failure to perform his duties to the Company or an Affiliate for a reason other than illness or incapacity or (E) unauthorized disclosure of trade secrets or other confidential information belonging to the Company or an Affiliate.

 

(c)                “Committee” means to the committee of the Board of Directors of the Company designated to administer the Plan;

 

(d)               “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, or any successor statute or statutes thereto.  Reference to any particular section of the Code shall include any successor section; and

 

16.        Governing Law .  The internal laws of the State of Delaware (irrespective of its choice of laws principles) shall govern the validity of this Option, the construction of its terms and the interpretation and enforcement of the rights and duties of the parties hereto.

 

17.        Entire Agreement; Amendment .  This Option constitutes the entire understanding and agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements or understandings, inducements or conditions, express or implied, written or oral, between the parties with respect hereto.  If any provision of this

 

5



 

Option, or the application thereof, shall for any reason and to any extent be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of the Option and the application of such provision to other circumstances shall be interpreted so as best to reasonably effect the intent of the parties hereto.  Subject to the provisions of the Plan, this Option shall not be amended, modified or revoked except by agreement in writing signed by the Company and Optionee.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Option to be effective as of the Date of Grant, executed this       day of                 ,     .

 

 

 

 

Inovalon, Inc.

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

 

 

 

Keith R. Dunleavy, CEO

 

6



 

Optionee acknowledges and agrees that the vesting of shares pursuant to the notice of grant and Section 3 hereof is earned only by continuing employment at the will of the Company or one of its Affiliates (not through the act of being hired, being granted this option or acquiring shares hereunder).  Optionee further acknowledges and agrees that nothing in this Option, nor in the Plan which is incorporated herein by reference, will confer upon Optionee any right with respect to continuation of employment by the Company or such Affiliate, nor will it interfere in any way with such Optionee’s right or the Company’s (or Affiliate’s) right to terminate such Optionee’s employment at any time, with or without cause.

 

Optionee acknowledges receipt of a copy of the Plan and certain related information and represents that Optionee is familiar with the terms and provisions of these documents, and hereby accepts this Option subject to all of those terms and provisions.  Optionee has reviewed the Plan and this Option in their entirety, has had an opportunity to obtain the advice of counsel prior to executing this Option and fully understands all provisions of the Option.  Optionee hereby agrees to accept as binding, conclusive and final all decisions or interpretations of the Committee upon any questions arising under the Plan.  Optionee further agrees to notify the Company upon any change in the residence address indicated below.

 

 

 

 

 

Dated:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Residence Address:

 

 

 

 

 

 

7




EXHIBIT 10.4

 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.

AMENDED & RESTATED LONG-TERM INCENTIVE PLAN

 

NOTICE OF RESTRICTED STOCK UNIT AWARD

 

Grantee’s Name and Address:

 

 

You (the “Grantee”) have been granted an award of restricted stock units (the “Restricted Stock Units”, the “Units” or the “Award”), subject to the terms and conditions of this Notice of Restricted Stock Unit Award (the “Notice”), the Inovalon Holdings, Inc. Amended & Restated Long-Term Incentive Plan, as assumed from Inovalon, Inc. and as amended from time to time (the “Plan”) and the Restricted Stock Unit Agreement (the “Agreement”) attached hereto, as follows.  Unless otherwise provided herein, the terms in this Notice shall have the same meaning as those defined in the Plan.

 

Date of Award

 

Vesting Commencement Date

 

Total Number of Restricted Stock
Units Awarded

 

Vesting Schedule :

 

Subject to the Grantee’s Continuous Service and other limitations set forth in this Notice, the Agreement and the Plan, the Units will “vest” in accordance with the following schedule (the “Vesting Schedule”):

 

Twenty Percent of the Units shall vest on the later of (1) each annual anniversary of the Vesting Commencement Date and (2) the earlier of (x) the closing of a Public Offering or, if the lock-up restrictions in Section 8 of the Agreement apply to the Grantee, the expiration of the lock-up period specified in Section 8 of the Agreement and (y) a Change of Control due to an event specified in Section 9.2(a), Section 9.2(b), Section 9.2(c) or Section 9.2(d) of the Plan (a “Change of Control”).

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event of a Change of Control, for the Units that are not Assumed or Replaced, such Units shall become fully vested immediately upon termination of the Grantee’s Continuous Service if such Continuous Service is terminated by the successor company or the Company without Cause or voluntarily by the Grantee with Good Reason, in each case within 12 months after the Change of Control.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event of a Change of Control, for the Units that are neither Assumed nor Replaced, such Units shall automatically become fully vested immediately prior to the specified effective date of such Change of Control, provided that the Grantee’s Continuous Service has not terminated prior to such date.

 

For purposes of this Notice and the Agreement:

 

1.               “Assumed” means that pursuant to a Change of Control either (i) the Award expressly affirmed by the Company or (ii) the contractual obligations represented by the Award are expressly assumed (and not simply by operation of law) by the successor entity or its parent corporation in connection with

 



 

the Change of Control with appropriate adjustments to the number and type of securities of the successor entity or its parent corporation subject to the Award which at least preserves the compensation element of the Award existing at the time of the Change of Control as determined in accordance with the instruments evidencing the agreement to assume the Award.

 

2.               “Cause” means, either alone or in any combination: (i) a material breach by a Grantee of the terms of any agreement between that Grantee and the Company or an affiliate of the Company, unless the breach is cured within 10 days after written notice thereof to the Grantee (the Board may determine in its sole discretion that a failure is not subject to cure and may dispense with the cure period); (ii) the persistent and willful failure by a Grantee to perform his or her duties or obligations under any such agreement between that Grantee and the Company or an affiliate of the Company or to adhere to any written policies of the Company or such affiliate of the Company, unless the failure is cured within 10 days after written notice thereof to the Grantee (the Board may determine in its sole discretion that a failure is not subject to cure and may dispense with the cure period); (iii) the appropriation (or attempted appropriation) of a material business opportunity of the Company or an affiliate of the Company, including attempting to secure or securing any personal profit in connection with any transaction entered into on behalf of the Company or such affiliate of the Company, as the case may be; (iv) the misappropriation (or attempted misappropriation) of funds or property of the Company or an affiliate of the Company; (v) the commission (or attempted commission) of any act of theft, fraud, or dishonesty or any act which has or in the reasonable discretion of the Company may have a detrimental effect on the reputation or business of the Company or an affiliate of the Company; (vi) the unauthorized and willful disclosure of confidential information of the Company or an affiliate of the Company (including confidential or proprietary information of their respective clients); or (vii) the conviction of, the criminal indictment for (or its procedural equivalent), or the entering of a guilty plea or a plea of no contest with respect to, a felony or any other crime for which imprisonment is required or imposed.  No act or failure to act by a Grantee shall be considered “willful” unless done or omitted to be done by such Grantee, either knowingly, intentionally, or with reasonable knowledge or reckless disregard of the foreseeable consequences of such conduct.

 

3.               “Continuous Service” means that the provision of services to the Company or an Affiliate in the capacity of Employee is not interrupted or terminated.  In jurisdictions requiring notice in advance of an effective termination as an Employee, Continuous Service shall be deemed terminated upon the actual cessation of providing services to the Company or an Affiliate notwithstanding any required notice period that must be fulfilled before a termination as an Employee can be effective under applicable laws.  The Grantee’s Continuous Service shall be deemed to have terminated either upon an actual termination of Continuous Service or upon the entity for which the Grantee provides services ceasing to be an Affiliate.  Continuous Service shall not be considered interrupted in the case of (i) any approved leave of absence, (ii) transfers among the Company, any Affiliate, or any successor, in the capacity of Employee, member of the Board, consultant or advisor, or (iii) any change in status as long as the Grantee remains in the service of the Company or an Affiliate in any capacity of Employee, member of the Board, consultant or advisor.  An approved leave of absence shall include sick leave, military leave, or any other authorized personal leave.

 

4.               “Good Reason” means (i) the material breach by the Company or an affiliate of the Company, as applicable, of a written employment agreement, if any, between a Grantee and the Company or an affiliate of the Company, as applicable, (ii) the assignment of a Grantee without his or her consent to a position, responsibilities, or duties of a materially lesser status or degree of responsibility than his or her position, responsibilities, or duties on the date of a Change of Control, as set forth in writing between the Grantee and the Company, (iii) a reduction in a Grantee’s base salary, or (iv) the requirement by the Company that a Grantee’s principal place of employment be anywhere other than within 50 miles of the Grantee’s principal place of employment with the Company immediately

 

2



 

preceding Change of Control; or (v) a material breach by the Company of this Agreement which is not cured by the Company within 30 days following written notice to the Company of such breach.

 

5.               “Replaced” means that pursuant to a Change of Control the Award is replaced with a comparable stock award or a cash incentive award or program of the Company, the successor entity (if applicable) or the parent corporation of either of them which preserves the compensation element of the Award existing at the time of the Change of Control and provides for subsequent payout in accordance with the same (or, for the Grantee, a more favorable) vesting schedule applicable to such Award.  The determination of comparability shall be made by the Committee and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive.

 

During any authorized leave of absence, the vesting of the Units as provided in this schedule shall be suspended (to the extent permitted under Section 409A of the Code) after the leave of absence exceeds a period of three (3) months.  The Vesting Schedule of the Units shall be extended by the length of the suspension.  An authorized leave of absence shall include sick leave, military leave, or other bona fide leave of absence (such as temporary employment by the government).

 

For purposes of this Notice and the Agreement, the term “vest” shall mean, with respect to any Units, that such Units are no longer subject to forfeiture to the Company.  If the Grantee would become vested in a fraction of a Unit, such Unit shall not vest until the Grantee becomes vested in the entire Unit.

 

Vesting shall cease upon the date the Grantee terminates Continuous Service for any reason, including death or Disability.  In the event the Grantee terminates Continuous Service for any reason, including death or Disability, any unvested Units held by the Grantee immediately upon such termination of the Grantee’s Continuous Service shall be forfeited and deemed reconveyed to the Company and the Company shall thereafter be the legal and beneficial owner of such reconveyed Units and shall have all rights and interest in or related thereto without further action by the Grantee.

 

3



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company and the Grantee have executed this Notice and agree that the Award is to be governed by the terms and conditions of this Notice, the Plan, and the Agreement.

 

 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.

 

a Delaware corporation

 

 

 

 

By:

 

 

 

 

 

Name:

Keith R. Dunleavy, M.D.

 

 

 

 

Title:

Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

Date:

 

 

THE GRANTEE ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT THE UNITS SHALL VEST, IF AT ALL, ONLY DURING THE PERIOD OF THE GRANTEE’S CONTINUOUS SERVICE OR AS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED HEREIN (NOT THROUGH THE ACT OF BEING HIRED, BEING GRANTED THIS AWARD OR ACQUIRING SHARES HEREUNDER).  THE GRANTEE FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT NOTHING IN THIS NOTICE, THE AGREEMENT, NOR IN THE PLAN, SHALL CONFER UPON THE GRANTEE ANY RIGHT WITH RESPECT TO CONTINUATION OF THE GRANTEE’S CONTINUOUS SERVICE, NOR SHALL IT INTERFERE IN ANY WAY WITH THE GRANTEE’S RIGHT OR THE COMPANY’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE GRANTEE’S CONTINUOUS SERVICE AT ANY TIME, WITH OR WITHOUT CAUSE, AND WITH OR WITHOUT NOTICE.  THE GRANTEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT UNLESS THE GRANTEE HAS A WRITTEN EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT WITH THE COMPANY TO THE CONTRARY, THE GRANTEE’S STATUS IS AT WILL.

 

Grantee Acknowledges and Agrees :

 

The Grantee acknowledges receipt of a copy of the Plan and the Agreement and represents that he or she is familiar with the terms and provisions thereof, and hereby accepts the Award subject to all of the terms and provisions hereof and thereof.  The Grantee has reviewed this Notice, the Agreement and the Plan in their entirety, has had an opportunity to obtain the advice of counsel prior to executing this Notice and fully understands all provisions of this Notice, the Agreement and the Plan.  The Grantee further agrees and acknowledges that this Award is a non-elective arrangement pursuant to Section 409A of the Code.

 

The Grantee further acknowledges that, from time to time, the Company may be in a “blackout period” and/or subject to applicable federal securities laws that could subject the Grantee to liability for engaging in any transaction involving the sale of the Company’s Shares.  The Grantee further acknowledges and agrees that, prior to the sale of any Shares acquired under this Award, it is the Grantee’s responsibility to determine whether or not such sale of Shares will subject the Grantee to liability under insider trading rules or other applicable federal securities laws.

 

The Grantee understands that the Award is subject to the Grantee’s consent to access this Notice, the Agreement, the Plan and the Plan prospectus (collectively, the “Plan Documents”) in electronic form on the Company’s intranet or the website of the Company’s designated brokerage firm, if applicable.  By signing below (or providing an electronic signature by clicking below) and accepting the grant of the Award, the Grantee: (i) consents to access electronic copies (instead of receiving paper copies) of the Plan Documents via the Company’s intranet or the website of the Company’s designated brokerage firm, if applicable; (ii) represents that the Grantee has access to the Company’s intranet; (iii) acknowledges

 

4



 

receipt of electronic copies, or that the Grantee is already in possession of paper copies, of the Plan Documents; and (iv) acknowledges that the Grantee is familiar with and accepts the Award subject to the terms and provisions of the Plan Documents.

 

The Company may, in its sole discretion, decide to deliver any Plan Documents by electronic means or request the Grantee’s consent to participate in the Plan by electronic means.  The Grantee hereby consents to receive such documents by electronic delivery and agrees to participate in the Plan through an on-line or electronic system established and maintained by the Company or a third party designated by the Company.

 

The Grantee hereby agrees that all questions of interpretation and administration relating to this Notice, the Plan and the Agreement shall be resolved by the Committee in accordance with Section 9 of the Agreement.  The Grantee further agrees to the venue and jurisdiction selection in accordance with Section 12 of the Agreement.  The Grantee further agrees to notify the Company upon any change in his or her residence address indicated in this Notice.

 

 

 

 

 

Date:

 

 

 

 

Grantee’s Signature

 

 

 

 

 

Grantee’s Printed Name

 

 

 

 

 

Address

 

 

 

 

 

City, State & Zip

 

5



 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.

AMENDED & RESTATED LONG-TERM INCENTIVE PLAN

 

RESTRICTED STOCK UNIT AGREEMENT

 

1.                                       Issuance of Units .  Inovalon Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), hereby issues to the Grantee (the “Grantee”) named in the Notice of Restricted Stock Unit Award (the “Notice”) an award (the “Award”) of the Total Number of Restricted Stock Units Awarded set forth in the Notice (the “Units”), subject to the Notice, this Restricted Stock Unit Agreement (the “Agreement”) and the terms and provisions of the Inovalon Holdings, Inc. Amended & Restated Long-Term Incentive Plan, as assumed from Inovalon, Inc. and as amended from time to time (the “Plan”), which is incorporated herein by reference.  Unless otherwise provided herein or the Notice, the terms in this Agreement shall have the same meaning as those defined in the Plan.

 

2.                                       Transfer Restrictions .  The Units may not be transferred in any manner other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution.

 

3.                                       Conversion of Units and Issuance of Shares .

 

(a)                                  General .  Subject to Sections 3(b) and 3(c), one share of Class B Common Stock (as may be adjusted pursuant to the terms of the Plan, “Common Stock”) shall be issuable for each Unit subject to the Award (the “Shares”) upon vesting.  Immediately thereafter, or as soon as administratively feasible, the Company will transfer the appropriate number of Shares to the Grantee after satisfaction of any required tax or other withholding obligations.  Any fractional Unit remaining after the Award is fully vested shall be discarded and shall not be converted into a fractional Share.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the relevant number of Shares shall be issued no later than sixty (60) days following vesting.  Effective upon the consummation of a Change of Control, the Award shall terminate unless it is Assumed in connection with the Change of Control.

 

(b)                                  Delay of Conversion .  The conversion of the Units into the Shares under Section 3(a) above, may be delayed in the event the Company reasonably anticipates that the issuance of the Shares would constitute a violation of federal securities laws or other applicable law.  If the conversion of the Units into the Shares is delayed by the provisions of this Section 3(b), the conversion of the Units into the Shares shall occur at the earliest date at which the Company reasonably anticipates issuing the Shares will not cause a violation of federal securities laws or other applicable law.  For purposes of this Section 3(b), the issuance of Shares that would cause inclusion in gross income or the application of any penalty provision or other provision of the Code is not considered a violation of applicable law.

 

(c)                                   Delay of Issuance of Shares .  The Company shall delay the issuance of any Shares under this Section 3 to the extent necessary to comply with Section 409A(a)(2)(B)(i) of the Code (relating to payments made to certain “specified employees” of certain publicly-traded companies); in such event, any Shares to which the Grantee would otherwise be entitled during the six (6) month period following the date of the Grantee’s termination of Continuous Service will be issuable on the first business day following the expiration of such six (6) month period.

 

6



 

4.                                       Grantee’s Representations .  The Grantee understands that neither the Units nor the Shares issuable hereunder have been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or any United States securities laws.  In the event the Shares issuable hereunder have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, at the time the Shares are issued, the Grantee shall, if requested by the Company, concurrently with the issuance, deliver to the Company his or her investment representation statement in a form determined by the Committee from time to time.

 

5.                                       Right to Shares .  The Grantee shall not have any right in, to or with respect to any of the Shares (including any voting rights or rights with respect to dividends paid on the Common Stock) issuable under the Award until the Award is settled by the issuance of such Shares to the Grantee.

 

6.                                       Taxes .

 

(a)                                  Tax Liability .  The Grantee is ultimately liable and responsible for all taxes owed by the Grantee in connection with the Award, regardless of any action the Company or any Affiliate takes with respect to any tax withholding obligations that arise in connection with the Award.  Neither the Company nor any Affiliate makes any representation or undertaking regarding the treatment of any tax withholding in connection with any aspect of the Award, including the grant, vesting, assignment, release or cancellation of the Units, the delivery of Shares, the subsequent sale of any Shares acquired upon vesting and the receipt of any dividends or dividend equivalents.  The Company does not commit and is under no obligation to structure the Award to reduce or eliminate the Grantee’s tax liability.

 

(b)                                  Payment of Withholding Taxes .  Prior to any event in connection with the Award (e.g., vesting) that the Company determines may result in any tax withholding obligation, whether United States federal, state, local or non-U.S., including any social insurance, employment tax, payment on account or other tax-related obligation (the “Tax Withholding Obligation”), the Grantee must arrange for the satisfaction of the minimum amount of such Tax Withholding Obligation in a manner acceptable to the Company.

 

(i)                                      By Share Withholding.   If permissible under applicable law, the Grantee authorizes the Company to, upon the exercise of its sole discretion, withhold from those Shares otherwise issuable to the Grantee the whole number of Shares sufficient to satisfy the minimum applicable Tax Withholding Obligation.  The Grantee acknowledges that the withheld Shares may not be sufficient to satisfy the Grantee’s minimum Tax Withholding Obligation.  Accordingly, the Grantee agrees to pay to the Company or any Affiliate as soon as practicable, including through additional payroll withholding, any amount of the Tax Withholding Obligation that is not satisfied by the withholding of Shares described above.

 

(ii)                                   By Sale of Shares .  Unless the Grantee determines to satisfy the Tax Withholding Obligation by some other means in accordance with clause (iii) below, the Grantee’s acceptance of this Award constitutes the Grantee’s instruction and authorization to the Company and any brokerage firm determined acceptable to the Company for such purpose to, upon the exercise of Company’s sole discretion, sell on the Grantee’s behalf a whole number of Shares from those Shares issuable to the Grantee as the Company determines to be appropriate to generate cash proceeds sufficient to satisfy the minimum applicable Tax Withholding Obligation.  Such Shares will be sold on the day such Tax Withholding Obligation arises (e.g., a vesting date) or as soon thereafter as practicable.  The Grantee will be responsible for all broker’s fees and other costs of sale, and the Grantee agrees to indemnify and hold the Company harmless from any losses, costs, damages, or expenses relating to any such sale.  To the extent the proceeds of such sale exceed the Grantee’s minimum Tax Withholding Obligation, the Company agrees to pay such excess in cash to the Grantee.  The Grantee acknowledges that the Company or its designee is under no obligation to arrange for such sale at any particular price, and that the proceeds

 

7



 

of any such sale may not be sufficient to satisfy the Grantee’s minimum Tax Withholding Obligation.  Accordingly, the Grantee agrees to pay to the Company or any Affiliate as soon as practicable, including through additional payroll withholding, any amount of the Tax Withholding Obligation that is not satisfied by the sale of Shares described above.

 

(iii)                                By Check, Wire Transfer or Other Means . At any time not less than five (5) business days (or such fewer number of business days as determined by the Committee) before any Tax Withholding Obligation arises (e.g., a vesting date), the Grantee may elect to satisfy the Grantee’s Tax Withholding Obligation by delivering to the Company an amount that the Company determines is sufficient to satisfy the Tax Withholding Obligation by (x) wire transfer to such account as the Company may direct, (y) delivery of a certified check payable to the Company, or (z) such other means as specified from time to time by the Committee.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company or an Affiliate also may satisfy any Tax Withholding Obligation by offsetting any amounts (including, but not limited to, salary, bonus and severance payments) payable to the Grantee by the Company and/or a Related Entity.  Furthermore, in the event of any determination that the Company has failed to withhold a sum sufficient to pay all withholding taxes due in connection with the Award, the Grantee agrees to pay the Company the amount of such deficiency in cash within five (5) days after receiving a written demand from the Company to do so, whether or not the Grantee is an employee of the Company at that time.

 

7.               Company’s Right of First Refusal . The Grantee acknowledges and agrees that the Shares are subject to a right of first refusal (“Right of First Refusal”) as set forth in Article 10 of the Plan, which Right of First Refusal is incorporated herein by reference, and that, except in compliance with such Right of First Refusal, neither the Grantee nor a transferee shall sell, hypothecate, encumber or otherwise transfer any Shares or any right or interest therein.

 

8.               Lock-Up Agreement .

 

(a)                                  Agreement .  The Grantee, if requested by the Company and the lead underwriter of any public offering of the Common Stock (the “Lead Underwriter”), hereby irrevocably agrees not to sell, contract to sell, grant any option to purchase, transfer the economic risk of ownership in, make any short sale of, pledge or otherwise transfer or dispose of any interest in any Common Stock or any securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for or any other rights to purchase or acquire Common Stock (except Common Stock included in such public offering or acquired on the public market after such offering) during the 180-day period following the effective date of a registration statement of the Company filed under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or such shorter or longer period of time as the Lead Underwriter shall specify.  The Grantee further agrees to sign such documents as may be requested by the Lead Underwriter to effect the foregoing and agrees that the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to such Common Stock subject to the lock-up period until the end of such period.  The Company and the Grantee acknowledge that each Lead Underwriter of a public offering of the Company’s stock, during the period of such offering and for the lock-up period thereafter, is an intended beneficiary of this Section 8.

 

(b)                                  No Amendment Without Consent of Underwriter .  During the period from identification of a Lead Underwriter in connection with any public offering of the Company’s Common Stock until the earlier of (i) the expiration of the lock-up period specified in Section 8(a) in connection with such offering or (ii) the abandonment of such offering by the Company and the Lead Underwriter, the provisions of this Section 8 may not be amended or waived except with the consent of the Lead Underwriter.

 

8



 

9.                                       Entire Agreement; Governing Law .  The Notice, the Plan and this Agreement constitute the entire agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede in their entirety all prior undertakings and agreements of the Company and the Grantee with respect to the subject matter hereof, and may not be modified adversely to the Grantee’s interest except by means of a writing signed by the Company and the Grantee.  These agreements are to be construed in accordance with and governed by the internal laws of the State of Delaware without giving effect to any choice of law rule that would cause the application of the laws of any jurisdiction other than the internal laws of the State of Delaware to the rights and duties of the parties.  Should any provision of the Notice or this Agreement be determined to be illegal or unenforceable, the other provisions shall nevertheless remain effective and shall remain enforceable.

 

10.                                Construction .  The captions used in the Notice and this Agreement are inserted for convenience and shall not be deemed a part of the Award for construction or interpretation.  Except when otherwise indicated by the context, the singular shall include the plural and the plural shall include the singular.  Use of the term “or” is not intended to be exclusive, unless the context clearly requires otherwise.

 

11.                                Administration and Interpretation .  Any question or dispute regarding the administration or interpretation of the Notice, the Plan or this Agreement shall be submitted by the Grantee or by the Company to the Committee.  The resolution of such question or dispute by the Committee shall be final and binding on all persons.

 

12.                                Venue and Jurisdiction .  The parties agree that any suit, action, or proceeding arising out of or relating to the Notice, the Plan or this Agreement shall be brought exclusively in the United States District Court for Delaware (or should such court lack jurisdiction to hear such action, suit or proceeding, in a Delaware state court) and that the parties shall submit to the jurisdiction of such court.  The parties irrevocably waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any objection the party may have to the laying of venue for any such suit, action or proceeding brought in such court.  If any one or more provisions of this Section 12 shall for any reason be held invalid or unenforceable, it is the specific intent of the parties that such provisions shall be modified to the minimum extent necessary to make it or its application valid and enforceable.

 

13.                                Notices .  Any notice required or permitted hereunder shall be given in writing and shall be deemed effectively given upon personal delivery, upon deposit for delivery by an internationally recognized express mail courier service or upon deposit in the United States mail by certified mail (if the parties are within the United States), with postage and fees prepaid, addressed to the other party at its address as shown in these instruments, or to such other address as such party may designate in writing from time to time to the other party.

 

14.                                Language .  If the Grantee has received this Agreement or any other document related to the Plan translated into a language other than English and if the translated version is different than the English version, the English version will control, unless otherwise prescribed by applicable law.

 

15.                                Amendment and Delay to Meet the Requirements of Section 409A .  The Grantee acknowledges that the Company, in the exercise of its sole discretion and without the consent of the Grantee, may amend or modify this Agreement in any manner and delay the issuance of any Shares issuable pursuant to this Agreement to the minimum extent necessary to meet the requirements of Section 409A of the Code as amplified by any Treasury regulations or guidance from the Internal Revenue Service as the Company deems appropriate or advisable.  In addition, the Company makes no representation that the Award will comply with Section 409A of the Code and makes no undertaking to prevent Section 409A of the Code from applying to the Award or to mitigate its effects on any deferrals

 

9



 

or payments made in respect of the Units.  The Grantee is encouraged to consult a tax adviser regarding the potential impact of Section 409A of the Code.

 

END OF AGREEMENT

 

10




Exhibit 10.13

 

 

SHAREHOLDERS VOTING AGREEMENT

 

THIS SHAREHOLDERS VOTING AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is made effective as of September 15, 2008 by and among MedAssurant, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), those persons identified on Exhibit A hereto (collectively, the “Majority Stockholders”), and the undersigned investor (the “Investor”) executing a counterpart signature page to this Agreement.

 

Recitals

 

A.                                     The Majority Stockholders own an aggregate of 20,756,760 shares of the Company’s Common Stock (representing approximately 79.5% of the issued and outstanding shares).

 

B.                                     The Investor is purchasing an aggregate of 4,016,932 newly-issued shares of the Company’s Common Stock (the “Hoffmann Shares”).

 

C.                                     In connection with the consummation of the Financing, the Company, the Majority Stockholders and the Investor has agreed to provide for the future voting of their shares of the Company’s capital stock and other matters as set forth below.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

 

1.                                       Voting .

 

1.1          Common Shares; Investor Shares .

 

(a)           The Majority Stockholders each agree to hold all shares of voting capital stock of the Company now owned or hereafter acquired by them, registered in their name or beneficially owned by it or them as of the date hereof (and any and all other securities of the Company legally or beneficially acquired by it or them after the date hereof) (hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Majority Stockholders Shares”) subject to, and to vote the Majority Stockholders Shares in accordance with, the provisions of this Agreement.

 

(b)           The Investor agrees to hold all shares of voting capital stock of the Company now owned or hereafter acquired by it (including the Hoffmann Shares), registered in its names or beneficially owned as of the date hereof (and any and all other securities of the Company legally or beneficially acquired by the Investor after the date hereof) (hereinafter

 



 

MedAssurant, Inc.

Hoffmann Board Position Shareholders Voting Agreement

Page 2 of 7

 

collectively referred to as the “Investor Shares”) subject to, and to vote the Investor Shares in accordance with, the provisions of this Agreement.

 

1.2          Election of Directors .  On all matters relating to the election of directors of the Company, the Majority Stockholders and the Investor agree to vote all Majority Stockholders Shares and Investor Shares held by them (or the holders thereof shall consent pursuant to an action by written consent of shareholders) so as to elect Andre Hoffmann (or such other individual mutually agreed to between Andre Hoffmann (or his estate) and the holders of a majority of the shares of Common Stock held by all the Majority Stockholders) to the Company’s Board of Directors.

 

1.3          Legend .

 

(a)           Concurrently with the execution of this Agreement or thereafter as appropriate, the following restrictive legend shall be imprinted or otherwise placed, on certificates representing the Majority Stockholders Shares and the Investor Shares the following restrictive legend (the “Legend”):

 

THE SHARES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE ARE SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF A SHAREHOLDERS AGREEMENT AMONG THE COMPANY AND CERTAIN HOLDERS OF SHARES OF THE COMPANY, WHICH PLACES CERTAIN RESTRICTIONS ON THE VOTING OF THE SHARES REPRESENTED HEREBY.  ANY PERSON ACCEPTING ANY INTEREST IN SUCH SHARES SHALL BE DEEMED TO AGREE TO AND SHALL BECOME BOUND BY ALL THE PROVISIONS OF SUCH AGREEMENT.  A COPY OF SUCH SHAREHOLDERS AGREEMENT WILL BE FURNISHED TO THE RECORD HOLDER OF THIS CERTIFICATE WITHOUT CHARGE UPON WRITTEN REQUEST TO THE COMPANY AT ITS PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS.

 

(b)           The Company agrees that, during the term of this Agreement, it will not remove, and will not permit to be removed (upon registration of transfer, reissuance of otherwise), the Legend from any such certificate and will place or cause to be placed the Legend on any new certificate issued to represent Majority Stockholders Shares or Investor Shares theretofore represented by a certificate carrying the Legend.

 

1.4          Successors .  The provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon the successors in interest to any of the Majority Stockholders Shares or Investor Shares.  The Company shall not permit the transfer of any of the Majority Stockholders Shares or Investor Shares on its books or issue a new certificate representing any of the Majority Stockholders Shares or Investor Shares unless and until the person to whom such security is to be transferred shall have executed a written agreement, substantially in the form of this Agreement, pursuant to

 



 

MedAssurant, Inc.

Hoffmann Board Position Shareholders Voting Agreement

Page 3 of 7

 

which such person becomes a party to this Agreement and agrees to be bound by all the provisions hereof as if such person were a Majority Stockholder or an Investor, as applicable.

 

1.5          Other Rights .  Except as provided by this Agreement, each of the Majority Stockholders and the Investor shall exercise the full rights of a shareholder with respect to the Majority Stockholders Shares and the Investor Shares, respectively.

 

2.                                       Termination .

 

2.1          This Agreement shall continue in full force and effect from the date hereof through the earliest of the following dates, on which it shall terminate in its entirety (unless otherwise indicated):

 

(a)           as to each of the following as set forth below:

 

(i)            as to the Investor (and its permitted assigns), at such time as the Investor (and its permitted assigns) owns less than 10% of the equity of the company on a fully diluted basis.

 

(ii)           as to the Majority Stockholders (and their permitted assigns), at such time as the Majority Stockholders (or their permitted assigns) in the aggregate, own less than 50% of the equity of the company on a fully diluted basis;

 

(b)           ten years from the date of this Agreement; provided, however, that the parties hereto shall agree to terminate this Agreement in accordance with Section 2.1(c) below on the date of the closing of an underwritten public offering on a firm commitment basis pursuant to an effective registration statement (other than on Form S-4 or S-8 on any successor forms thereto) filed pursuant to the Securities Act covering the offer and sale of Common Stock for the account of the Company (a “Qualified Public Offering”), in the event that the lead underwriter of such offering indicates to the parties that the survival of this Agreement after the closing of such offering would materially adversely impact the marketing of the offering and a replacement lead underwriter that agrees to the survival of this Agreement and that is reasonably acceptable to the parties hereto cannot be engaged to complete the offering within its reasonable time requirements.

 

(c)           the date as of which the parties hereto terminate this Agreement by written consent of the Majority Stockholders (and their permitted assigns) owning a majority of the then outstanding Majority Stockholders Shares and the Investor (and its permitted assigns).

 

3.                                       Miscellaneous .

 

3.1          Ownership .  Each Majority Stockholder represents and warrants that (a) he now owns the Common Shares, free and clear of liens or encumbrances, and has not, prior to or on the date of this Agreement, executed or delivered any proxy or entered into any other voting agreement or similar arrangement other than one which has expired or terminated prior to or on

 



 

MedAssurant, Inc.

Hoffmann Board Position Shareholders Voting Agreement

Page 4 of 7

 

the execution hereof, and (b) such Majority Stockholder has full power and capacity to execute, deliver and perform this Agreement, which has been duly executed and delivered by, and evidences the valid and binding obligation of, such Majority Stockholder enforceable against such Majority Stockholder in accordance with its terms.  The Investor represents and warrants that (a) it now owns the Hoffmann Shares, free and clear of liens or encumbrances, and has not, prior to or on the date of this Agreement, executed or delivered any proxy or entered into any other voting agreement or similar arrangement other than one which has expired or terminated prior to or on the execution hereof, and (b) it has full power and capacity to execute, deliver and perform this Agreement, which has been duly executed and delivered by, and evidences the valid and binding obligation of, the Investor enforceable against it in accordance with its terms.

 

3.2          Further Action .  If and whenever any of the shares of Common Stock or Hoffmann Shares are sold, the Majority Stockholders or the Investor, as applicable, or their respective personal representatives shall do all things and execute and deliver all documents and make all transfers, and cause any transferee of the shares of Common Stock or the Hoffmann Shares, as the case may be, to do all things and execute and deliver all documents, as may be necessary to consummate such sale consistent with this Agreement.

 

3.3          Specific Performance .  The parties hereto hereby declare that it is impossible to measure in money the damages which will accrue to a party hereto or to their heirs, personal representatives, successors or assigns by reason of the failure of a party to perform any of the obligations under this Agreement and agree that the terms of this Agreement shall be specifically enforceable.  If any party hereto or his heirs, personal representatives, or assigns institutes any action or proceeding to specifically enforce the provisions hereof, any person against whom such action or proceeding is brought hereby waives the claim or defense therein that such party or such personal representative has an adequate remedy at law, and such person shall not offer in any such action or proceeding the claim or defense that such remedy at law exists.

 

3.4          Additional Shares .  In the event that subsequent to the date of this Agreement any shares or other securities (other than any shares or securities of another corporation issued to the Company’s shareholders pursuant to a plan of merger) are issued on, or in exchange for, any of the Majority Stockholders Shares or Investor Shares by reason of any stock dividend, stock split, consolidation of shares, reclassification or consolidation involving the Company, such shares or securities shall be deemed to be Majority Stockholders Shares or Investor Shares, as the case may be, for purposes of this Agreement.

 

3.5          Waiver .  No waivers of any breach of this Agreement extended by any party hereto to any other party shall be construed as a waiver of any rights or remedies of any other party hereto or with respect to any subsequent breach.

 

3.6          Governing Law .  This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware as to matters within the scope thereof, and as to all other matters shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of the State of Maryland, without regard to its principles of conflicts of laws.

 



 

MedAssurant, Inc.

Hoffmann Board Position Shareholders Voting Agreement

Page 5 of 7

 

3.7          Counterparts .  This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument.  This Agreement may also be executed and delivered by facsimile signature and in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument.

 

3.8          Notices.  All notices and other communications given or made pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed effectively given: (a) upon personal delivery to the party to be notified, (b) when sent by confirmed electronic mail or facsimile if sent during normal business hours of the recipient, and if not so confirmed, then on the next business day, ( c) five days after having been sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or ( d) one day after deposit with a nationally recognized overnight courier, specifying next day delivery, with written verification of receipt.  All communications shall be sent to the respective parties at their address as set forth on the signature page on the counterpart signature page for a Purchaser, or to such e-mail address, facsimile number or address as subsequently modified by written notice given in accordance with this Section 6.5.

 

3.9          Severability .  The invalidity of unenforceability of any provision hereof shall in no way affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.

 

3.10        Entire Agreement.  This Agreement (including the Exhibits hereto, if any), the Certificate of Designation and the other transaction agreements constitute the full and entire understanding and agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and any other written or oral agreement relating to the subject matter hereof existing between the parties are expressly canceled.

 

3.11        Dispute Resolution.  Any unresolved controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this Agreement, except as (i) otherwise provided in this Agreement, or (ii) any such controversies or claims arising out of either party’s intellectual property rights for which a provisional remedy or equitable relief is sought, shall be submitted to arbitration by one arbitrator mutually agreed upon by the parties, and if no agreement can be reached within 30 days after names of potential arbitrators have been proposed by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), then by one arbitrator having reasonable experience in corporate finance transactions of the type provided for in this Agreement and who is chosen by the AAA.  The arbitration shall take place in Annapolis, Maryland, United States, in accordance with the AAA rules then in effect, and judgment upon any award rendered in such arbitration will be binding and may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof.  There shall be limited discovery prior to the arbitration hearing as follows: (a) exchange of witness lists and copies of documentary evidence and documents relating to or arising out of the issues to be arbitrated, (b) depositions of all party witnesses and (c) such other depositions as may be allowed by the arbitrators upon a showing of good cause.  Depositions shall be conducted in accordance with the Maryland Code of Civil Procedure, the arbitrator shall be required to provide in writing to the parties the basis for the award or order of such arbitrator, and a court reporter shall record all hearings, with such record constituting the official transcript of such proceedings.  The prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorney’s fees, costs, and necessary

 



 

MedAssurant, Inc.

Hoffmann Board Position Shareholders Voting Agreement

Page 6 of 7

 

disbursements in addition to any other relief to which such party may be entitled.  Each of the parties to this Agreement consents to personal jurisdiction for any equitable action sought in the U.S. District Court for the District of Maryland or any court of the State of Maryland having subject matter jurisdiction.

 

[Signature Page Follows]

 



 

MedAssurant, Inc.

Hoffmann Board Position Shareholders Voting Agreement

Page 7 of 7

 

The parties have executed this Shareholders Voting Agreement as of the date first written above.

 

 

 

 

MedAssurant, Inc.:

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Keith R. Dunleavy

 

 

 

Keith R. Dunleavy

 

 

 

President

 

 

 

 

Investor:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CAPE VENTURES SAC LIMITED

 

 

 

- Segregated Account Cape Healthcare

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Edward Allanby

 

 

 

Name: Edward Allanby

 

 

 

Title: Director

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Majority Stockholders:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Founding Corporate Group, Inc.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Keith R. Dunleavy

 

 

 

 

Keith R. Dunleavy, President

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Richard Lasch

 

 

 

Richard Lasch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Grey McLean

 

 

 

Grey McLean

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Daniel Rizzo

 

 

 

Daniel Rizzo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

/s/ Raymond Walheim

 

 

 

Raymond Walheim

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FCG Holdings, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Keith R. Dunleavy

 

 

 

 

Keith R. Dunleavy, Manager

 

 

 

 



 

COMPANY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

 

MedAssurant, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), acknowledging the foregoing Shareholders Voting Agreement (the “Hoffmann Voting Agreement”) by and among the Company, those Majority Stockholders identified on Exhibit A thereto, and Cape Ventures SAC Limited, Segregated Account Cape Healthcare, collectively, the “Parties’’, and hereby confirms that the Hoffmann Voting Agreement does not violate the provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law (“DGCL”) or any other agreement to which the Parties are bound.  The Company hereby further agrees that is will adhere to the determinations of the Parties and to the fullest extent permitted under the DGCL will recommend those nominees of the Parties to the stockholders of the Company.

 

 

MedAssurant, Inc.:

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Keith R. Dunleavy

 

 

Keith R. Dunleavy

 

 

President

 




Exhibit 10.14

 

CREDIT AND GUARANTY AGREEMENT

 

 

dated as of September 19, 2014

 

 

among

 

 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.,

 

as Borrower,

 

 

CERTAIN SUBSIDIARIES OF BORROWER,

 

as Guarantors,

 

 

VARIOUS LENDERS,

 

 

GOLDMAN SACHS BANK USA,
MORGAN STANLEY SENIOR FUNDING, INC.,
CITIGROUP GLOBAL MARKETS INC.,
MERRILL LYNCH, PIERCE, FENNER & SMITH INCORPORATED, and
UBS SECURITIES LLC

 

as Joint Lead Arrangers and Joint Lead Bookrunners,

 

 

and

 

 

GOLDMAN SACHS BANK USA,

 

as Administrative Agent,

 


 

$300,000,000 Term Loan Facility and $100,000,000 Revolving Loan Facility

 


 

 



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

SECTION 1.

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1

 

 

 

1.1

Definitions

1

1.2

Accounting Terms

1

1.3

Interpretation, Etc.

1

 

 

 

SECTION 2.

LOANS

2

 

 

 

2.1

Term Loans

2

2.2

Revolving Loans

2

2.3

Pro Rata Shares; Availability of Funds

3

2.4

Use of Proceeds

4

2.5

Evidence of Debt; Register; Lenders’ Books and Records; Notes

4

2.6

Interest on Loans

5

2.7

Conversion/Continuation

6

2.8

Default Interest

6

2.9

Fees

7

2.10

Scheduled Term Loan Payments

7

2.11

Voluntary Prepayments/Commitment Reductions

8

2.12

Mandatory Prepayments/Commitment Reductions

9

2.13

Application of Prepayments/Reductions

10

2.14

General Provisions Regarding Payments

10

2.15

Ratable Sharing

11

2.16

Making or Maintaining Eurodollar Rate Loans

12

2.17

Increased Costs; Capital Adequacy

14

2.18

Taxes; Withholding, Etc.

15

2.19

Obligation to Mitigate

18

2.20

Defaulting Lenders

19

2.21

Removal or Replacement of a Lender

20

2.22

General Provisions Regarding Notices

21

 

 

 

SECTION 3.

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

21

 

 

 

3.1

Closing Date

21

3.2

Conditions Precedent to Each Loan

22

 

i



 

3.3

Determinations Under This Section 3

23

 

 

 

SECTION 4.

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

23

 

 

 

4.1

Corporate Existence and Power

23

4.2

Corporate and Governmental Authorization; No Contravention

23

4.3

Binding Effect

24

4.4

Financial Information

24

4.5

Litigation

24

4.6

Compliance with ERISA

24

4.7

Compliance with Laws and Agreements

25

4.8

Investment Company Act

25

4.9

Taxes

25

4.10

Federal Reserve Regulations

25

4.11

Solvency

26

4.12

Accuracy of Information

26

 

 

 

SECTION 5.

COVENANTS

26

 

 

 

5.1

Information

26

5.2

Conduct of Business and Maintenance of Existence and Insurance

28

5.3

Minimum Liquidity

28

5.4

Indebtedness

28

5.5

Liens

28

5.6

Compliance with Laws

30

5.7

Inspection of Property, Books and Records

30

5.8

Payment of Obligations

30

5.9

Guarantors

31

5.10

Security

31

5.11

No Further Negative Pledges

31

5.12

Consolidation or Merger

31

 

 

 

SECTION 6.

GUARANTY

32

 

 

 

6.1

Guaranty of the Obligations

32

6.2

Contribution by Guarantors

32

6.3

Payment by Guarantors

33

6.4

Liability of Guarantors Absolute

33

6.5

Waivers by Guarantors

35

 

ii



 

6.6

Guarantors’ Rights of Subrogation, Contribution, Etc.

35

6.7

Subordination of Other Obligations

36

6.8

Continuing Guaranty

36

6.9

Authority of Guarantors or Borrower

36

6.10

Financial Condition of Borrower

36

6.11

Bankruptcy, Etc.

37

6.12

Discharge of Guaranty Upon Sale of Guarantor

37

 

 

 

SECTION 7.

EVENTS OF DEFAULT

37

 

 

 

7.1

Events of Default:

37

7.2

Rights and Remedies

39

7.3

Notice of Default

40

7.4

Preservation of Certain Rights and Remedies

40

 

 

 

SECTION 8.

AGENTS

40

 

 

 

8.1

Appointment of Agents

40

8.2

Powers and Duties

40

8.3

General Immunity

40

8.4

Agents Entitled to Act as Lender

42

8.5

Lenders’ Representations, Warranties and Acknowledgment

42

8.6

Right to Indemnity

42

8.7

Successor Administrative Agent

43

8.8

Pledge Agreement and Guaranty

43

8.9

Administrative Agent May File Bankruptcy Disclosure and Proofs of Claim

44

8.10

Withholding Taxes

45

 

 

 

SECTION 9.

MISCELLANEOUS

45

 

 

 

9.1

Notices

45

9.2

Expenses

47

9.3

Indemnity

48

9.4

Set-Off

48

9.5

Amendments and Waivers

49

9.6

Successors and Assigns; Participations

51

9.7

Independence of Covenants

55

9.8

Survival of Representations, Warranties and Agreements

55

 

iii



 

9.9

No Waiver; Remedies Cumulative

55

9.10

Marshalling; Payments Set Aside

56

9.11

Severability

56

9.12

Obligations Several; Independent Nature of Lenders’ Rights

56

9.13

Headings

56

9.14

Applicable Law

56

9.15

Consent to Jurisdiction

56

9.16

Waiver of Jury Trial

57

9.17

Confidentiality

57

9.18

Usury Savings Clause

59

9.19

Effectiveness; Counterparts

60

9.20

Entire Agreement

60

9.21

PATRIOT Act

60

9.22

Electronic Execution of Assignments

60

9.23

No Fiduciary Duty

60

 

iv



 

APPENDICES:

 

A-1

 

Term Loan Commitments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-2

 

Revolving Loan Commitments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B-1

 

Notice Addresses

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEDULES:

 

1.1

 

Definitions

 

 

 

 

 

EXHIBITS:

 

A-1

 

Borrowing Notice

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-2

 

Conversion/Continuation Notice

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B-1

 

Term Loan Note

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B-2

 

Revolving Loan Note

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

 

Assignment Agreement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D-1

 

U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate (Foreign Lenders That Are Not Partnerships)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D-2

 

U.S. Tax Compliance Certificates (Foreign Participants That Are Not Partnerships)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D-3

 

U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate (Foreign Participants That Are Partnerships)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D-4

 

U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate (Foreign Lenders That Are Partnerships)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

E

 

Disclosure Schedule

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

F

 

Pledge Agreement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

G

 

Counterpart Agreement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

H

 

Compliance Certificate

 

v


 

CREDIT AND GUARANTY AGREEMENT

 

This CREDIT AND GUARANTY AGREEMENT , dated as of September 19, 2014, is entered into by and among INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC. (the “Borrower” ), a Delaware corporation, CERTAIN SUBSIDIARIES OF BORROWER , as Guarantors, the Lenders party to this Agreement from time to time, GOLDMAN SACHS BANK USA ( “Goldman Sachs” ), as Administrative Agent (together with its permitted successors in such capacity, “Administrative Agent” ), and Goldman Sachs, MORGAN STANLEY SENIOR FUNDING, INC., CITIGROUP GLOBAL MARKETS INC., MERRILL LYNCH, PIERCE, FENNER & SMITH INCORPORATED and UBS SECURITIES LLC , as Joint Lead Arrangers and Joint Bookrunners (collectively, in such capacities, the “Arrangers” ).

 

RECITALS:

 

A.  Lenders have agreed to extend certain credit facilities to Borrower, in an aggregate principal amount not to exceed $400,000,000, consisting of $300,000,000 aggregate principal amount of Term Loans and up to $100,000,000 aggregate principal amount of Revolving Loan Commitments, the proceeds of which will be used for working capital and general corporate purposes of Borrower and its direct and indirect subsidiaries from time to time, with the proceeds of the Term Loans being principally used for purposes of financing certain redemptions of Borrower’s Equity Interests by Borrower.

 

B.  Guarantors have agreed to guarantee the obligations of Borrower under this Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the agreements, provisions and covenants contained in this Agreement, the parties agree as follows:

 

SECTION 1.                          DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1                                Definitions .  Capitalized terms used in this Agreement have the respective meanings assigned to them, or as otherwise specified, in Schedule 1.1 .

 

1.2                                Accounting Terms .  Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, all accounting terms not otherwise defined in this Agreement have the meanings assigned to them in conformity with GAAP.  Financial statements and other information required to be delivered by Borrower to Lenders under Sections 5.1(a) and 5.1(b) will be prepared, and all financial and accounting computations will be made in accordance with GAAP and without duplication, in each case in accordance with GAAP as in effect at the time of such preparation.  If at any time any change in GAAP would affect the computation of any financial ratio or requirement set forth in any Credit Document, and Borrower so requests, Administrative Agent and Borrower will negotiate in good faith to amend such ratio or requirement to preserve the original intent thereof in light of such change in GAAP (subject to the approval of Requisite Lenders).  Until so amended, such ratio or requirement will continue to be computed in conformity with those accounting principles and policies used to prepare the Historical Financial Statements.

 

1.3                                Interpretation, Etc.   Any of the terms defined in this Agreement may, unless the context otherwise requires, be used in the singular or the plural, depending on the reference.  References to any Section, Appendix, Schedule or Exhibit mean a Section, an Appendix, a Schedule or an Exhibit, as the case may be, to this Agreement (and are included in the term “Agreement”), unless otherwise specifically provided.  The use of the word “include” or “including”, when following any general statement, term or matter, does not limit such statement, term or matter to the specific items or matters set forth immediately following such word or to similar items or matters, whether or not non-limiting language (such as “without limitation” or “but not limited to” or words of similar import) is used with reference thereto, but

 



 

rather refers to all other items or matters that fall within the broadest possible scope of such general statement, term or matter.  The terms lease and license include sub-lease and sub-license, as applicable.  When used in the context of a Default or an Event of Default, the term “and continuing” or any derivative thereof means that such Default or Event of Default has not been cured prior to the time when Administrative Agent or the Requisite Lenders exercise or waive their respective rights or remedies under this Agreement with respect to such Default or Event of Default, and no such Default or Event of Default will be deemed to be continuing if it is cured prior to the time of any such waiver or exercise.

 

SECTION 2.                          LOANS

 

2.1                                Term Loans.

 

(a)                                  Loan Commitments .  Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, each Lender severally agrees to make, in a single borrowing on the Closing Date, a Term Loan to Borrower in an amount equal to such Lender’s Term Loan Commitment.  Any amount borrowed under this Section 2.1(a) and subsequently repaid or prepaid may not be reborrowed.  Borrower will pay in full all amounts (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made) owed with respect to the Term Loans on or before the Maturity Date applicable to the Term Loans.  Each Lender’s Term Loan Commitment terminates immediately and without further action on the Closing Date, after giving effect to the funding of such Lender’s Term Loan Commitment on such date.

 

(b)                                  Borrowing Mechanics for Term Loans.

 

(i)                                      Borrower will deliver to Administrative Agent a fully executed Borrowing Notice no later than (x) the Closing Date with respect to Base Rate Loans and (y) three (3) Business Days prior to the Closing Date with respect to Eurodollar Rate Loans (or such shorter period as may be acceptable to Administrative Agent).  When Administrative Agent receives this Borrowing Notice, Administrative Agent will promptly notify each Lender of the proposed borrowing.

 

(ii)                                   Each Lender will make its Term Loan available to Administrative Agent not later than 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the Closing Date by wire transfer of same day funds in Dollars, at the principal office designated by Administrative Agent.  Upon satisfaction or waiver of the conditions precedent specified in this Agreement, Administrative Agent will make the proceeds of the Term Loans available to Borrower on the Closing Date by causing an amount of same day funds in Dollars equal to the proceeds of all such Loans received by Administrative Agent from Lenders to be credited to the account of Borrower at the Principal Office designated by Administrative Agent or to such other account as may be designated in writing to Administrative Agent by Borrower.

 

2.2                                Revolving Loans .

 

(a)                                  Revolving Loan Commitments .  During the Revolving Loan Commitment Period, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, each Lender severally agrees to make Revolving Loans to Borrower in an aggregate amount up to but not exceeding such Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitment, so long as after giving effect to the making of any Revolving Loans in no event will the Total Utilization of Revolving Loan Commitments exceed the Revolving Loan Commitments then in effect.  Amounts borrowed under this Section 2.2(a) may be repaid and reborrowed during the Revolving Loan Commitment Period.  Each Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitment will expire on the Revolving Loan Commitment Termination Date and (i) all Revolving Loans and (ii) other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made, all other amounts owed under this Agreement

 

2



 

with respect to the Revolving Loans and the Revolving Loan Commitments will be paid in full no later than such date.

 

(b)                                  Borrowing Mechanics for Revolving Loans .

 

(i)                                      Borrower will borrow Revolving Loans in an aggregate minimum amount of $1,000,000 and integral multiples of $1,000,000 in excess of such amount, except that no minimum borrowing amount (or minimum integral multiple in excess thereof) will apply at any time when the entire remaining amount of Revolving Loan Commitments then outstanding is being drawn by Borrower at such time.

 

(ii)                                   Subject to Section 2.22, whenever Borrower desires to borrow Revolving Loans, Borrower will deliver to Administrative Agent a fully executed Borrowing Notice no later than 10:00 a.m. (New York City time) at least three (3) Business Days in advance of the proposed Borrowing Date in the case of a Eurodollar Rate Loan, and at least one (1) Business Day in advance of the proposed Borrowing Date in the case of a Revolving Loan that is a Base Rate Loan; except that, if such Borrowing Date is the Closing Date, such Borrowing Notice may be delivered on the Closing Date with respect to Base Rate Loans and such period shorter than three (3) Business Days as may be agreed by Administrative Agent with respect to Eurodollar Rate Loans.  Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, a Borrowing Notice for a Revolving Loan that is a Eurodollar Rate Loan will be irrevocable on and after the related Interest Rate Determination Date, and Borrower will be bound to accept a Borrowing in accordance therewith.

 

(iii)                                Notice of receipt of each Borrowing Notice in respect of Revolving Loans, together with the amount of each Lender’s Pro Rata Share thereof, if any, together with the applicable interest rate, will be provided by Administrative Agent to each applicable Lender by telefacsimile with reasonable promptness, but (so long as Administrative Agent has received such notice by 10:00 a.m. (New York City time)) not later than 3:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the same day as Administrative Agent’s receipt of such Notice from Borrower.

 

(iv)                               Each Lender will make the amount of its Revolving Loan available to Administrative Agent not later than 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the applicable Borrowing Date by wire transfer of same day funds in Dollars, at the Principal Office of Administrative Agent.  Except as provided in this Agreement, upon satisfaction or waiver of the conditions precedent specified in this Agreement, Administrative Agent will make the proceeds of such Revolving Loans available to Borrower on the applicable Borrowing Date by causing an amount of same day funds in Dollars equal to the proceeds of all such Revolving Loans received by Administrative Agent from Lenders to be credited to the account of Borrower at the Principal Office designated by Administrative Agent or such other account as may be designated in writing to Administrative Agent by Borrower.

 

2.3                                Pro Rata Shares; Availability of Funds .

 

(a)                                  Pro Rata Shares .  Lenders will make all Loans simultaneously and proportionately to their respective Pro Rata Shares, it being understood that no Lender will be responsible for any default by any other Lender in such other Lender’s obligation to make a Loan requested under this Agreement, nor will any Term Loan Commitment or any Revolving Loan Commitment of any Lender be increased or decreased as a result of any such default by any other Lender.

 

(b)                                  Availability of Funds .  Unless Administrative Agent is notified by any Lender prior to the applicable Borrowing Date that such Lender does not intend to make available to

 

3



 

Administrative Agent the amount of such Lender’s Loan requested on such Borrowing Date, Administrative Agent may assume that such Lender has made such amount available to Administrative Agent on such Borrowing Date and Administrative Agent may, in its sole discretion, but will not be obligated to, make available to Borrower a corresponding amount on such Borrowing Date.  If such corresponding amount is not in fact made available to Administrative Agent by such Lender, Administrative Agent will be entitled to recover such corresponding amount on demand from such Lender together with interest thereon, for each day from such Borrowing Date until the date such amount is paid to Administrative Agent, at the customary rate set by Administrative Agent for the correction of errors among banks for three (3) Business Days and, after such third Business Day, at the Base Rate.  If (i) Administrative Agent declines to make a requested amount available to Borrower until such time as all applicable Lenders have made payment to Administrative Agent, (ii) a Lender fails to fund to Administrative Agent all or any portion of the Loans required to be funded by such Lender under this Agreement prior to the time specified in this Agreement and (iii) such Lender’s failure results in Administrative Agent failing to make a corresponding amount available to Borrower on the Borrowing Date, at Administrative Agent’s option, such Lender will not receive interest under this Agreement with respect to the requested amount of such Lender’s Loans for the period commencing with the time specified in this Agreement for receipt of payment by Borrower through and including the time of Borrower’s receipt of the requested amount.  If such Lender does not pay such corresponding amount forthwith upon Administrative Agent’s demand therefor, Administrative Agent will promptly notify Borrower and Borrower will immediately pay such corresponding amount to Administrative Agent together with interest thereon, for each day from such Borrowing Date until the date such amount is paid to Administrative Agent, at the then-current interest rate applicable to the portion of the Loan that such Lender failed to fund.  Nothing in this Section 2.3(b) will be deemed to relieve any Lender from its obligation to fulfill its Term Loan Commitments and Revolving Loan Commitments under this Agreement or to prejudice any rights that Borrower may have against any Lender as a result of any default by such Lender under this Agreement.

 

2.4                                Use of Proceeds.   The proceeds of the Loans will be used for working capital and general corporate purposes of Borrower and its direct and indirect subsidiaries from time to time, with the  proceeds of the Term Loans being principally used for purposes of financing certain redemptions of Borrower’s Equity Interests by Borrower.

 

2.5                                Evidence of Debt; Register; Lenders’ Books and Records; Notes.

 

(a)                                  Lenders’ Evidence of Debt .  Each Lender will maintain on its internal records an account or accounts evidencing the Obligations of Borrower to such Lender, including the amounts of the Loans made by it and each repayment and prepayment in respect thereof.  Any such recordation will be conclusive and binding on Borrower, absent manifest error.  The failure to make any such recordation, or any error in such recordation, will not affect any Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitments or Borrower’s Obligations in respect of any applicable Loans, and, if of any inconsistency between the Register and any Lender’s records, the recordations in the Register will govern.

 

(b)                                  Register .  Administrative Agent (or its agent or sub-agent appointed by it) will maintain at its Principal Office a register for the recordation of the names and addresses of Lenders and the Revolving Loan Commitments and Loans of each Lender from time to time (the “Register” ).  The Register will be available for inspection by Borrower or any Lender (with respect to (i) any entry relating to such Lender’s Loans and (ii) the identity of the other Lender’s (but not any information with respect to such other Lenders’ Loans).  Administrative Agent will record, or will cause to be recorded, in the Register the Revolving Loan Commitments and the Loans in accordance with the provisions of Section 9.6, and each repayment or prepayment in respect of the principal amount of the Loans, and any such recordation will be conclusive and binding on Borrower and each Lender, absent manifest error.  Failure

 

4



 

to make any such recordation, or any error in such recordation, will not affect any Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitments or Borrower’s Obligations in respect of any Loan.  Borrower hereby designates Administrative Agent to serve as Borrower’s agent solely for purposes of maintaining the Register as provided in this Section 2.5(b), and Borrower hereby agrees that, to the extent Administrative Agent serves in such capacity, Administrative Agent and its officers, directors, employees, agents, sub-agents and affiliates will constitute “Indemnitees.”

 

(c)                                   Notes .  If so requested by any Lender by written notice to Borrower (with a copy to Administrative Agent) at least three (3) Business Days prior to the Closing Date, or at any time after the Closing Date, Borrower will execute and deliver to such Lender (and/or, if applicable and if so specified in such notice, to any Person who is an assignee of such Lender under Section 9.6) on the Closing Date (or, if such notice is delivered after the Closing Date, promptly after Borrower’s receipt of such notice) a Note or Notes to evidence such Lender’s Term Loan or Revolving Loan, as the case may be.

 

2.6                                Interest on Loans .

 

(a)                                  Except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement, each Type of Loan will bear interest on the unpaid principal amount thereof from the date such Loan is made through repayment (whether by acceleration or otherwise) thereof as follows:

 

(i)                                      if a Base Rate Loan, at the Base Rate plus the Applicable Margin; or

 

(ii)                                   if a Eurodollar Rate Loan, at the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate plus the Applicable Margin.

 

(b)                                  The basis for determining the rate of interest with respect to any Loan, and the Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Rate Loan, will be selected by Borrower and notified to Administrative Agent and Lenders through the applicable Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice, as the case may be.

 

(c)                                   In connection with Eurodollar Rate Loans there will be no more than five (5) Interest Periods outstanding at any time.  If Borrower fails to specify between a Base Rate Loan and a Eurodollar Rate Loan in the applicable Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice, then Borrower will be deemed to have requested a Eurodollar Rate Loan having an Interest Period of thirty (30) days.  If Borrower fails to specify an Interest Period for any Eurodollar Rate Loan in the applicable Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice, then Borrower will be deemed to have selected an Interest Period of thirty (30) days.  As soon as practicable after 10:00 a.m. (New York City time) on each Interest Rate Determination Date, Administrative Agent will determine (which determination will, absent manifest error, be final, conclusive and binding upon all parties) the interest rate that will apply to the Eurodollar Rate Loans for which an interest rate is then being determined for the applicable Interest Period and will promptly give notice thereof (in writing or by telephone confirmed in a writing delivered promptly thereafter) to Borrower and each Lender.

 

(d)                                  Interest payable under Section 2.6(a) will be computed (i) in the case of Base Rate Loans on the basis of a 360-day year (or, in the case of Base Rate Loans determined by reference to the “Prime Rate,” a 365-day or 366-day year, as applicable), and (ii) in the case of Eurodollar Rate Loans, on the basis of a 360-day year, in each case for the actual number of days elapsed in the period during which it accrues.  In computing interest on any Loan, the date of the making of such Loan or the first day of an Interest Period applicable to such Loan or, with respect to a Term Loan, the last Interest Payment Date with respect to such Term Loan or, with respect to a Base Rate Loan being converted from a

 

5



 

Eurodollar Rate Loan, the date of conversion of such Eurodollar Rate Loan to such Base Rate Loan, as the case may be, will be included, and the date of payment of such Loan or the expiration date of an Interest Period applicable to such Loan or, with respect to a Base Rate Loan being converted to a Eurodollar Rate Loan, the date of conversion of such Base Rate Loan to such Eurodollar Rate Loan, as the case may be, will be excluded.  If a Loan is repaid on the same day on which it is made, one (1) day’s interest will be paid on that Loan.

 

(e)                                   Except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement, interest on each Loan (i) will accrue on a daily basis and will be payable in arrears on each Interest Payment Date with respect to interest accrued on and to each such payment date; (ii) will accrue on a daily basis and will be payable in arrears upon any prepayment of that Loan, whether voluntary or mandatory, to the extent accrued on the amount being prepaid; and (iii) will accrue on a daily basis and will be payable in arrears at maturity of the Loans, including final maturity of the Loans; however, with respect to any voluntary prepayment of a Base Rate Loan, accrued interest will instead be payable on the applicable Interest Payment Date.

 

2.7                                Conversion/Continuation .

 

(a)                                  Subject to Section 2.16 and so long as no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is then continuing, Borrower will have the option:

 

(i)                                      to convert at any time all or any part of any Loan equal to $1,000,000 and integral multiples of $1,000,000 in excess of such amount (or, if less than $1,000,000, the entire principal amount of such Loan then outstanding) from one Type of Loan to another Type of Loan.  A Eurodollar Rate Loan may only be converted on the expiration of the Interest Period applicable to such Eurodollar Rate Loan unless Borrower pays all amounts due under Section 2.16(c) in connection with any such conversion; or

 

(ii)                                   upon the expiration of any Interest Period applicable to any Eurodollar Rate Loan, to continue all or any portion of such Loan equal to $1,000,000 and integral multiples of $1,000,000 in excess of such amount (or, if less than $1,000,000, the entire principal amount of such Eurodollar Rate Loan then outstanding).

 

(b)                                  Subject to Section 2.22, Borrower will deliver a Conversion/Continuation Notice to Administrative Agent no later than 10:00 a.m. (New York City time) at least one (1) Business Day in advance of the proposed conversion date (in the case of a conversion to a Base Rate Loan) and at least three (3) Business Days in advance of the proposed conversion/continuation date (in the case of a conversion to, or a continuation of, a Eurodollar Rate Loan).  Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, a Conversion/Continuation Notice for conversion to, or continuation of, any Eurodollar Rate Loans will be irrevocable on and after the related Interest Rate Determination Date, and Borrower will be bound to effect a conversion or continuation in accordance therewith.  If on any day a Loan is outstanding with respect to which a Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice has not been delivered to Administrative Agent in accordance with the terms of this Agreement specifying the applicable basis for determining the rate of interest, then such Loan will be deemed to be a Eurodollar Rate Loan having an Interest Period of thirty (30) days.

 

2.8                                Default Interest.   Upon the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default under Sections 7.1(a) or (b) (including any such Event of Default resulting from an event or occurrence of the type described in Sections 7.1(g) or (h)), (i) the overdue amounts that have given rise to such Event of Default will bear interest (including post-petition interest in any proceeding under Debtor Relief Laws) at a rate that is 2% per annum in excess of the rates of interest otherwise payable under this Agreement with respect to applicable Loans (or, in the case of any overdue fees or other amounts, at a

 

6



 

rate that is 2% per annum in excess of the rates of interest otherwise payable under this Agreement for Base Rate Loans), and (ii) in the case of Eurodollar Rate Loans, upon the expiration of the Interest Period in effect at the time any such increase in interest rate is effective such Eurodollar Rate Loans will become Base Rate Loans and will bear interest payable upon demand at a rate that is 2% per annum in excess of the rates of interest otherwise payable under this Agreement for Base Rate Loans.  Payment or acceptance of the increased rates of interest provided for in this Section 2.8 is not a permitted alternative to timely payment and will not constitute a waiver of any Event of Default or otherwise prejudice or limit any rights or remedies of Administrative Agent or any Lender.

 

2.9                                Fees .

 

(a)                                  Solely during the Revolving Loan Commitment Period and on the Revolving Loan Commitment Termination Date, in each case, as set forth in Section 2.9(b), Borrower agrees to pay to Lenders having Revolving Loan Exposure commitment fees equal to (1) the average of the daily difference between (A) the Revolving Loan Commitments and (B) the aggregate principal amount of all outstanding Revolving Loans, times (2) the Applicable Revolving Loan Commitment Fee Percentage.  All fees referred to in this Section 2.9(a) will be paid to Administrative Agent at its Principal Office and upon receipt, Administrative Agent will promptly distribute to each Lender its Pro Rata Share thereof.

 

(b)                                  All fees referred to in Section 2.9(a) will be calculated on the basis of a 360-day year and the actual number of days elapsed and will be payable quarterly in arrears on the last Business Day of March, June, September and December of each year during the Revolving Loan Commitment Period, commencing on the first such date to occur after the Revolving Loan Commitment Closing Date, and on the Revolving Loan Commitment Effective Date.

 

(c)                                   In addition to any of the foregoing fees, Borrower agrees to pay to Agents such other fees in the amounts and at the times as may be separately and mutually agreed upon in writing by Borrower and such Agents.

 

2.10                         Scheduled Term Loan Payments.   The principal amounts of the Term Loans will be repaid in consecutive quarterly installments and at final maturity (each such payment, an “Installment” ) in the aggregate amounts set forth below on the four quarterly scheduled Interest Payment Dates applicable to Term Loans, commencing March 31, 2015:

 

Amortization Date

 

Term Loan Installments

 

March 31, 2015

 

$

5,000,000

 

June 30, 2015

 

$

5,000,000

 

September 30, 2015

 

$

5,000,000

 

December 31, 2015

 

$

3,750,000

 

March 31, 2016

 

$

3,750,000

 

June 30, 2016

 

$

3,750,000

 

September 30, 2016

 

$

3,750,000

 

December 31, 2016

 

$

3,750,000

 

March 31, 2017

 

$

7,500,000

 

June 30, 2017

 

$

7,500,000

 

 

7



 

Amortization Date

 

Term Loan Installments

 

September 30, 2017

 

$

7,500,000

 

December 31, 2017

 

$

7,500,000

 

March 31, 2018

 

$

11,250,000

 

June 30, 2018

 

$

11,250,000

 

September 30, 2018

 

$

11,250,000

 

December 31, 2018

 

$

11,250,000

 

March 31, 2019

 

$

11,250,000

 

June 30, 2019

 

$

11,250,000

 

Maturity Date

 

Balance

 

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, (x) such Installments will be reduced in connection with any voluntary or mandatory prepayments of the Term Loans in accordance with Sections 2.11, 2.12 and 2.13, as applicable; and (y) the Term Loans, together with all other amounts owed under this Agreement with respect thereto, will, in any event, be paid in full no later than the Maturity Date applicable to the Term Loans (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made).

 

2.11                         Voluntary Prepayments/Commitment Reductions .

 

(a)                                  Voluntary Prepayments .

 

(i)                                      Voluntary prepayments of outstanding Loans may be made, on a Business Day, at any time and from time to time without premium or penalty, in whole or in part, so long as any partial payments are made in an aggregate minimum amount of $1,000,000 and integral multiples of $1,000,000 in excess of that amount; and

 

(i)                                      If Borrower elects to make a voluntary prepayment under this Agreement, it will:

 

(1)                                  provide not less than one (1) Business Day’s prior written or telephonic notice in the case of Base Rate Loans; and

 

(2)                                  provide not less than three (3) Business Days’ prior written or telephonic notice in the case of Eurodollar Rate Loans;

 

in each case given to Administrative Agent by 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the date required and, if given by telephone, promptly confirmed by delivery of written notice thereof to Administrative Agent (and Administrative Agent will promptly transmit such original notice for Term Loans or Revolving Loans, as the case may be, by telefacsimile or telephone to each Lender).  Upon the giving of any such notice, the principal amount of the Loans specified in such notice will become due and payable on the prepayment date specified therein.  Any such voluntary prepayment will be applied as specified in Section 2.13(a).

 

8



 

(b)                                  Voluntary Commitment Reductions .

 

(i)                                      Borrower may, upon not less than three (3) Business Days’ prior written or telephonic notice promptly confirmed by delivery of written notice thereof to Administrative Agent (which original written notice Administrative Agent will promptly transmit by telefacsimile or telephone to each applicable Lender), at any time and from time to time terminate in whole or permanently reduce in part, without premium or penalty, the Revolving Loan Commitments in an amount up to the amount by which the Revolving Loan Commitments exceed the Total Utilization of Revolving Loan Commitments at the time of such proposed termination or reduction.  Any such partial reduction of the Revolving Loan Commitments will be in an aggregate minimum amount of $1,000,000 and integral multiples of $1,000,000 in excess of such amount  (or, if less than $1,000,000, the entire remaining amount Revolving Loan Commitments then outstanding).

 

(ii)                                   Borrower’s notice to Administrative Agent will designate the date (which will be a Business Day) of such termination or reduction and the amount of any partial reduction, and such termination or reduction of the Revolving Loan Commitments will be effective on the date specified in Borrower’s notice and will reduce the Revolving Loan Commitment of each Lender proportionately to its Pro Rata Share thereof.

 

2.12                         Mandatory Prepayments/Commitment Reductions.

 

(a)                                  Asset Sales .  No later than the fifth (5th) Business Day following the date of receipt by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries of any Net Asset Sale Proceeds, Borrower will prepay the Term Loans as set forth in Section 2.13(b) to the extent that aggregate Net Asset Sale Proceeds from the Closing Date through the applicable date of determination exceed $200,000,000; except that, upon written notice to Administrative Agent on or prior to such fifth (5th) Business Day, Borrower will have the option, so long as no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, directly or through one or more of its Subsidiaries, within the period of eighteen (18) months from the date of receipt of such Net Asset Sale Proceeds, to instead invest or commit to invest such Net Asset Sale Proceeds (or, at Borrower’s option, any portion thereof) in the acquisition of long term productive assets and businesses of the general type used or operated, as the case may be, in the business of Borrower and its Subsidiaries, in which case such Net Asset Sale Proceeds will not be required to be prepaid.

 

(b)                                  Insurance/Condemnation Proceeds .  No later than the fifth (5th) Business Day following the date of receipt by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries of any Net Insurance/Condemnation Proceeds, Borrower will prepay the Term Loans as set forth in Section 2.13(b) to the extent that aggregate Net Insurance/Condemnation Proceeds from the Closing Date through the applicable date of determination exceed $200,000,000; except that, upon written notice to Administrative Agent on or prior to such fifth (5th) Business Day, Borrower will have the option, so long as no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, directly or through one or more of its Subsidiaries, within the period of eighteen (18) months from the date of receipt of such Net Insurance/Condemnation Proceeds, to instead invest or commit to invest such Net Insurance/Condemnation Proceeds (or, at Borrower’s option, any portion thereof) in the acquisition of long term productive assets and businesses of the general type used or operated, as the case may be, in the business of Borrower and its Subsidiaries, in which case such Insurance/Condemnation Proceeds will not be required to be prepaid..

 

(c)                                   Mandatory Prepayments of Revolving Loans .  Borrower will from time to time prepay the Revolving Loans to the extent necessary so that the Total Utilization of Revolving Loan Commitments will not at any time exceed the Revolving Loan Commitments then in effect.

 

(d)                                  Prepayment Certificate .  Concurrently with any prepayment of the Loans pursuant to Sections 2.12(a) or 2.12(b), Borrower will deliver to Administrative Agent a certificate of an

 

9



 

Authorized Officer demonstrating the calculation of the amount of the applicable net proceeds.  In the event that Borrower subsequently determines that the actual amount received exceeded the amount set forth in such certificate, Borrower will promptly make an additional prepayment of the Loans in an amount equal to such excess, and Borrower will concurrently therewith deliver to Administrative Agent a certificate of an Authorized Officer demonstrating the derivation of such excess.

 

2.13                         Application of Prepayments/Reductions .

 

(a)                                  Application of Voluntary Prepayments by Type of Loans .  Any prepayment of any Loan under Section 2.11(a) will be applied in the order and manner as specified by Borrower in the applicable notice of prepayment.  If Borrower fails to specify the Loans to which any such prepayment will be applied, such prepayment will be applied as follows:

 

first , to repay outstanding Revolving Loans to the full extent thereof; and

 

second , to prepay the Term Loans on a pro rata basis (in accordance with the respective outstanding principal amounts thereof); and further applied on a pro rata basis to reduce the scheduled remaining Installments of principal of the Term Loans.

 

(b)                                  Application of Mandatory Prepayments by Type of Loans .  Any amount required to be paid pursuant to Sections 2.12(a) or 2.12(b) will be applied to prepay Term Loans on a pro rata basis (in accordance with the respective outstanding principal amounts thereof) and further applied on a pro rata basis to the remaining scheduled Installments of principal of the Term Loans.

 

(c)                                   Application of Prepayments of Loans to Base Rate Loans and Eurodollar Rate Loans .  Considering each Type of Loans being prepaid separately, any prepayment thereof will be applied first to Base Rate Loans to the full extent thereof before application to Eurodollar Rate Loans, in each case in a manner which minimizes the amount of any payments required to be made by Borrower under Section 2.16.

 

2.14                         General Provisions Regarding Payments .

 

(a)                                  Borrower will make all payments of principal, interest, fees and other Obligations in Dollars in same day funds, without defense (other than the defense of payment), recoupment, setoff or counterclaim, free of any restriction or condition, and will deliver such payments to Administrative Agent not later than 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the date due at the Principal Office of Administrative Agent for the account of Lenders; for purposes of computing interest and fees, funds received by Administrative Agent after that time on such due date will be deemed to have been paid by Borrower on the next succeeding Business Day.

 

(b)                                  All payments in respect of the principal amount of any Loan (other than voluntary prepayments of Revolving Loans) will be accompanied by payment of accrued interest on the principal amount being repaid or prepaid, and all such payments (and, in any event, any payments in respect of any Loan on a date when interest is due and payable with respect to such Loan) will be applied to the payment of interest then due and payable before application to principal.

 

(c)                                   Administrative Agent (or its agent or sub-agent appointed by it) will promptly distribute to each Lender at such address as such Lender indicates in writing, such Lender’s applicable Pro Rata Share of all payments and prepayments of principal and interest due under this Agreement, together with all other amounts due thereto, including all fees payable with respect thereto, to the extent received by Administrative Agent.

 

10


 

(d)                                  Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Agreement, if any Conversion/ Continuation Notice is withdrawn as to any Affected Lender or if any Affected Lender makes Base Rate Loans in lieu of its Pro Rata Share of any Eurodollar Rate Loans, Administrative Agent will give effect thereto in apportioning payments received after such date.

 

(e)                                   Subject to the provisos set forth in the definition of “Interest Period” as they may apply to Revolving Loans, whenever any payment to be made under this Agreement with respect to any Loan will be stated to be due on a day that is not a Business Day, Borrower will make such payment on the next succeeding Business Day and, with respect to Revolving Loans only, such extension of time will be included in the computation of the payment of interest under this Agreement or of the Revolving Loan Commitment fees under this Agreement.

 

(f)                                    Administrative Agent will deem any payment by or on behalf of Borrower under this Agreement that is not made in same day funds prior to 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) to be a non-conforming payment.  Any such payment will not be deemed to have been received by Administrative Agent until the later of (i) the time such funds become available funds, and (ii) the applicable next Business Day.  Administrative Agent will give prompt telephonic notice (confirmed in a writing delivered promptly thereafter) to Borrower and each applicable Lender if any payment is non-conforming.  Any non-conforming payment may constitute or become a Default or Event of Default in accordance with the terms of Sections 7.1(a) or 7.1(b), as applicable.  Interest will continue to accrue on any principal as to which a non-conforming payment is made until such funds become available funds (but in no event less than the period from the date of such payment to the next succeeding applicable Business Day) at the rate determined under Section 2.8 from the date such amount was due and payable until the date such amount is paid in full.

 

(g)                                   If an Event of Default has occurred is continuing, and the maturity of the Obligations have been accelerated, in whole or in part, under Section 7.2, all payments or proceeds received by Agents in respect of any of the Obligations (including as a result of collection from (or realization upon) any Collateral, will be applied in full or in part by Administrative Agent against, the Obligations in the following order of priority:  first , to the payment of all costs and expenses of such sale, collection or other realization, including reasonable compensation to Administrative Agent and its agents and counsel, and all other expenses, liabilities and advances made or incurred by Administrative Agent in connection therewith, and all amounts for which Administrative Agent is entitled to indemnification hereunder (in its capacity as Administrative Agent and not as a Lender) and all advances made by Administrative Agent under the Credit Documents for the account of the applicable Credit Party, and to the payment of all costs and expenses paid or incurred by Administrative Agent in connection with the exercise of any right or remedy under any Credit Document, all in accordance with the terms hereof or thereof; second , to the extent of any excess of such proceeds, to the payment of all other Obligations for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties; and third , to the extent of any excess of such proceeds, to the payment to or upon the order of the applicable Credit Party or to whosoever may be lawfully entitled to receive the same or as a court of competent jurisdiction may direct.

 

2.15                         Ratable Sharing.   Lenders hereby agree among themselves that if any of them, whether by voluntary payment (other than a voluntary prepayment of Loans made and applied in accordance with the terms of this Agreement), through the exercise of any right of set-off or banker’s lien, by counterclaim or cross action or by the enforcement of any right under the Credit Documents or otherwise, or as adequate protection of a deposit treated as cash collateral under the Bankruptcy Code, receives payment or reduction of a proportion of the aggregate amount of principal, interest, fees and other amounts then due and owing to such Lender under this Agreement or under the other Credit Documents (collectively, the “Aggregate Amounts Due” to such Lender) that is greater than the proportion received by any other Lender in respect of the Aggregate Amounts Due to such other Lender, then the Lender receiving such

 

11



 

proportionately greater payment will (a) notify Administrative Agent and each other Lender of the receipt of such payment and (b) apply a portion of such payment to purchase participations (which it will be deemed to have purchased from each seller of a participation simultaneously upon the receipt by such seller of its portion of such payment) in the Aggregate Amounts Due to the other Lenders so that all such recoveries of Aggregate Amounts Due will be shared by all Lenders in proportion to the Aggregate Amounts Due to them.  If all or part of such proportionately greater payment received by such purchasing Lender is later recovered from such Lender upon the bankruptcy or reorganization of Borrower or otherwise, those purchases will be rescinded and the purchase prices paid for such participations will be returned to such purchasing Lender ratably to the extent of such recovery, but without interest.  Borrower expressly consents to the foregoing arrangement and agrees that any holder of a participation so purchased may exercise any and all rights of banker’s lien, consolidation, set-off or counterclaim with respect to any and all monies owing by Borrower to that holder with respect thereto as fully as if that holder were owed the amount of the participation held by that holder.  The provisions of this Section 2.15 will not be construed to apply to (a) any payment made by Borrower in accordance with the express terms of this Agreement (including the application of funds arising from the existence of a Defaulting Lender) or (b) any payment obtained by any Lender as consideration for the assignment or sale of a participation in any of its Loans or other Obligations owed to it.

 

2.16                         Making or Maintaining Eurodollar Rate Loans .

 

(a)                                  Inability to Determine Applicable Interest Rate .  If Administrative Agent determines (which determination will be final and conclusive and binding upon all parties to this Agreement, absent manifest error), on any Interest Rate Determination Date with respect to any Eurodollar Rate Loans, that by reason of circumstances affecting the London interbank market adequate and fair means do not exist for ascertaining the interest rate applicable to such Loans on the basis provided for in the definition of “Adjusted Eurodollar Rate”, Administrative Agent will on such date give written notice (or by telephone confirmed in a writing delivered promptly thereafter) to Borrower and each Lender of such determination, whereupon (i) no Loans may be made as, or converted to, Eurodollar Rate Loans until such time as Administrative Agent notifies Borrower and Lenders that the circumstances giving rise to such notice no longer exist, and (ii) any Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice given by Borrower with respect to the Loans in respect of which such determination was made will be deemed, at the election of Borrower, to be (x) a Borrowing Notice for Base Rate Loans or (y) rescinded by Borrower.

 

(b)                                  Illegality or Impracticability of Eurodollar Rate Loans .  If on any date (i) any Lender determines (which determination will be final and conclusive and binding upon all parties to this Agreement, absent manifest error) that the making, maintaining, converting to or continuation of its Eurodollar Rate Loans has become unlawful as a result of compliance by such Lender in good faith with any law, treaty, governmental rule, regulation, guideline or order (or would conflict with any such treaty, governmental rule, regulation, guideline or order not having the force of law even though the failure to comply therewith would not be unlawful), or (ii) the Requisite Lenders advise Administrative Agent (which determination will be final and conclusive and binding upon all parties to this Agreement, absent manifest error) that the making, maintaining, converting to or continuation of its Eurodollar Rate Loans has become impracticable, as a result of contingencies occurring after the date of this Agreement which materially and adversely affect the London interbank market or the position of the Lenders in that market, then, and in any such event, such Lenders (or in the case of the preceding clause (i), such Lender) will be an “Affected Lender” and such Affected Lender will on that day give notice (by e-mail or by telephone confirmed in a writing delivered promptly thereafter) to Borrower and Administrative Agent of such determination (which notice Administrative Agent will promptly transmit to each other Lender).  If Administrative Agent receives a notice from (x) any Lender under clause (i) of the preceding sentence or (y) a notice from Lenders constituting Requisite Lenders under clause (ii) of the preceding sentence, then

 

12



 

(1) the obligation of the Lenders (or, in the case of any notice under clause (i) of the preceding sentence, such Lender) to make Loans as, or to convert Loans to, Eurodollar Rate Loans will be suspended until such notice is withdrawn by each Affected Lender, (2) to the extent such determination by the Affected Lender relates to a Eurodollar Rate Loan then being requested by Borrower through a Borrowing Notice or a Conversion/Continuation Notice, the Lenders (or in the case of any notice under clause (i) of the preceding sentence, such Lender) will make such Loan as (or continue such Loan as or convert such Loan to, as the case may be) a Base Rate Loan, (3) the Lenders’ (or in the case of any notice under clause (i) of the preceding sentence, such Lender’s) obligations to maintain their respective outstanding Eurodollar Rate Loans (the “Affected Loans” ) will be terminated at the earlier to occur of the expiration of the Interest Period then in effect with respect to the Affected Loans or when required by law, and (4) the Affected Loans will automatically convert into Base Rate Loans on the date of such termination.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent a determination by an Affected Lender as described above relates to a Eurodollar Rate Loan then being requested by Borrower through a Borrowing Notice or a Conversion/Continuation Notice, Borrower will have the option, subject to the provisions of Section 2.16(c), to (x) rescind such Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice as to any or all Lenders by giving written or telephonic notice (promptly confirmed by delivery of written notice thereof) to Administrative Agent of such rescission on the date on which the Affected Lender gives notice of its determination as described above (which notice of rescission Administrative Agent will promptly transmit to each other Lender), or (y) deem such Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice as to any or all Lenders to be a Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice for Base Rate Loans.

 

(c)                                   Compensation for Breakage or Non-Commencement of Interest Periods .  Borrower will compensate each Lender, upon written request by such Lender (which request will set forth the basis for requesting such amounts), for all reasonable losses, expenses and liabilities (including any interest paid or payable by such Lender to Lenders of funds borrowed by it to make or carry its Eurodollar Rate Loans and any loss, expense or liability sustained by such Lender in connection with the liquidation or re-employment of such funds but excluding loss of anticipated profits) which such Lender may sustain: (i) if for any reason (other than a default by such Lender) a Borrowing of any Eurodollar Rate Loan does not occur on a date specified therefor in a Borrowing Notice or a telephonic request for borrowing, or a conversion to or continuation of any Eurodollar Rate Loan does not occur on a date specified therefor in a Conversion/Continuation Notice or a telephonic request for conversion or continuation; (ii) if any prepayment or other principal payment of, or any conversion of, any of its Eurodollar Rate Loans occurs on a date prior to the last day of an Interest Period applicable to that Loan; or (iii) if any prepayment of any of its Eurodollar Rate Loans is not made on any date specified in a notice of prepayment given by Borrower.  With respect to any Lender’s claim for compensation under this Section 2.16, Borrower will not be required to compensate such Lender for any amount incurred more than 90 calendar days prior to the date that such Lender notifies Borrower of the event that gives rise to such claim.

 

(d)                                  Booking of Eurodollar Rate Loans .  Any Lender may make, carry or transfer Eurodollar Rate Loans at, to, or for the account of any of its branch offices or the office of an Affiliate of such Lender.

 

(e)                                   Assumptions Concerning Funding of Eurodollar Rate Loans .  Calculation of all amounts payable to a Lender under this Section 2.16 and under Section 2.17 will be made as though such Lender had actually funded each of its relevant Eurodollar Rate Loans through the purchase of a Eurodollar deposit bearing interest at the rate obtained under clause (i) of the definition of “Adjusted Eurodollar Rate” in an amount equal to the amount of such Eurodollar Rate Loan and having a maturity comparable to the relevant Interest Period and through the transfer of such Eurodollar deposit from an offshore office of such Lender to a domestic office of such Lender in the United States.  Each Lender may fund each of its Eurodollar Rate Loans in any manner it sees fit and the foregoing assumptions will be

 

13



 

utilized only for the purposes of calculating amounts payable under this Section 2.16 and under Section 2.17.

 

2.17                         Increased Costs; Capital Adequacy .

 

(a)                                  Compensation For Increased Costs .  If any Change in Law:

 

(i)                                      imposes, modifies or deems applicable any reserve, special deposit, compulsory loan, insurance charge or similar requirement against assets of, deposits with or for the account of, or credit extended by, any Lender (except any reserve requirement reflected in the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate)

 

(ii)                                   subjects any Recipient to any Taxes (other than (A) Indemnified Taxes, (B) Taxes described in clauses (b) through (d) of the definition of Excluded Taxes and (C) Connection Income Taxes) on its loans, loan principal, letters of credit, commitments, or other obligations, or its deposits, reserves, other liabilities or capital attributable thereto; or

 

(ii)                                   imposes on such Lender or the London interbank market any other condition, cost or expense (other than Taxes) affecting this Agreement or Loans made by any Lender;

 

and the result of any of the foregoing is to increase the cost to such Lender or such other Recipient, as applicable, of making, converting to, continuing or maintaining any Loan or of maintaining its obligation to make any such Loan, or to reduce the amount of any sum received or receivable by such Lender or such other Recipient, as applicable, under this Agreement (whether of principal, interest or any other amount) then, upon request of such Lender or such other Recipient, as applicable, Borrower will pay to such Lender, in the manner specified in, and after receipt of the statement referred to in, Section 2.17(c), such additional amount or amounts as may be reasonably necessary to compensate such Lender or such other Recipient, as applicable, for any such increased cost or reduction in amounts received or receivable under this Agreement.

 

(b)                                  Capital Adequacy Adjustment .  If any Lender determines that any Change in Law affecting such Lender or any lending office of such Lender or such Lender’s holding company, if any, regarding capital or liquidity requirements, has or would have the effect of reducing the rate of return on such Lender’s capital or on the capital of such Lender’s holding company, if any, as a consequence of this Agreement, the Commitments of such Lender or the Loans made by such Lender, to a level below that which such Lender or such Lender’s holding company could have achieved but for such Change in Law (taking into consideration such Lender’s policies and the policies of such Lender’s holding company with respect to capital adequacy), then from time to time, Borrower will pay to such Lender, in the manner specified in, and after receipt of the statement referred to in, Section 2.17(c), such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender or such Lender’s holding company for any such reduction suffered.

 

(c)                                   Certificates for Reimbursement .  A certificate of a Lender setting forth in reasonable detail the amount or amounts (including in reasonable detail the calculations (and the basis for such calculations) of such additional amount or amounts) necessary to compensate such Lender or its holding company, as the case may be, as specified in paragraph (a) or (b) of this Section 2.17 and delivered to the Borrower, will be conclusive absent manifest error.  The Borrower will pay such Lender the amount shown as due on any such certificate within ten (10) days after receipt thereof.

 

14



 

(d)                                  Delay in Requests .  Failure or delay on the part of any Lender to demand compensation pursuant to this Section 2.17 will not constitute a waiver of such Lender’s right to demand such compensation; except that the Borrower will not be required to compensate a Lender under this Section 2.17 for any increased costs incurred or reductions suffered more than nine (9) months prior to the date that such Lender notifies Borrower of the Change in Law giving rise to such increased costs or reductions, and of such Lender’s intention to claim compensation therefor (except that, if the Change in Law giving rise to such increased costs or reductions is retroactive, then the nine (9) month period referred to above will be extended to include the period of retroactive effect thereof).

 

2.18                         Taxes; Withholding, Etc.

 

(a)                                  Payments to Be Free and Clear .  All sums payable by or on behalf of any Credit Party under this Agreement and under the other Credit Documents will be paid free and clear of, and without any deduction or withholding on account of, any Taxes, except as required by applicable law. If any applicable law (as determined in the good faith discretion of an applicable Withholding Agent) requires the deduction or withholding of any Tax from any such payment by a Withholding Agent, then the applicable Withholding Agent will be entitled to make such deduction or withholding and will timely pay the full amount deducted or withheld to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law and, if such Tax is an Indemnified Tax, then the sum payable by the applicable Credit Party will be increased as necessary so that after such deduction or withholding has been made (including such deductions and withholdings applicable to additional sums payable under this Section 2.18) the applicable Recipient receives an amount equal to the sum it would have received had no such deduction or withholding been made.

 

(b)                                  Payment of Other Taxes by the Credit Parties.   The Credit Party will timely pay to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law, or at the option of the Administrative Agent timely reimburse it for the payment of, any Other Taxes.

 

(c)                                   Indemnification by the Credit Parties.   Except to the extent a Lender is already reimbursed under Section 2.18(b) by the Credit Parties, the Credit Parties will jointly and severally indemnify each Recipient, within ten (10) days after demand therefor, for the full amount of any Indemnified Taxes (including Indemnified Taxes imposed or asserted on or attributable to amounts payable under this Section) payable or paid by such Recipient or required to be withheld or deducted from a payment to such Recipient and any reasonable out-of-pocket expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, whether or not such Indemnified Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority.  A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to Borrower by a Lender (with a copy to the Administrative Agent), or by the Administrative Agent on its own behalf or on behalf of a Lender, will be conclusive absent manifest error.

 

(d)                                  Indemnification by the Lenders .  Each Lender will severally indemnify the Administrative Agent, within 10 days after demand therefor, for (i) any Indemnified Taxes attributable to such Lender (but only to the extent that the applicable Credit Party has not already indemnified the Administrative Agent for such Indemnified Taxes and without limiting the obligation of any Credit Party to do so), (ii) any Taxes attributable to such Lender’s failure to comply with the provisions of Section 9.6(g) relating to the maintenance of a Participant Register and (iii) any Excluded Taxes attributable to such Lender, in each case, that are payable or paid by the Administrative Agent in connection with any Credit Document, and any reasonable expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, whether or not such Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority.  A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to any Lender by the Administrative Agent will be conclusive absent manifest error.  Each Lender hereby authorizes the Administrative Agent to set off and apply any and all amounts at any time owing to such

 

15



 

Lender under any Credit Document or otherwise payable by the Administrative Agent to the Lender from any other source against any amount due to the Administrative Agent under this Section 2.18(d).

 

(e)                                   Evidence of Payments .  As soon as practicable after any payment of Taxes by a Credit Party to a Governmental Authority pursuant to this Section 2.18, the Credit Party will deliver to the Administrative Agent the original or a certified copy of a receipt issued by such Governmental Authority evidencing such payment, a copy of the return reporting such payment or other evidence of such payment reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

 

(f)                                    Status of Lenders .

 

(i)                                      Any Lender that is entitled to an exemption from or reduction of withholding Tax with respect to payments made under any Credit Document will deliver to Borrower and the Administrative Agent, at the time or times reasonably requested by Borrower or the Administrative Agent, such properly completed and executed documentation reasonably requested by Borrower or the Administrative Agent as will permit such payments to be made without withholding or at a reduced rate of withholding.  In addition, any Lender, if reasonably requested by Borrower or the Administrative Agent, will deliver such other documentation prescribed by applicable law or reasonably requested by Borrower or the Administrative Agent as will enable Borrower or the Administrative Agent to determine whether or not such Lender is subject to backup withholding or information reporting requirements.  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding two sentences, the completion, execution and submission of such documentation (other than such documentation set forth in Section 2.18(f)(ii)(A), (ii)(B) and (ii)(D) below) will not be required if in the Lender’s reasonable judgment such completion, execution or submission would subject such Lender to any material unreimbursed cost or expense or would materially prejudice the legal or commercial position of such Lender.

 

(ii)                                   Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, If Borrower is a U.S. Borrower,

 

(A)                                any Lender that is a U.S. Person will deliver to Borrower and the Administrative Agent on or prior to the date on which such Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time after such date upon the reasonable request of Borrower or the Administrative Agent), executed copies of IRS Form W-9 certifying that such Lender is exempt from U.S. federal backup withholding tax;

 

(B)                                any Foreign Lender will, to the extent it is legally entitled to do so, deliver to Borrower and the Administrative Agent (in such number of copies as is requested by the recipient) on or prior to the date on which such Foreign Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time after such date upon the reasonable request of Borrower or the Administrative Agent), whichever of the following is applicable:

 

(i)                                      in the case of a Foreign Lender claiming the benefits of an income tax treaty to which the United States is a party (x) with respect to payments of interest under any Credit Document, executed copies of IRS Form W-8BEN or IRS Form W-8BEN-E (or applicable successor form, establishing an exemption from, or reduction of, U.S. federal withholding Tax in accordance with the “interest” article of such tax treaty and (y) with respect to any other applicable payments under any Credit Document, IRS Form W-8BEN or IRS Form W-8BEN-E (or applicable successor form), establishing an exemption

 

16



 

from, or reduction of, U.S. federal withholding Tax under the “business profits” or “other income” article of such tax treaty;

 

(ii)                                   executed copies of IRS Form W-8ECI;

 

(iii)                                in the case of a Foreign Lender claiming the benefits of the exemption for portfolio interest under Section 881(c) of the Code, (x) a certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit D-1 to the effect that such Foreign Lender is not a “bank” within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, a “10 percent shareholder” of Borrower within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(B) of the Code, or a “controlled foreign corporation” related to the Borrower described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code (a “U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate” ) and (y) executed copies of IRS Form W-8BEN or IRS Form W-8BEN-E; or

 

(iv)                               to the extent a Foreign Lender is not the beneficial owner, executed copies of IRS Form W-8IMY, accompanied by IRS Form W-8ECI, IRS Form W-8BEN or IRS Form W-8BEN-E (or applicable successor form), a U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit D-2 or Exhibit D-3, IRS Form W-9, and/or other certification documents from each beneficial owner, as applicable; provided that if the Foreign Lender is a partnership and one or more direct or indirect partners of such Foreign Lender are claiming the portfolio interest exemption, such Foreign Lender may provide a U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit D-4 on behalf of each such direct and indirect partner;

 

(C)                                any Foreign Lender will, to the extent it is legally entitled to do so, deliver to Borrower and the Administrative Agent (in such number of copies as is requested by the recipient) on or prior to the date on which such Foreign Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time after such date upon the reasonable request of Borrower or the Administrative Agent), executed copies of any other form prescribed by applicable law as a basis for claiming exemption from or a reduction in U.S. federal withholding Tax, duly completed, together with such supplementary documentation as may be prescribed by applicable law to permit Borrower or the Administrative Agent to determine the withholding or deduction required to be made; and

 

(D)                                if a payment made to a Lender under any Credit Document would be subject to U.S. federal withholding Tax imposed by FATCA if such Lender were to fail to comply with the applicable reporting requirements of FATCA (including those contained in Section 1471(b) or 1472(b) of the Code, as applicable), such Lender will deliver to Borrower and the Administrative Agent at the time or times prescribed by law and at such time or times reasonably requested by Borrower or the Administrative Agent such documentation prescribed by applicable law (including as prescribed by Section 1471(b)(3)(C)(i) of the Code) and such additional documentation reasonably requested by Borrower or the Administrative Agent as may be necessary for Borrower and the Administrative Agent to comply with their obligations under FATCA and to determine that such Lender has complied with such Lender’s obligations under FATCA or to determine the amount to deduct and withhold from such payment.  Solely for purposes of this clause (D), “FATCA” will include any amendments made to FATCA after the date of this Agreement.

 

17



 

Each Lender agrees that if any form or certification it previously delivered expires or becomes obsolete or inaccurate in any respect, it will update such form or certification or promptly notify Borrower and the Administrative Agent in writing of its legal inability to do so.

 

(iii)                                In addition, Administrative Agent will deliver to Borrower, at the time or times reasonably requested by Borrower, with respect to any payments received by Administrative Agent, such documentation as a Lender would be required to deliver hereunder.

 

(g)                                   Treatment of Certain Refunds .  If any party receives a refund of any Taxes as to which it has been indemnified under this Section 2.18 (including by the payment of additional amounts under this Section 2.18), it will pay to the indemnifying party an amount equal to such refund (but only to the extent of indemnity payments made under this Section 2.18 with respect to the Taxes giving rise to such refund), net of all out-of-pocket expenses (including Taxes) of such indemnified party and without interest (other than any interest paid by the relevant Governmental Authority with respect to such refund).  Such indemnifying party, upon the request of such indemnified party, will repay to such indemnified party the amount paid over under this paragraph (g) ( plus any penalties, interest or other charges imposed by the relevant Governmental Authority) If such indemnified party is required to repay such refund to such Governmental Authority.  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this paragraph (g), in no event will the indemnified party be required to pay any amount to an indemnifying party under this paragraph (g) the payment of which would place the indemnified party in a less favorable net after-Tax position than the indemnified party would have been in if the Tax subject to indemnification and giving rise to such refund had not been deducted, withheld or otherwise imposed and the indemnification payments or additional amounts with respect to such Tax had never been paid.  This paragraph will not be construed to require any indemnified party to make available its Tax returns (or any other information relating to its Taxes that it deems confidential) to the indemnifying party or any other Person.

 

(h)                                  Survival.   Each party’s obligations under this Section 2.18 will survive the resignation or replacement of the Administrative Agent or any assignment of rights by, or the replacement of, a Lender, the termination of the Commitments and the repayment, satisfaction or discharge of all obligations under any Credit Document.

 

2.19                         Obligation to Mitigate .  Each Lender agrees that, as promptly as practicable after the officer of such Lender responsible for administering its Loans becomes aware of the occurrence of an event or the existence of a condition that would cause such Lender to become an Affected Lender or that would entitle such Lender to receive payments under Section 2.16, 2.17 or 2.18, it will, at the request of Borrower, to the extent not inconsistent with the internal policies of such Lender and any applicable legal or regulatory restrictions, use reasonable efforts to (a) make, issue, fund or maintain its Loans under this Agreement, including any Affected Loans, through another office of such Lender, or (b) take such other measures as such Lender may deem reasonable, if as a result thereof the circumstances which would cause such Lender to be an Affected Lender would cease to exist or the additional amounts which would otherwise be required to be paid to such Lender under Section 2.16, 2.17 or 2.18 would be reduced and if, as determined by such Lender in its sole discretion, the making, funding or maintaining of such Revolving Loan Commitments or Loans through such other office or in accordance with such other measures, as the case may be, would not otherwise adversely affect such Revolving Loan Commitments or Loans or the interests of such Lender.  Such Lender will not be obligated to use such other office under this Section 2.19 unless Borrower agrees to pay all reasonable incremental expenses incurred by such Lender as a result of using such other office as described above.  A certificate as to the amount of any such expenses payable by Borrower under this Section 2.19 (setting forth in reasonable detail the basis for requesting such amount) submitted by such Lender to Borrower (with a copy to Administrative Agent) will be conclusive absent manifest error.

 

18



 

2.20                         Defaulting Lenders.

 

(a)                                  Defaulting Lender Adjustments .  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, if any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, then, until such time as such Lender is no longer a Defaulting Lender, to the extent permitted by applicable law:

 

(i)   Defaulting Lender Waterfall . Any payment of principal, interest, fees or other amounts received by Administrative Agent for the account of such Defaulting Lender (whether voluntary or mandatory, at maturity, under Section 7.2 or otherwise) or received by Administrative Agent from a Defaulting Lender under Section 9.4 will be applied at such time or times as may be determined by Administrative Agent as follows:

 

first , to the payment of any amounts owing by such Defaulting Lender to Administrative Agent under this Agreement;

 

second , as Borrower may request (so long as no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing), to the funding of any Loan in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has failed to fund its portion thereof as required by this Agreement, as determined by Administrative Agent;

 

third , if so determined by Administrative Agent and Borrower, to be held in a Deposit Account and released pro rata in order to satisfy such Defaulting Lender’s potential future funding obligations with respect to Loans under this Agreement;

 

fourth , to the payment of any amounts owing to the Lenders as a result of any judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction obtained by any Lender against such Defaulting Lender as a result of such Defaulting Lender’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement;

 

fifth , so long as no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, to the payment of any amounts owing to Borrower as a result of any judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction obtained by Borrower against such Defaulting Lender as a result of such Defaulting Lender’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement; and

 

sixth , to such Defaulting Lender or as otherwise directed by a court of competent jurisdiction.

 

If (x) such payment is a payment of the principal amount of any Loans in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has not fully funded its appropriate share, and (y) such Loans were made at a time when the conditions set forth in Section 3.2 were satisfied and waived, such payment will be applied solely to pay the Loans of all Non-Defaulting Lenders on a pro rata basis prior to being applied to the payment of any Loans of such Defaulting Lender until such time as all Loans are held by the Lenders pro rata in accordance with the applicable Commitments. Any payments, prepayments or other amounts paid or payable to a Defaulting Lender that are applied (or held) to pay amounts owed by a Defaulting Lender will be deemed paid to and redirected by such Defaulting Lender, and each Lender irrevocably consents to this Agreement.

 

(ii)   Fees No Defaulting Lender will be entitled to receive any fee under Section 2.9(a) or otherwise for any period during which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender (and Borrower will not be required to pay any such fee that otherwise would have been required to have been paid to that Defaulting Lender).

 

(b)   Defaulting Lender Cure .  If Borrower and Administrative Agent agree in writing that a Lender is no longer a Defaulting Lender, Administrative Agent will so notify the parties to this

 

19



 

Agreement, whereupon as of the effective date specified in such notice and subject to any conditions set forth therein, that Lender will, to the extent applicable, purchase at par that portion of outstanding Loans of the other Lenders or take such other actions as Administrative Agent may determine to be necessary to cause the Loans to be held pro rata by the Lenders in accordance with the applicable Commitments, whereupon such Lender will cease to be a Defaulting Lender.  No adjustments will be made retroactively with respect to fees accrued or payments made by or on behalf of Borrower while that Lender was a Defaulting Lender.  Except to the extent otherwise expressly agreed by the affected parties, no change under this Agreement from Defaulting Lender to Lender will constitute a waiver or release of any claim of any party under this Agreement arising from that Lender having been a Defaulting Lender.

 

2.21                         Removal or Replacement of a Lender .   Anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, if:

 

(a) (i) any Lender (an “Increased-Cost Lender” ) gives notice to Borrower that such Lender is an Affected Lender or that such Lender is entitled to receive payments under Section 2.16, 2.17 or 2.18, (ii) the circumstances which have caused such Lender to be an Affected Lender or which entitle such Lender to receive such payments will remain in effect, and (iii) such Lender fails to withdraw such notice within five (5) Business Days after Borrower’s request for such withdrawal; or

 

(b) (i) any Lender becomes and continues to be a Defaulting Lender, and (ii) such Defaulting Lender fails to cure the default under Section 2.20(b) within five (5) Business Days of becoming a Defaulting Lender after Borrower’s request that it cure such default; or

 

(c) in connection with any proposed amendment, modification, termination, waiver or consent with respect to any of the provisions of this Agreement as contemplated by Section 9.5(b), the consent of Requisite Lenders is obtained but the consent of one or more of such other Lenders (each a “Non-Consenting Lender” ) whose consent is required is not obtained;

 

then, with respect to each such Increased-Cost Lender, Defaulting Lender or Non-Consenting Lender (the “Terminated Lender” ), Borrower may, by giving written notice to Administrative Agent and any Terminated Lender of its election to do so, elect to cause such Terminated Lender (and such Terminated Lender hereby irrevocably agrees) to assign its outstanding Loans and its Revolving Loan Commitments, if any, in full to one or more Eligible Assignees specified by Borrower (each a “Replacement Lender” ) in accordance with the provisions of Section 9.6 and Borrower will not pay the fees, if any, payable thereunder in connection with any such assignment from an Increased-Cost Lender, a Non-Consenting Lender or a Defaulting Lender.  On the date of such assignment:

 

(1)  the Replacement Lender will pay to Terminated Lender an amount equal to the sum of (A) an amount equal to the principal of, and all accrued interest on, all outstanding Loans of the Terminated Lender, (B) an amount equal to all unreimbursed drawings that have been funded by such Terminated Lender, together with all then unpaid interest with respect thereto at such time and (C) an amount equal to all accrued, but theretofore unpaid fees owing to such Terminated Lender under Section 2.9, and

 

(2)  Borrower will pay any amounts payable to such Terminated Lender under Section 2.16(c), 2.17 or 2.18.

 

If such Terminated Lender is a Non-Consenting Lender, each Replacement Lender will consent, at the time of such assignment, to each matter in respect of which such Terminated Lender was a Non-Consenting Lender.  Upon the prepayment of all amounts owing to any Terminated Lender and the termination of such Terminated Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitments, if any, such Terminated Lender will no longer constitute a “Lender” for purposes of this Agreement.

 

Any rights of such Terminated Lender to indemnification under this Agreement will survive as to such Terminated Lender.  Each Lender agrees that if Borrower exercises its option under this Agreement

 

20


 

to cause an assignment by such Lender as a Non-Consenting Lender or Terminated Lender, such Lender will, promptly after receipt of written notice of such election, execute and deliver all documentation necessary to effectuate such assignment in accordance with Section 9.6.  If a Lender does not comply with the requirements of the immediately preceding sentence within one (1) Business Day after receipt of such notice, each Lender hereby authorizes and directs Administrative Agent to execute and deliver such documentation as may be required to give effect to an assignment in accordance with Section 9.6 on behalf of a Non-Consenting Lender or Terminated Lender and any such documentation so executed by Administrative Agent will be effective for purposes of documenting an assignment under Section 9.6.

 

2.22                         General Provisions Regarding Notices.   Any Notice will be executed by an Authorized Officer in writing delivered to Administrative Agent.  In lieu of delivering a Notice, Borrower may give Administrative Agent telephonic notice by the required time of any proposed borrowing or conversion/continuation, as the case may be.  Each such notice will be promptly confirmed in writing by delivery of the applicable Notice to Administrative Agent on or before the close of business on the date that the telephonic notice is given.  If there is any discrepancy between the telephone notice and the written Notice, the written Notice will govern.  In the case of any Notice that is irrevocable once given, if Borrower provides telephonic notice in lieu thereof, such telephone notice will also be irrevocable once given.  Neither Administrative Agent nor any Lender will incur any liability to Borrower in acting upon any telephonic notice referred to above that Administrative Agent believes in good faith to have been given by a duly authorized officer or other person authorized on behalf of Borrower or for otherwise acting in good faith.

 

SECTION 3.                          CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

3.1                                Closing Date .  The obligation of each Lender to make a Term Loan to Borrower on the Closing Date will be subject to the satisfaction (or waiver by Administrative Agent) of the following conditions on or prior to such date:

 

(a)                                  Borrower having paid (i) to Administrative Agent all reasonable and documented out-of-pocket accrued fees and expenses of Administrative Agent and the Lenders as provided (x) in Section 9.2(a) and (y) without duplication, in the Mandate Letter; in each case, for which Borrower has received an invoice (together with a reasonably detailed accounting for such amounts) at least two (2) Business Days prior to the Closing Date; and (ii) to Administrative Agent the Agent Fee under the Agent Fee Letter.

 

(b)                                  On the Closing Date, the following statements being true and Administrative Agent having received for the account of each Lender a certificate signed by a duly authorized officer of Borrower, dated the Closing Date, stating that:

 

(i)                                      the representations and warranties contained in Section 4 are true and correct in all material respects on and as of the Closing Date except to the extent such representations and warranties specifically relate to an earlier date, in which case such representations and warranties will have been true and correct in all material respects on and as of such earlier date;

 

(ii)                                   no Default or Event of Default having occurred that is continuing; and

 

(iii)                                since December 31, 2013, there has not occurred any event, circumstance or change that has caused or evidences, or could reasonably be expected to result in, either in any individual case or in the aggregate, a Material Adverse Effect (except as set forth in Item 4.4(b) of the Disclosure Schedule).

 

21



 

(c)                                   Administrative Agent having received on or before the Closing Date the following, each dated such day, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Administrative Agent:

 

(i)                                      Counterparts of this Agreement, duly executed and delivered by each of the Lenders, Borrower, the Guarantors as of such date and Administrative Agent (or in the case of any such party as to which an executed counterpart has not been received, Administrative Agent having received, in form reasonably satisfactory to it, telecopy, email or other written confirmation from such party of its execution of a counterpart of this Agreement).

 

(ii)                                   To the extent requested by any Lender under Section 2.5(c) at least three (3) Business Days prior to the Closing Date), Notes duly executed and delivered by Borrower.

 

(iii)                                In respect of each Credit Party, copies of (x) such Credit Party’s Organizational Documents, (y) resolutions of the Board of Directors (or equivalent governing body) of such Credit Party, approving this Agreement and the other Credit Documents to which such Credit Party is a party, and of all documents evidencing other necessary corporate action and governmental approvals, if any, with respect to this Agreement and the other Credit Documents, in each case, certified as of the Closing Date by its secretary or an assistant secretary as being in full force and effect without modification or amendment, and (z) a good standing certificate from the applicable Governmental Authority of such Credit Party’s jurisdiction of incorporation, organization or formation, each dated the Closing Date or a recent date prior thereto.

 

(iv)                               A certificate of an Authorized Officer of each Credit Party, certifying the names and true signatures of the officers of such Credit Party authorized to sign this Agreement and the other Credit Documents to which such Credit Party is a party and the other documents (if any) to be delivered under this Agreement by such Credit Party.

 

(v)                                  One or more copies of a favorable written opinion (limited solely to matters of New York, federal and Delaware General Corporation Law) of Morrison & Foerster LLP, special New York counsel to Borrower, as to the following matters with respect to the Credit Parties: valid existence; corporate or limited liability company, as applicable, power and authority; due execution, delivery and performance; enforceability; no conflict with charter, by-laws or operating agreement, as applicable, or customarily applicable New York or Federal laws; registration as an “investment company” under the Investment Company Act of 1940; and compliance with Regulations U and X.

 

(vi)                               A certificate of the chief financial officer of Borrower, in form, scope and substance satisfactory to Administrative Agent, demonstrating that after giving effect to the consummation of the transactions contemplated by Credit Documents and any rights of contribution, Borrower and its Subsidiaries are and will be, on a consolidated basis, Solvent.

 

(vii)                            Each Lender having received from Borrower all documentation and other information required by bank regulatory authorities under applicable “know your customer” and anti-money laundering rules and regulations, including without limitation the PATRIOT Act to the extent reasonably requested by such Lender at least five (5) Business Days prior to the Closing Date.

 

3.2                                Conditions Precedent to Each Loan .  The obligation of each Lender to make any Loan on any Borrowing Date, including the Closing Date, are subject to the satisfaction, or waiver in accordance with Section 9.5, of the following conditions precedent:

 

22



 

(a)                                  Administrative Agent having received a fully executed and delivered Borrowing Notice with respect to such Borrowing Date;

 

(b)                                  as of such Borrowing Date, the representations and warranties contained in Section 4 of this Agreement (and, solely if the Pledge Agreement is then in effect, in Section 3 of the Pledge Agreement) being true and correct in all material respects on and as of such Borrowing Date to the same extent made on and as of that date, except to the extent such representations and warranties specifically relate to an earlier date, in which case such representations and warranties having been true and correct in all material respects on and as of such earlier date.  In each case, such materiality qualifier will not be applicable to any representations and warranties that already are qualified or modified by materiality in the text of such representation or warranty; and

 

(c)                                   as of such Borrowing Date, no Default or Event of Default having occurred that is continuing.

 

3.3                                Determinations Under This Section 3.   For purposes of determining compliance with the conditions specified in this Section 3, each Lender will be deemed to have consented to, approved or accepted or to be satisfied with each document or other matter required thereunder to be consented to or approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Lenders unless an officer of Administrative Agent responsible for the transactions contemplated by this Agreement has received notice from such Lender prior to the date that Borrower, by notice to the Lenders, designates as the proposed Closing Date, specifying its objection thereto.  Administrative Agent will promptly notify the Lenders of the occurrence of the Closing Date.

 

SECTION 4.                          REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

In order to induce Agents and the Lenders to enter into this Agreement and to make each Loan to be made thereby, except as otherwise provided on the Disclosure Schedule, Borrower represents and warrants to each Agent and each Lender, on the Closing Date and on each Borrowing Date, that the following statements are true and correct:

 

4.1                                Corporate Existence and Power.   Each Credit Party (i) is a corporation or limited liability company, as applicable, (ii) is duly incorporated or formed, as applicable, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of organization, (iii) has all corporate or limited liability company, as applicable, powers required to carry on its business as now conducted and to enter into the Credit Documents to which it is a party and to carry out the transactions contemplated thereby, and (iii) is qualified to do business and is in good standing in every jurisdiction where its assets are located and wherever necessary to carry out its business and operations, except in jurisdictions where the failure to be so qualified or in good standing has not had, and could not be reasonably expected to have, a Material Adverse Effect.  Each of Borrower and its Subsidiaries has all governmental licenses, authorizations, consents and approvals required to carry on its business as now conducted, the failure of which to have or to hold would, individually or in the aggregate, have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

4.2                                Corporate and Governmental Authorization; No Contravention.  The execution, delivery and performance by each Credit Party of this Agreement are within its corporate powers, have been duly authorized by all necessary corporate action, require no action by or in respect of, or advance filing with, any governmental body, agency or official (other than actions or filings that have been, or will when required have been, taken or made) and do not (a) contravene, or constitute a default under, (i) any provision of the Organizational Documents of such Credit Party, or (ii) any applicable law or regulation or any judgment, injunction, order or decree binding upon such Credit Party, except, with respect to this clause (ii), as would not, individually or in the aggregate, have a Material Adverse Effect, (b) conflict with, result in a breach of or constitute (with due notice or lapse of time or both) a default under any

 

23



 

Contractual Obligation of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, except, with respect to this clause (b), as would not, individually or in the aggregate, have a Material Adverse Effect, (c) result in or require the creation or imposition of any Lien upon any of the properties or assets of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries (other than any Liens created under any of the Credit Documents in favor of Administrative Agent, for the benefit of the Secured Parties), except, with respect to this clause (c), as would not, individually or in the aggregate, have a Material Adverse Effect or (d) require any approval of stockholders, members or partners or any approval or consent of any Person under any Contractual Obligation of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, except for such approvals or consents which will be obtained on or before the Closing Date except, with respect to this clause (d), as would not, individually or in the aggregate, have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

4.3                                Binding Effect.  Each Credit Document has been duly executed and delivered by each Credit Party that is a party thereto and constitutes the legally valid and binding obligation of such Credit Party, in each case enforceable against such Credit Party in accordance with its terms, except as may be limited by bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, moratorium or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally and by general principles of equity.

 

4.4                                Financial Information.

 

(a)                                  Borrower previously has furnished to Administrative Agent, for distribution to each of the Lenders, the following financial statements (the “Historical Financial Statements” ):  the audited consolidated balance sheet of Company as of December 31, 2013 and the unaudited consolidated balance sheet of Company as of June 30, 2014, and related consolidated statements of cash flows, operations and stockholders’ equity of Company for the twelve-month and six-month periods, respectively, then ended.  Such financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position and results of operations and cash flows of Company as of such date and for such period, in accordance with GAAP, subject, in the cause of unaudited statements, to normal year-end adjustments.

 

(b)                                  Since December 31, 2013, there has not occurred any event, circumstance or change that has caused or evidences, or could reasonably be expected to result in, either in any individual case or in the aggregate, a Material Adverse Effect.

 

4.5                                Litigation.  There is no action, suit or proceeding pending against, or to the knowledge of Borrower, threatened against or affecting, Borrower or its Subsidiaries before any court or arbitrator or any governmental body, agency or official, whether in connection with the transactions contemplated by the Credit Documents or otherwise that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

4.6                                Compliance with ERISA.   Except as would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, no ERISA Event has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur.  No Plan is in violation of the presently applicable provisions of ERISA and the Code, except where such violation would not have a Material Adverse Effect, and no Plan has incurred any material liability to the PBGC or a Plan under Title IV of ERISA.  Each Employee Benefit Plan which is intended to qualify under Section 401(a) of the Code has received a favorable determination letter from the IRS or is the subject of an IRS opinion letter, in either case, indicating that such Employee Benefit Plan is so qualified, and nothing has occurred subsequent to the issuance of such determination or opinion letter which would reasonably be expected to cause such Employee Benefit Plan to lose its qualified status.  The present value of all accumulated benefit obligations of all underfunded Plans (based on the assumptions used for financial reporting purposes of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 87) did not, as of the date of the most recent financial statements reflecting such amounts, exceed the fair market value of the

 

24



 

property of all such underfunded Plan by an amount that could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.  Using actuarial assumptions and computation methods consistent with Section 4211 of ERISA, the aggregate liabilities of each of Borrower, its Subsidiaries and each of their respective ERISA Affiliates to all Multiemployer Plans in the event of a complete withdrawal therefrom, as of the close of the most recent fiscal year of each such Multiemployer Plan, could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.  The sole representation and warranty of Borrower with respect to compliance with ERISA is that contained in this Section 4.6.

 

4.7                                Compliance with Laws and Agreements.   (a)  Each of Borrower and its Subsidiaries has complied in all material respects with all applicable laws (including Environmental Laws) and Contractual Obligations binding upon it, except where any failure to comply therewith could not reasonably be expected, individually or collectively, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

(b)                                  None of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or, to the knowledge of Borrower, any director, officer, agent, employee or Affiliate of Borrower, is currently the subject of any sanctions or economic embargoes administered or enforced by the U.S. Department of State or the U.S. Department of Treasury (including OFAC) or any other applicable sanctions authority (collectively, “ Sanctions ,” and the associated laws, rules, regulations and orders, collectively, “ Sanctions Laws ”).  Each of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and, to the knowledge of Borrower, any director, officer, agent, employee or Affiliate of Borrower, is in compliance, in all material respects, with (i) all applicable Sanctions Laws, (ii) the United States Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977, as amended, and any other applicable anti-bribery or anti-corruption laws, rules, regulations and orders (collectively, “Anti-Corruption Laws” ) and (iii) the PATRIOT Act and any other applicable terrorism and money laundering laws, rules, regulations and orders.  No part of the proceeds of the Loans will be used, directly or indirectly, or otherwise made available to any Person, (A) for any payments to any governmental official or employee, political party, official of a political party, candidate for political office, or anyone else acting in an official capacity, in order to obtain, retain or direct business or obtain any improper advantage, in violation of any Anti-Corruption Law, or (B) for the purpose of financing any activities or business of or with any Person or in any country or territory that at such time is the subject of any Sanctions.

 

4.8                                Investment Company Act.  No Credit Party is an “investment company” or a company “controlled” by an “investment company” within the meaning of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.

 

4.9                                Taxes.  Borrower and each of its Subsidiaries has filed or caused to be filed all United States Federal income tax returns and all other material tax returns required to be filed by it and has paid or caused to be paid all taxes, fees, charges and assessments required to have been paid by it, except (i) in any case in which such nonpayment or non-filing would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect or (ii) taxes that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and for which Borrower or the applicable Subsidiary has set aside on its books appropriate reserves with respect thereto in accordance with GAAP.

 

4.10                         Federal Reserve Regulations.   Neither Borrower nor any of its Subsidiaries is engaged or will engage, principally or as one of its important activities, in the business of extending credit for the purpose of “purchasing” or “carrying” any “margin stock” within the meaning of Regulation U.  Not more than 25% of the value of the assets subject to any restrictions on the sale, pledge or other disposition of assets under the Credit Documents or any other agreement to which Administrative Agent, any Lender or Affiliate of a Lender is party will at any time be represented by margin stock (as defined in Regulation U).  No portion of the proceeds of any Borrowing will be used in any manner, whether directly or indirectly, that causes or could reasonably be expected to cause, such Borrowing or the application of

 

25



 

such proceeds to violate Regulation T, Regulation U or Regulation X of the Board of Governors or any other regulation thereof or to violate the Exchange Act.

 

4.11                         Solvency.  Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis are, and immediately after giving effect to any Borrowing on any date on which this representation and warranty is made, will be Solvent.

 

4.12                         Accuracy of Information.  All written information (other than financial projections, statements estimates and other forward looking statements and information of a general economic or industry nature) furnished by any Credit Party to Administrative Agent or the Lenders in connection with the negotiation and arrangement of this Credit Agreement is and will be correct in all material respects at the time furnished and does not and will not at the time furnished contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements contained therein not materially misleading, in each case, when considered together with information in Borrower’s Historical Financial Statements, and when taken as a whole with all other information so furnished and after giving effect to all supplements and updates thereto, and in light of the circumstances under which such statements are made.  With respect to information consisting of statements, estimates, projections and other forward looking information (including the Projections), such information is not to be viewed as fact and Administrative Agent and all Lenders acknowledge and agree that actual results during the period or periods covered by such information may differ from such information and that the differences may be material and adverse, and Borrower represents only that such information has been prepared in good faith based upon assumptions believed in good faith by Borrower to be reasonable at the time of preparation thereof (it being understood that such information is subject to significant uncertainties and contingencies, many of which are beyond Borrower’s control, and that no assurance can be given that such information will be realized).

 

SECTION 5.                          COVENANTS

 

Borrower covenants and agrees that, so long as any Commitment is in effect and until payment in full of all Obligations (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made), it will perform, and will cause each of its Subsidiaries to perform, all covenants in this Section 5.

 

5.1                                Information .  Borrower will deliver to the Agent, for delivery by the Agent to each of the Lenders:

 

(a)                                  as soon as available and in any event within (i) 105 days after the end of the Fiscal Year ending December 31, 2014 and (ii) 90 days after the end of each Fiscal Year of Borrower, ending thereafter, (A) the consolidated balance sheet of Borrower as of the end of such Fiscal Year and the related consolidated statements of operations and of cash flows for such Fiscal Year, setting forth in each case in comparative form the figures for the previous Fiscal Year, together with a Narrative Report with respect thereto ( provided that, subsequent to a Qualified IPO, no Narrative Report will be required to be delivered under this clause), and (B) a report of an independent public accounting firm of nationally recognized standing (which such report and/or the accompanying financial statements will be unqualified as to going concern and scope of audit, and will state that such consolidated financial statements fairly present, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Borrower and its Subsidiaries as at the dates indicated and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the periods indicated in conformity with GAAP applied on a basis consistent with prior years (except as otherwise disclosed in such financial statements) and that the examination by such accountants in connection with such consolidated financial statements has been made in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards);

 

26



 

(b)                                  as soon as available and in any event within (i) 60 days after the end of the Fiscal Quarter ending September 30, 2014 and (ii) 45 days after the end of each of the first three Fiscal Quarters of each Fiscal Year of Borrower ending after September 30, 2014, the consolidated balance sheet of Borrower as of the end of such Fiscal Quarter and the related consolidated statements of operations and cash flows for the period commencing at the end of the previous Fiscal Year and ending with the end of such quarter, together with a Narrative Report with respect thereto ( provided that, subsequent to a Qualified IPO, no Narrative Report will be required to be delivered under this clause);

 

(c)                                   simultaneously with the delivery of each set of financial statements referred to in Sections 5.1(a) and 5.1(b), a duly executed and completed Compliance Certificate (i) stating whether any Default exists on the date of such certificate and, if any Default then exists, setting forth the details thereof and the action which Borrower is taking or proposes to take with respect thereto, (ii) setting forth calculations demonstrating compliance, as of the date of the most recent balance sheet included in the financial statements being furnished at such time, with the applicable covenant(s) set forth in Sections 5.3 and 5.4, respectively and (iii) certifying that such financial statements fairly present, in all material respects, the financial condition of Borrower and its subsidiaries as at the dates indicated and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the periods indicated, subject to changes resulting from audit and normal year end adjustments;

 

(d)                                  promptly, but in any event within five (5) days after any officer of Borrower obtains knowledge (i) of any Event of Default, if such Event of Default is then continuing, or (ii) of the occurrence of any event or change that has resulted in a Material Adverse Effect, in each case, a certificate of a Responsible Financial Officer of Borrower setting forth the details thereof and the action which Borrower is taking or proposes to take with respect thereto;

 

(e)                                   written notice promptly following the mailing to the stockholders of Borrower of any financial statements, Exchange Act reports or proxy statements;

 

(f)                                    promptly following a request therefor, any documentation or other information that a Lender reasonably requests in order to comply with its ongoing obligations under applicable “know your customer” and anti-money laundering rules and regulations, including the PATRIOT Act;

 

(g)                                   prompt written notice after the occurrence of (i) any Reportable Event that, alone or together with any other Reportable Events that have occurred, or (ii) a failure to make a required installment or other payment (within the meaning of Section 412(n)(1) of the Code) that, could reasonably be expected to result in liability of Borrower to the PBGC or to a Plan in an aggregate amount exceeding $5,000,000;

 

(h)                                  prompt written notice after Borrower’s Chief Legal Officer or Chief Financial Officer obtains knowledge of any action, suit or proceeding and reasonably determines that such action, suit or proceeding would reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

(i)                                      from time to time such additional information regarding the financial position or business of Borrower and its Subsidiaries as Administrative Agent, at the request of any Lender, may reasonably request.

 

Information required to be delivered under this Section 5.1 will be deemed to have been delivered on the date on which Borrower provides notice to the Lenders that such information has been posted on Borrower’s website on the Internet at http://www.inovalon.com or at http://www.sec.gov, but Borrower will deliver paper copies of the information referred to in this Section after the date delivery is required thereunder to any Lender which requests such delivery within five (5) Business Days after such request.

 

27



 

5.2                                Conduct of Business and Maintenance of Existence and Insurance.

 

(a)                                  Without limiting Section 5.12, Borrower will maintain its corporate existence.

 

(b)                                  Except for any transaction permitted by Section 5.12 or that would not otherwise result in a Material Adverse Effect, Borrower will cause each Material Subsidiary to maintain its respective corporate existence, except that the foregoing will not prohibit the termination of the existence of any Material Subsidiary if the surviving entity (in the case of any such termination resulting from a merger or consolidation) or the entity to which substantially all such Material Subsidiary’s assets are transferred (in the case of any other such termination) is or becomes (i) a Material Subsidiary or Borrower, or (ii) if the non-surviving entity was a Guarantor, a Guarantor or Borrower.

 

(c)                                   Borrower will maintain, with financially sound and reputable insurance companies, insurance (including self-insurance) in respect of the assets, properties and businesses of Borrower and its Subsidiaries, in such amounts and against such risks substantially the same as are customarily maintained by companies engaged in the same or similar businesses operating in the same or similar locations.

 

5.3                                Minimum Liquidity.

 

(a)                                  So long as any Term Loans are outstanding, Borrower will not permit the aggregate amount of Cash and Cash Equivalents of Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis as of the end of any Fiscal Quarter of Borrower to be less than $50,000,000.

 

(b)                                  If no Term Loans are outstanding, Borrower will not permit the aggregate amount of Cash and Cash Equivalents of Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis as of the end of any Fiscal Quarter of Borrower ending after the date of this Agreement to be less than $20,000,000.

 

5.4                                Indebtedness.   Borrower will not, and will not permit any of its Subsidiaries to, incur any indebtedness for borrowed money (including Revolving Loans) that would cause Borrower and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis after giving effect to such incurrence, to fail to be in compliance with the Debt Incurrence Test as of the previous Fiscal Quarter end of Borrower.  Notwithstanding anything in the immediately preceding sentence of this Section 5.4, (i) with respect to Lenders of Term Loans, this Section 5.4 will be of no force or effect from and after the earlier to occur of (x) a Qualified IPO of Borrower, and (y) such time when the aggregate outstanding principal amount of Term Loans has been reduced to $150,000,000 or less, and (ii) with respect to Lenders of Revolving Loans, this Section 5.4 will be of no force or effect at any time, and from time to time, when no Revolving Loans are outstanding, except that no Revolving Loan may be borrowed hereunder unless Borrower and its Subsidiaries would be in compliance with the Debt Incurrence Test after giving effect to such Borrowing.

 

5.5                                Liens .  Borrower will not, and will not permit any of its Subsidiaries to, create, incur, assume or permit to exist any Lien on any property or asset now owned or acquired by it after the date of this Agreement, except:

 

(a)                                  any Lien existing on the Closing Date that secures any obligation not in excess of $1,000,000 individually and $5,000,000 in the aggregate;

 

(b)                                  Liens for taxes, assessments or governmental charges or levies to the extent not past due or the validity of which is being contested in good faith by proper proceedings and for which appropriate reserves have been established;

 

28



 

(c)                                   Liens imposed by law, such as materialmen’s, mechanics’, carriers’, workmen’s, repairmen’s, landlord’s and other similar Liens arising in the ordinary course of business securing obligations which are not overdue by more than 30 days or the validity of which is being contested in good faith by proper proceedings and for which appropriate reserves have been established;

 

(d)                                  pledges or deposits to secure obligations under worker’s compensation laws or similar legislation or to secure public or statutory obligations of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries;

 

(e)                                   Liens upon, and defects of title to, real or personal property, including any attachment of such real or personal property or other legal process prior to adjudication of a dispute upon the merits and adverse judgment on appeal, so long as (i) the validity thereof is being contested in good faith by proper proceedings, and appropriate reserves have been established with respect thereto and (ii) levy and execution thereon has been stayed;

 

(f)                                    Liens on real or personal property existing thereon at the time of acquisition thereof (including acquisition by merger or consolidation) and not incurred in contemplation thereof, so long as no such Lien extends to or covers any property other than the property being acquired;

 

(g)                                   purchase money Liens on property acquired or constructed, in each case, after the date of this Agreement that are created prior to, at the time of, or within 180 days after such acquisition (or, in the case of property being constructed, the completion of such construction and commencement of full operation of such property, whichever is later) to secure Indebtedness incurred solely for the purpose of financing the acquisition or construction of all or any part of the property being acquired or constructed, so long as, in each case, (i) the Indebtedness secured by such Lien does not exceed the lesser of the purchase or construction price of such property or the fair market value of such property, (ii) no such Lien extends to or covers any property other than the property being acquired or constructed, and (iii) such Liens do not secure obligations in excess of $25,000,000 in the aggregate;

 

(h)                                  Liens existing on the property of a business entity at the time such entity becomes a Subsidiary of Borrower or otherwise is acquired by Borrower or any Subsidiary of Borrower, or at the time substantially all of the assets of such entity are acquired or leased by Borrower or any Subsidiary of Borrower and not incurred in contemplation thereof, so long as, no such Lien is permitted to extend to or cover any property other than the property subject thereto immediately prior to such entity becoming a Subsidiary or the assets of the owner of such property being so acquired or leased;

 

(i)                                      Liens on the property of a Subsidiary of Borrower (other than a wholly-owned Subsidiary) to secure Indebtedness owing to Borrower or to one or more wholly owned Subsidiaries of Borrower;

 

(j)                                     pledges, deposits, performance bonds or similar Liens arising in the ordinary course of business in connection with bids, tenders, contracts and leases to which Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries is a party;

 

(k)                                  Liens or other restrictions on the use of real property, none of which materially impairs the operation by Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole of their respective businesses and none of which is violated by existing or proposed structures or land use;

 

(l)                                      Liens securing appeal bonds and other similar Liens, arising in connection with court proceedings (including, without limitation, surety bonds, security for costs of litigation where required by law and letters of credit) or any other instruments serving a similar purpose;

 

29



 

(m)                              judgment Liens in respect of judgments not resulting in an Event of Default;

 

(n)                                  Liens given to a public utility or any municipality or governmental or other public authority when required by such utility or other authority in connection with the operation of the business or the ownership of the assets of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, so long as such Liens do not reduce the value of the assets in any material respect or interfere in any material respect with the ordinary conduct of the business of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries;

 

(o)                                  the right reserved to or vested in any Governmental Authority by any statutory provision or by the terms of any lease, license, franchise, grant or permit, to terminate any such lease, license, franchise, grant or permit, or to require annual or other payments as a condition to the continuance thereof;

 

(p)                                  Liens securing any Capital Lease entered into in the ordinary course of business, so long as (i) no such Lien extends to or covers any property other than the property subject to such Capital Lease and (ii) in any calendar year, no more than $25,000,000 of obligations secured by such Liens shall be incurred;

 

(q)                                  Liens on pledges or deposits of cash and cash equivalents to secure or cash-collateralize any letters of credit issued or extended in the ordinary course of business;

 

(r)                                     Liens under the Pledge Agreement securing the Obligations; and

 

(s)                                    extensions, renewals or replacements in whole or in part of the Liens described in clauses (a), (d), (f), (g), (h), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), (n), (o), (p), (q) and (r) of this Section 5.5 for the same or a lesser amount of Indebtedness, except that no such Lien is permitted to extend to or cover any property other than the property that was subject to the Lien being extended, renewed or replaced;

 

5.6                                Compliance with Laws.   Borrower will comply, and will cause each of its Subsidiaries to comply, in all material respects with all applicable laws (including Environmental Laws), except where any failure to comply therewith would not reasonably be expected to, individually or collectively, have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

5.7                                Inspection of Property, Books and Records.   Borrower will, and will cause each of its Subsidiaries to, keep proper books of record and account in which full, true and correct entries (in all material respects) in conformity with GAAP will be made of all dealings and transactions in relation to its business and activities.  Borrower will, and will cause each of its Subsidiaries to, permit representatives of Administrative Agent, at Borrower’s expense (provided, that the costs and expenses payable by Borrower in respect of such visits and inspections performed while no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing will not exceed $10,000 in the aggregate per calendar year), to visit and inspect any of the properties of any Credit Party and any of its respective Subsidiaries to inspect its and their financial records and properties, to examine and make extracts from its and their books and records and to discuss its and their affairs and financial condition with its and their officers and (with the participation of or prior notice to such officers) independent public accountants, all at reasonable times with reasonable prior notice.  So long as no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, such visits and inspections will not exceed one per calendar year.  Representatives of any Lender, at such Lender’s sole expense, may accompany representatives of Administrative Agent during any such visit or inspection by Administrative Agent.

 

5.8                                Payment of Obligations.  Borrower will, and will cause each of its Subsidiaries to, pay its tax liabilities and other material obligations, before the same becomes delinquent or in default, except

 

30


 

where (a) (i) the validity or amount thereof is being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and (ii) Borrower or such Subsidiary has set aside on its books appropriate reserves with respect thereto in accordance with GAAP or (b) the failure to make such payments could not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

5.9                                Guarantors.

 

(a)                                  Subject to clause (b) below, (A) Borrower will, on the date of this Agreement, cause each of Company, Inovalon SME and Catalyst to become a Guarantor by executing this Agreement, and (B) within 60 days (or such later date determined by Administrative Agent in its discretion) of creation or acquisition by any Credit Party after the date of this Agreement of any new wholly owned, direct or indirect Domestic Subsidiary of such Credit Party (other than any direct Domestic Subsidiary of any Foreign Subsidiary) that constitutes a Material Subsidiary, each Credit Party will cause such Subsidiary to become a Guarantor under this Agreement, and, solely if the Pledge Agreement is then in effect, a Grantor under the Pledge Agreement, by executing and delivering a Counterpart Agreement.

 

(b)                                  If, at any time, a Guarantor is dissolved, sold, merged, amalgamated or otherwise disposed of in a manner not prohibited by this Agreement, (A) such Guarantor will be automatically released from its obligations under this Agreement, without any need for any formal action by Administrative Agent or any Lender, and (B) Borrower will provide notice of any such event to Administrative Agent.  Upon the written request of Borrower and at Borrower’s expense, Administrative Agent will execute any documents reasonably requested by Borrower in order to acknowledge the release of any such Guarantor from its obligations as a Guarantor.

 

5.10                         Security.   If a Qualified IPO of Borrower is not consummated on or before the first anniversary of the Closing Date, then Borrower will, and will cause each of the Guarantors to, (i) within 30 days following such date (or such later date determined by Administrative Agent in its discretion), execute and deliver to Administrative Agent the Pledge Agreement, and (ii) take all actions required of such Credit Party pursuant to the Pledge Agreement to cause the Obligations to be secured by a First Priority Lien in favor of Administrative Agent, for the benefit of the Lenders, on the issued and outstanding Equity Interests of each wholly-owned Subsidiary of Borrower that is an operating company (except that the pledge of Equity Interests in any Foreign Subsidiary that is an operating company will be limited to 65% of the voting ownership interests and 100% of the non-voting ownership interests in such Foreign Subsidiary), including delivery to Administrative Agent of certificates representing all such pledged Equity Interests (to the extent certificated), together with duly executed and undated transfer powers, as (and if) applicable.

 

5.11                         No Further Negative Pledges.   Except with respect to (a) specific property encumbered to secure payment of particular Indebtedness or to be sold under an executed agreement with respect to an Asset Sale, (b) restrictions by reason of customary provisions restricting assignments, subletting or other transfers contained in leases, licenses and similar agreements entered into in the ordinary course of business (provided that such restrictions are limited to the property or assets secured by such Liens or the property or assets subject to such leases, licenses or similar agreements, as the case may be) and (c) restrictions existing on the Closing Date (none of which would prevent the pledge of the Collateral contemplated by the Pledge Agreement), neither Borrower, nor any of its Subsidiaries, is permitted to enter into any agreement prohibiting the creation or assumption of any Lien upon any of its material properties or assets, whether now owned or acquired after the date of this Agreement, to secure the Obligations.

 

5.12                         Consolidation or Merger .  Borrower will not, and will not permit any Subsidiary to, merge with or consolidate into any other Person, except that:

 

31



 

(i)                                      a Subsidiary may merge into or consolidate with Borrower or another Subsidiary; provided that in the case of any Subsidiary that is a Material Subsidiary or a Guarantor that merges or consolidates with another Subsidiary, the continuing corporation (or entity) will, after giving effect to such merger or consolidation, remain a Material Subsidiary or Guarantor, as the case may be; and

 

(ii)                                   Borrower or any Subsidiary may merge into or consolidate with any Person (other than Borrower or a Subsidiary) if (A) in the case of any merger or consolidation involving Borrower, Borrower is the continuing corporation and, in the case of any merger or consolidation involving a Material Subsidiary, the continuing corporation (immediately after giving effect to such merger or consolidation) is a Material Subsidiary and, in case such Subsidiary is a Guarantor, the continuing corporation (immediately after giving effect to such merger or consolidation) is a Guarantor; and (B) immediately after giving effect to such merger or consolidation, no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

SECTION 6.                          GUARANTY

 

6.1                                Guaranty of the Obligations.   Subject to the provisions of Section 6.2, Guarantors jointly and severally hereby irrevocably and unconditionally guaranty to Administrative Agent, for the ratable benefit of the Beneficiaries, the due and punctual payment in full of all Obligations when such Obligations become due, whether at stated maturity, by required prepayment, declaration, acceleration, demand or otherwise (including amounts that would become due but for the operation of the automatic stay under Section 362(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, 11 U.S.C. § 362(a)) (collectively, the “Guaranteed Obligations” ).

 

6.2                                Contribution by Guarantors.   All Guarantors desire to allocate among themselves (collectively, the “Contributing Guarantors” ), in a fair and equitable manner, their obligations arising under this Guaranty.  Accordingly, if any payment or distribution is made on any date by a Guarantor (a “Funding Guarantor” ) under this Guaranty such that its Aggregate Payments exceeds its Fair Share as of such date, such Funding Guarantor will be entitled to a contribution from each of the other Contributing Guarantors in an amount sufficient to cause each Contributing Guarantor’s Aggregate Payments to equal its Fair Share as of such date.  “Fair Share” means, with respect to a Contributing Guarantor as of any date of determination, an amount equal to (a) the ratio of (i) the Fair Share Contribution Amount with respect to such Contributing Guarantor to (ii) the aggregate of the Fair Share Contribution Amounts with respect to all Contributing Guarantors multiplied by (b) the aggregate amount paid or distributed on or before such date by all Funding Guarantors under this Guaranty in respect of the obligations Guaranteed.  “Fair Share Contribution Amount” means, with respect to a Contributing Guarantor as of any date of determination, the maximum aggregate amount of the obligations of such Contributing Guarantor under this Guaranty that would not render its obligations under this Agreement or thereunder subject to avoidance as a fraudulent transfer or conveyance under Section 548 of Title 11 of the United States Code or any comparable applicable provisions of state law.  Solely for purposes of calculating the “Fair Share Contribution Amount” with respect to any Contributing Guarantor for purposes of this Section 6.2, any assets or liabilities of such Contributing Guarantor arising by virtue of any rights to subrogation, reimbursement or indemnification or any rights to or obligations of contribution under this Agreement will not be considered as assets or liabilities of such Contributing Guarantor.  “Aggregate Payments” means, with respect to a Contributing Guarantor as of any date of determination, an amount equal to (1) the aggregate amount of all payments and distributions made on or before such date by such Contributing Guarantor in respect of this Guaranty (including in respect of this Section 6.2), minus (2) the aggregate amount of all payments received on or before such date by such Contributing Guarantor from the other Contributing Guarantors as contributions under this Section 6.2.  The amounts payable as contributions under this Agreement will be determined as of the date on which the related

 

32



 

payment or distribution is made by the applicable Funding Guarantor.  The allocation among Contributing Guarantors of their obligations as set forth in this Section 6.2 will not be construed in any way to limit the liability of any Contributing Guarantor under this Agreement.  Each Guarantor is a third party beneficiary to the contribution agreement set forth in this Section 6.2.

 

6.3                                Payment by Guarantors.   Subject to Section 6.2, Guarantors hereby jointly and severally agree, in furtherance of the foregoing and not in limitation of any other right which any Beneficiary may have at law or in equity against any Guarantor by virtue of this Agreement, that upon the failure of Borrower to pay any of the Guaranteed Obligations when and as such Guaranteed Obligations become due, whether at stated maturity, by required prepayment, declaration, acceleration, demand or otherwise (including amounts that would become due but for the operation of the automatic stay under Section 362(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, 11 U.S.C. § 362(a)), Guarantors will upon demand pay, or cause to be paid, in Cash, to Administrative Agent for the ratable benefit of Beneficiaries, an amount equal to the sum of the unpaid principal amount of all Guaranteed Obligations then due as aforesaid, accrued and unpaid interest on such Guaranteed Obligations (including interest which, but for Borrower’s becoming the subject of a case under the Bankruptcy Code, would have accrued on such Guaranteed Obligations, whether or not a claim is allowed against Borrower for such interest in the related bankruptcy case) and all other Guaranteed Obligations then owed to Beneficiaries as aforesaid.

 

6.4                                Liability of Guarantors Absolute.   Each Guarantor agrees that its obligations under this Agreement are irrevocable, absolute, independent and unconditional and will not be affected by any circumstance which constitutes a legal or equitable discharge of a guarantor or surety other than payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made).  In furtherance of the foregoing and without limiting the generality thereof, each Guarantor agrees as follows:

 

(a)                                  this Guaranty is a guaranty of payment when due and not of collectability.  This Guaranty is a primary obligation of each Guarantor and not merely a contract of surety;

 

(b)                                  Administrative Agent may enforce this Guaranty upon the occurrence of an Event of Default notwithstanding the existence of any dispute between Borrower and any Beneficiary with respect to the existence of such Event of Default;

 

(c)                                   the obligations of each Guarantor under this Agreement are independent of the obligations of Borrower and the obligations of any other guarantor (including any other Guarantor) of the obligations of Borrower, and a separate action or actions may be brought and prosecuted against such Guarantor whether or not any action is brought against Borrower or any of such other guarantors and whether or not Borrower is joined in any such action or actions;

 

(d)                                  payment by any Guarantor of a portion, but not all, of the Guaranteed Obligations will in no way limit, affect, modify or abridge any Guarantor’s liability for any portion of the Guaranteed Obligations which has not been paid.  Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, if Administrative Agent is awarded a judgment in any suit brought to enforce any Guarantor’s covenant to pay a portion of the Guaranteed Obligations, such judgment will not be deemed to release such Guarantor from its covenant to pay the portion of the Guaranteed Obligations that is not the subject of such suit, and such judgment will not, except to the extent satisfied by such Guarantor, limit, affect, modify or abridge any other Guarantor’s liability under this Agreement in respect of the Guaranteed Obligations;

 

(e)                                   any Beneficiary, upon such terms as it deems appropriate, without notice or demand and without affecting the validity or enforceability of this Agreement or giving rise to any reduction, limitation, impairment, discharge or termination of any Guarantor’s liability under this

 

33



 

Agreement, from time to time may (i) renew, extend, accelerate, increase the rate of interest on, or otherwise change the time, place, manner or terms of payment of the Guaranteed Obligations; (ii) settle, compromise, release or discharge, or accept or refuse any offer of performance with respect to, or substitutions for, the Guaranteed Obligations or any agreement relating thereto and/or subordinate the payment of the same to the payment of any other obligations; (iii) request and accept other guaranties of the Guaranteed Obligations and take and hold security for the payment of this Agreement or the Guaranteed Obligations; (iv) release, surrender, exchange, substitute, compromise, settle, rescind, waive, alter, subordinate or modify, with or without consideration, any security for payment of the Guaranteed Obligations, any other guaranties of the Guaranteed Obligations, or any other obligation of any Person (including any other Guarantor) with respect to the Guaranteed Obligations; (v) enforce and apply any security now or of the date of this Agreement held by or for the benefit of such Beneficiary in respect of this Agreement or the Guaranteed Obligations and direct the order or manner of sale thereof, or exercise any other right or remedy that such Beneficiary may have against any such security, in each case as such Beneficiary in its discretion may determine consistent herewith and any applicable security agreement, including foreclosure on any such security under one or more judicial or nonjudicial sales, whether or not every aspect of any such sale is commercially reasonable, and even though such action operates to impair or extinguish any right of reimbursement or subrogation or other right or remedy of any Guarantor against any other Credit Party or any security for the Guaranteed Obligations; and (vi) exercise any other rights available to it under the Credit Documents; and

 

(f)                                    this Guaranty and the obligations of Guarantors under this Agreement will be valid and enforceable and will not be subject to any reduction or limitation (other than as a result of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations), impairment, discharge or termination for any reason (other than payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made)), including the occurrence of any of the following, whether or not any Guarantor had notice or knowledge of any of them: (i) any failure or omission to assert or enforce or agreement or election not to assert or enforce, or the stay or enjoining, by order of court, by operation of law or otherwise, of the exercise or enforcement of, any claim or demand or any right, power or remedy (whether arising under the Credit Documents, at law, in equity or otherwise) with respect to the Guaranteed Obligations or any agreement relating thereto, or with respect to any other guaranty of or security for the payment of the Guaranteed Obligations; (ii) any rescission, waiver, amendment or modification of, or any consent to departure from, any of the terms or provisions (including provisions relating to events of default) of this Agreement, any of the other Credit Documents or any agreement or instrument executed under any other Credit Documents, or of any other guaranty or security for the Guaranteed Obligations, in each case whether or not in accordance with the terms of this Agreement or such Credit Document or any agreement relating to such other guaranty or security; (iii) the Guaranteed Obligations, or any agreement relating thereto, at any time being found to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any respect; (iv) the application of payments received from any source (other than payments received under the other Credit Documents or from the proceeds of any security for the Guaranteed Obligations, except to the extent such security also serves as collateral for indebtedness other than the Guaranteed Obligations) to the payment of indebtedness other than the Guaranteed Obligations, even though any Beneficiary might have elected to apply such payment to any part or all of the Guaranteed Obligations; (v) any Beneficiary’s consent to the change, reorganization or termination of the corporate structure or existence of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and to any corresponding restructuring of the Guaranteed Obligations; (vi) any failure to perfect or continue perfection of a security interest in any collateral which secures any of the Guaranteed Obligations; (vii) any defenses (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations), set-offs or counterclaims which Borrower may allege or assert against any Beneficiary in respect of the Guaranteed Obligations, including failure of consideration, breach of warranty, payment, statute of frauds, statute of limitations, accord and satisfaction and usury; and (viii) any other act or thing or omission, or delay to do any other act or thing,

 

34



 

which may or might in any manner or to any extent vary the risk of any Guarantor as an obligor in respect of the Guaranteed Obligations.

 

6.5                                Waivers by Guarantors.   Each Guarantor hereby waives, for the benefit of Beneficiaries: (a) any right to require any Beneficiary, as a condition of payment or performance by such Guarantor, to (i) proceed against Borrower, any other guarantor (including any other Guarantor) of the Guaranteed Obligations or any other Person, (ii) proceed against or exhaust any security held from Borrower, any such other guarantor or any other Person, (iii) proceed against or have resort to any balance of any Deposit Account or credit on the books of any Beneficiary in favor of any Credit Party or any other Person, or (iv) pursue any other remedy in the power of any Beneficiary whatsoever; (b) any defense arising by reason of the incapacity, lack of authority or any disability or other defense (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations) of Borrower or any other Guarantor including any defense (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations) based on or arising out of the lack of validity or the unenforceability of the Guaranteed Obligations or any agreement or instrument relating thereto or by reason of the cessation of the liability of Borrower or any other Guarantor from any cause other than payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made); (c) any defense (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations) based upon any statute or rule of law which provides that the obligation of a surety will be neither larger in amount nor in other respects more burdensome than that of the principal; (d) any defense (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations) based upon any Beneficiary’s errors or omissions in the administration of the Guaranteed Obligations, except behavior which amounts to bad faith; (e) (i) any principles or provisions of law, statutory or otherwise, which are or might be in conflict with the terms of this Agreement and any legal or equitable discharge of such Guarantor’s obligations under this Agreement, (ii) the benefit of any statute of limitations affecting such Guarantor’s liability under this Agreement or the enforcement of this Agreement, (iii) any rights to set-offs, recoupments and counterclaims, and (iv) promptness, diligence and any requirement that any Beneficiary protect, secure, perfect or insure any security interest or lien or any property subject thereto; (f) notices, demands, presentments, protests, notices of protest, notices of dishonor and notices of any action or inaction, including acceptance of this Agreement, notices of default under this Agreement or any agreement or instrument related thereto, notices of any renewal, extension or modification of the Guaranteed Obligations or any agreement related thereto, notices of any extension of credit to Borrower and notices of any of the matters referred to in Section 6.4 and any right to consent to any thereof; and (g) any defenses (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations) or benefits that may be derived from or afforded by law which limit the liability of or exonerate guarantors or sureties, or which may conflict with the terms of this Agreement.

 

6.6                                Guarantors’ Rights of Subrogation, Contribution, Etc .  Until the Guaranteed Obligations have been paid in full (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made) and the Revolving Loan Commitments have been terminated, each Guarantor hereby waives any claim, right or remedy, direct or indirect, that such Guarantor now has or may after the date of this Agreement have against Borrower or any other Guarantor or any of its assets in connection with this Guaranty or the performance by such Guarantor of its obligations under this Agreement, in each case whether such claim, right or remedy arises in equity, under contract, by statute, under common law or otherwise and including (a) any right of subrogation, reimbursement or indemnification that such Guarantor now has or may after the date of this Agreement have against Borrower with respect to the Guaranteed Obligations, (b) any right to enforce, or to participate in, any claim, right or remedy that any Beneficiary now has or may after the date of this Agreement have against Borrower, and (c) any benefit of, and any right to participate in, any collateral or security now or after the date of this Agreement held by any Beneficiary.  In addition, until the Guaranteed Obligations have been paid in full (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made) and the Revolving Loan Commitments have been terminated, each Guarantor will withhold exercise of any right of contribution

 

35



 

such Guarantor may have against any other guarantor (including any other Guarantor) of the Guaranteed Obligations, including any such right of contribution as contemplated by Section 6.2.  Each Guarantor further agrees that, to the extent the waiver or agreement to withhold the exercise of its rights of subrogation, reimbursement, indemnification and contribution as set forth in this Agreement is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void or voidable for any reason, any rights of subrogation, reimbursement or indemnification such Guarantor may have against Borrower or against any collateral or security, and any rights of contribution such Guarantor may have against any such other guarantor, will be junior and subordinate to any rights any Beneficiary may have against Borrower, to all right, title and interest any Beneficiary may have in any such collateral or security, and to any right any Beneficiary may have against such other guarantor.  If any amount is paid to any Guarantor on account of any such subrogation, reimbursement, indemnification or contribution rights at any time when all Guaranteed Obligations have not have been paid in full (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made), such amount will be held in trust for Administrative Agent on behalf of Beneficiaries and will forthwith be paid over to Administrative Agent for the benefit of Beneficiaries to be credited and applied against the Guaranteed Obligations, whether matured or unmatured, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

6.7                                Subordination of Other Obligations.   Any Indebtedness of Borrower or any Guarantor now or after the date of this Agreement held by any Guarantor (the “Obligee Guarantor” ) is hereby subordinated in right of payment to the Guaranteed Obligations, and any such Indebtedness collected or received by the Obligee Guarantor after an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing will be held in trust for Administrative Agent on behalf of Beneficiaries and will forthwith be paid over to Administrative Agent for the benefit of Beneficiaries to be credited and applied against the Guaranteed Obligations but without affecting, impairing or limiting in any manner the liability of the Obligee Guarantor under any other provision of this Agreement.

 

6.8                                Continuing Guaranty.   This Guaranty is a continuing guaranty and will remain in effect until all of the Guaranteed Obligations have been paid in full (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made) and the Revolving Loan Commitments have been terminated.  Each Guarantor hereby irrevocably waives any right to revoke this Guaranty as to future transactions giving rise to any Guaranteed Obligations.

 

6.9                                Authority of Guarantors or Borrower.   No Beneficiary will be required to inquire into the capacity or powers of any Guarantor or Borrower or the officers, directors or any agents acting or purporting to act on behalf of any of them.

 

6.10                         Financial Condition of Borrower.   Borrower may borrow or continue any Loan from time to time without notice to or authorization from any Guarantor regardless of the financial or other condition of Borrower at the time of any such grant or continuation.  No Beneficiary will have any obligation to disclose or discuss with any Guarantor its assessment, or any Guarantor’s assessment, of the financial condition of Borrower.  Each Guarantor has adequate means to obtain information from Borrower on a continuing basis concerning the financial condition of Borrower and its ability to perform its obligations under the Credit Documents, and each Guarantor assumes the responsibility for being and keeping informed of the financial condition of Borrower and of all circumstances bearing upon the risk of nonpayment of the Guaranteed Obligations.  Each Guarantor hereby waives and relinquishes any duty on the part of any Beneficiary to disclose any matter, fact or thing relating to the business, operations or conditions of Borrower now known or after the date of this Agreement known by any Beneficiary.

 

36



 

6.11                         Bankruptcy, Etc.

 

(a)                                  So long as any Guaranteed Obligations remain outstanding, no Guarantor will, without the prior written consent of Administrative Agent acting in accordance with the instructions of Requisite Lenders, commence or join with any other Person in commencing any bankruptcy, reorganization or insolvency case or proceeding of or against Borrower or any other Guarantor.  The obligations of Guarantors under this Agreement will not be reduced, limited, impaired, discharged, deferred, suspended or terminated by any case or proceeding, voluntary or involuntary, involving the bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership, reorganization, liquidation or arrangement of Borrower or any other Guarantor or by any defense (other than the defense of payment in full of the Guaranteed Obligations) that Borrower or any other Guarantor may have by reason of the order, decree or decision of any court or administrative body resulting from any such proceeding.

 

(b)                                  Each Guarantor acknowledges and agrees that any interest on any portion of the Guaranteed Obligations which accrues after the commencement of any case or proceeding referred to in clause (a) above (or, if interest on any portion of the Guaranteed Obligations ceases to accrue by operation of law by reason of the commencement of such case or proceeding, such interest as would have accrued on such portion of the Guaranteed Obligations if such case or proceeding had not been commenced) will be included in the Guaranteed Obligations because it is the intention of Guarantors and Beneficiaries that the Guaranteed Obligations which are guaranteed by Guarantors under this Agreement should be determined without regard to any rule of law or order which may relieve Borrower of any portion of such Guaranteed Obligations.  Guarantors will permit any trustee in bankruptcy, receiver, debtor in possession, assignee for the benefit of creditors or similar Person to pay Administrative Agent, or allow the claim of Administrative Agent in respect of, any such interest accruing after the date on which such case or proceeding is commenced.

 

(c)                                   If all or any portion of the Guaranteed Obligations are paid by Borrower, the obligations of Guarantors under this Agreement will continue and remain in full force and effect or be reinstated, as the case may be, if all or any part of such payment(s) are rescinded or recovered directly or indirectly from any Beneficiary as a preference, fraudulent transfer or otherwise, and any such payments which are so rescinded or recovered will constitute Guaranteed Obligations for all purposes under this Agreement.

 

6.12                         Discharge of Guaranty Upon Sale of Guarantor.   If all of the Equity Interests of any Guarantor or any of its successors in interest under this Agreement are sold or otherwise disposed of (including by merger or consolidation) in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the Guaranty of such Guarantor or such successor in interest, as the case may be, under this Agreement will automatically be discharged and released without any further action by any Beneficiary or any other Person effective as of the time of such sale or other disposal.

 

SECTION 7.                          EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

7.1                                Events of Default. Each of the following events is herein referred to as an “Event of Default” :

 

(a)                                  Borrower fails to pay when due, whether at stated maturity, acceleration or otherwise, any principal on any Loan;

 

(b)                                  Borrower fails to pay within five (5) Business Days after the date when due any fees, any interest or other amount due under the Credit Documents;

 

37



 

(c)                                   Borrower fails to observe or perform any covenant contained in (i) Sections 5.2(a), 5.3 or 5.4, or (ii) Sections 5.1(d)(i), 5.5 or 5.11 and, solely with respect to the covenants identified in this clause (ii), such failure continues for a period of five (5) Business Days;

 

(d)                                  Borrower fails to observe or perform, in any material respect, any covenant or agreement contained in this Agreement (other than those covered by Sections 7.1(a), 7.1(b) or 7.1(c) above) and such failure continues for a period of thirty (30) days after written notice thereof has been given to Borrower by the Agent at the request of any Lender;

 

(e)                                   any representation, warranty, certification or other material statement expressly made by Borrower in this Agreement or in any certificate, financial statement or other material document delivered under this Agreement proves to have been incorrect in any material respect when made (or deemed made);

 

(f)                                    (i) Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries fails to make any payment (whether of principal or interest) when  due in respect of any Indebtedness of Borrower or such Subsidiary, respectively, in each case, having (individually) a then-outstanding principal amount of at least $25,000,000 (or its equivalent (as of the applicable date) in any other currency), individually or collectively, in each case, beyond the grace period, if any, provided for such payment;

 

(i)                                      any breach or default by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries with respect to any term of Indebtedness of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, exclusive of any Indebtedness of the type described in clause (iii) below, having (individually) a then-outstanding principal amount (or equivalent) of at least $25,000,000 (or its equivalent (as of the applicable date) in any other currency), and as a result of such breach or default such Indebtedness has, or the holder or holders of such Indebtedness or any trustee or agent on its or their behalf has the right to declare all such Indebtedness to, become due and payable (or to become redeemable or subject to a compulsory repurchase) prior to its scheduled maturity; or

 

(ii)                                   any breach or default by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries with respect to any term of any Hedging Agreement  to which Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries is a party and, as a result of such breach or default (i) one or more counterparties to such Hedging Agreement (other than Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries) has the right to declare all amounts payable under such Hedging Agreement to be due and payable and (ii) the aggregate amount so due and payable (pursuant to the terms of such Hedging Agreement) would at least equal $25,000,000.

 

(g)                                   Borrower or any of its Material Subsidiaries commences a voluntary case or other proceeding seeking liquidation, reorganization or other relief with respect to itself or its debts under any bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar law now or after the date of this Agreement in effect or seeking the appointment of a trustee, receiver, liquidator, custodian or other similar official of it or all or substantially all of its property, or consents to any such relief or to the appointment of or taking possession by any such official in an involuntary case or other proceeding commenced against it, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or fails generally to pay its debts as they become due, or takes any corporate action to authorize any of the foregoing;

 

(h)                                  an involuntary case or other proceeding is commenced against Borrower or any of its Material Subsidiaries seeking liquidation, reorganization or other relief with respect to it or its debts under any bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar law now or after the date of this Agreement in effect or seeking the appointment of a trustee, receiver, liquidator, custodian or other similar official of it or all or substantially all of its property, and such involuntary case or other proceeding remains undismissed and

 

38



 

unstayed for a period of sixty (60) days; or an order for relief is entered against Borrower or any of its Material Subsidiaries under the federal bankruptcy laws as now or after the date of this Agreement in effect;

 

(i)                                      any money judgment, writ or warrant of attachment or similar process involving, individually or collectively, an amount in excess of $25,000,000 (in each case to the extent not adequately covered by insurance) is entered or filed against Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective assets and remains undischarged, unvacated, unbonded or unstayed for a period of sixty (60) consecutive days.

 

(j)                                     one or more ERISA Events has occurred and is continuing that would have, individually or in the aggregate, a Material Adverse Effect;

 

(k)                                  a Change of Control occurs; or

 

(l)                                      (x) with respect to this Agreement, the Guaranty and each other Credit Document (excluding the Pledge Agreement), at any time after the execution and delivery thereof, and (y) solely with respect to the Pledge Agreement, at any time after the date on which the Obligations are required to be secured by a First Priority Lien in favor of Administrative Agent under Section 5.10:

 

(i)                                      such Credit Document for any reason, other than the satisfaction in full of all Obligations, ceases to be in full force and effect (other than in accordance with its terms) or is declared to be null and void, or any Credit Party repudiates in writing its Obligations under such Credit Document (including with respect to future advances by Lenders under the Credit Agreement);

 

(ii)                                   with respect to the Pledge Agreement, the Administrative Agent does not have or ceases to have a valid and perfected First Priority Lien in any Collateral purported to be covered by the Pledge Agreement, in each case for any reason other than the failure of Administrative Agent or any Secured Party to take any action within its control (including Administrative Agent’s failure to timely file or continue any applicable UCC financing statement or loss of or failure to maintain control of any possessory Collateral delivered to it); or

 

(iii)                                any Credit Party contests in writing the validity or enforceability of any Credit Document or the validity or perfection of any Lien in any Collateral purported to be covered by the Pledge Agreement.

 

7.2                                Rights and Remedies.  (1) Upon the occurrence and during the continuance of any Event of Default (other than any of the Events of Default specified in Sections 7.1(g) or 7.1(h) above), if requested by the Requisite Lenders (subject to the proviso to the definition of “Requisite Lenders”), Administrative Agent will, by written notice to Borrower, immediately terminate the Revolving Loan Commitments, if any, of each Lender having such Revolving Loan Commitments, and declare the Loans (together with accrued interest thereon) and all other Obligations to be, and the Loans (together with accrued interest thereon) and all other Obligations will thereupon become, immediately due and payable without presentment, demand, protest or other notice of any kind, all of which are hereby waived by Borrower, and (2) upon the occurrence of any of the Events of Default specified in Sections 7.1(g) or 7.1(h) above, without any notice to Borrower or any other act by Administrative Agent or the Lenders, the Commitments will thereupon terminate and the Loans (together with accrued interest thereon) and all other Obligations will become immediately due and payable without presentment, demand, protest or other notice of any kind, all of which are hereby waived by Borrower.

 

39



 

7.3                                Notice of Default.  Administrative Agent will give notice to Borrower under Section 7.1(d) promptly upon being requested to do so by any Lender and will thereupon notify all the Lenders thereof.

 

7.4                                Preservation of Certain Rights and Remedies.  The parties to this Agreement agree that the absence of a right on the part of Administrative Agent or the Lenders (other than as expressly set forth in Section 7.2) to terminate the Commitments prior to the funding of the Loans on the Closing Date as a result of the existence of an Event of Default will not be construed as a waiver of (a) any condition precedent to the making of the Loans set forth in Section 3 or (b) any right on the part of Administrative Agent or the Lenders to accelerate the maturity of the Loans as provided in Section 7.2 or to exercise any other remedy provided for in this Agreement or available under applicable law, it being the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all such conditions, rights and remedies remain fully available to Administrative Agent and the Lenders.

 

SECTION 8.                          AGENTS

 

8.1                                Appointment of Agents .  Goldman Sachs is hereby appointed Administrative Agent under this Agreement and under the other Credit Documents and each Lender hereby authorizes Goldman Sachs to act as Administrative Agent in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the other Credit Documents.  Each Agent hereby agrees to act in its capacity as such upon the express conditions contained in this Agreement and the other Credit Documents, as applicable.  No Credit Party will have any rights as a third party beneficiary with respect to any of the provisions of this Section 8 consisting of those obligations of the Lenders that expressly are owed to the Agents or obligations of the Agents that expressly are owed to the Lenders.  Nothing in this Section 8 is intended to, and nothing in this Section 8 will, prohibit or limit any Credit Party from enforcing any consent or other rights of such Credit Party under Section 8.7.  In performing its functions and duties under this Agreement, each Agent will act solely as an agent of Lenders and does not assume and will not be deemed to have assumed any obligation towards or relationship of agency or trust with or for Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries.

 

8.2                                Powers and Duties .   Each Lender irrevocably authorizes each Agent to take such action on such Lender’s behalf and to exercise such powers, rights and remedies under this Agreement and under the other Credit Documents as are specifically delegated or granted to such Agent by the terms of this Agreement and thereof, together with such powers, rights and remedies as are reasonably incidental thereto.  Each Agent will have only those duties and responsibilities that are expressly specified in this Agreement and the other Credit Documents.  Each Agent may exercise such powers, rights and remedies and perform such duties by or through its agents or employees.  No Agent will have, by reason of this Agreement or any of the other Credit Documents, a fiduciary relationship in respect of any Lender or any other Person; and nothing in this Agreement or any of the other Credit Documents, expressed or implied, is intended to or will be so construed as to impose upon any Agent any obligations in respect of this Agreement or any of the other Credit Documents except as expressly set forth in this Agreement or therein.  No Arranger will have any duties or responsibilities under this Agreement or any other Credit Document, except in its capacity, as applicable, as a Lender under this Agreement.

 

8.3                                General Immunity .

 

(a)                                  No Responsibility for Certain Matters .  No Agent will be responsible to any Lender for the execution, effectiveness, genuineness, validity, enforceability, collectability or sufficiency of this Agreement or any other Credit Document or for any representations, warranties, recitals or statements made in this Agreement or therein or made in any written or oral statements or in any financial or other statements, instruments, reports or certificates or any other documents furnished or made by any Agent to Lenders or by or on behalf of any Credit Party to any Agent or any Lender in connection with

 

40


 

the Credit Documents and the transactions contemplated thereby or for the financial condition or business affairs of any Credit Party or any other Person liable for the payment of any Obligations, nor will any Agent be required to ascertain or inquire as to the performance or observance of any of the terms, conditions, provisions, covenants or agreements contained in any of the Credit Documents or as to the use of the proceeds of the Loans or as to the existence or possible existence of any Event of Default or Default or to make any disclosures with respect to the foregoing.  Anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, Administrative Agent will not have any liability arising from confirmations of the amount of outstanding Loans.

 

(b)                                  Exculpatory Provisions .  No Agent nor any of its officers, partners, directors, employees or agents will be liable to Lenders for any action taken or omitted by any Agent under or in connection with any of the Credit Documents except to the extent caused by such Agent’s gross negligence or willful misconduct, as determined by a final, non-appealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction.  Each Agent is entitled to refrain from any act or the taking of any action (including the failure to take an action) in connection herewith or any of the other Credit Documents or from the exercise of any power, discretion or authority vested in it under this Agreement or thereunder unless and until such Agent has received instructions in respect thereof from Requisite Lenders (or such other Lenders as may be required to give such instructions under Section 9.5) and, upon receipt of such instructions from Requisite Lenders (or such other Lenders, as the case may be), such Agent will be entitled to act or (where so instructed) refrain from acting, or to exercise such power, discretion or authority, in accordance with such instructions, including refraining from any action that, in its opinion or the opinion of its counsel, may be in violation of the automatic stay under any Debtor Relief Law or that may effect a forfeiture, modification or termination of property of a Defaulting Lender in violation of any Debtor Relief Law.  Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, (i) each Agent is entitled to rely, and will be fully protected in relying, upon any communication, instrument or document believed by it to be genuine and correct and to have been signed or sent by the proper Person or Persons, and is entitled to rely and will be protected in relying on opinions and judgments of attorneys (who may be attorneys for Borrower and its Subsidiaries), accountants, experts and other professional advisors selected by it; and (ii) no Lender will have any right of action whatsoever against any Agent as a result of such Agent acting or (where so instructed) refraining from acting under this Agreement or any of the other Credit Documents in accordance with the instructions of Requisite Lenders (or such other Lenders as may be required to give such instructions under Section 9.5).

 

(c)                                   Delegation of Duties . Administrative Agent may perform any and all of its duties and exercise its rights and powers under this Agreement or under any other Credit Document by or through any one or more sub-agents appointed by Administrative Agent. Administrative Agent and any such sub-agent may perform any and all of its duties and exercise its rights and powers by or through their respective Affiliates.  The exculpatory, indemnification and other provisions of this Section 8.3 and of Section 8.6 will apply to any of the Affiliates of Administrative Agent.  All of the rights, benefits, and privileges (including the exculpatory and indemnification provisions) of this Section 8.3 and of Section 8.6 will apply to any such sub-agent and to the Affiliates of any such sub-agent, and will apply to their respective activities as sub-agent as if such sub-agent and Affiliates were named in this Agreement.  Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, with respect to each sub-agent appointed by Administrative Agent, (i) such sub-agent will be a third party beneficiary under this Agreement with respect to all such rights, benefits and privileges (including exculpatory rights and rights to indemnification) and will have all of the rights and benefits of a third party beneficiary, including an independent right of action to enforce such rights, benefits and privileges (including exculpatory rights and rights to indemnification) directly, without the consent or joinder of any other Person, against any or all of Credit Parties and the Lenders, (ii) such rights, benefits and privileges (including exculpatory rights and rights to indemnification) will not be modified or amended without the consent of such sub-agent, and (iii) such sub-agent will only have obligations to Administrative Agent and not to any Credit Party,

 

41



 

Lender or any other Person and no Credit Party, Lender or any other Person will have any rights, directly or indirectly, as a third party beneficiary or otherwise, against such sub-agent.

 

8.4                                Agents Entitled to Act as Lender.   The agency hereby created will in no way impair or affect any of the rights and powers of, or impose any duties or obligations upon, any Agent in its individual capacity as a Lender under this Agreement.  With respect to its participation in the Loans, each Agent will have the same rights and powers under this Agreement as any other Lender and may exercise the same as if it were not performing the duties and functions delegated to it under this Agreement, and the term “Lender” will, unless the context clearly otherwise indicates, include each Agent in its individual capacity.  Any Agent and its Affiliates may accept deposits from, lend money to, own securities of, and generally engage in any kind of banking, trust, financial advisory or other business with Borrower or any of its Affiliates as if it were not performing the duties specified in this Agreement, and may accept fees and other consideration from Borrower for services in connection herewith and otherwise without having to account for the same to Lenders.

 

8.5                                Lenders’ Representations, Warranties and Acknowledgment .

 

(a)                                  Each Lender represents and warrants to the Agents that it has made its own independent investigation of the financial condition and affairs of Borrower and its Subsidiaries in connection with the making of Loans under this Agreement and that it has made and will continue to make its own appraisal of the creditworthiness of Borrower and its Subsidiaries.  No Agent will have any duty or responsibility, either initially or on a continuing basis, to make any such investigation or any such appraisal on behalf of Lenders or to provide any Lender with any credit or other information with respect thereto, whether coming into its possession before the making of the Loans or at any time or times at or after the making of such Loans, and no Agent will have any responsibility with respect to the accuracy of or the completeness of any information provided to Lenders.

 

(b)                                  Each Lender, by delivering its signature page to this Agreement or an Assignment Agreement and funding its Term Loan on the Closing Date and/or Revolving Loans on the applicable Borrowing Date, as the case may be, will be deemed to have acknowledged receipt of, and consented to and approved, each Credit Document and each other document required to be approved by any Agent, Requisite Lenders or Lenders, as applicable on the Closing Date or as of the date of funding of such Revolving Loans.

 

8.6                                Right to Indemnity.   Each Lender, in proportion to its Pro Rata Share, severally agrees to indemnify each Agent, to the extent that such Agent has not been reimbursed by any Credit Party, for and against any and all liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses (including counsel fees and disbursements) or disbursements of any kind or nature whatsoever which may be imposed on, incurred by or asserted against such Agent in exercising its powers, rights and remedies or performing its duties under this Agreement or under the other Credit Documents or otherwise in its capacity as such Agent in any way relating to or arising out of this Agreement or the other Credit Documents, but no Lender will be liable for any portion of such liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses or disbursements resulting from such Agent’s gross negligence or willful misconduct, as determined by a final, non-appealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction.  If any indemnity furnished to any Agent for any purpose will, in the opinion of such Agent, be insufficient or become impaired, such Agent may call for additional indemnity and cease, or not commence, to do the acts indemnified against until such additional indemnity is furnished, but in no event will this sentence require any Lender to indemnify any Agent against any liability, obligation, loss, damage, penalty, action, judgment, suit, cost, expense or disbursement in excess of such Lender’s Pro Rata Share thereof, and this sentence will not be deemed to require any Lender to indemnify any Agent against any liability, obligation, loss, damage, penalty, action, judgment, suit, cost, expense or

 

42



 

disbursement resulting from such Agent’s gross negligence or willful misconduct, as determined by a final, non-appealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction.

 

8.7                                Successor Administrative Agent.   Administrative Agent will have the right to resign at any time by giving prior written notice thereof to Lenders and Borrower.  Administrative Agent will have the right to appoint a financial institution that is an Eligible Assignee to act as Administrative Agent under this Agreement, subject to the reasonable satisfaction of Borrower and the Requisite Lenders, and Administrative Agent’s resignation will become effective on the earliest of (i) 30 days after delivery of the notice of resignation (regardless of whether a successor has been appointed or not), (ii) the acceptance of such successor Administrative Agent by Borrower and the Requisite Lenders or (iii) such other date, if any, agreed to by the Requisite Lenders.  Upon any such notice of resignation, if a successor Administrative Agent has not already been appointed by the retiring Administrative Agent, Requisite Lenders will have the right, upon five (5) Business Days’ notice to Borrower, to appoint a successor Administrative Agent.  If neither Requisite Lenders nor Administrative Agent have appointed a successor Administrative Agent, Requisite Lenders will be deemed to have succeeded to and become vested with all the rights, powers, privileges and duties of the retiring Administrative Agent.  Until a successor Administrative Agent is so appointed by Requisite Lenders or Administrative Agent, any collateral security held by Administrative Agent in its role as collateral agent on behalf of the Lenders under any of the Credit Documents will continue to be held by the retiring Administrative Agent as nominee until such time as a successor Administrative Agent is appointed.  Upon the acceptance of any appointment as Administrative Agent under this Agreement by a successor Administrative Agent, that successor Administrative Agent will thereupon succeed to and become vested with all the rights, powers, privileges and duties of the retiring Administrative Agent and the retiring Administrative Agent will promptly (i) transfer to such successor Administrative Agent all Securities and other items of Collateral held under the Pledge Agreement, together with all records and other documents necessary or appropriate, and all sums (if any) held by Administrative Agent, in each case, in connection with the performance of the duties of the successor Administrative Agent under the Credit Documents, and (ii) execute and deliver to such successor Administrative Agent such amendments to financing statements, and take such other actions, as may be necessary or appropriate in connection with the assignment to such successor Administrative Agent of the security interests created under the Pledge Agreement, whereupon such retiring Administrative Agent will be discharged from its duties and obligations under this Agreement.  After any retiring Administrative Agent’s resignation under this Agreement as Administrative Agent, the provisions of this Section 8 7 will inure to its benefit as to any actions taken or omitted to be taken by it while it was Administrative Agent under this Agreement.  Any successor Administrative Agent appointed pursuant to this Section 8.7 shall, upon its acceptance of such appointment, become the successor collateral agent for all purposes under this Agreement.

 

8.8                                Pledge Agreement and Guaranty.

 

(a)                                  Agents under Pledge Agreement and Guaranty .  Each Secured Party hereby further authorizes Administrative Agent on behalf of and for the benefit of Secured Parties, to be the agent for and representative of Secured Parties with respect to the Guaranty, the Collateral and the Pledge Agreement.  Subject to Section 9.5, without further written consent or authorization from any Secured Party, Administrative Agent may execute any documents or instruments necessary to (i) in connection with a sale or disposition of assets permitted by this Agreement, release any Lien encumbering any item of Collateral that is the subject of such sale or other disposition of assets or to which Requisite Lenders (or such other Lenders as may be required to give such consent under Section 9.5) have otherwise consented or (ii) release any Guarantor from the Guaranty under Sections 5.9(b) or 6.12 or with respect to which Requisite Lenders (or such other Lenders as may be required to give such consent under Section 9.5) have otherwise consented.

 

43



 

(b)                                  Right to Realize on Collateral and Enforce Guaranty .  Anything contained in any of the Credit Documents to the contrary notwithstanding, Borrower, Administrative Agent and each Secured Party hereby agree that (i) no Secured Party will have any right individually to realize upon any of the Collateral or to enforce the Guaranty, it being understood and agreed that all powers, rights and remedies under this Agreement and under any of the Credit Documents may be exercised solely by Administrative Agent for the benefit of the Secured Parties in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and the Credit Documents and all powers, rights and remedies under the Pledge Agreement may be exercised solely by Administrative Agent for the benefit of the Secured Parties in accordance with the terms thereof, and (ii) in the event of a foreclosure or similar enforcement action by Administrative Agent on any of the Collateral pursuant to a public or private sale or other disposition (including, without limitation, pursuant to Section 363(k), Section 1129(b)(2)(a)(ii) or otherwise of the Bankruptcy Code), Administrative Agent (or any Lender, except with respect to a “credit bid” pursuant to Section 363(k), Section 1129(b)(2)(a)(ii) or otherwise of the Bankruptcy Code) may be the purchaser or licensor of any or all of such Collateral at any such sale or other disposition and Administrative Agent, as agent for and representative of Secured Parties (but not any Lender or Lenders in its or their respective individual capacities) will be entitled, upon instructions from Requisite Lenders, for the purpose of bidding and making settlement or payment of the purchase price for all or any portion of the Collateral sold at any such sale or disposition, to use and apply any of the Obligations as a credit on account of the purchase price for any collateral payable by Administrative Agent at such sale or other disposition.

 

(c)                                   Release of Collateral and Guarantees, Termination of Credit Documents .  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement or any other Credit Document, when all Obligations have been paid in full (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made), all Commitments have terminated or expired, upon request of Borrower, Administrative Agent will (without notice to, or vote or consent of, any Lender) take such actions as are required to release its security interest in all Collateral, and to release all guarantee obligations provided for in any Credit Document.  Any such release of guarantee obligations will be deemed subject to the provision that such guarantee obligations will be reinstated if after such release any portion of any payment in respect of the Obligations guaranteed thereby is rescinded or will otherwise be restored or returned upon the insolvency, bankruptcy, dissolution, liquidation or reorganization of Borrower or any Guarantor, or upon or as a result of the appointment of a receiver, intervenor or conservator of, or trustee or similar officer for, Borrower or any Guarantor or any substantial part of its property, or otherwise, all as though such payment had not been made.

 

(d)                                  Administrative Agent will not be responsible for or have a duty to ascertain or inquire into any representation or warranty regarding the existence, value or collectability of the Collateral, the existence, priority or perfection of Administrative Agent’s Lien thereon, or any certificate prepared by any Credit Party in connection therewith, nor will Administrative Agent be responsible or liable to the Lenders for any failure to monitor or maintain any portion of the Collateral.

 

8.9                                Administrative Agent May File Bankruptcy Disclosure and Proofs of Claim .  In case of the pendency of any proceeding under any Debtor Relief Laws relative to any Credit Party, Administrative Agent (irrespective of whether the principal of any Loan is then due and payable as in this Agreement expressed or by declaration or otherwise and irrespective of whether Administrative Agent has made any demand on Borrower) will be entitled and empowered (but not obligated) by intervention in such proceeding or otherwise:

 

(a)                                  to file a verified statement under rule 2019 of the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure that, in its sole opinion, complies with such rule’s disclosure requirements for entities representing more than one creditor;

 

44



 

(b)                                  to file and prove a claim for the whole amount of the principal and interest owing and unpaid in respect of the Loans and all other Obligations that are owing and unpaid and to file such other documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the Lenders and Administrative Agent (including any claim for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of Administrative Agent and its respective agents and counsel and all other amounts due Administrative Agent under Sections 2.9, 9.2 and 9.3 allowed in such judicial proceeding; and

 

(c)                                   to collect and receive any monies or other property payable or deliverable on any such claims and to distribute the same; and any custodian, receiver, assignee, trustee, liquidator, sequestrator or other similar official in any such judicial proceeding is hereby authorized by each Lender to make such payments to Administrative Agent and, If Administrative Agent consents to the making of such payments directly to the Lenders, to pay to Administrative Agent any amount due for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of Administrative Agent and its agents and counsel, and any other amounts due Administrative Agent under Sections 2.9, 9.2 and 9.3.  To the extent that the payment of any such compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of Administrative Agent, its agents and counsel, and any other amounts due Administrative Agent under Sections 2.9, 9.2 and 9.3 out of the estate in any such proceeding, is denied for any reason (other than by reason of payment), payment of the same will be secured by a Lien on, and will be paid out of, any and all distributions, dividends, money, securities and other properties that the Lenders may be entitled to receive in such proceeding whether in liquidation or under any plan of reorganization or arrangement or otherwise.

 

(d)                                  Nothing contained in this Agreement will be deemed to authorize Administrative Agent to authorize or consent to or accept or adopt on behalf of any Lender any plan of reorganization, arrangement, adjustment or composition affecting the Obligations or the rights of any Lender or to authorize Administrative Agent to vote in respect of the claim of any Lender in any such proceeding.

 

8.10                         Withholding Taxes .  To the extent required by any applicable law, Administrative Agent may withhold from any payment to any Lender an amount equivalent to any applicable withholding Tax.  If the IRS or any other Governmental Authority asserts a claim that Administrative Agent did not properly withhold Tax from amounts paid to or for the account of any Lender because the appropriate form was not delivered or was not properly executed or because such Lender failed to notify Administrative Agent of a change in circumstance which rendered the exemption from, or reduction of, withholding Tax ineffective or for any other reason, or if Administrative Agent reasonably determines that a payment was made to a Lender pursuant to this Agreement without deduction of applicable withholding tax from such payment, such Lender will indemnify Administrative Agent fully for all amounts paid, directly or indirectly, by Administrative Agent as Tax or otherwise, including any penalties or interest and together with all expenses (including legal expenses, allocated internal costs and out of pocket expenses) incurred.

 

SECTION 9.                          MISCELLANEOUS

 

9.1                                Notices.

 

(a)                                  Notices Generally .  Any notice or other communication in this Agreement required or permitted to be given to (i) a Credit Party will be sent to Borrower, at Borrower’s address as set forth on Appendix B or in the other relevant Credit Documents, or (ii) Administrative Agent will be sent to Administrative Agent’s address as set forth on Appendix B-1 or in the other relevant Credit Document, and in the case of any Lender, the address as indicated on Appendix B or otherwise indicated to Administrative Agent in writing.  Except as otherwise set forth in Section 2.22 or Section 9.1(b) below, each notice under this Agreement will be in writing and may be personally served or sent by telefacsimile (except for any notices sent to Administrative Agent or any Credit Party) or United States mail or courier

 

45



 

service and will be deemed to have been given when delivered in person or by courier service and signed for against receipt thereof, upon receipt of telefacsimile (if applicable), or three (3) Business Days after depositing it in the United States mail with postage prepaid and properly addressed.  Any such notice or other communication will at the request of Administrative Agent be provided to any sub-agent appointed under Section 9.3(c) as designated by Administrative Agent from time to time.

 

(b)                                  Electronic Communications .

 

(i)                                      Notices and other communications to any Agent and any Lenders under this Agreement may be delivered or furnished by electronic communication (including e-mail and Internet or intranet websites, including the Platform) in accordance with procedures approved by Administrative Agent, except that the foregoing will not apply to notices to any Agent or any Lender under Section 2 if such Person has notified Administrative Agent that it is incapable of receiving notices under such Section by electronic communication.  Administrative Agent or Borrower may, in its discretion, agree to accept notices and other communications by electronic communications under procedures approved by it.  Approval of such procedures may be limited to particular notices or communications.  Unless Administrative Agent otherwise prescribes, (i) notices and other communications sent to an e-mail address will be deemed received upon the sender’s receipt of an acknowledgment from the intended recipient (such as by the “return receipt requested” function, as available, return e-mail or other written acknowledgment), except that, if such notice or other communication is not sent during the normal business hours of the recipient, such notice or communication will be deemed to have been sent at the opening of business on the next Business Day for the recipient, and (ii) notices or communications posted to an Internet or intranet website will be deemed received upon the deemed receipt by the intended recipient at its e-mail address as described in the foregoing clause (i) of notification that such notice or communication is available and identifying the website address therefor.

 

(ii)                                   Each Credit Party understands that the distribution of material through an electronic medium is not necessarily secure and that there are confidentiality and other risks associated with such distribution and agrees and assumes the risks associated with such electronic distribution, except to the extent caused by the willful misconduct or gross negligence of Administrative Agent, as determined by a final, non-appealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction.

 

(iii)                                The Platform and any Approved Electronic Communications are provided “as is” and “as available”.  None of the Agents or any of their respective officers, directors, employees, agents, advisors or representatives (the “Agent Affiliates” ) warrant the accuracy, adequacy, or completeness of the Approved Electronic Communications or the Platform and each expressly disclaims liability for errors or omissions in the Platform and the Approved Electronic Communications.  No warranty of any kind, express, implied or statutory, including any warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement of third party rights or freedom from viruses or other code defects is made by the Agent Affiliates in connection with the Platform or the Approved Electronic Communications.

 

(iv)                               Each Credit Party, each Lender and each Agent agrees that Administrative Agent may, but will not be obligated to, store any Approved Electronic Communications on the Platform in accordance with Administrative Agent’s customary document retention procedures and policies.

 

(v)                                  Any notice of Default or Event of Default may be provided by telephone if confirmed promptly after such telephone notice by delivery of written notice thereof.

 

46



 

(c)                                   Private Side Information Contacts .  Each Public Lender agrees to cause at least one individual at or on behalf of such Public Lender to at all times have selected the “Private Side Information” or similar designation on the content declaration screen of the Platform in order to enable such Public Lender or its delegate, in accordance with such Public Lender’s compliance procedures and applicable law, including United States federal and state securities laws, to make reference to information that is not made available through the “Public-Side Information” portion of the Platform and that may contain MNPI.  If any Public Lender has determined for itself to not access any information disclosed through the Platform or otherwise, such Public Lender acknowledges that (i) other Lenders may have availed themselves of such information and (ii) neither Borrower nor Administrative Agent has any responsibility for such Public Lender’s decision to limit the scope of the information it has obtained in connection with this Agreement and the other Credit Documents.

 

9.2                                Expenses.

 

(a)                                  Whether or not the transactions contemplated hereby are consummated, Borrower agrees to pay promptly all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and execution of the Credit Documents on or prior to the Closing Date to the extent provided in the Mandate Letter.

 

(b)                                  Following the Closing Date, Borrower agrees to pay promptly (i) all the reasonable and documented out-of-pocket fees, expenses and disbursements of a single law firm acting as counsel for the Agents and the Lenders (taken as a whole) and, if reasonably necessary, a single local law firm acting as counsel in each relevant material jurisdiction for the Agents and the Lenders (taken as a whole), in each case in connection with the negotiation, preparation, execution and administration of the Credit Documents following the Closing Date, including in respect of any consents, amendments, waivers or other modifications thereto, (ii) all the actual costs and reasonable expenses of creating, perfecting, recording, maintaining and preserving Liens in favor of Administrative Agent, for the benefit of Secured Parties, including filing and recording fees, expenses and taxes, stamp or documentary taxes, search fees, if any, and (iii) after the occurrence of a Default or an Event of Default, all reasonable and documented out-of-pocket costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees of a single law firm acting as counsel to the Agents and the Lenders (taken as a whole) and, if reasonably necessary, a single local law firm acting as counsel in each relevant material jurisdiction for the Agents and the Lenders (taken as a whole) (and, in the case of an actual or potential conflict of interest where any Person affected by such conflict informs Borrower of such conflict and thereafter retains its own counsel, of another firm acting as counsel for such affected Person), incurred by any Agent and Lenders in enforcing any Obligations of or in collecting any payments due from any Credit Party under this Agreement or under the other Credit Documents by reason of such Default or Event of Default (including in connection with the sale, lease or license of, collection from, or other realization upon any of the Collateral or the enforcement of the Guaranty) or in connection with any refinancing or restructuring of the credit arrangements provided under this Agreement in the nature of a “work-out” or in connection with any insolvency or bankruptcy cases or proceedings.

 

47



 

9.3                                Indemnity.

 

(e)                                   In addition to the payment of expenses under Section 9.2, whether or not the transactions contemplated in this Agreement are consummated, each Credit Party agrees to defend (subject to Indemnitees’ selection of counsel), indemnify, pay and hold harmless, each Agent and Lender and each of their respective officers, partners, members, directors, trustees, advisors, employees, agents, sub-agents and affiliates (each, an “Indemnitee” ), from and against any and all Indemnified Liabilities, except that no Credit Party will have any obligation to any Indemnitee under this Agreement with respect to any Indemnified Liabilities to the extent such Indemnified Liabilities arise (1) from the bad faith, gross negligence or willful misconduct of such Indemnitee (or any of such Indemnitee’s controlling Persons or subsidiaries of such controlling Persons or any of their respective or such Indemnitee’s partners, members, directors, attorneys, agents, sub-agents, or employees), or (2) the material breach by such Indemnitee of this Agreement or any of the other Credit Documents, in each case, as, and to the extent, determined by a final, non-appealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction.  To the extent that the undertakings to defend, indemnify, pay and hold harmless set forth in this Section 9.3 may be unenforceable in whole or in part because they are violative of any law or public policy, the applicable Credit Party will contribute the maximum portion that it is permitted to pay and satisfy under applicable law to the payment and satisfaction of all Indemnified Liabilities incurred by Indemnitees or any of them.

 

(b)                                  To the extent permitted by applicable law, in no event will any Indemnitee, any Credit Party or any Affiliate of any of the foregoing (or any of such Person’s controlling Persons or subsidiaries of such controlling Persons, or any of their respective partners, members, directors, attorneys, agents, sub-agents or employees) have any liability for any special, indirect, consequential or punitive damages (as opposed to direct or actual damages) (whether or not the claim therefor is based on contract, tort or duty imposed by any applicable legal requirement) arising out of, in connection with, as a result of, or in any way related to, this Agreement or any Credit Document or any agreement or instrument contemplated hereby or thereby or referred to in this Agreement or therein, the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby, any Loan or the use of the proceeds thereof or any act or omission or event occurring in connection therewith, and each Indemnitee and each Credit Party, for itself and on behalf of its respective Affiliates (and each such Person’s controlling Persons or subsidiaries of such controlling Persons, and their respective partners, members, directors, attorneys, agents, sub-agents and employees), hereby waives, releases and agrees not to sue upon any such claim or any such damages, whether or not accrued and whether or not known or suspected to exist in its favor.

 

(c)                                   Each Credit Party also agrees that no Lender, Agent nor their respective Affiliates, directors, employees, attorneys, agents or sub-agents will have any liability to any Credit Party or any Person asserting claims on behalf of or in right of any Credit Party or any other Person in connection with or as a result of this Agreement or any Credit Document or any agreement or instrument contemplated hereby or thereby or referred to herein or therein, the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby, any Loan or the use of the proceeds of the Loans or any act or omission or event occurring in connection therewith, in each case, except in the case of any Credit Party to the extent that any losses, claims, damages, liabilities or expenses incurred by such Credit Party or its affiliates, shareholders, partners or other equity holders have been found by a final, non-appealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction to have resulted from (1) the bad faith, gross negligence or willful misconduct of such Lender, Agent or their respective Affiliates (or any of such Person’s controlling Persons or subsidiaries of such controlling Persons, or any of their respective partners, members, directors, attorneys, agents, sub-agents or employees), or (2) the material breach by such Lender, Agent or their respective Affiliates (or any of such Person’s controlling Persons or subsidiaries of such controlling Persons, or any of their respective partners, members, directors, attorneys, agents, sub-agents or employees) of this Agreement or any of the other Credit Documents.

 

9.4                                Set-Off.   In addition to any rights now or after the date of this Agreement granted under applicable law and not by way of limitation of any such rights, upon the occurrence of any Event of

 

48



 

Default each Lender is hereby authorized by each Credit Party at any time or from time to time subject to the consent of Administrative Agent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), without notice to any Credit Party or to any other Person (other than Administrative Agent), any such notice being hereby expressly waived, to set off and to appropriate and to apply any and all deposits (general or special, including Indebtedness evidenced by certificates of deposit, whether matured or unmatured, but not including trust accounts) and any other Indebtedness at any time held or owing by such Lender to or for the sole credit or the sole account of any Credit Party against and on account of the obligations and liabilities of any Credit Party to such Lender under this Agreement, irrespective of whether or not (a) such Lender has made any demand under this Agreement or (b) the principal of or the interest on the Loans or any other amounts due under this Agreement have become due and payable under Section 2 and although such obligations and liabilities, or any of them, may be contingent or unmatured.  If any Defaulting Lender exercises any such right of setoff, (x) all amounts so set off will be paid over immediately to Administrative Agent for further application in accordance with the provisions of Sections 2.15 and 2.20 and, pending such payment, will be segregated by such Defaulting Lender from its other funds and deemed held in trust for the benefit of Administrative Agent and the Lenders, and (y) the Defaulting Lender will provide promptly to Administrative Agent a statement describing in reasonable detail the Obligations owing to such Defaulting Lender as to which it exercised such right of setoff.  The rights of each Lender and their respective Affiliates under this Section 9.4 are in addition to other rights and remedies (including other rights of setoff) that such Lender or their respective Affiliates may have.

 

9.5                                Amendments and Waivers .

 

(a)                                  Requisite Lenders’ Consent .  Subject to the additional requirements of Sections 9.5(b) and 9.5(c), no amendment, modification, termination or waiver of any provision of the Credit Documents, or consent to any departure by any Credit Party therefrom, will in any event be effective without the written concurrence of Requisite Lenders, except that Administrative Agent may, with the consent of Borrower only, amend, modify or supplement this Agreement or any other Credit Document to cure any ambiguity, omission, defect or inconsistency (as reasonably determined by Administrative Agent), so long as such amendment, modification or supplement does not adversely affect the rights of any Lender or the Lenders have received at least five (5) Business Days’ prior written notice thereof and Administrative Agent has not received, within five (5) Business Days of the date of such notice to the Lenders, a written notice from the Requisite Lenders stating that the Requisite Lenders object to such amendment.

 

(b)                                  Affected Lenders’ Consent .  Without the written consent of each Lender that would be directly affected thereby, no amendment, modification, termination, or consent will be effective if the effect thereof would:

 

(i)                                      extend the scheduled final maturity of any Loan or Note;

 

(ii)                                   waive, reduce or postpone any scheduled repayment (but not prepayment);

 

(iii)                                reduce the rate of interest on any Loan (other than (x) any waiver of any increase in the interest rate applicable to any Loan under Section 2.8 or (y) reductions based on fluctuations in the Base Rate or the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate, as applicable) or any fee or any premium payable under this Agreement;

 

(iv)                               extend the time for payment of any such interest, fees or premium;

 

(v)                                  reduce the principal amount of any Loan;

 

49



 

(vi)                               amend, modify, terminate or waive any provision of this Section 9.5(b), Section 9.5(c) or any other provision of this Agreement that expressly provides that the consent of all Lenders is required;

 

(vii)                            amend the definition of “Requisite Lenders” or “Pro Rata Share,” except that, with the consent of Requisite Lenders, additional extensions of credit under this Agreement may be included in the determination of “Requisite Lenders” or “Pro Rata Share” on substantially the same basis as the Term Loan Commitments, the Term Loans, the Revolving Loan Commitments and the Revolving Loans are included on the Closing Date;

 

(viii)                         release all or substantially all of the Collateral or all or substantially all of the Guarantors from the Guaranty except as expressly provided in the Credit Documents and except in connection with a “credit bid” undertaken by the Administrative Agent at the direction of the Requisite Lenders pursuant to Section 363(k), Section 1129(b)(2)(a)(ii) or otherwise of the Bankruptcy Code or other sale or disposition of assets in connection with an enforcement action with respect to the Collateral permitted pursuant to the Credit Documents (in which case only the consent of the Requisite Lenders will be needed for such release); or

 

(ix)                               consent to the assignment or transfer by any Credit Party of any of its rights and obligations under any Credit Document.

 

All Lenders will be deemed directly affected thereby with respect to any amendment described in clauses (vii), (viii) and (ix).

 

(c)                                   Other Consents .  No amendment, modification, termination or waiver of any provision of the Credit Documents, or consent to any departure by any Credit Party therefrom, will:

 

(i)                                      increase any Revolving Loan Commitment of any Lender over the amount thereof then in effect without the consent of such Lender.  No amendment, modification or waiver of any condition precedent, covenant, Default or Event of Default will constitute an increase in any Revolving Loan Commitment of any Lender;

 

(ii)                                   alter the required application of any repayments or prepayments as between Loans under Section 2.13 without the consent of Lenders holding more than 50% of the aggregate Term Loan Exposure of all Lenders or Revolving Loan Exposure of all Lenders, as applicable, of each type that is being allocated a lesser repayment or prepayment as a result thereof, except that Requisite Lenders may waive, in whole or in part, any prepayment so long as the application, as between types of Loans, of any portion of such prepayment which is still required to be made is not altered; or

 

(iii)                                amend, modify, terminate or waive any provision of the Credit Documents as the same applies to any Agent or Arranger, or any other provision of this Agreement as the same applies to the rights or obligations of any Agent or Arranger, in each case without the consent of such Agent or Arranger, as applicable.

 

(iv)                               after the earlier to occur of (x) a Qualified IPO of Borrower, and (y) such time when the aggregate outstanding principal amount of Term Loans has been reduced to $150,000,000 or less, amend or waive the terms and provisions (and related definitions) of the covenant set forth in Section 5.4 unless such agreement is in writing and signed by the Revolving Lenders (that are Non-Defaulting Lenders) holding in excess of 50% of the outstanding principal amount of all Revolving Loans or, if no Revolving Loans are then outstanding, in excess of 50%

 

50


 

of the outstanding Revolving Loan Commitments.  No consent of any other Lenders will be required for the matters addressed in this clause (iv).

 

(d)                                  Execution of Amendments, Etc.   Administrative Agent may, but will have no obligation to, with the concurrence of any Lender, execute amendments, modifications, waivers or consents on behalf of such Lender.  Any waiver or consent will be effective only in the specific instance and for the specific purpose for which it was given.  No notice to or demand on any Credit Party in any case will entitle any Credit Party to any other or further notice or demand in similar or other circumstances.  Any amendment, modification, termination, waiver or consent effected in accordance with this Section 9.5 will be binding upon each Lender at the time outstanding, each future Lender and, if signed by a Credit Party, on such Credit Party.

 

9.6                                Successors and Assigns; Participations .

 

(a)                                  Generally .  This Agreement will be binding upon the parties to this Agreement and their respective successors and assigns and will inure to the benefit of the parties to this Agreement and the successors and assigns of Lenders.  No Credit Party’s rights or obligations under this Agreement nor any interest therein may be assigned or delegated by any Credit Party without the prior written consent of all Lenders.  No Lender’s rights or obligations under this Agreement nor any interest therein may be assigned, participated or delegated by any Lender without the prior written consent of Borrower (except as otherwise provided in Sections 9.6(c) and (g)).  Nothing in this Agreement, expressed or implied, will be construed to confer upon any Person (other than the parties to this Agreement, their respective successors and assigns permitted hereby and, to the extent expressly contemplated hereby, Affiliates of each of the Agents and Lenders and other Indemnitees) any legal or equitable right, remedy or claim under or by reason of this Agreement.

 

(b)                                  Register .  Borrower, Administrative Agent and Lenders will deem and treat the Persons listed as Lenders in the Register as the holders and owners of the corresponding Commitments and Loans listed therein for all purposes of this Agreement, and no assignment or transfer of any such Commitment or Loan will be effective, in each case, unless and until recorded in the Register following receipt of a fully executed Assignment Agreement effecting the assignment or transfer thereof, together with the required forms and certificates regarding tax matters and any fees payable in connection with such assignment, in each case, as provided in Section 9.6(d).  Each assignment will be recorded in the Register promptly following receipt by Administrative Agent of the fully executed Assignment Agreement and all other necessary documents and approvals, prompt notice thereof will be provided to Borrower and a copy of such Assignment Agreement will be maintained, as applicable.  The date of such recordation of a transfer will be referred to in this Agreement as the “Assignment Closing Date.”   Any request, authority or consent of any Person who, at the time of making such request or giving such authority or consent, is listed in the Register as a Lender will be conclusive and binding (absent manifest error) on any subsequent holder, assignee or transferee of the corresponding Commitments or Loans.

 

(c)                                   Right to Assign .  Each Lender will have the right, at any time after the Closing Date, to sell, assign or transfer all or a portion of its rights and obligations under this Agreement, including all or a portion of its Commitment or Loans owing to it or other Obligations (pro rata assignments will not be required and each assignment will be of a uniform, and not varying, percentage of all rights and obligations under and in respect of any applicable Loan and any related Commitments), subject in all respects to the following:

 

(i)                                      unless Borrower provides its prior written consent (which may be withheld by Borrower in its sole and absolute discretion), prior to the earlier of (x) the thirtieth (30th) day following the consummation of a Qualified IPO of Borrower, and (y) the date that is

 

51



 

eighteen (18) months after the Closing Date, no such sale, transfer or assignment may be made by any Lender except to the extent that a Governmental Authority having supervision or jurisdiction over such Lender and its assets requires such Lender to sell, transfer or assign its rights or obligations hereunder;

 

(ii)                                   if such sale, transfer or assignment is to a Person meeting the criteria of clause (i) of the definition of the term “Eligible Assignee,” the assigning Lender must give prior written notice to Borrower and Administrative Agent of such proposed sale, transfer or assignment; and

 

(iii)                                each sale, transfer or assignment under this Section 9.6(c) (other than any sale, transfer or assignment of the type described in clause (ii) above) may only be made, with the prior written consent of Borrower and Administrative Agent (unless an Event of Default of the type described in clauses (a), (g) or (h) of Section 7.1 has occurred and is continuing, in which event no consent of Borrower will be required), to any Person meeting the criteria of clause (ii) of the definition of the term “Eligible Assignee” and that is not a Disqualified Lender.

 

Consents required under Section 9.6(c)(iii) will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, except that Borrower may withhold such consent (and such withholding will be deemed to be reasonable) in the event that it in good faith determines that the proposed assignee is a Person that would satisfy the requirements of the definition of a Disqualified Lender or is otherwise acting in the capacity of vulture investor, distressed debt investor or equivalent (without regard to the portion of such definition that requires such Person to be identified by name in a writing delivered to Administrative Agent).  Borrower will be deemed to have consented to any such assignment if Borrower fails to object to such assignment by written notice to Administrative Agent within five (5) Business Days after having received notice of such assignment.  Each assignment under this Section 9.6(c)(iii) will be in an aggregate amount of not less than (1) $2,500,000 with respect to the assignment of the Revolving Loan Commitments, the Revolving Loans and the Term Loans, (2) such lesser amount as agreed to by Borrower and Administrative Agent, (3) the aggregate amount of the Loans of the assigning Lender with respect to the Loans being assigned or (4) the amount assigned by an assigning Lender to an Affiliate or Related Fund of such Lender.

 

In no event will any Lender be permitted to make any assignment or participation to any Disqualified Lender.  Administrative Agent may provide the list of Disqualified Lenders to any Lender (or prospective Lender permitted hereunder) upon request or may provide access to such list via the Platform; provided, that Administrative Agent will not be responsible for, nor have any liability in connection with, maintaining, updating, monitoring, enforcing, or inadvertently disclosing information from, the list of Disqualified Lenders, and Borrower agrees to indemnify Administrative Agent in accordance with Section 9.3 for any documented out-of-pocket loss, cost or expense arising from any assignment by a Lender to a Disqualified Lender if, and solely to the extent, a court of competent jurisdiction in a final and non-appealable judgment determines that Administrative Agent is not entitled to indemnification under Section 8.6 for such loss, cost or expense (or portion thereof) and that such loss, cost or expense did not result from the fraud, gross negligence or willful misconduct of Administrative Agent (or any of its Affiliates).

 

(d)                                  Mechanics .

 

(i)                                      Assignments and assumptions of Loans and Commitments by Lenders will be effected by manual execution and delivery to Administrative Agent of an Assignment Agreement.  Assignments made under the foregoing provision will be effective as of the Assignment Closing Date.  In connection with all assignments, there will be delivered to Administrative Agent such forms, certificates or other evidence, if any, with respect to United States federal income tax withholding matters as the assignee under such Assignment Agreement

 

52



 

may be required to deliver under Section 2.18(f), together with payment to Administrative Agent of a registration and processing fee of $3,500 (except that no such registration and processing fee will be payable (y) in connection with an assignment by or to Goldman Sachs or any Affiliate thereof or (z) in the case of an assignee which is already a Lender or is an affiliate or Related Fund of a Lender or a Person under common management with a Lender).

 

(ii)                                   In connection with any assignment of rights and obligations of any Defaulting Lender under this Agreement, no such assignment will be effective unless and until, in addition to the other conditions to such Assignment set forth in this Agreement, the parties to the assignment will make such additional payments to Administrative Agent in an aggregate amount sufficient, upon distribution thereof as appropriate (which may be outright payment, purchases by the assignee of participations or subparticipations, or other compensating actions, including funding, with the consent of Borrower and Administrative Agent, the applicable Pro Rata Share of Loans previously requested but not funded by the Defaulting Lender, to each of which the applicable assignee and assignor hereby irrevocably consent), to (x) pay and satisfy in full all payment liabilities then owed by such Defaulting Lender to Administrative Agent and each other Lender under this Agreement (and interest accrued thereon), and (y) acquire (and fund as appropriate) its full Pro Rata Share of all Loans.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if any assignment of rights and obligations of any Defaulting Lender under this Agreement becomes effective under applicable law without compliance with the provisions of this paragraph, then the assignee of such interest will be deemed to be a Defaulting Lender for all purposes of this Agreement until such compliance occurs.

 

(e)                                   Representations and Warranties of Assignee .  Each Lender, upon execution and delivery of this Agreement or upon succeeding to an interest in the Commitments and Loans, as the case may be, represents and warrants as of the Closing Date or as of the Assignment Closing Date that (i) it is an Eligible Assignee; (ii) it has experience and expertise in the making of or investing in commitments or loans such as the applicable Commitments or Loans, as the case may be; (iii) it will make or invest in, as the case may be, its Commitments or Loans for its own account in the ordinary course and without a view to distribution of such Commitments or Loans within the meaning of the Securities Act or the Exchange Act or other federal securities laws (it being understood that, subject to the provisions of this Section 9.6, the disposition of such Commitments or Loans or any interests therein will at all times remain within its exclusive control); and (iv) it will not provide any information obtained by it in its capacity as a Lender to Sponsor or any Affiliate of Sponsor.

 

(f)                                    Effect of Assignment .  Subject to the terms and conditions of this Section 9.6, as of the Assignment Closing Date (i) the assignee thereunder will have the rights and obligations of a “Lender” under this Agreement to the extent of its interest in the Loans and Commitments as reflected in the Register and will after such date be a party to this Agreement and a “Lender” for all purposes of this Agreement; (ii) the assigning Lender thereunder will, to the extent that rights and obligations under this Agreement have been assigned to the assignee, relinquish its rights (other than any rights which survive the termination of this Agreement under Section 9.8) and be released from its obligations under this Agreement (and, in the case of an assignment covering all or the remaining portion of an assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement, such Lender will cease to be a party to this Agreement on the Assignment Closing Date.  Anything contained in any of the Credit Documents to the contrary notwithstanding, such assigning Lender will continue to be entitled to the benefit of all indemnities under this Agreement as specified in this Agreement with respect to matters arising out of the prior involvement of such assigning Lender as a Lender under this Agreement); (iii) the Commitments will be modified to reflect any Commitment of such assignee and any Revolving Loan Commitment of such assigning Lender, if any; and (iv) if any such assignment occurs after the issuance of any Note under this Agreement, the assigning Lender will, upon the effectiveness of such assignment or as promptly after

 

53



 

such date as practicable, surrender its applicable Notes to Administrative Agent for cancellation, and thereupon Borrower will issue and deliver new Notes, if so requested by the assignee and/or assigning Lender, to such assignee and/or to such assigning Lender, with appropriate insertions, to reflect the new Revolving Loan Commitments and/or outstanding Loans of the assignee and/or the assigning Lender.

 

(g)                                   Participations .

 

(i)                                      Each Lender will have the right, at any time to sell one or more participations in all or any part of its Commitments, Loans or in any other Obligation to any Eligible Assignee that is not a Disqualified Lender.

 

Each Lender that sells a participation under this Section 9.6(g) will, acting solely for U.S. federal income tax purposes as an agent of Borrower, maintain a register on which it records the name and address of each participant and the principal amounts of each participant’s participation interest with respect to the Term Loan (each, a “Participant Register” ). No Lender will have any obligation to disclose all or any portion of the Participant Register to any Person (other than the Borrower, upon its request from time to time), including the identity of any participant or any information relating to a participant’s interest in any Commitments, Loans or its other obligations under this Agreement, except to the extent that the relevant parties, acting reasonably and in good faith, determine that such disclosure is necessary to establish that such Commitment, Loan or other obligation is in registered form under Section 5f.103-1(c) of the United States Treasury Regulations. Unless otherwise required by the IRS, the relevant Lender will make any disclosure required by the foregoing sentence directly and solely to the IRS.  The entries in the Participant Register will be conclusive absent manifest error, and such Lender will treat each Person whose name is recorded in the Participant Register as the owner of a participation with respect to the Term Loan for all purposes under this Agreement, notwithstanding any notice to the contrary.

 

(ii)                                   The holder of any such participation, other than an Affiliate of the Lender granting such participation, will not be entitled to require such Lender to take or omit to take any action under this Agreement except with respect to any amendment, modification or waiver that would (A) extend the final scheduled maturity of any Loan or Note in which such participant is participating, or reduce the rate or extend the time of payment of interest or fees thereon (except in connection with a waiver of applicability of any post-default increase in interest rates) or reduce the principal amount thereof, or increase the amount of the participant’s participation over the amount thereof then in effect (it being understood that a waiver of any Default or Event of Default or of a mandatory reduction in the Commitment will not constitute a change in the terms of such participation, and that an increase in any Commitment or Loan will be permitted without the consent of any participant if the participant’s participation is not increased as a result thereof), (B) consent to the assignment or transfer by any Credit Party of any of its rights and obligations under this Agreement or (C) release all or substantially all of the Collateral under the Pledge Agreement or all or substantially all of the Guarantors from the Guaranty (in each case, except as expressly provided in the Credit Documents) supporting the Loans under this Agreement in which such participant is participating.

 

(iii)                                Borrower agrees that each participant will be entitled to the benefits of Sections 2.16(c), 2.17 and 2.18 to the same extent as if it were a Lender and had acquired its interest by assignment under paragraph (c) of this Section 9.6.  A participant (x) will not be entitled to receive any greater payment under Section 2.17 or 2.18 than the applicable Lender would have been entitled to receive with respect to the participation sold to such participant unless such entitlement to receive a greater payment results from a Change in Law that occurs after the Participant acquired the applicable participation, and (y) that would be a Foreign Lender if it were a Lender will not be entitled to the benefits of Section 2.18 unless Borrower is notified

 

54



 

of the participation sold to such participant or to the extent such entitlement to receive a greater payment results from a Change in Law that occurs after the Participant acquired the applicable participation, so long as such participant agrees, for the benefit of Borrower, to comply with Section 2.18 as though it were a Lender.  Except as specifically set forth in clauses (x) and (y) of this sentence, nothing in this Agreement will require any prior notice to Borrower or any other Person in connection with the sale of any participation.  To the extent permitted by law, each participant also will be entitled to the benefits of Section 9.4 as though it were a Lender, so long as such participant agrees to be subject to Section 2.15 as though it were a Lender.

 

(h)                                  Certain Other Assignments and Participations .  In addition to any other assignment or participation permitted under this Section 9.6 any Lender may assign, pledge and/or grant a security interest in all or any portion of its Loans, the other Obligations owed by or to such Lender, and its Notes, if any, to secure obligations of such Lender including any Federal Reserve Bank as collateral security under Regulation A of the Board of Governors and any operating circular issued by such Federal Reserve Bank.  No Lender, as between Borrower and such Lender, will be relieved of any of its obligations under this Agreement as a result of any such assignment and pledge, and in no event will the applicable Federal Reserve Bank, pledgee or trustee, be considered to be a “Lender” or be entitled to require the assigning Lender to take or omit to take any action under this Agreement

 

(i)                                      Disqualified Lender List .  From time to time before, on or after the Closing Date, Borrower has the right (but not the obligation) to prepare and deliver to Administrative Agent a list of Persons that Borrower, in its sole reasonable discretion, determines to be Disqualified Lenders in accordance with the definition of “Disqualified Lenders” (such list, as updated or otherwise modified from time to time in accordance with the definition of “Disqualified Lenders,” the “DQ List” ).

 

9.7                                Independence of Covenants.   All covenants under this Agreement will be given independent effect so that if a particular action or condition is not permitted by any of such covenants, the fact that it would be permitted by an exception to, or would otherwise be within the limitations of, another covenant will not avoid the occurrence of a Default or an Event of Default if such action is taken or condition exists.

 

9.8                                Survival of Representations, Warranties and Agreements.   All representations, warranties and agreements made in this Agreement will survive the execution and delivery of this Agreement and the making of any Loans.  Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement or implied by law to the contrary, the agreements of each Credit Party set forth in Sections 2.16(c), 2.17, 2.18, 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 and the agreements of Lenders set forth in Sections 2.15, 8.3(b) and 8.6 will survive the payment of the Loans and the termination of this Agreement.

 

9.9                                No Waiver; Remedies Cumulative.   No failure or delay on the part of any Agent or any Lender in the exercise of any power, right or privilege under this Agreement or under any other Credit Document will impair such power, right or privilege or be construed to be a waiver of any default or acquiescence therein, nor will any single or partial exercise of any such power, right or privilege preclude other or further exercise thereof or of any other power, right or privilege.  The rights, powers and remedies given to each Agent and each Lender hereby are cumulative and will be in addition to and independent of all rights, powers and remedies existing by virtue of any statute or rule of law or in any of the other Credit Documents.  Any forbearance or failure to exercise, and any delay in exercising, any right, power or remedy under this Agreement will not impair any such right, power or remedy or be construed to be a waiver thereof, nor will it preclude the further exercise of any such right, power or remedy.

 

55



 

9.10                         Marshalling; Payments Set Aside.   Neither any Agent nor any Lender will be under any obligation to marshal any assets in favor of any Credit Party or any other Person or against or in payment of any or all of the Obligations.  To the extent that any Credit Party makes a payment or payments to Administrative Agent or Lenders (or to Administrative Agent, on behalf of Lenders), or any Agent or Lender enforces any security interests or exercises any right of setoff, and such payment or payments or the proceeds of such enforcement or setoff or any part thereof are subsequently invalidated, declared to be fraudulent or preferential, set aside and/or required to be repaid to a trustee, receiver or any other party under any bankruptcy law, any other state or federal law, common law or any equitable cause, then, to the extent of such recovery, the obligation (or part of the obligation) originally intended to be satisfied, and all Liens, rights and remedies for such obligation (or such part) or related to such obligation (or such part), will be revived and continued in full force and effect as if such payment or payments had not been made or such enforcement or setoff had not occurred.

 

9.11                         Severability.   In case any provision in or obligation under this Agreement or under any other Credit Document is invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any jurisdiction, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions or obligations, or of such provision or obligation in any other jurisdiction, will not in any way be affected or impaired thereby.

 

9.12                         Obligations Several; Independent Nature of Lenders’ Rights.   The obligations of Lenders under this Agreement are several and no Lender will be responsible for the obligations or Commitment of any other Lender under this Agreement.  Nothing contained in this Agreement or in any other Credit Document, and no action taken by Lenders under this Agreement or any other Credit Document, will be deemed to constitute Lenders as a partnership, an association, a joint venture or any other kind of entity. The amounts payable at any time under this Agreement to each Lender will be a separate and independent debt, and each Lender will be entitled to protect and enforce its rights arising out of this Agreement and it will not be necessary for any other Lender to be joined as an additional party in any proceeding for such purpose.

 

9.13                         Headings.   Section headings in this Agreement are included in this Agreement for convenience of reference only and will not constitute a part of this Agreement for any other purpose or be given any substantive effect.

 

9.14                         Applicable Law.   THIS AGREEMENT AND THE RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES UNDER THIS AGREEMENT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CLAIMS SOUNDING IN CONTRACT LAW OR TORT LAW ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT AND ANY DETERMINATIONS WITH RESPECT TO POST-JUDGMENT INTEREST) WILL BE GOVERNED BY, AND WILL BE CONSTRUED AND ENFORCED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK WITHOUT REGARD TO CONFLICT OF LAWS PRINCIPLES THEREOF THAT WOULD RESULT IN THE APPLICATION OF ANY LAW OTHER THAN THE LAW OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

 

9.15                         Consent to Jurisdiction.   SUBJECT TO CLAUSE (E) OF THE FOLLOWING SENTENCE, ALL JUDICIAL PROCEEDINGS BROUGHT AGAINST ANY PARTY ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER CREDIT DOCUMENTS, OR ANY OF THE OBLIGATIONS, WILL BE BROUGHT IN ANY FEDERAL COURT OF THE UNITED STATES SITTING IN THE BOROUGH OF MANHATTAN OR, IF THAT COURT DOES NOT HAVE SUBJECT MATTER JURISDICTION, IN ANY STATE COURT LOCATED IN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF NEW YORK.  BY EXECUTING AND DELIVERING THIS AGREEMENT, EACH CREDIT PARTY, FOR ITSELF AND IN CONNECTION WITH ITS PROPERTIES, IRREVOCABLY (A) ACCEPTS GENERALLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY THE EXCLUSIVE (SUBJECT TO CLAUSE (E) BELOW) JURISDICTION AND VENUE OF SUCH COURTS; (B) WAIVES ANY

 

56



 

DEFENSE OF FORUM NON CONVENIENS; (C) AGREES THAT SERVICE OF ALL PROCESS IN ANY SUCH PROCEEDING IN ANY SUCH COURT MAY BE MADE BY REGISTERED OR CERTIFIED MAIL, RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED, TO THE APPLICABLE CREDIT PARTY AT ITS ADDRESS PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 9.1; (D) AGREES THAT SERVICE AS PROVIDED IN CLAUSE (C) ABOVE IS SUFFICIENT TO CONFER PERSONAL JURISDICTION OVER THE APPLICABLE CREDIT PARTY IN ANY SUCH PROCEEDING IN ANY SUCH COURT, AND OTHERWISE CONSTITUTES EFFECTIVE AND BINDING SERVICE IN EVERY RESPECT; AND (E) AGREES THAT AGENTS AND LENDERS RETAIN THE RIGHT TO SERVE PROCESS IN ANY OTHER MANNER PERMITTED BY LAW OR TO BRING PROCEEDINGS AGAINST ANY CREDIT PARTY IN THE COURTS OF ANY OTHER JURISDICTION IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS UNDER ANY CREDIT DOCUMENT OR AGAINST ANY COLLATERAL OR THE ENFORCEMENT OF ANY JUDGMENT, AND HEREBY SUBMITS TO THE JURISDICTION OF, AND CONSENTS TO VENUE IN, ANY SUCH COURT.

 

9.16                         Waiver of Jury Trial.   EACH OF THE PARTIES TO THIS AGREEMENT HEREBY AGREES TO WAIVE ITS RESPECTIVE RIGHTS TO A JURY TRIAL OF ANY CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION BASED UPON OR ARISING UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR UNDER ANY OF THE OTHER CREDIT DOCUMENTS OR ANY DEALINGS BETWEEN THEM RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THIS AGREEMENT OR THE LENDER/BORROWER RELATIONSHIP THAT IS BEING ESTABLISHED.  THE SCOPE OF THIS WAIVER IS INTENDED TO BE ALL-ENCOMPASSING OF ANY AND ALL DISPUTES THAT MAY BE FILED IN ANY COURT AND THAT RELATE TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING CONTRACT CLAIMS, TORT CLAIMS, BREACH OF DUTY CLAIMS AND ALL OTHER COMMON LAW AND STATUTORY CLAIMS.  EACH PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THIS WAIVER IS A MATERIAL INDUCEMENT TO ENTER INTO A BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP, THAT EACH HAS ALREADY RELIED ON THIS WAIVER IN ENTERING INTO THIS AGREEMENT, AND THAT EACH WILL CONTINUE TO RELY ON THIS WAIVER IN ITS RELATED FUTURE DEALINGS.  EACH PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT FURTHER WARRANTS AND REPRESENTS THAT IT HAS REVIEWED THIS WAIVER WITH ITS LEGAL COUNSEL AND THAT IT KNOWINGLY AND VOLUNTARILY WAIVES ITS JURY TRIAL RIGHTS FOLLOWING CONSULTATION WITH LEGAL COUNSEL.  THIS WAIVER IS IRREVOCABLE, MEANING THAT IT MAY NOT BE MODIFIED EITHER ORALLY OR IN WRITING (OTHER THAN BY A MUTUAL WRITTEN WAIVER SPECIFICALLY REFERRING TO THIS SECTION 9.16 AND EXECUTED BY EACH OF THE PARTIES TO THIS AGREEMENT), AND THIS WAIVER WILL APPLY TO ANY SUBSEQUENT AMENDMENTS, RENEWALS, SUPPLEMENTS OR MODIFICATIONS TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OF THE OTHER CREDIT DOCUMENTS OR TO ANY OTHER DOCUMENTS OR AGREEMENTS RELATING TO THE LOANS MADE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.  IF LITIGATION OCCURS, THIS AGREEMENT MAY BE FILED AS A WRITTEN CONSENT TO A TRIAL BY THE COURT.

 

9.17                         Confidentiality .

 

(a)                                  Each Agent and each Lender will keep confidential in accordance with this Section 9.17 all non-public information disclosed to it by the Borrower or any Subsidiary at any time on or after the date hereof regarding the business, operations, assets, liabilities, financial condition and prospects of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, including all Excluded Information and Limited Confidential Information (collectively, the “Confidential Information” ).  Any term or provision hereof to the contrary notwithstanding, Confidential Information will not include Non-Confidential Information,

 

57



 

and Non-Confidential Information will not be subject to the obligations on confidentiality and restrictions on disclosure set forth in this Section 9.17.

 

(b)                                  Each Agent and each Lender agrees that it will not, without Borrower’s prior written consent, disclose, or make any public statement regarding the existence or the terms or conditions of, this Agreement or any other Credit Document, including the DQ List or any of the Exhibits or Schedules hereto and thereto. Each Agent and each Lender further agrees that it (i) will use the Confidential Information only in connection with this Agreement and the other Credit Documents, including exercising its rights and remedies hereunder and thereunder or administering the terms hereof or thereof, (ii) will take reasonable precautions with respect to the confidentiality of the Confidential Information that are at least as protective as precautions employed by it with respect to confidential materials of similar nature of its other clients, (iii) will not reverse engineer or remove any proprietary markings from any Confidential Information and (iv) except as otherwise permitted under this Section 9.17, will not disclose any Confidential Information or the existence, or the terms or conditions of this Agreement, any  other Credit Document or any of the Exhibits or Schedules hereto and thereto (including the DQ List), to any Person, either internally or externally, without the prior written consent of Borrower.

 

(c)                                   Notwithstanding the foregoing, Borrower agrees that Administrative Agent may disclose Confidential Information to any Lender and its Affiliates (including by making the DQ List available on the Platform (including that portion of the Platform that is designated for “public side” Lenders)), and any Lender may disclose Confidential Information to Administrative Agent, any other Lender and their respective Affiliates, in each case only if the receiving Lender is not a Disqualified Lender.  In addition, Administrative Agent and each Lender may make (i) disclosures of Confidential Information to its Affiliates in connection with this Agreement and the other Credit Documents, (ii) disclosures of Confidential Information to its and its Affiliates’ respective directors, officers, credit and loan administration personnel, internal management and credit committee members, administrative personnel, conflicts and compliance personnel, legal advisers (including outside counsel), auditors and other personnel, advisors and agents directly involved in the transactions contemplated hereby (other than, for the avoidance of doubt, any research analyst), in each case on a “need to know” basis (and to other Persons authorized by the Administrative Agent or such Lender to organize, present or disseminate such information in connection with disclosures otherwise made in accordance with this Section 9.17), it being understood that the Persons to whom such disclosure is made will be informed of the confidential nature thereof and instructed to keep such information confidential in accordance herewith, (iii) disclosures of Standard Credit Information and Limited Confidential Information to any bona fide, prospective assignee, transferee or participant (in each case that would not qualify as a Disqualified Lender) in connection with the contemplated assignment, transfer or sale of any Commitments or Loans or any participations therein, or to any direct or indirect contractual counterparties (or the professional advisors thereto) to any swap or derivative transaction relating to the Borrower and its obligations, together with such other information (other than Excluded Information) as Administrative Agent or any Lender may reasonably request, the disclosure of such other information being subject to the consent of Borrower not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed, except that Borrower may withhold such consent (and such withholding will be deemed to be reasonable) in the event that Borrower in good faith determines that such prospective assignee, transferee or participant  is a Person that would satisfy the requirements of the definition of a Disqualified Lender or is otherwise acting in the capacity of a vulture investor, distressed debt investor or equivalent (without regard to the portion of the definition of Disqualified Lender that requires such Person to be identified by name in a writing delivered to Administrative Agent); provided that each such prospective assignee, transferee, participant, counterparty or advisor will be advised of and agree, in advance of such disclosure, in writing (including pursuant to customary “click-through” procedures), to be bound by either the provisions of this Section 9.17 or other provisions that are at least as restrictive as the provisions of this Section 9.17, (iv) disclosures of Confidential Information in connection with the exercise by Administrative Agent and Lenders of any

 

58



 

remedies hereunder or under any other Credit Document, (v) disclosures of Confidential Information to the extent (but only to the extent) required or requested by any Governmental Authority or self-regulatory authority purporting to have jurisdiction over Administrative Agent or any Lender or pursuant to legal or judicial process; provided that, unless prohibited by applicable law, court order or rules and regulations, (A) Administrative Agent or such Lender, as the case may be, shall take commercially reasonable efforts to promptly notify Borrower of any request by any such Governmental Authority or self-regulatory authority (other than any such request in connection with any examination of the financial condition or other routine examination of Administrative Agent or such Lender (or any Affiliate of any of the foregoing) by such Governmental Authority or self-regulatory authority) for disclosure of any such Confidential Information prior to the disclosure thereof and shall (other than in connection with any such examination where it is not practicable to do so under the circumstances) take commercially reasonable precautions to preserve the confidentiality of any Confidential Information subject to such disclosure and (B) Administrative Agent or such Lender, as the case may be, agrees to use reasonably diligent efforts to assist (other than in connection with any request in connection with any examination by a Governmental authority or any such self-regulatory authority of the financial condition or other routine examination of Administrative Agent, any Lender or any of their respective Affiliates) Borrower, at Borrower’s sole cost and expense, in seeking to limit the disclosure of such Confidential Information or to obtain confidential treatment or a protective order therefor, (vi) disclosure of Limited Confidential Information on a confidential basis to the CUSIP Service Bureau or any similar agency in connection with the issuance and monitoring of CUSIP numbers with respect to the Loans, and (vii) disclosures of Confidential Information to the extent (but only to the extent) (A) it has become publicly available other than as a result of a breach of this Section 9.17 or (B) it becomes available to Administrative Agent, any Lender or any Affiliate of any the foregoing from a source other than Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries to the extent such information is not known by Administrative Agent, such Lender or such Affiliate to be subject to a confidentiality agreement between such source and Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries; provided that if Administrative Agent, such Lender or such Affiliate subsequently obtains knowledge that such information is subject to such confidentiality agreement, any further disclosure thereof may only be made to the extent otherwise permitted by this Section 9.17; and provided , further ,   that none of Administrative Agent, any Lender or any Affiliate of any of the foregoing shall have any liability for any disclosure of such information prior to obtaining knowledge of any such confidentiality agreement.

 

(d)                                  To the extent that Administrative Agent or any Lender provides any Confidential Information to any of its Affiliates or its or any of its Affiliates’ respective directors, officers and other personnel referred to in clauses 9.17(c)(ii) or 9.17(c)(ii) above, Administrative Agent or such Lender, as applicable, will be responsible for compliance by such Affiliate and such other Person or individual with the terms of this Section 9.17. The obligations under this Section 9.17 will survive any termination of this Agreement.  Any Confidential Information disclosed by Borrower to any Lender pursuant to a non-disclosure agreement between the Borrower and such Lender will become subject to the terms of this Section 9.17 as if disclosed to such Lender on the date hereof.  Neither the Administrative Agent nor any Lender will acquire any intellectual property rights in any Confidential Information disclosed to it. Each of the Administrative Agent and the Lenders acknowledges that any breach of this Section 9.17 may cause irreparable harm for which monetary damages are an insufficient remedy and, as a consequence thereof, upon any breach of this Section 9.17, Borrower will be entitled to seek appropriate equitable relief in addition to any remedies available to the Borrower at law.

 

9.18                         Usury Savings Clause.   Notwithstanding any other provision in this Agreement, the aggregate interest rate charged with respect to any of the Obligations, including all charges or fees in connection therewith deemed in the nature of interest under applicable law will not exceed the Highest Lawful Rate.  If the rate of interest (determined without regard to the preceding sentence) under this Agreement at any time exceeds the Highest Lawful Rate, the outstanding amount of the Loans made under this Agreement will bear interest at the Highest Lawful Rate until the total amount of interest due

 

59



 

under this Agreement equals the amount of interest which would have been due under this Agreement if the stated rates of interest set forth in this Agreement had at all times been in effect.  In addition, if when the Loans made under this Agreement are repaid in full the total interest due under this Agreement (taking into account the increase provided for above) is less than the total amount of interest which would have been due under this Agreement if the stated rates of interest set forth in this Agreement had at all times been in effect, then to the extent permitted by law, Borrower will pay to Administrative Agent an amount equal to the difference between the amount of interest paid and the amount of interest which would have been paid if the Highest Lawful Rate had at all times been in effect.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, it is the intention of Lenders and Borrower to conform strictly to any applicable usury laws.  Accordingly, if any Lender contracts for, charges, or receives any consideration which constitutes interest in excess of the Highest Lawful Rate, then any such excess will be cancelled automatically and, if previously paid, will at such Lender’s option be applied to the outstanding amount of the Loans made under this Agreement or be refunded to Borrower.

 

9.19                         Effectiveness; Counterparts.   This Agreement will become effective upon the execution of a counterpart of this Agreement by each of the parties to this Agreement and receipt by Borrower and Administrative Agent of written notification of such execution and authorization of delivery thereof.  This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which when so executed and delivered will be deemed an original, but all such counterparts together will constitute but one and the same instrument. Delivery of an executed counterpart of a signature page of this Agreement by facsimile or in electronic format (i.e., “pdf” or “tif” will be effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart of this Agreement.

 

9.20                         Entire Agreement.   With the exception of those terms contained in the Mandate Letter, dated September 19, 2014, among the Arrangers and Company (the “ Mandate Letter ”), which by their terms remain in full force and effect, all of the Arrangers’ and their respective Affiliates’ obligations under the Mandate Letter will terminate and be superseded by the Credit Documents and the Arrangers and their respective Affiliates will be released from all liability in connection therewith, including any claim for injury or damages, whether consequential, special, direct, indirect, punitive or otherwise.  Each of the Administrative Agent, the Arrangers and the Lenders acknowledges and agrees that a breach of Section 5 of the Mandate Letter by any Arranger or any Lender will constitute a breach of this Agreement and, subject to the limitations set forth in this Agreement, Borrower will be entitled to seek any remedies available to Borrower at law or in equity with respect thereto.

 

9.21                         PATRIOT Act.   Each Lender and Administrative Agent (for itself and not on behalf of any Lender) hereby notifies each Credit Party that under the requirements of the PATRIOT Act, it is required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies each Credit Party, which information includes the name and address of each Credit Party and other information that will allow such Lender or Administrative Agent, as applicable, to identify such Credit Party in accordance with the PATRIOT Act.

 

9.22                         Electronic Execution of Assignments.  The words “execution,” “signed,” “signature,” and words of like import in any Assignment Agreement will be deemed to include electronic signatures or the keeping of records in electronic form, each of which will be of the same legal effect, validity or enforceability as a manually executed signature or the use of a paper-based recordkeeping system, as the case may be, to the extent and as provided for in any applicable law, including the Federal Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, the New York State Electronic Signatures and Records Act, or any other similar state laws based on the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act.

 

9.23                         No Fiduciary Duty .  Each Agent, each Lender and their Affiliates (collectively, solely for purposes of this paragraph, the “Lenders” ), may have economic interests that conflict with those of the Credit Parties, their stockholders and/or their affiliates.  Each Credit Party agrees that nothing in the

 

60



 

Credit Documents or otherwise will be deemed to create an advisory, fiduciary or agency relationship or fiduciary or other implied duty between any Lender, on the one hand, and such Credit Party, its stockholders or its affiliates, on the other.  The Credit Parties acknowledge and agree that (i) the transactions contemplated by the Credit Documents (including the exercise of rights and remedies under this Agreement and the other Credit Documents) are arm’s-length commercial transactions between the Lenders, on the one hand, and the Credit Parties, on the other, and (ii) in connection with such transaction and with the process leading to such transactions (x) no Lender has assumed an advisory or fiduciary responsibility in favor of any Credit Party, its stockholders or its affiliates with respect to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement (or the exercise of rights or remedies with respect to such transactions) or the process leading to such transactions (irrespective of whether any Lender has advised, is currently advising or will advise any Credit Party, its stockholders or its Affiliates on other matters) or any other obligation to any Credit Party except the obligations expressly set forth in the Credit Documents and (y) each Lender is acting solely as principal and not as the agent or fiduciary of any Credit Party, its management, stockholders, creditors or any other Person.  Each Credit Party acknowledges and agrees that it has consulted its own legal and financial advisors to the extent it deemed appropriate and that it is responsible for making its own independent judgment with respect to such transactions and the process leading to such transactions.  Each Credit Party agrees that it will not claim that any Lender has rendered advisory services of any nature or respect, or owes a fiduciary or similar duty to such Credit Party, in connection with such transaction or the process leading to such transaction.

 

[ Remainder of page intentionally left blank; signature pages follow ]

 

61


 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF , the parties to this Agreement have caused this Agreement to be duly executed and delivered by their respective officers thereunto duly authorized as of the date first written above.

 

 

 

Borrower:

 

 

 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Thomas R. Kloster

 

Name: Thomas R. Kloster

 

Title: Chief Financial Officer

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantors:

 

 

 

INOVALON, INC.

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Thomas R. Kloster

 

Name: Thomas R. Kloster

 

Title: Chief Financial Officer

 

 

 

 

 

CATALYST INFORMATION TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Thomas R. Kloster

 

Name: Thomas R. Kloster

 

Title: Chief Executive Officer

 

 

 

 

 

INOVALON SME, LLC

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Shauna L. Vernal

 

Name: Shauna L. Vernal

 

Title: Secretary

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement

 



 

 

GOLDMAN SACHS BANK USA,

 

 

 

as Administrative Agent, an Arranger and a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Robert Ehudin

 

Name: Robert Ehudin

 

Title: Authorized Signatory

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement

 



 

 

MORGAN STANLEY SENIOR FUNDING, INC.,

 

 

 

as an Arranger and a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Andrew Earls

 

Name: Andrew Earls

 

Title: Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

MORGAN STANLEY BANK N.A.,

 

 

 

as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Andrew Earls

 

Name: Andrew Earls

 

Title: Vice President

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement

 



 

 

CITIGROUP GLOBAL MARKETS INC.,

 

 

 

as an Arranger

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Justin Tichauer

 

Name: Justin Tichauer

 

Title: Director

 

 

 

 

 

CITIBANK, N.A.,

 

 

 

as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Justin Tichauer

 

Name: Justin Tichauer

 

Title: Vice President

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement

 



 

 

MERRILL LYNCH, PIERCE, FENNER & SMITH INCORPORATED,

 

 

 

as an Arranger

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ E. Mark Hardison

 

Name: E. Mark Hardison

 

Title: Vice President

 

 

 

 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.,

 

 

 

as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Sonal Gupta

 

Name: Sonal Gupta

 

Title: Vice President

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement

 



 

 

UBS SECURITIES LLC,

 

 

 

as an Arranger

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Lana Gifas

 

Name: Lana Gifas

 

Title: Attorney-in-Fact

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Jennifer Anderson

 

Name: Jennifer Anderson

 

Title: Attorney-in-Fact

 

 

 

 

 

UBS AG, STAMFORD BRANCH

 

 

 

as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Lana Gifas

 

Name: Lana Gifas

 

Title: Director Banking Products Services, US

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Jennifer Anderson

 

Name: Jennifer Anderson

 

Title: Associate Director Banking Product Services, US

 

Credit and Guaranty Agreement

 


 

APPENDIX A-1

 

TO CREDIT AND GUARANTY AGREEMENT

 

SCHEDULE A-I

 

Term Loan Commitments

 

Lender

 

Term Loan Commitment

 

Pro
Rata Share

 

Goldman Sachs Bank USA

 

$

88,235,294

 

29.4118

%

Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc.

 

$

70,588,235

 

23.5294

%

Citibank, N.A.

 

$

70,588,235

 

23.5294

%

Bank of America, N.A.

 

$

35,294,118

 

11.7647

%

UBS AG, Stamford Branch

 

$

35,294,118

 

11.7647

%

Total

 

$

300,000,000

 

100

%

 

APPENDIX A-1- 1



 

APPENDIX A-2

 

TO CREDIT AND GUARANTY AGREEMENT

 

SCHEDULE A-II

 

Revolving Loan Commitments

 

Lender

 

Revolving Loan Commitment

 

Pro Rata Share

 

Goldman Sachs Bank USA

 

$

29,411,764

 

29.4118

%

Morgan Stanley Bank N.A.

 

$

23,529,412

 

23.5294

%

Citibank, N.A.

 

$

23,529,412

 

23.5294

%

Bank of America, N.A.

 

$

11,764,706

 

11.7647

%

UBS AG, Stamford Branch

 

$

11,764,706

 

11.7647

%

Total

 

$

100,000,000

 

100

%

 

APPENDIX A-2- 1



 

APPENDIX B

TO CREDIT AND GUARANTY AGREEMENT

 

Notice Addresses

 

INOVALON HOLDINGS, INC.

 

4321 Collington Rd

Bowie, MD 20716

Attention:  Shauna Vernal, Chief Legal Officer

E-mail:      svernal@inovalon.com

 

Attention:  Thomas R. Kloster, Chief Financial Officer

E-mail:      tkloster@inovalon.com

 

in each case, with a copy (which will not constitute notice) to each of:

 

Morrison & Foerster LLP

250 West 55th Street

New York, NY 10019-9601

Attention:  Spencer D. Klein

Facsimile:  (212) 468-7900

E-mail:       spencerklein@mofo.com

 

GOLDMAN SACHS BANK USA ,

as Administrative Agent and a Lender

 

Administrative Agent’s Principal Office and as Lender:

 

Goldman Sachs Bank USA
c/o Goldman, Sachs & Co.
30 Hudson Street, 36th Floor
Jersey City, NJ 07302
Attention:  SBD Operations
Email:  gsd.link@gs.com

 

with a copy to:

 

Goldman Sachs Bank USA
200 West Street
New York, NY 10282-2198
Attention:  Anna Ashurov

 

APPENDIX B-1- 1



 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A. ,

as a Lender

 

Bank of America, N.A.
414 Union Street
4th Floor, TN1-100-04-17
Nashville, TN 37219
Attn: E. Mark Hardison    
Phone:   (615) 749.3026
E-mail : e.mark.hardison@baml.com

 

CITIBANK N.A. ,

as a Lender

 

1615 Brett Road, Building III
New Castle, DE 19720
Attention: Loan Administration
E-mail: global.loans.support@citi.com

 

MORGAN STANLEY SENIOR FUNDING, INC.

MORGAN STANLEY BANK N.A. ,

as a Lender

 

1585 Broadway, Floor 04
New York, NY  10036
Attention: Andrew Earls, Managing Director
E-mail: Andrew.Earls@morganstanley.com

 

with a copy to:

 

Attention: Jonathon Rauen
E-mail: Jonathon.Rauen@morganstanley.com

 

Attention: Diego Iñigo
E-mail: Diego.Inigo@morganstanley.com

 

UBS AG, STAMFORD BRANCH ,

as a Lender

 

677 Washington Blvd.
Stamford, CT 06901
Tel:  (203) 719 7813
Fax:  (203) 719-3888
Attention:  Kun Jin
E-mail:  sh-obp@ubs.com

 

APPENDIX B-1- 2


 

SCHEDULE 1.1
DEFINITIONS

 

Defined Term

 

Definition (or Section of this Agreement in which such Term is Defined)

“Adjusted Eurodollar Rate”

 

For any Interest Rate Determination Date with respect to an Interest Period for a Eurodollar Rate Loan, the rate per annum obtained by dividing:

 

(i) (a) the rate per annum equal to the rate determined by Administrative Agent to be the London interbank offered rate administered by the ICE Benchmark Administration (or any other person which takes over the administration of that rate) for deposits (for delivery on the first day of such period) with a term equivalent to such period in Dollars displayed on the ICE LIBOR USD page of the Reuters Screen (or any replacement Reuters page which displays that rate) or on the appropriate page of such other information service which publishes that rate from time to time in place of Reuters, determined as of approximately 11:00 a.m. (London, England time) on such Interest Rate Determination Date, or (b) if the rate referenced in the preceding clause (a) is not available, the rate per annum equal to the offered quotation rate to first class banks in the London interbank market by Bank of America, N.A. for deposits (for delivery on the first day of the relevant period) in Dollars of amounts in same day funds comparable to the principal amount of the applicable Loan of Administrative Agent, in its capacity as a Lender, for which the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate is then being determined with maturities comparable to such period as of approximately 11:00 a.m. (London, England time) on such Interest Rate Determination Date,

 

by:

 

(ii) an amount equal to (a) one (1) minus (b) the Applicable Reserve Requirement.

 

 

 

“Administrative Agent”

 

Preamble

 

 

 

“Affected Lender”

 

2.16(b)

 

 

 

“Affected Loans”

 

2.16(b)

 

 

 

“Affiliate”

 

As applied to any Person, any other Person directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by, or under common control with, that Person. For the purposes of this definition, “control” (including, with correlative meanings, the terms “controlling,” “controlled by” and “under common control with”), as applied to any Person, means the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of that Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities or by contract

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 1



 

 

 

or otherwise.

 

 

 

“Agent”

 

Each of (i) Administrative Agent, (ii) each Arranger and (iii) any other Person appointed under the Credit Documents to serve in an agent or similar capacity.

 

 

 

“Agent Affiliates”

 

9.1(b)(iii)

 

 

 

“Agent Fee”

 

The “Agent Fee” defined in the Agent Fee Letter.

 

 

 

“Agent Fee Letter”

 

The Agent Fee Letter, dated as of the Closing Date, by and between Borrower and Administrative Agent, as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

 

 

“Agreement”

 

This Credit and Guaranty Agreement, dated as of the date of this Agreement, as it may be amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

 

 

“Aggregate Amounts Due”

 

2.15

 

 

 

“Aggregate Payments”

 

6.2

 

 

 

“Anti-Corruption Laws”

 

4.7(b)

 

 

 

“Applicable Margin”

 

With respect to any Loans, (i) if a Base Rate Loan, 0.25% per annum and (ii) if a Eurodollar Rate Loan, 1.25% per annum .

 

 

 

“Applicable Reserve Requirement”

 

At any time for any Eurodollar Rate Loan, the maximum rate, expressed as a decimal, at which reserves (including any basic marginal, special, supplemental, emergency or other reserves) are required to be maintained with respect to such Eurodollar Rate Loan against “Eurocurrency liabilities” (as such term is defined in Regulation D) under regulations issued from time to time by the Board of Governors or other applicable banking regulator. Without limiting the effect of the foregoing, the Applicable Reserve Requirement will reflect any other reserves required to be maintained by such member banks with respect to (i) any category of liabilities which includes deposits by reference to which the applicable Adjusted Eurodollar Rate or any other interest rate of a Loan is to be determined, or (ii) any category of extensions of credit or other assets which include Eurodollar Rate Loans. A Eurodollar Rate Loan will be deemed to constitute Eurocurrency liabilities and as such will be deemed subject to reserve requirements without benefits of credit for proration, exceptions or offsets that may be available from time to time to the applicable Lender. The rate of interest on Eurodollar Rate Loans will be adjusted automatically on and as of the effective date of any change in the Applicable Reserve Requirement.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 2



 

“Applicable Revolving Loan Commitment Fee Percentage”

 

0.25% per annum .

 

 

 

“Approved Electronic Communications”

 

Any notice, demand, communication, information, document or other material that any Credit Party provides to Administrative Agent under any Credit Document or the transactions contemplated therein which is distributed to Agents or Lenders by means of electronic communications under Section 9.1(b).

 

 

 

“Arranger”

 

Preamble

 

 

 

“Asset Sale”

 

A sale, lease or sub-lease (as lessor or sublessor), sale and leaseback, assignment, conveyance, exclusive license (as licensor or sublicensor), transfer or other disposition to, or any exchange of property with, any Person (other than Borrower or any Guarantor), in one transaction or a series of transactions, of all or any part of Borrower’ or any of its Subsidiaries’ businesses, assets or properties of any kind, whether real, personal, or mixed and whether tangible or intangible, whether now owned or after the date of this Agreement acquired, leased or licensed, including the Equity Interests of any of Borrower’ Subsidiaries, other than inventory (or other assets) sold, leased or licensed out in the ordinary course of business (excluding any such sales, leases or licenses out by operations or divisions discontinued or to be discontinued).

 

 

 

“Assignment Agreement”

 

An Assignment and Assumption Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit C, with such amendments or modifications as may be approved by Administrative Agent.

 

 

 

“Assignment Closing Date”

 

9.6(b)

 

 

 

“Authorized Officer”

 

As applied to any Person, any individual holding the position of chairman of the board (if an officer), chief executive officer, president, vice president (or the equivalent thereof), chief financial officer, secretary, assistant secretary or treasurer of such Person as to which the secretary or an assistant secretary of such Person will have delivered an incumbency certificate to Administrative Agent as to the authority of such Authorized Officer.

 

 

 

“Bankruptcy Code”

 

Title 11 of the United States Code entitled “Bankruptcy,” as now and after the date of this Agreement in effect, or any successor statute.

 

 

 

“Base Rate”

 

For any day, a rate per annum equal to the greatest of (i) the Prime Rate in effect on such day, (ii) the Federal Funds Effective Rate in effect on such day plus ½ of 1% and (iii) the sum of (a) the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate that would be payable on such day for a Eurodollar Rate Loan with a one-month interest period plus (b) one percent (1.0%). Any change in the Base Rate due to a change in the Prime Rate, the Federal Funds Effective Rate or the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate will be effective on the effective day of such

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 3



 

 

 

change in the Prime Rate, the Federal Funds Effective Rate or the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate, respectively.

 

 

 

“Base Rate Loan”

 

A Loan bearing interest at a rate determined by reference to the Base Rate.

 

 

 

“Beneficiary”

 

Each Agent and Lender.

 

 

 

“Board of Governors”

 

The Board of Governors of the United States Federal Reserve System, or any successor to such Board of Governors of the United States Federal Reserve System.

 

 

 

“Borrower”

 

Preamble

 

 

 

“Borrowing”

 

The making of any Loan under this Agreement.

 

 

 

“Borrowing Date”

 

The date of any Borrowing.

 

 

 

“Borrowing Notice”

 

A notice substantially in the form of Exhibit A-1.

 

 

 

“Business Day”

 

(i) Any day excluding Saturday, Sunday and any day which is a legal holiday under the laws of the State of New York or is a day on which banking institutions located in such state are authorized or required by law or other governmental action to close and (ii) with respect to all notices, determinations, fundings and payments in connection with the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate or any Eurodollar Rate Loans, the term “Business Day” means any day which is a Business Day described in clause (i) and that is also a day for trading by and between banks in Dollar deposits in the London interbank market.

 

 

 

“Capital Lease”

 

As applied to any Person, any lease of any property (whether real, personal or mixed) by that Person as lessee that, in conformity with GAAP, is or should be accounted for as a capital lease on the balance sheet of that Person.

 

 

 

“Cash”

 

Money, currency or a credit balance in any demand or Deposit Account.

 

 

 

“Cash Equivalents”

 

As at any date of determination, any of the following: (i) marketable securities issued by, or directly and unconditionally guaranteed as to interest and principal by, the United States Government (which may include any agency of the United States the obligations of which are backed by the full faith and credit of the United States), in each case maturing within one year after such date; (ii) marketable direct obligations issued by any state of the United States or any political subdivision of any such state or any public instrumentality thereof, in each case maturing within one year after such date and having, at the time of the

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 4



 

 

 

acquisition thereof, a rating of at least A-1 from S&P or at least P-1 from Moody’s; (iii) commercial paper maturing no more than three months from the date of creation thereof and having, at the time of the acquisition thereof, a rating of at least A-1 from S&P or at least P-1 from Moody’s; (iv) certificates of deposit or bankers’ acceptances maturing within three months after such date and issued or accepted by any Lender or by any commercial bank organized under the laws of the United States or any state thereof or the District of Columbia that (a) is at least “adequately capitalized” (as defined in the regulations of its primary Federal banking regulator) and (b) has Tier 1 capital (as defined in such regulations) of not less than $1,000,000,000; and (v) shares of any money market mutual fund that (a) has substantially all of its assets invested continuously in the types of investments referred to in clauses (i) through (iii) above, (b) has net assets of not less than $5,000,000,000, and (c) has at least the ratings set forth in clauses (ii) and (iii) above from either S&P or Moody’s.

 

 

 

“Catalyst”

 

Catalyst Information Technologies, Inc., a Georgia corporation.

 

 

 

“Change in Law”

 

The occurrence, after the date of this Agreement, of any of the following (in each case, excluding proposals): (a) the adoption or taking effect of any law, rule, regulation or treaty, (b) any change in any law, rule, regulation or treaty or in the administration, interpretation, implementation or application thereof by any Governmental Authority or (c) the making or issuance of any request, rule, guideline or directive (whether or not having the force of law) by any Governmental Authority; except that notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, (x) the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act and all requests, rules, guidelines or directives thereunder or issued in connection therewith and (y) all requests, rules, guidelines or directives promulgated by the Bank for International Settlements, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (or any successor or similar authority) or the United States or foreign regulatory authorities, in each case pursuant to Basel III, will in each case be deemed to be a “Change in Law”, regardless of the date enacted, adopted or issued.

 

 

 

“Change of Control”

 

At any time, (i) at any time prior to consummation of a Qualified IPO, one or more Persons (whether acting individually or in concert), other than the Specified Holders, acquire beneficial ownership or control of more than 50% on a fully diluted basis of the voting interests in the Equity Interests of Borrower; (ii) at any time on or after consummation of a Qualified IPO any Person or “group” (within the meaning of Rules 13d-3 and 13d-5 under the Exchange Act) other than the Specified Holders (or any of them) acquires beneficial ownership or control of more than 35% on a fully diluted basis of the voting interests in the Equity Interests of Borrower; (iii) Borrower ceases to beneficially own and control 100% on a fully diluted basis of all Equity Interests of Company; or (iv) the majority of the seats (other than vacant seats) on the board of directors (or similar governing body) of Borrower cease to be occupied by Persons who either (a) were members of the board of directors of Borrower on the Closing Date, (b) were nominated for election by the board of directors of Borrower, a majority of whom were directors on the Closing Date or whose election or nomination for election was previously approved by a majority of such directors or (c) were elected by the

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 5



 

 

 

stockholders of Borrower, whether acting individually or together, as long as a majority of the shares electing such directors, are held by stockholders of Borrower who (x) were stockholders of Borrower on the Closing Date, or (y) are Specified Affiliates of any Person who, on the Closing Date, was a stockholder of Borrower.

 

 

 

“Closing Date”

 

The date on which the initial Borrowing of Loans is made.

 

 

 

“Code”

 

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended to the date of this Agreement and from time to time after the date of this Agreement, and any successor statute.

 

 

 

“Collateral”

 

The “Pledged Collateral” as defined in the Pledge Agreement.

 

 

 

“Commitment”

 

Any Revolving Loan Commitment or Term Loan Commitment.

 

 

 

“Company”

 

Inovalon, Inc., a Delaware corporation and a wholly owned Subsidiary of Borrower.

 

 

 

“Compliance Certificate”

 

A Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit H.

 

 

 

“Confidential Information”

 

9.17.

 

 

 

“Connection Income Taxes”

 

Other Connection Taxes that are imposed on or measured by net income (however denominated) or that are franchise Taxes or branch profits Taxes.

 

 

 

“Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA”

 

For any period, an amount determined for Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis equal to (i) Consolidated Net Income, plus, to the extent reducing Consolidated Net Income, the sum, without duplication, of amounts for (a) consolidated interest expense, (b) provisions for taxes based on income, (c) total depreciation expense, (d) total amortization expense, and (e) non-Cash equity compensation expense, (f) other one-time, non-recurring expenses and (g) other non-Cash charges reducing Consolidated Net Income (excluding any such non-Cash charge to the extent that it represents an accrual or reserve for potential Cash charge in any future period or amortization of a prepaid Cash charge that was paid in a prior period), minus (ii) other non-Cash gains increasing Consolidated Net Income for such period (excluding any such non-Cash gain to the extent it represents the reversal of an accrual or reserve for potential Cash gain in any prior period).

 

 

 

“Consolidated Net Income”

 

For any period, (i) the net income (or loss) of Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis for such period taken as a single accounting period determined in conformity with GAAP, minus (ii) (a) the income (or loss) of any Person in which Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries holds an Equity Interest but is not a Subsidiary of Borrower, except to the extent of the amount of dividends or other distributions actually paid

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 6



 

 

 

to Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries by such Person during such period, (b) the income (or loss) of any Person accrued prior to the date it becomes a Subsidiary of Borrower or is merged into or consolidated with Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or that Person’s assets are acquired by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, (c) the income of any Subsidiary of Borrower to the extent that the declaration or payment of dividends or similar distributions by that Subsidiary of that income is not at the time permitted by operation of the terms of its charter or any agreement, instrument, judgment, decree, order, statute, rule or governmental regulation applicable to that Subsidiary, (d) any after-tax gains or losses attributable to Asset Sales or returned surplus assets of any Plan, (e) the income (or loss) attributable to the early extinguishment of Indebtedness and (f) (to the extent not included in clauses (a) through (e) above) any net extraordinary gains or net extraordinary losses.

 

 

 

“Consolidated Total Debt”

 

As at any date of determination, the aggregate stated balance sheet amount of all Indebtedness of Borrower and its Subsidiaries (or, if higher, the par value or stated face amount of all such Indebtedness (other than zero coupon Indebtedness) determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP.

 

 

 

“Contractual Obligation”

 

As applied to any Person, any provision of any indenture, mortgage, deed of trust, contract, undertaking, agreement, Security or other instrument to which that Person is a party or by which it or any of its properties is bound.

 

 

 

“Contributing Guarantors”

 

6.2

 

 

 

“Conversion/Continuation Date”

 

The Closing Date of a continuation or conversion, as the case may be, as set forth in the applicable Conversion/Continuation Notice.

 

 

 

“Conversion/Continuation Notice”

 

A Conversion/Continuation Notice substantially in the form of Exhibit A-2.

 

 

 

“Counterpart Agreement”

 

A Counterpart Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit G.

 

 

 

“Credit Documents”

 

Any of this Agreement, the Notes (if any), the Pledge Agreement (if any) and any Counterpart Agreement (if any).

 

 

 

“Credit Party”

 

Each of Borrower and each Guarantor.

 

 

 

“Currency Agreement”

 

Any foreign exchange contract, currency swap agreement, futures contract, option contract, synthetic cap or other similar agreement or arrangement, each of which is for the purpose of hedging foreign currency risk associated with Borrower’s and its Subsidiaries’ operations.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 7



 

“Debt Incurrence Test”

 

A Leverage Ratio equal to or less than 4.00 to 1.00.

 

 

 

“Debtor Relief Laws”

 

The Bankruptcy Code, and all other liquidation, conservatorship, bankruptcy, assignment for the benefit of creditors, moratorium, rearrangement, receivership, insolvency, reorganization, or similar debtor relief laws of the United States or other applicable jurisdictions from time to time in effect.

 

 

 

“Default”

 

A condition or event that, after notice or lapse of time or both, would constitute an Event of Default.

 

 

 

“Defaulting Lender”

 

Subject to Section 2.20(b), any Lender that (a) has failed to (i) fund all or any portion of its Loans within two Business Days of the date such Loans were required to be funded hereunder unless such Lender notifies Administrative Agent and Borrower in writing that such failure is the result of such Lender’s determination that one or more conditions precedent to funding (each of which conditions precedent, together with any applicable default, will be specifically identified in such writing) has not been satisfied, or (ii) pay to Administrative Agent or any other Lender any other amount required to be paid by it hereunder within two Business Days of the date when due, (b) has notified Borrower or Administrative Agent in writing that it does not intend to comply with its funding obligations under this Agreement, or has made a public statement to that effect (unless such writing or public statement relates to such Lender’s obligation to fund a Loan hereunder and states that such position is based on such Lender’s determination that a condition precedent to funding (which condition precedent, together with any applicable default, will be specifically identified in such writing or public statement) cannot be satisfied), (c) has failed, within three Business Days after written request by Administrative Agent or Borrower, to confirm in writing to Administrative Agent and Borrower that it will comply with its prospective funding obligations hereunder (such Lender will cease to be a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this clause (c) upon receipt of such written confirmation by Administrative Agent and Borrower), or (d) has, or has a direct or indirect parent company that has, (i) become the subject of a proceeding under any Debtor Relief Law, or (ii) had appointed for it a receiver, custodian, conservator, trustee, administrator, assignee for the benefit of creditors or similar Person charged with reorganization or liquidation of its business or assets, including the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other state or federal regulatory authority acting in such a capacity; except that a Lender will not be a Defaulting Lender solely by virtue of the ownership or acquisition of any equity interest in that Lender or any direct or indirect parent company thereof by a Governmental Authority so long as such ownership interest does not result in or provide such Lender with immunity from the jurisdiction of courts within the United States or from the enforcement of judgments or writs of attachment on its assets or permit such Lender (or such Governmental Authority) to reject, repudiate, disavow or disaffirm any contracts or agreements made with such Lender. Any determination by Administrative Agent that a Lender is a Defaulting Lender under any one or more of clauses (a) through (d) above will be conclusive and binding absent manifest error, and such Lender will be deemed to be a Defaulting Lender (subject to Section 2.20(b)) upon delivery of written notice of such determination to Borrower and each Lender.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 8



 

“Deposit Account”

 

A demand, time, savings, passbook or like account with a bank, savings and loan association, credit union or like organization, other than an account evidenced by a negotiable certificate of deposit.

 

 

 

“Disclosure Schedule”

 

The disclosure schedule attached to this Agreement as Exhibit E, as the same may be amended or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

 

 

“Disqualified Equity Interests”

 

Any Equity Interest which, by its terms (or by the terms of any security or other Equity Interests into which it is convertible or for which it is exchangeable), or upon the happening of any event or condition (i) matures or is mandatorily redeemable (other than solely for Equity Interests which are not otherwise Disqualified Equity Interests), under a sinking fund obligation or otherwise, (ii) is redeemable at the option of the holder thereof (other than solely for Equity Interests which are not otherwise Disqualified Equity Interests), in whole or in part, (iii) provides for the scheduled payments or dividends in cash, or (iv) is or becomes convertible into or exchangeable for Indebtedness or any other Equity Interests that would constitute Disqualified Equity Interests, in each case of clauses (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) above, prior to the date that is 91 days after the Latest Maturity Date.

 

 

 

“Disqualified Lender”

 

Any of the following: (i) any corporate competitors of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries specified by Borrower (in its sole reasonable discretion) and identified by their respective names, in writing, to Administrative Agent on or prior to the Closing Date, (ii) any additional corporate competitors of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries specified by Borrower (in its sole reasonable discretion) and identified by their respective names, in writing, to Administrative Agent at any time, and from time to time, after the Closing Date, and (iii) each Affiliate of any Person described in the foregoing clauses (i) or (ii), in each case, that is clearly identifiable by its name as an Affiliate of such Person (whether or not such Affiliate is specified by Borrower and identified by its name in writing), but excluding for purposes of this clause (iii) any bona fide debt fund affiliates of any such Person that are primarily engaged in, or advise funds or other investment vehicles that are engaged in, making, purchasing, holding or otherwise investing in commercial loans, bonds and similar extensions of credit in the ordinary course.

 

 

 

“Dollars” / the sign “$”

 

The lawful money of the United States.

 

 

 

“Domestic Subsidiary”

 

Any Subsidiary organized under the laws of the United States, any State thereof or the District of Columbia.

 

 

 

“DQ List”

 

9.6(i).

 

 

 

“Eligible Assignee”

 

Any Person other than a natural person that is (i) a Lender, an Affiliate of any Lender or a Related Fund (any two or more Related Funds being treated as a single Eligible Assignee for all purposes of this Agreement), or (ii) a commercial bank, insurance company, investment or mutual fund or other entity that is an “accredited investor” (as defined in Regulation D under the Securities Act) and which extends credit or buys

 

 

 

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 9



 

 

 

loans in the ordinary course of business. No Defaulting Lender, Disqualified Lender, Credit Party or Affiliate of a Credit Party will be an Eligible Assignee.

 

 

 

“Employee Benefit Plan”

 

Any “employee benefit plan” as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA which is or was within six (6) years prior to the date of this Agreement sponsored, maintained or contributed to by, or required to be contributed by, Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries.

 

 

 

“Environmental Claim”

 

Any investigation, notice, notice of violation, claim, action, suit, proceeding, demand, abatement order or other order or directive (conditional or otherwise), by any Governmental Authority or any other Person, arising (i) under or in connection with any actual or alleged violation of any Environmental Law or (ii) in connection with any Hazardous Material or any actual or alleged Hazardous Materials Activity.

 

 

 

“Environmental Laws”

 

All laws, rules, regulations, codes, ordinances, orders, decrees, judgments, injunctions, notices or binding agreements issued, promulgated or entered into by any Governmental Authority, relating in any way to the environment, preservation or reclamation of natural resources, the management, release or threatened release of any Hazardous Material or to health and safety matters.

 

 

 

“Equity Interests”

 

Any and all shares, interests, participations or other equivalents (however designated) of capital stock of a corporation, any and all equivalent ownership interests in a Person (other than a corporation), including partnership interests and membership interests, and any and all warrants, rights or options to purchase or other arrangements or rights to acquire any of the foregoing.

 

 

 

“ERISA”

 

The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time, and any successor to the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974.

 

 

 

“ERISA Affiliate”

 

As applied to any Person, (i) any corporation which is a member of a controlled group of corporations within the meaning of Section 414(b) of the Code of which that Person is a member; (ii) any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) which is a member of a group of trades or businesses under common control within the meaning of Section 414(c) of the Code of which that Person is a member; and (iii) with respect to Code Sections 412 and 430 and ERISA Section 302 only, any member of an affiliated service group within the meaning of Section 414(m) or (o) of the Code of which that Person, any corporation described in clause (i) above or any trade or business described in clause (ii) above is a member. Any former ERISA Affiliate of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries will continue to be considered an ERISA Affiliate of Borrower or any such Subsidiary within the meaning of this definition with respect to the period such entity was an ERISA Affiliate of Borrower or such Subsidiary and with respect to liabilities arising after such period for which Borrower or such Subsidiary could be liable under the Code or ERISA.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 10


 

“ERISA Event”

 

(i) A “reportable event” within the meaning of Section 4043 of ERISA and the regulations issued thereunder with respect to any Plan (excluding those for which the provision for 30-day notice to the PBGC has been waived by regulation); (ii) the failure to meet the minimum funding standard of Section 412 of the Code with respect to any Plan (whether or not waived in accordance with Section 412(c) of the Code) or the failure to make by its due date a required installment under Section 430(j) of the Code with respect to any Plan or the failure to make any required contribution to a Multiemployer Plan; (iii) the provision by the administrator of any Plan under Section 4041(a)(2) of ERISA of a notice of intent to terminate such plan in a distress termination described in Section 4041(c) of ERISA; (iv) the withdrawal by Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective ERISA Affiliates from any Plan with two or more contributing sponsors or the termination of any such Plan resulting in liability to Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective Affiliates under Section 4063 or 4064 of ERISA; (v) the institution by the PBGC of proceedings to terminate any Plan, or the occurrence of any event or condition which might constitute grounds under ERISA for the termination of, or the appointment of a trustee to administer, any Plan; (vi) the imposition of liability on Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective ERISA Affiliates under Section 4062(e) or 4069 of ERISA or by reason of the application of Section 4212(c) of ERISA; (vii) the withdrawal of Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective ERISA Affiliates in a complete or partial withdrawal (within the meaning of Sections 4203 and 4205 of ERISA) from any Multiemployer Plan if there is any potential liability therefor, or the receipt by Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective ERISA Affiliates of notice from any Multiemployer Plan that it is in reorganization or insolvency under Section 4241 or 4245 of ERISA, or that it intends to terminate or has terminated under Section 4041A or 4042 of ERISA; (viii) the occurrence of an act or omission which could give rise to the imposition on Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective ERISA Affiliates of fines, penalties, taxes or related charges under Chapter 43 of the Code or under Section 409, Section 502(c), (i) or (l), or Section 4071 of ERISA in respect of any Employee Benefit Plan; (ix) the assertion of a material claim (other than routine claims for benefits) against any Employee Benefit Plan other than a Multiemployer Plan or the assets thereof, or against Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective ERISA Affiliates in connection with any Employee Benefit Plan; (x) receipt from the IRS of notice of the failure of any Plan (or any other Employee Benefit Plan intended to be qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code) to qualify under Section 401(a) of the Code, or the failure of any trust forming part of any Plan to qualify for exemption from taxation under Section 501(a) of the Code; or (xi) the imposition of a Lien under Section 430(k) of the Code or ERISA, in each case, on Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates or a violation of Section 436 of the Code on Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates.

 

 

 

“Eurodollar Rate Loan”

 

A Loan bearing interest at a rate determined by reference to the Adjusted Eurodollar Rate.

 

 

 

“Event of Default”

 

Each of the conditions or events set forth in Section 7.1.

 

 

 

Excluded Financial

 

All financial statements (other than the Historical Financial Statements and any financial statements

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 11



 

Information

 

delivered pursuant to Sections 5.1(a) or 5.1(b)) of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or businesses, and all financial projections and forecasts, or any business plans or opportunities, of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or businesses.

 

 

 

“Exchange Act”

 

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time, and any successor statute.

 

 

 

Excluded Information

 

(a) All Excluded Financial Information, (b) the DQ List, and (c) all product plans and designs, software, technology, inventions, trade secrets, know-how or other proprietary information of a like nature, in each case of or relating to Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, including business practices, business relationships, concepts, prototypes, patentable and un-patentable inventions, patent applications, designs, business and product plans, systems and technologies, procedures, business, equity, and corporate records, pricing and customer lists, in each case of or relating to Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries.

 

 

 

“Excluded Taxes”

 

Any of the following Taxes imposed on or with respect to a Recipient or required to be withheld or deducted from a payment to a Recipient, (a) Taxes imposed on or measured by net income (however denominated), franchise Taxes, and branch profits Taxes, in each case, (i) imposed as a result of such Recipient being organized under the laws of, or having its principal office or, in the case of any Lender, its applicable lending office located in, the jurisdiction imposing such Tax (or any political subdivision thereof) or (ii) that are Other Connection Taxes, (b) in the case of a Lender, U.S. federal withholding Taxes imposed on amounts payable to or for the account of such Lender with respect to an applicable interest in a Loan or Commitment under a law in effect on the date on which (i) such Lender acquires such interest in the Loan or Commitment (other than under an assignment request by Borrower under Section 2.21) or (ii) such Lender changes its lending office, except in each case to the extent that, in accordance with Section 2.18, amounts with respect to such Taxes were payable either to such Lender’s assignor immediately before such Lender became a party to this Agreement or to such Lender immediately before it changed its lending office, (c) Taxes attributable to such Recipient’s failure to comply with Section 2.18 (f) and (d) any U.S. withholding Taxes imposed under FATCA.

 

 

 

“Fair Share”

 

6.2

 

 

 

“Fair Share Contribution Amount”

 

6.2

 

 

 

“FATCA”

 

Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code, as of the date of this Agreement (or any amended or successor version that is substantively comparable and not materially more onerous to comply with) and any current or future regulations or official interpretations thereunder and any agreement entered into pursuant to Section 1471(b)(1) of the Code, or any intergovernmental agreement with respect thereto whether currently in effect or as published and amended from time to time, provided any amended intergovernmental agreement is

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 12



 

 

 

substantively comparable and not materially more onerous to comply with.

 

 

 

“Federal Funds Effective Rate”

 

For any day, the rate per annum equal to the weighted average of the rates on overnight Federal funds transactions with members of the Federal Reserve System arranged by Federal funds brokers on such day, as published by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York on the Business Day next succeeding such day. If such day is not a Business Day, the Federal Funds Effective Rate for such day will be such rate on such transactions on the next preceding Business Day as so published on the next succeeding Business Day. If no such rate is so published on such next succeeding Business Day, the Federal Funds Effective Rate for such day will be the average rate charged to Administrative Agent on such day on such transactions as determined by Administrative Agent.

 

 

 

“First Priority”

 

With respect to any Lien purported to be created in any Collateral under the Pledge Agreement, that such Lien is the only Lien to which such Collateral is subject, other than any Permitted Lien.

 

 

 

“Fiscal Quarter”

 

A fiscal quarter of any Fiscal Year.

 

 

 

“Fiscal Year”

 

The fiscal year of Borrower and its Subsidiaries ending on December 31st of each calendar year.

 

 

 

“Foreign Lender”

 

(a) If Borrower is a U.S. Person, a Lender that is not a U.S. Person, and (b) if Borrower is not a U.S. Person, a Lender that is resident or organized under the laws of a jurisdiction other than that in which Borrower is resident for tax purposes.

 

 

 

“Foreign Subsidiary”

 

Any Subsidiary that is not a Domestic Subsidiary.

 

 

 

“Funding Guarantors”

 

6.2

 

 

 

“GAAP”

 

Subject to the provisions of Section 1.2, United States generally accepted accounting principles in effect as of the date of determination thereof.

 

 

 

“Goldman Sachs”

 

Preamble

 

 

 

“Governmental Authority”

 

Any federal, state, municipal, national or other government, governmental department, commission, board, bureau, court, agency or instrumentality or political subdivision thereof or any entity, officer or examiner exercising executive, legislative, judicial, regulatory or administrative functions of or pertaining to any government or any court, in each case whether associated with a state of the United States, the United States, or a foreign entity or government.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 13



 

“Grantor”

 

As defined in the Pledge Agreement.

 

 

 

“Guaranteed Obligations”

 

6.1

 

 

 

“Guarantor”

 

(i) On the date of this Agreement, each of Company, Inovalon SME and Catalyst, and (ii) each Person that becomes a Guarantor after the date of this Agreement under Section 5.9. A Person that is released as a “Guarantor” under Section 5.9(b) or Section 6.12 will no longer constitute a “Guarantor” for purposes of this Agreement.

 

 

 

“Guaranty”

 

The guaranty of each Guarantor set forth in Section 6.

 

 

 

“Hazardous Materials”

 

All explosive or radioactive substances or wastes and all hazardous or toxic substances, wastes or other pollutants, including petroleum or petroleum distillates, asbestos or asbestos containing materials, polychlorinated biphenyls, radon gas, infectious or medical wastes and all other substances or wastes of any nature regulated under any Environmental Law.

 

 

 

“Hazardous Materials Activity”

 

Any past, current, proposed or threatened activity, event or occurrence involving any Hazardous Materials, including the use, manufacture, possession, storage, holding, presence, existence, location, Release, threatened Release, discharge, placement, generation, transportation, processing, construction, treatment, abatement, removal, remediation, disposal, disposition or handling of any Hazardous Materials, and any corrective action or response action with respect to any of the foregoing.

 

 

 

“Hedge Agreement”

 

Any exchange traded or over the counter derivative transaction, including under any Interest Rate Agreement or a Currency Agreement.

 

 

 

“Highest Lawful Rate”

 

The maximum lawful interest rate, if any, that at any time or from time to time may be contracted for, charged, or received under the laws applicable to any Lender which are presently in effect or, to the extent allowed by law, under such applicable laws which may after the date of this Agreement be in effect and which allow a higher maximum non-usurious interest rate than applicable laws now allow.

 

 

 

“Historical Financial Statements”

 

4.4(a)

 

 

 

“Immediate Family Member”

 

A child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, sibling, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law or sister-in-law, including adoptive relationships of a natural Person of the type referred to in this definition.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 14



 

“Increased-Cost Lenders”

 

2.21(a)

 

 

 

“Indemnitee”

 

9.3(a)

 

 

 

“Indebtedness”

 

As applied to any Person at any time of determination, without duplication, (i) all indebtedness for borrowed money, including outstanding reimbursement obligations under letters of credit that are due and payable; (ii) that portion of obligations with respect to Capital Leases that in accordance with GAAP should be classified as indebtedness on a balance sheet in conformity with GAAP; (iii) all obligations of such Person evidenced by bonds, debentures, notes or similar instruments; (iv) any obligation owed for all or any part of the deferred purchase price of property or services, including any earn-out obligations, to the extent then due and payable at such time of determination (excluding any such obligations incurred under ERISA and excluding current accounts payable and accrued liabilities), which purchase price is (a) due more than twelve (12) months from the date of incurrence of the obligation in respect thereof or (b) evidenced by a note or similar written instrument; (v) all indebtedness secured by any Lien on any property or asset owned or held by that Person regardless of whether the indebtedness secured thereby has been assumed by that Person or is nonrecourse to the credit of that Person (the amount of any Indebtedness of the type described in this clause (v) will be the lesser of (x) the amount of the indebtedness so secured, and (y) the fair market value of the property or assets on which such Lien has been granted); (vi) the face amount of any undrawn letter of credit that is covering indebtedness of the type described in clauses (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) above and that is issued for the account of that Person or as to which that Person is otherwise liable for reimbursement of drawings; (vii) Disqualified Equity Interests; (viii) any obligation of such Person the primary purpose or intent of which is to provide assurance, guarantee or similar support for any obligation or liability of another Person that is of the type described above, except that the amount of such obligation will be limited to the amount of such guarantee; or (ix) all obligations of such Person in respect of any Hedge Agreement, in each case, whether entered into for hedging or speculative purposes or otherwise; except that in no event shall obligations under any such Hedge Agreement be deemed “Indebtedness” unless such obligations relate to a derivatives transaction that has been terminated and the obligations in respect thereof are required in accordance with GAAP to be classified as indebtedness on a balance sheet in conformity with GAAP.

 

 

 

“Indemnified Liabilities”

 

Collectively, any and all liabilities, obligations, losses, damages (including natural resource damages), penalties, claims (including Environmental Claims), actions, judgments, suits, costs (including the costs of any investigation, study, sampling, testing, abatement, cleanup, removal, remediation or other response action necessary to remove, remediate, clean up or abate any Hazardous Materials Activity), expenses and disbursements of any kind or nature whatsoever (including the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel for Indemnitees in connection with any investigative, administrative or judicial proceeding or hearing commenced or threatened by any Person, whether or not any such Indemnitee is designated as a party or a potential party thereto, and any fees or expenses incurred by Indemnitees in enforcing this indemnity), whether direct, indirect, special or consequential and whether based on any federal, state or foreign laws,

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 15



 

 

 

statutes, rules or regulations (including securities and commercial laws, statutes, rules or regulations and Environmental Laws), on common law or equitable cause or on contract or otherwise, that may be imposed on, incurred by, or asserted against any such Indemnitee, in any manner relating to or arising out of (i) breach of any of Borrower’s representations, warranties, or covenants in this Agreement, any other Credit Documents, the Mandate Letter, or the Agent Fee Letter; (ii) the transactions contemplated by the Credit Documents (including the Lenders’ agreement to make Loans or Borrower’s use or intended use of the proceeds thereof, any amendments, waivers or consents with respect to any provision of the Credit Documents, or any enforcement of any of the Credit Documents (including any sale of, collection from, or other realization upon any of the Collateral or the enforcement of the Guaranty)) or (iii) any Environmental Claim or any Hazardous Materials Activity relating to or arising from, directly or indirectly, any past or present activity, operation, land ownership, or practice of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries.

 

 

 

“Indemnified Taxes”

 

(a) Taxes, other than Excluded Taxes, imposed on or with respect to any payment made by or on account of any obligation of any Credit Party under any Credit Document and (b) to the extent not otherwise described in (a), Other Taxes.

 

 

 

“Inovalon SME”

 

Inovalon SME, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company.

 

 

 

“Installment”

 

2.10

 

 

 

“Interest Payment Date”

 

With respect to (i) any Loan that is a Base Rate Loan, (a) the last Business Day of March, June, September and December of each year, commencing on the first such date to occur after the Closing Date and (b) the final maturity date of such Loan; and (ii) any Loan that is a Eurodollar Rate Loan, the last day of each Interest Period applicable to such Loan. In the case of each Interest Period of longer than ninety (90) days, “Interest Payment Date” will also include each date that is ninety (90) days, or an integral multiple thereof, after the commencement of such Interest Period.

 

 

 

“Interest Period”

 

In connection with a Eurodollar Rate Loan, an interest period of thirty (30) days, sixty (60) days, ninety (90) days or one hundred eighty (180) days, as selected by Borrower in the applicable Borrowing Notice or Conversion/Continuation Notice, (i) initially, commencing on the Borrowing Date or Conversion/Continuation Date for such Eurodollar Rate Loan as the case may be; and (ii) after the Borrowing Date or Conversion/Continuation Date, commencing on the day on which the immediately preceding Interest Period expires. (a) If an Interest Period would otherwise expire on a day that is not a Business Day, such Interest Period will expire on the next succeeding Business Day unless no further Business Day occurs in such month, in which case such Interest Period will expire on the immediately preceding Business Day; (b) any Interest Period that begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month (or on a day for which there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month at the end of such Interest Period) will, subject to clauses (c) and (d), of this definition, end on the last Business Day of a

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 16



 

 

 

calendar month; (c) no Interest Period with respect to any portion of any Term Loans will extend beyond the Maturity Date applicable to the Term Loans; and (d) no Interest Period with respect to any portion of the Revolving Loans will extend beyond the Revolving Loan Commitment Termination Date.

 

 

 

“Interest Rate Agreement”

 

Any interest rate swap agreement, interest rate cap agreement, interest rate collar agreement, interest rate hedging agreement or other similar agreement or agreements, each of which is for the purpose of hedging the interest rate exposure associated with Borrower’s and its Subsidiaries’ operations.

 

 

 

“Interest Rate Determination Date”

 

With respect to any Interest Period, the date that is two Business Days prior to the first day of such Interest Period.

 

 

 

“IRS”

 

The Internal Revenue Service.

 

 

 

“Joint Venture”

 

A joint venture, partnership or other similar arrangement, whether in corporate, partnership or other legal form. In no event will any Subsidiary of any Person be considered to be a Joint Venture to which such Person is a party.

 

 

 

“Latest Maturity Date”

 

At any date of determination, the latest maturity or expiration date applicable to any Loan or Commitment under this Agreement at such time, in each case as extended in accordance with this Agreement from time to time.

 

 

 

“Lender”

 

Each financial institution listed on the signature pages to this Agreement as a Lender and any other Person that becomes a party to this Agreement under an Assignment Agreement.

 

 

 

“Leverage Ratio”

 

The ratio, calculated as of the end of any time of determination, of (i) Consolidated Total Debt as of such time of determination to (ii) Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA for the four-Fiscal Quarter period ended as of the last-ended Fiscal Quarter of Borrower. For purposes of calculating Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA, investments, acquisitions, dispositions, mergers, amalgamations, consolidations and discontinued operations made or effected by Borrower or any Subsidiary of Borrower after the date of this Agreement will be calculated on a pro forma basis giving effect to any such investments, acquisitions, dispositions, mergers, amalgamations, consolidations and discontinued operations (and changes in EBITDA resulting therefrom) as of the first day of the applicable four-Fiscal Quarter period.

 

 

 

“Lien”

 

Any mortgage, deed of trust, lien, security interest, pledge, encumbrance, charge or, with respect to Equity Interests, any purchase option, call option or similar right of a third party, except that precautionary or other filings filed in connection with operating leases of Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries will not constitute

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 17



 

 

 

Liens.

 

 

 

Limited Confidential Information

 

This Agreement, any other Credit Document or any of the Exhibits or Schedules hereto and thereto, excluding any Exhibits, Schedules or other notices, certificates or other documents that contain or include any Excluded Information.

 

 

 

“Loan”

 

Any Term Loan or any Revolving Loan, as the case may be.

 

 

 

“Mandate Letter”

 

9.20

 

 

 

“Material Adverse Effect”

 

A material adverse effect on (i) the business, operations, properties, assets or condition (financial or otherwise) of Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole; (ii) the legality, validity, binding effect or enforceability against the Credit Parties, taken as a whole, of the Credit Documents to which they are parties; or (iii) the rights, remedies and benefits available to, or conferred upon, any Agent and any Lender or any Secured Party under the Pledge Agreement with respect to the Liens on the Collateral.

 

 

 

“Maturity Date”

 

With respect to the Term Loans, the earlier of (a) the fifth (5 th ) anniversary of the Closing Date, and (b) the date on which such Term Loans become due and payable in full under this Agreement, whether by acceleration or otherwise, and (ii) with respect to Revolving Loans, the earlier of (a) the Revolving Loan Commitment Termination Date, and (b) the date on which such Revolving Loans become due and payable in full under this Agreement, whether by acceleration or otherwise.

 

 

 

“Material Subsidiary”

 

A Subsidiary of Borrower that, as of the time of determination of whether such Subsidiary is a “ Material Subsidiary,” and together with its Subsidiaries, (i) generates more than 5.0% of Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA for the four (4) Fiscal Quarter period most recently ended or (ii) has total assets (including Equity Interests in other Subsidiaries and excluding investments that are eliminated in consolidation) of equal to or greater than 10.0% of the total assets of Borrower and its Subsidiaries , on a consolidated basis (a) as of June 30, 2014, or, after such date, or (b) as of the most recent date for which a consolidated balance sheet of Borrower has been delivered to Administrative Agent in accordance with Sections 5.1(a) or 5.1(b); except that if at any time there are Subsidiaries which are not classified as “Material Subsidiaries” but which collectively (i) generate more than 10.0% of Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA or (ii) have total assets (including Equity Interests in other Subsidiaries and excluding investments that are eliminated in consolidation) of equal to or greater than 10.0% of the total assets of Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis, then Borrower will promptly designate one or more of such Subsidiaries as Material Subsidiaries such that, after such designation, the Subsidiaries that are not Material Subsidiaries will (A) generate less than 10.0% of Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA and (B) have total assets of less than 10.0% of the total assets of Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 18



 

“Moody’s”

 

Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.

 

 

 

“MNPI”

 

Material, non-public information with respect to (i) Borrower, (ii) any of its Subsidiaries or (iii) the respective securities of any of the foregoing.

 

 

 

“Multiemployer Plan”

 

Any Employee Benefit Plan which is a “multiemployer plan” as defined in Section 3(37) of ERISA.

 

 

 

“Narrative Report”

 

With respect to the financial statements for which such Narrative Report is required, a narrative report describing the operations of Borrower and its Subsidiaries in the form prepared for presentation to senior management thereof for the applicable Fiscal Quarter or Fiscal Year and for the period from the beginning of the then current Fiscal Year to the end of such period to which such financial statements relate.

 

 

 

“Net Asset Sale Proceeds”

 

With respect to any Asset Sale by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, the aggregate amount of all cash proceeds (including any cash proceeds received by way of deferred payment of principal pursuant to a note or installment receivable, purchase price adjustment, or otherwise, but only as and when received) received by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries in respect of such Asset Sale, net of (i) all reasonable third-party attorneys’ fees, accountants’ fees, brokerage, consultant and other customary fees and commissions, title and recording tax expenses and other fees and expenses incurred by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries in connection with such Asset Sale, (ii) all Taxes (including Taxes arising out of the distribution of such cash proceeds by a Foreign Subsidiary directly or indirectly to Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries by one or more intermediate Subsidiaries or another Subsidiary organized and existing under the laws of the United States of America or any political subdivision thereof (such Taxes, “Specified Taxes” )) paid or reasonably estimated to be payable as a result thereof, (iii) any liabilities or obligations associated with the property or assets disposed of in such Asset Sale and retained, indemnified or insured by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries after such Asset Sale including without limitation pension and other post-employment benefit liabilities, liabilities related to environmental matters, and liabilities relating to any indemnification obligations associated with such Asset Sale, (iv) all payments made, and all installment payments required to be made, with respect to any obligation (x) that is secured by any property or assets subject to such Asset Sale, in accordance with the terms of any Lien upon such property or assets, or (y) that must by its terms, or in order to obtain a necessary consent to such Asset Sale, or by applicable law, be repaid out of the proceeds from such Asset sale, (v) all distributions and other payments required to be made to minority interest holders in Subsidiaries or joint ventures as a result of such Asset Sale, or to any other Person (other than Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries) owning a beneficial interest in the property or assets disposed of in such Asset Sale and (vi) the amount of any purchase price or similar adjustment (x) claimed by any Person to be owed by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, until such time as such claim shall have been settled or otherwise finally resolved or (y) paid or payable by Borrower or a Subsidiary, in either case in respect of such Asset Sale.

 

 

 

“Net Insurance/Condemnation

 

With respect to any Property Loss Event, the aggregate amount of all cash proceeds received by Borrower or

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 19



 

Proceeds”

 

any of its Subsidiaries (unless the repatriation to the United States of the related proceeds is prohibited or delayed by applicable local law or would in the good faith judgment of Borrower have an adverse tax consequence), net of (i) any actual and reasonable costs incurred by Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries in connection with the adjustment or settlement of any claims of Borrower or such Subsidiary in respect thereof, (ii) any other bona fide direct costs incurred in connection with such Property Loss Event and (iii) Taxes, including Specified Taxes.

 

 

 

“Non-Confidential Information”

 

Any information that (a) is or becomes publicly available through no breach of this Agreement by any Agent, Lender or any of their Affiliates, (b) is received from a third party source (other than Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective Affiliates) to the extent such information is not known by any Agent, Lender or any of their Affiliates to be subject to a confidentiality agreement (or similar agreement limiting or prohibiting disclosure) between such source and Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective Affiliates, as the case may be, (c) is approved for release by Borrower, or (d) is independently developed or is otherwise already in the possession of any Agent, Lender or any of their Affiliates and is not subject to a separate confidentiality agreement (or similar agreement limiting or prohibiting disclosure) with Borrower, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective Affiliates, as the case may be.

 

 

 

“Non-Consenting Lender”

 

2.21(c)

 

 

 

“Non-Defaulting Lender”

 

At any time, each Lender that is not a Defaulting Lender at such time.

 

 

 

“Note”

 

A Term Loan Note or a Revolving Loan Note.

 

 

 

“Notice”

 

A Borrowing Notice or a Conversion/ Continuation Notice.

 

 

 

“Obligations”

 

All monetary obligations of every nature of each Credit Party, including obligations from time to time owed to Agents (including former Agents), Lenders or any of them, under any Credit Document, whether for principal, interest (including interest which, but for the filing of a petition in bankruptcy with respect to such Credit Party, would have accrued on any Obligation, whether or not a claim is allowed against such Credit Party for such interest in the related bankruptcy proceeding), fees, expenses, indemnification or otherwise.

 

 

 

“Obligee Guarantor”

 

6.7

 

 

 

“OFAC”

 

Office of Foreign Assets Control or any successor to such Office of Foreign Assets Control.

 

 

 

“Organizational Documents”

 

(i) With respect to any corporation or company, its certificate, memorandum or articles of incorporation, organization or association, as amended, and its by-laws, as amended, (ii) with respect to any limited partnership, its certificate or declaration of limited partnership, as amended, and its partnership agreement,

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 20


 

 

 

as amended, (iii) with respect to any general partnership, its partnership agreement, as amended, and (iv) with respect to any limited liability company, its articles or certificate of organization or formation, as amended, and its operating agreement, as amended. If any term or condition of this Agreement or any other Credit Document requires any Organizational Document to be certified by a secretary of state or similar governmental official, the reference to any such Organizational Document will only be to a document of a type customarily certified by such governmental official.

 

 

 

“Other Connection Taxes”

 

With respect to any Recipient, Taxes imposed as a result of a present or former connection between such Recipient and the jurisdiction imposing such Tax (other than connections arising from such Recipient having executed, delivered, become a party to, performed its obligations under, received payments under, received or perfected a security interest under, engaged in any other transaction under, or enforced any. Credit Document, or sold or assigned an interest in any Loan or Credit Document).

 

 

 

“Other Taxes”

 

All present or future stamp, court or documentary, intangible, recording, filing or similar Taxes that arise from any payment made under, from the execution, delivery, performance, enforcement or registration of, from the receipt or perfection of a security interest under, or otherwise with respect to, any Credit Document, except any such Taxes that are Other Connection Taxes imposed with respect to an assignment (other than an assignment made under Section 2.21.

 

 

 

“Participant Register”

 

9.6(g)(i)

 

 

 

“PATRIOT Act”

 

The Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001, Pub. L. 107-56, signed into law October 26, 2001.

 

 

 

“PBGC”

 

The Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation referred to and defined in ERISA or any successor entity performing similar functions.

 

 

 

“Permitted Liens”

 

Each of the Liens permitted under Section 5.5.

 

 

 

“Person”

 

Includes natural persons, corporations, limited partnerships, general partnerships, limited liability companies, limited liability partnerships, joint stock companies, Joint Ventures, associations, companies, trusts, banks, trust companies, land trusts, business trusts or other organizations, whether or not legal entities, and Governmental Authorities.

 

 

 

“Plan”

 

Any Employee Benefit Plan, other than a Multiemployer Plan, which is subject to Section 412 of the Code or Section 302 of ERISA, and in respect of which Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate is (or, if such plan were terminated, would under Section 4069 of ERISA be deemed to be) an “employer” as defined in Section 3(5) 

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 21



 

 

 

of ERISA.

 

 

 

“Platform”

 

IntraLinks, SyndTrak or another similar electronic system.

 

 

 

“Pledge Agreement”

 

The Pledge Agreement to be executed by Borrower and each Guarantor substantially in the form of Exhibit F and otherwise in form and substance reasonable acceptable to Borrower and Administrative Agent, as it may be amended or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

 

 

“Prime Rate”

 

The rate of interest quoted in the print edition of The Wall Street Journal , Money Rates Section as the Prime Rate (currently defined as the base rate on corporate loans posted by at least 75% of the nation’s thirty (30) largest banks), as in effect from time to time. The Prime Rate is a reference rate and does not necessarily represent the lowest or best rate actually charged to any customer. Administrative Agent or any other Lender may make commercial loans or other loans at rates of interest at, above or below the Prime Rate.

 

 

 

“Principal Office”

 

Administrative Agent’s “Principal Office” as set forth on Appendix B, or such other office or office of a third party or sub-agent, as appropriate, as Administrative Agent may from time to time designate in writing to Borrower and each Lender.

 

 

 

“Pro Rata Share”

 

(i) With respect to all payments, computations and other matters relating to the Term Loan of any Lender, the percentage obtained by dividing (a) the Term Loan Exposure of that Lender by (b) the aggregate Term Loan Exposure of all Lenders;

 

(ii) with respect to all payments, computations and other matters relating to the Revolving Loan Commitment or Revolving Loans of any Lender, the percentage obtained by dividing (a) the Revolving Loan Exposure of that Lender by (b) the aggregate Revolving Loan Exposure of all Lenders; and

 

(iii) for all other purposes with respect to each Lender, “Pro Rata Share” means the percentage obtained by dividing (a) an amount equal to the sum of the Term Loan Exposure and the Revolving Loan Exposure of that Lender, by (b) an amount equal to the sum of the aggregate Term Loan Exposure and the aggregate Revolving Loan Exposure of all Lenders.

 

 

 

“Projections”

 

The financial projections of Borrower and its Subsidiaries for the period of Fiscal Year 2014 through and including Fiscal Year 2017, in the form furnished by Borrower to Administrative Agent on August 24, 2014.

 

 

 

“Property Loss Event”

 

(a) Any loss of or damage to property or assets of Borrower and any of its Subsidiaries that results in the receipt by such Person of proceeds of insurance (other than business interruption insurance or insurance covering cyber security or data breach events or similar matters or occurrences) or (b) any taking of property or assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries that results in the receipt by such Person of a compensation

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 22



 

 

 

payment in respect thereof.

 

 

 

“Public Lenders”

 

Lenders that do not wish to receive MNPI.

 

 

 

“Qualified IPO”

 

The issuance by Borrower or any direct or indirect parent company of Borrower of its common Equity Interests (and the contribution of any proceeds of such issuance to Borrower) in an underwritten primary public offering (other than a public offering under a registration statement on Form S-8) under an effective registration statement filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (or any Governmental Authority succeeding to any of its principal functions) in accordance with the Securities Act (whether alone or in connection with a secondary public offering) resulting in (i) such Equity Interests being listed on a nationally-recognized stock exchange in the United States and (ii) gross proceeds of such offering of at least $200,000,000. For purposes of this definition, the term “common Equity Interests” may, at the election of Borrower, refer to Class A common Equity Interests in a dual-class structure.

 

 

 

“Recipient”

 

(a) Administrative Agent or (b) any Lender, in each case, as applicable.

 

 

 

“Register”

 

2.5(b)

 

 

 

“Regulation D”

 

Regulation D of the Board of Governors, as in effect from time to time and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

 

 

 

“Regulation T”

 

Regulation T of the Board of Governors, as in effect from time to time and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

 

 

 

“Regulation U”

 

Regulation U of the Board of Governors, as in effect from time to time and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

 

 

 

“Regulation X”

 

Regulation X of the Board of Governors, as in effect from time to time and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

 

 

 

“Related Fund”

 

With respect to any Lender that is an investment fund, any other investment fund that invests in commercial loans and that is managed or advised by the same investment advisor as such Lender or by an Affiliate of such investment advisor.

 

 

 

“Release”

 

Any release, spill, emission, leaking, pumping, pouring, injection, escaping, deposit, disposal, discharge, dispersal, dumping, leaching or migration of any Hazardous Material into the indoor or outdoor environment (including the abandonment or disposal of any barrels, containers or other closed receptacles containing any Hazardous Material), including the movement of any Hazardous Material through the air, soil, surface water

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 23



 

 

 

or groundwater.

 

 

 

“Replacement Lender”

 

2.21(c)

 

 

 

“Reportable Event”

 

Any “reportable event” as defined in Section 4043(c) of ERISA or the regulations issued thereunder (other than a Reportable Event as to which the 30-day notice requirement has been waived by applicable regulation) with respect to a Plan (other than a Plan maintained by Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates that is considered an ERISA Affiliate only under subsection (m) or (o) of Section 414 of the Code).

 

 

 

“Requisite Lenders”

 

At any time of determination, one or more Non-Defaulting Lenders holding more than 50% of the Total Exposure Amount of all such Non-Defaulting Lenders; provided that at all times during the period occurring after the earlier of (i) a Qualified IPO of Borrower, and (ii) such time when the aggregate outstanding principal amount of Term Loans has been reduced to $150,000,000 or less, if an Event of Default occurs and is continuing as a result of Borrower’s failure to observe or perform its obligations under Section 5.4 at a time when such section is in effect (pursuant to its terms), then, solely for purposes of exercising rights and remedies or making demands or requests under Section 7.2 in respect of such Event of Default, “Requisite Lenders” will be deemed to mean Revolving Lenders (that are Non-Defaulting Lenders) holding in excess of 50% of aggregate Revolving Loan Commitments or, if no such Commitments are then outstanding, in excess of 50% of the aggregate outstanding principal amount of Revolving Loans.

 

 

 

“Responsible Financial Officer”

 

Chief financial officer, treasurer, chief accounting officer or other senior financial officer.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Commitment”

 

The commitment of a Lender to make or otherwise fund any Revolving Loan under this Agreement. The amount of each Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitment, if any, is set forth on Appendix A-2 or in the applicable Assignment Agreement, subject to any adjustment or reduction required or permitted under this Agreement. The aggregate amount of the Revolving Loan Commitments as of the Closing Date is $100,000,000.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Commitment Effective Date”

 

The date designated by Borrower (in its sole discretion) at any time on or after the Closing Date, when either (a) a Qualified IPO of Borrower has been consummated or (b) the date on which the aggregate principal amount of Term Loans then outstanding does not exceed $200,000,000.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Commitment Period”

 

The period from the Revolving Loan Commitment Effective Date to but excluding the Revolving Loan Commitment Termination Date.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Commitment Termination Date”

 

The earliest to occur of (i) March 31, 2020, (iii) the date the Revolving Loan Commitments are permanently reduced to zero under Section 2.11 or 2.12, and (iv) the date of the termination of the Revolving Loan

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 24



 

 

 

Commitments under Section 7.2.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Commitments”

 

The Revolving Loan Commitment, in the aggregate, of all Lenders.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Exposure”

 

With respect to any Lender as of any date of determination, (i) prior to the termination of the Revolving Loan Commitments, that Lender’s Revolving Loan Commitment; and (ii) after the termination of the Revolving Loan Commitments, the sum of the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the Revolving Loans of that Lender.

 

 

 

“Revolving Lender”

 

A Lender having a Revolving Loan Commitment.

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan”

 

A Loan made by a Lender to Borrower under Section 2.2(a).

 

 

 

“Revolving Loan Note”

 

A promissory note in the form of Exhibit B-2, as it may be amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

 

 

“S&P”

 

Standard & Poor’s, a division of McGraw Hill Financial, Inc.

 

 

 

“Sanctions”

 

4.7(b)

 

 

 

“Sanctions Laws”

 

4.7(b)

 

 

 

“Secured Parties”

 

The Agents and Lenders and will include, without limitation, all former Agents and Lenders to the extent that any Obligations owing to such Persons were incurred while such Persons were Agents or Lenders and such Obligations have not been paid or satisfied in full (other than contingent obligations as to which no claim or demand has been made).

 

 

 

“Securities”

 

Any stock, shares, partnership interests, voting trust certificates, certificates of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement or arrangement, options, warrants, bonds, debentures, notes, or other evidences of indebtedness, secured or unsecured, convertible, subordinated or otherwise, or in general any instruments commonly known as “securities” or any certificates of interest, shares or participations in temporary or interim certificates for the purchase or acquisition of, or any right to subscribe to, purchase or acquire, any of the foregoing.

 

 

 

“Securities Act”

 

The Securities Act of 1933, as amended from time to time, and any successor statute.

 

 

 

“Solvent”

 

With respect to any Person, (i) the sum of the liabilities (including contingent liabilities) of such Person and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, does not exceed the present fair saleable value of the present assets

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 25



 

 

 

of such Person and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, (ii) the fair value of the property of such Person and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, is greater than the total amount of liabilities (including contingent liabilities) of such Person and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, (iii) the capital of such Person and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, is not unreasonably small in relation to their business, and (iv) such Person and its Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, have not incurred and do not intend to incur, or believe that they will incur, debts including current obligations beyond its ability to pay such debts as they become due (whether at maturity or otherwise). For purposes of this definition, the amount of any contingent liability at any time will be computed as the amount that, in light of all of the facts and circumstances existing at such time, represents the amount that can reasonably be expected to become an actual or matured liability (irrespective of whether such contingent liabilities meet the criteria for accrual under Statement of Financial Accounting Standard No. 5). For purposes of this definition (x) “fair value” means the amount at which the aggregate or total assets of a Person (including goodwill) would change hands between an independent willing buyer and an independent willing seller, within a commercially reasonable period of time, each having reasonable knowledge of the relevant facts and neither being under any compulsion to act, and (y) “present fair saleable value” means the amount that may be realized by an independent willing seller from an independent willing buyer if a Person’s aggregate or total assets (including goodwill) are sold with reasonable promptness in an arm’s length transaction under present conditions in an existing and not theoretical market.

 

 

 

“Specified Affiliate”

 

As to any Person, any of the following: (i) if such Person is a natural Person, such natural Person’s Immediate Family Member or trust or other estate planning vehicle for the benefit of (x) such natural Person or (y) one or more of such natural Person’s Immediate Family Members, or (ii) (x) any entity controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person or any of the Persons described in clause (i) of this definition or (y) any subsidiary, Affiliate, parent, partner, member, limited partner, retired partner, retired member or stockholder of any of the Persons described in clause (ii)(x) of this definition. Solely as used in this definition, the term “Affiliate” means, as to any Person, any Person that, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by or is under common control with such Person, including any general partner, officer or director of such Person and any venture capital or private equity fund or other collective investment vehicle now or after the date of this Agreement existing that is controlled by or under common control with one or more general partners or shares the same management company with such Person. Any holder of Equity Interests of Borrower on the Closing Date that is an Affiliate of a Specified Holder will be deemed to be a Specified Affiliate hereunder. For the purposes of this definition, “control” (including, with correlative meanings, the terms “controlling”, “controlled by” and “under common control with”), as applied to any Person, means the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of that Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities or by contract or otherwise.

 

 

 

“Specified Taxes”

 

As defined in the definition of “Net Asset Sale Proceeds.”

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 26



 

“Specified Holder”

 

Any of (i) Keith R. Dunleavy, (ii) Andre S. Hoffmann, and (iii) any Specified Affiliates of any of the foregoing.

 

 

 

Standard Credit Information

 

(a) The Historical Financial Statements and any financial statements delivered pursuant to Sections 5.1(a) or 5.1(b)), (b) any notice, certificate or other document delivered by Borrower pursuant to the terms of this Agreement or any other Credit Document and (c) information concerning compliance by Borrower with the terms of this Agreement and the other Credit Documents, in each case of clauses (a), (b) and (c), to the extent (but only to the extent) such financial statement or other information does not contain or include any Excluded Information.

 

 

 

“Subsidiary”

 

With respect to any Person, any corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association, joint venture or other business entity of which more than 50% of the total voting power of shares of stock or other ownership interests entitled (without regard to the occurrence of any contingency) to vote in the election of the Person or Persons (whether directors, managers, trustees or other Persons performing similar functions) having the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies thereof is at the time owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by that Person or one or more of the other Subsidiaries of that Person or a combination thereof. When determining the percentage of ownership interests of any Person controlled by another Person, no ownership interest in the nature of a “qualifying share” of the former Person will be deemed to be outstanding. As of the date of this Agreement, the only Subsidiaries of Borrower are Company, Catalyst and Inovalon SME.

 

 

 

“Taxes”

 

All present or future taxes, levies, imposts, duties, deductions, withholdings (including backup withholding), assessments, fees or other charges imposed by any Governmental Authority and all interest, penalties or other additions to tax with respect thereto.

 

 

 

“Term Loan”

 

A Term Loan made by a Lender to Borrower under Section 2.1(a).

 

 

 

“Term Loan Commitment”

 

The commitment of a Lender to make or otherwise fund a Term Loan. The amount of each Lender’s Term Loan Commitment, if any, is set forth on Appendix A-1 or in the applicable Assignment Agreement, subject to any adjustment or reduction required or permitted under this Agreement. The aggregate amount of the Term Loan Commitments as of the Closing Date is $300,000,000.

 

 

 

“Term Loan Commitments”

 

The Term Loan Commitment, in the aggregate, of all Lenders.

 

 

 

“Term Loan Exposure”

 

With respect to any Lender, as of any date of determination, the outstanding principal amount of the Term Loans of such Lender. At any time prior to the making of the Term Loans, the Term Loan Exposure of any Lender will be equal to such Lender’s Term Loan Commitment.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 27



 

“Term Loan Note”

 

A promissory note in the form of Exhibit B-1, as it may be amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

 

 

“Terminated Lender”

 

2.21

 

 

 

“Total Exposure Amount”

 

On any date of determination (and without duplication), the sum of (i) the aggregate outstanding principal amount of all Loans, and (ii) the aggregate unfunded amount of all outstanding Commitments.

 

 

 

“Total Utilization of Revolving Loan Commitments”

 

As at any date of determination, the aggregate principal amount of all outstanding Revolving Loans.

 

 

 

“Traded Securities”

 

Any debt or equity Securities issued in a public offering or Rule 144A offering or other similar private placement.

 

 

 

“Type of Loan”

 

A Base Rate Loan or a Eurodollar Rate Loan.

 

 

 

“UCC”

 

The Uniform Commercial Code (or any similar or equivalent legislation) as in effect from time to time in any applicable jurisdiction.

 

 

 

“United States”

 

The United States of America.

 

 

 

“U.S. Borrower”

 

Any Borrower that is a U.S. Person.

 

 

 

“U.S. Person”

 

Any Person that is a “United States person” as defined in Section 7701(a)(30) of the Code.

 

 

 

“U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate”

 

2.18(f)(ii)(B)(iii)

 

 

 

“Withholding Agent”

 

Any Credit Party and Administrative Agent.

 

SCHEDULE 1.1- 28




EXHIBIT 21.1

 

SIGNIFICANT SUBSIDIARIES

 

Subsidiary

 

State of Organization

Inovalon, Inc.

 

Delaware

 




Exhibit 23.1

 

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

We consent to the use in this Registration Statement on Form S-1 of our report dated October 10, 2014 relating to the consolidated financial statements and consolidated financial statement schedule of Inovalon Holdings, Inc. and subsidiaries appearing in the Prospectus, which is a part of this Registration Statement.

 

We also consent to the reference to us under the heading “Experts” in such Prospectus.

 

 

/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP

McLean, Virginia

December 30, 2014